Turbina SIEMENS - Catalogo Manuales y Planos PDF

Operating manual
Turbine
Customer: PROCESADORA INDUSTRIAL
Machine type: SST-110 (TWIN-CA 36 GT5)
Year of construction: 2012
Output date: 26.12.2012
Machine number: 4.736.053
EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Table of content
Table of content
1 User information 1-1

1.1 General 1-1
1.2 Using the operating manual 1-1
1.3 Contacting Siemens 1-1
1.4 Copyright 1-2
2 Safety information 2-1

2.1 General 2-1
2.2 Laws and regulations 2-1
2.3 Intended use 2-1
2.4 Personnel 2-1
2.5 Safety notes in the operating instructions 2-2
2.6 Safety notes on the machine 2-3
2.7 Safety information in safety data sheets 2-3
2.8 Safety notes for operation 2-3
2.9 Safety notes for maintenance 2-4
2.10 Safety instructions for machines with steam (turbines) or hot operating 2-4
fluids
2.11 Safety instructions for machines with hot surfaces 2-4
2.12 Instructions how to handle a trip 2-5
3 Technical data 3-1

3.1 Operating data 3-1
3.1.1 Calibrating the turbine to the unit 3-1
3.1.2 Operating limits 3-2
3.1.3 Steam flow diagram 3-8
3.1.4 Limitation of operating data 3-9
3.2 Operating fluid 3-9
3.2.1 Steam quality 3-9
3.3 Acoustic data 3-10
3.3.1 Octave band sound pressure level 3-10
3.4 Adjusting values and switching values 3-10
3.5 Vibration velocity 3-10
EQUI/900517/000- i
A Operating manual
Table of content
3.6 Shaft vibration 3-11

3.7 Oil and bearing data 3-11
3.8 Steam quality 3-12
3.9 Screw tightening torques 3-13
3.10 Electrical technology 3-14
4 Description 4-1
4.1 Functional description of turbine 1 4-1
4.2 Functional description of turbine 2 4-1
4.3 General structure of turbine 4-1
4.4 Turbine rotor 4-2
4.5 Turbine impeller 4-2
4.6 Turbine shaft blank 4-2
4.7 Shaft-hub connection 4-2
4.8 Turbine casing 4-2
4.9 Nozzles 4-2
4.10 Shaft seal 4-2
4.11 Turbine shaft 4-2
4.12 Gearbox 4-3
4.13 Gearbox casing 4-3
4.14 Bearings 4-3
4.15 Bull gear shaft 4-3
4.16 Baseframe 4-3
4.17 Mechanically driven oil pump 4-3
4.18 Auxiliary oil pump 4-3
4.19 Controllers 4-3
4.20 Valve control 4-4
4.21 Control valves 4-4
4.22 Valve seal 4-4
4.23 Control actuator 4-4
4.24 Overspeed device 4-4
4.25 Monitoring 4-4
ii EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Table of content
5 Transport and storage 5-1

5.1 Safety 5-1
5.2 Packaging 5-1
5.2.1 Labelling and information 5-1
5.2.2 Plugs 5-1
5.3 Transport 5-1
5.3.1 Lifting and lowering 5-1
5.3.2 Transporting 5-2
5.4 Checking the consignment 5-2
5.5 Storage 5-2
5.6 Duration of packaging protection 5-2
5.7 Parts made of corrosion-resistant steel 5-3
5.8 Disposal of packaging material 5-3
6 Assembly and disassembly 6-1

6.1 Safety 6-1
6.2 Personnel qualification 6-3
6.2.1 Installation list 6-4
6.3 Installation of turbine 6-4
6.3.1 Checking the consignment 6-4
6.3.2 Assembly planning and provision of assembly equipment 6-5
6.3.3 Checking the connection points 6-5
6.3.4 Turbine assembly 6-5
6.3.5 Cleaning of main steam line 6-6
6.3.6 Connecting the turbine 6-7
6.3.7 Assembly of pipes 6-7
6.3.8 Pickling and neutralising lube oil pipes 6-7
6.3.9 Flushing of lube oil lines 6-8
6.3.10 Assemble accessories 6-8
6.3.11 Filling the oil tank with lube oil 6-8
6.3.12 Clearing up the jobsite 6-9
6.3.13 Checks 6-9
6.4 Installation report 6-9
6.5 Electrical connection and interlock 6-10
EQUI/900517/000- iii
A Operating manual
Table of content
6.6 Test run 6-10

6.7 Preservation 6-10
6.8 Replacing spare parts 6-10
6.8.1 Checking of spare parts 6-10
6.8.2 Rotor 6-11
6.8.3 Impeller 6-11
6.8.4 Shaft seal 6-11
6.8.5 Turbine bearings 6-12
6.8.6 Coupling 6-13
6.8.7 Spare parts accessories 6-14
6.8.8 Seals, wear parts 6-14
6.8.9 Maintenance manual 6-14
6.8.10 Corrosion protection 6-14
6.9 Test run 6-14
7 Initial commissioning and operation 7-1

7.1 Turbine and plant 7-1
7.2 Mode of operation 7-1
7.3 Influence of the plant 7-1
7.4 Requirements for initial commissioning or recommissioning following 7-1
overhaul
7.4.1 Preparation for initial commissioning with LCP 7-1
7.4.2 Commissioning of oil supply unit 7-2
7.4.3 Turbine 7-3
7.4.4 Shutdown with emergency stop switch 7-3
7.5 Initial commissioning or recommissioning following overhaul 7-4
7.6 Report following initial commissioning 7-5
7.7 Commissioning 7-6
7.7.1 Prerequisites 7-6
7.7.2 Startup of the turbine via LCP 7-6
7.7.3 Startup of the turbine via control room 7-6
7.7.4 During operation 7-7
7.7.5 Turbine startup 7-7
7.7.6 Automatic synchronization: 7-8
7.7.7 Manual synchronization 7-8
iv EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Table of content
7.7.8 Monitoring 7-8

7.7.9 Decommissioning 7-9
7.7.10 Trip test 7-10
7.7.11 Trip test - trip simulation 7-10
8 Maintenance 8-1
8.1 Safety 8-1
8.2 Maintenance activities 8-2
8.3 Automatic monitoring 8-2
8.4 Inspection and maintenance intervals 8-3
8.5 Inspection and maintenance intervals 8-3
8.6 Inspection and overhaul intervals 8-4
8.7 Adjusting the intervals 8-4
8.9 Inspection and maintenance lists 8-6
8.9.1 Machine periphery and machine connections 8-6
8.9.2 Instrumentation 8-6
8.9.3 Machine 8-7
8.9.4 Gearbox 8-9
8.9.5 Oil supply unit 8-10
8.9.6 Oil specification 8-11
8.9.7 Safety inspection 8-13
8.9.8 Protective devices 8-13
8.10 Instructions 8-14
8.10.1 Cleaning 8-14
8.10.2 Lubricants and assembly compounds 8-14
8.10.3 Supply systems 8-15
8.10.4 Condensate drainage 8-16
8.11 Maintenance of accessories 8-16
8.12 Preserving 8-16
8.13 Repair 8-17
8.14 Maintenance manual 8-17
9 Trouble shooting 9-1

9.1 Handling of faults 9-1
EQUI/900517/000- v
A Operating manual
Table of content

9.3 Defective measuring instruments 9-2
9.4 Documentation 9-2
9.5 Fault tables 9-2
9.5.1 Sound 9-2
9.5.2 Vibration 9-3
9.5.3 Noise 9-3
9.5.4 Corrosion/Wear/Deposits 9-4
9.5.5 Bearing temperature 9-4
9.5.6 Bearing tightness 9-5
9.5.7 Shaft seal tightness 9-5
9.5.8 Coupling 9-5
9.5.9 Gearbox 9-6
9.5.10 Control system / control equipment 9-6
9.5.11 Oil temperature 9-7
9.5.12 Oil pressure 9-7
9.5.13 Oil flow rate 9-8
9.5.14 Oil level in tank / bearing housing 9-8
9.5.15 Oil condition 9-9
9.5.16 Electrical system 9-9
9.5.17 Monitoring 9-10
10 Spare parts 10-1

10.1 Provisioning 10-1
10.2 Identification 10-1
10.3 Ordering 10-1
10.4 Storage 10-1
11 Disposal 11-1
11.1 Changing of components 11-1
11.2 Changing lubricants 11-1
11.3 Dismantling of machines 11-1
11.4 Laws and regulations 11-2
11.5 Accompanying information 11-2
11.6 Packaging material and preservatives 11-2
vi EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
User information 1
1 User information
1.1 General
This operating manual contains information required for the safe use of the machine.
Observe this operating manual. This will
▪ avoid any danger, repairs and downtime
▪ increase the reliability and service life of the machine.
The operating manual must always be available at the machine site. Each person en‐
trusted with the operation of and work on the machine must have read and understood
the operating manual and its safety notes. The machine may only be operated by au‐
thorised personnel.
1.2 Using the operating manual

This operating manual is split into parts and sections. You will find
▪ at the beginning of the operating manual: an overview of the parts
▪ at the beginning of a each part: an overview of the sections
▪ at the beginning of a each section: an overview of the content
The texts may refer to
▪ other parts
▪ other sections
▪ annexes to the section.
These references are marked by a book symbol .
Familiarize yourself with the use of the operating manual to ensure you always have all
necessary information.
If the operating manual is amended or changed, Siemens will send you pages to be ex‐
changed or additional sheets with a revision sheet. Please update all copies of the oper‐
ating manual in your possession, including the operating manual on electronic data car‐
riers.
Some sections of this operating manual apply in general for compressors, turbo blow‐
ers, turbines and ECM (expansion compression modules). In this case, the general term
"machine" is used in the operating manual. In all other cases you will find the term
"compressor" or "turbo blower", "turbine" or "ECM".
1.3 Contacting Siemens

The name plate of the machine indicates the Siemens machine number. Please always
quote this number when contacting Siemens.
Do not hesitate to contact our Service Department if you
▪ have any questions
▪ wish to order spare parts
▪ plan to modify the machine
EQUI/900517/000- 1-1
A Operating manual
1 User information
▪ or if the machine is damaged.

Use the contact form on the Internet at www.siemens.com/energy.
1.4 Copyright
This operating manual is protected by copyright and may not be used, in particularly
copied, distributed or made available to third parties in any other way without our con‐
sent. This also applies to operating manuals on electronic data carriers.
Breach of copyright may result in prosecution and liability for damages. We reserve all
rights to exercise industrial property rights.
The operating manual may be used for compilation of system/plant documentation.
1-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Safety information 2
2 Safety information
2.1 General
The machine was built by Siemens with the utmost care in accordance with the state-of-
the-art and approved safety rules and regulations.
General safety information is given in this section as the use of the machine may pose
risks..
Siemens has striven to ensure the highest possible levels of environmental protection
throughout all processes from planning and manufacture to the delivery of the ma‐
chine.
The machine may pose risks to the environment upon handover, during operation and
from the operation of the machine to dismantling it. This manual therefore contains in‐
formation on handling substances that are hazardous to the environment and disposing
of waste.
2.2 Laws and regulations

All accident prevention and environmental protection laws and regulations applicable in
the country of use and at the place of installation must be adhered to.
2.3 Intended use

The machine is intended solely for the purpose described in the sales contract. The ma‐
chine may not be used for any other purpose.
Do not modify the machine or its accessories without the authority of the manufactur‐
er.
Do not modify the instrument settings without the authority of the manufacturer; do
not bridge switch signals.
Do not alter the settings of control systems supplied with the machine without the au‐
thority of the manufacturer. You may not access to control program is inoperable, nor
may you by-pass the security prompts.
Personnel must have access to and observe all points in the operating manual at all
times.
The signs and symbols on the machine must be observed. They may not be removed
and must be always be completely legible.
The machine operating data must remain within the limit values.
Siemens will not assume liability for any damage resulting from use of the machine oth‐
er than for the purpose intended.
2.4 Personnel
The owner/operator must authorise his personnel for operation, maintenance and in‐
stallation. Personnel must be trained, qualified or have been instructed and may only
work at the machine under the supervision of an authorised person.
▪ Personnel must have read and understood the operating manual before the work.
EQUI/900517/000- 2-1
A Operating manual
▪ During the work, personnel must follow all points in the operating manual.
Siemens will not assume liability for any damage or accidents occurring due to non-ob‐
servance the operating manual.
Should we train your staff especially do not hesitate to contact our service department.
Staff must acquaint themselves with the machine and the working environment at the
site of installation. They must be familiar with the use of protective devices such as
▪ Emergency-stop switches
▪ Telephones
▪ First aid kits and first aid devices
▪ Fire detectors or fire extinguishers.
Work on electrical devices may only be carried out by qualified electricians.
Work on hydraulic devices may only be carried out by persons with knowledge and ex‐
perience of hydraulics.
Only experienced personnel may attach loads and instruct crane operators.
The regulations governing this work must be followed.
The sections "Assembly and disassembly" and "Commissioning and operation" provide
information on the required personnel qualifications.
We recommend you employ Siemens personnel for
▪ Installation
▪ Commissioning
▪ Repair
▪ Fault analysis
2.5 Safety notes in the operating instructions

In addition to the present section Safety information [➙ 2-1], certain other sections of
these operating instructions contain safety notes. These describe
▪ risks and dangers
▪ how dangers can be avoided.
The safety notes are highlighted as follows:
DANGER
These are warnings of danger to people.
You must observe these instructions. Otherwise you risk instantly lethal injuries or severe in‐
curable injuries.
WARNING
You must observe these instructions. Otherwise you risk lethal injuries or severe incurable inju‐
ries.
2-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
CAUTION
You must observe these instructions. Otherwise you risk possible injuries.
NOTICE
This is an indication of possible property damage.
You must observe these instructions. Otherwise, parts of the machine or the machine itself
may be damaged.
Some property damages may also pose a danger to people. Such indications are marked as
warning notes.
2.6 Safety notes on the machine

Danger and “prohibited” signs are fixed to the machine. Meaning:
Warning – automatic start.
The machine may start suddenly.
Warning – hot surface.

You might get burnt on the machine.
Warning – hand injuries.

You may incur contusions of your extremities due to moving machine parts.
Do not climb on this machine.

You might fall, and parts of the machine might bend or twist under your body weight.
2.7 Safety information in safety data sheets

Materials and substances which pose a danger to health, safety or the environment are
accompanied by safety data sheets. These sheets provide information about preventa‐
tive measures, safety, storage, transport, use and disposal.
2.8 Safety notes for operation

The machine may be operated only
▪ for the purpose intended
▪ in full working order
▪ in a safe and responsible manner.
EQUI/900517/000- 2-3
A Operating manual
All mechanical and electrical protection and safety devices must be in place and in
working order.
These protection and safety devices may include for example:
▪ coupling guard
▪ sound insulation
▪ mechanically operated monitoring systems
▪ electrically operated monitoring systems
The machine must be switched-off if
▪ the shut-off criteria of the interlock diagram are met
▪ there is malfunction of the electricity supply or monitoring
▪ live parts become defective
Operation must not pose a risk to personnel on site during maintenance work.
2.9 Safety notes for maintenance

Operating personnel must be informed before maintenance work begins. A supervisor
must be appointed if several persons are working on the machine.
Personnel must wear the prescribed personal protection equipment. Long hair must be
tied back and personnel may not wear loose clothing or jewellery. There is a risk of in‐
jury from getting caught, pulled in or trapped by rotating parts.
Adequate workshop equipment is required. The special tools or installation devices
specified must be used.
Handles, steps and railings, ladders and platforms must be free from dirt, snow and ice.
Do not climb or stand on the machine, pipes or other parts of the unit.
Operating supplies, chemical substances and disassembled parts must be disposed of in
an environmentally friendly manner.
2.10 Safety instructions for machines with steam (turbines) or hot operating
fluids
In the event of damage to the shaft seal or to piping, steam having a high pressure and
a high temperature may escape.
The plant owner must perform a risk analysis that covers the possibility of escaping
steam or hot operating fluids. Based on the results of this analysis, the plant owner
must implement suitable measures to ensure the safety of personnel, the environment
and the unit.
2.11 Safety instructions for machines with hot surfaces

The presence of a leak or failure to perform cleaning can lead to lubricants or hydraulic
liquids coming into contact with hot machine and pipe surfaces or flowing into thermal
insulation and then igniting.
The plant owner must perform a risk analysis that covers the possibility of a fire. Based
on the results of this analysis, the plant owner must implement suitable measures to
ensure the safety of personnel, the environment and the unit.
2-4 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Sensors that can detect a fire and trigger an alarm are not part of Siemens' scope of sup‐
ply. Such sensors must be installed by the customer.
2.12 Instructions how to handle a trip

Based on the risk assessment for the machine, Siemens requires the immediate dis‐
connection of the energy supply to the main drive in case of a trip. This helps to avoid
or limit damages to the machine.
Based on the risk assessment for the plant, the plant operator might decide that, in
case of a trip, the energy supply to the main drive can only be disconnected with a cer‐
tain delay. Major damage to the plant is avoided or limited due to the delayed trip.
In such a case, personal injuries and/or damages or consequential damages to the ma‐
chine are possible. Siemens does not assume any liability for damages and accidents in
case of the delayed disconnection of the energy supply to the main drive in case of a
trip.
EQUI/900517/000- 2-5
A Operating manual
2-6 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Technical data 3
3 Technical data
3.1 Operating data
3.1.1 Calibrating the turbine to the unit
DANGER
Changes to plant data
The machine is tuned to the plant data specified by the customer.
• If any changes to the plant data are made or planned, then have Siemens check these
changes for permissibility.
EQUI/900517/000- 3-1
A Operating manual
3 Technical data
3.1.2 Operating limits
Operating Limits (Turbine 1)
3-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Technical data 3
O P E R A T I N G L I M I T S
for operating instructions (pressures are gauge pressures)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
| STEAM TURBINE NO. : 4736053 |
| |
| MODEL : CFR3 GT5 |
| |
| FLUID : STEAM |
| |
| COMPONENT : POWER GENERATION |
| ALTERNATOR: CYNCHRONIC |
| |
| PERFORMANCE DATA |
| -------------- |
| POWER AT COUPLING: 923.0 KW (OPERATION) |
| POWER AT COUPLING MAX : KW (LIMIT) |
| |
| POWER AT CLAMP NORM: 880.0 KW (OPERATION) |
| POWER AT CLAMP NORM: KW (MAX) |
| |
| OUTPUT SPEED MIN : ---- RPM |
| OUTPUT SPEED RATED : 1800. RPM |
| OUTPUT SPEED MAX : ---- RPM |
| |
| TRIP SPEED : 1908. RPM |
| |
| GEAR RATIO : 13.63 |
| |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE MIN : 50.0 BAR (LIMIT) |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE MIN : ---- BAR (OPERATION) |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE NORM: 55.0 BAR |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 59.5 BAR (OPERATION) |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 60.0 BAR (LIMIT) |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 60.0 BAR (SAFETY VALVE) |
| |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. MIN : 396. °C (LIMIT) |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. MIN : ---- °C (OPERATION) |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. RATED : 446. °C |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. MAX : ---- °C (OPERATION) |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. MAX : 456. °C (LIMIT) |
| |
| STARTUP CONDITIONS MIN : 50.0 BAR / 396. °C (LIMIT) |
| STARTUP CONDITIONS RATED : 55.0 BAR / 446. °C |
| STARTUP CONDITIONS MAX : 60.0 BAR / 456. °C (LIMIT) |
| |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MIN : 2.50 BAR (LIMIT) |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSUR MIN : ---- BAR (OPERATION) |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE RATED: 3.50 BAR |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 4.25 BAR (OPERATION) |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 4.50 BAR (LIMIT) |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 4.50 BAR (SAFETY VALVE) |
| |
| EXHAUST STEAM TEMP. MAX : 380. °C (LIMIT) |
| |
| PRESSURE DIFF. DP4 ALARM. : 2.0 BAR |
| PRESSURE DIFF DP4 TURNING-OFF. : 2.3 BAR |
| |
| LEAKOFF STEAM PRESSURE : 2.00 BAR |
| |
| SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL : 83.6 dB(A) |
| SOUND POWER LEVEL : 98.6 dB(A) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
EQUI/900517/000- 3-3
A Operating manual
3 Technical data
D A T A
for rating plate (pressures are gauge pressures)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
| STEAM TURBINE NO. : 4736053 |
| |
| |
| |
| MODEL : CFR3 GT5 |
| |
| POWER RATED : 923.0 KW (POWER AT COUPLING) |
| POWER MAX : KW (POWER AT COUPLING) |
| |
| TRIP SPEED: 1908. RPM |
| |
| OUTPUT SPEED NORM: 1800. RPM |
| |
| 1ST CRIT. SPEED (turb.shaft): 5866. RPM (API) |
| |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE RATED: 55.0 BAR |
| |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. RATED: 446. °C |
| |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MIN : 2.50 BAR (LIMIT) |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE RATED: 3.50 BAR |
| |
| EXHAUST STEAM TEMP. MAX : 380. °C (LIMIT)
| |
| FIELD 25 (ATEX) : |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
3-4 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Technical data 3
Operating Limits (Turbine 2)
EQUI/900517/000- 3-5
A Operating manual
3 Technical data
O P E R A T I N G L I M I T S
for operating instructions (pressures are gauge pressures)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
| STEAM TURBINE NR. : 4736053 |
| |
| MODEL : AFA6 GT5 |
| |
| FLUID : STEAM |
| |
| COMPONENT : POWER GENERATION |
| ALTERNATOR: CYNCHRONIC |
| |
| PERFORMANCE DATA |
| -------------- |
| POWER AT COUPLING RATED: KW (OPERATION) |
| POWER AT COUPLING MAX : KW (LIMIT) |
| |
| POWER AT CLAMP RATED: KW (OPERATION) |
| POWER AT CLAMP RATED: KW (MAXIMAL) |
| |
| OUTPUT SPEED RATED: 1800. RPM |
| |
| |
| GEAR RATIO : 6.41 |
| |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE MIN : ---- BAR (OPERATION) |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 4.2 BAR (OPERATION) |
| MAIN STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 4.5 BAR (SAFETY VALVE) |
| |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. MIN : ---- °C (OPERATION) |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. RATED: 218. °C |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. MAX : ---- °C (OPERATION) |
| |
| STARTUP CONDITIONS MIN : 2.5 BAR / 168. °C (LIMIT) |
| STARTUP CONDITIONS RATED: 3.4 BAR / 218. °C |
| STARTUP CONDITIONS MAX : 4.5 BAR / 380. °C (LIMIT) |
| |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MIN : -0.920 BAR (LIMIT) |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MIN : ---- BAR (OPERATION) |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE RATED: -0.900 BAR |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 0.200 BAR (OPERATION) |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MAX : 2.00 BAR (SAFETY VALVE) |
| |
| EXHAUST STEAM TEMP. MAX : 275. °C (LIMIT) |
| |
| PRESSURE DIFF DP4 ALARM. : 0.35 BAR |
| PRESSURE DIFF DP4 TURNING OFF. : 0.40 BAR |
| |
| LEAKOFF STEAM PRESSURE AL: 0.00 BAR |
| |
| SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL : 86.4 dB(A) |
| SOUND POWER LEVEL : 101.4 dB(A) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
3-6 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Technical data 3
D A T A
for rating plate (pressures are gauge pressures)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
| STEAM TURBINE NR. : 4736053 |
| |
| |
| MODEL : AFA6 GT5 |
| |
| POWER RATED: KW (POWER AT COUPLING) |
| POWER MAX : KW (POWER AT COUPLING) |
| |
| |
| OUTPUT SPEED RATED: 1800. RPM |
| |
| 1ST CRIT. SPEED (turb.shaft): 4650. RPM (API) |
| |
| |
| MAIN STEAM TEMP. RATED : 218. °C |
| |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE MIN : ---- BAR (LIMIT) |
| EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE RATED: -0.900 BAR |
| |
| EXHAUST STEAM TEMP. MAX: 275. °C (LIMIT) |
| |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
EQUI/900517/000- 3-7
A Operating manual
3 Technical data
3.1.3 Steam flow diagram

Note! The design output cannot be achieved with a lower main steam pressure,
a lower main steam temperature or a higher exhaust steam backpressure.
3-8 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Technical data 3
3.1.4 Limitation of operating data

Pressures of the operating fluid
Attention! The machine may only be operated with the prescribed pressure value
for the operating fluid.
The pressures and temperatures of the operating fluid must be adhered to accord‐
ing to the specifications on the "Operating limits" sheet.
Danger! Deviations may lead to escape of the operating fluid and thus to serious
personal injury. Elevated steam moisture levels and temperature increase, for ex‐
ample, can result in damage to the turbine or components.
Operating limits [➙ 3-2]
Speed
DANGER
Exceeding the permissible speed limit
Exceeding the permissible speed limit can result in damage and/or destruction of the rotor.
1. Check the machine for damage.
2. Notify Siemens
The machine may only be operated in the prescribed direction of rotation.
CAUTION
Incorrect direction of rotor rotation
The rotor must not turn against the prescribed direction of rotation, even when the machine is
at standstill. When the machine is started, the rotor or the bearing may be damaged.
Power at coupling
See also
2 Operating limits [➙ 3-2]
3.2 Operating fluid
3.2.1 Steam quality

The steam quality data can be found in the chapter "Steam quality".
EQUI/900517/000- 3-9
A Operating manual
3 Technical data
Steam quality [➙ 3-12]
3.3 Acoustic data
Note! The sound power data are based on the sound intensity measurement meth‐
od according to the enveloping surface method.
The measuring surface sound pressure level is determined from the sound power
levels including a correction value of + 2 dB (A).
This correction value considers that the sound waves do not only pass through the
measurement areas vertically.
The acoustic data can be found in the chapter "Operating limits".
3.3.1 Octave band sound pressure level
3.4 Adjusting values and switching values

"Drawings and schemes"
"Documentation on accessories"
3.5 Vibration velocity
The vibration velocity is assessed in accordance with DIN ISO 10816, Part 1 or 3.
DIN lSO 10816 differentiates between rigid and flexible substructures and also between
speed ranges.
DIN ISO 10816-3 for speeds up to 15,000 rpm
rigid flexible
Requirement for operation 2.3 mm/s 3.5 mm/s
Veff =
Alarm limit at Veff = 3.5 mm/s 5.3 mm/s
Trip limit at Veff = 4.5 mm/s 6.3 mm/s
DIN ISO 10816-1 for speeds > 15,000 rpm
3-10 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Technical data 3
rigid flexible
Requirement for operation 1.8 mm/s 2.8 mm/s
Veff =
Alarm limit at Veff = 2.7 mm/s 4.2 mm/s
Trip limit at Veff = 3.7 mm/s 5.2 mm/s
"Interlock diagram"
Determination of the switching values

The switching values for alarm and trip initiation are determined based on the values
measured during operation.
1. Measurement of vibration velocity
The effective values of the vibration velocity (veff. B) are to be determined under
correct operating conditions over the entire load range of the machine, i.e. from
zero load to full load. The base value for monitoring shall be the highest recorded
value.
2. Determination of the alarm and trip limits
Alarm limit at νeff = νeff. B + 1 mm/s
Trip limit at νeff = νeff. B + 2 mm/s
Note! The maximum alarm or trip limit values may not exceed the limit values giv‐
en in the table.
3.6 Shaft vibration
The shaft vibration limit values are defined in accordance with DIN ISO 7919, Part 3 or
API 612 (Zone A).
Alarm and trip values are determined based on our own experience.
"Interlock diagram"
3.7 Oil and bearing data
Attention! Pressure specifications in "bar" are gauge pressures. Only pressures la‐
beled with "abs" are absolute pressures.
Note! Initial oil filling is not included in the Siemens scope of supply.
EQUI/900517/000- 3-11
A Operating manual
3 Technical data
Oil Lube oil (turbine oil) 6-7

SST-040, 060, 110, in accordance with
111 DIN 51515-2 (L-TD
46)
(without zinc-con‐
taining additives)
DIN 51515 -2 Edi‐
tion: November
2004
Failure load stage: FZG test A/8.3/90 6-7

FZG load stage for determination of
relative
scuffing load carry‐
ing capacity of lube
oils
(ISO 14635-1:2000)
Warning! Synthetic oils and lubricants that do not meet these specifications are
not permissible for use during turbine operation.
Danger! Defoaming additives may not be subsequently added to the lube oil (e.g.
molybdenum disulfide MoS2 and/ or high-pressure additives).
Oil temperature at normal 45 +/= 5 °C

the oil cooler outlet:
*
on startup >/= 5 °C
Control oil pressure: 12 bar
Lube oil pressure: normal 2.0 +/= 0.5 bar
on startup > 1.5 bar
Bearing tempera‐ normal < **) °C
ture:
Turbine shutdown < **) °C
at
* for measurement in the oil flow using local thermometers without contact installation
** alarm and trip values, see control and instrument diagram
"Installation drawing"
3.8 Steam quality
3-12 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Technical data 3
Note! The steam on the turbine inlet must be absolutely dry under all circumstan‐
ces (x=1 in the h/s diagram).
This means an effective mist and dirt separator, for example a cyclone, must be in‐
stalled in the main steam line.
Non-steady-state operating conditions, for example startup processes of the boil‐
er, must also be taken into consideration.
Conductivity measured at </= 0.2 µS/cm in continuous operation

25 °C in the condensed
sample after very acidic cat‐
ion exchanger
and after removal of CO2.
Silicic acid (SiO2) < 0.02 mg/kg in continuous operation
Total iron (Fe) < 0.02 mg/kg in continuous operation
Sodium + potassium (Na + < 0.01 mg/kg in continuous operation
K)
Copper (Cu) < 0.003 mg/kg in continuous operation
Oxygen (O2) < 0.02 mg/kg in continuous operation
Chloride (CI-) < 0.01 mg/kg in continuous operation
pH 9.2 - 9.6 in continuous operation
3.9 Screw tightening torques

The following table applies to:
▪ set screws with coarse-pitch thread DIN 13-13
▪ Hexagon head bolts DIN EN ISO 4014 to 4018
▪ Cylinder head bolts DIN EN ISO 4762
▪ Boreholes "medium" DIN EN 20273
▪ Thermal expansion coefficient identical for bolt and bolted parts.
EQUI/900517/000- 3-13
A Operating manual
3 Technical data
Thread Strength class /steel grade / material

(d2)
5.6 8.8 10.9 Ck35 A2/A4-70 A2/A4-80 24CrMo5
M4 1,3 2,8 4,0 1,2 2,0 2,6 1,9
M5 2,5 5,5 8,1 2,2 3,6 5,2 3,7
M6 5,5 9,5 13,5 4,2 6,5 8,9 6,5
M8 10,8 23 32 10,2 16,5 21,5 15,5
M10 21 46 64 19 30 40 30
M12 37 79 110 33 50 70 52
M16 90 194 265 79 125 170 125
M20 184 392 558 155 245 340 240
M24 315 676 959 265 240 - 415
M30 632 1349 1922 530 475 - 830
M36 1100 2343 3345 920 820 - 1450
M45 2100 4600 6500 1800 1650 - 2750
Note! This table is not applicable for flange connection screws and impeller connection
screws.
surrounding area
3.10 Electrical technology

List of instruments and devices
3-14 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Description 4
4 Description
4.1 Functional description of turbine 1

The turbine is designed as a single-stage impulse turbine.
The main steam flows through the control valves and the turbine casing to the nozzles.
In the nozzles, the steam is expanded and led to the impeller in radial direction.
This way, the thermal energy is converted to velocity. The velocity is then converted in‐
to kinetic energy by redirecting the flow in the moving blades.
The exhaust steam exits the turbine through the exhaust steam nozzle.
4.2 Functional description of turbine 2

The turbine is designed as a single-stage impulse turbine.
The main steam flows through the control valves and the turbine casing to the nozzles.
In the nozzles, the steam is expanded and led to the impeller in axial direction.
This way, the thermal energy is converted to velocity. The velocity is then converted in‐
to kinetic energy by redirecting the flow in the moving blades.
The exhaust steam exits the turbine through the exhaust steam nozzle.
4.3 General structure of turbine

The unit consists of two turbines, each of which transmits power via a turbine rotor and
a bull gear to the driven machine inside a three-shaft gearbox.
Each turbine consists of the following main components:
▪ Turbine rotor
– Turbine impeller
– Turbine shaft
– Shaft-hub connection (impeller)
▪ Turbine casing
▪ Nozzles
▪ Shaft seal
▪ Turbine controller
Features common to both turbines are:
▪ Gearbox
▪ Baseframe
▪ Oil supply system
▪ Cabling
EQUI/900517/000- 4-1
A Operating manual
4 Description
4.4 Turbine rotor (Turbine 1 and 2)

The turbine rotor consists of turbine impeller, turbine shaft and shaft-hub connection.
The turbine rotor is supported in two bearings. The turbine impeller is located outside of
the bearing.
Bend-critical speed is set below operating speed leaving an adequate margin. The rotor
is statically and dynamically balanced.
4.5 Turbine impeller (Turbine 1 and 2)

The complete turbine impeller made of high-temperature steel including the turbine
blades is a monobloc (single-piece) forging.
4.6 Turbine shaft blank (Turbine 1 and 2)

The turbine shaft is manufactured out of one forging and machined on all sides.
4.7 Shaft-hub connection (Turbine 1 and 2)

The turbine impeller is mounted on the turbine shaft with Hirth facial serration, a re‐
duced-shank bolt and a shaft nut.
The Hirth facial serration transfers the turbine torque and ensures that the turbine runs
as intended at all operating points through its positive locking and self-centering prop‐
erties.
4.8 Turbine casing (Turbine 1 and 2)

The turbine casing is centrically slide-mounted on the gearbox casing by means of bolts.
The casing is radially split. Impeller, nozzle system and shaft seal are easily accessible.
4.9 Nozzles (Turbine 1 and 2)

The nozzles are arranged in an exchangeable closed nozzle ring that is screwed into the
turbine casing.
4.10 Shaft seal (Turbine 1 and 2)

The shaft seal with two or three leakoff steam extraction lines seals the turbine against
the atmosphere at the shaft penetration.
See chapter "Technical data" for design information.
4.11 Turbine shaft (Turbine 1 and 2)

The gearing is machined directly out of the shaft or shrink-fitted onto the shaft as pin‐
ions.
4-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Description 4
4.12 Gearbox
The single-stage, single-helical spur gear transmits the speed of the turbine to the driv‐
en machine.
4.13 Gearbox casing

The oil-tight gearbox casing is horizontally split.
4.14 Bearings
The bull gear shaft of the gearbox is radially supported in two circular cylindrical bear‐
ings and axially in a double-acting pad thrust bearing. The bearings are lubricated with
circulating oil.
4.15 Bull gear shaft

The bull gear shaft is a monobloc (single-piece) forging and machined on all sides. The
bull gear is a monobloc (single-piece) forging and shrink-fitted onto the bull gear shaft.
4.16 Baseframe (Turbine 1 and 2)

The turbine is mounted on a baseframe with integrated oil tank. The complete oil sup‐
ply unit is mounted on the baseframe.
4.17 Mechanically driven oil pump (Turbine 1 and 2)

The mechanically driven oil pump is installed in the gearbox casing and is driven by the
turbine shaft or the bull gear shaft.
4.18 Auxiliary oil pump (Turbine 1 and 2)

During operation, hydraulic oil for turbine control and lubricating oil for lubrication of
the gearboxes and bearings is supplied by the mechanically driven oil pump. An electri‐
cally driven auxiliary oil pump is available to start up and shut down the turbine.
4.19 Controllers (Turbine 1 and 2)

The turbine is controlled by throttling the supply of the driving fluid by means of control
valves.
The electronic speed controller measures the speed of the turbine via two speed trans‐
mitters. It outputs a (4...20m) signal that is proportional to the control valve lift. The
speed of the turbine is kept at a constant level by lowering and raising this signal.
The pressure controller controls the main steam pressure and adjusts the setpoint of the
speed controller in cascade operation with the generator in parallel operation.
The pressure controller adjusts the intermediate pressure to the set pressure level for
the LP turbine with the generator in parallel operation.
EQUI/900517/000- 4-3
A Operating manual
4 Description
The load limit controller reduces the initial pressure controller setting on reaching the
maximum permissible generator output.
4.20 Valve control (Turbine 1 and 2)

The pressure final controlling element converts the controller signal (4...20mA) into a
proportional impulse oil pressure.
4.21 Control valves (Turbine 1 and 2)

Control valves are installed to control the turbine. These valves throttle the mass flow to
the nozzle ring. Depending on the turbine design, the turbine can be controlled by a
central control valve or by up to four individual nozzle group valves.
4.22 Valve seal (Turbine 1 and 2)

The valve is sealed on the valve stem by carbon rings in combination with pure graphite
seals or stellite bushings.
4.23 Control actuator (Turbine 1 and 2)

The actuator is opened with control oil and closes mechanically via a helical wound
spring. For exact positioning, it is provided with an integrated pilot unit that converts
impulse oil pressure into proportional lift. In case of several nozzle group valves they are
arranged such that the actuators open in series one after the other.
4.24 Overspeed device (Turbine 1 and 2)

This protective device against overspeed consists of the following components:
▪ Sensor disk that is firmly installed on the turbine shaft,
▪ Sensor that measures the speed on the sensor disk,
▪ Electronic evaluation that monitors the speed,
▪ Solenoid valve that drains the oil quickly in case of overspeed and
▪ Actuator that closes by means of spring force.
In case of overspeed, the steam valve is closed immediately, blocking the steam supply
to the turbine.
Interlock Diagram
P & I Diagram
4.25 Monitoring (Turbine 1 and 2)

Lube oil pressure
The pressure of the lubricating oil is monitored. If the pressure of the lubricating oil
drops below the minimum allowable level, the turbine is shut down via the pressure
measuring equipment.
Main steam pressure
4-4 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Description 4
The main steam pressure is monitored. On reaching the limit values, the turbine shuts
down.
Main steam temperature
The main steam temperature is monitored. On reaching the limit values, the turbine
shuts down.
Exhaust steam pressure
The exhaust steam pressure is monitored. On reaching the limit values, the turbine
shuts down.
Intermediate pressure
The intermediate pressure is monitored. On reaching the limit values, the turbine shuts
down.
Impeller temperature
The impeller temperature is monitored. On reaching the limit values, the turbine shuts
down.
Differential pressure at the impeller
The differential pressure at the impeller is monitored. If the differential pressure ex‐
ceeds the maximum allowable limit at the impeller, the turbine is shut down via the dif‐
ferential pressure measuring equipment.
Casing vibration
The turbine is equipped with casing vibration monitoring equipment on the gearbox or
bearing pedestal. The casing vibration is monitored. On reaching the limit values, the
turbine shuts down.
Axial position monitoring of the turbine shaft
The axial position of the turbine shaft is monitored. On reaching the limit values, the
turbine shuts down.
Bearing temperature
The bearing temperature is monitored. On reaching the limit values, the turbine shuts
down.
Oil temperature downstream of oil cooler
The oil temperature downstream of the oil cooler is monitored. On reaching the limit
values, the turbine shuts down.
Oil level in the oil tank
The oil level in the oil tank is monitored. On reaching the limit values, the turbine shuts
down.
Differential pressure at the Duplex oil filter
The differential pressure at the Duplex oil filter is monitored. If the limits are exceeded,
the Duplex oil filter must be switched over manually. The contaminated, switched off
filter piece must then be cleaned.
Differential pressure at the single oil filter
If the limits are exceeded, the single oil filter must be cleaned or replaced.
Control oil pressure
EQUI/900517/000- 4-5
A Operating manual
4 Description
The control oil pressure is monitored. If one of the limits is exceeded, the auxiliary oil
pump is switched on.
Bearing, cooling air and winding temperature at the generator
If the limits are exceeded, the turbine is shut down via the corresponding protective de‐
vice.
Bearing temperature at the gearbox
If the limits are exceeded, the turbine is shut down via the corresponding protective de‐
vice.
4-6 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Transport and storage 5
5 Transport and storage
5.1 Safety
WARNING
Injuries and damages during transport
During loading at the manufacturer, transport to the construction site as well as unloading at
the construction site, there is a risk of injuries and damages.
1. Observe the accident prevention rules and the transport instructions.
2. Only use approved transport devices and means of transport.
5.2 Packaging
The machine will be delivered either unpacked or packed depending
▪ on customer requirements
▪ machine size
▪ mode of transport
5.2.1 Labelling and information

The labelling on the packaging and the information in the attached delivery slip enve‐
lope bag must be observed.
5.2.2 Plugs
Suction and discharge nozzles of the machine and supply line openings are closed with
plugs.
5.3 Transport
5.3.1 Lifting and lowering

The lifting weight and the provided sling points must be taken into consideration: The
sling points of the machine are marked on the packing and shown in the main dimen‐
sional drawing.
The packed or unpacked machine must not collide with any obstacles and must be put
down cautiously.
EQUI/900517/000- 5-1
A Operating manual
WARNING
Injuries and damages when lifting the machine
There is a risk of injury and damage during the lifting of the machine or machine parts.
1. Lift the machine, housing parts and the rotor only with the approved hanging up devices
and slings.
2. Lift the machine, housing parts and rotor as described in the drawing. The sling points and
weights are indicated in the drawing.
3. Use the eye bolts in the bearing housing only for lifting bearings, not for the machine or the
rotor!
5.3.2 Transporting
The transport vehicle must be approved for the total weight. The machine must be se‐
cured against moving and tilting. Unpacked machines must be covered with a tarpaulin.
5.4 Checking the consignment

Upon receipt the consignment must be checked for
▪ correctness and completeness
▪ transport damage
Immediately advise the transport company and Siemens should you discover that the
consignment is incomplete or damaged.
5.5 Storage
Until installation of the machine, please observe the following:
▪ Do not remove or damage packaging,. packaging foil or delivery slip envelope bag.
▪ Guide marks, information and handling markings must remain legible.
▪ The machine must be stored on dry, firm ground.
▪ Avoid excessive temperature changes.
▪ Protect from sunlight, rain/snow and wind.
▪ Protect against rodents and vermin.
▪ Protect against theft.
5.6 Duration of packaging protection

The table gives guide values for storage in the packaging.
5-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Transport and storage 5
Climate Place of stor‐ Duration of protection

age
Packing
standard seaworthy,
shrink-wrap‐
ped
Standard climate: dry room 4 months 12 months
rural or urban atmosphere.
outdoors 2 months 6 months
Industrial atmosphere with minor
chemical influences.
Aggressive climate: dry room 2 months 12 months
industrial atmosphere with medi‐
outdoors 1 month 6 months
um to high chemical influences.
Sea atmosphere.
Humid-warm climate (tropical).
Dry-warm climate (desert).
Please contact Siemens should you want to store the machine longer than indicated in
the sales contract.
5.7 Parts made of corrosion-resistant steel

Parts made of corrosion-resistant steel may corrode and must be treated with care:
▪ no contact with corrodible material, not even for a short time
▪ no grinding sparks on surfaces
▪ use suitable tools for installation and working
5.8 Disposal of packaging material

Once the machine, the machine parts and the accessories have been removed from the
packaging, the packaging material must be disposed of.
Disposal [➙ 11-1]
Spare parts are to be kept in their original packaging until they are used.
EQUI/900517/000- 5-3
A Operating manual
5-4 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Assembly and disassembly 6
6 Assembly and disassembly
6.1 Safety
DANGER
Risk of injury during installation
1. Observe the accident prevention regulations of the country of installation and at the site.
2. Close the valves in the main steam line and in the exhaust steam line and install the blank‐
ing plates, if necessary.
3. Stop the energy supply to all auxiliary equipment, for example, the electrical auxiliary oil
pump.
4. Do not open any inspection openings as long as the impeller is still rotating.
5. Do not touch the machine as long as it is still hot.
DANGER
Unexpected machine start
If the machine is not locked out and tagged out, it may start up at any time.
• If the machine is switched off for assembly or maintenance, it must be locked out and tag‐
ged out!
1. Shut down the turbine and all auxiliary equipment.
WARNING
Continuing turbine rotor
The rotor requires a certain amount of time to come to a complete standstill after the turbine
has been switched off.
• Wait until the rotor has come to a complete standstill before starting to work on the ma‐
chine.
WARNING
Risk of fire caused by hot surfaces
If lube oil or grease comes in contact with a hot surface, this may result in fire. Lube oil that
leaks from oil lines that are under pressure may also reach surfaces that are further away.
1. Do not spill any lube oil.
2. Immediately remove any leaked oil.
3. Immediately remove any lube oil residue.
4. Replace oil-soaked insulating material with new material.
EQUI/900517/000- 6-1
A Operating manual
WARNING
Risk of injury and damage when lifting the turbine
There is a risk of injury and damage when lifting the machine or machine parts.
1. Lift the machine, casing parts and the rotor only with approved attachment gear and slings.
2. Lift the machine, casing parts and the rotor as described in the drawing. The attachment
points and weights are stated in the drawing.
3. Use the eye bolts in the bearing housing only for lifting the bearings, not for the machine or
the rotor.
CAUTION
Contact with lubricants or assembly compounds
Contact with lubricants or assembly compounds can be harmful to your health.
1. Avoid direct contact with lubricants or assembly compounds.
2. Wear safety gloves and protective goggles.
3. Read the product safety data sheets; they provide information on health, accident and envi‐
ronmental protection.
Siemens will send you the safety data sheets on request.
NOTICE
Damage due to dirt and moisture
Dirt and moisture may affect the function of the parts.
1. If possible, work in a workshop rather than outdoors.
2. Protect the working site when working outdoors.
NOTICE
Damage due to incorrect lowering
Machine parts may be damaged during lowering.
1. Lay square timber underneath housing parts.
2. Lay corrugated paper or air-bubble foil underneath bare metallic parts.
NOTICE
Incorrect dismantling/installation of parts
Parts may be damaged if they are installed/dismantled carelessly.
• Do not use force.
6-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
NOTICE
Mixed-up piping connections
Mixed-up piping connections can damage the machine’s function.
• Mark piping connections before dismantling. Thus, they are not mixed up later for installa‐
tion.
NOTICE
Failure to follow the marking of parts that belong together
The functionality of parts which do not belong together is affected
1. Observe the marking of parts.
2. Observe the consecutive order of parts.
NOTICE
Environmental hazards caused by lube oil and grease
1. Lube oil and grease may not ingress in the soil or sewage system.
2. Have used oil and grease disposed of by an authorised and specialised company.
6.2 Personnel qualification

Personnel for assembly and disassembly work must have the following qualifications:
Training Personnel qualification Abbreviation PQ

Qualified Specialist qualification, Q
specifically trained and in‐
structed
Authorized Authorized by Siemens and A
qualified to perform the
necessary tasks
Electrically skilled person Qualified electrician E
Specialist Siemens technical supervi‐ S
sor
Depending on the type of fault, the fault analysis must be performed by personnel with
the following qualifications.
We recommend to have the fault analysis and repair work performed by Siemens spe‐
cialist personnel.
EQUI/900517/000- 6-3
A Operating manual
6.2.1 Installation list
DANGER
Incorrect installation of the machine
An incorrectly installed machine is a risk to people and material.
• The machine may only be installed by qualified and authorised staff.
Component Activity PQ
Machine and accessories Installation, setup S/Q
Machine and accessories Connection of electrical E
equipment
Non-rotating parts, Replacement of parts Q
seals, parts without align‐
ment
Steam components Installation/removal of S, A
flanges and
pipes
Rotating parts, Replacement of parts S, A
parts with alignment
Measurement/readjustment S, A
of clearances,
gaps, alignment
Control valves, Adjustment of pressure val‐ Q
trip valves ues
Switches for pressure, Adjustment of switching Q
temperature, volume flow values
rate
Transducer Adjustment of measured Q/E
values, switching values
6.3 Installation of turbine

We recommend to have the turbine installed by Siemens specialist personnel. If the tur‐
bine is not installed by Siemens personnel, these installation instructions must be pre‐
cisely adhered to at all times.
6.3.1 Checking the consignment

▪ Marking
▪ Assembly groups and parts complete
▪ Damage
Transport and storage [➙ 5-1]
▪ Leave assembly groups and parts in their packaging until they are assembled.
6-4 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
6.3.2 Assembly planning and provision of assembly equipment

The assembly must be planned carefully.
Prior to commencement, read the operating instructions and observe the following
drawings:
▪ Installation plan
▪ Piping and instrument diagram
▪ Terminal diagram (if available)
▪ Drawings of the accessories
6.3.3 Checking the connection points

▪ Check foundation
▪ Design, anchor bolt holes
▪ Spatial coordinates
▪ Dimensions
▪ Main steam and exhaust steam line
▪ Pipe configuration
▪ Forces acting on the turbine
▪ Cooling water pipes
6.3.4 Turbine assembly

The turbine with gearbox, driven machine and baseframe are already fully assembled.
All assemblies are aligned on the baseframe.
1. Clean contact surfaces on the baseframe and on the foundation.
Clean anchor bolt holes, remove water, ice, dirt.
2. Screw foundation anchor bolts onto the baseframe with shims.
Mask the threaded holes of the foundation anchor bolts to prevent ingress of dirt
during grouting.
3. Install jacking screws.
4. Place turbine on the foundation.
In the process, insert the foundation anchor bolts into the holes of the foundation.
5. Align turbine horizontally.
6. Align the turbine vertically by means of the jacking screws.
EQUI/900517/000- 6-5
A Operating manual
⇨ Permissible inclination: 0.5 mm/m

7. Grout foundation anchor bolts with non-shrinking and high-strength mortar and
leave it to set.
8. Tighten foundation anchor bolts.
9. Erect the formwork around the baseframe and grout the gap between baseframe
and foundation with non-shrinking mortar and leave it to set.
10. Check turbine alignment.
11. Check coupling alignment.
6.3.5 Cleaning of main steam line

Note! Prior to connecting the line to the flange of the turbine, the entire main
steam line must be cleaned of contaminations such as rolling scale, rust, slag, weld
spatter and oxide layer. This is done by grinding out the welding seams and care‐
fully purging the line with steam.
Purging with steam is the final cleaning of the main steam line and distributor and
reducing stations leading from the boiler to the turbine prior to initial commission‐
ing of the turbine.
▪ Clean main steam line.
▪ Purge main steam line and evaluate the result by checking the control plates.
Note! Evaluation of the control plate and purging are to be performed according to
VGB R-513.
If a sound pressure level of approximately 120 dB is reached during purging, a
sound attenuator must be used.
Cleanliness criteria for mirrors used during purging

Recommended size 40x40 mm
Material St 37 (soft structural steel)
aluminum, copper, austenite
Impact size and density 40x40 mm
none > 1.0 mm in diameter
less than 4 > 0.5 mm in diameter
less than 10 > 0.2 mm in diameter
Diameter of the purging line corresponding to the line to be purged
Prerequisites for purging
▪ Do not isolate new piping in order to achieve shorter cooling times.
▪ Remove steam strainer and dirt trap as well as mist and dirt separator.
Instead of the mist and dirt separator, install an adapter or connect the lines directly.
▪ Pickle the adapter prior to purging and clean thoroughly by means of machining.
6-6 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
DANGER
Escaping steam
Steam that escapes from leaking or opened components can lead to serious injuries or death.
1. Note that escaping steam can be invisible.
2. Stay out of areas where there may be a possibility of escaped or escaping steam.
3. Report leaks from steam-conducting components to the responsible person immediately.
4. Perform work on steam-conducting components with utmost care.
5. Ensure that steam-conducting components are drained, cooled down and at atmospheric
pressure when working on them.
6. Ensure that the steam supply is permanently and securely shut off when performing work
on steam-conducting components.
7. Ensure that only qualified and authorized personnel performs work on steam-conducting
components.
6.3.6 Connecting the turbine

▪ Install expansion joints
▪ Connect main steam and exhaust steam line under low stress.
– Observe the maximum permissible nozzle forces specified in the installation
plan.
– Observe the installation instructions for flange connections.
6.3.7 Assembly of pipes

▪ Clean pipes and connections
▪ Connect supply units
▪ Connect supply pipes
▪ Connect condensate branches free from stress
6.3.8 Pickling and neutralising lube oil pipes

Lube oil pipes manufactured on site must be pickled and neutralised.
NOTICE
Not pickled/neutralised lube oil pipes
If oil pipes are not pickled and neutralised, rust or scale may cause damage to important ma‐
chine and accessory components.
• Pickle and neutralise the pipes.
EQUI/900517/000- 6-7
A Operating manual
6.3.9 Flushing of lube oil lines

The oil system is supplied in clean and flushed condition.
If no work is performed on the oil system, repeated flushing of the oil system is not nec‐
essary. Contamination of the oil system with foreign substances is to be avoided.
Lube oil lines that are installed on the construction site must be flushed with lube oil.
NOTICE
Not flushed lube oil pipes
If lube oil pipes are not flushed, dirt particles may cause damage to important machine and ac‐
cessory components.
• Flush the pipes.
1. Separate lube oil lines from the bearing housing or gearbox.

2. Lead separated lube oil lines into the return lines via a bypass line (e.g. tube).
3. Fill the oil tank with lube oil at least up to the minimum oil level mark.
4. Switch on oil supply unit.
⇨ Dirt particles will accumulate in the filter.
5. Flush lines until no more dirt particles accumulate in the filter.
6. Clean oil filter after flushing.
7. Reconnect the lube oil lines.
6.3.10 Assemble accessories

6.3.11 Filling the oil tank with lube oil

▪ Oil tank and filling opening must be clean
▪ Fill in lube oil through a filling filter
▪ Fill oil tank up to maximum oil level mark
– (In case of initial filling, lube oil must be refilled after initial commissioning)
▪ Plug filling opening
▪ Record type of lube oil used
NOTICE
Oils must not be mixed
Oils by different manufacturers and of different types or qualities must not be mixed.
In case of initial filling, the oil must be refilled after commissioning.
6-8 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
6.3.12 Clearing up the jobsite

▪ Dispose of packaging material
▪ Clean machine and accessories
▪ Close openings with covers if no pipes are connected
▪ The turbine, gearbox, driven machine and piping must be free from any foreign ob‐
jects. Make sure that no tools have been left behind.
CAUTION
Foreign objects in the flow chamber of the machine
The machine may be severely damaged by foreign objects.
• Prior to commissioning the machine, remove all foreign objects (e.g. tools, cleaning cloths)
from the flow chamber and from the entire machine.
6.3.13 Checks
▪ Attachment to the substructure
▪ Correct connection to the pipes
▪ Protective devices
6.4 Installation report

The technical supervisor documents all of the work performed in an installation report.
The installation report must include the following information:
▪ Siemens machine number
▪ Date
▪ Name
▪ Installation period
▪ Work performed
▪ Alignment values
▪ Impeller gap
▪ Modification of settings
▪ Oil fill
▪ Lubrication / lubricating grease type
▪ Comments
The installation report is used as proof that the technical supervisor has observed the
installation specifications prescribed in these operating instructions.
EQUI/900517/000- 6-9
A Operating manual
6.5 Electrical connection and interlock

The electrical connection and interlock are not part of the Siemens scope of services.
The instructions on the electrical installation must be observed.
External electrical installation
6.6 Test run

Initial commissioning and operation to be performed by authorized or Siemens person‐
nel.
6.7 Preservation
NOTICE
Preservation
Machines or machine parts without preservation may be subject to corrosion (also inside) when
they are not in operation. Inquire about the necessary preservation measures at Siemens if:
1. initial commissioning is not performed immediately after installation of the turbine
2. there is an extended outage (more than 4 weeks) between first and final commissioning
Maintenance [➙ 8-1]
See also
2 Maintenance [➙ 8-1]
6.8 Replacing spare parts
NOTICE
Replacing spare parts
Rotating parts or parts requiring alignment may only be replaced by Siemens specialist person‐
nel or by authorized personnel.
DANGER
Incorrect installation of spare parts
Incorrectly installed spare parts pose a risk to both people and the machine.
• Spare parts may only be installed by qualified, authorised personnel.
6.8.1 Checking of spare parts

▪ Identification, completeness and damage
6-10 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
▪ Leave assemblies and parts in the packaging until the assembly

Spare parts [➙ 10-1]
6.8.2 Rotor
DANGER
Rubbing of the rotor on the casing
After the replacement of impellers, rotors or bearings, clearances and gaps may have changed,
especially if the turbine casing was disassembled.
• Measure and compare the clearances and gaps with the drawing specification.
"Drawings and diagrams"
6.8.3 Impeller
Shaft and hub are connected by means of a Hirth facial serration.
Assembly and disassembly
See also
6.8.4 Shaft seal

Disassembly
1. Open steam chamber of the turbine, i.e. disassemble the exhaust steam casing.
2. Remove impeller.
3. Remove shaft seal axially using an assembly aid.
4. Lift off top half of casing towards the top.
5. Open and remove the garter springs.
6. Turn out seal rings.
7. Clean casing parts and flanges.
Assembly
EQUI/900517/000- 6-11
A Operating manual
NOTICE
Mixing up sealing ring segments
The seal may leak if the sealing ring segments are mixed up.
1. Observe equal markings of the sealing ring segments.
2. The marking must be at one side of the sealing ring segments.
3. The marking must match at the abutting surfaces of the sealing ring segments.
NOTICE
Adhered seal rings
Seal rings must be moveable in radial direction.
• Make sure that the seal rings are not glued in place with sealant during installation.
1. Insert garter springs into the grooves.

2. NOTE! Make sure that the anti-rotation device remains in the correct position
during this procedure.
3. Insert seal rings into the grooves.
4. Close garter springs.
5. The horizontal sealing surface of the shaft seal must be clean and dry. Note! Do not
use sealant.
6. Carefully slide the top half of the casing onto the bottom half of the casing over the
seal rings.
7. Pin and bolt the top and bottom half of the shaft seal together.
8. Replace seal between shaft seal and turbine casing.
9. Install the shaft seal axially in the turbine casing or on the turbine shaft using an as‐
sembly aid and bolt together.
10. Install the impeller.
11. Install the exhaust steam casing.
6.8.5 Turbine bearings
NOTICE
Contamination and damage to the bearings
Smoothness of the machine is affected.
Possible premature bearing failure.
1. When working on the open bearing housing, make sure that everything is absolutely clean.
2. Cover open bearing housings or bearings with a clean cloth if you stop work.
3. Immediately remove any foreign bodies in the bearing or bearing housing.
6-12 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
NOTICE
Rust formation during disassembly of bearings
The bearing seats in the casing and on the shaft may corrode. Bearing fastening elements may
corrode.
1. Thoroughly clean all parts.
2. Lubricate all parts.
NOTICE
Contamination and oxidation of unprotected bearings
Unpacked bearings are not adequately protected against dirt and oxidation.
• Open the original packing only immediately before the installation at the workplace.
NOTICE
Failure to follow the marking of parts that belong together
The functionality of parts which do not belong together is affected
1. Observe the marking of parts.
2. Observe the consecutive order of parts.
NOTICE
Sealants containing silicone
Sealants containing silicone used to seal off joints may affect the properties of the lube oil,
damage components and lead to leakage.
• Do not use sealants containing silicone.
6.8.6 Coupling
Safety
NOTICE
Impacts applied on the coupling
Damage to the bearings
• Heat the coupling hub when installing or dismantling.
Disassembly and assembly

▪ Alignment
▪ Check alignment and compare with the setpoint
EQUI/900517/000- 6-13
A Operating manual
Should you require alignment instructions, please do not hesitate to contact Siemens.
6.8.7 Spare parts accessories

6.8.8 Seals, wear parts

▪ As a general rule, sealing elements and sealing agents are to be replaced by new
ones.
▪ Wear parts should be replaced even if they could still be used for some time.
6.8.9 Maintenance manual

The technical supervisor documents the replacement of parts in a maintenance manual.
Maintenance
6.8.10 Corrosion protection
Parts made of stainless steel

Parts made of stainless steel may corrode and must be treated with care:
▪ no contact with corrosion-susceptible material, not even for a short time
▪ no grinding sparks on surfaces
▪ use suitable tools for installation and machining
6.9 Test run

Initial commissioning and operation [➙ 7-1]
6-14 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Initial commissioning and operation 7
7 Initial commissioning and operation
7.1 Turbine and plant

To ensure safe and efficient operation, the turbine must have the correct configuration
for the plant in accordance with the intended usage.
Do not hesitate to contact Siemens if you need advice.
7.2 Mode of operation

The mode of operation of the turbine depends, among other, on the following criteria:
▪ Type and function of the plant
▪ Type of control
▪ Mode of operation of the plant
These operating instructions do not describe the operation of the turbine together with
the plant. This is responsibility of process engineering.
Do not hesitate to contact Siemens if you need advice.
7.3 Influence of the plant
Plant operation may influence the turbine, even if the latter is shut down or in standby
mode. For this reason, it is essential that all specifications in these operating instruc‐
tions are precisely adhered to.
Note! If the steam deviates from our steam quality specification, this may, for ex‐
ample, lead to deposits on the rotor. These may come loose and cause imbalance.
7.4 Requirements for initial commissioning or recommissioning following

overhaul
We recommend to have the turbine commissioned by Siemens specialist personnel.
Please contact Siemens to request a quotation for initial commissioning.
7.4.1 Preparation for initial commissioning with LCP

Surrounding Turbines
EQUI/900517/000- 7-1
A Operating manual
WARNING
Non-functional monitoring systems
Machine and accessories not adequately protected.
• Before commissioning, test the monitoring system and the interlock using simulation when
the machine is at a standstill.
WARNING
Missing or non-functioning protective devices
Risk of severe injuries resulting from unsecured machine parts
1. Only commission the machine with complete and functioning protective devices.
2. Ensure that the emergency stop switch functions properly.
▪ The turbine must be completely assembled.

▪ All electrical connections for power supply and for the plant must be ready for use.
▪ All mechanical and electrical protective and safety devices must be in place and
functioning properly.
▪ The turbine and steam line must be free from foreign objects. Make sure that no
tools have been left behind.
▪ Quality of the foundation corresponds to the regulations.
▪ The entire unit has been correctly attached to the foundation and the alignment is
correct.
▪ The piping has been correctly connected.
The piping has been connected such that the maximum permissible forces and mo‐
ments are not exceeded in accordance with the specifications of the installation
drawing.
▪ The local control system must be connected and ready for operation.
▪ Lubricants must be refilled to the maximum level.
▪ Switching values must not have been changed without reason.
▪ The emergency stop device must be functioning properly.
The turbine must be released for commissioning.
See also
7.4.2 Commissioning of oil supply unit

▪ Pay attention to abnormal noise.
▪ Check oil level while the oil supply unit is in operation.
▪ Check temperature of electric motors and valves.
7-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
▪ Check filters for contamination.

▪ Check components, lube oil lines and connections for tightness.
(Leaking bolted connections may only be retightened after pressure relief)
▪ Secure any vibrating lube oil lines or tubes.
▪ Check all functions (pressures, temperatures).
▪ Vent the unit.
7.4.3 Turbine
Note! If turbine and driven machine are installed separately on the construction
site, the rotation direction of the two machines must be compared.
Checking the direction of rotation
Test run
1. DANGER! A residual risk cannot be ruled out during the test run. Make sure that
only the personnel required for initial commissioning is in the vicinity of the
machine.
▪ Start turbine.
"Drawings and diagrams", piping diagram and instrument diagram, activation se‐
quence.
▪ Measure bearing temperatures until they have reached their steady-state condition.
▪ Check tightness.
▪ Monitor turbine and pay attention to abnormal noise.
▪ Shut down turbine.
"Drawings and diagrams", piping diagram and instrument diagram, deactivation se‐
quence.
▪ If required, adapt switching values (e.g. bearing temperatures).
▪ Start turbine, test emergency stop.
See also
7.4.4 Shutdown with emergency stop switch
Attention! Do not use the emergency stop switch for normal deactivation / shut‐
down of the turbine.
1. Emergency stop switch
is activated manually at local operator control unit or control cabinet by pressing.
or
EQUI/900517/000- 7-3
A Operating manual
2. Trip:
is activated automatically when the limit values are exceeded in accordance with the
interlock diagram.
Both actions cause the steam valve to close.
DANGER
Damage resulting from overheating of bearings
Damage may occur due to overheating as a result of insufficient cooling of the bearings.
• If one of the bearings reaches a temperature of 130 °C, the bearings of the turbine shaft in
the gearbox must be inspected by opening prior to recommissioning.
Attention! The turbine may only be recommissioned after it has been shut down
and the cause of the fault eliminated!
P & I Diagram
Interlock Diagram
7.5 Initial commissioning or recommissioning following overhaul

Installation and alignment of the entire unit as well as laying and connection of the pip‐
ing must be performed correctly. As part of the complete documentation, the following
documents have already been provided:
Surrounding Turbines
CAUTION
Damage to the turbine or to the entire unit due to improper work!
Initial commissioning of the turbine or the entire unit may only be performed by authorized
personnel.
Prior to initial commissioning of the turbine, it must be ensured that all work has been
performed properly:
▪ Check settings of electrical, hydraulic and mechanical protective devices.
▪ Check whether the interlock logic chain functions properly.
▪ Check all connections for tightness.
▪ The coupling guard must be installed!
Attention! Motoring of the turbine is not permissible. For this reason, a reverse
power relay must be installed.
7-4 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Caution! All protective devices and emergency stop devices must be installed and
functioning properly.
CAUTION
Mechanical damage caused by power failure
Short power failures cause mechanical damage to the turbo generator.
• Install a vector surge relay (ANSI Code 78) prior to initial commissioning.
The gearbox, the oil tank and the oil system are provided with interior conservation ac‐
cording to the VCI method (VCI = volatile corrosion inhibited). The components and the
oil system shall remain closed until immediately prior to startup.
1. Fill the oil tank with oil until the "normal" mark on the sight glass has been reached.
DANGER
Danger due to the escaping oily condensate
Escaping condensate may contain oil (e.g. preservation oil from the turbine, the induction and
exhaust steam lines or the steam valves).
• Ensure that escaping condensate is not led into the waste water during initial commission‐
ing.
NOTICE
Preservation
7.6 Report following initial commissioning

The commissioning engineer documents the results of the commissioning and the test
run in a commissioning report. The report should include the following information (if
available):
▪ Date
▪ Name of the commissioning engineer
▪ Duration of the test run
▪ Operating data
– Main steam pressure
– Main steam temperature
EQUI/900517/000- 7-5
A Operating manual
– Exhaust steam pressure

– Exhaust steam temperature
▪ Measurable variables of instruments
– Speed
– Vibration velocity
– Shaft vibration
– Temperatures for bearing, lube oil, sealing liquid, cooling water
– Pressure for lube oil, sealing liquid, seal gas, flushing liquid
– Differential pressure at filters
– Fill level of lube oil, sealing liquid
▪ Result of the vibration measurement
▪ Result of the leak test
▪ Adaptation of switching values
7.7 Commissioning
7.7.1 Prerequisites
Attention! The operating instructions of the driven machine must also be observed
for the commissioning process.
Attention! The turbine controller must be set according to the structure and pa‐
rameter list.
▪ The turbine must have passed the test run successfully.
▪ The turbine must be released for operation.
▪ The auxiliary equipment must be ready for operation.
7.7.2 Startup of the turbine via LCP

The turbine is started up via the local control panel (LCP).
Local control panel (LCP)
7.7.3 Startup of the turbine via control room

The turbine is started up via the control room.
"Interlock and switching sequence"
7-6 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
7.7.4 During operation

▪ Monitoring
▪ Inspection
▪ Maintenance
DANGER
Non-observance of fault reports
If the limit values for speed, storage temperature, inlet temperature, inlet pressure and vibra‐
tions are exceeded, and if the limit values for the pressure and flow of supply systems are fallen
below, the machine may be damaged.
1. Establish the cause of the fault in the event of a WARNING message and remove it.
2. After the EMERGENCY STOP message indicated by the locking device or an EMERGENCY
STOP, the machine may not be started until the cause of the fault has been established and
removed.
DANGER
Risk caused by generator short-circuit
A generator short-circuit can result in a high impact load on the drive train.
1. Check the shaft train (shaft ends, gear teeth and coupling) for damage.
2. This check may only be performed by authorized personnel.
See also
7.7.5 Turbine startup

P & I Diagram
Interlock Diagram
A trip test shall be performed during initial commissioning or after an overhaul.
1. Set electrical auxiliary oil pump to "AUTOMATIC".
2. Ensure that the steam valve of the turbine is closed.
To do this, activate the TURBINE-STOP button on the control cabinet.
3. Open all drain valves on the main and exhaust steam end.
4. Open shutoff valve in the customer's exhaust steam line.
5. Open shutoff valve in the customer's main steam line.
6. Any condensate that has accumulated will be drained through the drain lines after
the main steam shutoff valve in the main steam line has been opened.
Note! When the minimum main steam temperature is reached, it is assumed that no
condensate is left in the turbine.
7. Throttle drain valves.
EQUI/900517/000- 7-7
A Operating manual
8. Acknowledge all pending faults.

9. Press the READY button on the control cabinet.
10. Start up turbine by pressing the TURBINE-START button on the control cabinet or on
the local control panel, depending on the pre-selection made.
The turbine is ramped up to minimum speed.
11. Run turbine up to rated speed by means of the setpoint adjustment button (speed
+/-).
7.7.6 Automatic synchronization:

1. Switch the synchronization key switch on the control cabinet to "AUTOMATIC" .
Press "Start synchronization" button.
Set pressure controller to "AUTOMATIC".
2. The pressure controller is automatically activated when the generator is connected
to the grid. Set the setpoint on the pressure controller.
3. When the oil temperature increases to >40 °C, open the cooling water supply for the
oil cooler to such an extent that the oil temperature on the oil cooler outlet settles at
45 ±5 °C .
4. Close all drain valves.
The shutoff valves upstream and downstream of the steam traps remain open.
7.7.7 Manual synchronization

Attention! Manual synchronization may only be performed if the automatic syn‐
chronization does not function properly or for test purposes.
Attention! Manual synchronization can only be performed at the switchboard.
1. Adjust turbine to synchronization speed.
2. Set "Synchronization" selector switch to "Manual". Set generator key switch to "0".
3. The frequency in the synchronoscope display is adjusted in the synchronization win‐
dow by means of the setpoint adjustment button (speed +/-) .
4. Adjust the generator voltage using the setpoint adjustment button.
5. Switch the generator key switch to "1" to activate the generator circuit breaker.
7.7.8 Monitoring
During continuous operation, the condition of the turbine must be checked at regular
intervals:
▪ Running behavior / vibrations
▪ Bearing temperatures
▪ Speed setting
▪ Tightness (oil and steam side)
▪ Steam pressures and temperature
▪ Lube oil pressures and temperature
7-8 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
DANGER
Violation of limit values
Violation of limit values may result in turbine faults and impair the safety of the turbine.
DANGER
Risk caused by blocking of functions
Blocking of functions, especially of valves, is strictly prohibited!
DANGER
The turbine may not be operated in the event of faults.
Shut down the turbine and eliminate the causes of faults.
7.7.9 Decommissioning
Decommissioning (automatic – manual)
1. Activate TURBINE STOP from the control cabinet or a higher-level control until.
The turbine load is automatically reduced to a defined minimum load by decreasing
the process controller variables.
2. On reaching the minimum load, the process controllers are deactivated and the set‐
point enable of the speed controller adopted.
The unit coasts down until it comes to a complete standstill.
Decommissioning (manual)
1. Set pressure controller to "MANUAL".
Reduce Y variable gradually until a generator output of approx. 0 kW is reached.
2. In case of residual load, use the setpoint adjustment button (speed lower) on the
control cabinet.
3. Disconnect generator from the grid.
Set generator circuit breaker to "Open".
Set pressure controller to "AUTOMATIC".
4. Press the button "TURBINE STOP" on the control cabinet.
5. Close shutoff valve in the customer's main steam line.
6. Close shutoff valve in the customer's exhaust steam line.
7. Close cooling water supply.
8. Open drain valves.
9. The electric oil pump switches off automatically.
The oil pump for aftercooling is switched on automatically for 3 h of the cooldown
period.
If the turbine unit is to be shut down temporarily, adequate preservation measures

have to be taken.
EQUI/900517/000- 7-9
A Operating manual
NOTICE
Preservation
7.7.10 Trip test
Attention! In case of driving a generator, the trip test may only be performed at
zero load, and in case of driving a pump or compressor only when the driven ma‐
chine is decoupled.
1. The turbine is commissioned.
2. Press the TRIP-TEST button on the local control panel.
This way, the setpoint of the electronic speed controller is increased until it exceeds
the maximum adjustment range limit, a trip is initiated and the turbine is shut
down.
3. Decommissioning of the turbine according to
Decommissioning [➙ 7-9]
Danger! If no trip is triggered within the permissible tolerance range, the speed
may not be increased any further. The turbine must be shut down and the cause
determined.
See also
2 Decommissioning [➙ 7-9]
7.7.11 Trip test - trip simulation

Trip simulation can be performed while the driven machine is still coupled.
1. The turbine is in operation.
2. Press the TRIP-SIMULATION button on the local control panel.
For a short defined period, a speed signal which is greater than the trip speed is in‐
put as actual value. The steam valve of the turbine closes partially and opens again
immediately.
This closing motion can be monitored by the operator and documents the functional
performance of the entire installation. Turbine operation is not influenced by this mo‐
tion in the unused lift range.
Note! Repair work may only be carried out by authorized personnel.
7-10 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
See also
EQUI/900517/000- 7-11
A Operating manual
7-12 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Maintenance 8
8 Maintenance
8.1 Safety
DANGER
Unexpected start of the machine
A machine that is not secured against restart can start up any time.
• If the machine is shut down for assembly or maintenance work it must be secured against
restart!
Set the main switch to "OFF" and install a safety lock.
DANGER
Rotating machine parts
Touching rotating machine parts may cause severe injuries.
• Only carry out maintenance work if the machine is equipped with the required protective
devices.
DANGER
Escaping steam
Steam that escapes from leaking or opened components can lead to serious injuries or death.
1. Note that escaping steam can be invisible.
2. Stay out of areas where there may be a possibility of escaped or escaping steam.
3. Report leaks from steam-conducting components to the responsible person immediately.
4. Perform work on steam-conducting components with utmost care.
5. Ensure that steam-conducting components are drained, cooled down and at atmospheric
pressure when working on them.
6. Ensure that the steam supply is permanently and securely shut off when performing work
on steam-conducting components.
7. Ensure that only qualified and authorized personnel performs work on steam-conducting
components.
WARNING
Pressure in hydraulic systems
Careless work on pressurized hydraulic systems can lead to serious injuries.
1. Ensure that only suitably qualified personnel performs work on hydraulic systems.
2. Prior to working on hydraulic systems, ensure that these are at atmospheric pressure.
3. Secure the hydraulic systems against accidental startup by other persons for the duration of
the work.
EQUI/900517/000- 8-1
A Operating manual
8 Maintenance
WARNING
Hot surfaces
Touching hot machine parts may cause severe burns.
• Touch hot machine parts only with safety gloves or wait until the parts have cooled down
sufficiently.
CAUTION
Noise caused by running machine
The noise of the running machine may damage your hearing.
• Wear hearing protection when staying at the running machine.
8.2 Maintenance activities

Maintenance ensures that the turbine remains operational. Maintenance includes in‐
spection, service and repair.
▪ Inspection
Asses actual condition by
– Checks
– Measurements
▪ Service
Prevent wear by
– Cleaning
– Draining
– Lubricating
– Readjusting (restoration of specified condition)
– Making up (operating fluids)
– Changing (operating fluids)
– Preserving
▪ Repair
Restore operational condition by
– Adjusting (setting new setpoint or specified condition)
– Replacing (spare parts)
– Repairing
8.3 Automatic monitoring

Turbines are typically monitored automatically. This may include:
▪ Operating data
8-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Maintenance 8
– Intake pressure
– Intake temperature
– Operating point
▪ Instrumentation and control variables
– Speed
– Casing vibration
– Shaft vibration
– Temperatures of bearings, lube oil, seal fluid, cooling water
– Pressure of lube oil, seal fluid, seal gas
– Differential pressure filter
– Fill level of lube oil, seal fluid
8.4 Inspection and maintenance intervals

Note! The inspection and maintenance intervals differ as a function of operating
time and operating hours.
Time Interval Operating hours Operating time

A 500 hours -
B 3500 hours -
C 16000 hours 2 years
D 100000 hours 12 years
Interval C continues in a two-year cycle.
Intervals A and B are one-off intervals and completed after the stated operating hours.
Intervals C is completed fulfilled after the stated operating hours or the operating time,
depending on which event occurs first.
Interval D Safety inspection is continued in a three-year cycle after 100000 hours.
8.5 Inspection and maintenance intervals

Inspection and maintenance must be performed within the intervals indicated in the in‐
spection and maintenance lists. The first inspection and maintenance is always sched‐
uled at the beginning of a new interval.
EQUI/900517/000- 8-3
A Operating manual
8 Maintenance
Abbreviation Interval
1 according to condition
2 according to lubrication instruction
3 once at the beginning of the time interval
d daily
w weekly
m monthly
3m every 3 months
R during an inspection and overhaul
8.6 Inspection and overhaul intervals

The unit is shut down during inspections and overhauls. This allows comprehensive in‐
spection and maintenance, and, if necessary, repair of the turbine. Preventive mainte‐
nance is also possible.
The interval for an inspection and overhaul depends on
▪ the required reliability and operating safety
▪ the unit
– operating temperature
– operating fluid
▪ operating frequency
▪ experiences gathered from inspection and maintenance
In case of continuous operation, we recommend an inspection and overhaul
▪ once during interval C
▪ at least every 2 years
Contact the Siemens service if you wish to determine specific inspection and overhaul
intervals for your turbine.
An inspection and overhaul ensures reliable operation for the next operating period.
Have Siemens carry out inspections and overhauls in good time.
8.7 Adjusting the intervals

The intervals for the turbine and its accessories can be reduced to bring them in line
with intervals of the overall plant.
8-4 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Maintenance 8
Attention! Work on the electrical power supply system may only be performed by
qualified electricians.
Electrical equipment shall be secured against unexpected restarting (lock main
switch and remove key, apply warning lock against restart).
Attention! Compliance must be ensured with national and international codes and
standards for accident prevention and environmental protection as well as to the
recognized rules for safe work in line with accepted engineering standards.
Maintenance personnel for maintenance must have the following training and qualifica‐
tions:
Abbreviation PQ Training Personnel qualification

L Simple Qualified and instructed
C Competent With special qualification
and instructed
Q Qualified With special qualification,
specifically trained and in‐
structed
E Qualified electrician With professional electrical
engineering training
S Specialist Siemens technical supervi‐
sor
I Inspector Siemens technical supervi‐
sor
M Specialist Specialist from the equip‐
ment manufacturer or spe‐
cialized company
A Authorized Persons that have been ap‐
proved and authorized by
Siemens to perform the re‐
quired tasks
EQUI/900517/000- 8-5
A Operating manual
8 Maintenance
8.9 Inspection and maintenance lists
8.9.1 Machine periphery and machine connections
Work Interval PQ Note

A B C
Machine periphery -
Cleaning: General 1 1 1 L -
Machine foundation and machine attachment -
Checking: Condition, attachments, corrosion w m 3m C -
Piping connections and expansion joints -
Checking: Condition, attachments, corrosion w m 3m Q -
Note! Have nonreturn valves and full-lift safety valves checked by qualified per‐
sonnel at the intervals specified in the manufacturer documentation.
8.9.2 Instrumentation

A B C
Instrumentation -
Cleaning: Scales, displays 1 1 1 C -
Checking/measuring: All values of local displays d d w C Local displays
are marked with
the letter "I" in
the piping and
instrument dia‐
gram.
Checking: Oil tightness, damage, vibrations d d w C -
Checking: Function - - R S -
8-6 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Maintenance 8
8.9.3 Machine

A B C
Machine
Checking: Noise d d w C -
Checking: Condition, attachments, piping con‐ w m 3m C -
nections, rating plate, warning signs
Measuring: Vibration analysis 1 1 1 I "Technical
data"
Measuring: Vibration velocity d d w Q "Technical
data"
Measuring: Alignment of drive train - - R S/A "Technical
data"
Protective devices
Checking: Attachment, deformation, vibrations w w m Q -
Turbine casing
Checking: Steam tightness d d w C -
Clean drains, check passage 1 1 R S/A -
Turbine casing interior (flow chamber)
Cleaning: Deposits - - R C -
Checking: Condition, corrosion, wear - - R S -
Impeller
Checking: Condition, corrosion, wear, cracks - - R S/A -
Impeller/casing (impeller seal)
Checking/adjusting: Gap - - R S "Drawings
and dia‐
grams"
Rotor shaft
Cleaning: General - - R C -
Checking: Corrosion, wear - - R S
Shaft seal
Cleaning: General - - R C -
Checking: Leaktightness w w m Q -
Checking: Corrosion, wear - - R S -
Bearings
EQUI/900517/000- 8-7
A Operating manual
8 Maintenance
Checking: Condition, bearing clearance, contact - - R S/A -

pattern
Oil
Checking: Coating, odor w w m Q -
Checking/draining: Water content - - R Q Separate lu‐
bricating oil
Changing: Lube oil 1 1 R Q "Technical
data"
Coupling
Checking: Condition, wear - - R S -
Control and trip gear
Checking - - R S -
Steam lines, seals
Checking - - R S -
Function test (automatic start)
Immediate standby - - 2m Q -
See also
2 Technical data
8-8 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Maintenance 8
8.9.4 Gearbox

A B C
Gearbox -
Checking: Noise, smooth running d d w C -
Checking: Condition, attachments, piping con‐ w m 3m C -
nections, rating plate, warning signs
Measuring: Alignment of drive train - - R S -
Measuring: Vibration analysis 1 1 1 I Technical
data
Protective devices -
Checking: Attachment, deformation, vibrations w w m Q -
Gearbox casing -
Cleaning: Ventilation filter 1 1 1 C -
Checking: Oil tightness d d w C -
Gearbox bearings -
Checking: Condition, bearing clearance, contact - - R S -
pattern
Gears, gear teeth -
Checking: Condition, crack, fatigue (pitting), - - R S -
contact pattern
Mechanically driven oil pump -
Checking: Attachment, noise w m 3m C -
Checking: Condition - - R S -
Coupling -
Checking: Condition, wear - - R S -
Piping, instruments -
EQUI/900517/000- 8-9
A Operating manual
8 Maintenance
8.9.5 Oil supply unit

A B C
Oil supply unit -
Cleaning: General 1 1 1 C -
Checking: Condition, attachments, settings, pip‐ w m 3m C/E -
ing connections, electrical connections, rating
plate, warning signs
Tanks and vessels -
Cleaning: Filling nozzle 1 1 1 C -
Cleaning: Ventilation filter 1 1 1 C -
Checking: Oil level d d w C -
Making up: Lube oil 1 1 1 C -
Oil pump(s) -
Checking: Noise, smooth running d d w C -
Checking: Attachment w m 3m C -
Valves -
Checking: Noise, vibrations d d w C -
Checking: Attachment, settings w m 3m C -
Oil filter -
Checking: Differential pressure d d w C -
Cleaning: When differential pressure >1.5 bar, 1 1 1 Q -
switch to second filter
Cleaning: Deactivated filter 1 1 1 C -
Units, general -
Checking: Attachment w m 3m C -
Oil cooler -
Checking: Oil tightness, water tightness d d w C -
Tanks and vessels - interior -
Checking: Coating - - R C -
Piping, hoses -
8-10 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Maintenance 8
Oil -
Checking: Coating, odor w w m Q -
Checking/draining: Water content 1 1 1 Q Separate lubri‐
cating oil
Changing: Lube oil 1 1 R C Technical
data
Oil analysis - 3m 6m Q -
8.9.6 Oil specification

Only the oil specified in Section "Technical Data" may be used for the turbine.
Technical data
See also
2 Technical data
Monitoring the oil condition
Danger! In the event that water is detected in the oil, the turbine must be shut
down.
1. Drain water and oil from the lowest point of the oil tank until only clear oil is dis‐
charged.
2. If provided, use an oil separator to remove any water.
3. Determine and eliminate the cause for the ingress of water.
Oil maintenance
Note! We recommend having oil analyzed by the technical service of the oil suppli‐
er or by an independent laboratory.
These examination contribute significantly to the operating safety and reliability.
Oil sampling
Removing samples from the oil line
Note! Required accessories: Clean bucket, sampling container.
Only use adequate sampling containers made of glass or plastic to sample oil. Ensure
that the sample containers are clean and free of any residue.
1. Place bucket underneath the sampling drain valve in the oil line.
2. Open the sampling container.
3. Open sampling drain valve.
4. Drain 1-2 liters of oil into the bucket.
5. Immerse and rinse sampling container in oil and empty it.
EQUI/900517/000- 8-11
A Operating manual
8 Maintenance
6. Fill sampling container from the sampling drain valve (90 % of max. filling level).
7. Close sampling drain valve.
8. Seal sample and label.
9. Dispose of excess oil in the bucket.
Sampling oil from the oil tank

1. Place bucket underneath the drain valve in the oil tank.
2. Open the sampling container.
3. Open oil drain valve.
4. Drain 2-3 liters of oil into the bucket.
5. Immerse and rinse sampling container in oil and empty it
6. Fill sampling container from the drain valve (90 % of max. filling level).
7. Close oil drain valve.
8. Seal sample and label.
9. Dispose of excess oil in the bucket.
Labeling the sample

To ensure unambiguous identification, label the sample as follows.
Machine number
Type and manufacturer of the oil
Date and place of the sampling
Changing the oil filter:
The filter cartridge must be cleaned or replaced if the differential pressure across the fil‐
ter exceeds the maximum allowable limit. Follow the procedure specified in the operat‐
ing instructions of the filter manufacturer.
DANGER
Fire hazard due to escaping oil during filter cleaning
When cleaning the filter of the duplex oil filter, oil may escape due to improper handling or
negligence.
• When changing the filter, ensure that the active filter is not opened.
Single oil filters may only be replaced when the unit is shut down.
Changing the oil
Note! The oil must be changed when the oil analysis has determined that it is no
longer adequate for continued use.
Cleaning the oil lines

8-12 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Maintenance 8
All oil lines and the oil tank must be absolutely clean. Solid particles such as sand,
flyash, dust, cotton fibers absolutely must not remain in the oil-conducting parts (me‐
chanical cleaning). New connecting lines to the oil tank must be free of corrosion and
absolutely clean.
Filling the oil system

Note! Do not fill in oil that does not meet the specified quality. Do not fill in the oil
directly, but through a fine-mesh strainer. If provided, use an oil separator for fill‐
ing in oil.
Keep remaining oil quantity in the original container for comparison.
Record filled oil type, manufacturer, quantity and filling date in the maintenance record.
8.9.7 Safety inspection

The tasks described here are required in addition to the tasks detailed in other mainte‐
nance and inspection lists.

Valve body, turbine D S -
casing, exhaust
steam casing
Checking: Condi‐
tion, pressure tight‐
ness, cracks
Compressor impel‐ D S -
ler, turbine wheel
Checking: Condi‐
tion, cracks
Shaft, impeller- D S -
shaft connections
Checking: Condi‐
tion, cracks
Control and trip D S -
gear
Checking: Condi‐
tion, function
8.9.8 Protective devices

A B C
Emergency stop -
Checking: Function - - R Q -
Turbine trip -
Checking: Function (trip simulation) - - 3m Q -
Trip test - - R/C S/A -
EQUI/900517/000- 8-13
A Operating manual
8 Maintenance
8.10 Instructions
8.10.1 Cleaning
CAUTION
Fire risk caused by dirt
Dirt, dust deposits, lube oil and other substances may ignite.
• Clean the machine surfaces at regular intervals.
NOTICE
Functional impairment caused by lint
Lint may endanger the functioning of sensitive parts such as bearings, seals and supply units.
• Clean only with lint-free cleaning rags.
NOTICE
Incorrect cleaning
High-pressure cleaners may spray water into the inside of the machine and damage sensitive
parts.
• Do not use high-pressure cleaners for cleaning of the machine.
Only a clean machine can be serviced in accordance with the specified instructions. Dirt
is also a safety hazard.
8.10.2 Lubricants and assembly compounds
CAUTION
Contact with lubricants or assembly compounds
Contact with lubricants or assembly compounds can be harmful to your health.
1. Avoid direct contact with lubricants or assembly compounds.
2. Wear safety gloves and protective goggles.
3. Read the product safety data sheets; they provide information on health, accident and envi‐
ronmental protection.
Siemens will send you the safety data sheets on request.
8-14 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Maintenance 8
NOTICE
Use of wrong lubricants
Only the specified lubricants are suited.
Mixing different lubricants may affect their properties.
1. Use only the specified lubricants.
2. Do not use any lubricant of different quality.
NOTICE
Use of lube oil additives
Lube oil additives may affect the oil properties and thus damage machine components.
• Do not add any additives to the lube oil.
NOTICE
Dirty lube oil
Water or solid matter in the lube oil may damage bearings, oil pipes or the oil supply system.
• Establish and eliminate the cause for the dirt.
NOTICE
8.10.3 Supply systems

Oil supply systems and other supply system are a prerequisite for the safe and reliable
operation of the machine.
NOTICE
Unauthorized adjustment of devices
The machine may be damaged if valves, throttles and shutoff valves are adjusted or control ac‐
tuators are operated.
1. The settings of the devices may not by changed without authorization.
2. Have Siemens check if the changes are allowable before making them.
Note! Please contact Siemens, if you want to change the switching values.
EQUI/900517/000- 8-15
A Operating manual
8 Maintenance
NOTICE
Dirty lube oil
Water or solid matter in the lube oil may damage bearings, oil pipes or the oil supply system.
NOTICE
Dirty sealing media
Dirt in sealing media may damage shaft seals, supply lines or supply systems.
8.10.4 Condensate drainage

Condensate in the casing must be drained from the drain connections.
DANGER
Damage to the impeller/wheel due to startup in condensate
The impeller/wheel may be destroyed if it is immersed in accumulated condensate in the casing
during startup.
• Thoroughly drain the turbine prior to startup.
8.11 Maintenance of accessories

Separate operating instructions apply to accessories. They contain the necessary main‐
tenance instructions.
"Accessory documentation"
8.12 Preserving
Preservation measures must be performed when the machine is at standstill if
▪ operation is not commenced immediately following assembly or commissioning
▪ the turbine will be shut down for a prolonged period of time
8-16 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Maintenance 8
8.13 Repair
The results of the inspection show whether repairs are required. We recommend having
repairs carried out by Siemens specialist personnel.
Repair list
Component/damage Activity PQ
Non-rotating parts, seals, parts with‐ Replacement of parts Q
out alignment
Rotating parts, parts with alignment Replacement of parts S/A
Measurement/readjustment of clear‐ S/A
ances, gaps, alignment
Pressure valves Adjustment of pressure values Q
Switches for pressure, temperature, Adjustment of switching values Q
volume flow rate
Transducer Adjustment of measured values, Q/E
switching values
Minor damage Repair (place of installation/ work‐ Q
shop)
Major damage, rotating parts Repair (workshop / Siemens) S
Damage to accessory Repair (at manufacturer's site) M
"Accessory documentation"
See also
8.14 Maintenance manual

The operator documents all work in a maintenance manual. The book provides proof of
maintenance and should include the following information:
▪ Date
▪ Name
▪ Operating hours
▪ Work performed
▪ Date of lube oil change / lube oil type
▪ Date of lubrication / lubricating grease type
▪ Replacement of spare parts
▪ Modification of settings
EQUI/900517/000- 8-17
A Operating manual
8 Maintenance
▪ Faults and damage
8-18 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Trouble shooting 9
9 Trouble shooting
9.1 Handling of faults

Faults must be eliminated to avoid machine damage.
DANGER
Failure to observe fault messages
Violation of specified limit values can result machine damage.
1. In the event of an ALARM, establish the root cause of the fault and eliminate it.
2. Do not restart the machine following display of an EMERGENCY STOP message by the inter‐
lock or an actual EMERGENCY STOP until the root cause of the fault has been established
and remedied.
NOTICE
Manipulated switch signals
Modified or bridged switch signals do not ensure the protection of the machine anymore.
1. The settings of the device must not be changed without the authorisation of the manufac‐
turer.
2. Bridging switch signals is strictly prohibited.
The following tables list possible faults, their causes and remedial action for all assem‐
blies and variants. The table may list assemblies and variants not integrated in your ma‐
chine.
NOTICE
Incorrect fault analysis
Incorrect fault analysis results in the wrong measures being taken.
Faults may only be analysed by qualified, authorised personnel.
Depending on the type of fault, the personnel employed for fault analysis must be se‐
lected according to the following table.
EQUI/900517/000- 9-1
A Operating manual
9 Trouble shooting
Training Personnel qualification Abbreviation PQ

Qualified Special qualification, Q
specially trained and in‐
structed
Authorized Authorized by Siemens and A
qualified to perform neces‐
sary tasks
Qualified electrician Electrical engineering train‐ E
ing
Specialist Siemenstechnical supervi‐ S
sor
We recommend that fault analysis and repairs be performed by qualified and authorized
personnel from Siemens.
9.3 Defective measuring instruments

Defective measuring instruments may indicate mock faults. This applies in particular to
installed transmitters with measuring transducers and to portable measuring instru‐
ments. Therefore, it must first be checked whether the measuring instruments operate
correctly.
9.4 Documentation
The operator must document faults and damage in a maintenance log.
Maintenance
9.5 Fault tables
9.5.1 Sound
Fault Cause Measure

Sound power level too high Acoustic insulation not in Repair acoustic insulation
line with accepted engi‐
neering practice
9-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Trouble shooting 9
9.5.2 Vibration
Cause Measure
Elevated vibration levels, Unbalance through depos‐ Table Corrosion/Wear/
noisy running behavior its/spalling on impeller Deposits
Speed within no-hold speed Only allow speed outside
range the no-hold speed ranges.
Bearing clearance too large Install bearing with correct
bearing clearance
Bearing unstable due to in‐ Change lube oil, use speci‐
correct oil viscosity fied lube oil
Bearing damage Replace bearing
Coupling alignment incor‐ Re-align coupling
rect or modified
Foundation has yielded Repair foundation, re-align
machine
Impeller runs in the con‐ Check drain and clean it
densate
Unbalance through depos‐ Table Corrosion/Wear/
its/spalling on impeller Deposits
Imbalance due to wear on Balance, measure and eval‐
the impeller uate wear
The cause of elevated vibration levels can often only be determined by special measure‐
ments. For such measurements, the connection between vibration pickup and bearing
must be rigid and as short as possible. Measurement direction is horizontal, in some ca‐
ses also vertical and axial.
A frequency analysis allows the cause of vibration to be established. If a frequency anal‐
ysis is not possible, you should
▪ measure selectively: overall (∞) and rotary frequency vibrations (1xn)
▪ measure the vibration displacement (µm) and vibration velocity (mm/s).
We recommend that vibration issues be resolved by qualified and authorized personnel
from Siemens.
9.5.3 Noise
Fault Cause Measure

Noise in the area of the in‐ Pump defective, worn Check pump, replace
stalled duty oil pump
Noisy, rough running be‐ Gearing damage Check gearing, repair
havior of the gearbox
EQUI/900517/000- 9-3
A Operating manual
9 Trouble shooting
9.5.4 Corrosion/Wear/Deposits
Fault Cause Measure

Erosion, corrosion on the Excessive steam moisture In case of increased steam
impeller, nozzles and casing moisture, operate turbine
interior in specific range
Steam quality (boiler water Check water treatment, an‐
treatment), not according alyze condensate, compare
to Siemens specification with Siemens specification
Deposits on the impeller Steam quality (boiler water Check water treatment, an‐
treatment), not according alyze condensate, compare
Deposits on the casing inte‐ Steam quality (boiler water Check water treatment, an‐
rior treatment), not according alyze condensate, compare
9.5.5 Bearing temperature
Fault Cause Measure

Bearing temperature too Bearing clearance too small Install bearing with suffi‐
high cient clearance
Oil temperature too high Table Oil temperature
Oil viscosity too high Change lube oil, use speci‐
fied lube oil
Oil pressure too low Table Oil quantity
Oil quantity too low Table Oil quantity
Bearing damaged Install new bearing
Bearing worn Install new bearing
Incorrect bearing Install correct bearing
The bearing temperature limit values can often only be determined after commissioning
and initial operating experience.
9-4 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Trouble shooting 9
9.5.6 Bearing tightness
Fault Cause Measure

Leaking gearbox Seal rings worn Replace seal rings
Leaking joint Reseal joint
Excessive pressure in the Clean ventilation filter
bearing housing
Excessive pressure from ad‐ Ensure pressure balance
jacent assemblies (com‐ and ventilation
pressor/turbo blower, cool‐
ing disc, coupling)
Oil level too high Ensure compliance with
specified max. oil level
when lubricating in the fu‐
ture; if necessary drain lube
oil
Oil quantity too high Table Oil quantity
Defective oil supply system Table Lube oil supply
Shaft seal defective (nega‐ Table Tightness of shaft
tive pressure may cause seal
lube oil to be drawn from
the bearing)
9.5.7 Shaft seal tightness
Fault Cause Measure

Leaking shaft seal Carbon rings worn Replace carbon rings
Defective extraction Check and repair extraction
system
Defective seal gas supply* Table Sealing gas supply
* only applies for gas expansion turbines
9.5.8 Coupling
Fault Cause Measure

Noises and/or vibrations Incorrect or changed align‐ Establish cause, realign
ment
Wear Replace worn parts of the
coupling
EQUI/900517/000- 9-5
A Operating manual
9 Trouble shooting
9.5.9 Gearbox
Fault Cause Measure

Noise Defective oil supply system Table Oil pressure
Damaged gearing teeth Check and repair gearbox
Vibration Excitation by compressor/ Table Vibration
turbo blower
Galling on tooth flanks Lube oil with incorrect fail‐ Use specified lube oil
ure load stage
Damaged tooth flanks Overloading, also localized Inspection of current load,
overloading service limit (contact pat‐
tern test)
Incorrect contact pattern Foundation has yielded Repair foundation, re-align
machine, check contact
pattern
9.5.10 Control system / control equipment
Fault Cause Measure

Turbine does not start Valve stem is tight, deposits Clean valve stem, replace
on the valve stem seal
Turbine does not stop Valve stem is tight, deposits Clean valve stem, replace
on the valve stem seal
Speed fluctuates Valve stem is tight Clean internals of the ac‐
tuator
Speed fluctuates Actuator contaminated on Clean valve stem, replace
the inside seal
Specified speed/output is Valve stem is tight, deposits Clean valve stem, replace
not achieved on the valve stem seal
Oil leaking from actuator Seal rings worn Replace seal rings
Oil leakage at steam valve Wear Replace packing
9-6 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Trouble shooting 9
9.5.11 Oil temperature
Fault Cause Measure

Oil temperature too high Ambient temperature too Protect oil supply system
high from heat
Soiled cooler Clean cooler
Inadequate cooling water Increase cooling water flow
flow rate rate
Cooling water temperature Increase cooling water flow
too high rate
Water connections at cooler Correct water connections
switched
Heater does not switch off Check and repair oil heater
and temperature controller
Controller incorrectly set or Correct controller settings
defective or replace controller
Oil temperature too low Heater does not switch on Check and repair heater
and temperature control
Cooling water flow rate too Reduce cooling water flow
high rate
Cooling water temperature Reduce cooling water flow
too low rate
9.5.12 Oil pressure
Fault Cause Measure

Oil pressure too low Soiled filter Clean / replace filter
Pressure relief valve soiled, Clean, readjust or repair
incorrectly set or defective pressure relief valve
Clogged suction line Clean suction line
Defective oil pump Repair oil pump
Mechanical pump drive unit Repair drive unit
defective
Lube oil foams Table Oil condition
Leakage Eliminate leakage
Oil pressure too high Soiled filter Clean / replace filter
Pressure relief valve soiled Clean or readjust pressure
or incorrectly set relief valve
Soiled cooler Clean cooler
EQUI/900517/000- 9-7
A Operating manual
9 Trouble shooting
9.5.13 Oil flow rate
Fault Cause Measure

Oil pump does not pump Pump is rotating in the Wire up motor correctly
lube oil wrong direction
Mechanical pump drive unit Repair drive unit
defective
Defective oil pump Repair oil pump
Oil level too low Refill lube oil, check level
indicator
Oil pump pumps too little Oil pump sucks in air Check and repair oil pump
lube oil seal
9.5.14 Oil level in tank / bearing housing
Fault Cause Measure

Oil level too low Lube oil has not been refil‐ Refill lube oil
led
Leaking bearing Table Tightness of
bearing
Leakage Eliminate leakage
9-8 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Trouble shooting 9
9.5.15 Oil condition
Fault Cause Measure

Dirt in the lube oil Lube oil has not been Change lube oil
changed
Oil filter defective or filter Repair filter, replace filter
mesh size too large strainer
Metal particles in the lube Bearing wear Check bearing
oil
Water in the lube oil Ingress of rain water or Protect from water ingress
cleaning water
Clearing was performed Do not use high pressure
with high pressure cleaner cleaner
Leaking cooler Repair cooler
Water not drained from oil Drain water at regular inter‐
tank vals, eliminate cause
Leaking turbine shaft seal Replace shaft seal
Lube oil displays dark dis‐ Lube oil has not been Analyze oil and change lube
coloration changed oil
Lube oil foams Lube oil has not been Analyze lube oil, change
changed lube oil
Incorrect lube oil Flush system, change lube
oil
Brown precipitation from Aged oil, degraded antioxi‐ Analyze oil, change oil,
the oil, deposits dants clean oil system
9.5.16 Electrical system

Power supply
Fault Cause Measure

No power Power supply interrupted Check and restore power
supply
Overload switch triggered Restart after a certain peri‐
od, establish cause
EQUI/900517/000- 9-9
A Operating manual
9 Trouble shooting
9.5.17 Monitoring
Fault Cause Measure

No measured value Measuring fault Check 4...20mA signal,
check lines, replace or re‐
pair
Defective measuring trans‐ Repair measuring transmit‐
mitter ter
Incorrect measured value Measuring transmitter not Reset measuring transmit‐
set correctly ter
9-10 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Spare parts 10
10 Spare parts
10.1 Provisioning
We recommend provisioning spare parts: If a part is worn or damaged, the machine can
be repaired quickly.
In order to secure availability of the machine we recommend that at least the following
spare parts be kept in storage:
▪ 1 rotor
▪ 1 set bearings for the turbine and the gearbox
▪ 1 set seal rings for shaft seal
▪ 1 set seals for the turbine and the gearbox
▪ 1 tube bundle for the cooler
▪ 1 set seals for the cooler
▪ 2 sets of oil filter inserts with seals
10.2 Identification
Parts lists with drawings ensure identification of spare parts.
10.3 Ordering
When placing an order for spare parts, please always indicate:
– The name plate of the machine indicates the Siemens machine number.
▪ From the parts list in part B indicate:
– Material number ("material number")
– Quantity / unit of quantity ("Q/Un")
– Designation ("designation")
10.4 Storage
NOTICE
Incorrect storage of spare parts
Incorrect storage of spare parts may significantly affect their functionality.
1. Observe storage instructions.
2. Open the original packing only immediately before the installation at the workplace.
Spare parts will only be available in good condition and operational when required if
they have been properly stored.
EQUI/900517/000- 10-1
A Operating manual
10 Spare parts
▪ Spare parts must be stored protected in their original packaging.

▪ Spare parts must be stored in a dry, dust-free hall.
▪ do not store any aggressive chemicals in the same room
▪ Carbon sealing rings
– must be stored horizontally
– must not be deformed or compressed
▪ Sealing elements made of elastomers
– must be stored at temperatures of between +15°C and +25°C
– must not be stored near heat sources
– must not be exposed to direct sunlight
– must not be deformed or compressed
10-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Operating manual A
Disposal 11
11 Disposal
11.1 Changing of components

Disassembled components must be disposed of in an environmentally-friendly way. Ex‐
amples are shown in the table.
Pos. Description Example Activity

1 Materials Metals, plastics Recycling
2 Special waste Oil, grease, chemicals, Dispose of separately
electrical/electronic devi‐
ces and their compo‐
nents, batteries,
3 Waste Residue waste Dispose /landfill
11.2 Changing lubricants

Large quantities of lube oil may be conditioned in an oil separator and reused. Used oil
and grease must be disposed of.
NOTICE
11.3 Dismantling of machines

For dismantling of a machine, all accident prevention and environmental protection
laws and regulations applicable in the country of use and at the place of installation
must be adhered to.
Dismantling poses specific risks. The work must be carried out by a specialised company
with the required expertise in this field.
All components must be disposed of in an environmentally-friendly manner. Examples
are shown in the table.
Pos. Denomination Example Activity

1 Machine - Dismantle, separate ma‐
terials
2 Materials Metals, plastics Recycling
3 Special waste Oil, grease, chemicals, Dispose of separately
electrical/electronic devi‐
ces, batteries,
4 Waste Residue waste Dispose /landfill
EQUI/900517/000- 11-1
A Operating manual
11 Disposal
NOTICE
Waste generate during when working on the machine
Waste such as lube oil and grease, chemicals and electronic scrap are hazardous for the envi‐
ronment.
1. Observe the legislation and the local regulations for waste disposal.
2. Have waste disposed of by an authorised and specialised company.
11.4 Laws and regulations

All laws and regulations concerning the protection of the environment and waste dis‐
posal valid in the country of use and at the site must be observed.
11.5 Accompanying information

The information on the packaging and in the safety data sheets concerning waste dis‐
posal must be observed.
11.6 Packaging material and preservatives

Packaging material must be disposed of in an environmentally-friendly way. Examples
are shown in the table.
Item Denomination Example Activity

1 Materials Metals, plastic film, card‐ Recycling
board
Recycling / use for ener‐
wood gy
2 Special waste Preservatives that have Dispose of
been removed with a
solvent
3 Waste Desicants Landfill
11-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Drawings and Schemes
Turbine
EQUI/900517/000-
Drawings and Schemes B
Table of content
Table of content
1 Plant 1-1
1.1 General Arrangement 1-1
General arrangement-DW-Z-165955 3
2 Machine 2-1
2.1 Drawings and Parts Lists 2-1
2.1.1 Piping 2-1
2.1.2 Turbine unit 1 2-20
2.1.3 Turbine unit 2 2-49
2.1.4 Power train 2-91
3 Schemes and Lists 3-1

3.1 P & I Diagram 3-1
P &I schematic - DW-Z-165956 3
3.2 Interlock Diagram 3-5
Interlocking schematic - DW-Z-165957 7
3.3 Circuit Diagram 3-8
0060 -- ___._ -- Control panel - DW-Z-166164 9
0063 -- ___._ -- Switch gear panel - DW-Z-166166 168
0065 -- 031.0 -- Local panel - DW-Z-166165 189
4 Guidelines 4-1
4.1 External electrical installation 4-1
Installation Guidelines 3
4.2 Surrounding area for turbines 4-33
Regulations for the surroundings of Turbine 35
4.3 Installation instructions for flanged joints 4-59
Installation instructions for flanged connections 61
EQUI/900517/000- i
B Drawings and Schemes
Table of content
ii EQUI/900517/000-
Plant 1
1 Plant
1.1 General Arrangement
See also
2 General arrangement-DW-Z-165955 [➙ 3]
EQUI/900517/000- 1-1
1 Plant
1-2 EQUI/900517/000-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
ca.3510
ca.4270 ca.302 2038 ca.1170
ca.2115
A A
Norm 4 (max. 7)
10.2
120 150
15.3 15.2 15.3
B B
11 10.1
150 10.1 14.1
Y
3.2
3.2 19.1
3.1
Luftaustritt
C 14.1 12.1 AIR OUTLET 12.1 C
Lufteintritt 12.2
14.2 AIR INLET
165.1
19.1 19.2
1 4.2 20
1072
1072
ca.3195
3195
D D
958
958
180 31
31
ca.2662
20 100 151
165.2
ca.860
59
E E
165.1
2068
60.2;
400
ca.600
61
ca.650
ca.735
ca.789
151 7.2,
ca.850
ca.850
ca.850
7.4, 6.1,
F
8.1 6.2, 7.1,
F
1110
1110
7.3, 5.1
ca.701
8.2 5.2
50 54 60 9.1 9.2
9.3 8.1
ca.107
60.1 8.2
G ca.220 G
50
10
min.200
min.200
7.2; 6.1; 7.1; 5.1; 53
Unterguss 40x45°
GROUT
ca.400
7.4 6.2 7.3 5.2
min.200
ca.500
H ca.200 H
ca.180
ca.300 ca.400
102 102
50 50 2600 50
50 Fußleisten nicht mechanisch bearbeitet
BASE FLATS NOT MACHINED
J J
3.2 Ansicht Y
ca.4270
Maßstab/SCALE 1:5
Luftaustritt Lufteintritt
AIR OUTLET AIR INLET
14.2
515.5 1270
35
K K
prohibited.
Zuwiderhandlungen
35
ca.200 ca.200 ca.200 ca.250
4.2 7.4 6.2 7.3 5.2

communication of its contents to others without explicid authorization is
Kabelaustritt M10
L CABLE OUTLET L
seines Inhalts sind verboten, soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet.
in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.
ca.400
min.1000 59
Die Abdampfleitung muss 150
leicht demontierbar sein,
Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.
um einen Montageraum
970
von min. 1000mm zu gewähren.
ca.894+200
Norm 4 (max. 7)
170
170
970
M THE EXHAUST STEAM PIPE M
MUST BE DISMANTELED EASILY, 10.2 170
TO HAVE A WORKING
AREA OF MIN.1000mm
15.3
586
180 15.2 98
343
170
170
1
ca.3510
14.1
440
686
N N
3.1 100
343
99 35 35
170
170
35 35
544
4.1 15.1
35
35
20
The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this document as well as the
48
48
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieses Dokuments, Verwertung und Mitteilung
Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved
P 10.1 Luftmenge 1,6 m³/s P

Details siehe Generatorzeichnung 240 COOLING AIR AMOUNT 240
verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patent-,
12.1 63.1 DETAILS SEE GENERATOR DRAWING Gegendruck 0,22 kPa

ca.400
275 275
Marelli MJB 400 L "M40AD488D" MAX. BACKPRESSURE FOR AIR DUCTS
7.2 6.1 7.1 5.1

655
b .. 17.10.2012 Muk Rib .. Pos. 9.3 Leckwasser hinzu , Angabe Kupplungsabstand

60 61 60.2,60.1 a .. 23.08.2012 Muk Rib .. Kühler auf gegenüberliegende Seite, Geno überarbeitet
Q - - 16.05.2012 Fib Rib Erstzustand / original version
Index/ Anzahl/ Datum/ gezeich./ geprüft/ freigeg./ Bemerkung /
Rev. number of. date drawn checked released remark
Kom.: 4.736.053 (BBF00069)

Ausbau Rohrbündel Für diese Zeichnung behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Schutzvermerk nach DIN ISO 16016 beachten.
ca.50
We reserve us all rights to this drawing. Observe Protection mark acc. to DIN ISO 16016
Allgemeintoleranzen :DIN ISO 2768-m
Oberflächen : DIN EN ISO 1302
ca.200 ca.200 ca.200 ca.250 ca.1201 ca.490.5 Werkstückkanten : DIN ISO 13715
Form- u. Lagetoleranzen : DIN EN ISO 1101
Huellbedingungen : DIN 7167
ca.1800
R
Siemens Turbomachinery universal tolerance : DIN ISO 2768-m
surfaces : DIN EN ISO 1302
ca.1068
Equipment GmbH edges of workpiece : DIN ISO 13715
form- and pos. tolerance : DIN EN ISO 1101
31 Frankenthal envelope condition : DIN 7167
Bedienseite Einbauzeichnung SST-110 Entstanden aus/ :

originated from:
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING (TWIN - CFR3 / AFA6) Z-166069
OPERATING SIDE Maßstab/
scale:
Zeichnungsnummer / drawing no. Blatt Nr./ Blattanzahl/ Format/
sheet no. no. of sheets size
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1:10 Z-165955 1 3 A0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
A A
B B
ca.4123
C C
ca.1143
1361
819
0
min.250
D D
min.250
Dyn. Belastung
CARICO DINAMICO
1) statische Ersatzkraft im Störfall Statische
1) FORZA STATICA SOSTITUTIVA IN CASO DI GUASTO Belastung
E CARICO E
STATICO
I II
3.2
651
4.2
815
kN
kN
#y #Hz
t=360
180
F 1 23 F
Norm 4 (max. 7) I 43
1401
2 10 23
AFA6 1 13
II 2 6 13
43
VI VII III
1 36
144
2 16 36
1 23
III IV 42
586
ca.150
G 2 10 23 G
1 13
V 42
ca.3280
2 6 13
1 4
101
Getriebewelle Generatorwelle VI 13
1500
2 2 4
GEARING SHAFT ALTERNATOR SHAFT
23 1 4
VII 2 2 4
13
H 1 4 H
4.1 VIII 16
544
2 2 4
20 ca.800 ca.1090
IX
1 4
16
2 2 4
CFR3
VIII IX Last-
1199
fall 1
Hz=0
CONDIZIONE
DI CARICO 1
J 3.1 J
655
Hz =
Last- Turbinen-
Ersatz-
449
fall 2 welle
kraft
CONDIZIONE ALBERO
FORZA
DI CARICO 2 TURBINA
SOSTITUTIVA
t=360
180
K K
min.250
prohibited.
IV V
Zuwiderhandlungen
L L
0
190
530
2148
1338
1020
1530
1159.5

M M
N N
P P
b .. 17.10.2012 Muk Rib .. Pos. 9.3 Leckwasser hinzu , Angabe Kupplungsabstand

a .. 23.08.2012 Muk Rib .. Kühler auf gegenüberliegende Seite, Geno überarbeitet
Q - - 16.05.2012 Fib Rib Erstzustand / original version
Rev. number of. date drawn checked released remark
Kom.: 4.736.053 (BBF00069)

Für diese Zeichnung behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Schutzvermerk nach DIN ISO 16016 beachten.
Allgemeintoleranzen :DIN ISO 2768-m
Werkstückkanten : DIN ISO 13715
Form- u. Lagetoleranzen : DIN EN ISO 1101
R
Siemens Turbomachinery universal tolerance : DIN ISO 2768-m
Equipment GmbH edges of workpiece : DIN ISO 13715
Frankenthal envelope condition : DIN 7167
Einbauzeichnung SST-110 Entstanden aus/ :

originated from:
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING (TWIN - CFR3 / AFA6) Z-166069
Maßstab/ Zeichnungsnummer / drawing no. Blatt Nr./ Blattanzahl/ Format/
scale: sheet no. no. of sheets size
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1:10 Z-165955 2 3 A0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Pos-Nr DN PN DIN Benennung DESIGNATION

Alle Druckangaben sind Überdrücke !
A
1 Turbine CFR3 TURBINE CFR3 ALL PRESSURES INDICATED ARE GAUGE PRESSURES ! A
2 Turbine AFA6 TURBINE AFA6 Die Abweichung der Parallelität der Anschlußflansche darf
am größten Dichtheitsdurchmesser 0.2mm nicht überschreiten.
3.1 4" 1500lbs ANSI RF Frischdampfstutzen LIVE STEAM BRANCH THE DEVIATION FROM THE PARALLELISM OF THE CONECTION FLANGES MAY
NOT EXCEED 0.2mm AT THE BIGGEST DIAMETER OF THE SEALING SURFACE.
3.2 14" 600 lbs ANSI RF Frischdampfstutzen LIVE STEAM BRANCH
4.1 10'' 150 lbs ANSI RF Abdampfstutzen EXHAUST STEAM BRANCH Sicherheitsventile - Abblasedruck
4.2 24'' 150 lbs ANSI RF Abdampfstutzen EXHAUST STEAM BRANCH Abblasedruck des bauseits unbedingt vorzusehenden Sicherheits-
B ventil in der Frischdampfleitung 60,0 bar B
5.1 1/2" 1500lbs ANSI Frischdampfentwässerung mit Kondensomat LIVE STEAM DRAINAGE WITH STEAM TRAP Abdampfleitung 3,0 bar
Entnahmedampf 4,5 bar
5.2 1/2" 1500lbs ANSI Frischdampfentwässerung mit Kondensomat LIVE STEAM DRAINAGE WITH STEAM TRAP
Alle Sicherheitsventile müssen für die volle Dampfmenge (100%)
6.1 1" 150lbs ANSI Abdampfentwässerung mit Kondensomat EXHAUST STEAM DRAINAGE WITH STEAM TRAP ausgelegt werden.
6.2 1" 150lbs ANSI Abdampfentwässerung EXHAUST STEAM DRAINAGE SAFETY VALVE BLOW-OFF PRESSURE
THE BLOW-OFF PRESSURE FOR THE SAFETY VALVE WICH IS ESSENTIAL
7.1 1/2" 1500lbs ANSI Düsenkammer Entwässerung mit Kondensomat NOZZLE CHAMBER DRAINAGE WITH STEAM TRAP
ON SITE LIVE STEAM LINE 60,0 bar
C EXHAUST STEAM LINE 3,0 bar C
7.2 1/2" 1500lbs ANSI Düsenkammer Entwässerung mit Kondensomat NOZZLE CHAMBER DRAINAGE WITH STEAM TRAP
EXTRACTION STEAM 4,5 bar
7.3 1/2" 1500lbs ANSI Düsenkammer Entwässerung NOZZLE CHAMBER DRAINAGE ALL SAFETY VALVES MUST BE DESIGNED TO COPE WITH THE FULL
STEAM RATE (100%)
7.4 1/2" 1500lbs ANSI Düsenkammer Entwässerung NOZZLE CHAMBER DRAINAGE
8.1 1 1/2" 150lbs ANSI Wrasendampf INTERMEDIATE LEAK OFF TAPPING Alle Leckdampf-, Wrasendampf- und Entwässerungsleitungen sind
einzeln und mit Gefälle ins Freie zu verlegen.
8.2 1 1/2" 150lbs ANSI Wrasendampf INTERMEDIATE LEAK OFF TAPPING
ALL LEAKAGE STEAM AND DRAIN PIPES ARE TO BE LED INDIVIDUALLY
D 9.1 1/2" 150lbs ANSI Leckwasser aus Ventilstopfbuchse LECKAGE WATER FROM VALVE GLAND AND WITH DECLINE TO THE ATMOSPHERE. D
9.2 1 1/2" 150lbs ANSI Leckdampf LOW PRESSURE LEAK OFF TAPPING
Gewichts- und Kraftangaben ohne Zuschläge für Schwingugen und
9.3 1/2" 150lbs ANSI Leckwasser aus Ventilstopfbuchse LECKAGE WATER FROM VALVE GLAND ohne dynamische Überhöhung für die festigkeitsmäßig und
schwingungstechnich richtige Ausbildung des Unterbaus ist der
10.1 Ø25 Schwadendampf VENT STEAM Besteller verantwortlich. Bei schwingungsisolierter Aufstellung
der Maschine müssen auch die Eigenfrequenzen des gekoppelten
10.2 Ø25 Schwadendampf VENT STEAM Systems beachtet werden.
E 11 4" Dampfsieb STEAM STRAINER WEIGHTS- AND FORCES SHOWN TAKE NO ACCOUNT OF VIBRATIONS AND E
DYNAMIC AMPLICATIONS. THE CUSTOMER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DE-
12.1 Regelventil CONTROL VALVE SIGN OF A SUITABLE RIGID FOUNDATION ALLOWING FOR VIBRATIONS.
FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH VIBRATION INSULATION THE NATURAL
14.1 Schnellschlussventil TRIP VALVE FREQUENCIES OF THE COUPLED UNIT SHOUTD BE CONSIDERED
14.2 Schnellschlussventil TRIP VALVE
ACHTUNG !
15.1 Autom. Düsengruppen Regelventil AUTOMATIC NOZZLE GROUP CONTROL VALVES Bei Abdampfleitung nach oben oder bei Reduzierung der Abdampf-
leitung muß an der tiefsten Stelle eine Entwässerung angebracht
15.2 Autom. Düsengruppen Regelventil AUTOMATIC NOZZLE GROUP CONTROL VALVES
F werden. F
15.3 Autom. Düsengruppen Regelventil AUTOMATIC NOZZLE GROUP CONTROL VALVES ATTENTION !
19.1 elektr. Überdrehzahlschutz ELECTRONIC OVERSPEED PROTECTION WHEN THE EXHAUST STEAM LINE IS LED UPWARDS OR REDUCED A DRAIN Dampfsieb 4"
MUST BE FITTED AT THE LOWEST POINT.
19.2 elektr. Überdrehzahlschutz ELECTRONIC OVERSPEED PROTECTION STEAM STRAINER 4"
Maßstab/SCALE 1:5
20 10" 150 lbs ANSI Entnahmedampf EXTRACTION STEAM
Pos. 11
31 örtliche Bedieneinheit LOCAL CONTROL UNIT
G G
50 Ölbehälter OIL RESERVOIR
53 Ölentleerung OIL DRAINAGE
54 Ölstandsanzeiger OIL SIGHT GLASS
59 E-Pumpe ELECTRIC PUMP
60 Ölkühler OIL COOLER

H H
60.1 2" 150 lbs ANSI Kühlwassereintritt COOLING WATER INLET
60.2 2" 150 lbs ANSI Kühlwasseraustritt COOLING WATER OUTLET
589
61 2" 150 lbs ANSI Kühlwasserregelventil COOLING WATER REGULATING VALVE
63.1 Doppelölfilter TWIN OIL FILTER
98 Kupplung COUPLING
J 99 Getriebe TWIN GEARING J
100 Generator ALTERNATOR WITH COOLER
20
102 799-A M30x280 Fundamentklotz FOUNDATION BLOCK
109 Steuereinheit CONTROL UNIT

91
120 4'' Zwischenstück (keine SIEMENS Lieferung) INTERMEDIATE PIECE (NOT SIEMENS SUPPLY)
180
K 150 Überströmleitung OVERFLOWPIPE K
151 Stütze Überströmleitung SUPPORT - OWERFLOWPIPE
prohibited.
165.1 Stütze Turbinengehäuse SUPPORT - TURBINECASING

Zuwiderhandlungen
165.2 Stütze Ventilgehäuse AFA6 SUPPORT - TURBINECASING
180 24'' Zwischenstück (keine SIEMENS Lieferung) INTERMEDIATE PIECE (NOT SIEMENS SUPPLY)
S Schwerpunkt CENTER OF GRAVITY

L L
Max. zulässige äußere Kräfte und Momente an den

Turbinenstutzen #
MAX. PERMISSIBLE EXTERNAL FORCES AND MOMENTS
ON THE TURINE BRANCHES #
Frischdampfstutzen (3.1) Abdampfstutzen (4.1) Frischdampfstutzen (3.2) Abdampfstutzen (4.2) Entnahmedampfstutzen (20)
LIVE STEAM BRANCH EXHAUST STEAM BRANCH LIVE STEAM BRANCH EXHAUST STEAM BRANCH EXTRACTION BRANCH
M M
Fx = 1000 N Fx = 1000 N Fx = 1000 N Fx = 1000 N Fx = 700 N
Fy = 1000 N Fy = 1000 N Fy = 1000 N Fy = 1000 N Fy = 300 N
Fz = 1000 N Fz = 1000 N Fz = 1000 N Fz = 1000 N Fz = 300 N
Mx = 1000 Nm Mx = 1000 Nm Mx = 1000 Nm Mx = 1000 Nm Mx = 140 Nm
My = 1000 Nm My = 1000 Nm My = 1000 Nm My = 1000 Nm My = 970 Nm
Mz = 500 Nm Mz = 500 Nm Mz = 500 Nm Mz = 500 Nm Mz = 400 Nm
Stutzenverschiebung
BRANCHES DISPLACEMENT
N N
Frischdampfstutzen (3.1) Abdampfstutzen (4.1) Frischdampfstutzen (3.2) Abdampfstutzen (4.2) Entnahmedampfstutzen (20)
LIVE STEAM BRANCH EXHAUST STEAM BRANCH LIVE STEAM BRANCH EXHAUST STEAM BRANCH EXTRACTION BRANCH
x = -1.6 mm x = -2.1 mm x = +0.3 mm x = -1.6 mm x = -5.8 mm

y = +5.8 mm y = +0.6 mm y = +5.5 mm y = +0.6 mm y = +0.6 mm
z = #0 mm z = #0 mm z = +4.2 mm z = #0 mm z = #0 mm
P P
Kühlwassermenge t= 8°C m³/h 9,8 -- -- --

COOLING WATER QUANTITY
Kühlwasssertemperatur °C 30 -- -- --
COOLING WATER TEMPERATURE
Öl Viskosität bei 40 °C mm²/s 41-51 -- -- --
OIL VISCOSITY b .. 17.10.2012 Muk Rib .. Pos. 9.3 Leckwasser hinzu , Angabe Kupplungsabstand
a .. 23.08.2012 Muk Rib .. Kühler auf gegenüberliegende Seite, Geno überarbeitet
Q Öl Füllung l -- -- -- 750 - - 16.05.2012 Fib Rib Erstzustand / original version
OIL CHARGE
3:50

-1 Rev. number of. date drawn checked released remark
Drehzahl min 24525 1500 1500 --
>1500 Kom.: 4.736.053 (BBF00069)
SPEED 11541
Massenträgheitsmoment kgm² 261,5 4,3 19,8 -- Für diese Zeichnung behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Schutzvermerk nach DIN ISO 16016 beachten.
MASS MOMENT OF INERTIA Allgemeintoleranzen :DIN ISO 2768-m
Gewicht der rotierenden Teile kg 1090 203 1000 -- Werkstückkanten : DIN ISO 13715
WEIGHT OF ROTATION PARTS Form- u. Lagetoleranzen : DIN EN ISO 1101
R Gewicht (ohne Ölfüllung) kg 9500 203 3200 4500 Siemens Turbomachinery universal tolerance : DIN ISO 2768-m
WEIGHT Equipment GmbH edges of workpiece : DIN ISO 13715
Frankenthal
Turbinen-Nr. : Turbine Kupplung Generator Ölbehälter
envelope condition : DIN 7167
4.736.053 TURBINE COUPLING ALTERNATOR OIL RESERVOIR Einbauzeichnung SST-110 Entstanden aus/ :
TURBINE-NO. : GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING (TWIN - CFR3 / AFA6)
originated from:
Z-166069
Maßstab/ Zeichnungsnummer / drawing no. Blatt Nr./ Blattanzahl/ Format/
scale: sheet no. no. of sheets size
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1:1 Z-165955 3 3 A0
Machine 2
2 Machine
2.1 Drawings and Parts Lists
2.1.1 Piping
See also
2 Oil piping - DW-Z-166299 [➙ 3]
2 Steam piping - DW-Z-166299 [➙ 4]
2 Oil piping -PL-4-360002-706 [➙ 5]
2 Steam piping - PL-4-360002-707 [➙ 15]
2 Steam piping - PL-4-360002-708 [➙ 16]
EQUI/900517/000- 2-1
2 Machine
2-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Abkürzungen / Abbreviations Datum / Date
Teileliste Z-Pos = Zeichnungsposition / Drawing Item

M = Menge je Einheit / Quantity per unit
ME = Mengeneinheit / Code for unit of quantity (ME)
24.09.2012
Seite / Page no
Parts list ST = Stück / Each

L = Liter / Litre
KG = kg / Kilogramme
M = Meter / Metre
22
* = separate Teileliste / Separate parts list Gedruckt von: / Printed by

WOLF002O
Auftrags-Nr./ Job no. Benennung / Designation Zeichnung(en) / Drawing(s)
BBF00069/10 Zsb. Rohrleitung Öl Z-166299 /DRW/A

ASSY. PIPING OIL
Maschinen-Nr. / Machine no. Materialnummer / Parts list no.
4-360002-706
Materialnummer / Part no. M Benennung / Designation Ersatzteilcode /
Z-Pos ME Werkstoff / Material Spare part code
2-688100-839 1,0 Kühler

003 ST COOLER
00032600040 1,0 BLINDFLANSCH B

011 ST BLIND FLANGE
C22.8
19002883204 1,0 DICHTUNG für Flansch mit RB 1

012 ST GASKET
CENTELLEN WS 3820
00035356210 4,0 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE M 12X 30

013 ST HEXAGONAL BOLT
8.8
4-345000-345 1,0 E-Pumpe

015 ST ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
4-345000-421 1,0 E-Pumpe

016 ST ELECTRIC OIL PUMP
2-360600-004 1,0 Ölnebelabscheider

020 ST Oilmist separater
49014000012 2,0 Druckstellglied

025 ST Electronic Pressure Control Valve
00035191269 4,0 Zylinderschraube mit Innensechskant

026 ST CYLINDER HEAD SCREW
8.8
49014060808 1,0 Zsb. Montageplatte

027 ST ASSY. MOUNTING PLATE
2-365010-150 1,0 Ölfilter

028.1 ST OIL FILTER
Al-Guss
2-365010-026 1,0 VERSCHMUTZUNGSANZEIGER FÜR ÖLFILTER

028.2 ST FOULING INDICATOR
OPTISCH
2-365010-154 1,0 Ölfilter

029.1 ST OIL FILTER
EN-GJS-400-18-LT
2-365010-018 1,0 Verschmutzungsanzeiger

029.2 ST FOULING INDICATOR
STANDARD

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
23

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING OIL
4-360002-706
49003650111 1,0 ANSCHLUSSPLATTE F.STEUERBLOCK/DU 251

029.3 ST ...
ST
4-360150-060 1,0 Steuereinheit

030 ST CONTROL UNIT
49023600100 1,0 SAUGLEITUNG DN65 (DREHRICHTUNG RECHTS)

032 ST SUCTION PIPING
00080344710 2,0 O-RING 1

033 ST O RING
72 NBR 872
49024701203 1,0 HALTER

039 ST SUPPORT
2-367080-074 1,0 Temperaturregler

040 ST TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
4-367950-031 1,0 Blindflansch DN50 PN40 Nacharbeit

041 ST FLANGE
1.0402
3-322570-008 1,0 Dichtring

042 ST CONICAL NIPPLE
EDELSTAHL/VITON
49016820029 1,0 Niveauschalter NR 0,75 Zoll

050 ST LEVEL SWITCH
00032281204 2,0 DISCO-RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL

060 ST NON RETURN VALVE
GX4CrNi13-4
00035356877 8,0 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE

061.1 ST HEXAGONAL BOLT
8.8
00035500451 8,0 Sechskantmutter M 16

061.2 ST HEXAGONAL NUT
8
4-367520-017 1,0 Überströmventil KKK

064 ST OVERFLOW VALVE KKK
STAHL
2-520000-009 1,0 Überströmventil

065 ST OVERFLOW VALVE
GG-30

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
24

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING OIL
4-360002-706
19003679559 4,0 SAE-Anschweißflansch AFS 106 ST

066 ST Welding neck flange
E235 (ST37-2)
00080341366 6,0 RUNDGUMMIDICHTUNG 1

067 ST RUBBER O-RING SEALING
rubber
49023697902 1,0 SAE-FLANSCH MITTELB.G1

068 ST SAE-FLANGE
ST 42.3
2-470060-074 2,0 Mano.-Anordnung

070 ST PRESSURE GAUGE ARRANGEMENT
STAHL
3-415302-032 2,0 Bezeichnungsschild FRDPF TURB1-SP

070.1 ST LABELLING PLATES
PE 100
3-415302-035 2,0 Bezeichnungsschild FRDPF TURB2-SP

PE 100
3-415302-044 2,0 Bezeichnungsschild ABDPF TURB2-SP

PE 100
3-415302-048 1,0 Bezeichnungsschild SPERRDAMPF-SP

PE 100
3-415302-091 1,0 Bezeichnungsschild Delta p4 Turbine 1-D

PE 100
3-415302-090 1,0 Bezeichnungsschild Delta p4 Turbine 2-D

PE 100
00041530639 1,0 BEZEICHNUNGSSCHILD IMPDRUCK-SP

RESOPAL
3-415302-112 1,0 Bezeichnungsschild KUEHLOEL-SP

PE 100
2-526200-050 1,0 Thermometer

080 ST THERMOMETER
3-308901-007 1,0 Schutzrohr

081 ST PROTECTIVE TUBE
C22.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
25

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING OIL
4-360002-706
2-010041-008 1,0 Distanzbuchse

082 ST SPACER BUSHING
S235JRG1(UST37-2)
2-420190-167 1,0 Drucktransmitter SITRANS P DS III

084 ST PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
NIRO

rubber

rubber

8.8
49012973514 1,0 SAE-ANSCHWEISSFLANSCH DN 40(SAE)

113 ST SAE-WELDING FLANGE
E235 (RST37-2)
19003679560 1,0 SAE - Anschweißflansch AFS 108 St

120 ST WELDING NECK FLANGE
ST 37-2
4-367950-093 1,0 Flansch

135 ST FLANGE
S235JRG2
49012973520 4,0 SAE-VERSCHLFLANSCH AFC 104 ST

139 ST SEALING FLANGE
ST 42.3
49012973518 12,0 SAE-ANSCHWEISSFLANSCH AFS 104 ST

140 ST SAE-WELDING FLANGE
ST 42.3
00080344711 16,0 O-Ring 1

141 ST O-Ring
72 NBR 872

8.8
49012973519 5,0 SAE-GEGENFLANSCH GFS 104 ST

143 ST SAE-Companion flange
ST 42.3
00032520209 10,0 FLANSCH C

145 ST FLANGE
C22.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
26

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING OIL
4-360002-706
00080320310 8,0 DICHTUNG 1

146 ST GASKET
CENTELLEN HD WS3822

8.8

8
00032300100 1,0 SAE FLANSCHVERBINDUNG-STANDARDSERIE

148.1 ST SAE-FLANGE CONNECTION
ST42.2
3-803402-763 1,0 O-Ring

148.2 ST O-RING
Viton 70 FKM

148.3 ST CYLINDER HEAD SCREW
8.8
00032510030 2,0 VORSCHWEISSFLANSCH 150 LB

C21(C21)
3-803201-245 1,0 Dichtung 1

151 ST SEALING
CENTELL.HD WS3822
3-353501-281 4,0 Sechskantschraube mit Mutter

152.1 ST HEXAGONAL HEAD SCREW
X6CrNiTi18-10
3-355001-011 4,0 Sechskantmutter

X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2
00032600068 3,0 BLINDFLANSCH B PN 16

153 ST BLIND FLANGE
C22.8
00032510504 8,0 FLANSCH C

C22.8
00080320356 11,0 DICHTUNG 1

156 ST GASKET
CENTELLEN HD WS3822
00032520217 2,0 Flansch C

157 ST Flange
C22.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
27

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING OIL
4-360002-706
00080320454 2,0 DICHTUNG 1

158 ST GASKET
CENTELL.HD WS3822

8.8

8
00018200409 0,0 ROHR (P235T2/ St 37.4)

160 ST TUBE
P235TR2+N
00018200720 0,0 ROHR (S235G2T/ ST35)

162 ST TUBE
P235TR1+N
00018200997 0,0 ROHR (P235T2/ ST37.4)

163 ST TUBE
P235TR2+N
00018201206 0,0 ROHR (P235T2/ ST37.4)

164 ST TUBE
P235TR2+N
00018201252 0,0 ROHR (P235T2/ ST37.4)

165 ST TUBE
P235TR2+N
00018201456 0,0 ROHR (S235G2T/ ST35)

166 ST TUBE
P235TR1+N
00032700103 10,0 BOGEN

174 ST BEND
P235GH+N
00032700151 10,0 BOGEN

175 ST BEND
P235GH+N
00032700257 5,0 BOGEN

176 ST BEND
P235GH+N
00032530003 1,0 FLANSCH C

180 ST FLANGE C
C22.8
00080320259 1,0 DICHTUNG 1

181 ST GASKET 32 ND 40
CENTELL.HD WS3822

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
28

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING OIL
4-360002-706

8.8
00035500353 4,0 Sechskantmutter

183 ST HEXAGONAL NUT
8.8
00032270058 2,0 HOCHDRUCK-SCHWENKVERSCHRAUBUNG

188 ST HP-MALE STUD UNIT
steel
00032240753 1,0 GERADE EINSCHRAUBVERSCHRAUBUNG

190 ST MALE STUD UNIT
steel
00032190086 1,0 GERADE AUFSCHRAUBVERSCHRAUBUNG

steel

steel
4-367100-045 1,0 Einschraubstutzen

195 ST THREADED CONNECTORS
Stahl
3-322301-001 2,0 Gerade Einschraubverschraubung

196 ST STRAIGHT SCREW-IN CONNECTION
steel
49013613100 5,0 AXIAL-KOMPENSATOR DN32 PN6

197 ST AXIAL KOMPENSATOR
ST 35
4-350000-115 1,0 ZSB Schmierölverriegelung

200 ST ADDITIONAL PIPE
steel (St)
00032230005 6,0 T-VERSCHRAUBUNG

201 ST T-SCREW CONNECTION
steel
00032220210 2,0 ANSCHWEISS-VERSCHRAUBUNG

202 ST WELDING CONNECTION
steel
00032180021 1,0 EINSTELLBARER WINKEL-ANSCHLSTUTZEN DICHT

203 ST ADJUSTABLE ELBOW CONNECTING BRACH
steel
3-322025-003 2,0 Zwischenstutzen

204 ST INTERMEDIATE CONNECTION PIECE
steel

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
29

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING OIL
4-360002-706
3-322401-011 1,0 Gerader Mess-Stutzen mit Schraubkupplung

207 ST Straight lines measuring connecting piec
steel galvanized

steel

209 ST Male stud union
steel
00032292030 5,0 REDUZIERANSCHLUSS MIT DICHTKEGEL

211 ST SCREWED JOINT
steel
00032292033 1,0 REDUZIERANSCHLUSS MIT DICHTKEGEL

212 ST SCREWED JOINT
steel

steel

steel
00032050038 2,0 MUFFE N

221 ST SLEEVE
steel
3-325101-024 2,0 Blindflansch Form B

230 ST BLIND FLANGE
C22
00032520650 2,0 FLANSCH C

C22.8
00032510657 1,0 Flansch C

C22G2 (C22.8)
00080320407 3,0 DICHTUNG 1

233 ST GASKET
CENTELL.HD WS3822

8.8
00032050301 1,0 MUFFE

235 ST SLEEVE
steel

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
30

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING OIL
4-360002-706
00035301107 1,0 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE

236 ST LOCKING SCREW
steel
00035300301 9,0 Verschlußschraube G 3/4 A

steel
00032760084 2,0 T-Stück

280 ST T-PIECE
P235GH+N
00032760117 3,0 T-Stück

281 ST T-PIECE
P235GH+N
00032000110 2,0 REDUZIERSTUECK K

291 ST REDUCTION PIECE
P235GH+N

ST 37.0

P235GH+N

P235GH+N

P235GH+N
00032760177 1,0 T-Stück

297 ST T-PIECE
P235GH+N
2-361310-029 1,0 Kompensator

298 ST COMPENSATOR
ST
00030701900 1,0 FLUESSIGKEITSANZEIGER FSA

603 ST LEVEL INDICATOR
plastic
2-702015-011 1,0 Bezeichnungsschild

604 ST LABELLING PLATES
EDELSTAHL
3-820401-012 10,0 Rohrschelle

.. ST PIPE CLAMP
POLYAMID

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
31

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING OIL
4-360002-706
00082045380 10,0 ROHRSCHELLE

.. ST PIPE CLAMP
POLYAMID
00082041001 10,0 ROHRSCHELLE

.. ST PIPE CLAMP
POLYAMID
3-820401-001 10,0 Rohrschelle

.. ST PIPE CLAMP
PAH
3-323402-060 5,0 Rohrschelle

.. ST PIPE CLAMP
POLYPROPYLEN
00082041000 5,0 ROHRSCHELLE

.. ST PIPE CLAMP
POLYAMID
00032210000 5,0 GERADE VERSCHRAUBUNG

.. ST MALE STUD UNIT
steel

.. ST INTERMEDIATE CONNECTION PIECE
steel

.. ST MALE STUD UNIT
steel

.. ST INTERMEDIATE CONNECTION PIECE
steel

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
32

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Zsb. Rohrleitung Dampf Z-166299 /DRW/A

ASSY. PIPING STEAM
4-360002-707
00018300052 0,0 ROHR

704 ST TUBE
13CRMO4-5
00018300021 0,0 ROHR

706 ST TUBE
13CRMO4-5
49013675403 1,0 Zwischenstück

709 ST Intermediate piece
13 CRMO 44 V
49003673429 1,0 SCHWEISSNIPPEL DN10

710 ST WELDING NIPPLE
13CRMO44V
49003673402 3,0 Schweißnippel DN 15

711 ST WELDING NIPPLE
13 CRMO 44
00032600010 3,0 VORSCHWEISSFLANSCH 1500 LB (13CRMO44)

13CRMO4-5
00032221030 2,0 HEISSDAMPF-ANSCHWEISSVERSCHRAUBUNG

.. ST SCREWING TO BE WELDED ON
13 CRMO 44
00032221005 3,0 HEISSDAMPF-ANSCHWEISSVERSCHRAUB

.. ST SCREWING TO BE WELDED ON
13 CRMO 44

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
33

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING STEAM
4-360002-708
49003673443 3,0 Schweißnippel DN15/10

499 ST WELDING PIECE
15 MO 3
00080250000 14,0 Dichtring A kammprofiliert/Reingraphit 1

500 ST Grooved-O-rings
13CRMO4-5/REINGR.
49003673302 14,0 Überwurfschraube DN 15

501 ST CAP SCREW
21 CRMO V 57 V
49003673426 4,0 Schweißnippel DN15

502 ST WELDING PIECE
15 MO 3
00018300007 0,0 ROHR

503 ST TUBE
16MO3+N
00018300006 0,0 ROHR

504 ST TUBE
16MO3+N
00018200408 0,0 ROHR (P235G1TH/ St 35.8)

505 ST TUBE
P235GH+N
00018300005 0,0 ROHR

506 ST TUBE
16MO3+N
49013675407 4,0 Zwischenstück

509 ST INTERMEDIATE PIECE
15 MO 3
00080250081 4,0 DICHTRING B 1

517 ST SEALING RING
13CRMO4-5
00035670031 8,0 SCHRAUBENBOLZEN FORM L

518 ST SCREW BOLT
21CRMOV5-7
00035680041 16,0 Sechskantmutter M20 NF Produktklasse T3

21CrMoV5-7
49003714203 2,0 Drosselscheibe (Bohrung 3mm)

520 ST Throttle disc
X20Cr13+QT
00032600300 5,0 VORSCHWEISSFLANSCH 1500 LB

16MO3(15 MO 3)

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
34

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING STEAM
4-360002-708

525 ST SCREW CONNECTION
steel
00032760009 2,0 T-Stück

528 ST T-PIECE
15 MO 3

16MO3
00032510028 2,0 VORSCHWEISSFLANSCH 150 LB RF

16MO3 (15MO3)

steel
00032240704 6,0 GERADE EINSCHRAUBVERSCHRAUBUNG GE

533 ST MALE STUD UNION GE
steel

Stahl, verzinkt,Cr6-frei
00035670059 4,0 SCHRAUBENBOLZEN L

535 ST SCREW BOLT
21CRMOV5-7
00035680011 8,0 SECHSKANTMUTTER NF PRODUKTKLASSE T3

21CrMoV5-7
3-802501-001 1,0 Dichtung 1

537 ST GASKET
13CRMO4-5/REINGRAPHIT
00032520206 1,0 FLANSCH C

538 ST FLANGE
16MO3 (15MO3)
3-325301-113 1,0 Vorschweißflansch ASME

16MO3
2-367090-163 1,0 Widerstandsthermometer

560 ST RESISTANCE THERMOMETER
49023713200 1,0 Schutzhülse

561 ST PROTECTION SLEEVE
15MO3

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
35

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING STEAM
4-360002-708
2-420190-157 1,0 Drucktransmitter SITRANS P Serie DS III

NIRO

NIRO
2-010042-002 3,0 Anschweißstutzen DN10

564 ST BUSHING
16MO3
4-367260-015 3,0 Reduzierstück

565 ST REDUCING PIECE
16MO3 (15 MO 3)
4-370002-026 1,0 Schmutzfänger SF312

570 ST Steam strainer SF312
GS-C 25
49003714203 1,0 Drosselscheibe (Bohrung 3mm)

571 ST Throttle disc
X20Cr13+QT
00032520000 2,0 FLANSCH C

572 ST FLANGE C
16MO3
3-802501-038 3,0 Flachdichtung 1

573 ST GASKET
316L / GRAPHIT
00035670059 4,0 SCHRAUBENBOLZEN L

574 ST SCREW BOLT
21CRMOV5-7
3-356702-082 4,0 Schraubenbolzen L

575 ST SCREW BOLT
21CRMOV5-7

21CrMoV5-7

NIRO

NIRO
2-360200-083 2,0 Ventilblock

595 ST VALVE
316L

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
36

WOLF002O

ASSY. PIPING STEAM
4-360002-708

.. ST BUSHING
16MO3

.. ST BUSHING
16MO3
49003673525 4,0 Blindscheibe

.. ST Blind disc
13CRMO44
2-702015-003 4,0 Bezeichnungsschild (DE-EN-FR-SP-IT)

.. ST LABELLING PLATES
EDELSTAHL

EDELSTAHL

EDELSTAHL

EDELSTAHL

EDELSTAHL

EDELSTAHL
2 Machine
2.1.2 Turbine unit 1
See also
2 Turbine-DW-Z-143522 [➙ 21]
2 Turbine - PL-43430001300 [➙ 22]
2 Turbine rotor - DW-49021204000 [➙ 33]
2 Turbine rotor - PL-4-120002-006 [➙ 34]
2 Shaft sealing DW-Z-103571 [➙ 35]
2 Shaft sealing - PL-49021800007 [➙ 36]
2 Control valve DW-Z-102364 [➙ 37]
2 Control valve PL-4-110001-903 [➙ 38]
2 Control valve acuator DW-Z-108775 [➙ 39]
2 Control valve acuator - PL-4-430001-118 [➙ 40]
2 Trip valve - DW-Z-102364 [➙ 43]
2 Trip valve - PL-4-110000-481 [➙ 44]
2 Trip valve acuator - DW-Z-137886 [➙ 45]
2 Motor für Schnellschlussventil - PL-4-430000-023 [➙ 46]
2-20 EQUI/900517/000-

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
1

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 AFA 3/4/6 / CFA 4 / CFR 3 Drosselgehäuse

AFA 3/4/6 / CFA 4 / CFR 3 throttle cas.
43430001300
4-500105-006 1,0 Grundrahmen

.. ST BASE FRAME
Steel
00080701206 1,0 CURIL K 2 500 G DOSE

011 KG CURIL K 2 500 G TIN

8.8
00035730302 2,0 KEGELSTIFT

013 ST TAPER PIN
steel
4-230010-166 1,0 Getriebe Twin CFR3"DrG"/AFA6 (4.736.053) *

015 ST GEAR
43401095500 1,0 Zentrierring AFA4 G3a-G6b,Db

150 ST CENTERING RING AFA4 SUPERCRITICAL
R ST 37-2

8.8
00035735102 2,0 KEGELSTIFT A

152 ST TAPER PIN
steel

8.8
4-480000-003 1,0 Abschirmblech

156 ST INSULATION
X10CrNi18-8
4-101001-013 1,0 Turbinengehäuse CFR3 DrG (ZFR3)

160 ST TURBINE CASING
GS-17CRMO55
4-107000-006 1,0 Zsb.Wrasendampfabführung 1 1/2" 150lb

165 ST LEAKAGE STEAM DRAIN
4-108000-027 2,0 Dichtung 1

166 ST GASKET
GRAPHIT/STRECKMETALL
00035350020 2,0 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE M12X45 Edelstahl

21 CRMO V 57 V

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
2

WOLF002O

43430001300
49021071200 1,0 Zsb.Schwadendampfrohr (Kamin) AFA4 DrG

169 ST INTERMEDIATE LEAK-OFF TAPPING
43431034300 4,0 Passfeder (Zentrierstück)

170 ST KEY
C 45 K
00035310058 4,0 Gewindestift m. Innenskt. m. Kegelstumpf

171 ST THREADED PIN
45H
00035356668 8,0 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE M 16 x 40

8.8

8.8
49021800007 1,0 Wellendichtung (Auslegungstemp. 300°C) *

180 ST SHAFT SEALING (design temperature 300°C)
49021883400 1,0 Dichtung für Flansch Wellendichtung 1

181 ST GASKET FOR FLANGE - SHAFT SEAL
GRAPHIT
49011080700 1,0 Metall-C-Ring 1

182 ST METAL RING
INCONEL X-750

21 CRMO V 57 V
00065550432 1,0 Montagepaste hochtemperaturbeständig 1

187 ST Fitting lubricant high-temperature resis
4-163001-160 1,0 Düsenring CFR3 "DrG" Dr=rechts 4.736.053

190 ST NOZZLE RING
X20Cr13
3-356701-020 61,0 Stiftschraube mit Dehnschaft HR

192 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

192 ST LOCKING SCREW WITH REDUCED SHAFT HR
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1
49011673700 63,0 Sechskantmutter NF

193 ST HEXAGON NUT
24 CRMO 5

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
3

WOLF002O

43430001300
45301653002 1,0 Umlenkschaufelring, rechts

194 ST Reversing Chamber Ring
G-X 20 CR 14

21CRMOV5-7
42501033301 1,0 Blindflansch

200 ST BLIND FLANGE
13 CRMO 44 V

201 ST BLIND FLANGE
13 CRMO 44 V
43401483000 2,0 Dichtung 1

202 ST GASKET
X6CRNITI1810/GR.
00035670019 12,0 STIFTSCHRAUBE HR MIT DEHNSCHAFT

203 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

X22CrMoV12-1+QT1
4-111000-014 1,0 Ventilgehäuse AFA4 4" 1500lb (2 Stellm.)

205 ST VALVE CASING
G17CRMOV5-10
4-113000-233 1,0 Ventilsitz Ø=43 (eingestemmt)

206 ST VALVE SEAT
X20Cr13
43401183100 1,0 Dichtung 1

207 ST GASKET
X6CRNITI1810/GR.

208 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

X22CrMoV12-1+QT1
4-110000-481 1,0 Stellventil SS160 DN80/100 PN320/160 *

210 ST ADJUSTING VALVE
4-108000-004 1,0 Metall-O-Ring Ø120 (DA)

211 ST GASKET
INCONEL X-750

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
4

WOLF002O

43430001300

212 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

X22CrMoV12-1+QT1
4-110001-903 1,0 Stellventil R160 Hub=45mm "invers" *

4-101100-012 1,0 TG-Deckel AFA4 10" 150lbs HD (z=48)

220 ST EXHAUST STEAM CASING
NAXTRA
4-108000-018 1,0 Dichtung 1

221 ST GASKET
REINGRAPHIT MIT SPIESSBL.

222 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

X22CrMoV12-1

224 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-702011-068 1,0 Turbinenbeschriftung BBF00069

270 ST TURBINE LABELLING BBF00069
00035778156 4,0 Halbrundkerbnagel

271 ST ROUND HEAD GROOVED PIN
U ST 36-2
49004975229 2,0 Aufhängeöse

280 ST SUSPENSION SHACKLE
ST 37-2
49024975201 1,0 3-D-Lastring

280 ST 3-D-Ring

8.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
5

WOLF002O

43430001300

290 ST STUD BOLT
21CRMOV5-7
00035680549 8,0 DEHNHUELSE E 49X20

291 ST TORSION SLEEVE
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

21CrMoV5-7
4-110000-453 1,0 Zsb.p4-Ventil

00080313053 2,0 DICHTRING A KAMMPROFILIERT/REINGRAPHIT 1

296 ST GASKET
13CRMO4-5/REINGR
00035670001 8,0 STIFTSCHRAUBE MIT DEHNSCHAFT FORM HR

297 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7

21CrMoV5-7
4-360002-706 1,0 Zsb. Rohrleitung Öl *

300 ST ASSY. PIPING OIL
Standard
4-360002-707 1,0 Zsb. Rohrleitung Dampf *

301 ST ASSY. PIPING STEAM
13CrMo44

16Mo3
49015063206 1,0 Halter für Klemmenkasten

404 ST SUPPORT FOR TERMINAL BOX
4-200000-573 1,0 Verkabelung BBF00069

423 ST CABLING BBF00069
00080701206 1,0 CURIL K 2 500 G DOSE

4-544010-474 1,0 Bolzenkupplung BBF00069

653 ST BOLT COUPLING BBF00069

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
6

WOLF002O

43430001300
43434800000 1,0 Isolierung Blech/Mineralwolle CFA4/AFA4

700 ST ASSY. SHEET METAL CLEADING
3-415008-002 1,0 Firmenmarkenschild SIEMENS

702 ST LOGO SIEMENS
ALU
2-702015-054 1,0 Sicherheitshinweis

703 ST security advice
AL 99,8

8.8
00035730302 2,0 KEGELSTIFT

013 ST TAPER PIN
steel
4-506350-037 1,0 Abstützung

100 ST SUPPORT
4-506350-099 1,0 Abstützung

101 ST SUPPORT
ST
4-506350-024 2,0 Zubehör Abstützung

102 ST SUPPORT
4-685000-066 1,0 Federstütze (für VG AFA6 DN350)

103 ST TWIN INTERMEDIATE LINE
4-500111-751 1,0 Auflageplatte Federstütze

103 ST METAL SHEETING
ST37
4-500140-099 1,0 Rohr (Unterbau Federstütze)

103 ST WASTE PIPE
ST37
4-506350-069 1,0 Verlängerung Federstütze

104 ST SUPPORT
C45E
49021095500 1,0 Zentrierring AFA6/CFA4 G3a-G6b,Db

150 ST CENTERING RING
R ST 37-2

8.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
7

WOLF002O

43430001300
00035735102 2,0 KEGELSTIFT A

152 ST TAPER PIN
steel

8.8
49021244001 1,0 Ventilationsscheibe Ø90 schmal

156 ST VENTILATION DISK
42 CRMO 4 V
4-101001-050 1,0 Turbinengehäuse AFA6 DN350 PN64 DGG

GS-17 CRMO 55
4-112000-020 1,0 Blindflansch TG AFA6 DN350 PN64

160.1 ST COVER
S690QL1
3-802502-167 1,0 Dichtring 1

160.2 ST SEALING RING

160.3 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-113000-539 1,0 Ventilsitz Ø=64

161 ST VALVE SEAT
X20Cr13
4-113000-540 1,0 Ventilsitz Ø=52

162 ST VALVE SEAT
X20Cr13
4-113000-539 1,0 Ventilsitz Ø=64

163 ST VALVE SEAT
X20Cr13

4-108000-027 3,0 Dichtung 1

166 ST GASKET

21 CRMO V 57 V

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
8

WOLF002O

43430001300
4-350000-050 1,0 Rohrleitung Delta-p4-Messung AFA6

15MO3
49021071701 1,0 Zsb.Sperrdampfzuführung 1/2" 150lbs

168 ST ASSY. SEAL STEAM ADMISSION
4-107000-013 1,0 Zsb.Schwadendampfrohr (Kamin) AFA6 DN350


170 ST KEY
C 45 K

171 ST THREADED PIN
45H

8.8

8.8
4-180000-026 1,0 Wellendichtung Kond(Auslegungstemp200°C) *

180 ST SHAFT SEALING

GRAPHIT
49011080700 1,0 Metall-C-Ring 1

182 ST METAL RING
INCONEL X-750

21 CRMO V 57 V

4-163004-238 1,0 Düsenring AFA6 DR=Rechts 4.736.053

190 ST NOZZLE RING
X12Cr13
4-108000-037 1,0 Dichtung Düsenring AFA6 (DGG DN350) 1

191 ST GASKET

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
9

WOLF002O

43430001300

191 ST GASKET

21CRMOV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7+QT
4-167340-077 1,0 Abdeckring AFA6 L=30

194 ST Cover Ring
10CRMO9-10

21CRMOV5-7+QT
00041250082 4,0 KUGEL

196 ST Ball
WAELZLAGERSTAHL
43601674401 4,0 Gewindestift mit Kegel M10 x 30

197 ST Threaded Pin with Cone M10x30
45 H
4-110001-904 1,0 Stellventil R100 DGV bei Pos.200 (DN350) *



3-802502-166 3,0 Dichtring 1

3-356701-002 12,0 STIFTSCHRAUBE HR MIT DEHNSCHAFT

203 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-111000-079 1,0 Ventilgehäuse AFA6 14" 600lbs

205 ST VALVE CASING
GS-17 CRMO 55

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
10

WOLF002O

43430001300
4-112000-022 1,0 Blindflansch VG AFA6 14" 600lbs

205.1 ST COVER
S690QL1
3-802502-169 1,0 Dichtring B 1

205.2 ST SEALING RING, SIMILAR TO DIN

205.3 ST STUD BOLT
21CRMOV5-7

21CrMoV5-7
4-113000-257 1,0 Ventilsitz SS-Ventil AFA6 DN350

206 ST VALVE SEAT
42CrMo4+QT
3-802502-167 1,0 Dichtring 1

207 ST SEALING RING

208 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-110001-481 1,0 Stellventil SS160 DN350 *

3-802502-168 1,0 Dichtring 1

211 ST SEALING RING

212 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-109552-003 1,0 Leitkreuz AFA6 mit Fanglager (Ausf. Col)

218 ST GUIDE VANES
ST37.2
43601020006 1,0 TG-Deckel AFA6 24" 150lbs

220 ST Turbine casing cover
ST.37

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
11

WOLF002O

43430001300
43601083000 1,0 Dichtung Abdampfdeckel AFA6 1

221 ST GASKET

222 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
00035670004 20,0 STIFTSCHRAUBE MIT DEHNSCHAFT HR

224 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CrMoV5-7

U ST 36-2

8.8

290 ST STUD BOLT
21CRMOV5-7
3-356802-002 20,0 Dehnhülse E

291 ST RESILIENT SLEEVE E
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

21CrMoV5-7
43634800000 1,0 Isolierung Blech/Mineralwolle AFA6

700 ST ASSY. HEAT PROTECTION

702 ST LOGO SIEMENS
ALU

AL 99,8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
46

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Zsb.Turbinenläufer CFR3"DrG" 4.736.053 49021204000 /DRW/F

ASSY. TURBINE ROTOR
4-120002-006
45300100003/DRW/000/C 1,0 Wuchten Turbinenläufer CFR3

000 ST ...
49010094309/DRW/000/- 1,0 Montagevorschrift Laufrad M27

000 ST ...
4-233000-337 1,0 Turbinenwelle AFA4 mit Druckkamm z=24

001 ST Turbine Shaft
56NICRMOV7+QT
4-123003-010 1,0 Laufrad CFR3 Drehrichtung rechts 6

002 ST TURBINE WHEEL
X12CrMoWVNbN10-1-1
4-127541-004 1,0 Dehnschraube M27/33 Sonderausführung

003 ST TENSION BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT
49011283202 1,0 Laufradmutter

004 ST NUT FOR TURBINE WHEEL
X22CrMoV12-1+QT

4-241010-012 1,0 Antriebsritzel

006 ST DRIVING PINION
42CRMO4+QT
4-127341-022 1,0 Geberscheibe z=16

007 ST CROWN GEAR
42CRMO4V

8.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
19

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Wellendichtung (Auslegungstemp. 300°C) Z-103571 /DRW/A

SHAFT SEALING (design temperature 300°C)
49021800007
49021810100 1,0 Wellendichtungsgeh. 2-teilig (bis 7 bar)

001 ST Shaft sealing casing
X20Cr13+QT
49021833104 3,0 Kohlering mit Schlauchf. u. Arr. 3

002 ST Carbon Ring with Tension Spring Ø90,22
ELEKTROGRAPHIT/ANTIMON

003 ST Carbon Ring with Tension Spring Ø 90,06

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
21

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Stellventil R160 Hub=45mm "invers" Z-102364 /DRW/B

ADJUSTING VALVE
4-110001-903
4-430001-118 1,0 Stellmotor R160 Hub=45mm "invers" *

101 ST SERVO MOTOR
4-115001-254 1,0 Ventilspindel mit Kegel Ø=43 3

102 ST VALVE SPINDLE WITH CONE
X20Cr13
49021153201 1,0 Laterne

109 ST GLAND
GGG-40

110 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-108000-005 1,0 Dichtung (Integral-Packungsring K80S) 1

112 ST GASKET
GRAPHIT MIT STAHLFOLIEN
4-115461-002 1,0 Führungsbuchse

114 ST GUIDE BUSH
STELLITE 6
49021154100 1,0 Stopfbuchsbrille

115 ST GLAND END COVER
GGG-40
00035406420 2,0 Stiftschraube mit Einschraubende Sk6

116 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8.8
49001155201 1,0 Ventilkupplung 2-teilig

118 ST VALVE COUPLING
CK 35 N

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
51

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Stellmotor R160 Hub=45mm "invers" Z-108775 /DRW/C

SERVO MOTOR
4-430001-118
49024310006 1,0 Regelzylinder

001 ST CONTROL CYLINDER
GGG-40

002 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8
4-435680-006 1,0 Dichtungs- und Führungsbuchse

004 ST BUSH
G-CUSN10ZN (RG10)
00080345149 1,0 O-Ring 1

005 ST O RING
Viton 83 FKM 592
3-803903-001 1,0 Abstreifer 1

006 ST STRIPPER
FKM (VITON)
00040510011 1,0 QRAR04211 QUAD-RING 1

007 ST GASKET
FP70
00080410000 1,0 DFI-Führungsring 1

008 ST GUIDE RING
HGW HG517
4-435490-013 1,0 Kolbenscheibe Ø160

010 ST PISTON
EN-GJS-400-15
4-435500-012 1,0 Spindel

011 ST SPINDLE
X39CrMo17-1
49024353602 1,0 Federteller

012 ST SPRING PLATE
CK 15
2-804101-004 1,0 Führungsring

014 ST GUIDE RING
PA 4112

8
49004343099 1,0 Zylinderschraubenfeder F2=7705 N

017 ST CYLINDRICAL HELICAL SPRING
50 CR V4

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
52

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430001-118
49024310108 1,0 Regelzylinderdeckel

018 ST CONTROL CYLINDER COVER
GGG-40
4-435680-021 1,0 Regelbuchse

019 ST BUSH
GG-25
4-435490-018 1,0 Regelkolben

020 ST PISTON
16 MNCR 5 G
00035770306 1,0 Kegelkerbstift

021 ST TAPER GROOVED PIN
6.8
4-434300-021 1,0 Zylinderschraubenfeder F1=245N

023 ST SPRING
EN 10270-1 SL
4-435360-011 1,0 Federteller

024 ST SPRING PLATE
EN-GJL-200
00035192452 2,0 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE

8.8 BRUEN
49004343093 1,0 Zylinderschraubenfeder 8%

FEDERSTAHL/1.0500
00080345110 4,0 O-RING 1

027 ST O-RING
Viton 83 FKM 592
00080340022 1,0 O-RING 1

028 ST O-RING
Viton 83 FKM 592

8.8
4-435360-010 1,0 Federhalter

042 ST SPRING PLATE
C45E
4-367420-004 1,0 Drossel R160 45Hub

048 ST CHOKE
11SMN30

8.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
53

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430001-118
00032310003 4,0 Verschlußschraube für Einschraublöcher

steel
49007013111 1,0 Bezeichnungsschild Düsengruppe I

076 ST NAMEPLATE NOZZLE GROUP I
ALU

U ST 36-2
49004673008 1,0 Meßzapfen Hub 65

078 ST MEASURING PIVOT
X6CrNiTi18-10

8
49024374502 1,0 Hülse Hub=45mm

080 ST Sleeve
15 MO 3
4-367420-041 1,0 Drossel

081 ST CHOKE
5.8

8.8
00080701700 1,0 Loctite 243 1

110 ST LOCTITE 243

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
20

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Stellventil SS160 DN80/100 PN320/160 Z-102364 /DRW/B

ADJUSTING VALVE
4-110000-481
4-430000-023 1,0 Stellmotor SS160/45mm (ohne Hubanzeige) *

001 ST SERVO MOTOR
4-115450-015 1,0 Ventilspindel mit Deckel 3

002 ST VALVE SPINDLE
X20Cr13
4-115300-004 1,0 Stopfbuchse DN100/80 PN160/320

009 ST GLAND
G17CRMO5-5
4-115461-015 1,0 Führungsbuchse

014 ST GUIDE BUSH
STELLITE 6
49001155201 1,0 Ventilkupplung 2-teilig

CK 35 N

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
48

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Stellmotor SS160/45mm (ohne Hubanzeige) Z-137886 /DRW/G

SERVO MOTOR
4-430000-023
4-431000-010 1,0 Regelzylinder R160

001 ST CASING
EN-GJL-250 (GG-25)

002 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8

004 ST BUSH
GS CUSN10ZN
00080345149 2,0 O-Ring 1

005 ST O RING
Viton 83 FKM 592
3-803903-002 1,0 Abstreifer ASOB

006 ST STRIPPER
NBR 101
00040510031 2,0 QRAR04214 QUAD-RING 1

007 ST GASKET
NBR/N7004
2-804101-002 1,0 Führungsring FRI

008 ST GUIDE RING
PA 4112
3-351902-020 4,0 Zylinderschraube

8.8
4-435490-015 1,0 Kolben

010 ST PISTON
42CRMO4+QT
4-435360-005 1,0 Federteller

012 ST SPRING PLATE
C15E

014 ST GUIDE RING
PA 4112
4-437450-014 1,0 Hülse

016 ST SLEEVE
42CRMO4+QT
4-434300-006 1,0 Zylinderschraubenfeder

017 ST SPRING
50CRV4

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
49

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430000-023
4-431010-024 1,0 Regelzylinderdeckel

018 ST COVER
00080345110 7,0 O-RING 1

027 ST O-RING
Viton 83 FKM 592
00080340040 1,0 O-RING 1

028 ST O Ring
72 NBR 872
4-367420-004 1,0 Drossel R160 45Hub

048 ST CHOKE
11SMN30

8.8
4-320001-031 1,0 Überdrehzahlschutz ST800

063 ST OVER SPEED PROTECTION

8.8

steel

steel

steel
3-323101-007 1,0 Verschlussschraube

X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2
3-351001-013 2,0 Ringschraube

075 ST EYEBOLT
23MNNICRMO5-2
2-010023-004 1,0 Meßzapfen Hub 45

078 ST SET SCREW
X6CrNiTi18-10

8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
50

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430000-023

ST GAL ZN GLCC
4-367420-041 1,0 Drossel

081 ST CHOKE
5.8
00080701700 1,0 Loctite 243 1

110 ST LOCTITE 243
Machine 2
2.1.3 Turbine unit 2
See also
2 Turbine - DW-Z-157786 [➙ 51]
2 Turbine - PL-43430001300 [➙ 52]
2 Turbine rotor DW-49021204000 [➙ 63]
2 Turbine rotor - PL-4-120002-007 [➙ 64]
2 Shaft sealing DW-Z-160766 [➙ 65]
2 Shaft sealing PL-4-180000-026 [➙ 66]
2 Trip valve - DW-Z-156570 [➙ 67]
2 Trip valve -PL-4-110001-481 [➙ 68]
2 Trip valve acuator - DW-Z-161706 [➙ 69]
2 Trip valve acuator - PL-4-430000-060 [➙ 70]
2 Control valve I - DW-Z-156420 [➙ 73]
2 Control valve I - PL-4-110001-904 [➙ 74]
2 Control valve acuator - DW-Z-154196 [➙ 75]
2 Control valve acuator I - PL-4-430002-088 [➙ 76]
2 Control valve II - DW-Z-156420 [➙ 79]
2 Control valve II - PL-4-110001-905 [➙ 80]
2 Control valve acuator II - DW-Z-154196 [➙ 81]
2 Control valve acuator II - PL-4-430002-087 [➙ 82]
2 Control valve III - DW-Z-156420 [➙ 85]
2 Control valve III - PL-4-110001-906 [➙ 86]
2 Control valve acuator III - DW-Z-154196 [➙ 87]
2 Control valve acuator III - PL-4-430002-088 [➙ 88]
EQUI/900517/000- 2-49
2 Machine
2-50 EQUI/900517/000-

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
1

WOLF002O

43430001300
4-500105-006 1,0 Grundrahmen

.. ST BASE FRAME
Steel
00080701206 1,0 CURIL K 2 500 G DOSE


8.8
00035730302 2,0 KEGELSTIFT

013 ST TAPER PIN
steel
4-230010-166 1,0 Getriebe Twin CFR3"DrG"/AFA6 (4.736.053) *

015 ST GEAR
43401095500 1,0 Zentrierring AFA4 G3a-G6b,Db

150 ST CENTERING RING AFA4 SUPERCRITICAL
R ST 37-2

8.8
00035735102 2,0 KEGELSTIFT A

152 ST TAPER PIN
steel

8.8
4-480000-003 1,0 Abschirmblech

156 ST INSULATION
X10CrNi18-8
4-101001-013 1,0 Turbinengehäuse CFR3 DrG (ZFR3)

GS-17CRMO55

4-108000-027 2,0 Dichtung 1

166 ST GASKET

21 CRMO V 57 V

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
2

WOLF002O

43430001300
49021071200 1,0 Zsb.Schwadendampfrohr (Kamin) AFA4 DrG

169 ST INTERMEDIATE LEAK-OFF TAPPING

170 ST KEY
C 45 K

171 ST THREADED PIN
45H

8.8

8.8
49021800007 1,0 Wellendichtung (Auslegungstemp. 300°C) *

180 ST SHAFT SEALING (design temperature 300°C)

GRAPHIT
49011080700 1,0 Metall-C-Ring 1

182 ST METAL RING
INCONEL X-750

21 CRMO V 57 V

4-163001-160 1,0 Düsenring CFR3 "DrG" Dr=rechts 4.736.053

190 ST NOZZLE RING
X20Cr13

192 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

192 ST LOCKING SCREW WITH REDUCED SHAFT HR
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1
49011673700 63,0 Sechskantmutter NF

193 ST HEXAGON NUT
24 CRMO 5

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
3

WOLF002O

43430001300
45301653002 1,0 Umlenkschaufelring, rechts

194 ST Reversing Chamber Ring
G-X 20 CR 14

21CRMOV5-7

200 ST BLIND FLANGE
13 CRMO 44 V

201 ST BLIND FLANGE
13 CRMO 44 V
43401483000 2,0 Dichtung 1

202 ST GASKET
X6CRNITI1810/GR.

203 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

X22CrMoV12-1+QT1
4-111000-014 1,0 Ventilgehäuse AFA4 4" 1500lb (2 Stellm.)

205 ST VALVE CASING
G17CRMOV5-10
4-113000-233 1,0 Ventilsitz Ø=43 (eingestemmt)

206 ST VALVE SEAT
X20Cr13
43401183100 1,0 Dichtung 1

207 ST GASKET
X6CRNITI1810/GR.

208 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

X22CrMoV12-1+QT1
4-110000-481 1,0 Stellventil SS160 DN80/100 PN320/160 *

4-108000-004 1,0 Metall-O-Ring Ø120 (DA)

211 ST GASKET
INCONEL X-750

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
4

WOLF002O

43430001300

212 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

X22CrMoV12-1+QT1
4-110001-903 1,0 Stellventil R160 Hub=45mm "invers" *

4-101100-012 1,0 TG-Deckel AFA4 10" 150lbs HD (z=48)

220 ST EXHAUST STEAM CASING
NAXTRA
4-108000-018 1,0 Dichtung 1

221 ST GASKET
REINGRAPHIT MIT SPIESSBL.

222 ST STUD BOLT
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

X22CrMoV12-1

224 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-702011-068 1,0 Turbinenbeschriftung BBF00069

270 ST TURBINE LABELLING BBF00069

U ST 36-2
49004975229 2,0 Aufhängeöse

280 ST SUSPENSION SHACKLE
ST 37-2
49024975201 1,0 3-D-Lastring

280 ST 3-D-Ring

8.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
5

WOLF002O

43430001300

290 ST STUD BOLT
21CRMOV5-7
00035680549 8,0 DEHNHUELSE E 49X20

291 ST TORSION SLEEVE
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

21CrMoV5-7
4-110000-453 1,0 Zsb.p4-Ventil

00080313053 2,0 DICHTRING A KAMMPROFILIERT/REINGRAPHIT 1

296 ST GASKET
13CRMO4-5/REINGR
00035670001 8,0 STIFTSCHRAUBE MIT DEHNSCHAFT FORM HR

297 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7

21CrMoV5-7
4-360002-706 1,0 Zsb. Rohrleitung Öl *

300 ST ASSY. PIPING OIL
Standard

13CrMo44

16Mo3
49015063206 1,0 Halter für Klemmenkasten

404 ST SUPPORT FOR TERMINAL BOX
4-200000-573 1,0 Verkabelung BBF00069

423 ST CABLING BBF00069
00080701206 1,0 CURIL K 2 500 G DOSE

4-544010-474 1,0 Bolzenkupplung BBF00069

653 ST BOLT COUPLING BBF00069

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
6

WOLF002O

43430001300
43434800000 1,0 Isolierung Blech/Mineralwolle CFA4/AFA4

700 ST ASSY. SHEET METAL CLEADING

702 ST LOGO SIEMENS
ALU

AL 99,8

8.8
00035730302 2,0 KEGELSTIFT

013 ST TAPER PIN
steel
4-506350-037 1,0 Abstützung

100 ST SUPPORT
4-506350-099 1,0 Abstützung

101 ST SUPPORT
ST
4-506350-024 2,0 Zubehör Abstützung

102 ST SUPPORT
4-685000-066 1,0 Federstütze (für VG AFA6 DN350)

103 ST TWIN INTERMEDIATE LINE
4-500111-751 1,0 Auflageplatte Federstütze

103 ST METAL SHEETING
ST37
4-500140-099 1,0 Rohr (Unterbau Federstütze)

103 ST WASTE PIPE
ST37
4-506350-069 1,0 Verlängerung Federstütze

104 ST SUPPORT
C45E
49021095500 1,0 Zentrierring AFA6/CFA4 G3a-G6b,Db

150 ST CENTERING RING
R ST 37-2

8.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
7

WOLF002O

43430001300
00035735102 2,0 KEGELSTIFT A

152 ST TAPER PIN
steel

8.8
49021244001 1,0 Ventilationsscheibe Ø90 schmal

156 ST VENTILATION DISK
42 CRMO 4 V
4-101001-050 1,0 Turbinengehäuse AFA6 DN350 PN64 DGG

GS-17 CRMO 55
4-112000-020 1,0 Blindflansch TG AFA6 DN350 PN64

160.1 ST COVER
S690QL1
3-802502-167 1,0 Dichtring 1


160.3 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-113000-539 1,0 Ventilsitz Ø=64

161 ST VALVE SEAT
X20Cr13
4-113000-540 1,0 Ventilsitz Ø=52

162 ST VALVE SEAT
X20Cr13
4-113000-539 1,0 Ventilsitz Ø=64

163 ST VALVE SEAT
X20Cr13

4-108000-027 3,0 Dichtung 1

166 ST GASKET

21 CRMO V 57 V

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
8

WOLF002O

43430001300
4-350000-050 1,0 Rohrleitung Delta-p4-Messung AFA6

15MO3
49021071701 1,0 Zsb.Sperrdampfzuführung 1/2" 150lbs

168 ST ASSY. SEAL STEAM ADMISSION
4-107000-013 1,0 Zsb.Schwadendampfrohr (Kamin) AFA6 DN350


170 ST KEY
C 45 K

171 ST THREADED PIN
45H

8.8

8.8
4-180000-026 1,0 Wellendichtung Kond(Auslegungstemp200°C) *

180 ST SHAFT SEALING

GRAPHIT
49011080700 1,0 Metall-C-Ring 1

182 ST METAL RING
INCONEL X-750

21 CRMO V 57 V

4-163004-238 1,0 Düsenring AFA6 DR=Rechts 4.736.053

190 ST NOZZLE RING
X12Cr13

191 ST GASKET

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
9

WOLF002O

43430001300

191 ST GASKET

21CRMOV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7+QT
4-167340-077 1,0 Abdeckring AFA6 L=30

194 ST Cover Ring
10CRMO9-10

21CRMOV5-7+QT
00041250082 4,0 KUGEL

196 ST Ball
WAELZLAGERSTAHL
43601674401 4,0 Gewindestift mit Kegel M10 x 30

197 ST Threaded Pin with Cone M10x30
45 H



3-802502-166 3,0 Dichtring 1


203 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-111000-079 1,0 Ventilgehäuse AFA6 14" 600lbs

205 ST VALVE CASING
GS-17 CRMO 55

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
10

WOLF002O

43430001300
4-112000-022 1,0 Blindflansch VG AFA6 14" 600lbs

205.1 ST COVER
S690QL1
3-802502-169 1,0 Dichtring B 1

205.2 ST SEALING RING, SIMILAR TO DIN

205.3 ST STUD BOLT
21CRMOV5-7

21CrMoV5-7
4-113000-257 1,0 Ventilsitz SS-Ventil AFA6 DN350

206 ST VALVE SEAT
42CrMo4+QT
3-802502-167 1,0 Dichtring 1

207 ST SEALING RING

208 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-110001-481 1,0 Stellventil SS160 DN350 *

3-802502-168 1,0 Dichtring 1

211 ST SEALING RING

212 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
4-109552-003 1,0 Leitkreuz AFA6 mit Fanglager (Ausf. Col)

218 ST GUIDE VANES
ST37.2
43601020006 1,0 TG-Deckel AFA6 24" 150lbs

220 ST Turbine casing cover
ST.37

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
11

WOLF002O

43430001300
43601083000 1,0 Dichtung Abdampfdeckel AFA6 1

221 ST GASKET

222 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CRMOV5-7
00035670004 20,0 STIFTSCHRAUBE MIT DEHNSCHAFT HR

224 ST STUD BOLT
21CrMoV5-7+QT

21CrMoV5-7

U ST 36-2

8.8

290 ST STUD BOLT
21CRMOV5-7
3-356802-002 20,0 Dehnhülse E

291 ST RESILIENT SLEEVE E
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1

21CrMoV5-7
43634800000 1,0 Isolierung Blech/Mineralwolle AFA6

700 ST ASSY. HEAT PROTECTION

702 ST LOGO SIEMENS
ALU

AL 99,8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
47

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Zsb.Turbinenläufer AFA6 4.736.053 49021204000 /DRW/F

ASSY. TURBINE ROTOR
4-120002-007
4-233000-463 1,0 Turbinenwelle AFA6 mit Spurscheibe z=51

001 ST Turbine Shaft
56NiCrMoV7+QT
4-123001-225 1,0 Laufrad AFA6 L=30 DR=rechts (N=0) 6

002 ST TURBINE WHEEL
X22CrMoV12-1+QT1
49011275407 1,0 Dehnschraube

003 ST Tension Bolt
X22CrMoV12-1+QT
49011283204 1,0 Laufradmutter

004 ST Nut for Turbine Wheel
X22CrMoV12-1+QT

49013053415 1,0 Geberscheibe z=27

007 ST TRANSMITTER DISC
42 CRMO 4 V

8.8
4-127341-001 1,0 Buchse

009 ST CROWN GEAR
42CRMO4V

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
41

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Wellendichtung Kond(Auslegungstemp200°C) Z-160766 /DRW/-

SHAFT SEALING
4-180000-026
4-181000-007 1,0 Wellendichtungsgehäuse Kond *

001 ST SHAFT SEAL HOUSING
X20Cr13
4-183000-008 6,0 Kohlering mit Schlauchf. u. Arr. 3

002 ST CARBON RING



24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
45

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Stellventil SS160 DN350 Z-156570 /DRW/A

ADJUSTING VALVE
4-110001-481
4-430000-060 1,0 Stellmotor SS160/90mm (ohne Hubanzeige) *

001 ST SERVO MOTOR
4-114000-326 1,0 Ventilkegel SS-Ventil DN350 3

002 ST TAPER
42CRMO4+QT
4-115450-027 1,0 Ventilspindel SS-Ventil DN350 3

003 ST VALVE SPINDLE
X20Cr13
49021154603 1,0 Führungsbuchse

004 ST GUIDE BUSH
STELLITE 6
4-115300-039 1,0 Stopfbuchse SS-Ventil AFA6 DN350

005 ST GLAND
GS-17CRMO55
4-115520-011 1,0 Ventilkupplung 2-teilig

X20Cr13

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
64

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Stellmotor SS160/90mm (ohne Hubanzeige) Z-161706 /DRW/A

SERVO MOTOR
4-430000-060
4-431000-027 1,0 Regelzylinder für Hub 90mm

001 ST CASING
EN-GJL-250

002 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8

004 ST BUSH
GS CUSN10ZN
00080345149 2,0 O-Ring 1

005 ST O RING
Viton 83 FKM 592
3-803903-002 1,0 Abstreifer ASOB

006 ST STRIPPER
NBR 101
00040510031 2,0 QRAR04214 QUAD-RING 1

007 ST GASKET
NBR/N7004
2-804101-002 1,0 Führungsring FRI

008 ST GUIDE RING
PA 4112

8.8
4-435490-024 1,0 Kolben

010 ST PISTON
42CRMO4+QT
4-435360-014 1,0 Federteller

012 ST SPRING PLATE
C15E

014 ST GUIDE RING
PA 4112
4-437450-017 1,0 Hubbegrenzungshülse

016 ST SLEEVE
42CRMO4+QT
4-434300-031 1,0 Zyl. Schraubenfeder

017 ST SPRING

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
65

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430000-060

018 ST COVER
EN-GJS-400-15
00080345110 7,0 O-RING 1

027 ST O-RING
Viton 83 FKM 592
00080340040 1,0 O-RING 1

028 ST O Ring
72 NBR 872
4-367420-006 1,0 Drossel R200 65Hub

048 ST CHOKE
11SMN30

8.8
4-320001-031 1,0 Überdrehzahlschutz ST800

063 ST OVER SPEED PROTECTION

8.8

steel

steel

steel
3-323101-007 1,0 Verschlussschraube

X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2

075 ST EYEBOLT
23MNNICRMO5-2
2-010023-013 1,0 Messzapfen für Hub 90mm

078 ST SET SCREW
X6CrNiTi18-10

8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
66

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430000-060

ST GAL ZN GLCC
4-367420-041 1,0 Drossel

081 ST CHOKE
5.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
42

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Stellventil R100 DGV bei Pos.200 (DN350) Z-156420 /DRW/A

ADJUSTING VALVE
4-110001-904
4-430002-088 1,0 Stellmotor R100 *

001 ST SERVO MOTOR

X20Cr13
4-115300-037 1,0 Stopfbuchse PN64

009 ST GLAND
GS17CRMO5-5
00080322205 2,0 DICHTUNG 1

011 ST GASKET
NOVAPRESS MULTI
49001173112 11,0 Kohlering 1

012 ST CARBON RING
KOHLE LE 967
49011183520 5,0 Dichtung 1

013 ST GASKET ¢25/40 X 7.5
REINGRAPHIT
49001173112 4,0 Kohlering 1

014 ST CARBON RING
KOHLE LE 967

GGG-40

016 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8.8
4-115520-016 1,0 Ventilkupplung

X20Cr13

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
55

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Stellmotor R100 Z-154196 /DRW/D

SERVO MOTOR
4-430002-088
4-431000-019 1,0 Regelzylinder

001 ST REGULATING CONE
EN-GJS-400-15

002 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8.8
2-010023-003 1,0 Meßzapfen Hub 40

004 ST SET SCREW
X6CrNiTi18-10

8

006 ST BUSH
GS CUSN10ZN
00080345149 2,0 O-Ring 1

007 ST O RING
Viton 83 FKM 592
4-435500-021 1,0 Kolben mit Spindel

008 ST SPINDLE
42CRMO4+QT
00040600555 2,0 Rechteckring KI PT 100/92 x 3 1

009 ST SQUARE SECTION RING
EN-GJL
4-435360-013 1,0 Federteller

010 ST SPRING PLATE
C45
3-803903-001 1,0 Abstreifer 1

011 ST STRIPPER
FKM (VITON)
49004053112 1,0 Rückführzylinder Ø38

013 ST FEEDBACK CYLINDER
10S20+C
3-355902-049 1,0 Spannstift

014 ST SPRING DOWEL PIN
X10CrNi18-8
49004643037 1,0 Zylinderschraubenfeder Ø3,2 DM=47

DRAHT 3,2 B

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
56

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430002-088
00040510011 2,0 QRAR04211 QUAD-RING 1

016 ST GASKET
FP70

017 ST GUIDE RING
HGW HG517
49004643065 1,0 Zylinderschraubenfeder

018 ST Cylindrical helical spring
49004043130 1,0 Regelbuchse

019 ST CONTROL BUSH
EN-GJL-250
00041250066 1,0 Kugel

020 ST BALL
WAELZLAGERSTAHL

8.8

6.8
49004043030 1,0 Regelkolben

025 ST CONTROL PISTON
16 MNCR5+A
49004053801 1,0 Regelkolbenführung

026 ST CONTROL PISTON GUIDE
EN-GJL-250
00040710607 2,0 Sicherungsring für Bohrungen

027 ST CIRCLIP
FED ST

8.8

DRAHT 3,6 VD

030 ST SPRING PLATE
9SMN28+C
00035510202 1,0 Sechskantmutter M12 DIN 985

8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
57

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430002-088
00080345357 1,0 O-RING 1

032 ST O RING
Viton 83 FKM 592
49004613212 1,0 Regelzylinderaufsatz

033 ST CONTROL CYLINDER HEADPIECE
GGG-40

8.8

rubber
00080345294 1,0 O-RING 1

036 ST O-RING
Viton 83 FKM 592

037 ST COVER
EN-GJS-400-15

8.8

039 ST EYEBOLT
23MNNICRMO5-2

steel

U ST 36-2
49013775301 1,0 Gewindestift

048 ST THREADED PIN
14 H
00080701700 1,0 Loctite 243 1

060 ST LOCTITE 243

steel
00080300456 1,0 FLACHDICHTRING FORM A KAMMPROFILIERT 1

063 ST SEALING RING FORM A
ST 30

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
43

WOLF002O

ADJUSTING VALVE
4-110001-905
4-430002-087 1,0 Stellmotor R100 *

001 ST SERVO MOTOR

X20Cr13
4-115300-037 1,0 Stopfbuchse PN64

009 ST GLAND
GS17CRMO5-5
00080322205 2,0 DICHTUNG 1

011 ST GASKET
NOVAPRESS MULTI
49001173112 11,0 Kohlering 1

012 ST CARBON RING
KOHLE LE 967
49011183520 5,0 Dichtung 1

013 ST GASKET ¢25/40 X 7.5
REINGRAPHIT
49001173112 4,0 Kohlering 1

014 ST CARBON RING
KOHLE LE 967

GGG-40

016 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8.8

X20Cr13

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
58

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430002-087

EN-GJS-400-15

002 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8.8
2-010023-003 1,0 Meßzapfen Hub 40

004 ST SET SCREW
X6CrNiTi18-10

8

006 ST BUSH
GS CUSN10ZN
00080345149 2,0 O-Ring 1

007 ST O RING
Viton 83 FKM 592

008 ST SPINDLE
42CRMO4+QT

EN-GJL
4-435360-013 1,0 Federteller

010 ST SPRING PLATE
C45
3-803903-001 1,0 Abstreifer 1

011 ST STRIPPER
FKM (VITON)

10S20+C
3-355902-049 1,0 Spannstift

X10CrNi18-8

015 ST CYLINDRICAL HELICAL SPRING Ø3,2 DM=47
DRAHT 3,2 B

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
59

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430002-087
00040510011 2,0 QRAR04211 QUAD-RING 1

016 ST GASKET
FP70

017 ST GUIDE RING
HGW HG517


019 ST CONTROL BUSH
EN-GJL-250
00041250066 1,0 Kugel

020 ST BALL
WAELZLAGERSTAHL

8.8

6.8

16 MNCR5+A

EN-GJL-250

027 ST CIRCLIP
FED ST

8.8

DRAHT 3,6 VD

030 ST SPRING PLATE
9SMN28+C

8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
60

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430002-087
00080345357 1,0 O-RING 1

032 ST O RING
Viton 83 FKM 592

GGG-40

8.8

rubber
00080345294 1,0 O-RING 1

036 ST O-RING
Viton 83 FKM 592

037 ST COVER
EN-GJS-400-15

8.8

039 ST EYEBOLT
23MNNICRMO5-2

steel

U ST 36-2

048 ST THREADED PIN
14 H
00080701700 1,0 Loctite 243 1

060 ST LOCTITE 243

steel

ST 30

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
44

WOLF002O

ADJUSTING VALVE
4-110001-906
4-430002-088 1,0 Stellmotor R100 *

001 ST SERVO MOTOR

X20Cr13
4-115300-037 1,0 Stopfbuchse PN64

009 ST GLAND
GS17CRMO5-5
00080322205 2,0 DICHTUNG 1

011 ST GASKET
NOVAPRESS MULTI
49001173112 11,0 Kohlering 1

012 ST CARBON RING
KOHLE LE 967
49011183520 5,0 Dichtung 1

013 ST GASKET ¢25/40 X 7.5
REINGRAPHIT
49001173112 4,0 Kohlering 1

014 ST CARBON RING
KOHLE LE 967

GGG-40

016 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8.8

X20Cr13

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
61

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430002-088

EN-GJS-400-15

002 ST STUD BOLT
5.6

8.8
2-010023-003 1,0 Meßzapfen Hub 40

004 ST SET SCREW
X6CrNiTi18-10

8

006 ST BUSH
GS CUSN10ZN
00080345149 2,0 O-Ring 1

007 ST O RING
Viton 83 FKM 592

008 ST SPINDLE
42CRMO4+QT

EN-GJL
4-435360-013 1,0 Federteller

010 ST SPRING PLATE
C45
3-803903-001 1,0 Abstreifer 1

011 ST STRIPPER
FKM (VITON)

10S20+C
3-355902-049 1,0 Spannstift

X10CrNi18-8

DRAHT 3,2 B

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
62

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430002-088
00040510011 2,0 QRAR04211 QUAD-RING 1

016 ST GASKET
FP70

017 ST GUIDE RING
HGW HG517


019 ST CONTROL BUSH
EN-GJL-250
00041250066 1,0 Kugel

020 ST BALL
WAELZLAGERSTAHL

8.8

6.8

16 MNCR5+A

EN-GJL-250

027 ST CIRCLIP
FED ST

8.8

DRAHT 3,6 VD

030 ST SPRING PLATE
9SMN28+C

8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
63

WOLF002O

SERVO MOTOR
4-430002-088
00080345357 1,0 O-RING 1

032 ST O RING
Viton 83 FKM 592

GGG-40

8.8

rubber
00080345294 1,0 O-RING 1

036 ST O-RING
Viton 83 FKM 592

037 ST COVER
EN-GJS-400-15

8.8

039 ST EYEBOLT
23MNNICRMO5-2

steel

U ST 36-2

048 ST THREADED PIN
14 H
00080701700 1,0 Loctite 243 1

060 ST LOCTITE 243

steel

ST 30
Machine 2
2.1.4 Power train
See also
2 Coupling guard - DW-Z-160354 [➙ 93]
2 Kupplungsschutz - PL-4-560020-006 [➙ 94]
2 Gear box - DW-Z-156684 [➙ 95]
2 Gear box - PL-4-230010-166 [➙ 96]
EQUI/900517/000- 2-91
2 Machine
2-92 EQUI/900517/000-

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
37

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 ZSB. Kupplungsschutz Z-160354 /DRW/-

COUPLING GUARD
4-560020-006
4-560020-008 1,0 Kupplungsschutzgestell - 1

1 ST COUPLING GUARD
4-560020-009 1,0 Kupplungsschutzgestell - 2

2 ST COUPLING GUARD - 2
00013010801 0,0 U-Profil

3 ST U-PROFILE
S235JR(ST37-2)
49005073905 4,0 KLOTZ M10

4 ST BLOCK
9SMN28+C

5 ST HEXAGONAL BOLT
8.8
00035870206 4,0 Sicherungsscheibe

6 ST CIRCLIP
spring steel
00010551010 6,0 QUADRATLOCHPLATTE QG (USt 1203)

8 M2 PERFORATED PLATE
DC01

8.8-A0P
00035090002 50,0 Scheibe A

9 ST WASHER / DISC
steel galvanized
00035420959 6,0 SENKSCHRAUBE

10 ST COUNTERSUNK SCREW
4.8
00035830202 6,0 Scheibe B

11 ST WASHER / DISC
steel

12 ST HEXAGONAL NUT
8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
12

WOLF002O
BBF00069/10 Getriebe Twin CFR3"DrG"/AFA6 (4.736.053) Z-156684 /DRW/B

GEAR
4-230010-166
4-324000-027 1,0 Temp-Messeinr.Twin ohne Ex mit Spurlager

010 ST TEMPERATURE MEASURING DEVICE
2-010081-004 1,0 Zsb. Blindflansch

010 ST BLIND FLANGE
2-010021-001 8,0 Verschlußschraube Nacharbeit

011 ST CLOSURE SCREW
4-323000-052 1,0 Lagerbockschwingungsmessung ohne Ex

014 ST BEARING PILLARBLOCK VIBRATION MEASUREMEN
4-231301-075 1,0 Getriebegehäuse 2-tlg. TWIN5

015 ST GEAR HOUSING, 2-PART
EN-GJL-200
00035774054 2,0 STECKKERBSTIFT

016 ST TAPER GROOVED DOWEL PIN
6.8

rubber
4-236010-023 1,0 Drosselstopfen

018 ST THROTTLE
9 SMN 28 K

019 ST THROTTLE
9 SMN 28 K

020 ST THROTTLE
45 H
46102360072 1,0 Getriebeschmierung Twin rechts

022 ST GEARBOX LUBRICATION SYSTEM
46102360006 1,0 Getriebeschmierung Unterteil DR=rechts

023 ST GEARBOX LUBRICATING UNIT,rotation: right
46102360029 1,0 Getriebeschmierung DR=rechts

024 ST GEAR LUBRICATION
00080322199 2,0 DICHTUNG 1

026 ST GASKET
CENTELL.HD WS3822

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
13

WOLF002O

GEAR
4-230010-166

8.8

8.8
49012383203 1,0 Dichtung 1

029 ST GASKET
CENTELLEN WS3820
49012364103 4,0 Spritzdüse

030 ST SPRAYING NOZZLE
ST
4-150000-133 1,0 Halslager Ø60 b/d=0,6 KS TW rechts 3

048 ST Journal Bearing
4-150000-054 1,0 Halslager Ø80 b/d=0.6 KS TW rechts 3

049 ST NECK BEARING
49011552083 1,0 Halslager Ø60 b/d=0.6 KS TW re (exztr.) 3

050 ST JOURNAL BEARING
4-150000-028 1,0 Hals-u. Spurlager Ø70 b/d=0.6 TW KS r/l 3

051 ST JOURNAL AND THRUST BEARING
49011502004 1,0 Zsb.Halslager Ø100 b/d=0.8 GW (exztr.) 3

052 ST Journal Bearing Ø100
4-151000-031 1,0 Hals-u. Spurlager Ø120 b/d=0.8 GW 3

053 ST JOURNAL AND THRUST BEARING
00035710805 6,0 Zylinderstift M6 x 16

055 ST STRAIGHT PIN
steel
4-233100-571 1,0 Getriebewelle/Rad (Druckkamm) 6

056 ST GEAR SHAFT/WHEEL
56NiCrMoV7+QT
4-120002-006 1,0 Zsb.Turbinenläufer CFR3"DrG" 4.736.053 6 *

070 ST ASSY. TURBINE ROTOR
4-120002-007 1,0 Zsb.Turbinenläufer AFA6 4.736.053 6 *

071 ST ASSY. TURBINE ROTOR

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
14

WOLF002O

GEAR
4-230010-166

8.8
00035870253 3,0 SICHERUNGSSCHEIBE S

075 ST CIRCLIP
spring steel
4-294000-065 1,0 Zahnradölpumpe n+ links 6

076 ST TOOTHED GEAR OIL PUMP
00040600704 1,0 Rechteckring 1

EN-GJL
4-241020-041 1,0 Zsb. Antriebsrad 6

078 ST DRIVING WHEEL
42CRMO4+QT

079 ST HEXAGON NUT
ST42KG
4-232320-013 1,0 Ölpumpendeckel

081 ST OIL PUMP COVER
EN-GJL-200

8.8
00035712855 1,0 ZYLINDERSTIFT MIT INNENGEWINDE FORM A

083 ST STRAIGHT PIN
steel
49011674402 1,0 Stift

084 ST PIN
ST 50 K
4-232340-006 2,0 Verschlussdeckel RIW für AX

105 ST SEAL COVER
13CRMO4-5

8.8
00080701700 1,0 Loctite 243 1

107 ST LOCTITE 243
3-416201-002 1,0 Richtungspfeil B

110 ST DIRECTION ARROW
X6CrNiTi18-10

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
15

WOLF002O

GEAR
4-230010-166
00035778108 2,0 HALBRUNDKERBNAGEL

A2
46102323100 1,0 Ölfangdeckel RAW

112 ST OIL CONNECTING COVER
C45E

8.8

115 ST STRAIGHT PIN
steel

116 ST STRAIGHT PIN
steel
46102374402 1,0 Dichtungsring RAW

120 ST SEALING RING
C45E

steel
4-232310-010 1,0 Ölfangdeckel RIW

126 ST Oil collecting cover
C45E
4-232310-009 1,0 Dichtungsring RIW

127 ST Sealing ring
CK 45

8.8
3-357302-007 2,0 Kegelstift

130 ST TAPERED PIN
steel

8
46132323401 1,0 Verschlussdeckel RAW

135 ST COVER
C45E

8.8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
16

WOLF002O

GEAR
4-230010-166
00035250202 6,0 VERSCHLUSS-SCHRAUBE

steel
00080701700 1,0 Loctite 243 1

141 ST LOCTITE 243

ST 30
46132323402 2,0 Verschlussdeckel Inspektion

150 ST COVER
S235JRG2
00035356270 24,0 Sechskantschraube

8.8
00035830301 24,0 Scheibe B

152 ST WASHER / DISC
steel
4-360002-307 1,0 Leckölabführung Ermeto Stahl RIW

155 ST Leak oil piping Ermeto steel RIW
STAHL
4-360002-308 1,0 Leckölabführung Ermeto Stahl RAW

162 ST Leak oil piping Ermeto steel RAW
STAHL

steel

169 ST SEALING RING
ST 30

ST GAL ZN GLCC

170 ST SEALING RING
ST 30
4-470001-160 2,0 Drehzahlgeber (Hall) 3-Leiter 6

170 ST SPEED TRANSMITTER
4-470001-162 2,0 Drehzahlgeber induktiv 6

171 ST SPEED TRANSMITTER

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
17

WOLF002O

GEAR
4-230010-166
49013874403 2,0 Sicherungsblech KKK-NR.34

172 ST LOCKING PLATE
RR ST 1403
3-354203-015 4,0 Kreuzlochschraube

173 ST Cross hole screw
5.8
00041210019 1,0 PLOMBENDRAHT

174 ST LOCKING WIRE
ST ZN(WEICHVERZI)
00041210018 2,0 PLOMBE VG 95 560 A

175 ST LEAD SEAL
BLEI
4-232340-019 1,0 Verschlußdeckel

180 ST SEAL COVER
C45E

8.8

steel

ST 30
4-232310-010 1,0 Ölfangdeckel RIW

183 ST Oil collecting cover
C45E
4-232310-009 1,0 Dichtungsring RIW

184 ST Sealing ring
CK 45

8.8

8.8
3-357302-007 4,0 Kegelstift

187 ST TAPERED PIN
steel

8

24.09.2012
Seite / Page no

L = Liter / Litre
M = Meter / Metre
18

WOLF002O

GEAR
4-230010-166
4-360002-307 1,0 Leckölabführung Ermeto Stahl RIW

188 ST Leak oil piping Ermeto steel RIW
STAHL

steel
Schemes and Lists 3
3 Schemes and Lists
3.1 P & I Diagram
See also
2 P &I schematic - DW-Z-165956 [➙ 3]
EQUI/900517/000- 3-1
3 Schemes and Lists
3-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Schemes and Lists 3
3.2 Interlock Diagram
See also
2 Interlocking schematic - DW-Z-165957 [➙ 7]
EQUI/900517/000- 3-5
3 Schemes and Lists
3-6 EQUI/900517/000-
Verriegelungsplan Siemens Turbomachinery Equipment GmbH
Heßheimer Str. 2
scheme of interlocks D 67227 Frankenthal
Pos. Pos.
56 Filter tauschen / change filter
ein / on Gen. vom Netz trennen / disconnect alt. from mains 100
59.1 Nachkühlpumpe / after cooling pump
aus / off Startfreigabe / permit to start
63.1 Doppelölf. Umschalten / switch oilfilter Schnellschlußeinr. stellt Turbine ab /
14.1/14.2
ein / on overspeed protection unit stops the turbine
59 Elektroölpumpe / electrical oil pump
aus / off Alarm / alarm
Meßgröße Grenzwert Einheit Impuls von
measured variable limit value unit impulse comes from
Elektrischer Überdrehzahlschutz ST800
Drehzahl / speed > 1908 min-1 X X 19.1/19.2
electrical overspeed protection
Not-Halt / emergency off X X X X Bedienpersonal / operating personel
Schmieröldruck < 1,0 bar X Druckschalter / pressure switch 47.1
lube oil pressure < 0,8 bar X X Druckschalter / pressure switch 47.2
Öltemperatur nach Kühler > 52 °C X Widerstandsthermometer PT100

87
oil temperature after cooler > 55 °C X X X resistance thermometer
Niveauüberwachung < min. mm X Niveauschalter

55
oil level control < min. min. mm X X X level switch
Differenzdruck Ölfilter Druckschalter
> 1,8 bar X 64.1
differential pressure oilfilter pressure switch
Druck Ölnebelabscheider Druckmeßumformer
> -2 mbar X X 56.1
pressure oil mist separator pressure transmitter
> 9 und n > 1750 bar / min-1 X Drucküberwachung / pressure control
Steueröldruck 46
< 9 und n < 1750 bar / min-1 X Drehzahlkontakt - Drehzahlregler
operating oil pressure 23
< 9 und n > 1750 bar / min-1 X X speed contact of speed governor
Gehäuseschwingung Turbine > Meßwert/ value +1 max. 3,5 mm/s X Schwingungsüberwachung

34
housing vibration turbine > Meßwert/ value +2 max. 4,5 mm/s X X vibration control
< 51,0 bar X

< 50,0 bar X X
Frischdampfdruck Druckmeßumformer
> 59,0 bar X 27.1
live steam pressure pressure transmitter
> 60,0 bar X X
> 50,0 bar X
< 406 °C X
< 396 °C X X
Frischdampftemperatur Widerstandsthermometer PT100
> 451 °C X 136
live steam temperature resistance thermometer
> 456 °C X X
> 396 °C X
< 3,0 bar X
Entnahmedampfdruck < 2,5 bar X X Druckmeßumformer
27.3
extraction steam pressure > 4,0 bar X pressure transmitter
> 4,5 bar X X
< -0,91 bar X
Abdampfdruck < -0,92 bar X X Druckmeßumformer
27.5
exhaust steam pressure > 0,2 bar X pressure transmitter
> 0,5 bar X X
Differenzdruck CFR3 > 2,0 bar X Differenzdruckmeßumformer
27.2
differential pressure > 2,3 bar X X differential pressure transmitter
Differenzdruck AFA6 > 0,35 bar X Differenzdruckmeßumformer
27.4
differential pressure > 0,40 bar X X differential pressure transmitter
Laufradtemperatur AFA6 > 300 °C X Widerstandsthermometer PT100
85
blade wheel temperature > 310 °C X X resistance thermometer
Lagertemperatur Turbine > Meßwert/ value +10, max. 100 °C X Widerstandsthermometer PT100
84.1-10
bearing temperature turbine > Meßwert/ value +20, max. 110 °C X X resistance thermometer
Lagertemperatur Generator > max. °C X Widerstandsthermometer PT100
110.1-2
bearing temperature alternator > max.max °C X X resistance thermometer
Kühllufttemperatur Generator > max. °C X Widerstandsthermometer PT100
112
cooling air temp. alternator > max.max °C X X resistance thermometer
Wicklungstemperatur > max. °C X Widerstandsthermometer PT100
111.1-3
winding temperature > max.max °C X X resistance thermometer
Niveau Kondensator Niveauschalter
> max X X 138
level steam condenser level switch
Nachkühlen / after cooling
Turbine normal Stop, oder Trip
X SPS / PLC
turbine normal stop or trip
Lagertemperatur Turbine < 80 °C X Widerstandsthermometer PT100
84.1-10
bearing temperature turbine > 90 °C X resistance thermometer
Alle Druckangaben in bar sind Überdrücke !

Pressure indications in bar are gauge values !
Kom. : BBF00069 (4.736.053)
Customer: Procesadora Industrial
Rev Änderung Datum Bearb. Bearb. Gss

Gepr. Rib
Datum 26.04.2012
Dok. Nr. Z-165957
3 Schemes and Lists
3.3 Circuit Diagram
See also
2 0060 -- ___._ -- Control panel - DW-Z-166164 [➙ 9]
2 0063 -- ___._ -- Switch gear panel - DW-Z-166166 [➙ 168]
2 0065 -- 031.0 -- Local panel - DW-Z-166165 [➙ 189]
3-8 EQUI/900517/000-
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Siemens Turbomachinery Equipment GmbH

Siemens Beindersheimer Strasse 2
67227 Frankenthal
TURBINA AMARIO
PROYECTO: Rio Seco Peru
Siemens COMISIÓN NÚMERO: BBF 00069
ELDATEX COMISIÓN NÚMERO: 12-06-033
ÍNDICE DESCRIPCIÓN DEL CAMBIO FECHA NOMBRE

LFD. Nr. ART DER ÄNDERUNG DATUM NAME
0.1 Revision 27.08.2012 M. Freudenberg
1.0 Revision after workshop 12.11.2012 M. Freudenberg
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GERENTE FECHA 11.07.12 D E S C R I P C I Ó N / BEZEICHNUNG
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
PORTADA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
SIEMENS TURBINA AMARIO
+CP1to3
A m R i ngofen 6 D -41334 Nettetal S i emens T urbomachinery Equipment GmbH Rio Seco Peru PÁGINA:
ÍNDICE DESCRIPCIÓN FECHA NOMBRE E LD ATEX NO.: 1
Nr. BESCHREIBUNG DATUM NAME ELDATEX Nr.:
12-06-033 DECKBLATT Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:
1.0 Workshop 12.11.12 MF SIEMENS NO.:

BBF00069
67227 Frankenthal Z-166164 DE:
159
S I E M ENS Nr.: VON:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CONDICIONES AMBIENTALES GABINETE

UMGEBUNGSBEDINGUNGEN SCHALTSCHRANK
PROTECCIÓN X IP 42 IP 54 IP__________ GABINETE TIPO X HOJA DE ACERO ACERO INOXIDABLE

SCHUTZART IP 42 IP 54 IP__________ SCHALTSCHRANKTYP STAHLBLECH EDELSTAHL
VENTANA AL FRENTE DE INT.DE PUERTA X NO SI PINTURA X RAL 7035 RAL__________

FENSTER ÜBER TÜREINBAUTEN NEIN JA LACKIERUNG RAL 7035 RAL__________
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE MIN. 0°C __________°C DIMENSIONES (AN x AL x PR) 2400x2200x600 mm

UMGEBUNGSTEMPERATUR MIN. X 0°C __________°C ABMESSUNG (BxHxT) 2400x2200x600 mm
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE MAX. 40°C __________°C SEPARACIÓN DE TRANSPORTE NO SI

UMGEBUNGSTEMPERATUR MAX. X 40°C __________°C TRANSPORTTRENNUNG X NO JA
HUMEDAD RELATIVA 70% __________% LAS BISAGRAS PUERTA IZQUIERDO/DERECHNA/DERECHNA

X
RELATIVE LUFTFEUCHTIGKEIT 70% __________% TÜRANSCHLAG LINKS/RECHTS/RECHTS
ENTRADA DE CABLE / ACCESORIOS GABINETE GENERAL

SCHALTSCHRANK ALLGEMEIN
KABELEINFÜHRUNG / ZUBEHÖR
PLACA DE IDENTIFICACIÓN ALEMÁN INGLÉS __________
ENTRADA DE CABLE X ABAJO ARRIBA __________ TYPENSCHILD X DEUTSCH ENGLISCH __________
KABELEINFÜHRUNG UNTEN OBEN __________
ETIQUETADO "PUERTA" ALEMÁN INGLÉS ESPAÑOL
CABLE DE MONTAJE X NO SI BRIDA BESCHRIFTUNGSSCHILDER "TÜR" DEUTSCH ENGLISCH X SPANISCH
KABELVERSCHRAUBUNGEN NEIN JA FLANSCH
PLÁSTICO METAL LETRAS SIGNOS "ATORNILLAR" NO SI
X
PLASTIK METALL SCHILDER "GESCHRAUBT" NEIN JA
AMARIO SOCKET SI NO CON RCD DESIGNACIÓN DE ALAMBRE NO SI
X X
SCHALTSCHRANKSTECKDOSE JA NEIN ÜBER FI-SCHALTER ADERBEZEICHNUNG (z: B.: 13/14) NEIN JA
ILUMINACION ARMARIO SI NO ACERCA INT. DE POSICIONES IDENTIFICACIÓN DEL EQUIPO PL. DE MONTAJE EQUIPO
X X X X
SCHALTSCHRANKBELEUCHTUNG JA NEIN ÜBER POSITIONSSCHALTER BETRIEBSMITTELKENNZEICHNUNG MONTAGEPLATTE GERÄT
VENTILADOR DE GABINETE X NO SI THERMOSTATO CABLEADO "SIN HALÓGENOS" X NO SI

SCHALTSCHRANKLÜFTER NEIN JA THERMOSTAT VERDRAHTUNG "HALOGENFREI" NEIN JA
CALEFACCIÓN DE GABINETE X NO SI THERMOSTATO CABLEADO "ESTAÑADO VETAS" X NO SI

SCHALTSCHRANKHEIZUNG NEIN JA THERMOSTAT VERDRAHTUNG "VERZINNTE ADERN" NEIN JA
AIRE ACONDICIONADO X NO SI CONTROLADOR DE TEMPERATURA CLIPS DE PRENSA PARA SENSORES X NO SI

KLIMAANLAGE NEIN JA TEMPERATUR-REGLER TRENNKLEMMEN FÜR SENSOREN NEIN JA
IDENTIFICACIÓN DE LA PLANTA Y LA UBICACIÓN

ANLAGEN- UND ORTSKENNUNG
=TC CONTROL DE LA TURBINA =TU TURBINA =CB DISYUNTOR GENERADOR

=TC TURBINENSTEUERUNG =TU TURBINE =CB GENERATORSCHALTER
+CP1to3 ARMARIO DE CONTROL ARMARIO DE 1 A 3 +LP01 UNIDAD DE CONTROL LOCAL 01 +01 AMARIO 1
+CP1to3 STEUERSCHRANK 1 BIS STEUERSCHRANK 3 +LP01 ÖRTLICHE BEDIENEINHEIT 01 +01 SCHRANK 1
+JB100 CAJA DE BORNES 100

+EXT CONEXIÓN EXTERNA DESCONOCIDO +JB100 KLEMMKASTEN 100
+EXT UNBEKANNTER EXT. ANSCHLUSS
+GENO GENERADOR
+GENO GENERATOR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
INFORMACIÓN GENERAL ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 ALLGEMEINE INFORMATIONEN Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MATERIAL / EQUIPO
MATERIAL / SCHALTGERÄTE
GABINETE TIPO X RITTAL TS _____________

SCHALTSCHRANKTYP RITTAL TS _____________
CAJA DE TERMINALES / UNIDAD DE CONTROL RITTAL AE _____________
KLEMMKÄSTEN/BEDIENPULTE RITTAL AE _____________
CANALES DE CABLEADO X ABB _____________
VERDRAHTUNGSKANÄLE ABB _____________
INTERRUPTORES SCHNEIDER _____________
LEISTUNGSSCHALTER X SCHNEIDER _____________
MCC PANEL SCHNEIDER TYPE OKKEN
GABINETE MEDIA TENSIÓN ABB ZS8 ZS1 UniGear
MITTELSPANNUNGSANLAGE ABB ZS8 ZS1 UniGear
CONTACTORES SCHNEIDER _____________
X
LEISTUNGSSCHÜTZE SCHNEIDER _____________
PROTECCIÓN DE MOTOR X SCHNEIDER _____________
MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER SCHNEIDER _____________
FUSIBLE AUTOMÁTICO SCHNEIDER _____________
X
SICHERUNGSAUTOMATEN SCHNEIDER _____________
RELÉ AUXILIAR X FINDER X PHOENIX (SIL)
STEUERRELAIS FINDER PHOENIX (SIL)
RELÉS DE TIEMPO FINDER _____________
ZEITRELAIS X FINDER _____________
INTERRUPTORES DE CONTROL X SONTHEIMER _____________
STEUERSCHALTER SONTHEIMER _____________
LÁMPARAS / BOTÓN SCHNEIDER _____________
LAMPEN / TASTER X SCHNEIDER _____________
MATERIAL TERMINAL WEIDMÜLLER _____________
X
KLEMMEN WEIDMÜLLER _____________
MPC SIEMENS _____________
SPS X SIEMENS _____________
PANTALLA TÁCTIL SIEMENS _____________
X
TOUCH-PANEL SIEMENS _____________
PROTECCIÓN DE GENERADOR X WOODWARD/SEG SIEMENS X DEIF
GENERATORSCHUTZ WOODWARD/SEG SIEMENS DEIF
SINCRONIZACIÓN DEIF _____________
X
SYNCHRONISATION DEIF _____________
INDICADORES / MEDICIÓN X DEIF _____________
ANZEIGEN/MESSUNG DEIF _____________
AISLAMIENTO DEL AMPLIFICADOR MARTENS _____________
TRENNVERSTÄRKER X MARTENS _____________
CARGADORES DE BATERIÁS DSL X WOODWARD/SEG _____________
BATTERIELADEGERÄT DSL WOODWARD/SEG _____________
CONVERTIDORES DE FRECUENCIA DANFOSS _____________
FREQUENZUMRICHTER DANFOSS _____________
ARRANCADORES SUAVES SCHNEIDER SIEMENS _____________
X
SOFTSTARTER SCHNEIDER SIEMENS _____________
SURGE LA PROTECCIÓN DEHN _____________
ÜBERSPANNUNGSSCHUTZ DEHN _____________
BARRAS DEL SISTEMA WÖHNER _____________
X
SCHIENENSYSTEM WÖHNER _____________
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
MATERIAL ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 MATERIAL Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
COLOR DE LOS CONDUCTORES / SECCIÓN TRANSVERSAL

ADERFARBEN / QUERSCHNITT
VOLTAJE ALERNA 230/400 VAC NEGRITO ____________ MIN. 1,5 mm² ____________
X X
WECHSELSPANNUNG 230/400 VAC SCHWARZ ____________ MIN. 1,5 mm² ____________
NEUTRAL CONDUCCIÓN N AZUL ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________

NEUTRALLEITER N X HELLBLAU ____________ X MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
PROTECCIÓN CONDUCCIÓN X VERDE-AMARILLO ____________ X MIN. 1,5 mm² ____________

SCHUTZLEITER GRÜNGELB ____________ MIN. 1,5 mm² ____________
VOLTAGE DE CONTROL +24VDC X AZUL MARINO ____________ X MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
STEUERSPANNUNG +24VDC DUNDELBLAU ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
VOLTAGE DE CONTROL -24VDC AZUL MARINO ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
X X
STEUERSPANNUNG -24VDC DUNDELBLAU ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
VOLTAGE DE CONTROL +24VDC (PLC CABLEADO) AZUL MARINO ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
X X
STEUERSPANNUNG +24VDC (SPS-VERDRAHTUNG) DUNDELBLAU ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
VOLTAGE DE CONTROL -24VDC (PLC CABLEADO) AZUL MARINO ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
STEUERSPANNUNG -24VDC (SPS-VERDRAHTUNG) X DUNDELBLAU ____________ X MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
TENSIÓN CONTROL <60V AC DESPUÉS DE TRANSFORMADOR IMPUESTOS GRIS ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
STEUERSPANNUNG <60VAC NACH STEUERTRAFO X GRAU ____________ X MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
TENSIÓN CONTROL >60V AC DESPUÉS DE TRANSFORMADOR IMPUESTOS X RUBICUNDO ____________ X MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
STEUERSPANNUNG >60VAC NACH STEUERTRAFO ROT ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
TENSIÓN CONTROL 230VAC (SIN DE TRANSFORMADOR IMPUESTOS) X NEGRITO ____________ X MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
STEUERSPANNUNG 230VAC PHASE (OHNE STEUERTRAFO) SCHWARZ ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
TENSIÓN CONTROL 230VAC N (SIN DE TRANSFORMADOR IMPUESTOS) AZUL ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
X X
STEUERSPANNUNG 230VAC N (OHNE STEUERTRAFO) HELLBLAU ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
MEDICIÓN (DC CONVERTER) (L1/L2/L3/N) MARRON/NEGRITO/GRIS/AZUL ____________ MIN. 1,5 mm² ____________
X X
MESSUNG (SPANNUNGSWANDLER (L1/L2/L3/N) BRAUN/SCHWARZ/GRAU/BLAU ____________ MIN. 1,5 mm² ____________
MEDICIÓN (CT) GRIS ____________ MIN. 2,5 mm² MIN. 4,0²

MESSUNG (STROMWANDLER X GRAU ____________ MIN. 2,5 mm² X MIN. 4,0²
MEDICIÓN (0/4-20mA; 0/2-10V) GRIS ____________ MIN. 0,75 mm² ____________

MESSUNG (0/4-20mA; 0/2-10V) X GRAU ____________ X MIN. 0,75 mm² ____________
VOLTAJE EXTERNA X ORANGE ____________ X MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________

FREMDSPANNUNG / POT.-FREIE MELDUNGEN ORANGE ____________ MIN. 1,0 mm² ____________
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
INFORMATCIÓN SOBRE
EL CABLEADO
ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 ADERFARBEN Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
ÍNDICE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 INHALTSVERZEICHNIS Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
ÍNDICE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 RESERVE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
65 65 65
30
30
30
+CP1 +CP2 +CP3
2200
2100
2000
1900
1800 MP277 35
1 2 3 4 5
WOODWARD 505
1700
24
50
6 7 8 9 10 36
1600
..
1500 11 12 13 14 15 ..
16 17 18 19 20 25 26 27 28 37 38 39 40 41
1400
1300 23 29 30 31 32 42 43 44 45 46
22 21
1200
33 47 48
G
1100
49
34
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
600
500
0 400
300
200
100
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
0
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
AMARIO VISTA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 SCHRANKANSICHT Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
1 = 22P3 GERNERADOR DE CORRIENTE L1 50 = 53A2 SIPART DR22 1 = 22P3 GENERATOR STROM L1 50 = 53A2 SIPART DR22
2 = 22P3.1 GERNERADOR DE CORRIENTE L2 2 = 22P3.1 GENERATOR STROM L2
3 = 22P4 GERNERADOR DE CORRIENTE L3 3 = 22P4 GENERATOR STROM L3
4 = 22P5 GENERADOR Kvar 4 = 22P5 GENERATOR Kvar
5 = 22P5.1 GENERADOR kW 5 = 22P5.1 GENERATOR kW
6 = 25P2 VOLTAJE GENERADOR/LA RED 6 = 25P2 GENERATOR/NETZ SPANNUNG
7 = 25P4 FRECUENCIA GENERADOR/ LA RED 7 = 25P4 GENERATOR/NETZ FREQUENZ
8 = 25P7 SYCNRONOSCOPE 8 = 25P7 SYNCHRONOSCOPE
9 = 24P1 REGIMEN TURBINA 9 = 24P1 TURBINE DREHZAHL
10 = 38P3 24 VDC VOLTAJE DE CONTROL 10 = 38P3 24VDC STEUERSPANNUNG
11 = 25S1 VOLTIMETRO CONMUTADOR GENERADOR 11 = 25S1 VOLTMETERUMSCHALTER GENERATOR
12 = 27S7 ADJUSTE DE VOLTAJE 12 = 27S7 SPANNUNGSVERSTELLUNG
13 = 33S8.1 MANUALMENTE SINCRONIZACION 13 = 33S8.1 MANUELLE SYNCHRONISATION
14 = 54S1 ADJUSTE DE LA VELOCIDAD 14 = 54S1 DREHZAHLVERSTELLUNG
15 = 90H0 CUERNO 15 = 90H0 HUPE
16 = 25S3 VOLTIMETRO CONMUTADOR LA RED 16 = 25S3 VOLTMETERUMSCHALTER NETZ
17 = 54S4 LA SELECCION ARMARIO/OPERDAOR ATRIL/SALA DE CONTROL 17 = 54S4 AUSWAHL TURBINENSTEUERSCHRANK/ÖRTLICHE BEDIENEINHEIT/WARTE
18 = 33S8 SINCRONIZACION M/0/A 18 = 33S8 SYNCHRONISATION MAN/O/AUTO
19 = 54S9 PREPARACION INICIO 19 = 54S9 STARTVORBEREITUNG
20 = 54S5 TURBINA START/0/STOP 20 = 54S5 TURBINE START/0/STOP
21 = 22A2 GENERADOR MEDICION/SINCRONIZACION 21 = 22A2 GENERATOR MESSUNG/SYNCHRONISATION
22 = 34H6 INDICADOR DE POSICION DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 22 = 34H6 GENERATOR POSITIONSANZEIGE
23 = 34S1 LIBERAR DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 23 = 34S1 GENERATORSCHALTERFREIGABE
24 = 60A1 OPERADOR PANEL 24 = 60A1 TOUCHPANEL
25 = 112H3 BOMBA DE ACEITE EN FUNCIONAMIENTO 25 = 112H3 ÖLPUMPE LÄUFT
26 = 113H4 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO EN FUNCIONAMIENTO 26 = 113H4 NACHKÜHLPUMPE LÄUFT
27 = 115H2 NIEBLA DE ACEITE SEPARADOR EN FUNCIONAMIENTO 27 = 115H2 ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER LÄUFT
28 = 119H4 GENERADOR DE CALENTADOR EN FUNCIONAMIENTO 28 = 119H4 GENERATORHEIZUNG LÄUFT
29 = 103S3 BOMBA DE ACEITE MAN/O/AUTO 29 = 103S3 ÖLPUMPE MAN/O/AUTO
30 = 103S8 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO MAN/O/AUTO 30 = 103S8 NACHKÜHLPUMPE MAN/O/AUTO
31 = 104S3 NIEBLA DE ACEITE SEPARADOR MAN/O/AUTO 31 = 104S3 ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER MAN/O/AUTO
32 = 119S3 GENERADOR DE CALENTADOR MAN/O/AUTO 32 = 119S3 GENERATORHEIZUNG MAN/O/AUTO
33 = 42S9 RECONOCIMIENTO EMERGENCIA STOP 33 = 42S9 RESET NOT-AUS
34 = 41S1 EMERGENCIA STOP 34 = 41S1 NOT-AUS
35 = 45A0 REGULADOR DE VELOCIDAD 35 = 45A0 DREHZAHLREGLER
36 = 44A2 CONTROLADOR DE NIVEL 36 = 44A2 JUMO REGLER
37 = 111H8 CONDENSADOR EN FUNCIONAMIENTO 37 = 111H8 KONDENSATOR EIN
38 = 116H1 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 1 EN FUNCIONAMIENTO 38 = 116H1 KONDENSATPUMPE 1 LÄUFT
39 = 116H5 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 2 EN FUNCIONAMIENTO 39 = 116H5 KONDENSATPUMPE 2 LÄUFT
40 = 117H1 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 EN FUNCIONAMIENTO 40 = 117H1 VAKUUMPUMPE 1 LÄUFT
41 = 117H5 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 EN FUNCIONAMIENTO 41 = 117H5 VAKUUMPUMPE 2 LÄUFT
42 = 102S5 CONDENSADOR MAN/O/AUTO 42 = 102S5 KONDENSATOR MAN/O/AUTO
43 = 104S8 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 1 MAN/O/AUTO 43 = 104S8 KONDENSATPUMPE 1 MAN/O/AUTO
44 = 106S3 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 2 MAN/O/AUTO 44 = 106S3 KONDENSATPUMPE 2 MAN/O/AUTO
45 = 105S6 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 MAN/O/AUTO 45 = 105S6 VAKUUMPUMPE 1 MAN/O/AUTO
46 = 106S1 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 MAN/O/AUTO 46 = 106S1 VAKUUMPUMPE 2 MAN/O/AUTO
47 = 106S6 PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 47 = 106S6 VORWAHL KONDENSATPUMPE
48 = 106S8 PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE VACÍO 48 = 106S8 VORWAHL VAKUUMPUMPE
49 = 16S1 INTERRUPTOR PRINCIPAL 49 = 16S1 HAUPTSCHALTER
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
Nr. BESCHREIBUNG DATUM NAME ELDATEX Nr.: 12-06-033 SCHRANKANSICHT Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2200
2100
PLC 24VDC FUENTE
DE ALIMENTACIÓN
2000
1900
MCB RED / AUTOMÁTICO AUTOMÁTICO VOLTAJE DE

1800 TENSIÓN DEL TAE FUSIBLE DE FUSIBLE LA BATERIA
GENERADOR EN-MEDICIÓN 24VDC MONITOR
1700
1600 RELÉS DE CONTROL

C. B CONTACTORES DE CONTROL
1500
1400 C. B RELÉS DE CONTROL/PROTECCIÓN RELÉS DE CONTROL
1300 AUTOMÁTICO
FUSIBLE CANTACTORES
230VAC
1200 CONTACTORES DE SINCRONISATION RELÉS DE CONTROL
1100
BARRAS SISTEMA
GPU/POTENCIOMETRO/AISLAMIENTO AUXILIAR DE UNIDADES /
1000 DEL AMPLIFICADOR/PARADA CONTACTORES DE CANTACTORES 460VAC ENTRANTE
DE EMERGENCIA RELAY/SIL-RELAY PROTECCIÓN DE CONTROL
900
800
ARRANCADOR
700
BORNES
BORNES
BORNES
BORNES
BORNES
BORNES
BORNES
BORNES
BORNES
BORNES
600
500
N PE
400
300
200
100
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
0
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
AMARIO INTERIOR VISTA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 SCHRANKINNENANSICHT Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
9
=CB
CSQ3 GPU XN2-1
V/V Hz/Hz SY SP FA SA AS U>< F>< VS
460V/10 A
GPU XI1-1 XP2-R
A A A cos KW Kvar I> I>> P-Rev
460V/10 A
+GENO
1108 kVA
G 886 kW
460 V
3 1391 A
60 Hz
0,5Fs5 1500/1A/15VA
10P10 1500/1A/15VA
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
MEDICIÓN RESENTACIÓN ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 EINLINIENDARSTELLUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UPS.230V.L
UPS.230V.N 35.0
35.0
2 4 6 13 21
-15Q1 I >I >I >

14 22
43.1
16A 1 3 5
-X01
3 4
2 4
-16K8
1 3
-X01 -X01
1 2 PE 5 6 PE
-W-X01-1 -W-X01-5
3G4² 1 2 PE 3G4² 1 2 PE
NYM-J NYM-J
+SAI +EXT
-X L N PE -X L N PE
TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI SALIDA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI
VERBRAUCHERSPANNUNG USV ABGANG VERBRAUCHERSPANNUNG USV
230 V / 60 Hz / MIN. 20 A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 VERBRAUCHERSPANNUNG USV Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V.L1
112.0
V.L2 112.0
V.L3
112.0
1 3 5 13 21 V.L1.1
V.N 119.0
119.0
-XV -16Q3 I >I >I >
14 22
L1 L2 L3
43.1
14A 2 4 6
1 3 5 13 21
-X05 -16Q5 I >I >I >

14 22
27 28 29 PE
43.1
2,0A 2 4 6
T1 T2 T3 14 12
-16S1
160A L1 L2 L3 11 Xpri L1 L3
16.8
L+1
-16T3 21.0
Upri = 460V
Usek = 230V -16F5 L1 L2 L3 N 11 21 13
S = 3000VA
Xsek L1 N 70 %
U< U> -42K2
U< 14
DSL
ASW503-G001
%
12 14 22 24 U>
-X05
30 31 PE
11
-16S1
1 14 12
14 12
-16F3
2 11
C10A
43.1
A1
A1
-16K6 -16K8
-16S1 -X05 A2 A2
L1 L2 L3 N PE 32 33 PE
M
-W-16S1 -W-X01-32 21.0
5G25² 1 2 3 4 PE 5G25² 1 2 3 14 1 2 15.1
NYM-J NYM-J 12 11 3 4
99.0 15.1
24 5 6
22 21 13 14
99.0
+EXT +EXT 34
-X - - - - PE -X - - - 32 31
44
TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SALIDA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR 42 41
VERBRAUCHERSPANNUNG ABGANG VERBRAUCHERSPANNUNG
460V / 50Hz / min. 100A 230V / 50Hz / MAX. 20A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
TENSIÓN AUXILIAR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 VERBRAUCHERSPANNUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MUS1 22.0
MUS2
MVS1 22.0
22.0
MVS2 22.0
MWS1
MWS2 22.0
22.0
SUS1 27.0
SUS2
SVS1 27.0
27.0
SVS2 27.0
SWS1
SWS2 27.0
27.0
-X03 -X03
1 2 3 4 5 6 PE 7 8 9 10 11 12 PE
-W-X03-1 -W-X03-7 +GENO

7x2,5² 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE 7x2,5² 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE
N2XH N2XH
+GENO +GENO
-X5 4 1 5 2 6 3 -X5 10 7 11 8 12 9
S1 S2 S1 S2
L1 18.0
U
S1 S2 S1 S2
V
S1 S2 S1 S2 G L2
L3
18.0
W 18.0
CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR MEDICIÓN CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR PROTECCIÓN
GENERADOR
STROMWANDLER MESSUNG STROMWANDLER SCHUTZ
1500/1A 15VA 0,5Fs5 1500/1A 15VA 10P10 GENERATOR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 STROMWANDLER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
G.L1
22.0
G.L2 22.0
G.L3
G.N 22.0
N.L1
20.0
N.L2 20.0
N.L3
20.0
2 4 6 2 4 14 12 2 4 6
13 21 13 21
-18F2
-18Q1 I >I >I >
14 22
1 3 11 -18Q5 I >I >I >
14 22
43.1 B10A
43.1
43.1
2,5A 1 3 5 2,5A 1 3 5
-X02 -X02 -X02

1 2 3 4 PE 5 6 PE 7 8 9 10 PE
-W-X02-1 -W-X02-5 -W-X02-7
5x2,5² 1 2 3 4 PE 3G2,5² 1 2 PE 5x2,5² 1 2 3 4 PE =CB
N2XH H05VV-F N2XH
=CB 11.1
=CB 11.1
=CB 11.1
=CB 11.1
=CB 11.2
=CB 11.3
=CB 11.3
=CB 11.3
=CB 11.8
=CB 11.8
=CB 11.8
=CB 11.9
=CB 11.9
=CB =CB
+01 1 2 3 4 PE 5 6 PE +01 7 8 9 10 PE
-X02 -X02
e n
=CB =CB
+01 +01
-11T1 -11T8
L1 L1
17.9
17.9 L2 L2
L3 L3
17.9
GENERADOR VOLTAJE VOLTAJE LA RED
GENERATORSPANNUNG INTERRUPTOR DE GENERADOR NETZSPANNUNG
0,46 0,4 0,4 0,46 0,4 0,4
/ / kV GENERATORSCHALTER / / kV
3 3 3 3 3 3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
TRANSFORMADOR DE TENSIÓN ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 SPANNUNGSWANDLER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to4

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
N.L1 N.L1
18.9 N.L2 N.L2 22.0
18.9 22.0
18.9 N.L3 N.L3 22.0
11 12 14 5 kOhm
1 3 5 11
4 W
-49K0 -33K5 -33K1 -20R5
2 4 6
-33K4
12 14 11 1 2 3
12 14
13
-49K0
14
-X20
1 2 3 4 PE 5 6 7 8 PE 9 10 11 12 PE 13 14 15 PE
-W-X20-1 -W-X20-5 -W-X20-9 -W-X20-13

3G2,5² 1 2 5G2,5² 1 2 3 4 4G2,5² 1 2 3 Sh 3G2,5² 1 2
H05VV5-F H05VV5-F H05VVC4V5-K H05VV5-F
+GENO +GENO +GENO +GENO

-X 15 16 -X 4 14 54 55 -X 9 11 10 PE -X 400 0
EXCITACIÓN COS PHI REGULADORES SALDO VOLTAJE COS PHI REGULADORES VOLTAJE LA RED
DE LAS
ERREGUNG SPANNUNGSABGLEICH COS PHI REGELUNG NETZSPANNUNG
COS PHI REGLER EIN
AVR MARK 1 M40FA640A MS0FA400A
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
CONTROL DE GENERADOR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 GENERATORSTEUERUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+1 L+1
16.9 22.0
16.9 M M 22.0
11
-34K9
1=REDUCIR
2=AUMENTAR 12 14
11 11 21 21 1=TIEFER
2=HÖHER 2/4
1
0
2
-21K7 -21K8 -21K7 -21K8
-21S7
12 14 12 14 22 24 22 24
1 3
SU+
SU- 23.0
23.0
24 22 34 32
31
CW COM
-21R1 -21K7 -33K7 -33K7
21.7
21 31
21.8 32 34
M 41 41
31
-21K8 -21K7
-21K8 42 44 42 44
32 34
100 kOhm -21R1 -21R1

2W COM COM
A E
1 2 3
NO NO
-X20 A1 A1
16 17 18 19 PE -21K7 -21K8
A2 A2
-W-X20-16
4G2,5² 1 2 Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
+GENO 14 14
-X P Q PE 12 11 12 11
21.1 21.2
24 24
22 21 22 21
REGULAR LA VOLTAJE 34 21.3 34 21.4
32 31 21.4 32 31 21.4
SPANNUNGSVERSTELLUNG 44 44
42 41 21.8 42 41 21.7
VOLTAJE / SPANNUNG
AUMENTAR REDUCIR
TIEFER HÖHER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
CONTROL DE GENERADOR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 GENERATORSTEUERUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0-1500/3000 A 0-1200 Kvar 0-1200 kW
-22P3 -22P3.1 -22P4 -22P5 -22P5.1

A A A kvar kW
1 2 1 2 1 2 + - + -
17.9 MUS2 PEW258+ 51.7

MUS1
17.9 PEW258- 78.3
17.9 MVS2 PEW258S

MVS1 51.7
17.9
MWS2
17.9 MWS1
17.9
L+1 L+1
21.9 23.0
-22A2 6 9 12 15 3
1 73 74 75 76 77 78 96 95 92 91
23.1
Deif GPU
Profibus DP
2 79 81 83 84 85 87 89 88 29 31 32 34
B A B A 7 5 10 8 13 11 16 14 4
DP
61.0
G.L1 G.L1
18.9 25.0
18.9 G.L2 G.L2 25.0
G.L3 G.L3
18.9 25.0
N.L1 N.L1
20.9 N.L2 N.L2 25.0
20.9 25.0
N.L3 N.L3
20.9 25.0
A1 A1
-22K7 -22K9
A2 A2
M M
21.9 23.0
14 14
12 11 12 11 99.9
24 24
22 21 22 21
34 34
32 31 32 31
44 44
42 41 42 41
GPU FAULT
GPU FEHLER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
MEASURING GENERATOR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 MESSUNG GENERATOR Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
22.9 L+1 L+1 31.0

11
-34K8
12 14
11 11
-93K5 -90K4
12 14 12 14
A1 A1
-23K5 -23K6
A2 A2
-22A2
CB off CB on n+ n- Start Alarm Alarm
26 27 20 21 25 Synchr. 24 ACK 23 Inhibit
U- U+ Syn
28
5 6 8 9 18 19 17 22 37 38 39
21.9 SU-
SU+ SY1
21.9 SY2 33.8
33.8
11 11
-23K6 -23K5
12 14 12 14
SF+
SF- 54.0
54.0
M M
22.9 26.0
14 14
12 11 12 11
23.8 23.7
24 24
22 21 22 21
34 34
32 31 32 31
44 44
42 41 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
SYNCHRONIZING ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 SYNCHRONISATION Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
REGIMEN TURBINA
TURBINENDREHZAHL
0 - 1950 rpm P & I POS. 38.1
-24P1 RIA251 =TU RIA251

+LP01
1 2 3 4 -13P1 1 2 3 4
=TU 13.1
=TU 13.1
=TU 13.1
=TU 13.1
=TU
+LP01 1 2 S PE
-X49
-W-X49-1
2x1,5² 1 2 Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
-X49
1 2 S PE
TBSS 52.0
TBS-
TBS+ 52.0
52.0
PEW256S 52.0
PEW256+
Rpm- 78.0
52.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
TURBINE SPEED ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 TURBINENDREHZAHL Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0-500V 0-500V 2x 55-65Hz

Synchronoskop
-25P2 -25P4
V1 V2 Hz1 Hz2 -25P7
5
6
1
2
5 2 51 21 1 2 51 52
3
4
33.8
L1 L2
L2 L3
L3 L1
L1 L2
L2 L3
L3 L1
0
0
-25S1 1 7 -25S3 1 7
2 6 4
2 6 4
G.L1 G.L1
22.9 G.L2 G.L2
22.9 28.0
22.9 G.L3 G.L3 28.0
N.L1 N.L1
22.9 N.L2 N.L2 26.0
22.9 26.0
22.9 N.L3 N.L3 26.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
MEASURING VOLTAGE/FREQUENCY ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 MESSUNG SPANNUNG/FREQUENZ Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+2 L+2
26.9 27.0
PANEL
PC X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIP-
-26F1 SWITCH 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
A2 A1 A3 11 21
L+ L- L~ Uf 85 % 115 % 40 %
U
XN2-1 U</Un U>/Un UB>/Un
97,5 % 101 % 7° -26X6

L1 L2 L3 N 12 14 22 24 f 1 2
f</fn f>fn
-26X6
4 5
11
-26K7
12 14
A1 A1
A1 A1 A1
-26K1 -26K2 -26K3 -26K7 -26K8
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
23.9 M M 27.0
25.9 N.L1
N.L2
25.9 N.L3
25.9
13 14 36.2 14 13 14 98.2 14 14
21 22 12 11 21 22 12 11 12 11
33 34 24 33.1 33 34 36.1 24 26.8 24 33.2
98.1 34.3
43 44 34.3 22 21 43 44 22 21 36.1 22 21 34.3
34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31
34.3
44 44 44
42 41 42 41 42 41
DIP- 1 2 3 4 5
Switch 0 0 1 0 0
VOLTAJE/FRECUENZA LA RED FISURA VECTOR ISLA DE OPERACION SIN INTERUPCION
NETZ SPANNUNG/FREQUENZ VEKTORSPRUNG INSELBESTRIEB OHNE UNTERBRECHUNG

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
PROTECTION LA RED ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 NETZSCHUTZ Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+2 L+2
26.9 28.0
26.9 M M 28.0
PANEL
PC X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIP-
SWITCH 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
1
-27F3 A2 A1 11 21
L+ L- I> I>> sec
I>
XI1-I-1 x I x I tI>
sec
1S1 1S2 2S1 2S2 3S1 3S2 12 14 22 24 I>>
I1 I2 I3 x I x I tI>>
A1 A1
-27K5 -27K6
A2 A2
SUS1 SUS1
17.9 28.0
17.9 SUS2 SUS2 28.0
SVS1
17.9 SVS2
17.9
17.9 SWS1
SWS2
17.9
13 14 34.1 13 14 34.1
21 22 21 22
33 34 33 34
43 44 98.3 43 44 98.4
SOBRECORRIENTE CORTOCIRCUITO
ÜBERSTROM KURZSCHLUSS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
SOBRECARGA/CORTECIRCUITO ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 KURZSCHLUSSSCHUTZ Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
27.9 L+2 L+2 30.0
M M
27.9 30.0
PANEL
PC X
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DIP-
SWITCH 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
-28F2 A2 A1 A3 11 21
L+ L- L~
PR> P> PR> 0 % 1 % 5 sec
XP2-R PR>/Pn PR>/Pn tPR>
U I1 60 % 16 % 10 sec
1L 2L 1S1 1S2 12 14 22 24 P>
P>/Pn P>/Pn tP>
A1 A1
-28K4 -28K5
A2 A2
G.L2 G.L2
25.9
25.9 G.L3 G.L3
27.9 SUS1
SUS2
27.9
13 14 34.1 13 14 34.1
21 22 21 22
33 34 33 34
98.5 98.6
43 44 43 44
MOTORRIZACION
DEL GENERADOR SOBRECARGA
RÜCKLEISTUNG ÜBERLAST
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
MOTORRICACIOIN DEL GENERADOR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 RÜCKLEISTUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+2 L+2
28.9 39.0
-X80
34
+Ext
-X _
EXTERIOR DE FALLA
EXTERNE STÖRUNG
+Ext
-X _
-X80
35 PE
A1
-30K7
A2
M M
28.9 31.0
13 14 34.1
21 22
33 34 99.4
43 44
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
EXTERIOR DE FALLA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 EXTERNE STÖRUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
23.9 L+1 L+1 33.0
M M
30.9 33.0
-31A2 -31A6
Pepperl & Fuchs Pepperl & Fuchs
KFU8-CRG2-EX1.D KFD2-GUT-EX1.D
+23 +23
24VDC 24VDC
-24 -24
TEMP.85-1
+1 +1 80.7
TEMP.85-2
-2 IN PT100 2 80.7
IN 4...20 mA VIB.IN TEMP.85-3
+3 80.0 3 80.7
-7 VIB.OUT- 80.0 -7 TEMP.85.OUT- 80.7

OUT 4...20 mA OUT 4...20 mA
+8 VIB.OUT+ 80.0 +8 TEMP.85.OUT+ 80.7
10 10
RELAY 11 RELAY 11 56.3

56.3
OUT I OUT I
12 12
16 16
RELAY 17 RELAY 17
OUT II OUT II
18 18
EVALUACIÓN DE TRANSMISIÓN VIBRACIÓN TEMPERATURA DE TURBINA DE RODETE

AUSWERTUNG GETRIEBESCHWINGUNG TEMPERATUR TURBINE LAUFRAD
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
EVALUACIÓN DE
VIBRACIÓN / TEMPERATURA
ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 AUSWERTUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069 VIBRATION / TEMPERATUR 67227 Frankenthal Z-166164 DE:
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+1 L+1
31.9 34.0
Auto
Man
2/4
0
11 11 21
-34K7 -36K7 -34K7 -33S8

12 14 12 14 22 24 1 3
13 51 21
-34K4 -36K1 -36K8 13
14 52 -33S8.1
22 24 14
11 21
SY1
23.9
-36K8 -34K9 SY2
23.9
12 14 22 24
3
11 11
-25P7
-26K2 -26K8
4
12 14 12 14
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-33K1 -33K2 -33K4 -33K5 -33K7 -33K8 -33K9
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
M M
31.9 34.0
14 14 14
14 14 14 14 12 11 12 11 12 11
12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 97.5 34.5 97.6
24 20.5 24 24 20.3 24 20.4 24 24 24
22 21 22 21 22 21
22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 21.7 36.6
34 99.7 34 34 36.1 34 46.3 34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31
32 31 32 31 32 31 47.3 32 31 110.3 44 21.8 44 44
44 44 44 44
42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41
LISTO PARA LA SINCRONIZACIÓN PARALELO LA RED SINCRONIZACIÓN

BEREIT ZUM SYNCHRONISIEREN PARALLEL ZUM NETZ SYNCHRONISATION
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
SINCRONIZACIÓN ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 SYNCHRONISATION Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
33.9 L+1 L+1 36.0

LP LP
34.9 39.0
OFF 23
ON
2/4
-34K4
24
-34S1
1 3
13 11 21 -X10
14 1
-27K5 -33K8 -34K8
14 -36K1 -W-X10-1
13 5G2,5² 1
14 12 14 22 24
H05VV5-F
43
=CB 14.1
-27K6
13 13 -26K1
44 31
13 -90K7 -X11 =CB
14 -26K7 3 +01
-28K4 33
-X10
1
14 24 -26K3 32 34
-XLP DISYUNTOR
14 -42K2 34 GENERADOR
23 CERRADO
-28K5 1 2
13 12 14 GENERATORSCHALTER
=CB 14.1
11 21 GESCHLOSSEN
13 -93K9 -36K2 -26K8
=CB
-30K7 11 12 14 22 24 +01
14 21 31 -X10 2
12 14 -W-X10-1
-36K7 -34K7 5G2,5² 2
-56K9 H05VV5-F
22 24 32 34 -X11
11 -X10
4 PE 2
X1 X2
A1 A1
A1 A1 A1 A1
-34K2 -34K4 -34K5 -34H6 -34K7 -34K8 -34K9
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
X0
M M
33.9 35.0
14 13 14 13 14 14 14 14
12 11 23 24 33.1 35.1 12 11 12 11 12 11
97.7 34.5 21 22 33.1 23.4 21.7
24 33 34 35.3 31 32 24 24 24
22 21 43 44 43 44 35.1 22 21 22 21 22 21
35.3 33.3 34.6 33.2
34 03 04 97.9 03 04 34 34 34
32 31 51 52 32 31 32 31 32 31
44 61 62 35.2 44 34.3 44 36.0 44 102.7
35.2
42 41 71 72 36.5 42 41 47.0 42 41 42 41
81 82
LIBERAR DISYUNTOR GENERADOR ENCHUFAR ALGO DISYUNTOR GENERADOR DISYUNTOR GENERADOR CERRADO
GENERATORSCHALTERFREIGABE GENERATORSCHALTER EIN GENERATORSCHALTER RÜCKMELDUNG EIN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 GENERATORSCHALTER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
35.9 L+ L+ 38.9
M M
34.9 36.0
15.9 UPS.230V.L UPS.230V.L 38.0
UPS.230V.N UPS.230V.N
15.9 38.0
1 14 12 1 14 12
-35F5 -35F7
B6A 2 B6A 2 11
11
99.5
99.5
61 43
43
-34K5 -34K4 -34K4
44 62 44
14 52 34
-34K5 -34K4 -34K4
13 51 33
-X10
5 6 7 8 9 10 PE 18 19 PE 20 21 22 23 PE
-W-X10-5 -W-X10-18 -W-X10-20 =CB

7G2,5² 1 2 3 4 5 6 PE 3G2,5² 1 2 PE 5G2,5² 1 2 3 4 PE
H05VV5-F H05VV-F H05VV-F
=CB 13.3
=CB 13.3
=CB 13.5
=CB 13.5
=CB 13.6
=CB 13.6
=CB 13.6
=CB 11.6
=CB 11.7
=CB 11.7
=CB 13.1
=CB 13.1
=CB 13.1
=CB 13.1
=CB 13.1
=CB
+01
-X10 5 6 7 8 9 10 PE 18 19 PE 20 21 22 23 PE
DISYUNTOR DISYUNTOR DISYUNTOR GENERADOR DISYUNTOR DISYUNTOR

GENERADOR ON GENERADOR OFF DESCONECTADOR GENERADOR 230VAC GENERADOR 24VDC
GEN.-SCHALTER EIN GEN.-SCHALTER AUS GEN.-SCHALTER U-SPULE GENERATORSCHALTER 230VAC GENERATORSCHALTER 24VDC
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR
GENERATORSCHALTER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
34.9 L+1 L+1 38.0
21 61
-36K2 21 13 -36K1
-26K3 -26K1 62
22 24 14
22
21
72
31 21 -34K4 -33K8
-34K8 -33K4 71 22 24
32 34 22 24 -X10
3
21 -W-X10-1
5G2,5² 3
-26K7
=CB 14.2
H05VV5-F
-X11
22 24 1
=CB
+01
-X10 3
APAGO
DISYUNTOR
=CB 14.2
=CB 14.2
GENERADOR
GENERATOR C.B.
OPEN
=CB
+01
-X10 4 PE
-W-X10-1
5G2,5² 4 PE
H05VV5-F
-X11
-X10
4 PE 2
A1
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-36K1 -36K2 -36K3 -36K5 -36K7 -36K8
5 sec. A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
A2
M M
35.9 38.0
14 14 13 14 14
13 14 34.5 12 11 34.3 12 11 12 11 33.2 14
23 24 21 22 12 11
24 24 31 32 24 33.1
33 34 22 21 22 21 22 21 24
43 44 36.0 43 44 34.3 22 21
03 04 34 34 03 04 34 34 33.3
32 31 32 31 32 31
51 52 33.2 44 44 44 32 31 47.1
61 62 44
36.5 42 41 42 41 42 41
71 72 42 41 102.9
81 82
DIP- 1 2 3 4 5
Switch
0 0 1 0 0
DISYUNTOR LA RED OFF LIBERAR DISYUNTOR LA RED CONECTADO LA RED CONECTADO LA RED
NETZSCHALTER AUS NETZSCHALTERFREIGABE NETZSCHALTER EIN NETZSCHALTER RM EIN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
DISYUNTOR LA RED ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 NETZSCHALTER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DISYUNTOR LA RED
MAINS C.B
-X11
5 6 7 8 9 10 PE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
DISYUNTOR LA RED ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 NETZSCHALTER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
UPS.230V.L UPS.230V.L
35.9 UPS.230V.N UPS.230V.N 44.0
35.9 44.0
L+1 L+1
36.9 39.0
L+
39.0
1 14 12
-38F5
1 3 5 2 11
13 21 B20A
43.2
-38Q0 I >I >I >
14 22
43.1
4A 2 4 6 100 % 130 %
U</Un U>/Un
60 % 0%
I Diff
-38F5.1
E18 -38F7 U+ 11 21
25A
trip
NSGAFÖU BU1-DC2-24
1x6² U< U>
U- 12 14 24 34
-38G5 99.3
24V
65Ah
-38G0 +
L N PE +
-38P3 V
SEG BL18
26,6V DC / 18A - -
0-40V NSGAFÖU
1x6²
-38F5.2
E18
25A
M-
M M 39.0
36.9 39.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
24VDC VOLTAJE FUENTE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 24VDC STEUERSPANNUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+ L+
38.9 LP LP 40.0
34.9 42.0
38.9 M- M-
1 14 12 1 14 12 1 14 12 1 14 12 1 14 12 12 14
-39F1 -39F2 -39F4 -39F5 -39F6
B10A
2 11 B6A
2 11 B6A
2 11 B6A
2 11 B6A
2 11 -90K3
43.2
43.2
43.2
43.2
43.2
11
4²
-L+1 -L+2 -L+4 -L+5 -L+6 -M
L+1 L+1
38.9 L+2 L+2 41.0
30.9 53.0
39.9 L+4 L+4
L+5 L+5
39.9 L+6 L+6 43.0
39.9 60.0
38.9 M M 40.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
39.9 L+ L+ 8.9
1 14 12 1 14 12 1 14 12 1 14 12
-40F1 -40F3 -40F5 -40F7
B10A 2 11 B10A 2 11 B10A 2 11 B16A 2 11
43.2
43.4
43.4
43.4
ST1+ ST2+ VT+
SC+ 45.0 56.0 58.0 57.0
-40N3 E+ A+
-40N5 E+ A+
PE PE
E- A- E- A-
SC-
45.0 ST1- ST2- VT-
56.0 58.0 57.0
M M
39.9 42.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+1 L+1
39.9 42.0
21
-41S1
22
-X29 -X80 -X80 -X80

1 1 3 5
-W-X29-1
12G1,5² 1
H05VV5-F
=TU 7.1
P & I
POS. 31 =TU
+LP01 1
-X29
=TU 21
+LP01
-7S1
22
=TU 7.1
=TU
+LP01
-X29 2
-W-X29-1
12G1,5² 2 -X80 -X80 -X80
H05VV5-F 2 PE 3 PE 6 PE
-X29
2
NOT-AUS 42.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
EMERGENCIA STOP ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 NOT-AUS Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LP LP
39.9 L+1 L+1 54.0
41.9 44.0
41.9 NOT-AUS
61
-42K4
62
-XLP
-42S9 13
14
X1 LED
-42S9 RED
A1 Y1 Y2 13 23 33 41 42.2 X2 LED
-42K1 Siemens SIGUARD ROT
3TK2821-1CB30
A2 14 24 34 42
A1 A1 A1
-42K2 -42K3 -42K4
A2 A2 A2
M M
40.9 44.7
13 14
23 24 16.8 13 14 46.0 13 14 113.3
34.2 23 24 23 24
33 34 56.3 33 34 49.0 33 34 116.7
43 44 56.3 117.7
100.1 43 44 43 44
53 54 116.2 53 54 115.4 53 54 119.3
63 64 117.2
73 74 61 62 61 62 42.9
83 84
EMERGENCIA STOP
NOT-AUS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
EMERGENCIA STOP ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 NOT-AUS Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
39.9 L+5 L+5 51.0
-15Q1 13 11 11
-40F1 -40F3
14 12 14 12
14
-16Q3 13 14 12 14 12
-39F6 -40F5
11 11
14
-16Q5 13 11 11
-39F5 -40F7
14 12 14 12
14
-18Q1 13 14 12 14 12
-39F4 -120F1
11 11
14
-18Q5 13 11
-39F2
14 12
14
14 12
-38Q0 13
-39F1
11
14
11
14 12
-16F3 -38F5
11 14 12
11 E48.1
100.1
-18F2
14 12
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
INTERRUPTORS AUXILIAR FUSIBLE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 SICHERUNGSFEHLER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
38.9 UPS.230V.N UPS.230V.N 113.0
38.9 113.0
L+1 L+1
42.9 54.0
1 3 14 12
-44F1 JUMO dTRON304 703044/181-400-23/000.061
12 16
2 4 11 -44A2 -X3 -X3
B6A
MIN MAX
MRD-G OUT 4:::20mA IN 4:::20mA 24VDC
230VAC + - + - + -
-X1 -X1 -X2 -X2 -X3 -X3 -X3 -X3 -X3 -X3
L1 N 2 3 3 4 8 9 11 13 15 17
LEVEL-
80.5
LEVEL+ 80.5
LEVELS
80.5
-X92
1 2 PE 3 4 PE S 7 8 PE S
-W-X92-1 -W-X92-3
3G2,5² 1 2 PE 5G2,5² 1 2 3 4 PE Sh
H05VV-F H05VVC4V5-K
=COND
+TB1 1 2 PE 3 4 PE S 5 6 PE S 7 8 PE S
-X3
+ -
+ - A1 A1
-Yin I
4...20mA -44K8 -44K9
A2 A2
L
M M
0-100% 42.9 51.0
14 14
-LIC 12 11 12 11
98.7 98.9
24 24
22 21 22 21
M 34 34
ARI PREMIO PLUS 1 32 31 32 31
44 44
0LCA30AA001 <50VA 0MAG10CL051 42 41 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
CONTROLADOR DE NIVEL ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 FÜLLSTANDSREGLER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
40.2 SC+ SC+ 48.0
SC- SC-
40.2 W505.4 48.0
50.4
W505.5 50.7
W505.6
W505.8 46.0
46.0
W505.11
50.4
-45A0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
+ - PE + + + + + + + GND Woodward 505
POWER SUPPLY CONTACT 24VDC
12 DI ES 46.0 EMERGENCIA STOP NOT-AUS 52 AC#1 + 57.5 SOBRE LA PROTECCIÓN DRUCKSTELLGLIED 85 AO#1 + 52.1 REGIMEN TURBINA DREHZAHL
13 DI RE 46.1 REINICIAR RESET 53 - 86 -
14 DI SP+ 46.3 AUMENTAR LA VELOCID DREHZAHL ERHÖHEN 54 SHLD 87 SHLD
15 DI SP- 46.4 DESCENSO DE VELOCID DREHZAHL VERKLEI 67 AC#2 + RESERVA RESERVE 97 AO#2 +
68 - 98 -
69 SHLD 99 SHLD
16 DI#1 46.5 INICIO DE TURBINA TURBINE START 88 AO#3 +
17 DI#2 46.6 PRINCIPIO PERMISIVA START PERMISSIVE 89 -
18 DI#3 46.8 EMBALAR TEST ÜBERDREHZAHLTEST 82 SPU#1 + 50.4 SENSO DE VELOCIDAD DREHZAHLSENSOR 1 90 SHLD
19 DI#4 46.9 CERRAR HERUNTERFAHREN 83 - 100 AO#4 +
20 DI#5 47.0 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR GENERATORSCHALTE 84 SHLD 101 -
21 DI#6 47.1 DISYUNTOR LA RED NETZSCHALTER 94 SPU#2 + 50.7 SENSO DE VELOCIDAD DREHZAHLSENSOR 2 102 SHLD
22 DI#7 47.3 REGULADOR DE PRESIÓ DRUCKREGLER EIN 95 - 91 AO#5 + 52.4 RESERVA RESERVE
23 DI#8 47.4 RESERVA RESERVE 96 SHLD 92 -
24 DI#9 47.5 RESERVA RESERVE 93 SHLD
25 DI#10 47.6 RESERVA RESERVE 103 AO#6 + 52.8 RESERVA RESERVE
26 DI#11 47.8 RESERVA RESERVE 55 AI#1 24V 51.1 PRESION DE VAPOR FR FRISCHDAMPFDRUCK 104 -
27 DI#12 47.9 RESERVA RESERVE 56 + 105 SHLD
57 -
58 SHLD
28 R SD NC 48.0 NO PARADA KEIN TRIP 70 AI#2 24V 51.4 RESERVA RESERVE 114 CP#1 232/TXD
29 COM 71 + 115 232/RXD
30 NO 72 - 116 SIG/GND
31 R AL NC 48.3 ALARMA ALARM 73 SHLD 117 SHLD
32 COM 59 AI#3 24V 51.8 POTENCIA ACTIVA WIRKLEISTUNG 118 422R/485+
33 NO 60 + 119 422R/485-
61 - 120 422T+
62 SHLD 121 422T-
34 R#1 NC 48.5 VELOCIDAD > 10 % DREHZAHL > 10 % 74 AI#4 24V 51.1 RESERVA RESERVE 106 CP#2 232/TXD
35 COM 75 + 107 232/RXD
36 NO 76 - 108 SIG/GND
37 R#2 NC 48.7 TURBINA EN MARCHA TURBINE LÄUFT 77 SHLD 109 SHLD
38 COM 63 AI#5 24V 51.4 RESERVA RESERVE 110 422R/485+
39 NO 64 + 111 422R/485-
40 R#3 NC 49.0 VELOCIDAD > 1450 DREHZAHL > 1450 65 - 112 422T+
41 COM 66 SHLD 113 422T-
42 NO 78 AI#6 24V 51.8 RESERVA RESERVE
43 R#4 NC 49.3 RESERVA RESERVE 79 + 1 CP#3
44 COM 80 - 2
45 NO 81 SHLD 3
46 R#5 NC 49.5 RESERVA RESERVE 4
47 COM 5
48 NO 6
49 R#6 NC 49.7 RESERVA RESERVE 7
50 COM 8
51 NO 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
REGULADOR DE VELOCIDAD ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 DREHZAHLREGLER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
W505.6 W505.6
45.9 W505.8 W505.8
45.9 47.0
13 21 21 11 11 11 11
-42K3 -90K4 -33K5 -91K5 -93K3 -55K5 -91K6
14
22 24 22 24 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14
11 11
-55K2 -55K1
12 14 12 14
DI ES 12 DI RE 13 DI SP+ 14 DI SP- 15 DI#1 16 DI#2 17 DI#3 18 DI#4 19

45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0
EMERGENCIA STOP REINICIAR AUMENTAR LA VELOCIDAD DESCENSO DE VELOCIDAS INICIO DE TURBINA PRINCIPIO PERMISIVA EMBALAR TEST CERRAR
NOT-AUS RESET DREHZAHL ERHÖHEN DREHZAHL VERKLEINERN TURBINE START START PERMISSIVE ÜBERDREHZAHLTEST HERUNTERFAHREN
Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input Digital Input
Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505
-45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
W505.8 W505.8
46.9
41 31 31 11
-34K7 -36K8 -33K4 -91K9

42 44 32 34 32 34 12 14
DI#5 20 DI#6 21 DI#7 22 DI#8 23 DI#9 24 DI#10 25 DI#11 26 DI#12 27

45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR DISYUNTOR LA RED REGULADOR DE PRESIÓN RESERVA RESERVA RESERVA RESERVA RESERVA
ENCENDIDO
GENERATORSCHALTER NETZSCHALTER DRUCKREGLER EIN RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505
-45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
45.9 SC+ SC+ 49.0
-45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0

29 Woodward 505 32 Woodward 505 35 Woodward 505 38 Woodward 505
Relais Relais Relais Relais
NO PARADA ALARMA VELOCIDAD > 10 % TURBINA EN MARCHA
KEIN TRIP ALARM DREHZAHL > 10 % TURBINE LÄUFT
45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0

28 30 R SD 31 33 R AL 34 36 R#1 37 39 R#2
A1
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-48K0 SIL -48K1 -48K3 -48K5 -48K8 -48K9
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
SC- SC-
45.9 49.0
13 14 14 14 14 14 14
56.5 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11
23 24 58.5 101.8 101.8 53.3 54.5
31 32 24 24 24 24 24
22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21
56.0 101.6
34 34 34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31
44 44 44 101.4 44 110.1 44
42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 119.3 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
48.9 SC+ SC+
-45A0 -45A0 -45A0 -45A0

41 Woodward 505 44 Woodward 505 47 Woodward 505 50 Woodward 505
Relais Relais Relais Relais
VELOCIDAD > 1450 RESERVA RESERVA RESERVA
DREHZAHL > 1450 RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0

40 42 R#3 43 45 R#4 46 48 R#5 49 51 R#6
24
-90K7
23
23
-42K3
24
A1
A1
-49K0 -49K1
A2 A2
SC- SC-
48.9
1 2 20.1 14
3 4 12 11
20.1 101.0
5 6 20.1 24
13 14 22 21
20.4
34
32 31
44
42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-45A0 -45A0
Woodward 505 Woodward 505

Speed Pick Up Speed Pick Up
SENSO DE VELOCIDAD 1 SENSO DE VELOCIDAD 2
DREHZAHLSENSOR 1 DREHZAHLSENSOR 2
45.0 45.0
+ - SHLD + - SHLD
SPU#1 82 83 84 SPU#2 94 95 96
45.9 W505.11
W505.4 W505.5
45.9 45.9
-X49 -X49
3 4 5 PE S 6 7 8 PE S
-W-X49-3 -W-X49-6
4x0,75² 1 2 3 PE Sh 4x0,75² 1 2 3 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K
=TU 13.2
=TU 13.3
=TU 13.3
=TU 13.3
=TU 13.3
=TU 13.4
=TU 13.4
=TU 13.4
=TU 13.4
=TU 13.5
=TU =TU
+LP01 +LP01
-X49 3 4 5 PE S -X49 6 7 8 PE S
-W36.1 -W36.2
3x0,75² WH GN BN Sh 3x0,75² WH GN BN Sh
SIG - + SIG - +
A B C A B C
P & I POS.36.1 P & I POS.36.2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-45A0 -45A0 -45A0
Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505
Analog Input Analog Input Analog Input
PRESION DE VAPOR RESERVA POTENCIA ACTIVA

FRESCO
FRISCHDAMPFDRUCK RESERVE WIRKLEISTUNG
45.0 45.0 45.0

24V + - SHLD 24V + - SHLD 24V + - SHLD
AI#1 55 56 57 58 AI#2 70 71 72 73 AI#3 59 60 61 62
PEW260-
78.5
PEW260+ 78.5 22.9 PEW258+ PEW258+ 78.3
PEW260S PEW258S PEW258S
78.5 22.9 78.3
+ - + - + - + -
-51A1 7 8I9 2 3 7 8I9 2 3
Out In Out In
-51A8
10 12 TV500L 10 12 TV500L
+ - + -
L+5 L+5
43.9 52.0
44.9 M M 52.0
AI#4 74 75 76 77 AI#5 63 64 65 66 AI#6 78 79 80 81

24V + - SHLD 24V + - SHLD 24V + - SHLD
45.0 45.0 45.0
RESERVA RESERVA RESERVA
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
Analog Input Analog Input Analog Input
Woodward 505 Woodward 505 Woodward 505

-45A0 -45A0 -45A0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-45A0
Woodward 505
Analog Output
REGIMEN TURBINA
DREHZAHL
45.0
+ - SHLD
AO#1 85 86 87
-52A1 2 3 -52A3 +
2 3
- TV500L
+ IN - In
TV500L
Out+ + - Out- Out
7 8I 9 10 12
7 10 12 8 9 + - + -
Rpm- PEW256-
24.9 78.0
PEW256S PEW256S
24.9 78.0
L+5 L+5
51.9 M M 78.5
51.9 53.0
TBSS
24.9
TBS+
24.9 TBS-
24.9
AO#5 91 92 93 AO#6 103 104 105

+ - SHLD + - SHLD
45.0 45.0
RESERVA RESERVA
RESERVE RESERVE
Analog Output Analog Output
Woodward 505 Woodward 505

-45A0 -45A0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+2 L+2
39.9
11 21
-48K5 -56K9
12 14 22 24
. . . . .
L 15 16 17 18 4 5
-53A2 PE
+24VDC BE1 BE2 BE3 BE4 BA1 BA2
SIPART DR 22
Pressure Controller
AE1 AE3 AA1
L+4 - 20mA 0/4 4 - 20mA
.0V . . . . - .20mA . . .
N 3 20 19 24 23 2 1 12
PEW264S DSGNDS
79.0 59.0
PEW264- 79.0 DSGND+ 59.0
PEW264+ DSGND-
79.0 59.0
M M
52.9 54.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
SIPART DR22 ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 SIPART DR22 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LP LP
42.9 111.0
44.9 L+1 L+1 56.0
1
2
3
2
11
-54S4 11
-93K6
1 = TURBINA ARMARIO
1 3 5
2 = UNIDAD DE CONTROL LOCAL -48K8 12 14
3 = SALA DE CONTROL
Schrank 100.3 12 14
1 = STEUERSCHRANK VorOrt
2 = ÖRTLICHE BEDIENEINHEIT Warte 100.5 -XLP
3 = WARTE 100.2
11
-X29 -55K3
3 4
-W-X29-1 12 14
P & I Pos. 31
12G1,5² 3 -X29
H05VV5-F 8 10
-W-X29-1
=TU 7.3
12G1,5² 8 10
H05VV5-F
1 = REDUCIR
1 = REDUCIR
=TU 7.7
=TU 7.8
2 = AUMENTAR =TU+LP01-X29 P & I Pos. 31
2 = AUMENTAR 3
1 = DECREASE
Start
1 = DECREASE
Stop
2 = INCREASE
Start
2 = INCREASE =TU+LP01-X29
Stop
2/4 2/4 8 10
1
0
2
0
2/4 2/4
2/4
1
0
2
0
=TU =TU
1
0
2
+LP01 +LP01 =TU X1 LED
-54S1 -7S3 -7S5 =TU +LP01 -54S9 GREEN
1 3 1 3 +LP01
-54S5 -7S7 -7H8
1 3 1 3 100.7
1 3 X2 LED
GRÜN
=TU 7.3
=TU 7.3
=TU 7.5
=TU 7.5
=TU 7.7
=TU 7.8
=TU 7.9
=TU+LP01-X29
4 5 6 7
-W-X29-1
=TU+LP01-X29
12G1,5² 4 5 6 7 9 11 PE
H05VV5-F
-W-X29-1
-X29 12G1,5² 9 11 PE
4 5 6 7 H05VV5-F
-X29
9 11 PE
SF+ SF+ START

23.9 55.1 100.8
SF- SF- STOP OT
23.9 55.1 55.3 55.5
53.9 M M 55.0
ADJUSTE DE LAELOCIDAD TURBINA STOP/START EMBALAR TEST TURBINA LISTO

DREHZAHLVERSTELLUNG TURBINE STOP/START ÜBERDREHZAHLTEST TURBINE STARTBEREIT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
CONTROL DE TURBINA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 TURBINENSTEUERUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SF- STOP OT
54.3 54.6 54.7
SF+
54.3
21 21
-55K2 -55K1
22 24 22 24
A1 A1 A1 A1
-55K1 -55K2 -55K3 -55K5
A2 A2 A2 A2
M M
54.9 56.0
14 14 14 14
12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11
46.4 46.3 54.6 46.8
24 24 24 24
22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21
55.2 55.1 100.6
34 34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31
44 44 44 44
42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41
SPEED DECREASE SPEED INCREASE TURBINA STOP EMBALAR TEST

DREHZAHL TIEFER DREHZAHL HÖHER TURBINE STOP ÜBERDREHZAHLTEST
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ST1+ ST1+
40.4 ST1- ST1-
40.4
54.9 L+1 L+1 110.0
33 13 21
-42K2 -56K8 -56K1
34
14
22 24
14
11
-56K3 -56K7
34 13
-42K3
13 12 14
33
-48K0
14
14
21 -58K8
33 13
-48K5
-90K7 -X49
22 24 34 13 11 10 PE S
-W-X49-10
11 11 11 4G2,5² 3 1 2 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
-91K4 -56K2 -56K1
12 14 12 14 12 14
=TU 14.1
=TU 14.1
=TU 14.1
=TU 14.2
=TU 14.2
=TU
10 +LP01
-X49 13 11 10 PE S
-31A2
-W19.1
11 12 6G1² 5 2 3
H05VVC4C5-K
10
-31A6 E B C
F E A
11 12
Trip
A1 Simulation A1
A1 A1 A1 A1
-56K1 -56K2 -56K3 SIL Pick Up
-56K7 -56K8 SIL -56K9
A2 A2 A2 4 sec. A2 A2 A2
P & I Pos. 36.3 P & I Pos. 19.1
M M
55.9 58.0
14 14 13 14 56.5 DIP- 1 2 3 4 5 14 13 14 56.5 14

12 11 12 11 23 24 58.5 Switch 0 0 1 0 0 12 11 23 24 58.5 12 11
24 56.3 24 56.1 31 24 56.6 31 24 34.2
32 32
22 21 56.6 22 21 22 21 58.6 22 21 53.3
34 34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31
58.6 57.4
44 44 44 44
42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41
102.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
SOBRE LA PROTECCIÓN
DE VELOCIDAD 1
ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 ÜBERDREHZAHLSCHUTZ 1 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VT+ VT+
40.8 VT- VT- 59.0
40.8 59.0
-45A0
Woodward 505
Actuator
SOBRE LA PROTECCIÓN DE
VELOCIDAD 1
31
-56K9 DRUCKSTELLGLIED 1
32 34
45.0
+ - SHLD
AC#1 52 53 54
-57A5
+ - TV500L
2 3
In
Out
7 8I 9 10 12
+ - + -
-X49
21 22 23 24 25 26 S PE
-W-X49-21
5G1,5² 1 2 3 4 PE
H05VV5-F -W-X49-25
2 1 Sh 2x1,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
=TU 15.1
=TU 15.1
=TU 15.1
=TU 15.2
=TU 15.2
=TU 15.2
=TU 15.3
=TU 15.3
=TU
+LP01
-X49 21 22 23 24 25 26 S PE
-W29.1
7G1² 1 2 3 4 6 5 Sh PE
H05VVC4V5-K
B C E F D A PE
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE
HP - Turbine 1
P & I Pos. 29.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
DE VELOCIDAD 1 POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
ELDATEX SIEMENS TURBINA AMARIO
+CP1to3
12-06-033 DRUCKSTELLGLIED 1 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ST2+ ST2+
40.6 ST2- ST2-
40.6
23 31
-58K8 -56K1
24
32 34
24
21
-56K3 -56K7
23
23 22 24
-48K0
24
24
-56K8
23
-X49
19 17 16 PE S
-W-X49-16
4G2,5² 3 1 2 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
=TU 14.6
=TU 14.5
=TU 14.5
=TU 14.6
=TU 14.6
=TU
+LP01
-X49 19 17 16 PE S
-W19.2
6G1² 5 2 3
H05VVC4C5-K
E B C
F E A
Trip
Simulation A1
A1 A1
Pick Up
-58K7 -58K8 SIL -58K9
4 sec. A2 A2 A2
P & I Pos. 36.4 P & I Pos. 19.2
M M
56.9 60.0
DIP- 1 2 3 4 5 14 13 14 56.5 14
Switch 0 0 1 0 0 12 11 23 24 58.5 12 11
24 31 24 59.4
32
22 21 22 21 102.0
34 34
32 31 32 31
44 44
42 41 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
DE VELOCIDAD 2
ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 ÜBERDREHZAHLSCHUTZ 2 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VT+ VT+
57.9 VT- VT-
57.9
11
-58K9
12 14
DSGNDS
53.7 DSGND+
53.7
53.7 DSGND-
-X49
27 28 29 30 31 32 S PE
-W-X49-27
5G1,5² 1 2 3 4 PE
H05VV5-F -W-X49-31
2 1 Sh 2x1,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
=TU 15.6
=TU 15.6
=TU 15.6
=TU 15.6
=TU 15.7
=TU 15.7
=TU 15.7
=TU 15.8
=TU
+LP01
-X49 27 28 29 30 31 32 S PE
-W29.2
7G1² 1 2 3 4 6 5 Sh PE
H05VVC4V5-K
B C E F D A PE
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE
HP - Turbine 2
P & I Pos. 29.2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
DE VELOCIDAD 2 POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
ELDATEX SIEMENS TURBINA AMARIO
+CP1to3
12-06-033 DRUCKSTELLGLIED 2 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+6 L+6
39.9 M M 61.0
58.9 61.0
-60A1 -60A6
. N
-60E4
0V
L+
PE
24V
M
SIEMENS TSA-II Modem
MP277 Touch 10" SF
TAE
MultiMediaCard
1 2 BUSF
DC3V
RX/TX
SD CARD
DCD
USB
USB Line
-X82
DIP Switch 1 2 PE
DIP 1 2 3 4
RS232
-W-X82-1
MPI/
1=ON 1 1 1 1
2x1,5² 1 2 Sh
DP
IF 1B H05VVC4V5-K
RS422/485 LAN
PLC USB USB
Supply
+EXT
-X a b S
Supply
LÍNEA TELEFÓNICA (ANALOG)
TELEFONANSCHLUSS (ANALOG)
MPI 61.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
MP277 / MODEM ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 MP277 / MODEM Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+6 L+6
60.9 67.0
60.9 M M 67.0
-61A1 -61A2
L+
M
SIMATIC IM 365
CPU315-2DP Send
SF
DC5V
FRCE
RUN
STOP
RUN-P
RUN
STOP
MRES
SIMATIC MPI DP
S7-300
Supply
60.9 MPI IM 70.1
22.9 DP
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
PLC / IM ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 CPU / IM Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-62A2
S7-300 Analog Input SM 331
8 Inputs DC 24V
1 PEW256 78.1 TURBINE SPEED TURBINDENDREHZAHL

2
3
4
5
6 PEW258 78.3 ACTIVE POWER WIRKLEISTUNG
7
8
9
10
11 PEW260 78.5 PRESION DE VAPOR FRESCO FRISCHDAMPFDRUCK
12
13
14
15
16 PEW262 78.8 DIFERENCIA DE PRESIÓN DE VAPOR PA DIFFERENZDAMPFDRUCK HD
17
18
19
20
21 PEW264 79.1 PRESION DE VAPOR DE EXTRACCIÓN ENTNAHMEDAMPFDRUCK
22
23
24
25
26 PEW266 79.3 DIFERENCIA DE PRESIÓN DE VAPOR BP DIFFERENZDAMPFDRUCK ND
27
28
29
30
31 PEW268 79.4 SALIR DE LA PRESION DE VAPOR ABDAMPFDRUCK
32
33
34
35
36 PEW270 79.6 PRESIÓN SEPARADOR NIEBLA DE ACEITE DRUCK ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER
37
38
39
40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
ANALOG MODULO DE ENTRADA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 ANALOGE EINGANGSKARTE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-63A2
8 Inputs DC 24V
1 PEW272 80.1 MONITORIZACION DE VIBRACIONES SCHWINGUNG GETRIEBE

2
3
4
5
6 PEW274 80.3 RESERVA RESERVE
7
8
9
10
11 PEW276 80.5 HOTWELL NIVEL FÜLLSTAND HOTWELL KONDENSATOR
12
13
14
15
16 PEW278 80.8 TEMPERATURA DE RODETE LAUFRADTEMPERATUR
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-64A2
8 Inputs DC 24V
1 PEW288 82.1 TEMPERATURA DE RODAMIENTO TURBINA 1 TURBINENLAGER-TEMPERATUR 1

2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-65A2
8 Inputs DC 24V

2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11 PEW308 84.6 TEMPERATURA DE VAPOR FRESCO FRISCHDAMPFTEMPERATUR
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31 PEW316 85.5 ACEITE TEMPERATURA ÖLTEMPERATUR
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-66A2
8 Inputs DC 24V
1 PEW320 86.1 TEMPERATURA GENERADOR BOBINADO L1 TEMPERATUR GENERATORWICKLUNG L1

2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
16 PEW326 86.8 TEMPERATURA DODAMIENTO DE GENERADOR A TEMPERATUR GENERATORLAGER A
17
18
19
20
21 PEW328 87.1 TEMPERATURA DODAMIENTO DE GENERADOR B TEMPERATUR GENERATORLAGER B
22
23
24
25
26 PEW330 87.3 RESERVA RESERVA
27
28
29
30
31 PEW332 87.5 GENERADOR TEMPERATURA COOLING AIR SALIDA GENERATOR TEMPERATUR KÜHLLUFT AUSTRITT
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+6 L+6
61.9 70.0
61.9 M M 70.0
-67A1
PE
L+
CP 342-5
M
SF
BUSF
RUN
STOP
SIMATIC NET
RUN
STOP
Profibus
Supply
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
CP 342-5 ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 CP 342-5 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
CP 343-1 ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+6 L+6
67.9 71.0
67.9 M M 71.0
11
10
20
-61A2 -70A2
1
L+
L+
M
M
IM 365 S7-300 Digital Output SM322
Receive 16 Outputs DC 24V
2 A32.0 90.0 CUERNO HUPE

3 A32.1 90.1 PLC O.K. SPS O.K.
4 A32.2 90.3 LAMPADA TEST LAMPENTEST
5 A32.3 90.4 REINICIAR RESET
6 A32.4 90.5 COLECTIVA DE FALLOS ALARMA SAMMELALARM
7 A32.5 90.6 COLECTIVA DE FALLOS STOP SAMMELTRIP
8 A32.6 90.8 MECHANICA DE ERROR ALARMA MECHANIK ALARM
9 A32.7 90.9 MECHANICA DE ERROR STOP MECHANIK TRIP
12 A33.0 91.1 ELECTRICOS DE ERROR ALARMA ELEKTRIK ALARM

13 A33.1 91.2 ELECTRICOS DE ERROR STOP ELEKTRIK TRIP
14 A33.2 91.3 BOMBA DE ACEITE ON ÖLPUMPE EIN
15 A33.3 91.4 VALVULA DE SEGURIDAD SSV EIN
16 A33.4 91.5 TURBINA START TURBINE START
17 A33.5 91.6 TURBINA STOP TURBINE STOP
18 A33.6 91.7 TURBINA LISTO PARA DESPEGAR TURBINE STARTBEREIT
19 A33.7 91.9 DESCARGAR AUTOMATICO TURBINE ENTLASTEN
61.3 IM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
DIGITAL MODULA DE SALIDA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 DIGITALE AUSGANGSKARTE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+6 L+6
70.9
70.9 M M 72.0
11
10
20
-71A2
1
L+
L+
M
M
S7-300 Digital Output SM322
16 Outputs DC 24V
2 A36.0 92.1 VALVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE VAPOR DE PRESIÓN DAMPFDRUCK BOOSTER VENTIL

3 A36.1 92.2 VALVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE INYECCIÓN DE AGUA WASSEREINSPRITZUNG BOOSTER VENTIL
4 A36.2 92.3 ENTRADA DE GAS BOMBA 100.1 ENCENDER GASEINLASS PUMPE 100.1 EIN
5 A36.3 92.4 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 1 KONDENSATPUMPE 1 EIN
6 A36.4 92.5 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 2 KONDENSATPUMPE 2 EIN
7 A36.5 92.6 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 VAKUUMPUMPE 1 EIN
8 A36.6 92.7 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 VAKUUMPUMPE 2 EIN
9 A36.7 92.9 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO NACHKÜHLPUMPE EIN
12 A37.0 93.1 ENTRADA DE GAS BOMBA 100.2 ENCENDER GASEINLASS PUMPE 100.2 EIN
13 A37.1 93.2 ACEITE DE NIEBLA SEPERATOR ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER EIN
14 A37.2 93.3 W505 PERMISSIVE W505 PERMISSIVE
15 A37.3 93.4 CONDENSADOR ENCENDER KONDENSATOR EIN
16 A37.4 93.5 SINCRONIZACION SYNCHRONISATION
17 A37.5 93.6 AVISO EMPIEZA PRPARATE LAMPA STARTVORBEREITUNG SIGNALLAMPE
18 A37.6 93.7 RESERVA RESERVE
19 A37.7 93.9 DESCONECTADOR GENERADOR OFF GENERATORSCHALTER OFFEN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
DIGITAL MODULA DE SALIDA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 DIGITALE AUSGANGSKARTE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
71.9 M M 73.0
-72A2
M
S7-300 Digital Input SM321
16 Inputs DC 24V
2 E40.0 96.1 PRESION DE ACEITE BOMA DE ACEITE ÖLDRUCK E-PUMPE

3 E40.1 96.2 PRESION DE ACEITE ALARMA ÖLDRUCK ALARM
4 E40.2 96.3 PRESION DE ACEITE STOP ÖLDRUCK STOP
5 E40.3 96.4 NIVEL DE ACEITE ACCIDENTE MIN. ÖLLEVEL MIN.
6 E40.4 96.5 NIVEL DE ACEITE ACCIDENTE MINMIN. ÖLLEVEL MINMIN.
7 E40.5 96.6 RESERVA RESERVE
9 E40.7 96.9 CONTROL DE FILTRO DE ACEITE DIFF.-DRUCK ÖLFILTER
12 E41.0 97.1 SPARE RESERVE

15 E41.3 97.4 HOTWELL NIVEL MAXMAX HOTWELL NIVEAU MAXMAX
16 E41.4 97.5 SINCRONIZACIÓN MANUAL MANUELLE SYNCHRONISATION
17 E41.5 97.6 SINCRONIZACIÓN AUTOMÁTICA AUTOMATISCHE SYNCHRONISATION
18 E41.6 97.7 LIBERAR INTERRUPTOR DISYUNTOR GENERADOR GENERATORSCHALTER FREIGABE
19 E41.7 97.9 LIBERAR DISYUNTOR GENERADOR GENERATORSCHALTER FREIGEGEBEN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
DIGITAL MODULO DE ENTRADA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 DIGITALE EINGANGSKARTE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
72.9 M M 74.0
-73A2
M
16 Inputs DC 24V
2 E44.0 98.1 VOLTAJE/FREQUENZA LA RED NETZSPANNUNG / NETZFREQUENZ

3 E44.1 98.2 FISURA VECTOR VEKTORSPRUNG
4 E44.2 98.3 SOBRECORRIENTE ÜBERSTROM
5 E44.3 98.4 CORTOCIRCUITO KURZSCHLUSS
6 E44.4 98.5 MOTORRIZACION DEL GENERADOR RÜCKLEISTUNG
7 E44.5 98.6 SOBRECARGA ÜBERLAST
8 E44.6 98.7 HOTWELL NIVEL MIN HOTWELL NIVEAU MIN
9 E44.7 98.9 HOTWELL NIVEL MAX HOTWELL NIVEAU MAX
12 E45.0 99.1 460VAC O.K. 460VAC O.K.

13 E45.1 99.2 UPS 230VAC O.K. USV 230VAC O.K.
14 E45.2 99.3 VOLTAJE PILA NO O.K. BATTERIE SPANNUNGSFEHLER
15 E45.3 99.4 EXTERIOR DE FALLA EXTERNER FEHLER
16 E45.4 99.5 FUENTE DE ALIMENTACIÓN GENERADOR DISTURBED SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNG GENERATOR GESTÖRT
18 E45.6 99.7 SINCRONIZACIÓN LISTO SYNCHRONISIERBEREIT
19 E45.7 99.9 GPU FALLOS GPU GESTÖRT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
73.9 M M 75.0
-74A2
M
16 Inputs DC 24V
2 E48.0 100.1 EMERGENCIA STOP NOT-AUS

3 E48.1 100.2 CASO FUSIBLE SICHERUNGSFEHLER
4 E48.2 100.3 TURBINA OPERACION SALA DE CONTROL BEDIENUNG VON WARTE
5 E48.3 100.4 TURBINA OPERACION ARMARIO BEDIENUNG VOM STEUERSCHRANK
6 E48.4 100.5 TURBINA OPERACION ATRIL BEDIENUNG VON ÖRTLICHER BEDIENEINHEIT
7 E48.5 100.6 PARADA NORMAL NORMAL STOP
8 E48.6 100.7 PREPARACION TURBINA START STARTVORBEREITUNG
9 E48.7 100.9 TURBINA START TURBINE START
12 E49.0 101.1 n > 1750 n > 1750

13 E49.1 101.2 PRESIÓN CONMUTACIÓN DE BOMBA DE CONDENSADOR 1 DRUCKSCHALTER KONDENSATPUMPE 1
14 E49.2 101.3 PRESIÓN CONMUTACIÓN DE BOMBA DE CONDENSADOR 2 DRUCKSCHALTER KONDENSATPUMPE 2
15 E49.3 101.4 n > 10 % n > 10 %
17 E49.5 101.6 n > 0 / RUN = 1 n > 0 / RUN = 1
18 E49.6 101.7 W505: STOP W505: TRIP
19 E49.7 101.9 W505: ALARMA W505: ALARM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
74.9 M M 76.0
-75A2
M
16 Inputs DC 24V
2 E52.0 102.1 PROTECCION DE EXCESO DE VELOCIDAD ÜBERDREHZAHLSCHUTZ

5 E52.3 102.4 CONDENDENSADOR MAN KONDENSATOR MAN
6 E52.4 102.5 CONDENDENSADOR AUTO KONDENSATOR AUTO
7 E52.5 102.6 GENERADOR DE CALENTADOR AVERIA GENERATORHEIZUNG GESTÖRT
8 E52.6 102.7 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR CONNECTADO GENERATORSCHALTER EIN
9 E52.7 102.9 DISYUNTOR LA RED CONNECTADO NETZSCHALTER EIN
12 E53.0 103.1 BOMBA DE ACEITE AVERIA ÖLPUMPE GESTÖRT

13 E53.1 103.2 BOMBA DE ACEITE CONECTADO ÖLPUMPE LÄUFT
14 E53.2 103.3 BOMBA DE ACEITE MANUAL ÖLPUMPE MANUELL
15 E53.3 103.4 BOMBA DE ACEITE AUTOMATICO ÖLPUMPE AUTOMATIK
16 E53.4 103.5 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO AVERIA NACHKÜHLPUMPE GESTÖRT
17 E53.5 103.6 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO CONECTADO NACHKÜHLPUMPE LÄUFT
18 E53.6 103.7 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO MANUAL NACHKÜHLPUMPE MANUELL
19 E53.7 103.9 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO AUTOMATICO NACHKÜHLPUMPE AUTOMATIK
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
75.9 M M 77.0
-76A2
M
16 Inputs DC 24V
2 E56.0 104.1 NIEBLA DE ACEITE SEPARADOR AVERIA ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER GESTÖRT

3 E56.1 104.2 NIEBLA DE ACEITE SEPARADOR CONECTADO ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER LÄUFT
4 E56.2 104.3 NIEBLA DE ACEITE SEPARADOR MANUAL ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER MANUELL
5 E56.3 104.4 NIEBLA DE ACEITE SEPARADOR AUTOMATICO ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER AUTOMATIK
6 E56.4 104.5 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 1 AVERIA KONDENSATPUMPE 1 GESTÖRT
7 E56.5 104.6 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 1 CONECTADO KONDENSATPUMPE 1 LÄUFT
8 E56.6 104.7 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 1 MANUAL KONDENSATPUMPE 1 MANUELL
9 E56.7 104.9 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 1 AUTOMATICO KONDENSATPUMPE 1 AUTOMATIK
12 E57.0 105.1 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 2 AVERIA KONDENSATPUMPE 2 GESTÖRT

13 E57.1 105.2 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 2 CONECTADO KONDENSATPUMPE 2 LÄUFT
14 E57.2 105.3 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 AVERIA VAKUUMPUMPE 1 GESTÖRT
15 E57.3 105.4 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 CONECTADO VAKUUMPUME 1 LÄUFT
16 E57.4 105.5 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 MANUAL VAKUUMPUMPE 1 MANUELL
17 E57.5 105.6 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 AUTOMATICO VAKUUMPUMPE 1 AUTOMATIK
18 E57.6 105.7 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 AVERIA VAKUUMPUMPE 2 GESTÖRT
19 E57.7 105.9 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 CONECTADO VAKUUMPUME 2 LÄUFT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
76.9 M M 78.5
-77A2
M
16 Inputs DC 24V
2 E60.0 106.1 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 MANUAL VAKUUMPUMPE 2 MANUELL

3 E60.1 106.2 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 AUTOMATICO VAKUUMPUMPE 2 AUTOMATIK
4 E60.2 106.3 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 2 MANUAL KONDENSATPUMPE 2 MANUELL
5 E60.3 106.4 BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 2 AUTOMATICO KONDENSATPUMPE 2 AUTOMATIK
6 E60.4 106.5 PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 1 VORAUSWAHL KONDENSATPUMPE 1
7 E60.5 106.6 PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 2 VORAUSWAHL KONDENSATPUMPE 2
8 E60.6 106.7 PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 VORAUSWAHL VAKUUMPUMPE 1
9 E60.7 106.9 PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 VORAUSWAHL VAKUUMPUMPE 2
12 E61.0 107.1 VÁLVULA 0MAJ21AA151 CERRADA VENTIL 0MAJ21AA151 GESCHLOSSEN

13 E61.1 107.2 VÁLVULA 0MAJ21AA151 ABIERTA VENTIL 0MAJ21AA151 GEÖFFNET
14 E61.2 107.3 VÁLVULA 0MAJ22AA151 CERRADA VENTIL 0MAJ22AA151 GESCHLOSSEN
15 E61.3 107.4 VÁLVULA 0MAJ22AA151 ABIERTA VENTIL 0MAJ22AA151 GEÖFFNET
16 E61.4 107.5 COMPUERTA 0MAJ21AA101 CERRADA KLAPPE 0MAJ21AA101 GESCHLOSSEN
17 E61.5 107.6 COMPUERTA 0MAJ21AA101 ABIERTA KLAPPE 0MAJ21AA101 GEÖFFNET
18 E61.6 107.7 COMPUERTA 0MAJ22AA101 CERRADA KLAPPE 0MAJ22AA101 GESCHLOSSEN
19 E61.7 107.9 COMPUERTA 0MAJ22AA101 ABIERTA KLAPPE 0MAJ22AA101 GEÖFFNET
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-62A2 -62A2 -62A2 -62A2
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4
Analog Input Analog Input Analog Input Analog Input
TURBINE SPEED ACTIVE POWER PRESION DE VAPOR DIFERENCIA DE PRESIÓN

FRESCO DE VAPOR PA
TURBINDENDREHZAHL WIRKLEISTUNG FRISCHDAMPFDRUCK DIFFERENZDAMPFDRUCK HD
PEW256 62.2 PEW258 62.2 PEW260 62.2 PEW262 62.2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
77.9 M M 79.0
PEW260+
PEW256+ PEW258+ 51.3
24.9 PEW256- 51.9 PEW258- 51.3 PEW260-
52.2 22.9
PEW256S PEW258S
52.2 51.9 51.3 PEW260S
L+5 L+5
52.9 79.0
-X30
1 2 PE S 3 4 PE S
-W-X30-1
18G1,5² 1 2 3 4
H05VVC4V5-K
S1.1 79.0
=TU 10.0
=TU 10.1
=TU 10.1
=TU 10.1
=TU 10.2
=TU 10.2
=TU 10.2
=TU 10.2
=TU
+LP01 1 2 PE S 3 4 PE S
-X30
S1 79.0
-W27.1 -W27.2
2x1² 1 2 Sh 2x1² 1 2 Sh
+ - + -
I I
P P
P & I POS. 27.1 P & I POS. 27.2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
ENTRADAS ANALOGICAS ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 ANALOGE EINGÄNGE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-62A2 -62A2 -62A2 -62A2
PRESION DE VAPOR DE DIFERENCIA DE PRESIÓN SALIR DE LA PRESION DE PRESIÓN SEPARADOR

EXTRACCIÓN DE VAPOR BP VAPOR NIEBLA DE ACEITE
ENTNAHMEDAMPFDRUCK DIFFERENZDAMPFDRUCK ND ABDAMPFDRUCK DRUCK

ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER
PEW264 62.2 PEW266 62.2 PEW268 62.2 PEW270 62.2

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
78.9 M M 80.0
PEW264-
53.4 PEW264+
53.4
PEW264S
L+5 53.4 L+5
78.9 80.0
-X30
5 6 PE S 7 8 PE S 9 10 PE S 11 12 PE S
-W-X30-1
18G1,5² 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H05VVC4V5-K
S1.1 S1.1
78.9 80.0
=TU 10.3
=TU 10.3
=TU 10.4
=TU 10.4
=TU 10.5
=TU 10.5
=TU 10.5
=TU 10.5
=TU 10.6
=TU 10.6
=TU 10.6
=TU 10.7
=TU 10.7
=TU 10.8
=TU 10.8
=TU 10.8
=TU
+LP01 5 6 PE S 7 8 PE S 9 10 PE S 11 12 PE S
-X30
S1 S1
78.9 80.0
-W27.3 -W27.4 -W27.5 -W56.1
2x1² 1 2 Sh 2x1² 1 2 Sh 2x1² 1 2 Sh 2x1² 1 2 Sh
H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K
+ - + - + - + -
I I I I
P P P P
P & I POS. 27.3 P & I POS. 27.4 P & I POS. 27.5 P & I POS. 56.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-63A2 -63A2 -63A2 -63A2
MONITORIZACION DE RESERVA HOTWELL NIVEL TEMPERATURA DE RODETE

VIBRACIONES
SCHWINGUNG GETRIEBE RESERVE FÜLLSTAND HOTWELL LAUFRADTEMPERATUR

KONDENSATOR
PEW272 63.2 PEW274 63.2 PEW276 63.2 PEW278 63.2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
79.9 M M 90.0 31.7 TEMP.85.OUT+

TEMP.85.OUT-
VIB.OUT+ 31.7
31.3
31.3 VIB.OUT-
VIB.IN TEMP.85-3
31.3 31.7
31.7 TEMP.85-2
L+5 L+5 TEMP.85-1
79.9 96.0 31.7
-X30
31 32 33 PE S
-X30 -80A5 + - + -
13 14 PE S 15 16 17 PE S 10 12 7 8I 9
Out -W-X30-28
In 18G1,5² 4 5 6
2 3
-W-X30-1 + - TV500L H05VVC4V5-K
18G1,5² 13 14 15 16 17 PE Sh S3.1
84.5
H05VVC4V5-K LEVELS
44.7
LEVEL+
S1.1 44.7 LEVEL-
=TU 12.2
=TU 12.2
=TU 12.3
=TU 12.3
=TU 12.3
79.8 44.7
=TU 11.1
=TU 11.1
=TU 11.1
=TU 11.1
=TU 11.3
=TU 11.3
=TU 11.3
=TU 11.4
=TU 11.4
=TU
+LP01 31 32 33 PE S
=TU -X30 S3
84.5
+LP01 13 14 PE S 15 16 17 PE S
-X30 -W85
S1
79.8 4G1² 1 2 3 Sh
-W34 H05VVC4V5-K
2x1² 1 2 Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
+ -
I
mm/s
PT100
P & I POS. 34
P & I POS. 85
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-63A2 -63A2 -63A2 -63A2
RESERVA RESERVA RESERVA RESERVA
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE
PEW280 63.2 PEW282 63.2 PEW284 63.2 PEW286 63.2

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-64A2 -64A2 -64A2 -64A2
TEMPERATURA DE TEMPERATURA DE TEMPERATURA DE TEMPERATURA DE

RODAMIENTO TURBINA 1 RODAMIENTO TURBINA 2 RODAMIENTO TURBINA 3 RODAMIENTO TURBINA 4
TURBINENLAGER- TURBINENLAGER- TURBINENLAGER- TURBINENLAGER-

TEMPERATUR 1 TEMPERATUR 2 TEMPERATUR 3 TEMPERATUR 4
PEW288 64.2 PEW290 64.2 PEW292 64.2 PEW294 64.2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
-X31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 33 PE S
-W-X31-1
18G1² 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
=TU
+JB100
-X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PE S
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-64A2 -64A2 -64A2 -64A2
TEMPERATURA DE TEMPERATURA DE TEMPERATURA DE TEMPERATURA DE

RODAMIENTO TURBINA 5 RODAMIENTO TURBINA 6 RODAMIENTO TURBINA 7 RODAMIENTO TURBINA 8
TURBINENLAGER- TURBINENLAGER- TURBINENLAGER- TURBINENLAGER-

TEMPERATUR 5 TEMPERATUR 6 TEMPERATUR 7 TEMPERATUR 8
PEW296 64.2 PEW298 64.2 PEW300 64.2 PEW302 64.2

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
-X31 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 PE S
-W-X31-17
18G1² 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
=TU
+JB100
-X1 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 PE S
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-65A2 -65A2 -65A2 -65A2
Channel 28
Channel 25 Channel 26 Channel 27
RESERVA
TEMPERATURA DE TEMPERATURA DE TEMPERATURA DE VAPOR
RODAMIENTO TURBINA 9 RODAMIENTO TURBINA 10 FRESCO
TURBINENLAGER- TURBINENLAGER- FRISCHDAMPFTEMPERATUR RESERVE

TEMPERATUR 9 TEMPERATUR 10
PEW310 65.2
PEW304 65.2 PEW306 65.2 PEW308 65.2
16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
-X30
-X31 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 PE S 28 29 30 PE S
-W-X30-28
-W-X31-35 18G1,5² 1 2 3
12G1² 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 16 17 PE Sh H05VVC4V5-K
H05VVC4V5-K
80.9 S3.1 S3.1 85.0
=TU 12.1
=TU 12.1
=TU 12.1
=TU 12.1
=TU 12.1
=TU
=TU
+JB101 +LP01
5 6 7 8 13 14 15 16 PE S -X30 28 29 30 PE S
-X1 S3 S3
80.9 85.0
-W136
4G1² 1 2 3 Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
PT100 PT100
PT100
P & I POS. 84.9 P & I POS. 84.10 P & I POS. 136
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-65A2 -65A2 -65A2 -65A2
RESERVA RESERVA ACEITE TEMPERATURA RESERVA
RESERVE RESERVE ÖLTEMPERATUR RESERVE
PEW312 65.2 PEW314 65.2 PEW316 65.2 PEW318 65.2

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
-X30
34 35 36 PE S 37 38 39 PE S 40 41 42 PE S 43 44 PE S
-W-X30-28
18G1,5² 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
84.7 S3.1
=TU 12.4
=TU 12.4
=TU 12.4
=TU 12.4
=TU 12.5
=TU 12.5
=TU 12.6
=TU 12.6
=TU 12.6
=TU 12.6
=TU 12.7
=TU 12.7
=TU 12.7
=TU 12.7
=TU 12.8
=TU 12.9
=TU 12.9
=TU 12.9
=TU 12.9
=TU
+LP01
-X30 34 35 36 PE S 37 38 39 PE S 40 41 42 PE S 43 44 PE S
S3
84.7
-W87
4G1² 1 2 3 Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
PT100
P & I POS. 87
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-66A2 -66A2 -66A2 -66A2
TEMPERATURA GENERADOR TEMPERATURA GENERADOR TEMPERATURA GENERADOR TEMPERATURA DODAMIENTO

BOBINADO L1 BOBINADO L2 BOBINADO L3 DE GENERADOR A
TEMPERATUR TEMPERATUR TEMPERATUR TEMPERATUR

GENERATORWICKLUNG L1 GENERATORWICKLUNG L2 GENERATORWICKLUNG L3 GENERATORLAGER A
PEW320 66.2 PEW322 66.2 PEW324 66.2 PEW326 66.2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
S4.2
87.1
-X32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
-W-X32-1
25G1,5² 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H05VVC4V5-K
S4.1
87.1
+GENO
1R1
1R1
1R2
2R1
2R1
2R2
3R1
3R1
3R2
7R1
7R1
7R2
-X
S4
87.1
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-66A2 -66A2 -66A2 -66A2
TEMPERATURA DODAMIENTO RESERVA GENERADOR TEMPERATURA RESERVA

DE GENERADOR B COOLING AIR SALIDA
TEMPERATUR RESERVA GENERATOR TEMPERATUR RESERVE

GENERATORLAGER B KÜHLLUFT AUSTRITT
PEW328 66.2 PEW330 66.2 PEW332 66.2 PEW334 66.2

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
S4.2
86.9
-X32 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 PE S
-W-X32-1
25G1,5² 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
S4.1
86.9
10R1
10R1
10R2
+GENO
8R1
8R1
8R2
PE
-X
S
S4
86.9
PT100 PT100
P & I POS. 110.2 P & I POS. 112
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
SPARE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
SPARE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2

M 40.0 M 40.1 M 40.2 M 40.3 M 40.4 M 40.5 M 40.6 M 40.7
Digital Output Digital Output Digital Output Digital Output Digital Output Digital Output Digital Output Digital Output
CUERNO PLC O.K. LAMPADA TEST REINICIAR COLECTIVA DE FALLOS COLECTIVA DE FALLOS MECHANICA DE ERROR MECHANICA DE ERROR
ALARMA STOP ALARMA STOP
HUPE SPS O.K. LAMPENTEST RESET SAMMELALARM SAMMELTRIP MECHANIK ALARM MECHANIK TRIP
A32.0 70.2 A32.1 70.2 A32.2 70.2 A32.3 70.2 A32.4 70.2 A32.5 70.2 A32.6 70.2 A32.7 70.2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
X1
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-90H0 -90K1 -90K3 -90K4 -90K5 -90K6 -90K7 -90K8 -90K9
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
M X2 M
80.6 91.0
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 13 14 34.2 12 11 12 11
24 113.0 24 39.8 24 23.8 24 110.1 24 110.2 23 24 24 110.3 24 110.4
49.0
22 21 22 21 22 21 46.1 22 21 22 21 33 34 56.1 22 21 22 21
34 34 34 34 34 43 44 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31
44 44 44 44 44 44 44
42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
SALIDAS DIGITALES ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 DIGITALE AUSGÄNGE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2 -70A2

M 41.0 M 41.1 M 41.2 M 41.3 M 41.4 M 41.5 M 41.6 M 41.7
ELECTRICOS DE ERROR ELECTRICOS DE ERROR BOMBA DE ACEITE ON VALVULA DE SEGURIDAD TURBINA START TURBINA STOP TURBINA LISTO PARA DESCARGAR AUTOMATICO
ALARMA STOP DESPEGAR
ELEKTRIK ALARM ELEKTRIK TRIP ÖLPUMPE EIN SSV EIN TURBINE START TURBINE STOP TURBINE STARTBEREIT TURBINE ENTLASTEN
A33.0 70.2 A33.1 70.2 A33.2 70.2 A33.3 70.2 A33.4 70.2 A33.5 70.2 A33.6 70.2 A33.7 70.2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-91K1 -91K2 -91K3 -91K4 -91K5 -91K6 -91K7 -91K9
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
M M
90.9 92.0
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11
24 110.6 24 110.7 24 112.2 24 56.0 24 46.5 24 46.9 24 110.2 24 47.4
22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31
44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2

M 42.0 M 42.1 M 42.2 M 42.3 M 42.4 M 42.5 M 42.6 M 42.7
VALVULA DE SEGURIDAD VALVULA DE SEGURIDAD ENTRADA DE GAS BOMBA BOMBA DE BOMBA DE BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 BOMBA DE
DE VAPOR DE PRESIÓN DE INYECCIÓN DE AGUA 100.1 ENCENDER CONDENSADORES 1 CONDENSADORES 2 POSENFRIAMIENTO
DAMPFDRUCK BOOSTER WASSEREINSPRITZUNG GASEINLASS PUMPE KONDENSATPUMPE 1 EIN KONDENSATPUMPE 2 EIN VAKUUMPUMPE 1 EIN VAKUUMPUMPE 2 EIN NACHKÜHLPUMPE EIN
VENTIL BOOSTER VENTIL 100.1 EIN
A36.0 71.2 A36.1 71.2 A36.2 71.2 A36.3 71.2 A36.4 71.2 A36.5 71.2 A36.6 71.2 A36.7 71.2
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-92K1 -92K2 -92K3 -92K4 -92K5 -92K6 -92K7 -92K9
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
M M
91.9 93.0
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11
110.5 110.8 111.1 116.2 116.7 117.2 117.7 113.2
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21
110.6 110.9
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31
44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2 -71A2

M 43.0 M 43.1 M 43.2 M 43.3 M 43.4 M 43.5 M 43.6 M 43.7
ENTRADA DE GAS BOMBA ACEITE DE NIEBLA W505 PERMISSIVE CONDENSADOR ENCENDER SINCRONIZACION AVISO EMPIEZA RESERVA DESCONECTADOR
100.2 ENCENDER SEPERATOR PRPARATE LAMPA GENERADOR OFF
GASEINLASS PUMPE ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER EIN W505 PERMISSIVE KONDENSATOR EIN SYNCHRONISATION STARTVORBEREITUNG RESERVE GENERATORSCHALTER
100.2 EIN SIGNALLAMPE OFFEN
A37.0 71.2 A37.1 71.2 A37.2 71.2 A37.3 71.2 A37.4 71.2 A37.5 71.2 A37.6 71.2 A37.7 71.2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
COND 111.7
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
-93K1 -93K2 -93K3 -93K4 -93K5 -93K6 -93K7 -93K9
A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2
M M
92.9 96.0
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11
24 111.3 24 115.4 24 46.6 24 24 23.7 24 54.9 24 24 34.2
22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31
44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+5 L+5
80.6 97.0
93.9 M M 97.0
-X29
16 32
-W-X29-15
18G1,5² 2 11
H05VV5-F
=TU 8.1
=TU 8.3
=TU 8.5
=TU 8.6
=TU 8.9
=TU 9.2
=TU 9.1
=TU
+LP01
-X29 16 19 22 25 28 31 32
LP01+
97.0
-W46 -W47.1 -W55 -W64.1
4G1² 1 4G1² 1 4G1² 1 5G1² 1 4
H05VV5-F H05VV5-F H05VV5-F H05VV5-F GN RD
P< P P< P P<< P P> P
L< L L<< L
P & I P & I P & I P & I P & I
Pos. 46 Pos. 47.1 Pos. 47.2 Pos. 55 Pos. 64.1
-W46 -W47.1 -W47.2 -W55 -W64.1
4G1² 3 2 4G1² 3 2 4G1² 3 2 4G1² 3 2 5G1² 3 2
H05VV5-F H05VV5-F H05VV5-F H05VV5-F H05VV5-F
=TU 8.1
=TU 8.1
=TU 8.3
=TU 8.3
=TU 8.4
=TU 8.4
=TU 8.6
=TU 8.6
=TU 8.7
=TU 8.8
=TU 9.1
=TU 9.1
=TU
+LP01
-X29 14 15 17 18 20 21 23 24 26 27 29 30
-W-X29-15
18G1,5² 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
H05VV5-F
-X29
15 18 21 23 24 26 27 29 30
-72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2

2 72.2 3 72.2 4 72.2 5 72.2 6 72.2 7 72.2 8 72.2 9 72.2
E40.0 E40.1 E40.2 E40.3 E40.4 E40.5 E40.6 E40.7
PRESION DE ACEITE PRESION DE ACEITE PRESION DE ACEITE NIVEL DE ACEITE NIVEL DE ACEITE RESERVA RESERVA CONTROL DE FILTRO DE
BOMA DE ACEITE ALARMA STOP ACCIDENTE MIN. ACCIDENTE MINMIN. ACEITE
ÖLDRUCK E-PUMPE ÖLDRUCK ALARM ÖLDRUCK STOP ÖLLEVEL MIN. ÖLLEVEL MINMIN. RESERVE RESERVE DIFF.-DRUCK ÖLFILTER
M 10.0 M 10.1 M 10.2 M 10.3 M 10.4 M 10.5 M 10.6 M 10.7

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
ENTRADAS DIGITALES ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 DIGITALE EINGABE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+5 L+5
96.9 98.0
96.9 M M 110.0
11 11 11
-33K7 -33K9 -34K2 03

-34K4
12 14 12 14 12 14 04
=TU 9.3
=TU 9.5
=TU 9.6
-X91
7 9
=TU
+LP01 -W-X91-7
LP01+ -X29 35 38 41 4G1,5² 1 3
96.9 HO5VV5-F
+TB1
-X3 13 15
P & I 1 3
POS. 138
LZA++
0MAG10CL301
2
+TB1
=TU 9.3
=TU 9.3
=TU 9.4
=TU 9.4
=TU 9.6
=TU 9.6
=TU 9.6
=TU 9.6
-X3 14
-W-X91-7
=TU
4G1,5² 2
+LP01 HO5VV5-F
-X29 33 34 36 37 39 40 42 PE
-W-X29-15
18G1,5² 12 13 14 15 16 17 PE -X91
8 PE
H05VV5-F
-X29
34 36 37 39 40 42 PE
-72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2 -72A2

12 72.2 13 72.2 14 72.2 15 72.2 16 72.2 17 72.2 18 72.2 19 72.2
E41.0 E41.1 E41.2 E41.3 E41.4 E41.5 E41.6 E41.7
SPARE SPARE SPARE HOTWELL NIVEL MAXMAX SINCRONIZACIÓN MANUAL SINCRONIZACIÓN LIBERAR INTERRUPTOR LIBERAR DISYUNTOR
AUTOMÁTICA DISYUNTOR GENERADOR GENERADOR
RESERVE RESERVE RESERVE HOTWELL NIVEAU MAXMAX MANUELLE AUTOMATISCHE GENERATORSCHALTER GENERATORSCHALTER
SYNCHRONISATION SYNCHRONISATION FREIGABE FREIGEGEBEN
M 11.0 M 11.1 M 11.2 M 11.3 M 11.4 M 11.5 M 11.6 M 11.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+5 L+5
97.9 99.0
11 11
33 13 33 33 33 33 -44K8 -44K9
-26K1 -26K3 -27K5 -27K6 -28K4 -28K5
34 14 34 34 34 34 12 14 12 14
-73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2

2 73.2 3 73.2 4 73.2 5 73.2 6 73.2 7 73.2 8 73.2 9 73.2
E44.0 E44.1 E44.2 E44.3 E44.4 E44.5 E44.6 E44.7
VOLTAJE/FREQUENZA LA FISURA VECTOR SOBRECORRIENTE CORTOCIRCUITO MOTORRIZACION DEL SOBRECARGA HOTWELL NIVEL MIN HOTWELL NIVEL MAX
RED GENERADOR
NETZSPANNUNG / VEKTORSPRUNG ÜBERSTROM KURZSCHLUSS RÜCKLEISTUNG ÜBERLAST HOTWELL NIVEAU MIN HOTWELL NIVEAU MAX
NETZFREQUENZ
M 12.0 M 12.1 M 12.2 M 12.3 M 12.4 M 12.5 M 12.6 M 12.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
98.9 L+5 L+5 100.0
11 11
-38F7 -35F5
11 33 21 11
-120K6 12 14
-30K7 14 12
-33K1 -22K9
13 34
12 14 14 12 22 24 12 14
-16K8
14 -35F7
11
11
-16K6
12 14
-73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2 -73A2

12 73.2 13 73.2 14 73.2 15 73.2 16 73.2 17 73.2 18 73.2 19 73.2
E45.0 E45.1 E45.2 E45.3 E45.4 E45.5 E45.6 E45.7
460VAC O.K. UPS 230VAC O.K. VOLTAJE PILA NO O.K. EXTERIOR DE FALLA FUENTE DE RESERVA SINCRONIZACIÓN LISTO GPU FALLOS
ALIMENTACIÓN
GENERADOR DISTURBED
460VAC O.K. USV 230VAC O.K. BATTERIE EXTERNER FEHLER SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNG RESERVE SYNCHRONISIERBEREIT GPU GESTÖRT
SPANNUNGSFEHLER GENERATOR GESTÖRT
M 13.0 M 13.1 M 13.2 M 13.3 M 13.4 M 13.5 M 13.6 M 13.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
99.9 L+5 L+5 101.0
43 21 13
-42K2 -55K3 -54S9
44 14
22 24
E48.1 Warte Schrank VorOrt START

43.9 54.4 54.4 54.4 54.6
-74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2

2 74.2 3 74.2 4 74.2 5 74.2 6 74.2 7 74.2 8 74.2 9 74.2
E48.0 E48.1 E48.2 E48.3 E48.4 E48.5 E48.6 E48.7
EMERGENCIA STOP CASO FUSIBLE TURBINA OPERACION TURBINA OPERACION TURBINA OPERACION PARADA NORMAL PREPARACION TURBINA TURBINA START
SALA DE CONTROL ARMARIO ATRIL START
NOT-AUS SICHERUNGSFEHLER BEDIENUNG VON WARTE BEDIENUNG VOM BEDIENUNG VON NORMAL STOP STARTVORBEREITUNG TURBINE START
STEUERSCHRANK ÖRTLICHER
BEDIENEINHEIT
M 14.0 M 14.1 M 14.2 M 14.3 M 14.4 M 14.5 M 14.6 M 14.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+5 L+5
100.9 102.0
11 31 21 11 11
-X91
1
-49K1 -48K5 -48K8 -48K1 -48K3
-W-X91-1
12 14 7G1,5 1 32 34 22 24 12 14 12 14
H05VV5-F
=COND =COND
+TB1 16 +TB1 19
-X3
PS-0LCA11CP051 -X3
PS-0LCA12CP051
3 3
P P
P>> P>>
1 2 1 2
=COND =COND
+TB1 17 18 +TB1 20 21 PE
-X3 -X3
-W-X91-1
7G1,5 2 3 4 5 6 PE
H05VV5-F
-X91 -X91
2 3 4 5 6 PE
-74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2 -74A2

12 74.2 13 74.2 14 74.2 15 74.2 16 74.2 17 74.2 18 74.2 19 74.2
E49.0 E49.1 E49.2 E49.3 E49.4 E49.5 E49.6 E49.7
n > 1750 PRESIÓN CONMUTACIÓN PRESIÓN CONMUTACIÓN n > 10 % RESERVA n > 0 / RUN = 1 W505: STOP W505: ALARMA
DE BOMBA DE DE BOMBA DE
CONDENSADOR 1 CONDENSADOR 2
n > 1750 DRUCKSCHALTER DRUCKSCHALTER n > 10 % RESERVE n > 0 / RUN = 1 W505: TRIP W505: ALARM
KONDENSATPUMPE 1 KONDENSATPUMPE 2
M 15.0 M 15.1 M 15.2 M 15.3 M 15.4 M 15.5 M 15.6 M 15.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
101.9 L+5 L+5 103.0
Auto
Man
2/4
0
41 11 31 41
-56K9 -119F6 -34K9 -36K8

42 44 -102S5 1 3 14 12 32 34 42 44
PKZGH
21 119.0
-58K9
22 24
-75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2

2 75.2 3 75.2 4 75.2 5 75.2 6 75.2 7 75.2 8 75.2 9 75.2
E52.0 E52.1 E52.2 E52.3 E52.4 E52.5 E52.6 E52.7
PROTECCION DE EXCESO RESERVA RESERVA CONDENDENSADOR MAN CONDENDENSADOR AUTO GENERADOR DE DISYUNTOR GENERADOR DISYUNTOR LA RED
DE VELOCIDAD CALENTADOR AVERIA CONNECTADO CONNECTADO
ÜBERDREHZAHLSCHUTZ RESERVE RESERVE KONDENSATOR MAN KONDENSATOR AUTO GENERATORHEIZUNG GENERATORSCHALTER EIN NETZSCHALTER EIN
GESTÖRT
M 16.0 M 16.1 M 16.2 M 16.3 M 16.4 M 16.5 M 16.6 M 16.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
102.9 L+5 L+5 104.0
PKZHOP 112.0 PKZNP 113.0
Auto
Auto
Man
Man
2/4 2/4
0
11
-112Q4 13 -113Q6 13
-112K2 13
1 3
-113K2 1 3
14
12 14 -103S3 14 14 -103S8
112.2 113.3
113.0
11
-112K9
12 14
E53.1 E53.5
112.0 113.0
-75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2 -75A2

12 75.2 13 75.2 14 75.2 15 75.2 16 75.2 17 75.2 18 75.2 19 75.2
E53.0 E53.1 E53.2 E53.3 E53.4 E53.5 E53.6 E53.7
BOMBA DE ACEITE BOMBA DE ACEITE BOMBA DE ACEITE BOMBA DE ACEITE BOMBA DE BOMBA DE BOMBA DE BOMBA DE
AVERIA CONECTADO MANUAL AUTOMATICO POSENFRIAMIENTO POSENFRIAMIENTO POSENFRIAMIENTO POSENFRIAMIENTO
AVERIA CONECTADO MANUAL AUTOMATICO
ÖLPUMPE GESTÖRT ÖLPUMPE LÄUFT ÖLPUMPE MANUELL ÖLPUMPE AUTOMATIK NACHKÜHLPUMPE GESTÖRT NACHKÜHLPUMPE LÄUFT NACHKÜHLPUMPE MANUELL NACHKÜHLPUMPE
AUTOMATIK
M 17.0 M 17.1 M 17.2 M 17.3 M 17.4 M 17.5 M 17.6 M 17.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+5 L+5
103.9 105.0
PKZONA PKZKP1
115.0 116.0
Auto
Auto
Man
Man
13 2/4 13 2/4
0
-115Q5 13 -116Q3 13
-115K4 -116K2
14 14
-104S3 1 3 -104S8 1 3
14 14
115.4 116.2
E56.1 E56.5
115.0 116.0
-76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2

2 76.2 3 76.2 4 76.2 5 76.2 6 76.2 7 76.2 8 76.2 9 76.2
E56.0 E56.1 E56.2 E56.3 E56.4 E56.5 E56.6 E56.7
NIEBLA DE ACEITE NIEBLA DE ACEITE NIEBLA DE ACEITE NIEBLA DE ACEITE BOMBA DE BOMBA DE BOMBA DE BOMBA DE
SEPARADOR AVERIA SEPARADOR CONECTADO SEPARADOR MANUAL SEPARADOR AUTOMATICO CONDENSADORES 1 CONDENSADORES 1 CONDENSADORES 1 CONDENSADORES 1
AVERIA CONECTADO MANUAL AUTOMATICO
ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER KONDENSATPUMPE 1 KONDENSATPUMPE 1 KONDENSATPUMPE 1 KONDENSATPUMPE 1

GESTÖRT LÄUFT MANUELL AUTOMATIK GESTÖRT LÄUFT MANUELL AUTOMATIK
M 18.0 M 18.1 M 18.2 M 18.3 M 18.4 M 18.5 M 18.6 M 18.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+5 L+5
104.9 106.0
PKZKP2 PKZVP1 PKZVP2

116.0 117.0 117.0
Auto
Man
13 13 2/4 13
0
-116Q8 13 -117Q3 13 -117Q8 13
-116K7 -117K2 -117K7
14 14 14
-105S6 1 3
14 14 14
117.2
E57.1 E57.3 E57.7

116.5 117.0 117.5
-76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2 -76A2

12 76.2 13 76.2 14 76.2 15 76.2 16 76.2 17 76.2 18 76.2 19 76.2
E57.0 E57.1 E57.2 E57.3 E57.4 E57.5 E57.6 E57.7
BOMBA DE BOMBA DE BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 BOMBA DE VACÍO 1 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2
CONDENSADORES 2 CONDENSADORES 2 AVERIA CONECTADO MANUAL AUTOMATICO AVERIA CONECTADO
AVERIA CONECTADO
KONDENSATPUMPE 2 KONDENSATPUMPE 2 VAKUUMPUMPE 1 GESTÖRT VAKUUMPUME 1 LÄUFT VAKUUMPUMPE 1 MANUELL VAKUUMPUMPE 1 VAKUUMPUMPE 2 GESTÖRT VAKUUMPUME 2 LÄUFT
GESTÖRT LÄUFT AUTOMATIK
M 19.0 M 19.1 M 19.2 M 19.3 M 19.4 M 19.5 M 19.6 M 19.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+5 L+5
105.9 107.0
Auto
Auto
Man
Man
0 2/4 2/4 2/4 2/4
1
0
2
1
0
2
-106S1 1 3 -106S3 1 3 -106S6 1 3 -106S8 1 3
117.7 116.7
-77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2

2 77.2 3 77.2 4 77.2 5 77.2 6 77.2 7 77.2 8 77.2 9 77.2
E60.0 E60.1 E60.2 E60.3 E60.4 E60.5 E60.6 E60.7
BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 BOMBA DE VACÍO 2 BOMBA DE BOMBA DE PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE PRESELECCIÓN BOMBA DE
MANUAL AUTOMATICO CONDENSADORES 2 CONDENSADORES 2 CONDENSADORES 1 CONDENSADORES 2 VACÍO 1 VACÍO 2
MANUAL AUTOMATICO
VAKUUMPUMPE 2 MANUELL VAKUUMPUMPE 2 KONDENSATPUMPE 2 KONDENSATPUMPE 2 VORAUSWAHL VORAUSWAHL VORAUSWAHL VORAUSWAHL

AUTOMATIK MANUELL AUTOMATIK KONDENSATPUMPE 1 KONDENSATPUMPE 2 VAKUUMPUMPE 1 VAKUUMPUMPE 2
M 20.0 M 20.1 M 20.2 M 20.3 M 20.4 M 20.5 M 20.6 M 20.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+5 L+5
106.9
-X90
1
-W-X90-1
18G2,5² 1
H05VV5-F
=COND
+JB1 8 13 18 23
-X1
1 1 1 1
0MAJ21AA151
0MAJ22AA151
0MAJ21AA101
0MAJ22AA101
2 3 5 6 2 3 5 6 2 3 5 6 2 3 5 6
=COND
+JB1 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27
-X1
-W-X90-1
18G2,5² 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H05VV5-F
-X90
2 3 PE 4 5 PE 6 7 PE 8 9 PE
-77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2 -77A2

12 77.2 13 77.2 14 77.2 15 77.2 16 77.2 17 77.2 18 77.2 19 77.2
E61.0 E61.1 E61.2 E61.3 E61.4 E61.5 E61.6 E61.7
VÁLVULA 0MAJ21AA151 VÁLVULA 0MAJ21AA151 VÁLVULA 0MAJ22AA151 VÁLVULA 0MAJ22AA151 COMPUERTA 0MAJ21AA101 COMPUERTA 0MAJ21AA101 COMPUERTA 0MAJ22AA101 COMPUERTA 0MAJ22AA101
CERRADA ABIERTA CERRADA ABIERTA CERRADA ABIERTA CERRADA ABIERTA
VENTIL 0MAJ21AA151 VENTIL 0MAJ21AA151 VENTIL 0MAJ22AA151 VENTIL 0MAJ22AA151 KLAPPE 0MAJ21AA101 KLAPPE 0MAJ21AA101 KLAPPE 0MAJ22AA101 KLAPPE 0MAJ22AA101
GESCHLOSSEN GEÖFFNET GESCHLOSSEN GEÖFFNET GESCHLOSSEN GEÖFFNET GESCHLOSSEN GEÖFFNET
M 21.0 M 21.1 M 21.2 M 21.3 M 21.4 M 21.5 M 21.6 M 21.7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MANAGER D A TE 11.07.12 D E S C R I P T I O N / BENENNUNG:
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DESIGNER
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
TESTER
GEPRÜFT
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
A m R i ngofen 6 D -41334 Nettetal
S i emens T urbomachinery Equipment GmbH Rio Seco Peru PAGE:
INDEX DESCRIPTION D A TE NAME E LD ATEX NO.: 108
NR. ÄNDERUNG DATUM NAME Eldatex Nr.:
12-06-033 RESERVE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 302 776-0 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 B LA TT:
1.0 Workshop 12.11.12 MF C LI E N T NO.

BBF00069 Fax.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 302 776-29 67227 Frankenthal Z-166164 FROM:
159
Kunden Nr.: VON:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MANAGER D A TE 11.07.12 D E S C R I P T I O N / BENENNUNG:
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DESIGNER
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
TESTER
GEPRÜFT
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
A m R i ngofen 6 D -41334 Nettetal
S i emens T urbomachinery Equipment GmbH Rio Seco Peru PAGE:
INDEX DESCRIPTION D A TE NAME E LD ATEX NO.: 109
NR. ÄNDERUNG DATUM NAME Eldatex Nr.:
12-06-033 RESERVE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 302 776-0 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 B LA TT:
1.0 Workshop 12.11.12 MF C LI E N T NO.

BBF00069 Fax.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 302 776-29 67227 Frankenthal Z-166164 FROM:
159
Kunden Nr.: VON:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11 11 11 11 11
11
-90K5 -90K6 -90K8 -90K9 -91K1 -91K2
12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14
12 14
-X80 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
COLECTIVA DE COLECTIVA DE MECANICA DE MECANICA DE ELECTRICOS DE ELECTRICOS DE

FALLOS: ALARMA FALLOS: STOP ERROR: ALARMA ERROR: STOP ERROR: ALARMA ERROR: STOP
SAMMELALARM SAMMELTRIP MECHANIK ALARM MECHANIK TRIP ELECTRIK ALARM ELECTRIK TRIP
L+1 L+1
56.9 111.0
97.9 M M 111.0
31 11 31 11 21 11 21
-48K8 -91K7 -33K5 -92K1 -92K1 -92K2 -92K2

32 34 12 14 32 34 12 14 22 24 12 14 22 24
-X80 -X86 -X86

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 PE 1 2 PE 3 4 5 PE 6 7 PE 8 9 10 PE
TURBINA EN MARCHA TURBINA LISTO PUESTA EN PARALELO VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE VAPOR DE PRESIÓN VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE INYECCIÓN DE AGUA
PARA DESPEGAR
TURBINE LÄUFT PARALLELBETRIEB BOOSTER VENTIL DAMPFDRUCK BOOSTER VENTIL WASSEREINSPRITZUNG
TURBINE STARTBEREIT
OPCIÓN / OPTION
PRESIÓN DE LA ESTACIÓN REDUCCIÓN / DRUCKREDUZIERSTATION
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
CONTACTO SIN POTENCIAL ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 POT.-FREIE KONTAKTE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
L+1 L+1
110.9 M M 112.0
110.9 112.0
54.9 LP LP 112.0
11 11
-92K3 -93K1
12 14 12 14
-X90 -X90 -X90

10 11 PE 12 13 PE 14 15 16 17 PE
-W-X90-1
18G2,5² 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PE
H05VV5-F
=COND =COND =COND

+JB1 1 2 PE +JB1 3 4 PE +JB1 PE
-X1 -X1 -X1
COND
93.5
+GE
-XLP
13
X1 LED
0MAJ21AA151 0MAJ22AA151 BLANCO
-111H8
X2 LED
WEISS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
VÁLVULAS DE CONDENSACIÓN ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 VENTILE KONDENSATOR Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V.L1 V.L1
16.9 V.L2 V.L2 115.0
16.9 115.0
16.9 V.L3 V.L3 115.0
L+1 L+1
111.9 LP LP 113.0
111.9 113.0
E53.1
103.2
103.2
PKZHOP -112K2
-XV
L1 L2 L3
22 24
6/8 1 3 5 13 21
-103S3
-112Q4 I >I >I >
14 22
21
103.1
5 7 30,5A 2 4 6
-112A6
11 L1 L2 L3 A1 1 14
SIEMENS 3RW4028-2BB05
-91K3 T1 T2 T3 A2 13
12 14
-X05
1 2 3 PE
-W-X05-1
4G6² 1 2 3 PE
NYM-J
U V W PE
-XLP M
17,5kW
3
5
X1 LED
A1 BLANCO A1
P & I Pos. 59.1
-112K2 -112H3 -112K9
A2 X2 LED A2
WEISS
111.9 M M 113.0
14 14
12 11 12 11
24 103.1 24 103.2
22 21 112.8 22 21
34 34
32 31 32 31
44 44
42 41 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
BOMBA DE ACEITE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 ÖLPUMPE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
44.9 UPS.230V.N UPS.230V.N 120.0
44.9 120.0
112.9 L+1 L+1
LP LP
112.9 E53.5 115.0
103.7
PKZNP
103.7
1 3 5 13 21
13
-42K4 -113Q6 14 22
14 I >I >I >
103.5
4,3A 2 4 6
11 10/12
-90K1 -103S8
12 14 9 11
6/8 1 3 5
-103S8 -113K2
2 4 6
5 7
-X05
11 4 5 6 7 PE
-113K0 -W-X05-4
12 14 3x6² 1 2 PE
NYM-J
U1 U2 PE
660 W M
4,3A 1~
12 14 +Mont
-XLP
-92K9
6
11
X1 LED
A1 BLANCO
A1
-113K0 -113K2 -113H4
A2 A2 X2 LED
WEISS
M M
112.9 115.0
14 1 2 113.6
12 11 3 4
113.2 113.6
24 5 6 113.6
22 21 13 14
103.6
34
32 31
44
42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 NACHKÜHLPUMPE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V.L1 V.L1
112.9 116.0
112.9 V.L2 V.L2 116.0
V.L3 V.L3
112.9 LP LP 116.0
113.9 116.0
PKZONA
104.2
-XV
L1 L2 L3
43
1 3 5
-42K3 13 23
44
-115Q5 I >I >I > 14 24
104.1
0,5A 2 4 6
1 3 5
-115K4
2 4 6
6/8
-104S3
-X05
5 7 8 9 10 PE
-W-X05-8
4G1,5² 1 2 3 PE
NYM-J
U V W PE
E56.1
104.2 11
0,18 kW
M
3
-93K2
-XLP
12 14
7
P & I Pos. 56
LED
X1 BLANCO A1
-115H2 LED
-115K4
M X2 WEISS A2 M
113.9 116.0
1 2 115.5
3 4
115.5
5 6 115.5
13 14
104.2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
NIEBLA DE ACEITE SEPARADOR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V.L1 V.L1
115.9 117.0
115.9 V.L2 V.L2 117.0
V.L3 V.L3
115.9 LP LP 117.0
115.9 117.0
PKZKP2
105.2 PKZKP1
104.7
-XV -XV
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
53 23
1 3 5 1 3 5
-42K2 13 23 -42K4 13 23
54 24
-116Q3 I >I >I > 14 24 -116Q8 I >I >I > 14 24
104.5
105.1
7,5A 2 4 6 7,5A 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
-116K2 -116K7
2 4 6 2 4 6
6/8 6/8
-104S8 -106S3
-X05 -X05
5 7 11 12 13 PE 5 7 14 15 16 PE
-W-X05-11 -W-X05-14
4G1,5² 1 2 3 PE 4G1,5² 1 2 3 PE
NYM-J NYM-J
U V W PE U V W PE
E56.5 E57.1
104.7 105.2
11
4,6 kW
M 11
4,6 kW
M
3 3
-92K4 -92K5
-XLP -XLP
12 14 12 14
8 9
0LCB11AP001 0LCB12AP001
LED LED
X1 BLANCO A1 X1 BLANCO A1
-116H1 LED
-116K2 -116H5 LED
-116K7
M X2 WEISS A2 X2 WEISS A2 M
115.9 117.0
1 2 116.3 1 2 116.8
3 4 3 4
116.3 116.8
5 6 116.3 5 6 116.8
13 14 13 14
104.6 105.2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
BOMBA DE CONDENSADORES 1+2 ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 KONDENSATPUMPE 1+2 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V.L1 V.L1
116.9
116.9 V.L2 V.L2
V.L3 V.L3
116.9 LP LP
116.9 119.0
PKZVP2
105.9 PKZVP1
105.5
-XV -XV
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
53 33
1 3 5 1 3 5
-42K3 13 23 -42K4 13 23
54 34
-117Q3 I >I >I > 14 24 -117Q8 I >I >I > 14 24
105.3
105.7
21A 2 4 6 21A 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
-117K2 -117K7
2 4 6 2 4 6
6/8 6/8
-105S6 -106S1
-X05 -X05
5 7 17 18 19 PE 5 7 20 21 22 PE
-W-X05-17 -W-X05-20
4G6² 1 2 3 PE 4G6² 1 2 3 PE
NYM-J NYM-J
U V W PE U V W PE
E57.3 E57.7
105.5 105.9
11
13,2 kW
M 11
13,2 kW
M
3 3
-92K6 -92K7
-XLP -XLP
12 14 12 14
10 11
0MAJ21AN001 0MAJ22AN001
LED LED
X1 BLANCO A1 X1 BLANCO A1
-117H1 LED
-117K2 -117H5 LED
-117K7
M X2 WEISS A2 X2 WEISS A2 M
116.9 119.0
1 2 117.3 1 2 117.8
3 4 3 4
117.3 117.8
5 6 117.3 5 6 117.8
13 14 13 14
105.4 105.9
21 22 21 22
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
BOMBA DE VACÍO 1+2 ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 VAKUUMPUMPE 1+2 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V.L1.1 V.L1.1
16.9
117.9 LP LP
PKZGH
102.7
43
1 14 12
-42K4 -119F6
44 2
B10A 11
102.6
AUTO
MAN
2/4
0
1 3 5
-119S3 -119K3
1 3 2 4 6
-X05
23
-W-X05-23
3G1,5² 1
NYM-J
-48K8
+GENO
-HE1
41
42 44 500W
-XLP
+GENO
-HE2
12 -W-X05-23
3G1,5² 2 PE
NYM-J
LED -X05
A1 X1 BLANCO
24 PE
-119K3 -119H4 LED
A2 X2 WEISS
V.N V.N
16.9
117.9 M M
1 2 119.6
3 4
119.6
5 6
13 14 119.6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
GENERADOR DE CALENTADOR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 GENERATORHEIZUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
113.9
1 14 12
-120F1
B10A 2 11
-XIS 43.4
1
-120H1 -120H3 -120H4
. . .
. . .
. . .. . . .. . . ..
L N PE EL EN EPE L N PE EL EN EPE L N PE EL EN EPE
-XIS
2 PE
A1
-120K6
A2
UPS.230V.N UPS.230V.N
113.9
14
12 11
99.2
24
22 21
34
32 31
44
42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TC
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
PANEL LIGHT ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+CP1to3
12-06-033 SCHRANKBELEUCHTUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable externo asignación Placa de bornes: =TC+CP1to3-X01

Pagina/Seite
Kabelbelegung extern Klemmleiste: 1
External / Extern Interno / Intern
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI L -16K8 1 1 4 =TC+SAI-X L 15.1
TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI N -16K8 3 2 4 =TC+SAI-X N 15.1
TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI PE PE PE4 =TC+SAI-X PE 15.1
TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI L -15Q1 1 3 4 -16K8 2 15.1
TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI N -15Q1 5 4 4 -16K8 4 15.1
SALIDA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI L -15Q1 4 5 4 =TC+EXT-X L 15.3
SALIDA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI N -15Q1 6 6 4 =TC+EXT-X N 15.3
SALIDA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SAI PE PE PE4 =TC+EXT-X PE 15.3
F ECHA D E S C R I P C I Ó N / B EZEICHNUNG
GERENTE H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
PLACA DE BORNES -X01 ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
A m R i ngofen 6 D -41334 Nettetal S i emens T urbomachi nery Equipment GmbH Rio Seco Peru PÁGINA:
ÍNDICE DESCRIPCIÓN F ECHA NOMBRE E LD A TEX NO.: 121
Nr. BESCHREIBUNG DATUM NAME ELDATEX Nr.: 12-06-033 KLEMMLEISTE -X01 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:
1.0 Workshop 12.11.12 MF SIEMENS NO.: 67227 Frankenthal Z-166164 DE:

159
S I E M E NS Nr.: BBF00069 VON:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
N2XH
-W-X02-7 5x2,5²
H05VV-F
-W-X02-5 3G2,5²
H05VV-F
-W-X02-5 3G2,5²
N2XH
-W-X02-1 5x2,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 GENERADOR VOLTAJE L1 =CB+01-X02 1 1 WTL6/1 -18Q1 1 18.1
4 GENERADOR VOLTAJE N =CB+01-X02 4 4 WTL6/1 18.1
PE GENERADOR VOLTAJE PE =CB+01-X02 PE PE PE4 18.1
1 GENERADOR VOLTAJE en-BOBINADO e =CB+01-X02 5 5 WTL6/1 -18F2 1 18.2
2 GENERADOR VOLTAJE en-BOBINADO n =CB+01-X02 6 6 WTL6/1 -18F2 3 18.3
GENERADOR VOLTAJE en-BOBINADO PE =CB+01-X02 PE PE PE4 18.3
1 VOLTAJE LA RED L1 =CB+01-X02 7 7 WTL6/1 -18Q5 1 18.5
4 VOLTAJE LA RED N =CB+01-X02 10 10 WTL6/1 18.5
PE VOLTAJE LA RED PE =CB+01-X02 PE PE PE4 18.6
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
ÍNDICE DESCRIPCIÓN F ECHA NOMBRE E LD A TEX NO.:
Nr. BESCHREIBUNG DATUM NAME ELDATEX Nr.: 12-06-033 KLEMMLEISTE -X02 Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE: 122
BBF00069
159
S I E M E NS Nr.: VON:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
N2XH
-W-X03-7 7x2,5²
N2XH
-W-X03-1 7x2,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR MEDICIÓN L1 S1 =TC+GENO-X5 4 1 WTL6/3 -22A2 73 17.0
2 CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR MEDICIÓN L1 S2 =TC+GENO-X5 1 2 WTL6/3 -22P3 1 17.0
4 CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR MEDICIÓN L2 S2 =TC+GENO-X5 2 4 WTL6/3 -22P3.1 1 17.1
6 CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR MEDICIÓN L3 S2 =TC+GENO-X5 3 6 WTL6/3 -22P4 1 17.1
CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR MEDICIÓN PE PE PE10 17.1
1 CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR PROTECCIÓN L1 =TC+GENO-X5 10 7 WTL6/3 -27F3 1S1 17.2
CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR PROTECCIÓN PE PE PE10 17.3
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite

NYM-J
-W-X05-23 3G1,5²
NYM-J
-W-X05-20 4G6²
NYM-J
-W-X05-17 4G6²
NYM-J
-W-X05-14 4G1,5²
NYM-J
-W-X05-11 4G1,5²
NYM-J
-W-X05-8 4G1,5²
NYM-J
-W-X05-4 3x6²
NYM-J
-W-X05-1 4G6²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 P & I POS. 59.1 U 1 10 -112A6 T1 112.6
2 P & I POS. 59.1 V 2 10 -112A6 T2 112.7
3 P & I POS. 59.1 W 3 10 -112A6 T3 112.7
PE P & I POS. 59.1 PE PE PE10 112.7
BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO 4 2,5 113.6
1 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO U1 5 2,5 -113K2 4 113.6
2 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO U2 6 2,5 -113K2 6 113.6
BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO 7 2,5 113.7
PE BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO PE PE PE4 113.7
1 P & I POS. 56 U 8 2,5 -115K4 2 115.5
2 P & I POS. 56 V 9 2,5 -115K4 4 115.6
3 P & I POS. 56 W 10 2,5 -115K4 6 115.6
PE P & I POS. 56 PE PE PE4 115.6
1 0LCB11AP001 U 11 2,5 -116K2 2 116.3
2 0LCB11AP001 V 12 2,5 -116K2 4 116.4
3 0LCB11AP001 W 13 2,5 -116K2 6 116.4
PE 0LCB11AP001 PE PE PE4 116.4
1 0LCB12AP001 U 14 2,5 -116K7 2 116.8
2 0LCB12AP001 V 15 2,5 -116K7 4 116.8
3 0LCB12AP001 W 16 2,5 -116K7 6 116.8
PE 0LCB12AP001 PE PE PE4 116.9
1 0MAJ21AN001 U 17 10 -117K2 2 117.3
2 0MAJ21AN001 V 18 10 -117K2 4 117.4
3 0MAJ21AN001 W 19 10 -117K2 6 117.4
PE 0MAJ21AN001 PE PE PE10 117.4
1 0MAJ22AN001 U 20 10 -117K7 2 117.8
2 0MAJ22AN001 V 21 10 -117K7 4 117.8
3 0MAJ22AN001 W 22 10 -117K7 6 117.8
PE 0MAJ22AN001 PE PE PE10 117.9
1 GENERADOR DE CALENTADOR =TC+GENO-HE1 . 23 2,5 -119K3 2 119.6
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
NYM-J
-W-X01-32 5G25²
NYM-J
-W-X05-23 3G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
2 GENERADOR DE CALENTADOR =TC+GENO-HE2 . 24 2,5 119.6
PE GENERADOR DE CALENTADOR =TC+GENO-HE2 . PE PE4 119.7
LA ALIMENTACCIO 460VAC L1 -16T3 L1 27 2,5 -16Q3 2 16.3
LA ALIMENTACCIO 460VAC L2 28 2,5 -16Q3 4 16.3
LA ALIMENTACCIO 460VAC L3 -16T3 L3 29 2,5 -16Q3 6 16.3
LA ALIMENTACCIO 460VAC PE PE PE4 16.3
LA ALIMENTACCIO 230VAC L1 -16T3 L1 30 2,5 -16F3 1 16.3
LA ALIMENTACCIO 230VAC N -16T3 N 31 2,5 16.3
LA ALIMENTACCIO 230VAC PE PE PE4 16.3
1 SALIDA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR 230VAC L =TC+EXT-X - 32 4 -16F3 2 16.3
2 SALIDA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR 230VAC N =TC+EXT-X - 33 4 16.3
3 SALIDA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR 230VAC PE =TC+EXT-X - PE PE4 16.3
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VV-F
-W-X10-20 5G2,5²
H05VV-F
-W-X10-18 3G2,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X10-5 7G2,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X10-1 5G2,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR CERRADO =CB+01-X10 1 1 2,5 -34K7 11 34.8
2 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR CERRADO =CB+01-X10 2 2 2,5 -34K7 A1 34.8
3 APAGO DISYUNTOR GENERADOR =CB+01-X10 3 3 2,5 -34K4 71 36.5
4 APAGO DISYUNTOR GENERADOR =CB+01-X10 4 4 2,5 -36K5 A1 36.5
PE DISYUNTOR GENERADOR PE =CB+01-X10 PE PE PE4 36.5
5 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR ON =CB+01-X10 5 5 2,5 Sa 35.1
6 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR ON =CB+01-X10 6 6 2,5 Sb 35.1
1 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR OFF =CB+01-X10 7 7 2,5 Oa 35.2
2 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR OFF =CB+01-X10 8 8 2,5 Ob 35.3
3 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR DESCONECTADOR =CB+01-X10 9 9 2,5 Sa 35.3
4 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR DESCONECTADOR =CB+01-X10 10 10 2,5 Sb 35.4
PE DISYUNTOR GENERADOR PE =CB+01-X10 PE PE PE4 35.4
1 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 230VAC L =CB+01-X10 18 18 4 -35F5 2 35.5
2 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 230VAC N =CB+01-X10 19 19 4 -15Q1 6 35.5
PE DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 230VAC PE =CB+01-X10 PE PE PE4 35.6
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 24VDC + =CB+01-X10 20 20 4 -35F7 2 35.7
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 24VDC + =CB+01-X10 21 21 4 35.7
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 24VDC - =CB+01-X10 22 22 4 -34K4 A2 35.7
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 24VDC - =CB+01-X10 23 23 4 35.8
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 24VDC PE =CB+01-X10 PE PE PE4 35.8
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
CONECTADO LA RED 1 2,5 -16F5 11 36.8
CONECTADO LA RED 2 2,5 -36K7 A1 36.8
CONNECTADO LA RED 3 2,5 -36K1 13 34.5
CONNECTADO LA RED 4 2,5 -34K5 A1 34.5
CONNECTADO LA RED PE PE4 34.5
DISYUNTOR LA RED ON 5 2,5 37.3
DISYUNTOR LA RED ON 6 2,5 37.4
DISYUNTOR LA RED OFF 7 2,5 37.4
DISYUNTOR LA RED OFF 8 2,5 37.5
DESCONECTOR LA RED 9 2,5 37.6
DESCONECTOR LA RED 10 2,5 37.6
DISYUNTOR LA RED PE PE4 37.6
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X20-16 4G2,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X20-13 3G2,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X20-9 4G2,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X20-5 5G2,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X20-1 3G2,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 EXCITACIÓN =TC+GENO-X 15 1 2,5 -49K0 1 20.0
2 EXCITACIÓN =TC+GENO-X 16 2 2,5 -49K0 2 20.1
EXCITACIÓN 3 2,5 -49K0 4 20.1
EXCITACIÓN 4 2,5 -49K0 3 20.2
EXCITACIÓN PE PE4 20.2
1 COS PHI REGULADORES =TC+GENO-X 4 5 2,5 -33K4 12 20.3
2 COS PHI REGULADORES =TC+GENO-X 14 6 2,5 -33K4 11 20.3
3 SALDO VOLTAJE =TC+GENO-X 54 7 2,5 -49K0 14 20.4
4 SALDO VOLTAJE =TC+GENO-X 55 8 2,5 -33K1 11 20.5
PE PE4 20.5
1 COS PHI REGULADORES =TC+GENO-X 9 9 2,5 -20R5 1 20.5
Sh COS PHI REGULADORES +CP1to3-W-X21-206 Sh 12 2,5 +CP1to3-W-X21-206 Sh 20.6
COS PHI REGULADORES PE 4 20.7
1 VOLTAJE LA RED L1 =TC+GENO-X 400 13 2,5 -18Q5 2 20.8
2 VOLTAJE LA RED L2 =TC+GENO-X 0 14 2,5 -18Q5 4 20.8
VOLTAJE LA RED L3 15 2,5 -18Q5 6 20.8
VOLTAJE LA RED PE PE 4 20.8
1 REGULAR LA VOLTAJE =TC+GENO-X P 16 2,5 -21R1 1 21.1
2 REGULAR LA VOLTAJE =TC+GENO-X Q 17 2,5 -21R1 2 21.2
REGULAR LA VOLTAJE 18 2,5 -21R1 2 21.2
Sh REGULAR LA VOLTAJE =TC+GENO-X PE 19 2,5 +CP1to3-W-X20-16 Sh 21.3
REGULAR LA VOLTAJE PE PE4 21.3
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VV5-F
-W-X29-15 18G1,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X29-1 12G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 P & I POS. 31 =TU+LP01-X29 1 1 2,5 -41S1 22 41.1
2 P & I POS. 31 =TU+LP01-X29 2 2 2,5 -X80 1 41.1
3 24VDC =TU+LP01-X29 3 3 2,5 -54S4 3 54.4
4 VELOCIDAD REDUCIR =TU+LP01-X29 4 4 2,5 -23K6 14 54.2
5 VELOCIDAD AUMENTAR =TU+LP01-X29 5 5 2,5 -23K5 14 54.2
6 TURBINA STOP =TU+LP01-X29 6 6 2,5 -54S5 1 54.3
7 TURBINA START =TU+LP01-X29 7 7 2,5 -54S5 3 54.4
8 EMBALAR TEST =TU+LP01-X29 8 8 2,5 -16F5 11 54.7
9 EMBALAR TEST =TU+LP01-X29 9 9 2,5 -55K5 A1 54.7
10 TURBINA LISTO =TU+LP01-X29 10 10 2,5 -XLP 4 54.8
11 TURBINA LISTO =TU+LP01-X29 11 11 2,5 -16K6 A2 54.8
PE =TU+LP01-X29 PE PE PE4 54.8
1 P & I POS. 46 =TU+LP01-X29 15 15 2,5 -72A2 2 96.1
2 24VDC + =TU+LP01-X29 16 16 2,5 -L+5 96.0
3 P & I POS. 47.1 =TU+LP01-X29 18 18 2,5 -72A2 3 96.2
4 P & I POS. 47.2 =TU+LP01-X29 21 21 2,5 -72A2 4 96.3
5 P & I POS. 55 =TU+LP01-X29 23 23 2,5 -72A2 5 96.4
6 P & I POS. 55 =TU+LP01-X29 24 24 2,5 -72A2 6 96.5
7 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X29 26 26 2,5 -72A2 7 96.6
8 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X29 27 27 2,5 -72A2 8 96.7
9 P & I POS. 64.1 =TU+LP01-X29 29 29 2,5 -72A2 9 96.9
10 P & I POS. 64.1 =TU+LP01-X29 30 30 2,5 96.9
11 24VDC - =TU+LP01-X29 32 32 2,5 -16K6 A2 96.9
12 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X29 34 34 2,5 -72A2 12 97.1
13 SPARE =TU+LP01-X29 36 36 2,5 -72A2 13 97.2
14 SPARE =TU+LP01-X29 37 37 2,5 97.2
15 SPARE =TU+LP01-X29 39 39 2,5 -72A2 14 97.3
16 SPARE =TU+LP01-X29 40 40 2,5 97.3
17 SPARE =TU+LP01-X29 42 42 2,5 97.3
PE =TU+LP01-X29 PE PE 2,5 97.3
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X30-1 18G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 P & I POS. 27.1 =TU+LP01-X30 1 1 2,5 -L+5 78.5
2 P & I POS. 27.1 =TU+LP01-X30 2 2 2,5 78.6
P & I POS. 27.1 PE PE4 78.6
P & I POS. 27.1 S 2,5 78.6
3 P & I POS. 27.2 =TU+LP01-X30 3 3 2,5 -L+5 78.8
4 P & I POS. 27.2 =TU+LP01-X30 4 4 2,5 -62A2 17 78.8
P & I POS. 27.2 PE PE4 78.8
P & I POS. 27.2 S 2,5 Sh 78.8
5 P & I POS. 27.3 =TU+LP01-X30 5 5 2,5 -L+5 79.1
6 P & I POS. 27.3 =TU+LP01-X30 6 6 2,5 -53A2 20 79.1
P & I POS. 27.3 PE PE4 79.1
P & I POS. 27.3 S 2,5 Sh 79.1
7 P & I POS. 27.4 =TU+LP01-X30 7 7 2,5 -L+5 79.3
8 P & I POS. 27.4 =TU+LP01-X30 8 8 2,5 -62A2 27 79.3
P & I POS. 27.4 PE PE4 79.3
P & I POS. 27.4 S 2,5 79.3
9 P & I POS. 27.5 =TU+LP01-X30 9 9 2,5 -L+5 79.4
10 P & I POS. 27.5 =TU+LP01-X30 10 10 2,5 -62A2 32 79.5
P & I POS. 27.5 PE PE4 79.5
P & I POS. 27.5 S 2,5 79.5
11 P & I POS. 56.1 =TU+LP01-X30 11 11 2,5 -L+5 79.6
12 P & I POS. 56.1 =TU+LP01-X30 12 12 2,5 -62A2 37 79.6
P & I POS. 56.1 PE PE4 79.7
P & I POS. 56.1 S 2,5 Sh 79.7
13 P & I POS. 34 =TU+LP01-X30 13 13 2,5 -L+5 80.1
14 P & I POS. 34 =TU+LP01-X30 14 14 2,5 -31A2 +3 80.1
P & I POS. 34 PE PE4 80.1
P & I POS. 34 S 2,5 Sh 80.1
15 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 15 15 2,5 -L+5 80.3
16 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 16 16 2,5 -63A2 7 80.3
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X30-28 18G1,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X30-1 18G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
17 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 17 17 2,5 80.3
PE RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 PE PE PE4 80.4
Sh RESERVA Sh S 2,5 Sh 80.4
1 P & I POS. 136 =TU+LP01-X30 28 28 2,5 -65A2 13 84.6
2 P & I POS. 136 =TU+LP01-X30 29 29 2,5 -65A2 15 84.6
3 P & I POS. 136 =TU+LP01-X30 30 30 2,5 -65A2 14 84.6
P & I POS. 136 PE PE4 84.7
P & I POS. 136 S 2,5 Sh 84.7
4 P & I POS. 85 =TU+LP01-X30 31 31 2,5 -31A6 +1 80.8
5 P & I POS. 85 =TU+LP01-X30 32 32 2,5 -31A6 2 80.8
6 P & I POS. 85 =TU+LP01-X30 33 33 2,5 -31A6 3 80.8
P & I POS. 85 PE PE4 80.9
P & I POS. 85 S 2,5 Sh 80.9
7 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 34 34 2,5 -65A2 23 85.1
8 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 35 35 2,5 -65A2 25 85.1
9 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 36 36 2,5 -65A2 24 85.1
RESERVA PE PE4 85.1
RESERVA S 2,5 85.2
10 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 37 37 2,5 -65A2 28 85.3
11 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 38 38 2,5 -65A2 30 85.3
12 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 39 39 2,5 -65A2 29 85.3
RESERVA PE PE4 85.3
RESERVA S 2,5 85.4
13 P & I POS. 87 =TU+LP01-X30 40 40 2,5 -65A2 33 85.5
14 P & I POS. 87 =TU+LP01-X30 41 41 2,5 -65A2 35 85.5
15 P & I POS. 87 =TU+LP01-X30 42 42 2,5 -65A2 34 85.5
P & I POS. 87 PE PE4 85.6
P & I POS. 87 S 2,5 85.6
16 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 43 43 2,5 85.6
17 RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 44 44 2,5 85.6
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X30-28 18G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
PE RESERVA =TU+LP01-X30 PE PE PE4 85.6
Sh RESERVA Sh S 2,5 85.7
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X31-17 18G1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X31-1 18G1²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 P & I POS. 84.1 =TU+JB100-X1 1 1 2,5 -64A2 3 82.1
2 P & I POS. 84.1 =TU+JB100-X1 2 2 2,5 -64A2 5 82.1
3 P & I POS. 84.1 =TU+JB100-X1 3 3 2,5 -64A2 4 82.1
4 P & I POS. 84.1 =TU+JB100-X1 4 4 2,5 82.2
5 P & I POS. 84.2 =TU+JB100-X1 5 5 2,5 -64A2 8 82.3
6 P & I POS. 84.2 =TU+JB100-X1 6 6 2,5 -64A2 10 82.3
7 P & I POS. 84.2 =TU+JB100-X1 7 7 2,5 -64A2 9 82.4
8 P & I POS. 84.2 =TU+JB100-X1 8 8 2,5 82.4
9 P & I POS. 84.3 =TU+JB100-X1 9 9 2,5 -64A2 13 82.5
10 P & I POS. 84.3 =TU+JB100-X1 10 10 2,5 -64A2 15 82.5
11 P & I POS. 84.3 =TU+JB100-X1 11 11 2,5 -64A2 14 82.6
12 P & I POS. 84.3 =TU+JB100-X1 12 12 2,5 82.6
13 P & I POS. 84.4 =TU+JB100-X1 13 13 2,5 -64A2 18 82.7
14 P & I POS. 84.4 =TU+JB100-X1 14 14 2,5 -64A2 20 82.8
15 P & I POS. 84.4 =TU+JB100-X1 15 15 2,5 -64A2 19 82.8
16 P & I POS. 84.4 =TU+JB100-X1 16 16 2,5 82.8
PE =TU+JB100-X1 PE PE PE4 82.8
Sh Sh S 2,5 Sh 82.8
1 P & I POS. 84.5 =TU+JB100-X1 17 17 2,5 -64A2 23 83.1
2 P & I POS. 84.5 =TU+JB100-X1 18 18 2,5 -64A2 25 83.1
3 P & I POS. 84.5 =TU+JB100-X1 19 19 2,5 -64A2 24 83.1
4 P & I POS. 84.5 =TU+JB100-X1 20 20 2,5 83.2
5 P & I POS. 84.6 =TU+JB100-X1 21 21 2,5 -64A2 28 83.3
6 P & I POS. 84.6 =TU+JB100-X1 22 22 2,5 -64A2 30 83.3
7 P & I POS. 84.6 =TU+JB100-X1 23 23 2,5 -64A2 29 83.4
8 P & I POS. 84.6 =TU+JB100-X1 24 24 2,5 83.4
9 P & I POS. 84.7 =TU+JB100-X1 25 25 2,5 -64A2 33 83.5
10 P & I POS. 84.7 =TU+JB100-X1 26 26 2,5 -64A2 35 83.5
11 P & I POS. 84.7 =TU+JB100-X1 27 27 2,5 -64A2 34 83.6
12 P & I POS. 84.7 =TU+JB100-X1 28 28 2,5 83.6
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X31-35 12G1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X31-1 18G1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X31-17 18G1²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
13 P & I POS. 84.8 =TU+JB100-X1 29 29 2,5 -64A2 38 83.7
14 P & I POS. 84.8 =TU+JB100-X1 30 30 2,5 -64A2 40 83.8
15 P & I POS. 84.8 =TU+JB100-X1 31 31 2,5 -64A2 39 83.8
16 P & I POS. 84.8 =TU+JB100-X1 32 32 2,5 83.8
17 RESERVA =TU+JB100-X1 . 33 2,5 82.8
17 RESERVA =TU+JB100-X1 . 34 2,5 83.8
Sh Sh S 2,5 Sh 83.8
1 P & I POS. 84.9 =TU+JB101-X1 5 35 2,5 -65A2 3 84.1
2 P & I POS. 84.9 =TU+JB101-X1 6 36 2,5 -65A2 5 84.1
3 P & I POS. 84.9 =TU+JB101-X1 7 37 2,5 -65A2 4 84.1
4 P & I POS. 84.9 =TU+JB101-X1 8 38 2,5 84.1
5 P & I POS. 84.10 =TU+JB101-X1 13 39 2,5 -65A2 8 84.3
6 P & I POS. 84.10 =TU+JB101-X1 14 40 2,5 -65A2 10 84.3
7 P & I POS. 84.10 =TU+JB101-X1 15 41 2,5 -65A2 9 84.3
8 P & I POS. 84.10 =TU+JB101-X1 16 42 2,5 84.3
15 RESERVA =TU+JB101-X1 . 43 2,5 84.4
16 RESERVA =TU+JB101-X1 . 44 2,5 84.4
17 RESERVA =TU+JB101-X1 . 45 2,5 84.4
Sh Sh S 2,5 Sh 84.5
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X32-1 25G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 P & I POS. 111.1 =TC+GENO-X 1R1 1 2,5 -66A2 3 86.1
2 P & I POS. 111.1 =TC+GENO-X 1R1 2 2,5 -66A2 5 86.1
3 P & I POS. 111.1 =TC+GENO-X 1R2 3 2,5 -66A2 4 86.1
4 P & I POS. 111.2 =TC+GENO-X 2R1 4 2,5 -66A2 8 86.3
5 P & I POS. 111.2 =TC+GENO-X 2R1 5 2,5 -66A2 10 86.4
6 P & I POS. 111.2 =TC+GENO-X 2R2 6 2,5 -66A2 9 86.4
7 P & I POS. 111.3 =TC+GENO-X 3R1 7 2,5 -66A2 13 86.6
8 P & I POS. 111.3 =TC+GENO-X 3R1 8 2,5 -66A2 15 86.6
9 P & I POS. 111.3 =TC+GENO-X 3R2 9 2,5 -66A2 14 86.6
10 P & I POS. 110.1 =TC+GENO-X 7R1 10 2,5 -66A2 18 86.8
11 P & I POS. 110.1 =TC+GENO-X 7R1 11 2,5 -66A2 20 86.8
12 P & I POS. 110.1 =TC+GENO-X 7R2 12 2,5 -66A2 19 86.8
13 P & I POS. 110.2 =TC+GENO-X 8R1 13 2,5 -66A2 23 87.1
14 P & I POS. 110.2 =TC+GENO-X 8R1 14 2,5 -66A2 25 87.1
15 P & I POS. 110.2 =TC+GENO-X 8R2 15 2,5 -66A2 24 87.1
16 RESERVA =TC+GENO-X . 16 2,5 -66A2 28 87.3
19 P & I POS. 112 =TC+GENO-X 10R1 19 2,5 -66A2 33 87.6
20 P & I POS. 112 =TC+GENO-X 10R1 20 2,5 -66A2 35 87.6
21 P & I POS. 112 =TC+GENO-X 10R2 21 2,5 -66A2 34 87.6
PE =TC+GENO-X PE PE PE4 87.9
Sh Sh S 2,5 Sh 87.9
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite

H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-25 2x1,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X49-21 5G1,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-16 4G2,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-10 4G2,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-6 4x0,75²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-3 4x0,75²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-1 2x1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 P & I Pos. 38.1 =TU+LP01-X49 1 1 2,5 -52A3 7 24.4
2 P & I Pos. 38.1 =TU+LP01-X49 2 2 2,5 -52A3 8 24.4
Sh P & I Pos. 38.1 Sh S 2,5 Sh 24.5
P & I Pos. 38.1 PE PE4 Sh 24.5
1 P & I POS. 36.1 =TU+LP01-X49 3 3 2,5 -45A0 82 50.4
2 P & I POS. 36.1 =TU+LP01-X49 4 4 2,5 -45A0 11 50.5
3 P & I POS. 36.1 =TU+LP01-X49 5 5 2,5 -45A0 4 50.5
PE P & I POS. 36.1 =TU+LP01-X49 PE PE PE4 50.5
Sh P & I POS. 36.1 Sh S 2,5 -45A0 84 50.5
1 P & I POS. 36.2 =TU+LP01-X49 6 6 2,5 -45A0 94 50.7
2 P & I POS. 36.2 =TU+LP01-X49 7 7 2,5 -45A0 11 50.8
3 P & I POS. 36.2 =TU+LP01-X49 8 8 2,5 -45A0 5 50.8
Sh P & I POS. 36.2 Sh S 2,5 -45A0 96 50.8
2 P & I POS. 19.1 =TU+LP01-X49 10 10 2,5 -56K7 12 56.6
1 P & I POS. 19.1 =TU+LP01-X49 11 11 2,5 -58K8 13 56.5
3 P & I POS. 19.1 =TU+LP01-X49 13 13 2,5 -40N3 A- 56.5
Sh P & I POS. 19.1 Sh S 2,5 56.6
2 P & I POS. 19.2 =TU+LP01-X49 16 16 2,5 -56K7 22 58.6
1 P & I POS. 19.2 =TU+LP01-X49 17 17 2,5 -56K8 23 58.5
3 P & I POS. 19.2 =TU+LP01-X49 19 19 2,5 -40N5 A- 58.5
Sh P & I POS. 19.2 Sh S 2,5 58.6
1 P & I POS. 29.1 =TU+LP01-X49 21 21 2,5 57.3
2 P & I POS. 29.1 =TU+LP01-X49 22 22 2,5 -56K9 34 57.4
3 P & I POS. 29.1 =TU+LP01-X49 23 23 2,5 -57A5 12 57.4
4 P & I POS. 29.1 =TU+LP01-X49 24 24 2,5 57.4
2 P & I POS. 29.1 =TU+LP01-X49 25 25 2,5 -57A5 7 57.5
1 P & I POS. 29.1 =TU+LP01-X49 26 26 2,5 -57A5 8 57.5
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-31 2x1,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X49-27 5G1,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X49-21 5G1,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-25 2x1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Sh P & I POS. 29.1 Sh S 2,5 Sh 57.5
1 P & I Pos. 29.2 =TU+LP01-X49 27 27 2,5 59.3
2 P & I Pos. 29.2 =TU+LP01-X49 28 28 2,5 -58K9 14 59.4
3 P & I Pos. 29.2 =TU+LP01-X49 29 29 2,5 -57A5 12 59.4
4 P & I Pos. 29.2 =TU+LP01-X49 30 30 2,5 59.4
2 P & I Pos. 29.2 =TU+LP01-X49 31 31 2,5 -53A2 1 59.5
1 P & I Pos. 29.2 =TU+LP01-X49 32 32 2,5 -53A2 12 59.5
Sh P & I Pos. 29.2 Sh S 2,5 Sh 59.5
PE P & I Pos. 29.2 =TU+LP01-X49 PE PE PE4 Sh 59.5
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
P & I POS. 231 1 2,5 -X29 2 41.4
P & I POS. 231 2 2,5 41.4
EXTENAL EMERGENCY STOP PE PE4 41.4
EXTENAL EMERGENCY STOP 3 2,5 41.6
EXTENAL EMERGENCY STOP 6 2,5 -42K1 A1 41.8
COLECTIVA DE FALLOS: ALARMA 7 2,5 -90K5 12 110.0
COLECTIVA DE FALLOS: STOP 10 2,5 -90K6 12 110.2
MECANICA DE ERROR: ALARMA 13 2,5 -90K8 12 110.3
MECANICA DE ERROR: STOP 16 2,5 -90K9 12 110.4
ELECTRICOS DE ERROR: ALARMA 19 2,5 -91K1 12 110.5
ELECTRICOS DE ERROR: STOP 22 2,5 -91K2 12 110.7
TURBINA EN MARCHA 25 2,5 -48K8 32 110.0
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
TURBINA LISTO PARA DESPEGAR 28 2,5 -91K7 12 110.2
PUESTA EN PARALELO 31 2,5 -33K5 32 110.3
PE PE4 110.4
EXTERIOR DE FALLA =TC+Ext-X _ 34 2,5 -26F1 A2 30.7
EXTERIOR DE FALLA =TC+Ext-X _ 35 2,5 -30K7 A1 30.7
EXTERIOR DE FALLA PE PE4 30.7
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X82-1 2x1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 LÍNEA TELEFÓNICA (ANALOG) =TC+EXT-X a 1 2,5 -60E4 1 60.4
2 LÍNEA TELEFÓNICA (ANALOG) =TC+EXT-X b 2 2,5 -60E4 2 60.4
Sh LÍNEA TELEFÓNICA (ANALOG) Sh PE PE4 Sh 60.5
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE VAPOR DE PRESI 1 2,5 -92K1 14 110.5
VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE VAPOR DE PRESI 2 2,5 -16K6 A2 110.5
VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE VAPOR DE PRESI PE PE4 110.5
VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE VAPOR DE PRESI PE PE4 110.6
VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE INYECCIÓN DE A 6 2,5 -92K2 14 110.8
VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE INYECCIÓN DE A 7 2,5 -16K6 A2 110.8
VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE INYECCIÓN DE A PE PE4 110.8
VÁLVULA DE SEGURIDAD DE INYECCIÓN DE A PE PE4 110.9
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VV5-F
-W-X90-1 18G2,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 24VDC+ =COND+JB1-X1 8 1 2,5 -L+5 107.0
2 0MAJ21AA151 =COND+JB1-X1 10 2 2,5 -77A2 12 107.1
3 0MAJ21AA151 =COND+JB1-X1 12 3 2,5 -77A2 13 107.2
0MAJ21AA151 PE PE4 107.2
4 0MAJ22AA151 =COND+JB1-X1 15 4 2,5 -77A2 14 107.3
5 0MAJ22AA151 =COND+JB1-X1 17 5 2,5 -77A2 15 107.4
0MAJ22AA151 PE PE4 107.4
6 0MAJ21AA101 =COND+JB1-X1 20 6 2,5 -77A2 16 107.5
7 0MAJ21AA101 =COND+JB1-X1 22 7 2,5 -77A2 17 107.6
0MAJ21AA101 PE PE4 107.6
8 0MAJ22AA101 =COND+JB1-X1 25 8 2,5 -77A2 18 107.7
9 0MAJ22AA101 =COND+JB1-X1 27 9 2,5 -77A2 19 107.9
0MAJ22AA101 PE PE4 107.9
10 0MAJ21AA151 =COND+JB1-X1 1 10 2,5 -92K3 14 111.1
11 0MAJ21AA151 =COND+JB1-X1 2 11 2,5 -16K6 A2 111.1
0MAJ21AA151 PE PE4 111.2
12 0MAJ22AA151 =COND+JB1-X1 3 12 2,5 -93K1 14 111.3
13 0MAJ22AA151 =COND+JB1-X1 4 13 2,5 -16K6 A2 111.3
0MAJ22AA151 PE PE4 111.4
14 RESERVA =COND+JB1-X1 . 14 2,5 111.4
15 RESERVA =COND+JB1-X1 . 15 2,5 111.5
16 RESERVA =COND+JB1-X1 . 16 2,5 111.5
17 RESERVA =COND+JB1-X1 . 17 2,5 111.5
PE RESERVA =COND+JB1-X1 PE PE PE4 111.5
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
HO5VV5-F
-W-X91-7 4G1,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X91-1 7G1,5
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 24VDC+ =COND+TB1-X3 16 1 2,5 -L+5 101.2
2 PS-0LCA11CP051 =COND+TB1-X3 17 2 2,5 101.1
3 PS-0LCA11CP051 =COND+TB1-X3 18 3 2,5 -74A2 13 101.2
4 PS-0LCA12CP051 =COND+TB1-X3 20 4 2,5 101.3
5 PS-0LCA12CP051 =COND+TB1-X3 21 5 2,5 -74A2 14 101.3
6 RESERVA =COND+TB1-X3 6 2,5 101.3
PE =COND+TB1-X3 PE PE PE4 101.3
1 P & I POS. 138 =TC+TB1-X3 13 7 2,5 -16K6 A2 97.4
2 P & I POS. 138 =TC+TB1-X3 14 8 2,5 -72A2 15 97.4
3 P & I POS. 138 =TC+TB1-X3 15 9 2,5 -L+5 97.4
P & I POS. 138 PE PE4 97.4
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+

159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pagina/Seite
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X92-3 5G2,5²
H05VV-F
-W-X92-1 3G2,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 CONDENSADOR 230VAC L =COND+TB1-X3 1 1 4 -44F1 2 44.1
2 CONDENSADOR 230VAC N =COND+TB1-X3 2 2 4 -44F1 4 44.1
PE CONDENSADOR 230VAC PE =COND+TB1-X3 PE PE PE4 44.1
1 OLCA30AA001 =COND+TB1-X3 3 3 2,5 -44A2 2 44.3
2 OLCA30AA001 =COND+TB1-X3 4 4 2,5 -44A2 3 44.3
OLCA30AA001 PE PE4 44.3
OLCA30AA001 S 2,5 Sh 44.3
3 OMAG10CL051 =COND+TB1-X3 7 7 2,5 -44A2 8 44.6
4 OMAG10CL051 =COND+TB1-X3 8 8 2,5 -80A5 2 44.6
PE OMAG10CL051 =COND+TB1-X3 PE PE PE4 44.6
Sh OMAG10CL051 Sh S 2,5 Sh 44.6
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LISTA DE CABLE / KABELLISTE PAGINA / SEITE: 1
No.: PUNTO DE PARTIDA PUNTO DE DESTINO CABLE NÚMERO TAMANO DEL DESCRIPTICIÓN DE LA FUNCIÓN
CABLE
Nr.: STARTPUNKT ZIELPUNKT KABELNUMMER KABELGRÖSSE FUNKTIONSBESCHREIBUNG
1 +CP1to3 -16S1 +Ext -X -W-16S1 5G25² NYM-J TENSION AUXILIAR
2 +CP1to3 -X01 +SAI -X -W-X01-1 3G4² NYM-J AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SAI 230VAC
3 +CP1to3 -X01 +SAI -X -W-X01-5 3G4² NYM-J AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SAI 230VAC
4 +CP1to3 -X05 +Ext -X -W-X01-32 5G25² NYM-J SALIDA TENSION AUXILIAR 230VAC
5 +CP1to3 -X02 =CB -X02 -W-X02-1 5x2,5² N2XH GENERADOR VOLTAJE
6 +CP1to3 -X02 =CB -X02 -W-X02-5 3G2,5² H05VV-F GENERADOR VOLTAJE en-BOBINADO
7 +CP1to3 -X02 =CB -X02 -W-X02-7 5x2,5² N2XH VOLTAJE LA RED
8 +CP1to3 -X03 GENERATOR -X5 -W-X03-1 7x2,5² N2XH CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR MEDICIÓN
9 +CP1to3 -X03 GENERATOR -X -W-X03-7 7x2,5² N2XH CORRIENTE TRANSFORMADOR PROTECCIÓN
10 +CP1to3 -X05 P & I POS. 59 -W-X05-1 4G6² NYM-J P & I POS. 59.1
11 +CP1to3 -X05 BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO -W-X05-4 3x6² NYM-J BOMBA DE POSENFRIAMIENTO
12 +CP1to3 -X05 P & I POS. 56 -W-X05-8 4G1,5² NYM-J P & I POS. 56
13 +CP1to3 -X05 0LCB11AP001 -W-X05-11 4G1,5² NYM-J 0LCB11AP001
14 +CP1to3 -X05 0LCB12AP001 -W-X05-14 4G1,5² NYM-J 0LCB12AP001
15 +CP1to3 -X05 0MAJ21AN001 -W-X05-17 4G6² NYM-J 0MAJ21AN001
16 +CP1to3 -X05 0MAJ22AN001 -W-X05-20 4G6² NYM-J 0MAJ22AN001
17 +CP1to4 -X05 GENERADOR -HE1/HE2 -W-X05-23 3G1,5² NYM-J GENERADOR DE CALENTADOR
18 +CP1to3 -X10 =CB-X10 -W-X10-1 5G2,5² H05VV5-F DISYUNTOR GENERADOR COMENTARIOS
19 +CP1to3 -X10 =CB -X10 -W-X10-5 7G2,5² H05VV5-F SENAL DE REEMPLAZO A CISYUNTOR GENERADOR
20 +CP1to3 -X10 =CB -X10 -W-X10-18 3G2,5² H05VV-F DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 230VAC
21 +CP1to3 -X10 =CB -X10 -W-X10-20 5G2,5² H05VV-F DISYUNTOR GENERADOR 24VDC
22 +CP1to3 -X20 GENERADOR -X -W-X20-1 3G2,5² H05VV5-F EXCITACIÓN
23 +CP1to3 -X20 GENERADOR -X -W-X20-5 5G2,5² H05VV5-F COS PHI REGULADORES
24 +CP1to3 -X20 GENERADOR -X -W-X20-9 4G2,5² H05VVC4V5-K COS PHI REGULADORES
25 +CP1to3 -X20 GENERADOR -X -W-X20-13 3G2,5² H05VV5-F VOLTAJE LA RED
26 +CP1to3 -X20 GENERADOR -X -W-X20-16 4G2,5² H05VVC4V5-K REGULAR LA VOLTAJE
27 +CP1to3 -X29 TURBINA +LP01 -X29 -W-X29-1 12G1,5² H05VV5-F CONTROL DE TURBINA
28 +CP1to3 -X29 TURBINA +LP01 -X29 -W-X29-15 18G1,5² H05VV5-F SENAL DE +LP01
29 +CP1to4 -X30 TURBINA +LP01 -X30 -W-X30-1 18G1,5² H05VVC4V5-K SENAL DE +LP01
30 +CP1to3 -X30 TURBINA +LP01 -X30 -W-X30-28 18G1,5² H05VVC4V5-K SENAL DE +LP01
31 +CP1to3 -X31 TURBINA +JB100 -X1 -W-X31-1 18G1² H05VVC4V5-K TEMPERATURA TURBINA
34 +CP1to3 -X32 GENERATOR -X -W-X32-1 25G1,5² H05VVC4V5-K TEMPERATURA GENERADOR
35 +CP1to4 -X49 TURBINE 1 +LP01 -X49 -W-X49-1 2x1,5² H05VVC4V5-K P& I Pos. 38.1
36 +CP1to4 -X49 TURBINE 1 +LP01 -X49 -W-X49-3 4x0,75² H05VVC4V5-K P & I POS.36.1
37 +CP1to4 -X49 TURBINE 1 +LP01 -X49 -W-X49-6 4x0,75² H05VVC4V5-K P & I POS.36.2
38 +CP1to3 -X49 TURBINA +LP01 -X49 -W-X49-10 4G2,5² H05VVC4V5-K P & I Pos. 19.1
39 +CP1to3 -X49 TURBINA +LP01 -X49 -W-X49-16 4G2,5² H05VVC4V5-K P & I Pos. 19.2
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
LISTA DE CABLE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
Nr. BESCHREIBUNG DATUM NAME ELDATEX Nr.: 12-06-033 KABELLISTE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE: 145
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LISTA DE CABLE / KABELLISTE PAGINA / SEITE: 2
No.: PUNTO DE PARTIDA PUNTO DE DESTINO CABLE NÚMERO TAMANO DEL DESCRIPTICIÓN DE LA FUNCIÓN
CABLE
Nr.: STARTPUNKT ZIELPUNKT KABELNUMMER KABELGRÖSSE FUNKTIONSBESCHREIBUNG
40 +CP1to3 -X49 TURBINA +LP01 -X49 -W-X49-21 5G1,5² H05VV5-F P & I POS. 29.1
41 +CP1to3 -X49 TURBINA +LP01 -X49 -W-X49-25 2x1,5² H05VVC4V5-K P & I POS. 29.1
42 +CP1to3 -X49 TURBINA +LP01 -X49 -W-X49-27 5G1,5² H05VV5-F P & I Pos. 29.2
43 +CP1to4 -X249 TURBINA +LP01 -X49 -W-X49-31 2x1,5² H05VVC4V5-K P & I POS. 229
44 +CP1to3 -X82 EXTERN -X -W-X82-1 2x1,5² H05VVC4V5-K LÍNEA TELEFÓNICA (ANALOG)
45 +CP1to3 -X90 =COND +JB1 -X1 -W-X90-1 18G2,5² H05VV5-F 0MAJ21AA101/0MAJ22AA101/0MAJ21AA151/0MAJ22AA151
46 +CP1to3 -X91 =COND +TB1 -X3 -W-X91-1 7G1,5 H05VV5-F PRESIÓN CONMUTACIÓN DE CONDENSADOR
47 +CP1to3 -X91 +TB1 +X3 -W-X91-7 4G1,5² HO5VV5-F P & I POS. 138
48 +CP1to3 -X92 =COND +TB1 -X3 -W-X92-1 3G2,5² H05VV-F CONDENSADOR 230VAC
49 +CP1to3 -X92 +COND +TB1 -X3 -W-X92-3 5G2,5² H05VVC4V5-K OLCA30AA001/0MAG10CL051
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
LISTA DE CABLE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
Nr. BESCHREIBUNG DATUM NAME ELDATEX Nr.: 12-06-033 KABELLISTE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE: 146
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Lista de Materiales / Materialliste Pagina / Seite: 1
No.: Cantidad Componente: DESCRIPCIÓN: Modelo Fabricante No. Fabricante
Nr.: Menge Bauteil : Beschreibung: Artikelnr. Herstellernr. hersteller

1 6 =TC+CP1to3-X01 Terminal WDU 4 0201003 1020100000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
2 2 =TC+CP1to3-X01 Terminal WPE 4 0201016 1010100000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
3 1 =TC+CP1to3-15Q1 motor circuit breaker 0221011 GV2 ME20 Schneider Electric
1 auxiliary contact 1NO 1NC 0221101 GV AE11 Schneider Electric
4 1 =TC+CP1to3-XV Busbar adapter for NSX100/NSX250 0490029 32 156 Wöhner
5 1 =TC+CP1to3-16S1 Circuit breaker 0229301 LV430629 + LV429338 + 2 x LV4 Schneider Electric
1 Auxiliary contact for NSX 0229660 29450 Schneider Electric
7 20 =TC+CP1to3-X05 Terminal WDU 2,5 0201001 1020000000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
8 1 =TC+CP1to3-16T3 control transformer 0042007 SD 3,0 480/230V Eltra
10 1 =TC+CP1to3-16F3 automatic circuit breaker 0226057 23734 Schneider Electric
1 auxiliary switch circuit breaker 0226190 26925 Schneider Electric
12 1 =TC+CP1to3-16F5 under/overvoltage protective device 0090010 ASW503-G001 DSL elec
14 1 =TC+CP1to3-16K6 miniature relay 0130000 55.34.9.024.0040 Finder GmbH
1 relais socket 0130006 94.04 Finder GmbH
1 inverse diode 0130007 99.02.3.000.00 Finder GmbH
15 1 =TC+CP1to3-16K8 contactor 0223032 LP1 K1210BD3 Schneider Electric
16 12 =TC+CP1to3-X03 test and separating terminal WTL6/3 0201503 1018600000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
21 10 =TC+CP1to3-X02 Test and separating terminal WTL6/1 0201026 1016900000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
25 1 =TC+CP1to3-20R5 precision potentiometer 0197006 534-5K Reichelt
26 1 =TC+CP1to3-21R1 Motorpotentiometer 2960000 MPR4102-4-G1-3-0
27 1 =TC+CP1to3-21S7 swivel push-button switch 0114304 URR1/8ZM/X85=Schild tiefer / Sontheimer
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
LISTA DE MATERIALES ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
Nr. BESCHREIBUNG DATUM NAME ELDATEX Nr.: 12-06-033 MATERIALLISTE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

30 1 =TC+CP1to3-22A2 Generator Protection Unit GPU 0036101 GPU-D2-G2-F1-H3-J1 Deif
31 1 =TC+CP1to3-22P3.1 moving-iron ampere meter EQ96 0030001 EQ 96-x Deif
32 1 =TC+CP1to3-22P3 moving-iron ampere meter EQ96 0030001 EQ 96-x Deif
33 1 =TC+CP1to3-22P4 moving-iron ampere meter EQ96 0030001 EQ 96-x Deif
34 1 =TC+CP1to3-22P5 moving-coil instrument DQ96 0030010 DQ 96-x Deif
35 1 =TC+CP1to3-22P5.1 moving-coil instrument DQ96 0030008 DQ 96-x Deif
40 1 =TC+CP1to3-24P1 Digital Indication Unit RIA 251 0530001 RIA251-B1 Endress + Hauser
43 1 =TC+CP1to3-25S1 voltmeter switch 0118001 V3/8ZM Sontheimer
44 1 =TC+CP1to3-25P2 moving-iron voltmeter EQ96 (double) 0030025 2 EVQ 96-x Deif
45 1 =TC+CP1to3-25S3 voltmeter switch 0118001 V3/8ZM Sontheimer
46 1 =TC+CP1to3-25P4 double vibrating-reed frequency meter 2 FTQ96 0030027 2 FTQ96-x Deif
47 1 =TC+CP1to3-25P7 synchronoscope with synchronizing locking relay 0033003 CSQ 3 Deif
48 1 =TC+CP1to3-26K1 auxiliary contactor 0223551 CA3 KN31BD3 Schneider Electric
49 1 =TC+CP1to3-26F1 system disconnecting relay 0022010 XN2-1 SEG
50 1 =TC+CP1to3-26K2 miniature timing relay 0130005 85.04.0.024.0000 Finder GmbH
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

53 4 =TC+CP1to3-26X6 Terminal WDU 2,5 0201001 1020000000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
55 1 =TC+CP1to3-27F3 overcurrent time relay 0022001 XI1-I-1 SEG
58 1 =TC+CP1to3-28F2 power and power direction relay 0022008 XP2-R-1 SEG
64 1 =TC+CP1to3-31A2 EVALUATION UNIT KFU8-CRG2-EX1.D Pepperl & Fuchs
65 1 =TC+CP1to3-31A6 EVALUATION UNIT KFD2-GUT-EX1.D Pepperl & Fuchs
71 1 =TC+CP1to3-33S8 change-over switch 60° 0114001 U1/8ZM Sontheimer
72 1 =TC+CP1to3-33S8.1 push-button switch 0222105 ZB5 AA2 Schneider Electric
1 NO screw terminal contact 0222900 ZBE 101 Schneider Electric
1 fixing base 0222922 ZB5 AZ009 Schneider Electric
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
Nr. BESCHREIBUNG DATUM NAME ELDATEX Nr.: 12-06-033 MATERIALLISTE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE: 149
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

75 1 =TC+CP1to3-34S1 change-over switch 0111002 WS1/8ZM/F620 Sontheimer
77 1 =TC+CP1to3-34K4 auxiliary contactor 0223502 CAD 50BD Schneider Electric
1 auxiliary contact 4NC 0223108 LAD N04 Schneider Electric
78 1 =TC+CP1to3-34K5 auxiliary contactor 0223503 CAD32BD Schneider Electric
81 1 =TC+CP1to3-34H6 switch position indicator 9030001 PAD 56-22WF/G Mocotech
82 12 =TC+CP1to3-XLP Terminal WDK 2,5 2D 0201030 1023500000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
91 1 =TC+CP1to3-36K1 auxiliary contactor 0223502 CAD 50BD Schneider Electric
1 auxiliary contact 4NC 0223108 LAD N04 Schneider Electric
94 1 =TC+CP1to3-36K5 auxiliary contactor 0223503 CAD32BD Schneider Electric
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

97 1 =TC+CP1to3-38G0 battery charger 0023000 BL 18 230 24 SEG
99 1 =TC+CP1to3-38P3 battery voltmeter DQ72 0031018 DQ 72 / 0-40V Deif
100 1 =TC+CP1to3-38G5 local Pb-battery unit 24V-65Ah 2230006 OGiV 65Ah/24V Franke
101 1 =TC+CP1to3-38F5.1 fuse base 0491002 31 291 Wöhner
1 fuse 0072007 1701.025 Ferraz Shawmut
1 fuse carrier 0072140 1715.0003 Ferraz Shawmut
102 1 =TC+CP1to3-38F5.2 fuse base 0491002 31 291 Wöhner
104 1 =TC+CP1to3-38F7 d.c. relay 0020032 BU1-DC2-24 SEG
106 5 =TC+CP1to3-L+1 Terminal WDK 2,5N 0201023 1041600000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
115 15 =TC+CP1to3-M Terminal WDK 2,5N 0201023 1041600000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
117 1 =TC+CP1to3-40N3 Overvoltageprotection 9000006 Voith Siemens supplied
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

119 1 =TC+CP1to3-40N5 Overvoltageprotection 9000006 Voith Siemens supplied
123 1 =TC+CP1to3-41S1 Emergency stop push button 0222135 ZB5 AS944 Schneider Electric
1 NC screw terminal contact 0222901 ZBE 102 Schneider Electric
124 1 =TC+CP1to3-42K1 Emergency Stop Relais 0103990 3TK2821-1CB30 Siemens AG
1 auxiliary contact 0223603 LA1 KN40 Schneider Electric
128 1 =TC+CP1to3-42S9 illuminated push button 0222056 ZB5 AW343 Schneider Electric
1 LED pilot light LED 24 V 0222904 ZBV B4 Schneider Electric
132 1 =TC+CP1to3-44A2 JUMO dTRON304 703044/181-400- JUMO
136 1 =TC+CP1to3-45A0 Speed Regulateur 9000010 Woodward 505 Siemens supplied
137 1 =TC+CP1to3-48K0 Relay for failsafe PLC 0567001 PSR-SCP-24DC/FSP/2X1/1X2 Phoenix
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

145 1 =TC+CP1to3-51A1 Isolating Signal Converter 2890000 TV500L-100-5 Martens
149 1 =TC+CP1to3-53A2 Pressure Controler SIPART DR22 9000007 Siemens Siemens supplied
150 1 =TC+CP1to3-54S1 swivel push-button switch 0114304 URR1/8ZM/X85=Schild tiefer / Sontheimer
151 1 =TC+CP1to3-54S4 stepping switch with 3 positions 0112001 ST31/8ZM/F302 Sontheimer
152 1 =TC+CP1to3-54S5 change-over switch with retreat on both sides 0114302 URR1/8ZM Sontheimer
154 1 =TC+CP1to3-54S9 illuminated push button 0222055 ZB5 AW333 Schneider Electric
1 LED pilot light LED 24 V 0222903 ZBV B3 Schneider Electric
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

169 1 =TC+CP1to3-60A1 MP 277 TOUCH-Panel 0104100 6AV6 643-0CD01-1AX1 Siemens AG
170 1 =TC+CP1to3-60E4 Phoneconector 9990100
173 1 =TC+CP1to3-60A6 TS- modul II 0100470 6ES7972-0CB35-0XA0 Siemens AG
174 1 =TC+CP1to3-61A1 central module 0100010 6ES7 315-2AG10-0AB0 Siemens AG
175 1 =TC+CP1to3-61A2 IM 365 modul 0100469 6ES7365-0BA01-0AA0 Siemens AG
176 1 =TC+CP1to3-62A2 analogue input, 8 channel 0100047 6ES7 331-1KF02-0AB0 Siemens AG
181 1 =TC+CP1to3-67A1 CP342-5 0100061 6GK7 342-5DF00-0XE0 Siemens AG
182 1 =TC+CP1to3-70A2 digital output unit 0100036 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0 Siemens AG
183 1 =TC+CP1to3-71A2 digital output unit 0100036 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0 Siemens AG
184 1 =TC+CP1to3-72A2 digital input unit 0100032 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0 Siemens AG
GERENTE F ECHA 11.07.12 D E S C R I P C I Ó N / B EZEICHNUNG
H. G. Peters =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

197 1 =TC+CP1to3-90H0 buzzer 0080040 1SFA 616 401 R4010 ABB
203 1 =TC+CP1to3-90K7 auxiliary contactor 0223553 CA4 KN40BW3 Schneider Electric
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

233 1 =TC+CP1to3-103S3 change-over switch 60° 0114041 U2/8ZM/F621 Sontheimer
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

245 1 =TC+CP1to3-111H8 LED pilot light LED 24 V 0222000 XB5 AVB1 Schneider Electric
248 1 =TC+CP1to3-XV Busbar adapter 63A 0490024 32 456 Wöhner
249 1 =TC+CP1to3-112Q4 motor circuit breaker 0221031 GV3 P40 Schneider Electric
250 1 =TC+CP1to3-112A6 soft start-soft stop unit 0102862 3RW4028-1BB05 Siemens AG
256 1 =TC+Mont-XLP Terminal WDK 2,5 2D 0201030 1023500000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
260 1 =TC+CP1to3-115K4 contactor 0223034 LP4 K0910BW3 Schneider Electric
261 5 =TC+CP1to3-XV Busbar adapter 32A 0490025 32 442 Wöhner
1 auxiliary contact 2NO 0221102 GV AE20 Schneider Electric
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+

BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

270 1 =TC+CP1to3-117K2 contactor 0223054 LC1 D32BD Schneider Electric
273 1 =TC+CP1to3-117K7 contactor 0223054 LC1 D32BD Schneider Electric
279 1 =TC+CP1to3-120H1 switch cabinet lamp 18W 230V 0142001 SL80018TK AVT
280 2 =TC+CP1to3-XIS Terminal WDU 2,5 0201001 1020000000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
282 1 =TC+CP1to3-XIS Terminal WPE 4 0201016 1010100000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+
BBF00069
159
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

67227 Frankenthal
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
PORTADA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
SIEMENS DISYUNTOR GENERADOR
+01

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PROTECCIÓN X IP 42 IP 54 IP__________ GABINETE TIPO X HOJA DE ACERO ACERO INOXIDABLE

VENTANA AL FRENTE DE INT.DE PUERTA X NO SI PINTURA X RAL 7035 RAL__________

TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE MIN. 0°C __________°C DIMENSIONES (AN x AL x PR) 800x2200x600 mm

UMGEBUNGSTEMPERATUR MIN. X 0°C __________°C ABMESSUNG (BxHxT) 800x2200x600 mm
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE MAX. 40°C __________°C SEPARACIÓN DE TRANSPORTE NO SI

UMGEBUNGSTEMPERATUR MAX. X 40°C __________°C TRANSPORTTRENNUNG X NO JA
HUMEDAD RELATIVA 70% __________% LAS BISAGRAS PUERTA DERECHNA

X
RELATIVE LUFTFEUCHTIGKEIT 70% __________% TÜRANSCHLAG RECHTS
ENTRADA DE CABLE / ACCESORIOS GABINETE GENERAL

PLACA DE IDENTIFICACIÓN ALEMÁN INGLÉS __________
ENTRADA DE CABLE X ABAJO ARRIBA __________ TYPENSCHILD X DEUTSCH ENGLISCH __________
ETIQUETADO "PUERTA" ALEMÁN INGLÉS ESPAÑOL
CABLE DE MONTAJE X NO SI BRIDA BESCHRIFTUNGSSCHILDER "TÜR" DEUTSCH ENGLISCH X SPANISCH
X
PLASTIK METALL SCHILDER "GESCHRAUBT" NEIN JA
X X
SCHALTSCHRANKSTECKDOSE JA NEIN ÜBER FI-SCHALTER ADERBEZEICHNUNG (z: B.: 13/14) NEIN JA
X X X X
SCHALTSCHRANKBELEUCHTUNG JA NEIN ÜBER POSITIONSSCHALTER BETRIEBSMITTELKENNZEICHNUNG MONTAGEPLATTE GERÄT
VENTILADOR DE GABINETE X NO SI THERMOSTATO CABLEADO "SIN HALÓGENOS" X NO SI

CALEFACCIÓN DE GABINETE X NO SI THERMOSTATO CABLEADO "ESTAÑADO VETAS" X NO SI

AIRE ACONDICIONADO X NO SI CONTROLADOR DE TEMPERATURA CLIPS DE PRENSA PARA SENSORES X NO SI




+GENO GENERADOR
+GENO GENERATOR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MATERIAL / EQUIPO
GABINETE TIPO X RITTAL TS _____________

KLEMMKÄSTEN/BEDIENPULTE RITTAL AE _____________
X
X
RELÉ AUXILIAR X FINDER X PHOENIX (SIL)
STEUERRELAIS FINDER PHOENIX (SIL)
X
X
PROTECCIÓN DE GENERADOR X WOODWARD/SEG SIEMENS X DEIF
X
X
X
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
MATERIAL ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

X X


X X
X X
X X
X X



0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
COLOR DE LOS CONDUCTORES ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ÍNDICE / INHALTSVERZEICHNIS
No. PAGINA DESCRIPCIÓN
Nr. SEITE BEZEICHNUNG
1 0001 PORTADA DECKBLATT
2 0002 INFORMACIÓN GENERAL ALLGEMEINE INFORMATIONEN
3 0003 MATERIAL MATERIAL
4 0004 COLOR DE LOS CONDUCTORES ADERFARBEN
5 0005 INDICE INHALTSVERZEICHNIS
6 0006 RESERVA RESERVE
7 0007 AMARIO VISTA SCHRANKANSICHT
8 0008 RESERVA RESERVE
9 0009 AMARIO INTERIOR VISTA SCHRANKINNENANSICHT
10 0010 CORRIENTE GENERATOR GENERATORSTROM
11 0011 VOLTAJE GENERADOR/LA RED GENERATOR-/NETZSPANNUNG
12 0012 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR GENERATORSCHALTER
13 0013 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR GENERATORSCHALTER
14 0014 MENSAJES RÜCKMELDUNGEN
15 0015 VENTILADOR DE AMARIO SCHRANKLÜFTER
16 0016 PLACA DE BORNES -X01 KLEMMLEISTE -X01
20 0020 LISTA DE MATERIALES MATERIALLISTE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
INDICE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
65
30
=CB +01 1 = 11P3 MESURE GENERADOR
2200 2 = 15M1 VENTILADOR DE AMARIO
3 = 12H9 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR NO AVERIA
2100 4 = 12H4 INDICADOR DE POSICION DISYUNTOR GENERADOR
5 = 15M3 VENTILADOR DE AMARIO
2000
1900
1800
1
1700
1 = 11P3 MEASURING GENERATOR
1600 2 = 15M1 PANEL VENTILATOR
3 4 3 = 12H9 GENERATOR C. B. NO FAULT
1500 4 = 12H4 GENERATOR C. B. POSITION INDICATOR
5 = 15M3 PANEL VENTILATOR
1400 G
1300
1200
1100
1000
900
800
700
600
500 5
400
300
200
100
600
500
0 400
300
200
100
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
RESERVA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2200
2100
FUSIBLES
2000
RELES DE TERMOSTATO
1900 CONTROLES
1800
1700 TRANSFORMATODRES
1600
1500
BORNES
1400
1300
1200
DISYUNTOR
GENERADOR
1100
1000
L1
L2
L3
900
SALIENTE
800
700
L1
L2
L3
600
500
GENERADOR
400
PE
300
N
200
100
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
AMARIO INTERIOR VISTA
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
ELDATEX SIEMENS DISYUNTOR GENERADOR
+01
12-06-033 SCHRANKINNENANSICHT Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CB.L+1
CB.M 12.0
12.0
-10P6
14 13 Ch1 Ch2
INTEGRA
1 3 4 6 7 9 2 5 8 11
CB.G.L1
CB.G.L2 11.0
11.0
CB.G.L3 11.0
CB.G.N
11.0
-XIS
1 2 3 4 5 6 PE
GENERADOR
-11T1 2S1 2S2

U CB.L1
11.0
-11T1 2S1 2S2
V
W
G -11T1 2S1 2S2
CB.L2
CB.L3
11.0
11.0
N CB.N 11.0
MESURE GENERADOR DE CORRIENTE
MESSUNG GENERATORSTROM
1500/1A 15VA 0,5Fs5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
CORRIENTE GENERATOR ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01
12-06-033 GENERATORSTROM Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CB.V.L1
CB.V.N 12.0
12.0
GENERADOR VOLTAJE VOLTAJE GENERADOR en-BOBINADO GENERADOR VOLTAJE VOLTAJE LA RED
GENERATORSPANNUNG GENERATORSPANNUNG en-WICKLUNG GENERATORSPANNUNG NETZSPANNUNG
=TC 18.1
=TC 18.1
=TC 18.1
=TC 18.1
=TC 18.1
=TC 18.1
=TC 18.1
=TC 18.3
=TC 18.5
=TC 18.5
=TC 18.5
=TC 18.5
=TC 18.6
2 4 14 12
=TC +EXT =TC
+CP1to3 1 2 3 4 PE 3 4 PE -X 1 2 3 4 PE -11F6 +CP1to3 7 8 9 10 PE
-X02 -X02
B16A 1 3 11
14.7
-WCB-X01-1
-W-X02-1 -W-X02-5 1 2 3 4 PE 5x2,5² -W-X02-7
5x2,5² 1 2 3 4 PE 3G2,5² N2XH 5x2,5² 1 2 3 4 PE
N2XH H05VV-F N2XH
-X02 -X01 -X02

1 2 3 4 PE 5 6 PE 1 2 3 4 PE 7 8 9 10 PE
-X10
18 19 PE 2U 2V 2W 2N PE
2U 2V 2W 2N PE 3U1 3W2 PE
-W-X10-18
400 VAC 3U23V2 400 VAC
. .. . 3G2,5² 1 2 PE . .
H05VV-F
=TC
+CP1to3 18 19 PE . . .
. . . . . .
-11T1 -X10 -11T8
=TC 35.5
=TC 35.5
=TC 35.6
3V1 3W1
. . . .
460 VAC . . . 460 VAC . . .

1U 1V 1W 1N 230 VAC SUMINISTRO DE 1U 1V 1W PE
CONTROL DA LA TURBINA
CB.G.L1
10.9
10.9
CB.G.L2 -11F4 230VAC SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNG
10.9 CB.G.L3 E18 VOM TURBINENSTEUERSCHRANK
CB.G.N 6A
10.9
230V / 50Hz / max 16A
-11F8
E18
-11F1 -12Q1 6A
E18
CB.L1 6A CB.L1
10.9
CB.L2 CB.L2
10.9
10.9 CB.L3 CB.L3
CB.N CB.N
10.9
VOLTAJE GENERADOR DISYUNTOR GENERADOR VOLTAJE LA RED

VOLTAGE GENERATOR GENERATORSCHALTER MAINS VOLTAGE
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
VOLTAJE GENERADOR/LA RED ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01
12-06-033 GENERATOR-/NETZSPANNUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CB.V.L1 CB.V.L1
11.9 15.0
10.9 CB.L+1 CB.L+1 13.0
11 11 11
-13K3 -13K6 -13K5

12 14 12 14 12 14
-12Q1 B2 A2 C2 D2 11 21 81
OF1 OF2 SDE
M xf MX1 MN
B1 A1 C1 D1 12 14 22 24 82 84
11.5
X1 X2 LED
X1 ROJO
A1 A1 A1
-12H4 -12K5 -12K6 -12K7 -12H8 LED
A2 A2 A2 X2 RED
X0
10.9 CB.M CB.M 13.0
CB.V.N CB.V.N
11.9 15.0
14 14 14
12 11 12 11 12 11
13.3 13.5 14.6
24 24 24
22 21 22 21 22 21
14.1 14.2
34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31
44 14.4 44 14.5 44
42 41 42 41 42 41
OFF ON AVERIA/OFF NO AVERIA

OFF ON FAULT/OFF NO FAULT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CB.L+1 CB.L+1
12.9
11 11
-12K5 -12K6
12 14 12 14
2 4 14 12
-X10
-13F1 5 7 9
1 3 11 -W-X10-5
B10A
14.8
7G2,5² 5 1 3
H05VV5-F
=TC 35.1
=TC 35.2
=TC 35.3
=TC
+CP1to3 5 7 9
-X10 DISYUNTOR
DISYUNTOR
GENERADOR
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR OFF DESCONECTADOR
-X10 GENERADOR ON
20 21 22 23 PE GENERATOR-
GENERATOR
GENERATOR- SCHALTER AUS
=TC 35.1
=TC 35.3
=TC 35.4
=TC 35.4
-W-X10-20 SCHALTER U-SPULE
SCHALTER EIN
5G2,5²
H05VV-F =TC
=TC +CP1to3
+CP1to3 20 21 22 23 PE -X10
6 8 10 PE
-X10
=TC 35.7
=TC 35.7
=TC 35.7
=TC 35.8
=TC 35.8
-W-X10-5
7G2,5² 6 2 4 PE
H05VV5-F
-X10
6 8 10 PE
24VDC SUMINISTRO DE
CONTROL DA LA TURBINA
24VDC SPANNUNGSVERSORGUNG
VOM TURBINENSTEUERSCHRANK
A1 A1 A1
-13K3 -13K5 -13K6
A2 A2 A2
CB.M CB.M
12.9
14 14 14
12 11 12 11 12 11
12.1 12.3 12.2
24 24 24
22 21 22 21 22 21
34 34 34
32 31 32 31 32 31
44 44 44
42 41 42 41 42 41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
=TC 34.8
=TC 36.5
=TC +EXT
+CP1to3 1 3 -X
-X10
-W-X10-1
5G2,5² 1 3
H05VV5-F
-X10 -X10
1 3 24 26 28 30 32
21 21 31 31 11 11 11
-12K5 -12K6 -12K5 -12K6 -12K7 -11F6 -13F1
22 24 22 24 32 34 32 34 12 14 14 12 14 12
-X10 -X10
2 4 PE 25 27 29 31 33 PE PE
-W-X10-1
5G2,5² 2 4 PE
H05VV5-F
=TC +EXT
+CP1to3 2 4 PE -X PE PE
-X10
=TC 34.8
=TC 36.5
=TC 36.5
DISYUNTOR DISYUNTOR DISYUNTOR DISYUNTOR DISYUNTOR 230VAC AVERIA 24VDC AVERIA

GENERADOR OFF GENERADOR ON GENERADOR OFF GENERADOR ON GENERADOR AVERIA
230VAC GESTÖRT 24VDC GESTÖRT
GENERATOR- GENERATOR- GENERATOR- GENERATOR- GENERATOR-
SCHALTER AUS SCHALTER EIN SCHALTER AUS SCHALTER EIN SCHALTER GESTÖRT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
MENSAJES ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01
12-06-033 RÜCKMELDUNGEN Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CB.V.L1 CB.V.L1
12.9
-15S1 2
T
-XLÜF1 1
L1
-15M1 M
N PE
-XLÜF1 2 PE
CB.V.N CB.V.N
12.9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =CB
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
VENTILADOR DE AMARIO ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01
12-06-033 SCHRANKLÜFTER Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable externo asignación Placa de bornes: -X01 Pagina/Seite
N2XH
-WCB-X01-1 5x2,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 GENERADOR VOLTAJE L1 =CB+EXT-X 1 1 4 -11F4 11.4
4 GENERADOR VOLTAJE N =CB+EXT-X 4 4 4 -11T1 1N 11.5
GENERADOR VOLTAJE PE PE PE4 =CB+EXT-X PE 11.5
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 11.07.12 =CB
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01
BBF00069
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
N2XH
-W-X02-7 5x2,5²
H05VV-F
-W-X02-5 3G2,5²
N2XH
-W-X02-1 5x2,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 VOLTAJE GENERADOR L1 =TC+CP1to3-X02 1 1 4 -11T1 2U 11.1
2 VOLTAJE GENERADOR L2 =TC+CP1to3-X02 2 2 4 -11T1 2V 11.1
3 VOLTAJE GENERADOR L3 =TC+CP1to3-X02 3 3 4 -11T1 2W 11.1
4 VOLTAJE GENERADOR N =TC+CP1to3-X02 4 4 4 -11T1 2N 11.1
PE VOLTAJE GENERADOR PE =TC+CP1to3-X02 PE PE PE4 -11T1 PE 11.2
VOLTAJE GENERADOR EN-MESURE e =TC+CP1to3-X02 3 5 4 -11T1 3U1 11.3
VOLTAJE GENERADOR EN-MESURE n =TC+CP1to3-X02 4 6 4 -11T1 3W2 11.3
VOLTAJE GENERADOR EN-MESURE PE =TC+CP1to3-X02 PE PE PE4 -11T1 PE 11.3
1 VOLTAJE LA RED L1 =TC+CP1to3-X02 7 7 4 -11T8 2U 11.8
2 VOLTAJE LA RED L2 =TC+CP1to3-X02 8 8 4 -11T8 2V 11.8
3 VOLTAJE LA RED L3 =TC+CP1to3-X02 9 9 4 -11T8 2W 11.8
4 VOLTAJE LA RED N =TC+CP1to3-X02 10 10 4 -11T8 2N 11.9
PE VOLTAJE LA RED PE =TC+CP1to3-X02 PE PE PE4 -11T8 PE 11.9
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01

21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H05VV-F
-W-X10-20 5G2,5²
H05VV-F
-W-X10-18 3G2,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X10-5 7G2,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X10-1 5G2,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR OFF =TC+CP1to3-X10 1 1 2,5 -12K5 21 14.1
3 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR ON =TC+CP1to3-X10 3 3 2,5 -12K6 21 14.2
PE =TC+CP1to3-X10 PE PE PE4 14.2
6 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR ON =TC+CP1to3-X10 6 6 2,5 -13K3 A1 13.3
2 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR OFF =TC+CP1to3-X10 8 8 2,5 -13K5 A1 13.5
3 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR DESCONECTADOR =TC+CP1to3-X10 9 9 2,5 -10P6 13 13.6
4 DISYUNTOR GENERADOR DESCONECTADOR =TC+CP1to3-X10 10 10 2,5 -13K6 A1 13.6
PE =TC+CP1to3-X10 PE PE PE4 13.6
1 230VAC SUMINISTRO L =TC+CP1to3-X10 18 18 4 -11F6 1 11.6
2 230VAC SUMINISTRO N =TC+CP1to3-X10 19 19 4 -11F6 3 11.7
PE 230VAC SUMINISTRO PE =TC+CP1to3-X10 PE PE PE4 11.7
24 VDC SUMINISTRO + =TC+CP1to3-X10 20 20 4 13.1
24 VDC SUMINISTRO + =TC+CP1to3-X10 21 21 4 -13F1 1 13.1
24 VDC SUMINISTRO - =TC+CP1to3-X10 22 22 4 -13F1 3 13.1
24 VDC SUMINISTRO - =TC+CP1to3-X10 23 23 4 13.1
24 VDC SUMINISTRO PE =TC+CP1to3-X10 PE PE PE4 13.1
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR OFF =CB+EXT-X 24 2,5 -12K5 31 14.4
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR OFF =CB+EXT-X . 25 2,5 -12K5 34 14.4
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR ON =CB+EXT-X 26 2,5 -12K6 31 14.5
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR ON =CB+EXT-X . 27 2,5 -12K6 34 14.5
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR AVERIA =CB+EXT-X 28 2,5 -12K7 11 14.6
DISYUNTOR GENERADOR AVERIA =CB+EXT-X . 29 2,5 -12K7 14 14.6
230VAC AVERIA =CB+EXT-X 30 2,5 -11F6 11 14.7
230VAC AVERIA =CB+EXT-X . 31 2,5 -11F6 14 14.7
24VDC AVERIA =CB+EXT-X 32 2,5 -13F1 11 14.8
24VDC AVERIA =CB+EXT-X . 33 2,5 -13F1 14 14.8
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
PE PE4 =CB+EXT-X PE 14.9
PE PE4 =CB+EXT-X PE 14.9
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01

21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 1 =CB+01-10P6 power meter 2152000 INT-1630-M-1-L-000 Crompton / Tyco Electronic
2 6 =CB+01-XIS test and separating terminal WTL6/3 0201503 1018600000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
3 1 =CB+01-XIS Klemme_PE
4 10 =CB+01-X02 Terminal WDU 4 0201003 1020100000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
5 1 =CB+01-11T1 Voltage transformer 2750003 Transtech
6 1 =CB+01-11F1 fuse base 0491003 31 293 Wöhner
7 3 =CB+01-X02 Terminal WPE 4 0201016 1010100000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
9 4 =CB+EXT-X Terminal WDU 4 0201003 1020100000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
12 3 =CB+EXT-X Terminal WPE 4 0201016 1010100000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
14 1 =CB+01-11F6 automatic circuit breaker 0226013 23639 Schneider Electric
16 1 =CB+01-11T8 voltage transformer 2750002 Transtech
18 1 =CB+01-12Q1 open load-break switch E4S/MS 40 F HR 0084212 E4S/MS 40 F HR ABB
19 1 =CB+01-12H4 switch position indicator 9030001 PAD 56-22WF/G Mocotech
20 1 =CB+01-12K5 miniature relay 0130000 55.34.9.024.0040 Finder GmbH
23 1 =CB+01-12H8 LED pilot light LED 24 V 0222002 XB5 AVB4 Schneider Electric
24 1 =CB+01-13F1 automatic circuit breaker 0226011 23637 Schneider Electric
25 20 =CB+01-X10 Terminal WDU 2,5 0201001 1020000000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

29 10 =CB+EXT-X Terminal WDU 2,5 0201001 1020000000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
30 1 =CB+01-15M1 filter fan 0360006 LV 100 230VAC Rübsamen&Herr
31 1 =CB+01-XLÜF1 Terminal WPE 4 0201016 1010100000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
32 1 =CB+01-15S1 thermostat 0360002 TRS 60 Rübsamen&Herr
33 2 =CB+01-XLÜF1 Terminal WDU 2,5 0201001 1020000000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MF
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+01
21
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

67227 Frankenthal
UNIDAD DE CONTROL LOCAL


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
PORTADA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
SIEMENS UNIDAD DE CONTROL LOCAL
+LP01

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PROTECCIÓN IP 42 IP 54 IP__________ GABINETE TIPO HOJA DE ACERO ACERO INOXIDABLE

X X
VENTANA AL FRENTE DE INT.DE PUERTA NO SI PINTURA RAL 7035 RAL__________

X X
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE MIN. X 0°C __________°C DIMENSIONES (AN x AL x PR) 600x600x210 mm

UMGEBUNGSTEMPERATUR MIN. 0°C __________°C ABMESSUNG (BxHxT) 600x600x210 mm
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE MAX. X 40°C __________°C SEPARACIÓN DE TRANSPORTE X NO SI

UMGEBUNGSTEMPERATUR MAX. 40°C __________°C TRANSPORTTRENNUNG NO JA
HUMEDAD RELATIVA 70% __________% LAS BISAGRAS PUERTA DERECHNA

RELATIVE LUFTFEUCHTIGKEIT X 70% __________% TÜRANSCHLAG RECHTS
GABINETE GENERAL
ENTRADA DE CABLE / ACCESORIOS
ENTRADA DE CABLE ABAJO ARRIBA __________ PLACA DE IDENTIFICACIÓN X ALEMÁN INGLÉS __________
X TYPENSCHILD DEUTSCH ENGLISCH __________
CABLE DE MONTAJE NO SI BRIDA ETIQUETADO "PUERTA" ALEMÁN INGLÉS X ESPAÑOL
X BESCHRIFTUNGSSCHILDER "TÜR" DEUTSCH ENGLISCH SPANISCH
PLASTIK X METALL SCHILDER "GESCHRAUBT" X NEIN JA

SCHALTSCHRANKSTECKDOSE JA X NEIN ÜBER FI-SCHALTER ADERBEZEICHNUNG (z: B.: 13/14) X NEIN JA
SCHALTSCHRANKBELEUCHTUNG JA X NEIN X ÜBER POSITIONSSCHALTER BETRIEBSMITTELKENNZEICHNUNG X MONTAGEPLATTE X GERÄT
VENTILADOR DE GABINETE NO SI THERMOSTATO CABLEADO "SIN HALÓGENOS" NO SI

X X
CALEFACCIÓN DE GABINETE NO SI THERMOSTATO CABLEADO "ESTAÑADO VETAS" NO SI
X X
AIRE ACONDICIONADO NO SI CONTROLADOR DE TEMPERATURA CLIPS DE PRENSA PARA SENSORES NO SI

X X



+GENO GENERADOR
+GENO GENERATOR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MATERIAL / EQUIPO
GABINETE TIPO RITTAL TS _____________

KLEMMKÄSTEN/BEDIENPULTE X RITTAL AE _____________
X
X
RELÉ AUXILIAR X FINDER _____________
STEUERRELAIS FINDER _____________
X
X
PROTECCIÓN DE GENERADOR X WOODWARD/SEG SIEMENS DEIF
X
X
X
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MATERIAL ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

X X


X X
X X
X X
X X



0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
COLOR DE LOS CONDUCTORES ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ÍNDICE / INHALTSVERZEICHNIS
No. PAGINA DESCRIPCIÓN
Nr. SEITE BEZEICHNUNG
1 0001 PORTADA DECKBLATT
2 0002 INFORMACIÓN GENERAL ALLGEMEINE INFORMATIONEN
3 0003 MATERIAL MATERIAL
4 0004 COLOR DE LOS CONDUCTORES ADERFARBEN
5 0005 ÍNDICE INAHLTSVERZEICHNIS
6 0006 ARMARIO VISTA SCHRANKANSICHT
7 0007 CONTROL DE TURBINA TURBINENSTEUERUNG
8 0008 SEÑALES DIGITALES DIGITALE SIGNALE
9 0009 SEÑALES DIGITALES DIGITALE SIGNALE
10 0010 SEÑALES ANALÓGICAS ANALOGE SIGNALE
11 0011 SEÑALES ANALÓGICAS ANALOGE SIGNALE
12 0012 MEDIR LA TEMPERATURA TEMPERATURMESSUNG
13 0013 REGIMEN TURBINA TURBINENDREHZAHL
14 0014 SOBRE LA PROTECCIÓN DE VELOCIDAD ÜBERDREHZAHLSCHUTZ
15 0015 VALVOLA DI REGOLAZIONE DRUCKSTELLGLIED
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
ÍNDICE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
12-06-033 INAHLTSVERZEICHNIS Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
65 1 =13P1 EL REGIMEN TURBINA

2 = 7H8 TURBINA LISTO
30
+LP01 3 = 7S3 AJUSTE DE LA VELOCIDAD
4 = 7S5 TURBINA STOP/0/START
5 = 7S7 1=TURBINA EMBALAR TEST 2=TRIP SIMULATION 19.1
6 = 7S1 EMERGENCIA STOP
7 =14S7 TRIP SIMULATION 19.2
600
CABLE DE MONTAJE (ABAJO): 21xM16
500 1 9xM20
3xM25
400 2 7
300 3 4 5
500
200
400
6
300
100
100
0 1 = 13P1 TURBINE SPEED

2 = 7H8 TURBINE READY
200 210 3 = 7S3 SPEED ADJUSTMENT decr./0/incr.
140
300 70 4 = 7S5 TURBINE Stop/0/Start
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
400 5 = 7S7 1=OVERSPEED TEST 2=TRIP SIMULATION 19.1
6 = 7S1 EMERGENCY STOP
7 = 14S7 TRIP SIMULATION 19.2
CABLE GLANDS (BOTTOM): 21xM16

9xM20
3xM25
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
ARMARIO VISTA ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TURBINA AMARIO
TURBINENSTEUERSCHRANK
=TC 41.1
=TC 54.4
=TC 54.7
=TC 54.8
=TC
+CP1to3 1 3 8 10
-X29
-W-X29-1
12G1,5² 1 3 8 10
H05VV5-F
-X29
1 3 8 10
1 = REDUCIR 1=Turbina embalar test

2 = AUMENTAR 2=Trip Simulation 19.1
1 = DECREASE 1=OVERSPEED TEST
Start
2 = INCREASE 2=TRIP SIMULATION 19.1
Stop
21 2/4 2/4 2/4
X1 LED
1
0
2
1
0
2
BLANCO
-7S1 -7S3 -7S5 -7S7 -7H8
=TC 41.1 22 =TC 54.2 =TC 54.4 =TC 54.7 =TC 54.8 LED
X2 WEISS
1 3 1 3 14.3 1 3
-X29
2 4 5 6 7 9 11 PE
1xM20
-W-X29-1
12G1,5² 2 4 5 6 7 9 11 PE
H05VV5-F
=TC
+CP1to3 2 4 5 6 7 9 11 PE
-X29
=TC 41.1
=TC 54.2
=TC 54.2
=TC 54.3
=TC 54.4
=TC 54.7
=TC 54.8
=TC 54.8
TURBINA AMARIO
EMERGENCIA STOP AJUSTE DE LA VELOCIDAD TURBINA STOP/0/START TURBINA EMBALAR TEST TURBINA LISTO
NOT-AUS DREHZAHLVERSTELLUNG TURBINE STOP/0/START ÜBERDREHZAHLTEST TURBINE BEREIT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PRESION DE ACEITE PRESION DE ACEITE PRESION DE ACEITE NIVEL DE ACEITE ACCIDENTE

BOMBA DE ACEITE
ÖLDRUCK E-PUMPE ÖLDRUCK ÖLDRUCK ÖLNIVEAU

-P & I POS. 46 -P & I POS. 47.1 -P & I POS. 47.2 -P & I POS. 55
P< P P< P P<< P

L< L<<
2 3 1 PE 2 3 1 PE 2 3 1 PE 2 3 1 PE
-W46 -W47.1 -W47.2 -W55

4G1² 3 2 1 PE 4G1² 3 2 1 PE 4G1² 3 2 1 PE 4G1² 3 2 1 PE
H05VV5-F H05VV5-F H05VV5-F H05VV5-F
1xM16 1xM16 1xM16 1xM16
L+ 9.0
-X29
14 15 16 PE 17 18 19 PE 20 21 22 PE 23 24 25 PE 26 27 28 PE
1xM25
-W-X29-15
18G1,5² 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H05VV5-F
=TC
+CP1to3 15 16 18 21 23 24 26 27
-X29
=TC 96.1
=TC 96.0
=TC 96.2
=TC 96.3
=TC 96.4
=TC 96.5
=TC 96.6
=TC 96.7
TURBINA AMARIO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
SEÑALES DIGITALES ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
12-06-033 DIGITALE SIGNALE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CONTROL DE FILTRO DE ACEITE
DIFF.-DRUCK ÖLFILTER
-P & I POS. 64.1
P> P
GN RD
4 3 2 1 PE
-W64.1
5G1² 4 3 2 1 PE
H05VV5-F
1xM16 1xM16
8.9 L+
-X29
32 29 30 31 PE 33 34 35 PE 36 37 38 PE 39 40 41 42 PE
-W-X29-15
18G1,5² 11 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 PE
H05VV5-F
=TC
+CP1to3 32 29 30 34 36 37 39 40 42 PE
-X29
=TC 96.9
=TC 96.9
=TC 96.9
=TC 97.1
=TC 97.2
=TC 97.2
=TC 97.3
=TC 97.3
=TC 97.3
=TC 97.3
TURBINA AMARIO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
SEÑALES DIGITALES ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
12-06-033 DIGITALE SIGNALE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PRESION DE VAPOR FRESCO DIFERENCIA DE PRESIÓN PRESION DE VAPOR DIFERENCIA DE PRESIÓN SALIR DE LA PRESION PRESIÓN SEPARADOR
DE VAPOR PA DE EXTRACCIÓN DE VAPOR BP DE VAPOR NIEBLA DE ACEITE
FRISCHDAMPFDRUCK DIFF.-DAMPFDRUCK HD ENTNAHMEDAMPFDRUCK DIFF.-DAMPFDRUCK ND ABDAMPFDRUCK DRUCK ÖLNEBELABSCHEIDER
-P & I POS. 27.1 -P & I POS. 27.2 -P & I POS. 27.3 -P & I POS. 27.4 -P & I POS. 27.5 -P & I POS. 56.1
P P P P P P
I I I I I I
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
-W27.1 -W27.2 -W27.3 -W27.4 -W27.5 -W56.1

2x1² 1 2 Sh 2x1² 1 2 Sh 2x1² 1 2 Sh 2x1² 1 2 Sh 2x1² 1 2 Sh 2x1² 1 2 Sh
H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K
1xM16 1xM16 1xM16 1xM16 1xM16 1xM16
S1 11.0
-X30
1 2 PE S 3 4 PE S 5 6 PE S 7 8 PE S 9 10 PE S 11 12 PE S
1xM25
-W-X30-1
18G1,5² 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
H05VVC4V5-K
S1.1
11.0
=TC
+CP1to3 1 2 PE S 3 4 PE S 5 6 PE S 7 8 PE S 9 10 PE S 11 12 PE S
-X30
=TC 78.5
=TC 78.6
=TC 78.6
=TC 78.6
=TC 78.8
=TC 78.8
=TC 78.8
=TC 78.8
=TC 79.1
=TC 79.1
=TC 79.1
=TC 79.1
=TC 79.3
=TC 79.3
=TC 79.3
=TC 79.3
=TC 79.4
=TC 79.5
=TC 79.5
=TC 79.5
=TC 79.6
=TC 79.6
=TC 79.7
=TC 79.7
TURBINA AMARIO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
SEÑALES ANALÓGICAS ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
12-06-033 ANALOGE SIGNALE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MONITORIZACION DE
VIBRACIONES
SCHWINGUNG GETRIEBE
-P & I POS. 34
mm/s
I
+ -
-W34
2x1² 1 2 Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
1xM16
S1
10.9
-X30
13 14 PE S 15 16 17 PE S
-W-X30-1
18G1,5² 13 14 15 16 17 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
10.9 S1.1
=TC
+CP1to3 13 14 PE S 15 16 17 PE S
-X30
=TC 80.1
=TC 80.1
=TC 80.1
=TC 80.1
=TC 80.3
=TC 80.3
=TC 80.3
=TC 80.4
=TC 80.4
TURBINA AMARIO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
SEÑALES ANALÓGICAS ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
12-06-033 ANALOGE SIGNALE Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
TEMPERATURA DE VAPOR
FRESCO TEMPERATURA DE RODETE ACEITE TEMPERATURA
FRISCHDAMPFTEMPTERATUR LAUFRADTEMPERATUR ÖLTEMPERATUR

-P & I POS. 136 -P & I POS. 85 -P & I POS. 87
PT100 PT100 PT100
. . .
PE PE PE
-W136 -W85 -W87

4G1² 1 2 3 PE Sh 4G1² 1 2 3 PE Sh 4G1² 1 2 3 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K
1xM16 1xM16 1xM16
-X30
28 29 30 PE S 31 32 33 PE S 34 35 36 PE S 37 38 39 PE S 40 41 42 PE S 43 44 PE S
1xM25
-W-X30-28
18G1,5² 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K
=TC
+CP1to3 28 29 30 PE S 31 32 33 PE S 34 35 36 PE S 37 38 39 PE S 40 41 42 PE S 43 44 PE S
-X30
=TC 84.6
=TC 84.6
=TC 84.6
=TC 84.7
=TC 84.7
=TC 80.8
=TC 80.8
=TC 80.8
=TC 80.9
=TC 80.9
=TC 85.1
=TC 85.1
=TC 85.1
=TC 85.1
=TC 85.2
=TC 85.3
=TC 85.3
=TC 85.3
=TC 85.3
=TC 85.4
=TC 85.5
=TC 85.5
=TC 85.5
=TC 85.6
=TC 85.6
=TC 85.6
=TC 85.6
=TC 85.6
=TC 85.7
TURBINA AMARIO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
MEDIR LA TEMPERATURA
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
ELDATEX SIEMENS UNIDAD DE CONTROL LOCAL
+LP01
12-06-033 TEMPERATURMESSUNG Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SENSO DE VELOCIDAD 1 SENSO DE VELOCIDAD 2

0 - 1950 rpm DREHZAHLAUFNEHMER 1 DREHZAHLAUFNEHMER 2
0 - 1950 U/min
-P & I POS. 36.1 -P & I POS. 36.2
-13P1 RIA251
A B C A B C
=TC 24.4
1 2 3 4 SIG - + SIG - +
-W36.1 -W36.2
3x0,75² WH GN BN Sh 3x0,75² WH GN BN Sh
1xM16 1xM16
-X49
1 2 S PE 3 4 5 PE S 6 7 8 PE S
3xM16
-W-X49-1 -W-X49-3 -W-X49-6
2x1,5² 1 2 Sh 4x0,75² 1 2 3 PE Sh 4x0,75² 1 2 3 PE Sh
H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K H05VVC4V5-K
=TC
+CP1to3 1 2 S PE 3 4 5 PE S 6 7 8 PE S
-X49
=TC 24.4
=TC 24.4
=TC 24.5
=TC 24.5
=TC 50.4
=TC 50.5
=TC 50.5
=TC 50.5
=TC 50.5
=TC 50.7
=TC 50.8
=TC 50.8
=TC 50.8
=TC 50.8
TURBINA AMARIO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
REGIMEN TURBINA
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
ELDATEX SIEMENS UNIDAD DE CONTROL LOCAL
+LP01
12-06-033 TURBINENDREHZAHL Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
R&I Pos. 36.3 TURBINA EMBALAR DE PROTECCION (ST800) R&I Pos. 36.4 TURBINA EMBALAR DE PROTECCION (ST800)
+ - + -
F E F E
OVERSPEED PROTECTION ST800 OVERSPEED PROTECTION ST800

-P & I POS. 19.1 -P & I POS. 19.2
A B C D A B C D
-W19.1 -W19.2
6G1² 1 2 3 4 5 PE Sh 6G1² 1 2 3 4 5 PE Sh
H05VVC4C5-K H05VVC4C5-K
1xM20 1xM20
6/8
13
-7S7 -14S8
5 7 14
-X49
9 10 11 12 13 14 PE S 15 16 17 18 19 20 PE S
2xM20 -W-X49-10 -W-X49-16

4G2,5² 1 2 3 PE Sh 4G2,5² 1 2 3 PE Sh
=TC
+CP1to3 10 11 13 PE S 16 17 19 PE S
-X49
=TC 56.6
=TC 56.5
=TC 56.5
=TC 56.6
=TC 56.6
=TC 58.6
=TC 58.5
=TC 58.5
=TC 58.6
=TC 58.6
TURBINA AMARIO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
DE VELOCIDAD
ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
12-06-033 ÜBERDREHZAHLSCHUTZ Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-P & I POS. 29.1 -P & I POS. 29.2
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE

Turbine Turbine
B C E F A D PE B C E F A D PE
-W29.1 -W29.2
7G1² 2 3 5 6 1 4 S PE 7G1² 2 3 5 6 1 4 S PE
1xM20 1xM20
-X49 -X49
21 22 23 24 25 26 S PE 27 28 29 30 31 32 S PE
2xM20
-W-X49-21 -W-X49-27
5G1,5² 1 2 3 4 PE 5G1,5² 1 2 3 4 PE
H05VV5-F H05VV5-F
-W-X49-25 -W-X49-31
2x1,5² 1 2 Sh 2x1,5² 1 2 Sh
=TC =TC
+CP1to3 21 22 23 24 25 26 S PE +CP1to3 27 28 29 30 31 32 S PE
-X49 -X49
=TC 57.3
=TC 57.4
=TC 57.4
=TC 57.4
=TC 57.5
=TC 57.5
=TC 57.5
=TC 57.5
=TC 59.3
=TC 59.4
=TC 59.4
=TC 59.4
=TC 59.5
=TC 59.5
=TC 59.5
=TC 59.5
TURBINA AMARIO
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
H. G. Peters =TU
PROJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
VALVOLA DI REGOLAZIONE ELDATEX
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
12-06-033 DRUCKSTELLGLIED Tel.: 0049 (0) 2157 - 132 855 Beindersheimer Strasse 2 SEITE:

BBF00069
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cable externo asignación Placa de bornes: -X29

Pagina/Seite Cable interno asignación
Kabelbelegung extern Klemmleiste: 1 Kabelbelegung intern
H05VV5-F
-W46 4G1²
H05VV5-F
-W47.1 4G1²
H05VV5-F
-W47.2 4G1²
H05VV5-F
-W55 4G1²
H05VV5-F
-W-X29-15 18G1,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X29-1 12G1,5²
External / Extern Internal / Intern
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 EMERGENCIA STOP =TC+CP1to3-X29 1 1 2,5 -41S1 21 7.1
2 EMERGENCIA STOP =TC+CP1to3-X29 2 2 2,5 -41S1 22 7.1
3 24VDC =TC+CP1to3-X29 3 3 2,5 -7S3 2/4 7.3
4 VELOCIDAD REDUCIR =TC+CP1to3-X29 4 4 2,5 -7S3 1 7.3
5 VELOCIDAD AUMENTAR =TC+CP1to3-X29 5 5 2,5 -7S3 3 7.3
6 TURBINA STOP =TC+CP1to3-X29 6 6 2,5 -7S5 1 7.5
7 TURBINA START =TC+CP1to3-X29 7 7 2,5 -7S5 3 7.5
8 TURBINA EMBALAR TEST =TC+CP1to3-X29 8 8 2,5 -7S7 2/4 7.7
9 TURBINA EMBALAR TEST =TC+CP1to3-X29 9 9 2,5 -7S7 1 7.7
10 TURBINA LISTO =TC+CP1to3-X29 10 10 2,5 -7H8 7.8
11 TURBINA LISTO =TC+CP1to3-X29 11 11 2,5 -7H8 7.8
PE TURBINE READY =TC+CP1to3-X29 PE PE PE4 7.9
P & I POS. 46 14 2,5 8.1 3
1 P & I POS. 46 =TC+CP1to3-X29 15 15 2,5 8.1 2
2 P & I POS. 46 =TC+CP1to3-X29 16 16 2,5 8.1 1
P & I POS. 46 PE PE4 -P & I POS. 46 PE 8.1 PE
P & I POS. 47.1 17 2,5 8.3 3
3 P & I POS. 47.1 =TC+CP1to3-X29 18 18 2,5 8.3 2
P & I POS. 47.1 19 2,5 8.3 1
P & I POS. 47.1 PE PE4 -P & I POS. 47.1 PE 8.3 PE
P & I POS. 47.2 20 2,5 8.4 3
4 P & I POS. 47.2 =TC+CP1to3-X29 21 21 2,5 8.4 2
P & I POS. 47.2 22 2,5 8.5
5 P & I POS. 55 =TC+CP1to3-X29 23 23 2,5 Ob 8.6 3
6 P & I POS. 55 =TC+CP1to3-X29 24 24 2,5 Ob 8.6 2
P & I POS. 55 25 2,5 Oa 8.6 1
P & I POS. 55 PE PE4 -P & I POS. 55 PE 8.6 PE
7 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X29 26 26 2,5 8.7
8 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X29 27 27 2,5 8.8
GERENTE
H. G. Peters 10.07.12 =TU
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

H05VV5-F
-W64.1 5G1²
H05VV5-F
-W-X29-15 18G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
RESERVA 28 2,5 8.9
RESERVA PE PE4 8.9
9 P & I POS. 64.1 =TC+CP1to3-X29 29 29 2,5 9.1 3
10 P & I POS. 64.1 =TC+CP1to3-X29 30 30 2,5 9.1 2
P & I POS. 64.1 31 2,5 9.2 1
11 P & I POS. 64.1 =TC+CP1to3-X29 32 32 2,5 9.1 4
RESERVA 33 2,5 9.3
12 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X29 34 34 2,5 9.3
RESERVA 35 2,5 9.3
RESERVA PE PE4 9.3
13 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X29 36 36 2,5 9.4
14 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X29 37 37 2,5 9.4
RESERVA 38 2,5 9.5
RESERVA PE PE4 9.5
15 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X29 39 39 2,5 9.6
16 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X29 40 40 2,5 9.6
RESERVA 41 2,5 9.6
17 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X29 42 42 2,5 9.6
PE RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X29 PE PE PE4 9.6
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

H05VVC4V5-K
-W27.1 2x1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W27.2 2x1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W27.3 2x1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W27.4 2x1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W27.5 2x1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W56.1 2x1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W34 2x1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X30-1 18G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 P & I POS. 27.1 =TC+CP1to3-X30 1 1 2,5 + 10.0 1
2 P & I POS. 27.1 =TC+CP1to3-X30 2 2 2,5 - 10.1 2
P & I POS. 27.1 PE PE4 10.1
P & I POS. 27.1 S 2,5 Sh 10.1 Sh
3 P & I POS. 27.2 =TC+CP1to3-X30 3 3 2,5 + 10.2 1
4 P & I POS. 27.2 =TC+CP1to3-X30 4 4 2,5 - 10.2 2
P & I POS. 27.2 PE PE4 10.2
P & I POS. 27.2 S 2,5 Sh 10.2 Sh
5 P & I POS. 27.3 =TC+CP1to3-X30 5 5 2,5 + 10.3 1
6 P & I POS. 27.3 =TC+CP1to3-X30 6 6 2,5 - 10.3 2
P & I POS. 27.3 PE PE4 10.4
P & I POS. 27.3 S 2,5 Sh 10.4 Sh
7 P & I POS. 27.4 =TC+CP1to3-X30 7 7 2,5 + 10.5 1
8 P & I POS. 27.4 =TC+CP1to3-X30 8 8 2,5 - 10.5 2
P & I POS. 27.4 PE PE4 10.5
P & I POS. 27.4 S 2,5 Sh 10.5 Sh
9 P & I POS. 27.5 =TC+CP1to3-X30 9 9 2,5 + 10.6 1
10 P & I POS. 27.5 =TC+CP1to3-X30 10 10 2,5 - 10.6 2
P & I POS. 27.5 PE PE4 10.6
P & I POS. 27.5 S 2,5 Sh 10.7 Sh
11 P & I POS. 34 =TC+CP1to3-X30 11 11 2,5 + 10.7 1
12 P & I POS. 34 =TC+CP1to3-X30 12 12 2,5 - 10.8 2
P & I POS. 34 PE PE4 10.8
P & I POS. 34 S 2,5 Sh 10.8 Sh
13 P & I POS. 34 =TC+CP1to3-X30 13 13 2,5 + 11.1 1
14 P & I POS. 34 =TC+CP1to3-X30 14 14 2,5 - 11.1 2
P & I POS. 34 PE PE4 11.1
P & I POS. 34 S 2,5 Sh 11.1 Sh
15 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 15 15 2,5 11.3
16 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 16 16 2,5 11.3
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

H05VVC4V5-K
-W136 4G1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W85 4G1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W87 4G1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X30-28 18G1,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X30-1 18G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
17 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 17 17 2,5 11.3
Sh RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 S S 2,5 11.4
1 P & I POS. 136 =TC+CP1to3-X30 28 28 2,5 12.1 1
2 P & I POS. 136 =TC+CP1to3-X30 29 29 2,5 12.1 2
3 P & I POS. 136 =TC+CP1to3-X30 30 30 2,5 12.1 3
P & I POS. 136 PE PE4 PE 12.1 PE
P & I POS. 136 S 2,5 Sh 12.1 Sh
4 P & I POS. 85 =TC+CP1to3-X30 31 31 2,5 12.2 1
5 P & I POS. 85 =TC+CP1to3-X30 32 32 2,5 12.2 2
6 P & I POS. 85 =TC+CP1to3-X30 33 33 2,5 12.3 3
P & I POS. 85 S 2,5 Sh 12.3 Sh
7 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 34 34 2,5 12.4
8 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 35 35 2,5 12.4
9 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 36 36 2,5 12.4
RESERVA PE PE4 12.4
RESERVA S 2,5 12.5
10 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 37 37 2,5 12.5
11 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 38 38 2,5 12.6
12 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 39 39 2,5 12.6
RESERVA PE PE4 12.6
RESERVA S 2,5 12.6
13 P & I POS. 87 =TC+CP1to3-X30 40 40 2,5 12.7 1
14 P & I POS. 87 =TC+CP1to3-X30 41 41 2,5 12.7 2
P & I POS. 87 S 2,5 Sh 12.8 Sh
15 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 42 42 2,5 12.7 3
16 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 43 43 2,5 12.9
17 RESERVA =TC+CP1to3-X30 44 44 2,5 12.9
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X30-28 18G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
RESERVA Sh S 2,5 12.9
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

H05VVC4V5-K
-W36.1 3x0,75²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W36.2 3x0,75²
H05VVC4C5-K
-W19.1 6G1²
H05VVC4C5-K
-W19.2 6G1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X249-14 4G2,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-10 4G2,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-6 4x0,75²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-3 4x0,75²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-1 2x1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 P & I POS. 38.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 1 1 2,5 -13P1 1 13.1
2 P & I POS. 38.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 2 2 2,5 -13P1 3 13.1
Sh P & I POS. 38.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 S S 2,5 Sh 13.1
P & I POS. 38.1 PE PE4 13.1
1 P & I POS. 36.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 3 3 2,5 13.2 WH
2 P & I POS. 36.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 4 4 2,5 13.3 GN
3 P & I POS. 36.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 5 5 2,5 13.3 BN
PE P & I POS. 36.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 PE PE PE4 13.3
Sh P & I POS. 36.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 S S 2,5 Sh 13.3 Sh
1 P & I POS. 36.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 6 6 2,5 13.4 WH
2 P & I POS. 36.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 7 7 2,5 13.4 GN
3 P & I POS. 36.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 8 8 2,5 13.4 BN
PE P & I POS. 36.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 PE PE PE4 13.4
P & I POS. 19.1 -7S7 7 9 2,5 -P & I POS. 19.1 A 14.1 1
2 P & I POS. 19.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 10 10 2,5 C 14.1 3
1 P & I POS. 19.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 11 11 2,5 B 14.1 2
P & I POS. 19.1 12 2,5 -P & I POS. 19.1 D 14.1 4
3 P & I POS. 19.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 13 13 2,5 E 14.1 5
P & I POS. 19.1 14 2,5 -7S7 6/8 14.2
PE P & I POS. 19.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 PE PE PE4 14.2 PE
P & I POS. 19.2 -14S8 14 15 2,5 -P & I POS. 19.2 A 14.5 1
2 P & I POS. 19.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 16 16 2,5 C 14.5 3
1 P & I POS. 19.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 17 17 2,5 B 14.5 2
P & I POS. 19.2 18 2,5 -P & I POS. 19.2 D 14.6 4
3 P & I POS. 19.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 19 19 2,5 E 14.6 5
P & I POS. 19.2 20 2,5 -14S8 13 14.6
PE P & I POS. 19.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 PE PE PE4 14.6 PE
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

H05VVC4V5-K
-W29.1 7G1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W29.2 7G1²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-31 2x1,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X49-27 5G1,5²
H05VVC4V5-K
-W-X49-25 2x1,5²
H05VV5-F
-W-X49-21 5G1,5²
Klemmengrösse
connexión
tamaño de
Seite / Pfad
Página / Sección
beschreibung
Funktions-
la función
Descripción de
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
Klemmennummer
No. de conexiones
Puente / Brücke
bauteil
Anschluss-
componentes
conexión de
Klemme
Conexiones
1 P & I POS. 29.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 21 21 2,5 B 15.1 1
2 P & I POS. 29.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 22 22 2,5 C 15.1 2
3 P & I POS. 29.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 23 23 2,5 E 15.1 3
4 P & I POS. 29.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 24 24 2,5 F 15.2 4
2 P & I POS. 29.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 25 25 2,5 D 15.2 6
1 P & I POS. 29.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 26 26 2,5 A 15.2 5
PE P & I POS. 29.1 =TC+CP1to3-X49 PE PE PE4 PE 15.3 PE
1 P & I POS. 29.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 27 27 2,5 B 15.6 1
2 P & I POS. 29.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 28 28 2,5 C 15.6 2
3 P & I POS. 29.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 29 29 2,5 E 15.6 3
4 P & I POS. 29.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 30 30 2,5 F 15.6 4
2 P & I POS. 29.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 31 31 2,5 D 15.7 6
1 P & I POS. 29.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 32 32 2,5 A 15.7 5
PE P & I POS. 29.2 =TC+CP1to3-X49 PE PE PE4 PE 15.8 PE
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 40 =TU+LP01-X29 Terminal WDU 2,5 0201001 1020000000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
2 1 =TU+LP01-7S1 Emergency stop push button 0222135 ZB5 AS944 Schneider Electric
1 NC screw terminal contact 0222901 ZBE 102 Schneider Electric
3 1 =TU+LP01-7S3 swivel push-button switch 0114304 URR1/8ZM/X85=Schild tiefer / Sontheimer
4 1 =TU+LP01-7S5 change-over switch with retreat on both sides 0114302 URR1/8ZM Sontheimer
5 1 =TU+LP01-7S7 change-over switch with retreat on both sides 0114363 URR2/8ZM/Z32/F312 Sontheimer
6 1 =TU+LP01-7H8 LED pilot light LED 24 V 0222000 XB5 AVB1 Schneider Electric
7 10 =TU+LP01-X29 Terminal WPE 4 0201016 1010100000 Weidmüller GmbH & Co.
10 1 =TU+LP01-13P1 Digital Indication Unit RIA 251 0530001 RIA251-B1 Endress + Hauser
13 1 =TU+LP01-14S8 push-button switch 0222100 XB5 AA21 Schneider Electric
GERENTE
P R OJEKTLEITER
DISEÑADOR
ZEICHNER
U. Grabenhorst
DATUM
AUDITOR
PRÜFER
POWER SYSTEMS GMBH
+LP01
BBF00069
23
Guidelines 4
4 Guidelines
4.1 External electrical installation
See also
2 Installation Guidelines [➙ 3]
EQUI/900517/000- 4-1
4 Guidelines
4-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Installation Guidelines
For the electric installation

of electrical and control equipments
in machinery and control cabinets

Postfach 17 28 Hessheimer Straße 2
67207 Frankenthal 67227 Frankenthal
Germany Germany
Phone ++49 (0) 6233 / 85 - 0

E-Mail turbines-frankenthal.energy@siemens.com
Fax ++49 (0) 6233 / 85 - 2660
Net www.siemens.com/agkkk
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 1 of 30
CONTENTS
Page
1. Machine Installation ......................................................................................... 4
1.1 Technical data for machine control lines ........................................................ 4
1.2 General Information ........................................................................................... 6
1.3 Installation Paths - in the field, in machines, on cable trays and in ducts.............. 7
1.4 Explosion protection ........................................................................................ 8
2. Control cabinet installation ............................................................................. 9

2.1 Installation paths in cabinets, control desks, and control stations ..................... 10
2.2 Installation of low-energy signal lines for measurement and control systems..... 11
2.3 Explosion protection ........................................................................................ 12
3. Voith control components ............................................................................... 12

3.1 Installation of Voith control components ............................................................. 12
3.2 Technical data of the Voith control components .................................................. 14
4. Power supply for Voith control components ................................................ 16

4.1 Quality of the power supply ................................................................................. 17
5. Supplementary guidelines for the Woodward controller .............................. 18

5.1 Installation of the Woodward controller ............................................................ 18
5.2 Protection of the Woodward controller against electrostatic discharge .............. 19
5.3 Power supply to the Woodward controller and Voith components ..................... 20
5.3.1 Quality of the power supply ................................................................................ 21
5.3.2 Power supply to the Woodward controller .......................................................... 22
5.3.3 Power sources of the Woodward controller ........................................................ 23
5.3.4 Screening and earthing ...................................................................................... 24
5.4 Technical data of the Woodward controller ....................................................... 25
6. Notes regarding the installation of SPC, operator panel,

valve co-ordinator, bus cable .......................................................................... 27
7. Earthing and potential equalization ............................................................... 28
8. Standards for the dimensioning and laying of low and medium-voltage

power lines provided for the generator connections.......................... 29
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 2 of 30
APPENDIX
Fig. 1 Detail: Erection

(SIEMENS drawing no.: 4901 002 04 00)
Fig. 2-1 System arrangement potential equalization

(SIEMENS drawing no.: 4901 002 04 01; sheet 1)


Fig. 3-1 Dimensions of the Woodward controller
Fig. 3-6 Controller wiring diagram
Fig. 3-7 Typical 505 E/A scheme
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 3 of 30
1. Machine installation
1.1 Technical data for machine control lines
Installation materials and electrical equipment must be selected in order to fulfil the
environmental requirements on the site.
Oil-resistant machine control lines must be used for turbo machinery as they are in part
fitted to an oil supply unit.
The use of the following machine control lines is recommended for the electrical
equipment to be installed:
Binary transmitters, e.g. proximity switch and analogy signalling systems

 H05VVC4V5-K (former: NYSLYCYÖ – J) or others corresponding to this
standard
 e.g. lines of Lapp, Ölflex - 140 CY type, Classic - 115 CY.
 e.g. lines of Siemens Protoflex type.
Power consumers
Drive motors, actuators, solenoid valves, etc.
Binary transmitters: switches: limit, pressure, temperature switches, etc.

 H05VV5-F (former: NYSLYÖ – J) or others corresponding to this standard:
 e.g. lines of Lapp, Ölflex - 140 type
 e.g. lines of Siemens Protoflex type.
The installed lines may only be used inside of buildings or in suitable protection tubes or
in ducts. If the lines are exposed to a high mechanical load, a steel wire braid version,
e.g. lines of Lapp Ölflex -140 SY type must be used.
If the relevant machines are installed outdoors, the respective lines must be enclosed in
tubes (enclosed installation) or lines corresponding to VDE 0298, Part 3 must be used.
If the machines operate in explosion-endangered areas, only standard lines
corresponding to VDE 0298, Part 3 may be employed.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 4 of 30
Technical data for machine control lines
Line type H05VV5-F H05VVC4V5-K

(former: NYSLYÖ – J) (former: NYSLYCYÖ – J)
Nominal voltage Uo/U 300/500 V 300/500 V
Test voltage 3,000 V 3,000 V
Temperature range - 5°C...+70°C 5°C...+70°C

- flexible
Temperature range - 40°C...+70°C 40°C...+70°C

fixed installation
Minimum bending radius 15x 20x

Line diameter Line diameter
Screening Braiding of tinned copper

wire
Construction Fine-wired stranded cable in accordance with

VDE0295 made of polished E-Cu wires, twisted
layers of PVC-insulated strands, black with white
lettering, 1 insulated strand always to be
green/yellow, outer coating to be of a special PVC-
mixture.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 5 of 30
1.2 General Information
In order to ensure mechanical protection of machine installations, small metal cable

ducts are to be provided for the main cable paths and metal protection tubes for the
connections to the individual electrical equipment units. Fitting these installation means
to other supply and pressure pipes (oil, water, steam, etc.) is to be avoided as far as
possible. For inaccessible areas the protection tubes may be installed in the open form
(no pipe bends).
The lines are connected to the electrical equipments through cable bushings or by
plugs. The protection tube with edge protector at each end and at the bends ends right
before the cable bushing or plug.
The screening of the lines coming from the turbo machine must be continuous right
through to the control cabinet by means of local terminal boxes using lead-through
terminals which must not be earthed. Any earth connection at the local electrical
equipment for screening purposes is prohibited. In the control cabinet the screening is to
be connected to earth potential using the shortest possible path and a large contact
area (low resistor).
For information regarding the connection to the earth potential, see section 7, "earthing
and potential equalization".
The screening must not be interrupted along the length of the installation. Any
interruptions required must be made properly.
Reference numbers are to be attached to the ends of the lines.
Control and signal lines as well as power lines (supply lines for motors and/or power
consumers such as heaters) must be laid on different routes.
Due attention must be paid to the installation instructions provided in respect of the
individual electrical equipments.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 6 of 30
1.3 Installation Paths - in the field, in machines, on cable trays and in ducts
In order to minimise as far as possible any disturbing effects caused by inductive and
capacitive couplings between lines laid in parallel the supply lines for power consumers
should be laid at a distance of more than 300 mm from the control and signal lines.
In all situations it is recommendable to select an installation route over different levels.
Crossing cable tracks should always be right-angled.
Supply lines for power consumers are to be laid on cable trays separated from control
and signal lines.
The distance between the cable trays should be at least 300 mm. This also applies to the
laying of supply lines for power consumers as well as control and signal lines in ducts.
Cable trays and ducts are to be connected in a conductive way and earthed.
In narrow spaces and when lines are laid in parallel the control and signal lines must be
enclosed in metal protection tubes if inter-reactive effects from power lines or supply
lines on the control and signal lines are to be expected. These protection tubes are to be
earthed. Power lines may be enclosed in PVC ducts.
Example: Supply lines between phase control and consumer, etc.
Connecting lines for the vibration measurement probes are to be installed very carefully.
The lines should not be bent or subjected to pressure and they must be secured by
means of clips to avoid abrasion. The lines used dependent on the installed transformers
(5 m or 9 m in length) must not be shortened and the connections must be protected
against water and oil, e.g. by means of shrink hosing. Plug connections (in the case of
extensions) are to be protected after calibration only (setting of the probe gap). The
ambient temperature in the area of the transformer should lie between 20°C and max.
65°C. Screened lines should be used to connect transformer and terminal box or
evaluation unit.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 7 of 30
In the case of explosion-protection measures, the identification markings of all electrical
equipments must be clearly readable and they must never be covered over when
painting the machine.
If the type of protection inherent safety EEXi is used the electrical equipment (such as
connection lines, terminal blocks, cable entries) should be light blue or identified as such.
In the case of terminal boxes and in control cabinets with different forms of circuits (those
with and without inherent safety features), there must be a clear separation between the
terminal blocks (with an inherent safety feature - light blue) and the cable ducts (with an
inherent safety feature - light blue). There must be a distance of at least 50 mm for the
terminal blocks or a 1.5 mm partition with a creep path of 50 mm around the partition in
order to satisfy the requirements of VDE 0170/0171.
The installation of inherently-safe circuits to the control cabinet must be carried out using
light-blue lines separated from non-inherently safe circuits.
1.4 Explosion protection
As a rule, the following guidelines/standards must be observed for explosion protection:
Directive 94/9/EG
Directive 93/68/EG
Directive 89/336/EG
DIN EN 50014 (VDE 0170/0171)
DIN EN 50020 (VDE 0170/0171)
DIN EN 60079-7.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 8 of 30
2. Control cabinet installation
The control cabinet must be wired using leads with a cross-section of more than
1.0 mm2.
In the case of 24 V DC supply systems, the cross-section should be 1.5 mm2 while for
transformer lines carrying up to 5A, a cross-section of at least 2.5 mm2 should be
employed.
The unambiguous VDE specifications or the customer specification should be used for
colour coding.
Relays, contactors and solenoid valves should be wired using the following protective
devices:
 Direct current - Inverse diode

 Alternating current - Varistor or RC element
24 Volt and 0 volt supply lines are to be connected to distribution bus bars.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 9 of 30
2.1 Installation Paths - in control cabinets, control desks and control stations
For low-energy signals such as, e.g.:
a) Unit signals (0/4....20 mA)

b) Resistance thermometers
c) Thermocouples
d) mV-transmitters
e) Oscillation monitoring systems
f) Axial displacement monitoring systems
g) Proximity switches
h) Contacts for connection to amplifier relays
i) Speed transmitters
j) Pressure regulating valves
etc.
screened lines are to be used which are housed in one or more ducts separated from the
other lines to the extent that this is possible (a to c where necessary).
The control and signal lines must be laid separately from power lines whenever this is
possible.
The lines must be laid potentially separated in separate ducts whenever this is possible.
The potential separation must also be taken into account for the terminal arrangement.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 10 of 30
2.2 Installation of low-energy signal lines for measurement and control systems
To control the speed of turbo machinery signal lines must be laid from the speed
transmitters and the pressure regulating valve to the controller in the control cabinet.
It is of utmost importance to ensure that there are no interferences from other control,
signal and supply lines which are connections to other electrical equipments. The
instructions set out in the wiring diagram regarding the wire selection must be followed.
Before using another line type SIEMENS must be asked for their approval.
If no local terminal box is available the connecting lines from the speed transmitter is led
directly to the input terminals of control cabinet, control desk or the controller. The
screening is to be set to earth potential.
Here should also be a strict separation of the line paths whenever possible. Due
attention is to be paid to the necessary distances between low-energy signal lines and
high-energy signal lines and/or current supply lines.
For more detailed information please refer to section 2.1 (Installation paths).
When connecting lines to the terminals it must be ensured that the insulation of lines and
strands is as short as possible (i.e. the insulation reaches as close as possible to the
terminal). Individual strands may not be led through the ducts in the form of loops.
To the extent that a certain reserve length of line is necessary, only the completely
screened line length is to be included in the installation as a reserve length.
Loop formation is to be avoided.
All other lines connected to the controller are to be screened whereas the screening
material is to be connected to a collecting bus bar, which is to be connected to the earth
potential in a low-resistance manner.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 11 of 30
2.3 Explosion protection
As a rule, the following guidelines/standards must be observed for explosion protection:
Directive 94/9/EG
Directive 93/68/EG
Directive 89/336/EG
DIN EN 50014 (VDE 0170/0171)
DIN EN 50020 (VDE 0170/0171)
DIN EN 60079-7.
3. Voith control components
3.1 Installation of Voith control components
The instruments can be installed in a control cabinet. The area in which the control
cabinet is installed should have a temperature between 15°C and max. 40°C and a
relative humidity of 70%.
The installation height of 1,600 mm above floor level proved to be satisfactory.
The distance between power control gears and energy distribution systems must be
adequate.
The control system must be accommodated in the control cabinet so as to be easily

accessible.
To facilitate electrical de-coupling of the external control lines coupling relays are to be
used to prevent interfering signals from reaching the controller. The relay condition can
be indicated by LEDs. It should be possible to activate the relay manually.
The controller terminal connector strip and the relays are to be connected by short
screened lines. The relays are to be wired with inverse diodes. Coupling relays are to be
installed as close as possible to the controller terminal connector strip.
The mounting frame is to be earthed with a line having a cross-section of at least 4 mm2.
Special attention has to be paid to the potentially separated laying of the lines.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 12 of 30
The over voltage protection must be installed in the control cabinet if it cannot be housed
in the mounting frame of the controller.
It is secured to a mounting rail. Due to the low protection type (IP20) it is preferable to
install the controller on the mounting plate which is located in the control cabinet.
The operating elements in the form of push-buttons and switches must then be installed
in the front of the control panel. When installing the controller in the front of the control
panel, the latter is to be provided with a lockable transparent front cover.
Due attention is to be paid to the technical data relating to the Voith control
components.
As an example, the installation of coupling relay and mounting frame is described in
Fig. 1 Detail: - Erection.
Note regarding the installation of speed transmitter lines:

When using speed transmitters with pre-amplifier (e.g. explosion protection type) the
transmitter lines firmly attached to the transmitter are to be laid separately in an
adequately dimensioned protection tube.
This will facilitate dismounting and remounting in case of a replacement.
Fig. 1 Detail: Erection (SIEMENS drawing no.: 4901 002 04 00)
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 13 of 30
3.2 Technical data of the Voith control components
SC 800 / Relay Cards / Connection Module
General Data:
Permissible ambient temperature:
in operation - 10 to + 65°C
during transport and storage - 25 to + 80°C
Humidity classification: as per DIN 40 040 E
Protection classification: as per DIN 57 411/ III

VDE 0411
1)
Protection type: as per DIN 40 050/ IP OO
IEC 144
Vibration resistance:
Acceleration 4g
Shock loading 10 g
Dimensions:
Speed controller SC 800 21 TE/3HE in 19"-module
Connection module SC 800 230/50/80 mm W/H/D
Relay card 8TE/3HE in 19"-module
Installation location as desired
1)
Advanced protection type to IP 65 possible through special housing.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 14 of 30
SC 800 / Relay Cards / Connection Module
Electrical data:
Supply voltage 24 V DC
Voltage range 21 to 30 V DC
Permissible residual ripple + 1.2 V
Maximum permissible voltage

between OV and housing 30 V
Current drawn:
Speed Controller SC 800 Normal 0.32 A
Max. 0.5 A
Relay Card Min. 0.03 A

Max. 0.1 A
Analogy inputs and outputs:
Ohmic resistance 200 Ohm
Current 0/4 to 20 mA
Signal relay:
Switching capacity at 30 V 40 W
Ohmic load
Permissible switching current max. 1 A

Permissible switching voltage max. 30 V
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 15 of 30
4. Power supply for Voith control components
As electronic control systems and safety circuits are used for turbine drives it is
necessary to make special demands on the power supply. It is recommended to install a
battery-backed power supply system, complete with charging system, the negative pole
of which is to be earthed.
The supply lines from the supply terminal strip in the control cabinet to the control system
must be twisted and led through the over voltage protection unit.
Switching proposals are contained in the standard diagrams.
0 Volt lines used for power consumers must not be connected with the 0 Volt
leads of signal lines, but to a separate bus bar.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 16 of 30
4.1 Quality of the power supply
Operating voltage Nominal : 24 V DC

Ripple at rated load : = < 1.2 V
Permissible voltage range at the terminal positions of the control and adjusting
instruments: 22...30 V DC abs.
AC leakage current from the operating voltage relative to earth potential: < 0.05 mA.
The cross-section of the connection between 0 Volt and earth should be at least 4 mm2
of copper.
The dimensions of the lines used for the power supply results from:
 number and type of the relays used

 number and fusing of the different circuits
 number and performance of the signalling unit
 power requirement for the pressure regulating valve and the overspeed tripping unit
ST 800, if any
in each case - 24 V x 2.5 A = 60W
 power requirement for the SC 800 speed controller
24 V x 0.3 A = 7.2 W
 power requirement for any pressure controller
 power requirement for the solenoid valve.
Whatever type of power supply unit is employed, it is necessary that the 0 Volt bus bar is
directly earthed.
In the case of a battery-backed supply the 0 Volt is earthed in the control cabinet if the
battery is close to the control cabinet and the charging unit is located in the control
cabinet. In the case of external battery supply, the 0 Volt must not be earthed in the
control cabinet.
However, the voltage between 0 Volt at the controller and the earth potential must not
exceed 30 V.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 17 of 30
5 Supplementary guidelines for the Woodward controller
5.1 Installation of the Woodward controller
The Woodward controller can be installed in the front of the control cabinet. See Fig. 3-1
for the front cut-out, fixing holes and dimensions of the controller.
The room in which the control cabinet is installed should have a temperature between
15°C and max. 40°C at a relative humidity of 70%.
An installation height above the floor of 1,600 mm has proved to be effective.
Sufficient separation should be provided between the power switching devices and the
energy distribution units.
The relays should be connected to inverse diodes. LEDs should be used to show the
condition of the relays. Manual operation of the relays should be possible.
Special attention should be paid to a potentially separated laying of the lines.

Low-current lines (terminals 52 to 121) must be laid separately from the lines (terminals
1 to 51).
Fig. 3-1 Dimensions of the Woodward controller
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 18 of 30
5.2 Protection of the Woodward controller against electrostatic discharge
All electronic equipments are sensitive to statically influences, some components more
than others. In order to protect these components from statically damage, special protective
measures must be taken to reduce or preclude electrostatic discharge.
1. Before carrying out maintenance work on the electronic control system, it is essential
that personnel should discharge the static electricity on their bodies by touching and
holding an earthed metal object (pipe, cabinet, equipment, etc.).
2. Build-up of static electricity should be avoided by not wearing clothing made from
synthetic materials. Where possible, garments made from cotton and cotton mixtures
should be worn, since these materials do not store static electric charge to the extent
that synthetic materials do.
3. On no account should electronics cards (printed circuit boards) be taken out of the
control cabinet unless this is absolutely necessary. The following rules should be
observed when handling PCBs:
 never touch any part of the card except for the edges.
 never touch the boards, edge connectors or the individual components with
conducting devices or with the hands.
4. Keep plastic, vinyl and polystyrene foam materials away from the control system, the
electronic cards and the working area. Materials such as plastics, expanded
polystyrene cups, coffee cup holders, cigarette packets, cellophane packaging for
sweets, book covers or folders made of vinyl materials, plastic bottles and plastic
ashtrays generate and store static electric charges.
This also applies to the insertion and removal of bridges (jumpers) on the control board.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 19 of 30
5.3 Power supply to the Woodward controller and Voith components
(see Fig. 3-6)
As electronic control systems and safety circuits are used for turbine drives it is
necessary to make special demands on the power supply. It is recommended to install a
battery-backed power supply system, complete with charging system, the negative pole
of which is to be earthed.
The supply lines must be twisted. The supply line to the ST 800 must be led through the
over voltage protection unit.
Switching proposals are contained in the standard diagrams.
0 Volt lines used for power consumers must not be connected with the 0 Volt
leads of signal lines, but to a separate bus bar.
Fig. 3-6 Controller wiring diagram
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 20 of 30
5.3.1 Quality of the power supply
Operating voltage nominal : 24 V DC

Ripple at rated load : = < 1.2 V
Permissible voltage range at the terminal positions of the control and adjusting
instruments: 21...30 V DC abs.
AC leakage current from the operating voltage relative to earth potential: < 0.05 mA.
The cross-section of the connection between 0 Volt and earth should be at least 4 mm2
of copper.
The dimensions of the lines used for the power supply results from:
 number and type of the relays used

 number and fusing of the different circuits
 number and performance of the signalling unit
 power requirement for the pressure regulating valve and the overspeed tripping unit
ST 800, if any
in each case - 24 V x 2.5 A = 60W
 power requirement for the Woodward controller
24 V, max. 4 A, max. 100 W
 power requirement for any pressure controller
 power requirement for the solenoid valve.
Whatever type of power supply unit is employed, it is necessary that the 0 Volt bus bar is
directly earthed.
In the case of a battery-backed supply the 0 Volt is earthed in the control cabinet if the
battery is close to the control cabinet and the charging unit is located in the control
cabinet. In the case of external battery supply, the 0 Volt must not be earthed in the
control cabinet.
However, the voltage between 0 Volt at the ST 800 controller and the earth potential
must not exceed 30 V.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 21 of 30
5.3.2 Power supply to the Woodward controller and Voith components
The 505 power supply is rated for 18 to 32 V DC. The power supply can absorb transient
input power losses of about 25 milliseconds (roughly 1.5 Hz at 60 Hz). Input power
losses of more than about 25 milliseconds lead to switching off due to power failure.
Power consumption is less than 100 W.
The power supply delivers the current for the control system and any external
transducers. The 505 controller is rated for supply of power to all transducers via an
unearthed two-wire system. The only exception is the separate 4-20 mA input from the
Woodward effective power transducer, which has its own internal power supply.
18 ... 32 V DC (internal fuse 6.25, maximum current drain 77 VA)
The buffer time of the 505 control system in the event of a power failure depends on its
power supply and the prevailing power consumption. The time given below is based on
the worst condition (i.e. 18 V DC with a bandwidth between 18 and 32 V DC, in the event
of a power failure). This buffer time can be applied when the 505 control unit is fed by an
uninterruptible power supply (UPS), in order to determine whether the UPS switch-over
time is so short that a system shut-down is ruled out. The UPS switch-over times must
be shorter than the buffer time given below:
Power holding time

18 ... 32 V DC power supply 14 ms
The power supply is integrated into the 505 housing. The external wiring for the power
supply is through a terminal strip.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 22 of 30
5.3.3 Power sources of the Woodward controller (see Fig. 3-7)
Fig. 3-7 Typical 505E/A scheme
ATTENTION
The total current drawn through the terminals 55, 59, 63, 70 and 74 should not
exceed 200 mA, since otherwise the switch for the internal power supply of the
505 (CB1) opens and may lead to a CPU reset and switching off. The entire load
must be relieved from the terminals so that the switch can be reset.
The second power supply duct supplies 24 V DC +/- 10% @ 200 mA max. output power
to adjust the power outputs and the auxiliary equipment of the 505. The power
connections can be made through the terminals 85, 88, 91, 97, 100 and 103, while
terminal 78 is the common earth.
ATTENTION
The total current drawn through the terminals 85, 88, 91, 97, 100 and 104 should
not exceed 200 mA, since otherwise the switch for the internal power supply of the
505 (CB2) opens and this may lead to a CPU reset and switching off. The entire
load must be relieved from the terminals so that the switch can be reset.
Fig.: 3-8 Arrangement of fuses
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 23 of 30
5.3.4 Screening and earthing
The wiring for each MPU (magnetic pick-up) and for every actuator must be separately
screened. We also recommend separate screening for each milliampere input. Contact
inputs 1 (terminals 57 - 86) can be bundled together within a single multi-pole cable with
overall screening. The screening should only be connected at one end (usually the
controller end). For relay and power cable wiring, no screening is usually required.
It should be ensured that all inputs and outputs including all screening are not earthed
outside the 505 housing. The terminal strip 123 (earth) is the only 505 connection point
that should be attached to an external earth.
For reasons of interference prevention, it is recommended that all low-voltage lines

(terminals 52 to 121) should be separated from all high-voltage lines (terminals 1 to 51).
The input power earth terminal No. 3 should also be connected to the external earth.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 24 of 30
5.4 Technical data for the Woodward controller
General data:
Permissible ambient temperature:

in operation: - 20 to +65°C
in transport and storage - 40 to +85°C
Humidity class: Lloyds type EN V2 Test 1
2 temperature cycles between 20 and 55°C,

95% relative humidity within 48 hours.
EMC: EN 50081-2 and EN 50082-2
Insulation type: IEC 529 IP 66
Vibration: 13 - 100 Hz 1g
Shock loading: 30 g 11 ms
Dimensions: see Fig. 3-1 (Appendix)
Electrical connections:
Plug-in terminal strip 2.5 mm2
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 25 of 30
Technical data for the Woodward controller
Electrical data:
Supply voltage: 24 V DC
Voltage range: 21 to 30 V DC
Permissible residual ripple: 1.2 V
Max. permissible voltage

between 0V and housing 30 V
This data is dependent on the Voith components.
Power consumption: see section 5.3.1
6 analogy inputs:
Load 200 Ohm
Current 4 to 20 mA
The controller supplies 24 V DC for the first 5 analogy inputs to supply the two-wire
transducer
6 analogy outputs:
Load max. 600 Ohm
Current 4 to 20 mA
16 contact inputs:
Normally 24 V DC 2.5 mA
At least 14 V DC 1 mA
Minimum closing time of a contact 14 ms for signal recognition
6 relay outputs:
permissible switching current max. 5 A / 0.5 A
permissible switching voltage max. 28 V DC / 115 V AC
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 26 of 30
6. Notes regarding the installation of SPC, operator panel, valve
coordinator, bus cable
The installation of SPC (CPU, input and output modules, switching cards) and of the
operator panel has to be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer’s indications in
the respective manuals.
The manual of the respective bus applies to the laying of cables.
The installation guidelines of the valve co-ordinator apply to its installation.
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 27 of 30
7. Earthing and potential equalization
In compliance with the local regulations and the prevailing mains conditions, the electrical
equipment associated with the turbo machine should be earthed. Potential equalization
should be carried out.
In the case of turbo-generators, the zero conductor should be connected directly to earth
with half the external conductor cross-section (if required by mains type). The generator
housing and all other earthing points should be wired separately from the PE rail. For
systems set up according to the VDE regulations, the following applies in particular:
DIN VDE 0100, Teil 540

DIN EN 50178.
Apart from the electrical equipment, the following should be included in the potential
equalization:
 the base frame of the turbine
 the water pipes to the oil cooler
 the media supply pipes
 the steel structures
 the associated steam pipes
 the control and monitoring cabinets
 the generator housing (for generator systems)
 the negative terminal of the battery
The dimensions of the relevant potential equalization lines should be determined according
to the above regulations.
In figures 2-1 to 2-3 a turbo unit was used as an example and the wiring shown
schematically.
The connecting points and the wiring routes should be adopted analogously.
Fig. 2-1 System arrangement potential equalization (SIEMENS drawing no.: 4901 002 04 01; sheet 1)
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 28 of 30
8. Standards for the dimensioning and laying of low and medium-
voltage power cables provided for the generator connections
As a matter of principle, cable trays have to be connected with each other and with the
earth potential.
To avoid a damage to the cable insulation the supporting systems have to be provided
with edge protection both at the beginning and in the wiring corners.
In case of low and medium-voltage cables pipe clamps of nonmagnetic material have to
be fixed at a distance of one meter respectively.
In case of cable entries – e.g. out of a duct from below into the power control cabinet –
suitable cable cord strips (cable clamping rails) must always be provided. If laying takes
place in bends or entries and exits in terminal boxes and control cabinets the permitted
bending radii of the cables have to be observed.
When cables are laid on cable trays without sufficient distance, in pipes or badly
ventilated ducts, as well as at increased environmental temperatures, the reduction
factors according to VDE 0298 / DIN 57298 have to be taken into account.
Laying several systems per phase means that they have be laid symmetrically and
partitioned into collars, so that each collar consists of the phases L1, L2, L3 (and
possibly N) to counteract the formation of magnetic fields. If possible, the cross bonding
into symmetrical systems shall be carried out in the generator terminal box or in the
generator power switch.
The neutral is to be laid with half outer conductor cross section, if it is earthed outside
the generator or differently.
The suitability of the insulation material has to be guaranteed according to the location
and the conditions prevailing there.
Generally, suitable cable potheads have to be used at medium-voltage cables.
The cable screen must be led on earth potential on both sides. That the pressing of the
potheads must be carried out in accordance with the details of the manufacturer goes
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 29 of 30
without saying.
>1
_________
>1
_________
1 Cable tray
2 Cable clamps of nonmagnetic material
(aluminium)
The outer conductors must always be partitioned symmetrically into triple collars !
4951 910 03 42
10.2010 20-002 en
Page 30 of 30
Guidelines 4
4.2 Surrounding area for turbines
See also
2 Regulations for the surroundings of Turbine [➙ 35]
EQUI/900517/000- 4-33
4 Guidelines
4-34 EQUI/900517/000-
Regulations for the surroundings of
turbines

Postfach 17 28 Heßheimer Straße 2
67207 Frankenthal 67227 Frankenthal
Deutschland Deutschland
Phone ++49 (0) 6233 / 85 - 0

E-Mail turbines-frankenthal.energy@siemens.com
Fax ++49 (0) 6233 / 85 - 2660
Net www.siemens.com/agkkk
Regulations for the

Page 1 of 24 surroundings of turbines 29.08.2012
4951 910 03 35
Index of content
Page
1 Scope of application..................................................................................................... 3
2 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 4
3 Construction of the foundation and installation of the turbines .................................... 5
3.1 Construction of the foundation ..................................................................................... 5
3.2 Influence of the foundation on the vibration behavior of turbines................................. 6
4 Design of the steam lines............................................................................................. 7
4.1 Routing......................................................................................................................... 7
4.1.1 Main steam line ............................................................................................................ 8
4.1.2 Exhaust steam line....................................................................................................... 9
4.2 Forces and moments of the steam lines .................................................................... 11
4.3 Connecting the steam lines........................................................................................ 11
4.4 Steam line drainage ................................................................................................... 12
4.5 Warmup line ............................................................................................................... 13
4.6 Blowdown line: Startup and shutdown with backpressure (see fig. 2) ....................... 14
4.6.1 In case of backpressures of less than 6 bar (g) startup of the turbine is possible
without additional measures....................................................................................... 14
4.6.2 In case of backpressures larger than 6 bar (g) and smaller than 11 bar (g) the
following measures are required: ............................................................................... 14
4.6.3 In case of backpressures larger than 11 bar (g) the following measures are
necessary:.................................................................................................................. 15
5 Valves ........................................................................................................................ 17
5.1 Main steam line ......................................................................................................... 17
5.2 Exhaust steam line..................................................................................................... 18
5.3 Extraction line in extraction turbines .......................................................................... 19
6 Design of the turbine drains, leakoff steam and gland steam discharge.................... 20
6.1 Drains for backpressure turbines ............................................................................... 20
6.2 Discharge of leakoff steam......................................................................................... 21
6.3 Gland steam discharge .............................................................................................. 22
6.4 Drains on condensing turbines................................................................................... 23
7 Arrangement of the temperature measurement nozzles............................................ 23
Regulations for the

29.08.2012 surroundings of turbines Page 2 of 24
4951 910 03 35
1 Scope of application
This regulation is applicable for the following types of Siemens turbines:
 SST-040
 SST-050
 SST-060
 SST-110
 SST-111
The regulations include information for the design of the turbine

surroundings and for equipment that is not included in the Siemens scope
of supply.
The Siemens scope of supply is listed in the order confirmation.
The customer is solely responsible for the adherence to these regulations.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
2 Introduction
Proper assembly of the entire equipment unit is required for smooth

operation.
It is important that parts are easily accessible for maintenance and have a
user-friendly HMI.
Corresponding lifting gear, lighting, site electricity and scaffolding shall be

provided for assembly and maintenance work.
Caution
Damage when climbing on pipe work
Climbing on pipe work and cable ducts may damage the installations, causing
acute fire hazard.
1. The turbine unit and the pipe work may not be used as climbing and
standing aid for work above the unit.
2. Use a ladder or scaffolding for work above the entire turbine unit.
At the plant, it must be ensured that the turbine cannot be powered by the
driven machine.
The binding regulations applicable in the country of use and at the

installation location concerning accident prevention and environmental
protection shall be adhered to.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
3 Construction of the foundation and installation of the turbines
3.1 Construction of the foundation
The foundation shall be constructed so that the static and dynamic loads of
the turbine and the driven machine are accommodated. The natural
frequencies must have the minimum distance to the operating speed
1)
required according to DIN 4024 . Vibrations from the surroundings may
not cause inadmissible vibrating amplitudes on the unit.
Basis for evaluation are the displacement amplitudes of the machine rotor,
especially around the bearings.
After faults, the foundation may not be damaged in a way that impairs
further normal operation of the unit. A calculation of the static and dynamic
1)
load shall be performed according to DIN 4024 in order to achieve the
above requirements.
1) As long as there is no international norm corresponding to DIN 4024, DIN 4024 shall
be applicable. DIN 4024 is available in English translation
(DIN 4024 Machine foundations; rigid foundations for machinery with periodic
excitation).
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
3.2 Influence of the foundation on the vibration behavior of turbines
New Siemens turbines have vibration levels pursuant to DIN ISO 10816-3,
Group 1, Zone A and vibration data for rigid and yielding foundation
according to Appendix A of the standard.
In case of turbine speeds larger than 15000 1/min, DIN ISO 10816-1, Zone
A, Class III (rigid foundation) or Class IV (yielding foundation) is applicable.
A foundation can be designated as rigid if there are no critical resonances

within a range of +/- 25% around the operating speed.
The customer must perform dynamic and static foundation calculations or

have them done and provide documentation to prove absence of
resonance.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
4 Design of the steam lines
4.1 Routing
The steam lines must be designed and routed so that no water or

condensate from the pipe work ingresses the turbine during startup or
continuous operation.
Water can also ingress the turbine in case of non-steady-state boiler

conditions or if condensate is entrained from dead spaces or steam lines
that are not drained.
The customer must provide the steam lines with protection against
overpressure through adequate measures.
Pressure values [→ see Section 5 – Technical data]
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
4.1.1 Main steam line
Steam lines from the steam generator shall preferably be routed to the
turbine via a steam distributor (see figure 1).
Figure 1
1 Main steam line

2 Steam for turbine and consumers
3 Alternative connections
4 To the drains collection point
5 Startup drain and purging option
Route branch lines to the turbine from the main steam line towards the top.
Lay horizontal line sections with a slope of approximately 1 to 2 % in steam

line direction.
Avoid dead spaces, or pipeline sections in which condensate can collect

(for example blind downward branch lines).
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
4.1.2 Exhaust steam line
HAZARD
Damage to the turbine through overpressure and overheating
Overpressure and overheating, and thus damage to the entire unit may be
caused by false design of the components.
 Pay attention to the exhaust steam temperature while the turbine is in idle
mode for the design of the parts.
When using an air-cooled condenser we recommend installing a water

injection system between the turbine and the air-cooled condenser.
A vertical steam line section, directed towards the top in direct connection
to the exhaust steam flange of the turbine may not be longer than 2 - 3 m,
in order to prevent condensate backflow into the turbine. If the vertical
steam line section needs to be longer, a horizontal steam line section with
appropriate drainage shall be installed.
Lay horizontal steam line sections with an incline of approximately 1 to 2 %

in steam flow direction.
Avoid dead spaces, or pipeline sections in which condensate can collect

(for example blind downward branch lines).
The following shall be considered if a turbo auxiliary oil pump VF 2.0 is

installed:
In the pipe layout of the exhaust line of the turbo auxiliary oil pump VF2.0 it
must be ensured that the exhaust steam is discharged without pressure,
admission into a steam system with pressure >/= 1,2 Bar(a) is not
admissible.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
The steam line may not contain an isolation valve downstream of the turbo
auxiliary oil pump VF2.0.
Sufficient and safe drainage shall be ensured, water may not settle in the
exhaust steam line. In case of outside installation, ice formation must be
prevented in the line, if necessary, the line must be heated.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
4.2 Forces and moments of the steam lines
HAZARD
Damage to the turbine through inadmissible high forces
Inadmissible high forces from the pipe work may lead to deformation of the
turbine parts, causing the turbine rotor to rub inside the casing.
 The main steam and exhaust steam line must be installed so that the
admissible forces and moments on the flange of the turbine are not
exceeded.
The admissible forces and moments as well as the nozzle displacements

are listed in the installation drawing.
During installation of the steam lines, the preloads, locations of the

supports and the spring hangers, location of any expansion joints and
other construction information stated in the drawing of the piping designer
shall be exactly adhered to in order to exclude deviations from the
calculated forces and moments.
4.3 Connecting the steam lines
The parallel deviation may not exceed 0.2 mm in the sealing diameter on
loosened flanges. If the deviations are greater, the steam line shall be
adjusted until the minimum values are reached.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
4.4 Steam line drainage
Steam lines must be automatically drained at the following locations:
o prior to every upward change of direction

o at low points
o at the end of the line
o in intervals of approximately 100 m in straight lines
o upstream or downstream of isolating devices, non-return devices, orifices
etc.
(see figure 3).
HAZARD
Hazard through hot condensate
Scalding hazard on hot condensate.

 Design the steam traps so that there is no scalding hazard or vision
impairment through exiting steam.
Freezing of the drain lines must be excluded.
Re-evaporation must be considered when sizing the drain discharge line

downstream of the steam traps.
Drain lines shall be equipped with adequate contact protection, insofar
accessible.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
4.5 Warmup line
A warmup line shall be installed directly upstream of the turbine in the main
steam line (figure 3).
It shall be designed so that the minimum startup temperature is reached
before the turbine is started. It can be connected to a steam header.
Minimal admissible startup steam temperature

[→Operating instructions "Technical Data"]
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
4.6 Blowdown line: Startup and shutdown with backpressure (see fig. 2)
HAZARD
Hazard through escaping steam
Scalding hazard through escaping steam on blowdown lines and safety valves.
 The blowdown lines for startup and shutdown of the turbine without load
and for the safety valves must be routed such thatescaping steam does not
pose a hazard to personnel..
4.6.1 In case of backpressures of less than 6 bar (g) startup of the turbine
is possible without additional measures.
4.6.2 In case of backpressures larger than 6 bar (g) and smaller than
11 bar (g) the following measures are required:
Install a nonreturn valve in the exhaust steam line downstream of the

turbine (as far away from the turbine as possible).
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
4.6.3 In case of backpressures larger than 11 bar (g) the following
measures are necessary:
Install a nonreturn valve in the exhaust steam line downstream of the

turbine.
A blowdown line DN 100 resp. 4“ with blowdown valve shall be installed by
the customer between the turbine and the nonreturn valve in the exhaust
steam line.
The blowdown valve shall be actuated with auxiliary power and shall be
interlocked with the startup procedure as a function of the speed limit of the
turbine.
For this purpose, Siemens installs a pressure switch in the exhaust steam
line between blowdown line and the turbine.
The turbine is interlocked for startup so that the turbine cannot be started
at a backpressure of > 6 bar (g), as this leads to increased wear of the
bearing.
The blowdown steam shall be discharged under atmospheric pressure, for

example via the roof.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
Figure 2
1 Exhaust steam line

2 Isolation valve
3 Nonreturn valve
4 Blowdown line (DN 100 or 4"; discharge under atmospheric pressure)
5 Blowdown valve
6 Vent line
7 Drain line
8 Safety valve
9 SIEMENS- terminal point
10 Automatic steam trap
11 Main steam
12 Pressure switch
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
5 Valves
5.1 Main steam line
Turbine casings and valve bodies are designed for the corresponding pressure
levels in agreement with the design data stated by Siemens.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
HAZARD
Hazard through escaping steam
Exceeding the admissible main steam / exhaust steam pressure may cause
steam to escape on the turbine. Scalding hazard.
 Ensure that it is not possible to exceed the admissible pressure in the main
steam line and thus in the turbine.
An isolating device must be installed upstream of the turbine.

The customer must install an effective droplet and dirt separator, for
example a cyclone, in the main steam line.
The droplet and dirt separator must be installed between the isolating
device and the turbine.
5.2 Exhaust steam line

See figure 2 under 4.6 (Blowdown line)
An isolating device must be installed downstream of the turbine.

A safety valve adequate for 100% mass steam flow must be installed
between the turbine and the isolating device.
See operating manual „Technical Data“ for maximum response pressure
for the safety valve.
If the turbine is in immediate stand-by when the main and exhaust steam
valves are open, a nonreturn device must be installed in the exhaust line of
the turbine.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
5.3 Extraction line in extraction turbines
An isolating device and a nonreturn valve must be installed in the
extraction line between the HP turbine and the LP turbine.
A safety valve adequate for 100% steam mass flow must be installed in the
extraction line between the turbine and the isolating valve.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
6 Design of the turbine drains, leakoff steam and gland steam exhaust
6.1 Drains for backpressure turbines
The drains mounted on the turbines are exclusively intended for the
turbine.
All main steam and nozzle chamber drains can be discharged by gravity to
the environment either separately or collectively via a steam header.
The exhaust steam drain shall discharged to the environment separately
and by gravity.
In case of turbines that are designed for automatic startup, all drains are
equipped with automatic steam traps.
HAZARD

 Design the steam traps such that there is no scalding hazard or vision
impairment through escaping steam.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
6.2 Discharge of leakoff steam
Leakoff steam can be routed into an LP system or can be discharged to

the environment at atmospheric pressure depending on the turbine design.
Depending on the exhaust steam pressure and turbine speed, the
"maximum admissible leakoff steam pressure" is calculated.
Maximum admissible leakoff steam pressure

[→Operating manual "Technical Data"]
If a steam system is available whose pressure is lower than the admissible

leakoff steam pressure, the leakoff steam line can be connected there.
If no adequate steam system is available, the leakoff steam line shall be

routed outside with a downward pitch, into a steam header or into a steam
condenser.
The leakoff line losses may not exceed a maximum of 0.2 bar.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
6.3 Gland exhaust steam discharge
The gland steam exhaust line shall be routed to the environment with a downward
pitch and without an isolation valve, into a steam header or into a condenser.
The gland steam exhaust line must be laid with a corresponding cross section
according to the installation drawing so that no backlog occurs.
NOTE
Merging leakoff and gland exhaust steam discharge lines
Leckoff steam, gland exhaust steam and drains have different pressure levels.
Merging can lead to pressure buildup and steam leakage.
 Pay special attention that leakoff steam and gland exhaust steam discharge
lines are:
1. laid separately.
2. not merged with drain lines.
3. do not discharge into a volume of water.
 Adhere to the minimal line cross sections.
Leakoff and gland exhaust steam discharge [→ Installation drawing]
HAZARD

 Design the steam traps so that there is no scalding hazard or vision
impairment through escaping steam.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
6.4 Drains on condensing turbines
The drain lines shall be designed according to the manufacturers

specifications following the P&IDs
When using mechanical seals, leakoff and gland exhaust steam discharge
lines are no longer necessary.
7 Arrangement of the temperature measurement nozzles
Fault-free measuring points must be installed to check the main steam

temperature. These measuring points must be arranged in the main steam
line, immediately upstream of the turbine. A measuring connection for a
mechanical thermometer, as well as a measuring connection for an
electrical thermometer must be welded in. Measuring arrangements must
correspond to the VDI-guidelines 3512, Sheet 2 (see figure 5).
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
Measuring arrangement with weld-in guard pipes and weld-on nozzle
Figure 4
1 Weld-on nozzle
2 Weld-in guard pipe DIN 43763 Geometry D
3 Connecting tube DIN 43763
matching:
4 Terminal head DIN 43729
5 Measuring element DIN 43735 or 43762
6 Machine glass thermometer DIN 16174 Geometry D and E
DIN 16189 Geometry D and E
Ø d1 pre-drilled, reamed to G7 after welding.
Only the underlined dimensions are recommended, the other dimensions

shall be checked by the supplier of the operating equipment.
Regulations for the

4951 910 03 35
Guidelines 4
4.3 Installation instructions for flanged joints
See also
2 Installation instructions for flanged connections [➙ 61]
EQUI/900517/000- 4-59
4 Guidelines
4-60 EQUI/900517/000-
Installation instructions for flanged connections
WARNING
Risk of burns and scalding when working on components conveying live
steam
Risk of burns and scalding when working on components conveying live steam
1. Ensure compliance with the specified cooling-down times for the

components in the steam path.
2. Be sure to wear suitable protective gloves before touching hot machine

parts.
1. Completely coat threads and all nut contact faces with NEVER SEEZ.
2. Use a ratched torque wrench to tighten the bolt and nuts to the specified
torque.
3. First tighten the bolts and nuts crosswise. Then check the tightening torques
by retightening the bolts and nuts successively.
4. Seals and gaskets subject to temperature changes (graphite-, grooved and

graphitized grooved seals) may not be reused after they have been removed
(e.g. test run, inspections and overhauls, etc.) and must be replaced by new
seals and gaskets.
5. When replacing seals and gaskets, repair any damage to flanges.
MVfFV 004 de
Page 1 / 2
DANGER
Danger due to incorrectly installed flanged connections
Incorrectly internal and external flanged connections can result in leaks

(escaping steam). Risk of burns and scalding.
 Check the tightening torques of internal and external flanged connections
to make sure these are in line with the specifications.
Internal flanged connections are subject to the tightening torques specified

in the spare parts drawings.
The following table applies for the flanged connections of the drain, leakoff steam
and gland steam lines:
Bolt size Tightening torque

M12 45 Nm
M14 70 Nm
M16 105 Nm
M20 190 Nm
External flanged connections are subject to the tightening torques specified

in the installation drawings.
External flanged connections are subject to the tightening torques specified

in the installation drawings.
Siemens only supplies bolts as per DIN 2510:

 21CrMOV57 (marking GA) and
 X22CrMoV121 (marking V).
MVfFV 004 de
Page 2 / 2
Documentation on Accessories
Turbine
EQUI/900517/000-
Documentation on Accessories C
Table of content
Table of content
1 Block ball valve 1-1

___.____Block ball valve -- 00030370005 -- 318702 3
2 Main steam drain 2-1

005.1 -- Shut-off valve with flanges -- 3-300201-004 -- 318244 3
005.1 -- Steam trap BK29 -- 4-682500-004 -- 300587 4
005.1 -- Steam trap BK29 -- 4-682500-004 -- 311018 6
3 Exhaust steam drain with steam trap 3-1

006.1 -- Shut off valve -- 00030021509 -- 318560 3
006.1 -- Steam trap BK45 -- 49016820506 -- 300600 4
006.1 -- Steam trap BK45 -- 49016820506 -- 303969 20
4 Nozzle chamber drain 4-1

007.x -- Shut-off valve with flanges -- 3-300201-004 -- 318244 -- 005.1 3
007.x -- Steam trap BK29 -- 4-682500-004 -- 300587 -- 005.1 5
007.x -- Steam trap BK29 -- 4-682500-004 -- 311018 -- 005.1 7
5 Main steam strainer - Y-type for fast maintenance 5-1

011.1 -- Steam strainer SF312 -- 4-370002-026 -- 300711 3
011.1 -- Steam strainer SF312 -- 4-370002-026 -- 306769 4
6 Overspeed protection system with linear solenoid 6-1

019.x -- Over speed protection -- 4-320001-031 -- D-300054 3
7 Woodward 505 electronic speed controller 7-1

023.0 -- Speed governor Woodward SC505 -- 4-400180-009 -- 300977 3
8 DR22 pressure controller 8-1

025.0 -- Pressure governor -- 49014201723 -- 300893 3
9 Main or exhaust steam pressure transmitter 9-1

027.1 -- Pressure transmitter -- 2-420190-161 -- 316191 3
EQUI/900517/000- i
C Documentation on Accessories
Table of content
027.2 -- Pressure transmitter -- 2-420190-165 -- 310674 -- 027.1 294

027.2 -- Valve -- 2-360200-083 -- 313327 298
027.4 -- Valve -- 2-360200-083 -- 313327 -- 027.2 317
10 Pressure final control element for control valves controlled by 10-1

speed controller
029.0 -- Electronic pressure control valve -- 49014000012 -- D-300200 3
11 Casing vibration monitoring system inside bearing housing 11-1

034.0 -- Vibration speed sensor -- 1-682060-029 -- 318640 3
034.0 -- Vibration speed sensor -- 1-682060-029 -- 321294 8
12 Speed sensor at turbine shaft 12-1

036.1 -- Speed transmitter -- 4-470001-160 -- 313126 3
036.2 -- Speed transmitter -- 4-470001-160 -- 313126 -- 036.1 9
036.3 -- Speed transmitter -- 4-470001-162 -- 300923 11
036.4 -- Speed transmitter -- 4-470001-162 -- 300923 -- 036.3 25
13 Local speed indicator 13-1

038.x -- Speed indicator RIA 251 -- 4-470000-484 -- 301125 3
14 Oil level indicator 14-1

054.0 -- Level indicator -- 00030701900 -- D-300022 3
15 Level sensor in oil tank 15-1

055.0 -- Level switch -- 49016820029 -- 300612 3
16 Oil mist separator 16-1

056.0 -- Oil mist separator -- 2-360600-004 -- 302098 3
ii EQUI/900517/000-
Table of content
17 Pressure transmitter for oil mist separator 17-1

18 Electric auxiliary oil pump 18-1

059.1 -- Electric oil pump -- 4-345000-345 -- 302751 3
059.1 -- Electric oil pump -- 4-345000-345 -- D-300435 51
059.2 -- Electric oil pump -- 4-345000-421 -- D-300435 -- 059.1 125
19 Oil cooler 19-1

060.0 -- Cooler -- 2-688100-839 -- 311548 3
060.0 -- Cooler -- 2-688100-839 -- 319946 16
20 Cooling water control valve for oil cooler 20-1

061.0 -- Temperature controller -- 2-367080-074 -- 300860 3
21 Duplex oil filter 21-1

063.1 -- Oil filter -- 2-365010-154 -- 300468 3
063.1 -- Oil filter -- 2-365010-154 -- D-300191 6
063.2 -- Oil filter -- 2-365010-150 -- 300685 8
063.2 -- Oil filter -- 2-365010-150 -- 306165 10
22 Oil filter fouling indicator with contact 22-1

064.1 -- Fouling indicator -- 2-365010-018 -- 300683 3
23 Rückschlagventil 23-1
066.1 -- Non return valve -- 00032281204 -- 306231 3
EQUI/900517/000- iii
Table of content
066.1 -- Non return valve -- 00032281204 -- 321219 15

066.1 -- Non return valve -- 00032281204 -- D-300027 26
066.2 -- Non return valve -- 00032281204 -- 306231 -- 066.1 28
066.2 -- Non return valve -- 00032281204 -- 321219 -- 066.1 30
066.2 -- Non return valve -- 00032281204 -- D-300027 -- 066.1 32
066.3 -- Non-return valve -- 00032281005 -- 306231 -- 066.1 34
066.3 -- Non-return valve -- 00032281005 -- 321219 -- 066.1 36
066.3 -- Non-return valve -- 00032281005 -- D-300027 -- 066.1 38
066.4 -- Non-return valve -- 00032281005 -- 306231 -- 066.1 40
066.4 -- Non-return valve -- 00032281005 -- 321219 -- 066.1 42
066.4 -- Non-return valve -- 00032281005 -- D-300027 -- 066.1 44
24 Pressure relief valve for oil return line 24-1

070.2 -- Overflow valve -- 2-520000-009 -- 300709 3
070.2 -- Overflow valve -- 2-520000-009 -- D-300116 39
070.3 -- Overflow valve KKK -- 4-367520-017 -- 319152 55
25 Resistance thermometer for turbine bearings 25-1

084.x -- Cable loom -- 4-324010-022 -- 317078 3
26 Resistance thermometer for turbine wheel temperature 26-1

085.0 -- Resistance thermometer -- 2-367090-163 -- 313328 3
27 Coupling 27-1
098.0 -- Bolt coupling -- 4-544010-474 -- 322357 3
098.0 -- Bolt coupling -- 4-544010-474 -- D-300370 6
28 Generator 28-1
100.0 -- Alternator -- 4-681000-321 -- 322359 3
29 Control oil manifold 29-1

109.0 -- Control unit -- 4-360150-060 -- 320816 3
30 Cyclone-type moisture separator 30-1

127.0 -- Cyclone separator -- 4-370000-172 -- 322358 3
31 Water condenser 31-1
iv EQUI/900517/000-
C - Accessories
Content
P&I Content Part number Document Reference
___._ Block ball valve 00030370005 318702

005.1 Shut-off valve with flanges 3-300201-004 318244
005.1 Steam trap BK29 4-682500-004 300587
005.1 Steam trap Bk29 4-682500-004 311018
006.1 Shut off valve 00030021509 318560
006.1 Steam trap BK45 49016820506 300600
006.1 Steam trap BK45 49016820506 303969
007.x Shut-off valve with flanges 3-300201-004 318244  005.1
007.x Steam trap BK29 4-682500-004 300587  005.1
007.x Steam trap BK29 4-682500-004 311018  005.1
011.1 Steam strainer SF312 4-370002-026 300711
011.1 Steam strainer SF312 4-370002-026 306769
019.x Over speed protection 4-320001-031 D-300054
023.0 Speed governor Woodward SC505 4-400180-009 300977
025.0 Pressure governor 49014201723 300893
027.1 Pressure transmitter 2-420190-161 310674
027.2 Pressure transmitter 2-420190-165 310674  027.1
027.2 Valve 2-360200-083 313327
027.4 Valve 2-360200-083 313327  027.2
029.0 Electronic pressure control valve 49014000012 D-300200
034.0 Vibration speed sensor 1-682060-029 318640
________________________________________________________________________________________
1/3
C - Accessories
Content
034.0 Vibration speed sensor 1-682060-029 321294

036.1 Speed transmitter 4-470001-160 313126
036.2 Speed transmitter 4-470001-160 313126  036.1
036.3 Speed transmitter 4-470001-162 300923
036.4 Speed transmitter 4-470001-162 300923  036.3
038.x Speed indicator RIA 251 4-470000-484 301125
054.0 Level indicator 00030701900 D-300022
055.0 Level switch 49016820029 300612
056.0 Oil mist separator 2-360600-004 302098
059.1 Electric oil pump 4-345000-345 302751
059.1 Electric oil pump 4-345000-345 D-300435
059.2 Electric oil pump 4-345000-421 D-300435  059.1
060.0 Cooler 2-688100-839 311548
060.0 Cooler 2-688100-839 319946
061.0 Temperature controller 2-367080-074 300860
063.1 Oil filter 2-365010-154 300468
063.1 Oil filter 2-365010-154 D-300191
063.2 Oil filter 2-365010-150 300685
063.2 Oil filter 2-365010-150 306165
064.1 Fouling indicator 2-365010-018 300683
066.1 Non return valve 00032281204 306231
066.1 Non return valve 00032281204 321219
________________________________________________________________________________________
2/3
C - Accessories
Content
066.1 Non return valve 00032281204 D-300027

066.2 Non return valve 00032281204 306231  066.1
066.2 Non return valve 00032281204 321219  066.1
066.2 Non return valve 00032281204 D-300027  066.1
066.3 Non-return valve 00032281005 306231  066.1
066.3 Non-return valve 00032281005 321219  066.1
066.3 Non-return valve 00032281005 D-300027  066.1
066.4 Non-return valve 00032281005 306231  066.1
066.4 Non-return valve 00032281005 321219  066.1
066.4 Non-return valve 00032281005 D-300027  066.1
070.2 Overflow valve 2-520000-009 300709
070.2 Overflow valve 2-520000-009 D-300116
070.3 Overflow valve KKK 4-367520-017 319152
084.x Cable loom 4-324010-022 317078
085.0 Resistance thermometer 2-367090-163 313328
098.0 Bolt coupling 4-544010-474 322357
098.0 Bolt coupling 4-544010-474 D-300370
100.0 Alternator 4-681000-321 322359
109.0 Control unit 4-360150-060 320816
127.0 Cyclone separator 4-370000-172 322358
160.0 Water condenser 4-683000-052 322362
________________________________________________________________________________________
3/3
Block ball valve 1
1 Block ball valve

Siemens-P+I diagram item no.
▪-
See also
2 ___.____Block ball valve -- 00030370005 -- 318702 [➙ 3]
EQUI/900517/000- 1-1
1 Block ball valve
1-2 EQUI/900517/000-
318702
Main steam drain 2
2 Main steam drain

▪ 005.0
See also
2 005.1 -- Shut-off valve with flanges -- 3-300201-004 -- 318244 [➙ 3]
2 005.1 -- Steam trap BK29 -- 4-682500-004 -- 300587 [➙ 4]
2 005.1 -- Steam trap BK29 -- 4-682500-004 -- 311018 [➙ 6]
EQUI/900517/000- 2-1
2 Main steam drain
2-2 EQUI/900517/000-
318244
GESTRA
Issue Date: 11/04
Product Range Group A1

GESTRA Steam Systems
Instructions for Installation and Maintenance BK 29
Duo Steam Trap
BK 29
PN 160, DN 15 – 25 mm (½ –1")
Operation lf gas annealing is used, the regulator 2 must be

Thermostatic/thermodynamic steam trap with removed beforehand, as otherwise it might suffer 4.5
corrosion-resistant regulator unaffected by water- damage from overheating, so that it would no longer
hammer. The trap opens and closes a few degrees operate correctly.
below saturation temperature relative to the applied
pressure. lt vents air automatically during start-up Maintenance
and during continuous operation. 4.4
The BK 29 does not require any particular main- 3
The stage nozzle of the regulator operates as a tenance. Its capacity and operation might, however,
non-return valve. be impaired by an accumulation of dirt.
Pressure /Temperature Rating

Cleaning of Trap and
(DIN 2401) PN 160 13 CrMo 4 4
Replacing of Regulator 2
PMA (Maximum [barg] 153 110 62
allowable pressure) [psig] 2220 1600 900 1. Cut off steam, in the case of back pressure also
shut off condensate line.
TMA (Maximum [°C] 350 505 530
allowable temperature) [°F] 660 940 986 2. Unscrew cover bolts 4.4/4.5 and remove
cover 3.
∆PMX (Maximum
3. Unscrew regulator 2 and take off strainer 4.3.
differential pressure 110 bar (1600 psi)
(inlet pressure minus 4. Clean body 1, regulator 2, cover 3 and
outlet pressure) strainer 4.3. 2
5. Renew cover gasket 4.2.
Installation 6. Clean sealing surfaces of regulator and body,
The direction of flow is marked by an arrow on the metal-to-metal seal.
trap body and in addition it is indicated by the name
7. Replace strainer 4.3. Apply heat-resistant
plate in the form of an arrow. Installation in any
lubricant to threads of regulator 2. Screw in
plane. To be able to take off cover 3 provide a free
regulator 2 and tighten, applying a torque of
space of approx. 80 mm.
100 Nm.
8. Replace cover 3. Apply heat-resistant lubricant
Important Note to threads of cover bolts 4.4. Insert bolts and
Heat Treatment of Welds screw on nuts 4.5 in diagonally opposite pairs 4.3
We recommend that only resistance annealing is with a torque of 80 Nm.
used. Annealing must be restricted to the region of
4.2
the welds; the steam trap must not be completely
insulated during heat treatment.
1
Parts List
Item No. Designation Order No. Number Hints
1 Bod y – 1 no spare part
Regulator, complete
*2 370281 1 – 4.5
including cover gasket 4.2
3 Cover – 1 no spare part
* 4.2 Cover gasket 086519 1 Graphite/CrNi
4.3 Strainer 096701 1 –
Stud bolt M 16 x 75
4.4 010167 4 1.7709
DIN 2509
Hexagonal nut M 16
4.5 010168 8 1.7258
DIN 934
* Parts subject to wear (stock-keeping recommended)
300587
Duo Steam Trap
BK 29 2
PN 160, DN 15 – 25 mm (½ –1")
Adjustment of Regulator
The regulator 2 is adjusted before leaving our fac-
tory to close steam-tight and open as soon as
condensate is formed. lf another adjustment is
required (larger amount of undercooling or steam-
lock release), please indicate when ordering.
Torques Required for Tightening

Parts at Room Temperature
Item No. 2 – 100 Nm
No. 4.5 – 80 Nm 1
Tools Required
Spanners AF 2 x 24 mm
Capacity Chart
Capacity
The chart shows the maximum capacities for hot

and cold condensate discharge at factory setting
(steam-tight closure).
Curve 1
Hot condensate capacities Differential pressure (assuming discharge to atmospheric pressure)
Curve 2
Cold condensate capacities
Supply in accordance with our general terms of

business.
GESTRA AG
P. O. Box 10 54 60, D-28054 Bremen
Münchener Str. 77, D-28215 Bremen
Telephone +49 (0) 421 35 03 - 0, Fax +49 (0) 421 35 03 - 393
E-Mail gestra.ag@flowserve.com, Internet www.gestra.de
818521-00/1104cm · © 1985 GESTRA AG · Bremen · Printed in Germany
300587
BK 37 
BK 28
BK 29
Installation Instructions 818689-01
Steam Trap
BK 37, BK 28, BK 29
BK 37 ASME, BK 28 ASME, BK 29 ASME

311018
Contents
Page
Important Notes
Usage for the intended purpose...............................................................................................................4

Safety note..............................................................................................................................................4
Danger....................................................................................................................................................4
Attention . ...............................................................................................................................................4
PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) . ......................................................................................................4
ATEX (Atmosphère Explosible) . ...............................................................................................................4
Explanatory Notes
Scope of supply.......................................................................................................................................5
Description..............................................................................................................................................5
Function..................................................................................................................................................5
Technical Data
Corrosion resistance................................................................................................................................6
Sizing......................................................................................................................................................6
Name plate / marking..............................................................................................................................6
Design
Component parts BK 37...........................................................................................................................7

Component parts BK 37 ASME ................................................................................................................8
Component parts BK 28, BK 29................................................................................................................9
Component parts BK 28 ASME, BK 29 ASME .........................................................................................10
Key........................................................................................................................................................11
Installation
BK 37, BK 37 ASME, BK 28, BK 28 ASME, BK 29, BK 29 ASME...............................................................12

Flanged design......................................................................................................................................12
Socket-weld design...............................................................................................................................12
Butt-weld design...................................................................................................................................12
Attention................................................................................................................................................12
Heat treatment of welds .......................................................................................................................13
Tools . ...................................................................................................................................................13
Commissioning

Attention . .............................................................................................................................................13

311018
Contents – continued –
Page
Operation

Thermovit regulator............................................................................................................................... 13
Maintenance
Replacing regulator ..............................................................................................................................14

Tools . ...................................................................................................................................................14
Torques required for tightening..............................................................................................................14
Spare Parts
BK 37, BK 37 ASME, BK 28, BK 28 ASME, BK 29, BK 29 ASME ..............................................................15

Spare parts list ..................................................................................................................................... 15
Decommissioning
Danger .................................................................................................................................................15
Disposal ............................................................................................................................................... 15

311018
Important Notes
Usage for the intended purpose
Use steam traps BK 37..., BK 28... and BK 29... only for the discharge of condensed water or for
air-venting in steam lines within the admissible pressure/temperature ratings. Check the corrosion
resistance and chemical suitability of this pressure equipment for the application in question.
Safety note
The equipment must only be installed and commissioned by qualified staff.

Maintenance and service work must only be performed by adequately trained persons who have a
recognised level of competence.
Danger
The steam trap is under pressure during operation.

When loosening flanged connections, sealing plugs or the regulator, hot water and/or
steam may escape. This presents the risk of severe scalding.
Installation and maintenance work should only be carried out when the system is
depressurized (0 bar): isolate the trap from both upstream and downstream pressure.
The trap becomes hot during operation. This presents the danger of severe burns to
hands and arms. Installation and maintenance work should only be carried out when the
system is cold (20 °C).
Sharp edges on internal parts present a danger of cuts to hands. Always wear industrial
gloves when replacing the regulator.
Attention
The name plate indicates the technical specification of the equipment.

Do not commission or operate a steam trap without name plate.
PED (Pressure Equipment Directive)
The equipment fulfills the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive PED 97/23/EC.
For applications with fluids of group 2. With CE marking (apart from equipment according to
section 3.3).
ATEX (Atmosphère Explosible)
The equipment does not have its own potential source of ignition and is therefore not subject to the
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC. The equipment can be used in potentially explosive areas 0, 1, 2, 20, 21, 22
(1999/92/EC). The equipment is not Ex marked.

311018
Explanatory Notes
Scope of Supply
BK 37: BK 28: BK 29:

1 Steam trap type BK 37 1 Steam trap type BK 28 1 Steam trap type BK 29
1 Installation manual 1 Installation manual 1 Installation manual
BK 37 ASME: BK 28 ASME: BK 29 ASME:
1 Steam trap type BK 37 ASME 1 Steam trap type BK 28 ASME 1 Steam trap type BK 29 ASME
1 Installation manual 1 Installation manual 1 Installation manual
Description
Thermostatic / thermodynamic steam trap with corrosion-resistant Thermovit Duo s.s. regulator
unaffected by waterhammer. The trap features:
n Integral strainer
n Non-return valve action
n Asbestos-free cover gasket (graphite/CrNi)
n Installation in any position
The factory setting enables the steam trap to discharge condensate with virtually no banking-up.
Function
During start-up of the plant the Duo stainless steel plates are flat. The service pressure acts in the
opening direction, the valve is completely open. As the condensate temperature rises, the plates
deflect, drawing the stage nozzle towards the closed position. As the condensate temperature sinks,
the deflection of the Duo stainless steel plates decreases and the steam trap opens at the adjusted
opening temperature.
The thermostatic and spring characteristics of the stack of plates are balanced such that condensate is
always discharged at a given undercooling temperature.
The trap provides automatic air-venting at start-up and during operation. BK 37..., BK 28... and BK 29...
can also be used for thermal air-venting in steam systems.

311018
Technical Data
Corrosion Resistance
If the steam trap is used for the intended purpose, its safety is not impaired by corrosion.
Sizing
The trap body must not be subjected to pulsating loads.

The dimensional allowances for corrosion reflect the latest state of technology.
Name Plate / Marking
The pressure/temperature ratings are indicated on the trap body / the name plate. For more information
see GESTRA data sheets and Technical Information.
According to EN 19 the name plate and the valve body indicate the type and design:
■ Name/logo of the manufacturer
■ Type designation
■ Pressure class PN or Class
■ Material number
■ Max. temperature
■ Max. pressure
■ Flow direction
1
■ Stamp on valve body, e. g. 06 specifies the quarter and the year of production
(Example: 1 quarter 2006).
st
Size
Nominal pressure
Class
Nominal pressure
Fig. 1

311018
Design
Component Parts BK 37
I
A
D
H E
Fig. 2 G

311018
Design – continued –
Component Parts BK 37 ASME
I
A
Fig. 3 G

311018
Component Parts BK 28, BK 29
I
A
D
H E
Fig. 4 G

311018
Component Parts BK 28 ASME, BK 29 ASME
I
A
Fig. 5 G
10
311018
Key
A Cover
B Thermovit regulator BK 28, BK 28 ASME, BK 29, BK 29 ASME
C Thermovit regulator BK 37, BK 37 ASME
D Strainer
E Gasket
F Body
G Hexagon nut
H Expansion bolts (DIN 2510)
I Name plate
J Bolt
11
311018
Installation
BK 37, BK 37 ASME, BK 28, BK 28 ASME, BK 29, BK 29 ASME
Provided that the flow arrow (the arrow points towards the direction of flow) is taken into consideration,
the trap can be installed in any position. In the case of a horizontal installation make sure that the cover
is on top.
Flanged design
1. Take care of correct position of installation.

2. Take care of flow direction. The flow arrow is on the trap body.
3. Consider space required for opening trap. When the trap is installed a minimum space of 80 mm is
required for removing cover A.
4. Remove plastic plugs. They are only used as transit protection.
5. Clean seating surfaces of both flanges.
6. Install steam trap.
Socket-weld design

required for removing the cover A.
5. Remove regulator as described under Maintenance.
6. Clean socket-weld ends.
7. Arc-weld trap (welding process 111 and 141 in accordance with ISO 4063).
Butt-weld design

required for removing the cover A.
5. Clean butt-weld ends.
6. Arc-weld trap (welding process 111 and 141 in accordance with ISO 4063) or use gas-welding
process (welding process 3 in accordance with ISO 4063).
Attention
■ Only qualified welders certified e. g. according to DIN EN 287 may weld the steam trap
into pressurized lines.
12
311018
Installation – continued –
Heat Treatment of Welds
After welding the steam trap in place a heat treatment of the welds is required (stress-relief annealing
to DIN EN 100529). The heat treatment must be restricted to the immediate area of the welds. Remove
the regulator as described under Maintenance before carrying out the heat treatment.
Tools
■ Combination spanner A. F. 24 mm, DIN 3113, form B
Commissioning
Make sure that the flanged connections of the BK 37..., BK 28... or BK 29... are permanently bolted
and tight.
Attention
The steam trap is under pressure at start-up and during the operation.
The steam trap becomes hot during operation. This presents the risk of severe burns to
hands and arms.
Always wear industrial gloves when setting the regulator.
Installation and maintenance work may only be carried out when the system is
depressurised (zero bar).
Make sure that the lines upstream and downstream of the trap are not under pressure!
Operation
Please note that maintenance may be required for certain operating modes (see Maintenance).
Thermovit regulator
The factory setting of the Thermovit regulator enables the regulator to be steam-tight when closed and
to open just before the pressure-dependent boiling temperature is reached.
13
311018
Maintenance
GESTRA steam traps type BK 37... BK 28... and BK 29... do not require any special maintenance.
However, if used in new installations which have not been rinsed it may be necessary to check and
clean the trap.
Replacing Regulator
1. Remove cover A from body F, Fig. 2, Fig. 3

2. Remove regulator B or C using a spanner.
3. Unscrew regulator B or C and take off strainer D.
4. Clean body, regulator, cover and strainer.
5. Clean gasket seating surfaces and insert new gasket E.
6. Clean sealing surfaces of regulator B or C and body F.
7. Replace strainer D.
8. Screw in regulator B or C and tighten with a torque of 100 Nm.
9. Apply heat-resistant lubricant to threads of the expansion bolts H or the bolts J (use for instance
MOLYKOTE HSC+®)
10. Replace cover A. Insert expansion bolts H or bolts J and tighten hexagon nuts G at room
temperature in diagonally opposite pairs with a torque of 60 Nm.
Tools
■ Combination spanner A.F. 24 mm, DIN 3113, form B

■ Combination spanner ¾" A.F., ISO 3318
■ Torque spanner 20-100 Nm, ISO 6789
■ Torque spanner 80-400 Nm, ISO 6789
Torques required for tightening
Item Designation Torque [Nm]
B/C Thermovit regulator 100
G Hexagon nut 60
All torques are based at 20 °C room temperature.
MOLYKOTE® is a registered trademark of Dow Corning GmbH, Wiesbaden
14
311018
Spare Parts
B/C
D
Fig. 4
Spare parts list
Item Designation Stock code

Regulator for BK 28..., BK 29..., complete
B including cover gasket E
370281
Regulator for BK 37..., complete

C including cover gasket E
377722
E Gasket (graphite /CrNi) 372095

D Strainer 096701
Decommissioning
Danger
Risk of severe burns and scalds to the whole body!
Before loosening flanged connections or sealing plugs, make sure that all connected lines
are depressurized (zero bar) and cooled down to room temperature (20°C).
Disposal
Dismantle the trap and separate the waste materials, using the specifications in the table “Materials”
on page 9 as a reference.
For the disposal of the trap observe the pertinent legal regulations concerning waste disposal.
15
311018
GESTRA
Agencies all over the world:

www.gestra.de
España Polska
GESTRA ESPAÑOLA S.A. GESTRA Polonia Spolka z.o.o.
Luis Cabrera, 86-88 Ul. Schuberta 104
E-28002 Madrid PL - 80-172 Gdansk
Tel. 00 34 91 / 5 15 20 32 Tel. 00 48 58 / 3 06 10 -02 od 10
Fax 00 34 91 / 4 13 67 47; 5 15 20 36 Fax 00 48 58 / 3 06 33 00
E-mail: aromero@flowserve.com E-mail: gestra@gestra.pl
Great Britain Portugal

Flowserve Flow Control (UK) Ltd. Flowserve Portuguesa, Lda.
Burrel Road, Haywards Heath Av. Dr. Antunes Guimarães, 1159
West Sussex RH 16 1TL Porto 4100-082
Tel. 00 44 14 44 / 31 44 00 Tel. 0 03 51 22 / 6 19 87 70
Fax 00 44 14 44 / 31 45 57 Fax 0 03 51 22 / 6 10 75 75
E-mail: gestraukinfo@flowserve.com E-mail: jtavares@flowserve.com
Italia USA
Flowserve S.p.A. Flowserve GESTRA U.S.
Flow Control Division 2341 Ampere Drive
Via Prealpi, 30 Louisville, KY 40299
l-20032 Cormano (MI) Tel.: 00 15 02 / 267 2205
Tel. 00 39 02 / 66 32 51 Fax: 00 15 02 / 266 5397
Fax 00 39 02 / 66 32 55 60 E-mail: dgoodwin@flowserve.com
E-mail: infoitaly@flowserve.com
GESTRA AG
P. O. Box 10 54 60, D-28054 Bremen
Telephone +49 (0) 421 35 03 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 421 35 03 - 393
E-Mail gestra.ag@flowserve.com
Internet www.gestra.de
818689-01/1206cm · 2006 GESTRA AG · Bremen · Printed in Germany

16
311018
Exhaust steam drain with steam trap 3
3 Exhaust steam drain with steam trap

▪ 006.1
See also
2 006.1 -- Shut off valve -- 00030021509 -- 318560 [➙ 3]
2 006.1 -- Steam trap BK45 -- 49016820506 -- 300600 [➙ 4]
2 006.1 -- Steam trap BK45 -- 49016820506 -- 303969 [➙ 20]
EQUI/900517/000- 3-1
3 Exhaust steam drain with steam trap
3-2 EQUI/900517/000-
318560
BK 45 
BK 45U
BK 46
Installation Instructions 810437-05
GESTRA Steam Traps
BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46

300600
Contents
Page
Important Notes
Usage for the intended purpose...............................................................................................................4

Safety note..............................................................................................................................................4
Danger....................................................................................................................................................4
Attention..................................................................................................................................................4
PED (Pressure Equipment Directive).........................................................................................................4
ATEX (Atmosphère Explosible)..................................................................................................................4
Explanatory Notes
Scope of supply.......................................................................................................................................5
Description..............................................................................................................................................5
Function..................................................................................................................................................5
Technical Data
Corrosion resistance................................................................................................................................6
Sizing......................................................................................................................................................6
Name plate / Marking..............................................................................................................................6
Design
Component parts BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46 .................................................................................................7

Key..........................................................................................................................................................8
Installation
BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46..............................................................................................................................9

Flanged design........................................................................................................................................9
Screwed-socket design...........................................................................................................................9
Butt-weld design.....................................................................................................................................9
Attention..................................................................................................................................................9
Heat treatment of welds........................................................................................................................10
Tools......................................................................................................................................................10
Commissioning
BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46............................................................................................................................10

Attention................................................................................................................................................10
Operation
BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46............................................................................................................................10

Thermovit regulator...............................................................................................................................10

300600
Contents – continued –
Page
Maintenance
Checking steam trap ............................................................................................................................11

Cleaning / replacing regulator and nozzle insert.....................................................................................11
Cleaning / replacing strainer .................................................................................................................11
Tools......................................................................................................................................................12
Torques.................................................................................................................................................12
Spare Parts
BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46............................................................................................................................13

Spare parts list .....................................................................................................................................13
Decommissioning
Danger .................................................................................................................................................14
Disposal ...............................................................................................................................................14

300600
Important Notes
Usage for the intended purpose
Use steam traps BK 45, BK 45U and BK 46 only for the discharge of condensed water in pipe lines or
for air-venting within the admissible pressure/temperature ratings.
Check the corrosion resistance and chemical suitability of the steam trap for the application in
question.
Safety note
The equipment must only be installed and commissioned by qualified staff.

Maintenance and retrofitting must only be performed by adequately trained persons who have a
recognised level of competence.
Danger
The steam trap is under pressure during operation.

When loosening flanged connections, plugs or the regulator, hot water and/or steam may
escape. This presents the risk of severe scalding.
Installation and maintenance work should only be carried out when the system is
depressurized (0 bar): isolate the trap from both upstream and downstream pressure.
The trap becomes hot during operation. This presents the danger of severe burns to
hands and arms. Installation and maintenance work should only be carried out when the
system is cold (20 °C).
Sharp edges on internal parts present a danger of cuts to hands. Always wear industrial
gloves when replacing the regulator or the strainer.
Attention
The name plate indicates the technical specification of the equipment. Do not
commission or operate a steam trap without a name plate.
PED (Pressure Equipment Directive)
The equipment fulfills the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive PED 97/23/EC.
For applications with fluids of group 2.
The equipment BK 45D (special design) is also suitable for fluids of group 1.
According to section 3.3 the equipment is excluded from the scope of this directive and must therefore
not be CE marked.
ATEX (Atmosphère Explosible)

The equipment does not have its own potential source of ignition and is therefore not subject to the
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC.
The equipment can be used in potentially explosive areas 0, 1, 2, 20, 21, 22 (1999/92/EC).
The equipment is not Ex marked.

300600
Explanatory Notes
Scope of supply
BK 45:
1 Steam trap type BK 45
1 Installation manual
BK 45U:
1 Steam trap type BK 45U
BK 46:
1 Steam trap type BK 46
Description
Thermostatic steam trap with corrosion-resistant Thermovit regulator (Duo stainless steel bimetallic
regulator) unaffected by waterhammer. With integral strainer, non-return valve and asbestos-free cover
gasket (graphite/CrNi).
Installation in any position.
The standard regulator discharges the condensate with virtually no banking-up, special regulator “U” with
an undercooling of approx. 30 K.
Function
During start-up of the plant the Duo stainless steel plates are flat. The service pressure acts in the
opening direction, the valve is completely open. As the condensate temperature rises, the plates
deflect, drawing the stage nozzle towards the closed position. As the condensate temperature sinks,
the deflection of the Duo stainless steel plates decreases and the steam trap opens at the adjusted
opening temperature.
The thermostatic and spring characteristics of the stack of plates are balanced such that condensate is
always discharged at a given undercooling temperature.
The trap provides automatic air-venting at start-up and during operation. BK 45, BK 45U and BK 46 can
also be used for thermal air-venting in steam systems.

300600
Technical Data
Corrosion resistance
If the steam trap is used for the intended purpose, its safety is not impaired by corrosion.
Sizing
The trap body must not be subjected to pulsating loads. The dimensional allowances for corrosion and
anti-corrosive additives reflect the latest state of technology.
Name plate / Marking
The pressure / temperature ratings are indicated on the trap body / the name plate.
For more information see GESTRA data sheets and Technical Information.
According to EN 19 the name plate and the valve body indicate the type and design:
■ Name / logo of the manufacturer
■ Type designation
■ Pressure class PN or Class
■ Material number
■ Max. temperature
■ Max. pressure
■ Flow direction
1
■ Stamp on trap body, e. g. 06 specifies the quarter and the year of production
(Example: 1 quarter 2006).
st
Type designation
Type of regulator
Nominal size
Standard design
U 30K undercooling
Ratings
Fig. 1

300600
Design
Component parts BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46
A D
J
Fig. 2

300600
Key
A Hexagon-head screw M 10 x 25, ISO 4017, made of 1.7225

B Name plate
C Cover
D Thermovit regulator
E Bush (interference fit, not a spare part)
F Cover gasket 40 x 48 x 2
G Body
H Strainer
I Plug gasket A 24 x 29
J Sealing plug

300600
Installation
BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46
The steam traps can be installed in horizontal or vertical position (arrow points towards direction of
flow). In the case of a horizontal installation, the cover should be at the top.
Flanged design

required for removing cover C.
5. Clean seating surfaces of both flanges.
6. Install steam trap.
Screwed-socket design

required for removing the cover C.
5. Remove Thermovit regulator as described in the section Maintenance.
6. Clean threads of screwed sockets.
7. Arc weld trap in place (welding process 111 and 141 to ISO 4063).
Butt-weld design

required for removing the cover C.
5. Clean butt-weld ends.
6. Arc-weld trap in place (welding process 111 and 141 in accordance with ISO 4063) or use gas-
welding process (welding process 3 in accordance with ISO 4063).
Attention
■ Only qualified welders certified e. g. according to DIN EN 287 may weld the steam trap
into pressurized lines.

300600
Installation – continued –
Heat treatment of welds
A subsequent heat treatment of the welds is not required.
Tools
■ Combination spanner 16 A. F., DIN 3113, Form B

■ Combination spanner 22 A. F., DIN 3113, Form B
Commissioning
BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46
Make sure that the flanged connections of the BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46 are permanently bolted and tight.
Attention
The steam trap is under pressure at start-up and during the operation.
The steam trap becomes hot during operation. This presents the risk of severe burns to
hands and arms.
Always wear industrial gloves when setting the regulator.
Installation and maintenance work may only be carried out when the system is
depressurised (zero bar).
Make sure that the lines upstream and downstream of the trap are not under pressure!
Operation
BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46
BK 45, BK 45U and BK 46 can be serviced (see Maintenance).
Thermovit regulator
The factory setting of the Thermovit regulator enables the regulator to be steam-tight when closed and
to open just before the pressure-dependent boiling temperature is reached.
10
300600
Maintenance
GESTRA steam traps BK 45, BK 45U and BK 46 do not require any special maintenance.
However, if used in new installations which have not been rinsed it may be necessary to check and
clean the trap.
Checking steam trap
You can check the steam trap BK 45, BK 45U and BK 46 for steam loss during operation using the
ultrasonic measuring unit VAPOPHONE ® or the test unit TRAPtest ®.
The reference points are at the name plate on the cover. See Fig. 3
Should you detect any loss of live steam clean the trap and/or replace the regulator.
Cleaning / replacing regulator and nozzle insert
1. Take heed of the note “Danger” on page 4.

2. Undo body screws A. Remove cover C from the body G.
3. Remove and clean regulator D.
4. Replace regulator D in case of visible signs of wear or damage.
5. Clean body, internals and all gasket surfaces.
6. Apply heat-resistant lubricant to all threads and the seating surfaces of the nozzle insert and the
cover (use for instance WINIX® 2150).
7. Screw in regulator and tighten with a torque of 90 Nm.
8. Replace gasket F if there are visual signs of damage. Use the same cover C. Always replace
gasket F when using a new cover C or the cover of another steam trap.
9. Put cover onto the body. Tighten body screws A alternately and in several steps to a torque of
25 Nm.
Cleaning / replacing strainer
1. Take heed of note “Danger” on page 4.

2. Unscrew sealing plug J and remove strainer H.
3. Clean strainer, sealing plug and gasket seats.
4. Exchange strainer and sealing plug in case of visible signs of wear or damage.
5. Exchange gasket I if damaged.
6. Apply heat-resistant lubricant to the thread of the sealing plug (use for instance WINIX® 2150).
7. Replace gasket I and strainer H and tighten sealing plug J with a torque of 120 Nm.
WINIX® 2150 is a registered trademark of WINIX GmbH, Norderstedt
11
300600
Maintenance – continued –
Tools
■ Combination spanner A. F. 16 mm to DIN 3113, form B

■ Combination spanner A. F. 22 mm to DIN 3113, form B
■ Torque spanner 20 – 120 Nm to ISO 6789
Torques
Item Designation Torque [Nm]
D Thermovit regulator 90
A Body screws 25
J Sealing plug 120
All torques given in the table are based at an ambient temperature of 20°C.
12
300600
Spare Parts
BK 45, BK 45U, BK 46
F D
Fig. 3 H I J
Spare parts list
Stock code Stock code Stock code

Item Designation
BK 45 BK 45 U BK 46
D Thermovit regulator 375 234 375235 375464
HIJ Strainer, complete 375 113 375 113 375113
F Gasket *) 40 x 48 x 2, graphite 375 159 375 159 375159
I Gasket *) A 24 x 29, stainless steel 375 162 375 162 375162
*) Minimum purchasing quantity 50 pcs. Contact your local dealer for smaller quantities.
13
300600
Decommissioning
Danger
Risk of severe burns and scalds to the whole body!

Before loosening flanged connections, stuffing box unions or sealing plugs, make sure
that all connected lines are depressurized (zero bar) and cooled down to room
temperature (20 °C).
Disposal
Dismantle the equipment and separate the waste materials, using the specifications in the table
“Materials” on page 9 as a reference.
For the disposal of the equipment observe the pertinent legal regulations concerning waste disposal.
14
300600
For your notes
15
300600
GESTRA
Agencies all over the world:

www.gestra.de
España Polska
GESTRA ESPAÑOLA S.A. GESTRA Polonia Spolka z.o.o.
Luis Cabrera, 86-88 Ul. Schuberta 104
E-28002 Madrid PL - 80-172 Gdansk
Tel. 00 34 91 / 5 15 20 32 Tel. 00 48 58 / 3 06 10 -02 od 10
Fax 00 34 91 / 4 13 67 47; 5 15 20 36 Fax 00 48 58 / 3 06 33 00
E-mail: aromero@flowserve.com E-mail: gestra@gestra.pl
Great Britain Portugal

Flowserve Flow Control (UK) Ltd. Flowserve Portuguesa, Lda.
Burrel Road, Haywards Heath Av. Dr. Antunes Guimarães, 1159
West Sussex RH 16 1TL Porto 4100-082
Tel. 00 44 14 44 / 31 44 00 Tel. 0 03 51 22 / 6 19 87 70
Fax 00 44 14 44 / 31 45 57 Fax 0 03 51 22 / 6 10 75 75
E-mail: gestraukinfo@flowserve.com E-mail: jtavares@flowserve.com
Italia USA
Flowserve S.p.A. Flowserve GESTRA U.S.
Flow Control Division 2341 Ampere Drive
Via Prealpi, 30 Louisville, KY 40299
l-20032 Cormano (MI) Tel.: 00 15 02 / 267 2205
Tel. 00 39 02 / 66 32 51 Fax: 00 15 02 / 266 5397
Fax 00 39 02 / 66 32 55 60 E-mail: dgoodwin@flowserve.com
E-mail: infoitaly@flowserve.com
GESTRA AG
P. O. Box 10 54 60, D-28054 Bremen
Telephone +49 (0) 421 35 03 - 0
Fax +49 (0) 421 35 03 - 393
E-Mail gestra.ag@flowserve.com
Internet www.gestra.de
810437-05/407cm · 2007 GESTRA AG · Bremen · Printed in Germany

16
300600
GESTRA
Issue Date: 3/05
GESTRA Steam Systems Product Range A1
Steam Traps RHOMBUSline ® BK 45

BK 45, BK 45U BK 45U
PN 40
DN 15, 20, 25 (½", ¾", 1")
L Thermostatic steam trap with corrosion-resistant ther-

Space required for
mostatic element (Duo stainless steel bimetallic regula-

96
opening trap
tor) unaffected by waterhammer.

Y-type strainer, non-return valve and asbestos-free cover
gasket (graphite) included as standard.
70
The traps with standard regulator discharge the conden-

sate with virtually no banking-up.
Optionally BK 45U with an undercooling of approx. 30 K
(to utilize the condensate heat in steam tracers).
Field of application: Draining of saturated steam and
b superheated steam lines and steam tracers.
Can also be used for air-venting.
H2
Installation in any position. In horizontal pipes the cover

øl must be on top.
Pressure/Temperature Ratings
Max. service [barg] 32 22 21
øg
øD
pressure [psig] 465 320 305

øk
Related temperature [°C] 250 385 400

[°F] 482 725 752
H1
Max. differential pressure

(inlet pressure minus 22 barg
outlet pressure) (320 psig)
Space required for 30 Pressure

opening strainer BK 45 with flanged ends (to DIN) [bar]
40
36
32
28
24
20
16
53
20 100 200 250 300 350 400

[°C] Temp.
DIN ASTM
Materials reference equivalent
96
C 22.8
L L Body, cover A 105
(1.0460)
BK 45 with BK 45 with
screwed sockets socket-weld ends butt-weld ends 24 CrMo 5
Screws A 193 B 7
(1.7258)
Dimensions and End connections Bimetallic regulator Stainless steel
weights Flanged Screwed Socket-weld Butt-weld Other internals Stainless steel
Nominal sizes [mm] 15 20 25 15 20 25 15 20 25
[inch] ½ ¾ 1 ½ ¾ 1 ½ ¾ 1 Connections
Flanges: DIN, PN 40.
Dimensions L 150 150 160 95 200 ANSI 150 and 300 lb/in2
[mm] H1 70 70 70 Screwed sockets: BSP or NPT (API)
H2 88 88 88 Socket-weld ends
Approx. weight [kg] 3.7 4.3 4.8 2.2 2.1 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 Butt-weld ends
Flange End connections

dimensions DIN CL 150 CL 300
Flange dimensions D 95 105 115 88.9 98.4 107.9 95.2 117.5 123.8
b 16 18 18 11.1 12.7 14.3 14.3 15.9 17.5
k 65 75 85 60.3 69.8 79.4 66.7 82.5 88.9
g 45 58 68 34.9 42.9 50.8 34.9 42.9 50.8
l 14 14 14 15.9 15.9 15.9 15.9 19.0 19.0
Number of bolts 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
303969
Steam Traps RHOMBUSline ® Capacity Chart
2
BK 45, BK 45U for BK 45 and
BK 45U
PN 40
DN 15, 20, 25 (½", ¾", 1")
Capacity Charts
The charts show the maximum capacities for hot and
cold condensate. 1
Curve 1
Curve 1 indicates the max. capacity of hot condensate
that the BK 45 having a standard regulator can discharge
with virtually no banking-up.
The BK 45U (undercooling) discharges the condensate
when it is approx. 30 K (degC) below saturation tem-
perature (banking-up of condensate).
Curve 2
Curve 2 shows the max. capacity of cold condensate
that the BK 45 and BK 45U can discharge (condensate
temperature 20 °C).
F D
When ordering please state: H I J

Steam pressure, back pressure, quantity of condensate
to be discharged, type, size, connections, mounting Standard Spare Parts
position of the trap, and details of application. Item. Designation Order No.
The following test certificates can be issued on request, No. BK 45 BK 45U
at extra cost: Regulator, complete
In accordance with EN 10204 – 2.2 and -3.1 B. D, F including cover 375234 375235
All inspection requirements have to be stated with the gasket
order. After supply of the equipment certificates can no H, I, Strainer set,
longer be established. Charges and extent of the above 375113 375113
J complete
mentioned certificates as well as the different tests
Cover gasket
confirmed therein are listed in our price list “Test and
F*) (set with 375159 375159
Inspection Charges for Standard Equipment”.
50 items1))
For other tests and inspections than those listed above,
please consult us. Strainer gasket
I*) (set with 375162 375162
50 items1))
Supply in accordance with our general terms
of business. *) Parts subject to wear
1
) Contact your local dealer for smaller quantities.
GESTRA AG
P. O. Box 10 54 60, D-28054 Bremen
Telephone +49 (0) 421 35 03 - 0, Fax +49 (0) 421 35 03 - 393
E-Mail gestra.ag@flowserve.com, Internet www.gestra.de
810436-01/305c · © 1998 GESTRA AG · Bremen · Printed in Germany
303969
Nozzle chamber drain 4
4 Nozzle chamber drain

▪ 007.0
See also
2 007.x -- Shut-off valve with flanges -- 3-300201-004 -- 318244 -- 005.1 [➙ 3]
2 007.x -- Steam trap BK29 -- 4-682500-004 -- 300587 -- 005.1 [➙ 5]
2 007.x -- Steam trap BK29 -- 4-682500-004 -- 311018 -- 005.1 [➙ 7]
EQUI/900517/000- 4-1
4 Nozzle chamber drain
4-2 EQUI/900517/000-
==> 005.1
==> 005.1
==> 005.1
Main steam strainer - Y-type for fast maintenance 5
5 Main steam strainer - Y-type for fast maintenance

▪ 011.1
See also
2 011.1 -- Steam strainer SF312 -- 4-370002-026 -- 300711 [➙ 3]
2 011.1 -- Steam strainer SF312 -- 4-370002-026 -- 306769 [➙ 4]
EQUI/900517/000- 5-1
5 Main steam strainer - Y-type for fast maintenance
5-2 EQUI/900517/000-
1.0 General description:
1.1 KROMBACH-strainers are installed in pipes in order to filter mud, which is flowing through the pipe.
1.2 By mounting in a horizontal steam pipeline the strainer must be fitted with a collateral lying screen
in order to avoid water traps.
1.3 The valves for oxygen (O2) are additionally marked with: „oil and grease free, suitable for oxygen”.
2.0 Installation in the pipe:
2.1 Before installation, the pipe must be cleaned conscientiously.

2.2 Strainer must be cleaned from mud, if necessary.
2.3 When strainer is installed, flanges of the pipe must be exactly parallel to flange connections of the
strainer. In addition the cast direction-arrow must show into flow direction and the Y-type filter-
connection-piece must show downwards.
2.4 Flange connection screws must be tightened by means of a torque spanner, whereby face-to-face
screws must always be considered one after another.
2.5 When flange connection screws are tightened, it is absolutely necessary that the strainer is
not braced.
3.0 Start-up and switch-off of plants:
3.1 The start-up and switch-off of plants represents always a special situation. According to the geometry
of the pipe and the conduct of the process, appropriate steps must be taken in order to lead the
installation process safely and controlled into the planned working process. At no time the maximum
permissible service conditions must be infringed. For strainers these are nominal pressure, working
temperature, flow rate and differential pressure over the screen.
The maximum allowable differential pressure for strainers is 1,5 bar and the max. allowable flow rate
is 1,8 m/s (referred to water).
3.2 In case of operation of plants the strainer must be checked on tightness and if necessary the cover
screws have to be tightened.
3.3 Immediately after the initial operation or after modification of a plant, strainers should be controlled
according to point 4, because often unexpected dirt occurs, which could have damaged the screen,
too.
4.0 Maintenance:
4.1 If the screen is dirty, it must be cleaned.

4.2 Before disassembly of the strainer, a replacement sealing must be kept ready.
4.3 For this purpose, the lid, the sealing and the screen must be taken off by
loosening the lid-screws.
4.4 The screen must be cleaned in a container with detergent.
4.5 After cleaning, the screen must be dried with compressed air.
4.6 The intervals, in which the screen should be cleaned, depends on how much dirt is in the pipe.
4.7 Before installation, the sealing and the screen must be checked on damages. In case of
damages, these parts must be replaced by new ones.
4.8 When the screen is re-installed, the following things must be done:
- Lid sealing must be put into the connecting-piece-centre.
- Lid must be mounted and it must be taken care that the screen is not braced.
- Bolts and nuts must be tightened in that way that tight sealing is achieved.
Operating and maintenance instructions for strainer with flange connection

Date : 03.05.2001 Operating instruction-no.:
Name : Klein
Checked : Böcking BUW - 301c E
Page : 1 of 1
300711
Schmutzfänger
Strainers
Nr. 310
Schmutzfänger in Schrägsitzform mit Flanschanschluss oder Schweißenden

mit auswechselbarem Innensieb aus rost- und säurebeständigem Edelstahlgewebe 1.4401, ab DN 65 mit zusätzlichem Stützsieb aus gelochtem
Edelstahlblech 1.4571. Baulänge nach DIN EN 558-1, Reihe 1, Flanschanschlussmaße nach DIN.
Strainers in “Y” type with flange connection or welding ends

with exchangeable inside screen made of stainless steel 1.4401, from DN 65 with additional supporting screen made of stainless steel 1.4571. Face-to-
face dimension acc. to DIN EN 558-1, line 1, Flanged connection acc. to DIN.
Bestell-Nr. Ausführung Werkstoff

Order no. PN
Design Material
SF 311 10/16 Flansche / Flanges warmfester Stahlguss / Cast steel GP240GH (1.0619)
SF 311/S 10/16 Schweißenden / Welding ends warmfester Stahlguss / Cast steel GP240GH (1.0619)
SF 312 25/40 Flansche / Flanges warmfester Stahlguss / Cast steel GP240GH (1.0619)
SF 312/S 25/40 Schweißenden / Welding ends warmfester Stahlguss / Cast steel GP240GH (1.0619)
SF 319 10/16 Flansche / Flanges Edelstahlguss / Stainless steel casting GX5CrNiMo19-11-2 (1.4408)
SF 320 25/40 Flansche / Flanges Edelstahlguss / Stainless steel casting GX5CrNiMo19-11-2 (1.4408)
306769
Schmutzfänger
Strainers
Nr. 310
Ausführung DN 15-50
Design DN 15-50
N
H Dimension to be considered for screen removal
Ausführung DN 65 - 100, 250 - 350

Design DN 65 - 100, 250 - 350
N
H Dimension to be considered for screen removal
Detail "X"
DN 125 - 200
306769
Schmutzfänger
Strainers
Nr. 310
Baumaße / Dimensions
Baumaße Flanschanschlussmaße Sieb Gewicht
Dimensions Flange dimensions Screen Weight
DN PN L H1 H D k nxØd g f b e s G kg
15 10-40 130 81 118 95 65 4x14 45 2 16 52 19 - 2,6
20 10-40 150 85 125 105 75 4x14 58 2 18 56 25 - 3,8
25 10-40 160 100 130 115 85 4x14 68 2 18 57 29 - 4,7
32 10-40 180 100 146 140 100 4x18 78 2 18 67 37 - 6,5
40 10-40 200 120 168 150 110 4x18 88 3 18 95 45 - 8,3
50 10-40 230 133 177 165 125 4x18 102 3 20 102 55 - 11,8
65 10/16 290 200 330 185 145 4x18 122 3 18 178,5 70 G½ 16,1
65 25/40 290 200 330 185 145 8x18 122 3 22 178,5 70 G½ 16,1
80 10/16 310 210 340 200 160 8x18 138 3 20 182,5 85 G½ 22
80 25/40 310 210 340 200 160 8x18 138 3 24 182,5 85 G½ 22,5
100 10/16 350 250 410 220 180 8x18 158 3 20 226,5 105 G1 28
100 25/40 350 250 410 235 190 8x22 162 3 24 226,5 105 G1 30,3
125 10/16 400 313 516 250 210 8x18 188 3 22 286,5 130 G1 46
125 25/40 400 313 516 270 220 8x26 188 3 26 286,5 130 G1 48
150 10/16 480 362 600 285 240 8x22 212 3 22 339,5 157 G1 70
150 25/40 480 362 600 300 250 8x26 218 3 28 339,5 157 G1 65,2
200 10 600 475 790 340 295 8x22 268 3 24 454,5 207 G1 125
200 16 600 475 790 340 295 12x22 268 3 24 454,5 207 G1 125
200 25 600 475 790 360 310 12x26 278 3 30 454,5 207 G1 134,2
200 40 600 475 790 375 320 12x30 285 3 34 454,5 207 G1 134,2
250 10 730 530 940 395 350 12x22 320 3 26 510 255,5 G1 156
250 16 730 530 940 405 355 12x26 320 3 26 510 255,5 G1 156
250 25 730 530 940 425 370 12x30 335 3 32 510 255,5 G1 178
250 40 730 530 940 450 385 12x33 345 3 38 510 255,5 G1 178
300 10 850 620 1030 445 400 12x22 378 4 28 463 280 G1 275
300 16 850 620 1030 460 410 12x26 378 4 28 463 280 G1 275
300 25 850 640 1050 485 430 16x30 395 4 34 463 280 G1 385
300 40 850 640 1050 515 450 16x33 410 4 42 463 280 G1 385
350 10 980 705 1150 505 460 16x22 430 4 30 621 320 G1 360
350 16 980 705 1150 520 470 16x26 438 4 30 621 320 G1 360
350 25 980 705 1150 555 490 16x33 450 4 38 621 320 G1 412
350 40 980 705 1150 580 510 16x36 465 4 46 621 320 G1 412
Standardsieb / Standard screen

DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
Zeta-Werte / Zeta values 3,0 3,4 3,6 4,0 4,2 4,8 4,1 4,0 4,0 4,3 4,3 4,7 4,8 8,3 8,3
3
Kvs-Wert in m /h / Kvs-values 5,2 8,7 13,2 20,5 31,2 45,6 83,4 127,8 200 301 433 737 1140 1248 1699
Maschenweite / Mesh size 0,6 mm 1,2 mm 1,5 mm
Drahtstärke / Wire thickness 0,4 mm 0,6 mm 0,8 mm
Feinsieb / Fine screen
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350
Zeta-Werte / Zeta values 4,5 5,1 5,4 6,0 6,3 7,2 6,1 6,0 6,0 6,4 6,4 7,0 7,2 12,4 12,4
Kvs-Wert in m3/h / Kvs-values 4,2 7,1 10,7 16,7 25,5 37,2 68,3 104,4 163 247 355 604 931 1021 1390
Maschenweite / Mesh size 0,25 mm
Drahtstärke / Wire thickness 0,16 mm
Der Kv-Wert drückt aus, welche Durchflussmenge in m³/h von Wasser zwischen 5°C bis 30°C bei einem Druckverlust von 1 kp/cm² (1 bar)
durch die Armatur hindurchgeht (Kvs = Kv-Wert von Bauserien).
The Kv-value shows the flow-through quantity in m³/h for water between 5°C up to 30°C at a pressure loss of 1 kp/cm² going through the
valve (Kvs = Kv-value of type series).
Werkstoffe / Materials
Pos. Material
Benennung Designation
Item SF 311, 311/S, 312, 312/S SF 319, 320
1 Gehäuse Body GP240GH (GS-C25) 1.0619 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2 1.4408
2 Deckel Cover GP240GH (GS-C25) 1.0619 GX5CrNiMo19-11-2 1.4408
3 Sieb Screen X4CrNiMo17-12-2 1.4401 X4CrNiMo17-12-2 1.4401
3.1 Stützsieb ab DN 65 Supporting screen up to DN 65 X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 1.4571 X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 1.4571
4 Dichtung Sealing Graphit mit Spießblech/Pure graphite with metal insert
5 Schraube Screw 24CrMo5 1.7258 A4-70
6 Sk.-Mutter Hex.-nut C35E (Ck35) 1.1181 A4-70
7 Dichtung Sealing asbestfrei / free of asbestos
8 Verschlussschraube Plug St A4-70
306769
Schmutzfänger
Strainers
Nr. 310
Ausführung Schweißende nach DIN 3239 Teil 1, Reihe 1, Form 1
Design with welding ends acc. to DIN 3239 part 1, line 1, form 1
Ausführung DN 15-50 Ausführung DN 65-200

Design DN 15-50 Design DN 65-200
N
DN 15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200
L 130 150 160 180 200 230 290 310 350 400 480 600
d1 21,3 26,9 33,7 42,2 48,3 60,3 76,1 88,9 114,3 139,7 168,3 219,1
d2 17 22 28 35 43 54 70 82 106 131 159 207
Betriebs- und Prüfdrücke / Working and test pressure

Bestell-Nr. Wasser-Prüfdruck im Gehäuse in bar max. Betriebsdruck in bar / max. working pressure in bar
Order-no. PN Water test pressure at the body in bar 20° C 120° C 200° C 300° C 400° C
SF 311 10 15 10 10 8 6 -
SF 311 16 24 16 16 14 11 8
SF 312 25 37,5 25 25 22 17 13
SF 312 40 60 40 40 35 28 21
SF 319 10 15 10 8 7 6 -
SF 319 16 24 16 12 10 8,5 -
SF 320 25 37,5 25 19 16 13,5 -
SF 320 40 60 40 30,5 26 21,5 -
Der max. zulässige Differenzdruck beträgt 1,5 bar und die max. zulässige Strömungsgeschwindigkeit beträgt 1,8 m/s (Wasser)
The max. allowable differential pressure is 1,5 bar. The max. allowable flow speed is 1,8 m/sec. (water)
Lieferbare Sonderausführungen: Available special designs:

• andere Maschenweiten • Other wire cloth
• andere Siebwerkstoffe • Other screen materials
• Flansche nach ASA • Flanges acc. to ASA
• Flansche mit Dichtflächen nach DIN 2526 • Flanges with sealing surface acc. to DIN 2526
• mit Ablaßventil im Deckel • With globe valve in the cover
• mit Heizmantel • With heating jacket
• mit Differenzdruckanzeige • With differential pressure indicator
• SF 319, SF 320 mit Schweißenden • SF 319, SF 320 with welding ends
Die beschriebenen Armaturen entsprechen in Ihrer Konstruktion, ihren Abmessungen, Gewichten und Werkstoffen dem derzeitigen Stand der Technik. Änderungen im Zuge der
Weiterentwicklung, sowie die Verwendung gleich- oder höherwertiger Werkstoffe bleiben vorbehalten. Für eventuelle Schreib- oder Übersetzungsfehler übernehmen wir keine Haftung.
The construction, the measurements and the weights of the described valves represent the current technical standards. We reserve the right to change the technical details and to use
materials of equivalent and higher quality. We cannot be held responsible for any printing or translation errors that might be found in this catalogue.
10/05
Friedrich Krombach GmbH & Co. KG Armaturenwerke D-57202 Kreuztal Postfach 1130
Telefon (0 27 32) 520-0 Telefax (0 27 32) 520 100 http//www.krombach.com e Mail: info@krombach.com
306769
Overspeed protection system with linear solenoid 6
6 Overspeed protection system with linear solenoid

▪ 019.x
See also
2 019.x -- Over speed protection -- 4-320001-031 -- D-300054 [➙ 3]
EQUI/900517/000- 6-1
6 Overspeed protection system with linear solenoid
6-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Instruction Manual
Voith Turbo Overspeed Protector CTO-B45102
Overspeed Protector
Type CTO-B45102
Instruction Manual
Version 1.3
04 / 07 aiet - Ochs Voith Turbo GmbH & Co, KG Page: 1 / 22

3.626 - 018912 en D – 74564 Crailsheim Version 1.3
D-300054
Instruction Manual
Should you have any questions concerning the overspeed protector, please
contact the Service Department of the product group Electronic Drive Systems,
Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG, Crailsheim, indicating
article number and serial number of the overspeed protector.
Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG

P.O. Box 15 55
D-74555 Crailsheim
Switchboard: ++49 – 7951 / 32 - 0

Fax: ++49 – 7951 / 32 - 500
Service department of the product group

Electronic Drive Systems
Direct dial: ++49 – 7951 / 32 - 470
Direct fax: ++49 – 7951 / 32 - 605
E-mail: turcon@voith.com
Address for goods supplied:

Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG
Dept. aie
Voithstr. 1
D-74564 Crailsheim
This instruction manual describes the technical condition of the

overspeed protector from July 2004.
Any modifications following the delivery are not considered in this operating
manual.
 Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG 2004
This instruction manual is protected by copyright.

It may not be reproduced or translated in any form or by any
means (mechanical or electronic) or submitted to
third parties, without the publisher’s written approval.
Amendment: 2006/07, aiev1-ELay

Order No: 3.626-018912 en
Version: 1.3
Printed in Germany

D-300054
Instruction Manual
Contents
1. Technical data
2. Safety Information
2.1 Definition of notes and symbols
2.2 Proper use
2.3 Important notes
2.4 Warranty
3. Functional Description
3.1 Mechanical design
3.2 Block diagram
3.3 Operating characteristics
3.4 Trip criteria
4. Packing, Storage and Transport
5. Installation
5.1 Mounting
5.2 Hydraulic connection
5.3 Electric connection
6. Adjustment and Commissioning

6.1 Adjustment of turbine trip speed
6.2 Adjustment of potentiometers Uf and If
6.3 Commissioning
7. Maintenance and Repair
8. Shutdown
9. Annex

D-300054
Instruction Manual
1. Technical Data
Ambient conditions:
Ambient temperature for storage -40 °C ... +90 °C

Ambient temperature: -20 °C ... +80 °C
Protection IP 65 to EN 60529
suitable for internal installation in industrial air
Electric data:
Supply voltage 24 VDC

Power consumption approx. 0.5 A, max. 3 A for t < 1 sec
Turbine trip speed fss 4000..10000 Hz adjustable
Actual speed remote indication 4..20 mA, for f = 0..fss
Hydraulic data:
Input pressure P max 25 bar

Pressure fluid Mineral oil or hydraulic oil
(hardly combustible fluids upon
request)
Viscosity pressure fluid ISO VG 32... ISO VG 48 to
DIN 51519
Temperature pressure fluid: +10 °C...+70 °C
Oil purity recommended purity class:
to NAS1638 class 7
to ISO4406 class -/16/13
Leakage ≤ 2 l/min at P = 10 bar
Mechanical data:
Dimensions, fittings see chapter 9

Hydraulic connection see chapter 9
Mounting position see chapter 5.1
Sealing compound FPM, NBR
Weight approx. 14 kg

D-300054
Instruction Manual
2. Safety Information
2.1 Definition of notes and symbols
Danger !
This symbol signals an imminent danger to the life and
health of individuals.
If this note is not observed, injury to health and even most
serious injuries may be the consequence.
Warning !
This symbol signals a harmful situation.
If this note is not observed, the product may be damaged.
Note !
This symbol refers to proper handling of the product. It does not refer to
or indicate a dangerous situation.
2.2 Proper use
The overspeed protector is an electro-hydraulic turbine trip device to

control the speed of steam turbines. In the case of a given trip criterion,
the magnetic force is switched off in the electronic component, thus
switching over the 3/3-way valve via a restoring spring designed with
substantial power reserve. This procedure reliably connects the way
valve outlet with the tank return line and the trip-stop valve will close.
2.3 Important notes
The following notes refer to the entire instruction manual and have to be
observed in addition to the individual notes.
Accident prevention
• Improper use may cause operating agent under pressure to leak

at the sealing surfaces. There is a risk of fire around hot components.
• Isolate the hydraulic supply prior to working on the overspeed

protector.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
• Failure of electric power or disturbance of the control electronics

integrated in the overspeed protector may cause strong variations of
the output pressure when operating the overspeed protector. Thus e.g.
the piston rod of a hydraulic cylinder may move uncontrolled, causing
danger to individuals or equipment.
• During operation, the outer surfaces of the overspeed protector may

heat up due to the pressure fluid. Contact may cause skin burns. Make
sure to cool down the overspeed protector prior to working on it.
• Electrical components are installed in the overspeed protector. These

components can be destroyed by e.g. welding in its surrounding.
Therefore make sure to disconnect all electric connections prior to
electrical weldings in the surrounding of the overspeed protector.
Environment protection
• During mounting, dismounting or improper use of the overspeed

protector, pressure fluid may leak out. Operating agent reaching the
sewage system or open soil, causes severe environmental damages.
Leaking pressure fluid has to be collected and deposited in
accordance with the national legal regulations.
Instruction manual
• The instruction manual contains important information for proper

handling of the overspeed protector. Prior to installation and
commissioning of the overspeed protector, read the manual carefully
and make sure it is completely understood.
• Keep this manual in a location convenient to the operating staff.
• In addition to this operating manual: Have the relevant regulations for

prevention of accidents and environmental protection available and
observe same.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
Staff qualification:
• Only trained and instructed staff is allowed to perform any work on the
overspeed protector. These personnel have to be trained and
authorized to mount and commission overspeed protectors
professionally.
• An electronic expert has to install, commission and operate the

overspeed protector.
Constructional modifications:
• Mounting and constructional modifications are not permitted.
2.4 Warranty
The terms and conditions mentioned in the General Conditions

of Sale of Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG, Crailsheim, are applicable.
Warranty claims are excluded if these are due to one or several of the
following causes:
• Improper transportation, storage, mounting, set-up, commissioning

and operation of the overspeed protector.
• Not observing the safety instructions and guidelines included in this

instruction manual.
• Use of spare parts not approved by

Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG, Crailsheim.
Repair works on the overspeed protector are to be performed or

approved by
Voith Turbo GmbH & Co. KG, Crailsheim.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
3. Function
3.1 Design
Fig.: 3.1.1
1 – Control magnet VRM P – Input pressure

2 – Tappet for power transmission A – Outlet
3 – Potentiometer T4 T – Tank return line
4 – Electric connection
5 – Control housing
6 – Control piston FMag – Magnetic force
7 – Restoring spring FF – Spring force
8 – Cover

D-300054
Instruction Manual
3.2 Block diagram
Fig. 3.2.1
3.3 Operating characteristics (see Fig. 3.1.1 and 3.2.1)
A 3/2- way valve and the control magnet VRM with integrated electronics
are the main components of the overspeed protector CTo.
If no trip criteria exist, the CTo can be switched on via a reset, energizing
relay K and thus closing contact K. An inherently short-circuit-proof
holding current from the VRM keeps the relay energized via the closed
circuit current (e.g. external trip).
For a limited time the reset actuates a maximum coil current which
creates a magnetic force FMag and adjusts the piston of the 3/2- way
valve against the progressively designed restoring spring. The coil
current is then reduced and the control piston is kept in its position. Now
the supply pressure is connected with outlet A and the trip-stop valve
runs in the “OPEN” position.
In case of a trip criterion (e.g. reaching of the turbine trip speed) coming
into being, the coil current in the VRM is broken instantaneously resulting
in magnetic force FMag zero. The spring force FF now moves the control
piston in that position where outlet A is connected with the
tank return line T.
The trip-stop valve will run into the “CLOSED” position.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
3.4 Trip criteria
• Wire breakage and / or short circuit on the speed sensor

• Exceeding of the set trip speed
• Break of the closed circuit arrangement (e.g. external trip)
• Short circuit at the holding current output (+24 V towards relay)
• Temperature in the electronic compartment of VRM ≥ 80 °C
• Power supply > 30 V (over-voltage)
• Power supply < 19 V (under-voltage)
• Trip-simulation = Trip test
The "trip-simulation" does not cause a real turbine trip!

The trip-simulation allows a functional test of the trip valve during
operation with the turbine speed exceeding the set trip speed by 23%.
If a trip criterion causes any real turbine trip, the turbine speed has to fall
below a reclosure limit equivalent to approx. 65% of the set turbine trip
speed.
4. Packing, Storage and Transport

Packing
The overspeed protector is delivered in a special packing.

The openings for the hydraulic connections are sealed with plugs to
prevent penetration of impurities and humidity.
Storage and preserving
The outer surfaces of the overspeed protector are protected by means of

a preserving surface coat.
The internal parts are preserved by oil.
Within Europe the anticorrosion protection is sufficient for approx. 8
months in industrial air, presuming storage of the overspeed protector in
a dry location.
In case the overspeed protector is to be stored for a longer period of

time, special precautions will have to be taken.
In each specific case, these precautions have to be agreed with
Voith Turbo GmbH & Co, KG, Crailsheim.
The storage ambient conditions have to be within the limits, as indicated

in chapter 1.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
Transport
Improper transport may cause personal injuries and damages to

property.
Pack the overspeed protector in a way that prevents damages to housing
and electrical connection during transport.
5. Installation
• Improper installation of the overspeed protector may cause
malfunctions and premature failure of the operation.
• Cleanliness is imperative during installation and connection. Prevent

any impurities (dust, metal chips etc.) from getting into the overspeed
protector or pipe system, which may cause damage to the overspeed
protector.
Cover and protect the overspeed protector and, in particular, the electric
lines during construction time.
5.1 Mounting
Perform any work on the overspeed protector only when it is in a de-

energized condition and with switched off oil supply system.
Protect oil and power supply against unintentional switching-on during
mounting.
Preferably install the overload protection in a vertical position, with the

magnet towards the bottom.
Recommended fastening bolts:

2 pieces socket head screws M12, strength category 8.8.
Tightening torque MA=60 Nm, thread slightly oiled.
Select screw length according to mounting situation.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
5.2 Hydraulic connection
The hydraulic connection on the overspeed protector is done by means

of connection bores at its bottom. The connection flange is sealed with o-
rings. Please refer to chapter 9 for position and dimensions of the
connections..
Surface roughness of connecting flange:

Ra = 1.6 µm, Rmax = 6.3 µm
Observe the correct pressure range when selecting pipes, hoses,

screwings and flanges.
Immediately replace damaged pipes and hose lines.
When assembling the pipe lines, ensure that they are fastened to fixed
structures, free from vibration and not to moving equipment. Temperature
variations of the piping (thus alterations in length) must not apply
constraining forces on the overspeed protector.
Clean pipe lines from dirt, cinder, sand, chips etc. prior to installation.
Pickle or flush welded pipes.
Clean and flush carefully all pipe and hose lines prior to attaching the
• Residual oil may leak when removing the plug (max. 0.2 l). Collect the
oil in a suitable container and deposit it properly.
• Do not use fibrous or hardening sealing compounds, such as e.g.

hemp or mastic to seal connections and screwings.
5.3 Electric connection
The electric system has to be connected in accordance with electrical

engineering standards and legal regulations of the manufacturing country
by an electric expert.
When connecting customer’s lines, avoid parallel run of the overspeed

protector lines with the lines of current converter assemblies.
The customer’s signals and supply lines running to the overspeed
protector must be screened.
Please refer to chapter 9 for the wiring diagram.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
6. Adjustment and Commissioning

The overspeed protector was factory-set and checked at Voith Turbo’s
works.
The test result is documented in the provided test report.
Make sure that the pipe lines and hydraulic system are cleaned prior to
commissioning. The pressure fluid has to be in accordance with the
purity class mentioned in chapter 1. Do not flush or clean the operating
agent with hydraulically connected overspeed protector. Operation of the
overspeed protector with contaminated pressure fluid is prohibited, since
this may cause damage to the overspeed protector.
6.1 Adjustment of turbine trip speed
Any trip speed adjustment represents a potentially dangerous

manipulation of the equipment and only skilled personnel, authorized by
the manufacturer or the supplier, are allowed to perform it. Any
maladjustment may cause imminent danger to life and severe damage to
properties.
In any case, document any adjustment of the turbine trip speed.
Confirmation of the new adjustment by means of a documented trip test
is mandatory before operating the turbine.
Due to safety reasons, the overspeed protector is set to the minimum trip
speed possible of approx. 3800 Hz for first commissioning. Regarding the
exact value, please refer to the relevant test report submitted to you.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
The turbine trip speed is set by means of an 8-fold DIP coding switch
which is located protected on the electronics integrated in the control
magnet A (VRM) (see Fig. 6.1.1).
Fig.: 6.1.1
Fig.: 6.1.2
Disconnect the VRM from the hydraulic component B in order to reach

the coding switch.
Loosen the 4 screw nuts D (width over flats 10 mm) and pull off the VRM
from the hydraulic component B.
Unscrew the 4 Allen screws (size 5 mm) used to fix cover C and pull off
the cover. On account of the seal in cover C, it is not easy to move. It
may therefore be helpful to first turn the cover and then lift it using a
screwdriver until air may penetrate into the electronic compartment
underneath. Then it will be easy to remove the cover.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
Fig. 6.1.3 shows the top view onto the electronics installed underneath
cover C with coding switch SS1 and Uf- and If-potentiometers.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 OFF
7 8 6 5 4 3 2 1
SS1
ON
ON
VOITH
E528 Uf If
Fig.: 6.1.3
Shifting the respective individual switch 1 - 8 of SS1 adjusts the required

turbine trip speed.
The switch combination to be adjusted is an 8-bit binary number (binary
number 0000 0000 up to 1111 1111 = decimal number
0-255), calculated as follows, based on the required trip speed,:
trip speed [Hz] - 3800 Hz

Decimal number SS1 = −−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−−
27.333 Hz
Convert this decimal number into a binary number and adjust it directly
as switch combination at SS1, where 1 = ON and 0 = OFF. Adjust the
least number on the right at switch 1 and the most significant on the left
side at switch 8.
A more convenient method is to enter table 1 attached with the desired
trip speed and to directly take from there the switch combination to be
adjusted.
If you use the actual speed remote indication, re-adjust the 4 mA value
using the If-potentiometer for speed 0 after adjustment of the trip speed.
See chapter 6.2, If-potentiometer.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
After adjustment of the coding switches at the SS1, remount cover C and
fix it using the 4 Allen screws. Make sure that the o-ring in the cover and
the two little o-rings in the pole pipe are mounted, not damaged and
greased. Re-lock the 4 Allen screws using the two circlips.
Now push the VRM onto the hydraulic component, at the control housing
of which the o-ring between the hydraulic component and the VRM has
to be mounted correctly.
After the overspeed protector is ready for operation again, a test of the
re-adjusted trip speed is mandatory. On account of rounding errors
and/or manufacturing tolerances it may be necessary to increase or
reduce the binary number set by 1. Should this be the case, please
proceed again as outlined above. A trip speed test is to be performed
and documented, at any rate, after completion of settings.
After that, seal the overspeed protector, thus securing the setting.
See section A-A of the outline drawing in Annex 9.
6.2 Adjustment of Uf- and If-potentiometers
Uf-potentiometer (please refer to Fig. 6.1.3)

The Uf potentiometer is provided to adjust the turbine trip speed
reference, it is factory-set and lacquer-locked. Any new adjustment is
prohibited.
If-potentiometer (please refer to Fig. 6.1.3)

This potentiometer is to be re-adjusted if you want to use the actual
speed remote indication. The limit of 20 mA actual speed remote
indication is permanently assigned to the turbine trip speed and is
corrected automatically on adjustment of the turbine trip speed. The initial
value of 4 mA is to be assigned to 0 Hz.
On adjustment of the turbine trip speed (see chapter 6.1), however, also
the assignment of 4 mA initial value changes at the same time. It is
possible to re-adjust this 4 mA initial value to 0 speed again by means of
the If-potentiometer.
For this purpose, the output of actual speed remote indication is put on a
mA-Meter. At 0 speed the If-potentiometer is turned until the mA-meter
indicates 4.0 mA. Turning the potentiometer clockwise will increase the
mA-signal.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
T4 Potentiometer (please refer to figures 6.1.4 and 6.1.2)

The T4 potentiometer is used to set the trip time. The potentiometer is in
the VRM and protected by a cover.
Loosen the 2 Allen screws F (width over flats 5mm) in order to reach the
T4 potentiometer. Then you can remove cover E. Due to the seal in cover
E it is somewhat sluggish.
Fig.: 6.1.4
Turning of the T4 potentiometer will adjust the trip time, elapsing after
releasing the "trip simulation" = turbine trip test pushbutton (functional
description see chapter 3.4).
Thus, the trip time is adjustable from 10 - 25 ms.
Turning the potentiometer clockwise is extending the trip time.
The potentiometer is factory-set to the minimum possible trip time.
Repeated pushing and releasing the pushbutton "trip simulation" adjusts
the potentiometer. The potentiometer is step-wise adjusted clockwise and
the trip valve is observed. The trip time is set correctly when trip valve to
be adjusted performs a little stroke towards the closing directions, but does
not yet have a negative effect on the turbine.
Doing so, it is possible to check the function of the overspeed protector
and trip-stop valve in intervals to be determined by pushing and releasing
the “trip simulation” button during turbine operation.
After adjustment of the trip time remount cover E and fix it using the 2
Allen screws F. Observe that the o-ring is inserted in the cover,
undamaged and greased. Lock the 2 Allen screws using the locking rings.

D-300054
Instruction Manual
6.3 Commissioning
Commissioning START
Check cables and hydraulic lines

according to terminal diagram
Connect to supply voltage

B
Operate the "ON-button"
Are the trip signals reset for the no

speed controller and for external A
processing?
yes
no
Does the hydraulic valve fully open?
yes
Does the hydraulic valve close, the no

speed controller signal “trip“ and is the external trip signal
available after opening of external trip loop?
yes
Bring turbine speed close to rated speed

or achieve the same by simulating the
actual speed
yes
Does the stroke of the hydraulic valve collapse for a

short time when operating the trip-sim. pushbutton? (you can adjust the no
time to trip the overspeed protection by means of the T4
potentiometer, see chapter 6.3)
yes
C
Disconnection when / on:
- exceeding SS frequency
- external trip loop is interrupted no
- overvoltageg
- undervoltage
- interruption or short circuit of speed pick-up
- short circuit of coil connections
of external relay K
yes
END of commissioning

D-300054
Instruction Manual
Is contact "external trip" yes

A (external trip loop) closed?
no
Close contact "external trip"
B
yes Have the trip signals Disconnect supply
been reset? voltage
To exclude a speed pick-up defect, connect a

1 KOhm resistor or another speed pick-up
to core 7 and 8.
Connect to supply voltage
yes no
Does the hydraulic
valve open?
Inform the
Speed pick-up is defective and /or VOITH-Service
break or short circuit of cable.
Replace speed pick-up.
C

D-300054
Instruction Manual
7. Maintenance and Repair

For a trouble-free and reliable operation of the overspeed protector, it is
necessary to perform inspection, maintenance and repair work in
certain intervals.
Routine inspection:
Check the pipes, screw connections and connections on the

overspeed protector for leakage, impurities and damage.
Eliminate any leakage, impurity and damage noticed, if required, during
appropriate operating modes.
Monitor the control behavior of the overspeed protector for any changes.
Analyse and eliminate the causes, if required, during appropriate
operating modes.
Inspection after approx. 740 operating hours / max. 1 month:
Take an oil sample from the oil tank and analyse it for solid and
suspended matters, water content, shadings and air bubbles.
Analyse oil purity of the oil sample. Clean or exchange the oil, if
required, in an appropriate operating mode.
Inspection after approx. 8000 operating hours / max. 1 year:
Take an oil sample from the oil tank and analyse it chemically.
If required, clean or change the oil during an appropriate operating mode.
Check and retighten, if necessary, the electric connections of the


D-300054
Instruction Manual
8. Shutdown
If the overspeed protector is switched off for reasons of repair,
inspection or unit shutdown, switch off the oil supply system and relieve
all pressure reservoirs, if effective. Switch off the 24 VDC supply voltage
and remove the lines as well as piping and hose connections. Doing so,
a considerable oil quantity may leak out. Collect the oil in a suitable
container and deposit it properly. Close all holes. Now clean and pack
the overspeed protector.
Disposal
In the event of disposal of the overspeed protector, observe the locally

applicable regulations regarding environmental protection. The
overspeed protector contains steel, copper, synthetic materials,
electronic components and residual oil.
9. Annex
Table 1: Adjustments turbine trip speed
Outline drawing 91867112
Connecting cable 91866512

D-300054
Instruction Manual
Table 1: Adjustment turbine trip speed

Format: / decimal number / turbine trip speed / binary number/
0 3800 00000000 64 5549 01000000 128 7299 10000000 192 9048 11000000
1 3827 00000001 65 5577 01000001 129 7326 10000001 193 9075 11000001
2 3855 00000010 66 5604 01000010 130 7353 10000010 194 9103 11000010
3 3882 00000011 67 5631 01000011 131 7381 10000011 195 9130 11000011
4 3909 00000100 68 5659 01000100 132 7408 10000100 196 9157 11000100
5 3937 00000101 69 5686 01000101 133 7435 10000101 197 9185 11000101
6 3964 00000110 70 5713 01000110 134 7463 10000110 198 9212 11000110
7 3991 00000111 71 5741 01000111 135 7490 10000111 199 9239 11000111
8 4019 00001000 72 5768 01001000 136 7517 10001000 200 9267 11001000
9 4046 00001001 73 5795 01001001 137 7545 10001001 201 9294 11001001
10 4073 00001010 74 5823 01001010 138 7572 10001010 202 9321 11001010
11 4101 00001011 75 5850 01001011 139 7599 10001011 203 9349 11001011
12 4128 00001100 76 5877 01001100 140 7627 10001100 204 9376 11001100
13 4155 00001101 77 5905 01001101 141 7654 10001101 205 9403 11001101
14 4183 00001110 78 5932 01001110 142 7681 10001110 206 9431 11001110
15 4210 00001111 79 5959 01001111 143 7709 10001111 207 9458 11001111
16 4237 00010000 80 5987 01010000 144 7736 10010000 208 9485 11010000
17 4265 00010001 81 6014 01010001 145 7763 10010001 209 9513 11010001
18 4292 00010010 82 6041 01010010 146 7791 10010010 210 9540 11010010
19 4319 00010011 83 6069 01010011 147 7818 10010011 211 9567 11010011
20 4347 00010100 84 6096 01010100 148 7845 10010100 212 9595 11010100
21 4374 00010101 85 6123 01010101 149 7873 10010101 213 9622 11010101
22 4401 00010110 86 6151 01010110 150 7900 10010110 214 9649 11010110
23 4429 00010111 87 6178 01010111 151 7927 10010111 215 9677 11010111
24 4456 00011000 88 6205 01011000 152 7955 10011000 216 9704 11011000
25 4483 00011001 89 6233 01011001 153 7982 10011001 217 9731 11011001
26 4511 00011010 90 6260 01011010 154 8009 10011010 218 9759 11011010
27 4538 00011011 91 6287 01011011 155 8037 10011011 219 9786 11011011
28 4565 00011100 92 6315 01011100 156 8064 10011100 220 9813 11011100
29 4593 00011101 93 6342 01011101 157 8091 10011101 221 9841 11011101
30 4620 00011110 94 6369 01011110 158 8119 10011110 222 9868 11011110
31 4647 00011111 95 6397 01011111 159 8146 10011111 223 9895 11011111
32 4675 00100000 96 6424 01100000 160 8173 10100000 224 9923 11100000
33 4702 00100001 97 6451 01100001 161 8201 10100001 225 9950 11100001
34 4729 00100010 98 6479 01100010 162 8228 10100010 226 9977 11100010
35 4757 00100011 99 6506 01100011 163 8255 10100011 227 10005 11100011
36 4784 00100100 100 6533 01100100 164 8283 10100100 228 10032 11100100
37 4811 00100101 101 6561 01100101 165 8310 10100101 229 10059 11100101
38 4839 00100110 102 6588 01100110 166 8337 10100110 230 10087 11100110
39 4866 00100111 103 6615 01100111 167 8365 10100111 231 10114 11100111
40 4893 00101000 104 6643 01101000 168 8392 10101000 232 10141 11101000
41 4921 00101001 105 6670 01101001 169 8419 10101001 233 10169 11101001
42 4948 00101010 106 6697 01101010 170 8447 10101010 234 10196 11101010
43 4975 00101011 107 6725 01101011 171 8474 10101011 235 10223 11101011
44 5003 00101100 108 6752 01101100 172 8501 10101100 236 10251 11101100
45 5030 00101101 109 6779 01101101 173 8529 10101101 237 10278 11101101
46 5057 00101110 110 6807 01101110 174 8556 10101110 238 10305 11101110
47 5085 00101111 111 6834 01101111 175 8583 10101111 239 10333 11101111
48 5112 00110000 112 6861 01110000 176 8611 10110000 240 10360 11110000
49 5139 00110001 113 6889 01110001 177 8638 10110001 241 10387 11110001
50 5167 00110010 114 6916 01110010 178 8665 10110010 242 10415 11110010
51 5194 00110011 115 6943 01110011 179 8693 10110011 243 10442 11110011
52 5221 00110100 116 6971 01110100 180 8720 10110100 244 10469 11110100
53 5249 00110101 117 6998 01110101 181 8747 10110101 245 10497 11110101
54 5276 00110110 118 7025 01110110 182 8775 10110110 246 10524 11110110
55 5303 00110111 119 7053 01110111 183 8802 10110111 247 10551 11110111
56 5331 00111000 120 7080 01111000 184 8829 10111000 248 10579 11111000
57 5358 00111001 121 7107 01111001 185 8857 10111001 249 10606 11111001
58 5385 00111010 122 7135 01111010 186 8884 10111010 250 10633 11111010
59 5413 00111011 123 7162 01111011 187 8911 10111011 251 10661 11111011
60 5440 00111100 124 7189 01111100 188 8939 10111100 252 10688 11111100
61 5467 00111101 125 7217 01111101 189 8966 10111101 253 10715 11111101
62 5495 00111110 126 7244 01111110 190 8993 10111110 254 10743 11111110
63 5522 00111111 127 7271 01111111 191 9021 10111111 255 10770 11111111

D-300054
D-300054
Woodward 505 electronic speed controller 7
7 Woodward 505 electronic speed controller

▪ 023.0
See also
2 023.0 -- Speed governor Woodward SC505 -- 4-400180-009 -- 300977 [➙ 3]
EQUI/900517/000- 7-1
7 Woodward 505 electronic speed controller
7-2 EQUI/900517/000-
Installation and Operation Manual
505 Digital Governor for Steam Turbines

with Single or Split-Range Actuators
9907-162, 9907-163, 9907-164

Volume 1
Manual 85017V1 (Revision C)

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.
 DANGER—Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
DEFINITIONS  WARNING—Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
 CAUTION—Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
 NOTICE—Indicates a hazard that could result in property damage only (including
damage to the control).
 IMPORTANT—Designates an operating tip or maintenance suggestion.
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be equipped with an
overspeed shutdown device to protect against runaway or damage to the prime
mover with possible personal injury, loss of life, or property damage.
The overspeed shutdown device must be totally independent of the prime mover
control system. An overtemperature or overpressure shutdown device may also
be needed for safety, as appropriate.
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be performed before
installing, operating, or servicing this equipment. Practice all plant and safety instructions and
precautions. Failure to follow instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.
This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was produced. To verify that
you have the latest revision, be sure to check the Woodward website:
www.woodward.com/pubs/current.pdf
The revision level is shown at the bottom of the front cover after the publication number. The latest
version of most publications is available at:
www.woodward.com/publications
If your publication is not there, please contact your customer service representative to get the
latest copy.
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified mechanical,
electrical, or other operating limits may cause personal injury and/or property damage, including
damage to the equipment. Any such unauthorized modifications: (i) constitute "misuse" and/or
"negligence" within the meaning of the product warranty thereby excluding warranty coverage
for any resulting damage, and (ii) invalidate product certifications or listings.
To prevent damage to a control system that uses an alternator or battery-charging

device, make sure the charging device is turned off before disconnecting the battery
from the system.
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling, read

and observe the precautions in Woodward manual 82715, Guide for Handling and
Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed Circuit Boards, and Modules.
Revisions—Text changes are indicated by a black line alongside the text.
Woodward Governor Company reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information
provided by Woodward Governor Company is believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed
by Woodward Governor Company unless otherwise expressly undertaken.
© Woodward 1997
All Rights Reserved
Manual 85017V1 505 Digital Governor
Contents
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS .................................................. V

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................... 1
Introduction .............................................................................................................1
General Description ................................................................................................3
505 Inputs and Outputs ..........................................................................................5
Control Overview ....................................................................................................6
Speed Control .........................................................................................................9
Auxiliary Control .....................................................................................................9
Load Sharing Input ...............................................................................................10
Cascade Control ...................................................................................................10
Valve Limiter .........................................................................................................10
Starting Features ..................................................................................................11
Critical Speed Avoidance .....................................................................................11
Block Diagrams ....................................................................................................12
Keypad and Display..............................................................................................14
Watchdog Timer/CPU Fault Control .....................................................................16
CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURES.................................................. 17
Introduction ...........................................................................................................17
Mechanical Data and Hardware Installation .........................................................17
Communications Grounding and Shielding ..........................................................33
CHAPTER 3. 505 CONTROL DESCRIPTION .................................................. 35
Introduction ...........................................................................................................35
Turbine Start .........................................................................................................35
Turbine Start Modes .............................................................................................37
Critical Speed Avoidance .....................................................................................40
Idle/Rated .............................................................................................................41
Automatic Start Sequence ....................................................................................42
No Idle Programmed ............................................................................................45
Speed Control Overview.......................................................................................45
Speed PID Operational Modes .............................................................................46
Cascade Control ...................................................................................................58
Auxiliary Control ...................................................................................................64
Remote Auxiliary Setpoint ....................................................................................68
Valve Limiter .........................................................................................................70
Emergency Shutdown ..........................................................................................70
Controlled Shutdown ............................................................................................71
Overspeed Test Function .....................................................................................72
Local/Remote Function.........................................................................................73
Function Keys .......................................................................................................74
Relays ...................................................................................................................74
CHAPTER 4. CONFIGURATION PROCEDURES .............................................. 77
Program Architecture............................................................................................77
Programming the 505 ...........................................................................................78
Exiting the Program Mode ..................................................................................101
Valve/Actuator Calibration & Test ......................................................................105
Calibration/Stroking Procedure ..........................................................................106
Calibration/Stroking Procedure ..........................................................................108
Woodward i
505 Digital Governor Manual 85017V1
Contents
CHAPTER 5. 505 OPERATION ...................................................................112

Run Mode Architecture .......................................................................................112
Keypad and Display ............................................................................................116
Run Mode Front Panel Keys ..............................................................................116
Starting Procedures ............................................................................................117
Speed Key Screens ............................................................................................118
Overspeed Test Function ...................................................................................122
F3 and F4 Keys ..................................................................................................123
Limiter (LMTR) Key Screens ..............................................................................123
Actuator (ACTR) Key Screens............................................................................124
Control (CONT) Key Screens .............................................................................125
Dynamics (DYN) Key Screens ...........................................................................127
Stop Key Screens ...............................................................................................128
Auxiliary (Aux) Key Screens ...............................................................................128
Remote/Speed Bias (RMT) Key Screens ...........................................................131
Unit Load (KW) Key Screens..............................................................................134
Cascade (CAS) Key Screens .............................................................................135
Alarms.................................................................................................................137
Trips ....................................................................................................................138
Speed, Cascade, and Auxiliary Dynamics Adjustments.....................................139
CHAPTER 6. COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................143
Modbus Communications ...................................................................................143
Port Adjustments ................................................................................................146
505 Control Modbus Addresses .........................................................................146
Specific Address Information ..............................................................................157
CHAPTER 7. SERVICE OPTIONS ................................................................159
Product Service Options .....................................................................................159
Woodward Factory Servicing Options ................................................................160
Returning Equipment for Repair .........................................................................161
Replacement Parts .............................................................................................161
Engineering Services ..........................................................................................162
How to Contact Woodward .................................................................................162
Technical Assistance ..........................................................................................163
APPENDIX. 505 PROGRAM MODE WORKSHEETS ......................................164
DECLARATIONS .......................................................................................167
ii Woodward
Illustrations and Tables
Figure 1-1. Typical Single or Dual Inlet Steam Turbine .........................................4

Figure 1-2. Split Range or Admission Type of Turbine Configuration ....................4
Figure 1-3a. Overview of 505 Functionality ............................................................7
Figure 1-3b. Overview of 505 Functionality ............................................................8
Figure 1-4. Overview of 505 Functionality Notes .................................................12
Figure 1-5. Single or Split-Range Turbine Configurations ...................................13
Figure 1-8. 505 Key Pad and Display...................................................................14
Figure 2-1. 505 Control Layout (Standard Enclosure) .........................................19
Figure 2-2. 505 Bulkhead-Mounted Enclosure .....................................................20
Figure 2-3. Jumper Options ..................................................................................21
Figure 2-4. Jumper Locations ...............................................................................21
Figure 2-5. CageClamp Terminal Blocks .............................................................23
Figure 2-6. Control Wiring Diagram......................................................................24
Figure 2-7. Representative 505 I/O Schematic ....................................................25
Figure 2-8. Fuse location ......................................................................................26
Figure 2-9. Shielded Wire Connections ................................................................27
Figure 2-10. Typical RS-232 Communications.....................................................32
Figure 2-13. Preferred Multipoint Wiring with a Separate Signal Ground Wire....33
Figure 2-14. Alternate Multipoint Wiring without a Separate Signal Ground
Wire .................................................................................................34
Figure 3-1. Basic Control Overview ......................................................................35
Figure 3-2. Manual Start Mode Example..............................................................38
Figure 3-3. Semiautomatic Start mode Example..................................................39
Figure 3-4. Automatic Start Mode Example .........................................................40
Figure 3-5. Idle/Rated Start ..................................................................................42
Figure 3-6. Automatic Start Sequence .................................................................43
Figure 3-7. Speed Control Functional Diagram ....................................................46
Figure 3-8. Speed PID Control Modes .................................................................47
Figure 3-9. Frequency and Unit Load Relationship ..............................................49
Figure 3-10. Speed Relationships ........................................................................51
Figure 3-11. Loadsharing Logic ............................................................................57
Figure 3-12. Cascade Functional Diagram...........................................................59
Figure 3-13. Aux Control Overview ......................................................................64
Figure 4-1. Basic Program Architecture ...............................................................77
Figure 4-2. Initial 505 Program Mode Entry .........................................................78
Figure 4-3a. Program Mode Blocks......................................................................81
Figure 4-3b. Program Mode Blocks......................................................................82
Figure 4-3c. Program Mode Blocks ......................................................................83
Figure 4-3d. Program Mode Blocks......................................................................84
Figure 4-4. Exiting the Program Mode ...............................................................101
Figure 4-5. Stroke Actuator ................................................................................110
Figure 4-6. Stroking Dual Actuators ...................................................................111
Figure 5-1. Basic Program Architecture .............................................................112
Figure 5-2a. Overview of Run Mode ..................................................................113
Figure 5-2b. Overview of Run Mode ..................................................................114
Figure 5-3. 505 Keypad and Display ..................................................................116
Figure 5-4. SPEED Key Screens .......................................................................118
Figure 5-5. Direct Setpoint Entry ........................................................................121
Figure 5-6. Overspeed Test Enable Key Screens ..............................................122
Figure 5-7. LMTR Key Screens ..........................................................................124
Woodward iii
Figure 5-8. ACTR Key Screens ..........................................................................125

Figure 5-9. CONT Key Screens..........................................................................126
Figure 5-10. DYN Key Screens ..........................................................................127
Figure 5-11. STOP Key Screens ........................................................................128
Figure 5-12. AUX Key Screens ..........................................................................129
Figure 5-13. RMT Key Screens ..........................................................................132
Figure 5-14. KW Key Screens ............................................................................134
Figure 5-15. CAS Key Screens ..........................................................................135
Figure 5-16. ALARM Screen ..............................................................................137
Figure 5-17. TRIP Screen...................................................................................138
Figure 5-18. Typical Response to Load Change ................................................142
Figure 6-1. ASCII/RTU Representation of 3 .......................................................144
Figure 6-2. Modbus Frame Definition .................................................................145
Table 1-1. 505s with Polyacrylate Coated Boards .................................................1

Table 2-1. Jumper Options Chart .........................................................................22
Table 3-1. On-Line/Off-Line Dynamics Selection .................................................53
Table 3-2. Load Sharing Logic .............................................................................58
Table 4-1. Actuator Driver Limits ........................................................................106
Table 5-1. Overview of Run Mode ......................................................................115
Table 5-2. Idle/Rated Messages.........................................................................119
Table 5-3. Auto Start Messages .........................................................................120
Table 5-4. Controlling Parameter Messages ......................................................126
Table 5-5. Auxiliary Messages (if using Aux enable) .........................................130
Table 5-6. Auxiliary Messages (if using Aux as a limiter) ...................................130
Table 5-7. Remote AUX Messages ....................................................................131
Table 5-8. Remote Speed Messages .................................................................132
Table 5-9. Control Messages .............................................................................133
Table 5-10. Cascade Control Messages ............................................................136
Table 5-11. Remote Cascade Messages ...........................................................137
Table 5-12. Alarm Messages..............................................................................138
Table 5-13. Trip Messages .................................................................................139
Table 6-1. ASCII vs RTU Modbus ......................................................................144
Table 6-2. Modbus Function Codes ...................................................................145
Table 6-3. Modbus Error Codes .........................................................................146
Table 6-4. Maximum Modbus Discrete and Analog Values ...............................147
Table 6-5. Boolean Write Addresses ..................................................................148
Table 6-6. Boolean Read Addresses .................................................................150
Table 6-7. Analog Read Addresses ...................................................................152
Table 7-8. Analog Write Addresses ....................................................................152
Table 6-9. Last Turbine Trip Cause ....................................................................153
Table 6-10. Control Status..................................................................................153
Table 6-11. Analog Input Configuration ..............................................................154
Table 6-12. Analog Output Configuration ...........................................................154
Table 6-13. Relay Configuration .........................................................................155
Table 6-14. Contact Input Configurations ...........................................................156
Table 6-15. Units Configuration ..........................................................................156
iv Woodward
Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

All electronic equipment is static-sensitive, some components more than others.
To protect these components from static damage, you must take special
precautions to minimize or eliminate electrostatic discharges.
Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.
1. Before doing maintenance on the electronic control, discharge the static

electricity on your body to ground by touching and holding a grounded metal
object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.).
2. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing
made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend materials as much
as possible because these do not store static electric charges as much as
synthetics.
3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or Styrofoam

cups, cup holders, cigarette packages, cellophane wrappers, vinyl books or
folders, plastic bottles, and plastic ash trays) away from the control, the
modules, and the work area as much as possible.
4. Do not remove the printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cabinet
unless absolutely necessary. If you must remove the PCB from the control
cabinet, follow these precautions:
 Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
 Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the

components with conductive devices or with your hands.
 When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic antistatic
protective bag it comes in until you are ready to install it. Immediately
after removing the old PCB from the control cabinet, place it in the
antistatic protective bag.
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper

handling, read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual
82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls,
Printed Circuit Boards, and Modules.
Woodward v
vi Woodward
Chapter 1.
General Information
Introduction
This manual describes the Woodward 505 Digital Governor for steam turbines.
English versions are 9907-162, 9907-163, and 9907-164. The option charts
below show the differences between the part numbers. Volume 1 of this manual
provides installation instructions, describes the control, and explains the
configuration (programming) and operating procedures. Volume 2 includes notes
on applying the control to specific applications, Service mode information, and
505 hardware specifications. This manual does not contain instructions for the
operation of the complete turbine system. For turbine or plant operating
instructions, contact the plant-equipment manufacturer.
Manual 85018 describes the 505E Digital Governor for extraction steam turbines.
Part Number Options

Part Number Power
9907-162 HVAC (180–264 Vac)
9907-163 AC/DC (88–132 Vac or 90–150 Vdc)
9907-164 LVDC (18–32 Vdc)
Optional Bulkhead Mounting Box (NEMA 4X) P/N 8923-439
505 controllers now utilize a special polyacrylate conformal coating material to

coat and protect their internal circuit boards from corrosive environments. This
new polyacrylate material replaces the previous silicon conformal coating and
provides an improved barrier between board components and sulfur-based
gases. 505 controls that have this coating will have a label on the side stating
“SULFUR RESISTANT CONFORMAL COATED”. All 505 controllers shipped
from Woodward with the revision letters listed below, or subsequent letters, were
shipped with the new polyacrylate conformal coating material:
Table 1-1. 505s with Polyacrylate Coated Boards
Part Number Revision Label on 505

9907-162 U 9907-162U
9907-163 U 9907-163U
9907-164 R 9907-164R
9907-805 K 9907-805K
9907-806 K 9907-806K
9907-807 K 9907-807K
9907-813 D 9907-813D
9907-814 D 9907-814D
9907-815 D 9907-815D
Woodward 1
General Installation and Operating Notes and Warnings

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2 , Groups A, B, C, and D
(Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC) or non-hazardous locations.
The 505s are suitable for use in European Zone 2, Group II environments per
compliance with EN60079-15, Electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres –
Type of protection ‘n’
These listings are limited only to those units bearing the certification
identification.
Field wiring must be rated at least 75 °C for operating ambient temperatures

expected to exceed 50 °C.
Peripheral equipment must be suitable for the location in which it is used.
Wiring must be in accordance with North American Class I, Division 2 or

European Zone 2 wiring methods as applicable, and in accordance with the
authority having jurisdiction.
EXPLOSION HAZARD—Do not connect or disconnect while circuit is

live unless area is known to be non-hazardous.
Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,

Division 2.
Do not use any test points on the power supply or control boards
unless the area is known to be non-hazardous.
RISQUE D’EXPLOSION—Ne pas raccorder ni débrancher

tant que l’installation est sous tension, sauf en cas
l’ambiance est décidément non dangereuse.
La substitution de composants peut rendre ce matériel

inacceptable pour les emplacements de Classe I, Division 2.
Ne pas utiliser les bornes d’essai du block d’alimentation

ou des cartes de commande à moins de se trouver dans un
emplacement non dangereux.
2 Woodward
505 Software Changes Covered in This Manual Revision

1. PROGRAM MODE: Added an error check to ensure Rated Speed (when
programmed as a gen set) was less than max gov.
2. SERVICE MODE: Changed the hold changes for Min Load to come from the
Breaker Logic header's Hold Changes input. Previously the hold changes
command was selected under the Speed Control Settings header.
3. SPEED SETPOINT RATES: Changed the minimum adjustment range for all
speed setpoint rates to 0.01 (was 0.1).
4. AUX LIMITER or CONTROLLER: Added logic to ensure the inhibited status
of Aux control when the input is failed. In addition, changed Aux re- enable
logic such that when a failed aux input is restored there is no glitch to the
speed LSS. Also changed breaker open logic to correct a Gen Opening Aux
actuator output glitch.
5. AUX CONTROLLER: Changed the speed setpoint aux biasing logic to only
allow the speed control limiting action (while in aux control) to be active when
the speed setpoint reaches max gov. Prior to this fix the speed limiter could
come into control during an extreme transient.
6. AUX DIRECT ENTERED SETPT: Changed Aux Entered setpoint to be
reset/stopped on a shutdown pulse rather than held disabled on a shutdown
condition. This change allows the Aux Limiter function direct setpoint entry
even when the unit is tripped.
7. AUX and CASC DROOP: Changed the droop feedback lag-tau tunable range
from a max of 10 to a max of 1000.
8. MODBUS: Changed the Gen and Tie Open alarms for Aux, Casc, and
Remote to match the Modbus listing—the software eventlatch inputs were
reversed/backwards with the Modbus listing.
9. CONTROLLED STOP: Made the Controlled Stop abort if speed raise/lower is
selected or another control mode is selected. This can be tuned-out by
setting CNTRL_STOP.RL_STOP.IN_2=*false in the debug mode.
10. ANALOG INPUTS: Changed max setting on the delay time’s tunable range
from 3 ms to 3000 ms. The analog input failure delay setting is defaulted to
zero but can be adjusted up to 3000 ms using the debug mode
MAIN.AIx.LATCH_DLY where x is the analog input number. Added a tunable
single pole filter (LAG) to each analog input. Output/input = 1/(1+st) where t =
1/(2(pi)f) = LAG_TAU. The Lag-tau is defaulted to zero but can be adjusted
in the debug mode using MAIN.AIx_LAG.LAG_TAU where x is the analog
input number (1-6).
General Description
General
The 505 microprocessor-based control is designed to control single or dual (split
range) actuator steam turbines (extraction steam turbines require the 505E
version). The 505 is field programmable which allows a single design to be used
in many different control applications and reduces both cost and delivery time. It
uses menu driven software to instruct site engineers on programming the control
to a specific generator or mechanical drive application. The 505 can be
configured to operate as a stand-alone unit or in conjunction with a plant’s
Distributed Control System.
Woodward 3
GOVERNOR VALVE
T&T
VALVE
INLET
STEAM
T&T
VALVE
INLET
STEAM
GOVERNOR VALVE
855−664
EXHAUST 98−03−12 JMM
STEAM
Figure 1-1. Typical Single or Dual Inlet Steam Turbine
HP/ACT1
GOVERNOR VALVE
T&T
VALVE
INLET
STEAM
INLET
STEAM
T&T 855−665
VALVE 98−03−12 JMM
LP/ACT2
GOVERNOR VALVE EXHAUST
STEAM
Figure 1-2. Split Range or Admission Type of Turbine Configuration
Operator Control Panel

The 505 is a field configurable steam turbine control and operator control panel
(OCP) integrated into one package. A comprehensive operator control panel,
including a two-line (24 characters each) display, and a set of 30 keys is located
on the 505’s front panel. This OCP is used to configure the 505, make On-Line
program adjustments, and operate the turbine/system. Easy to follow instructions
are presented in English through the OCP’s two-line display and operators can
view actual and setpoint values from the same screen.
4 Woodward
Turbine Control Parameters

The 505 interfaces with one or two control valves to control one parameter at a
time and limit an additional parameter, if desired. The one controlled parameter is
typically speed (or load), however, the 505 could be utilized to control or limit:
turbine inlet pressure or flow, exhaust (back) pressure or flow, first stage
pressure, generator power output, plant import and/or export levels, compressor
inlet or discharge pressure or flow, unit/plant frequency, process temperature, or
any other turbine related process parameter. Refer to Volume 2 of this manual
for details on applications.
Communications
The 505 can communicate directly with plant Distributed Control Systems and/or
CRT based operator control panels, through two Modbus® * communication
ports. These ports support RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 communications using
ASCII or RTU MODBUS transmission protocols. Communications between the
505 and a plant DCS can also be performed through hardwired connections.
Since all 505 PID setpoints can be controlled through analog input signals,
interface resolution and control is not sacrificed.
*—Modbus is a trademark of Schneider Automation Inc.
Additional Features
The 505 also provides the following features: First-Out Trip Indication (5 total trip
inputs), Critical Speed Avoidance (2 speed bands), Auto Start Sequence (hot &
cold starts), Dual Speed/Load Dynamics, Zero Speed Detection, Peak Speed
Indication for Overspeed trip, and Isochronous Loadsharing between units (with a
DSLC™ control).
Using the 505

The 505 control has two normal operating modes, the Program Mode and the
Run Mode. The Program Mode is used to select the options needed to configure
the control to your specific turbine application. Once the control has been
configured, the Program Mode is typically never again used, unless turbine
options or operation changes. Once configured, the Run Mode is used to operate
the turbine from start-up through shutdown. In addition, on-line adjustments can
be made using the Service Mode (see Volume 2).
505 Inputs and Outputs

Control Inputs
Two speed inputs that are jumper configurable for MPU (magnetic pickup units)
inputs or proximity probes.
Six programmable analog inputs can be used as one of the following options:
auxiliary input, remote auxiliary setpoint, cascade input, remote cascade setpoint,
kW (load) input, remote speed setpoint, synchronizing, load sharing, both
synchronizing and load sharing, and first stage pressure. The sixth analog input
has isolation circuitry and should be used for a self-powered signal that is not
isolated.
Woodward 5
Sixteen contact inputs are available. Four are dedicated for shutdown, reset,
raise speed setpoint, and lower speed setpoint. Another two contact inputs must
be dedicated for generator breaker and utility tie breaker if the control is used in a
generator application. Ten additional contact inputs can be configured. If the unit
is not used in a generator application, then twelve additional contact inputs can
be configured.
Four function keys on the front panel of the control. F1 and F2 are dedicated to
alarm and overspeed, respectively. F3 and F4 can be used to enable or disable
various functions of the control.
Control Outputs
Two actuator outputs with linearization curves; the second actuator output can be
used as an extra readout if not used as an actuator output. Six 4–20 mA outputs,
for meters or other readouts.
Eight Form-C relay contact outputs, six that are configurable. The two dedicated
relay outputs are for shutdown and alarm indication.
Control Interfaces
Two Modbus ports, to be used as control interfaces. The protocol can be either
ASCII or RTU and the communications can be RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485.
One computer (PC) port to be used for program configuration storage.
An overview of the 505 functions is shown in Figure 1-3. Use this block diagram
to match the control features to the site-specific application required.
Control Overview
The 505 has two independent control channels, the speed/load and auxiliary
controllers. The outputs of these two controllers are low-signal-selected (LSS)
with another channel, the valve limiter. The output of the LSS directly sets the
position of the actuator driver’s output. In addition to these channels, the
speed/load controller can be manipulated by another controller, the cascade
controller. The cascade controller is ‘cascaded’ into the speed controller,
whereby the speed controller setpoint is changed directly by the cascade
controller output. The auxiliary controller can act as either a control channel or as
a limiting channel. All three of these PID controllers have the option of utilizing an
analog input signal to remotely position their setpoints. Additional features of the
505 include frequency control, isochronous loadsharing (with a DSLC), critical
speed avoidance, idle/rated control and an automatic start sequence. There are
two serial communications ports which can be used to monitor and control the
turbine using Modbus protocol.
6 Woodward
Figure 1-3a. Overview of 505 Functionality
Woodward 7
Figure 1-3b. Overview of 505 Functionality
8 Woodward
Speed Control
The speed control receives a turbine speed signal from one or two magnetic
pickups or proximity probes. The speed PID (proportional, integral, derivative)
control amplifier then compares this signal to the speed setpoint to generate an
output signal to the actuator (through a low signal select bus).
The speed control’s setpoint is adjustable with raise or lower commands through
the keypad on the front of the control, remote contact inputs or the
communication line. The setpoint can also be directly set by entering the new
setpoint from the keypad or through either Modbus communications. In addition,
an analog input can be programmed to remotely position the speed setpoint.
Remote Speed Setpoint

One of the 4–20 mA inputs can be configured to control the speed setpoint.
Typically, a process control external to the 505 interfaces with this input to
regulate the turbine’s speed or load to control a related process.
The remote speed setpoint input directly affects the 505’s speed setpoint. The
maximum rate at which the remote input signal can change the speed setpoint is
programmable. When the remote setpoint is enabled, the speed setpoint will
move at a much slower rate until the two settings are matched at which time the
speed setpoint will be allowed to move at the maximum rate. The remote speed
function can be enabled and disabled as required from the front-panel keypad,
remote contact inputs or the communication line.
Auxiliary Control
The Auxiliary control channel can be used to either control a parameter or limit a
parameter. The Auxiliary PID controller can be used to control or limit unit
load/power, plant import/export levels, inlet pressure, exhaust pressure,
temperature or any other process directly related to turbine load.
The Auxiliary input is a 4–20 mA current signal. The Auxiliary PID control
amplifier compares this input signal with a setpoint to produce a control output to
the digital LSS (low-signal select) bus. The LSS bus sends the lowest signal to
the actuator driver circuitry.
The Auxiliary setpoint is adjustable with raise or lower commands through the
keypad on the front of the control, through remote contact inputs or through the
communication links. Also, the setpoint can be directly set by entering the new
setpoint from the keypad or through either Modbus communications. In addition,
an analog input can be programmed to remotely position the Auxiliary setpoint.
Remote Aux Setpoint

One of the 4–20 mA inputs can be configured to remotely adjust the aux setpoint.
The remote aux setpoint input directly affects the Auxiliary setpoint. The
maximum rate at which the remote input signal can change the auxiliary setpoint
is programmable. When the remote setpoint is enabled, the Auxiliary setpoint will
move at a much slower rate until the two settings are matched at which time the
setpoint will be allowed to move at the maximum rate. The remote aux function
can be enabled and disabled as required from the front panel keypad, the remote
contact inputs, or the communication links.
Woodward 9
Load Sharing Input

The 505 is capable of using an analog input to accept a load sharing signal from
Woodward’s Digital Synchronizer and Load Control (DSLC). This input in
conjunction with the DSLC allows the control to isochronously loadshare with any
other system using a DSLC. The 505’s internal summing junction adds this signal
with the speed/load PID’s reference. In addition to loadsharing, the DSLC input to
the 505 can be used to synchronize the unit to either the plant bus or to the utility.
Cascade Control
The cascade control can be configured to control any system process, related to
or affected by turbine speed or load. Typically this controller is used as a turbine
inlet or exhaust pressure controller.
The cascade control is a PID controller that compares a 4–20 mA process signal
with the cascade setpoint. The PID controller sets the speed controller setpoint
until the process signal and the setpoint match.
The cascade setpoint is adjustable with raise or lower commands through the
keypad on the front of the control, the remote contact inputs, or the
communication links. Also, the setpoint can be directly set by entering the new
setpoint from the keypad or through Modbus communications. In addition, a
remote cascade setpoint analog input can be programmed to remotely position
the cascade setpoint.
Remote Cascade Setpoint

One of the 4–20 mA inputs can be configured to remotely adjust the cascade
setpoint. The remote cascade setpoint input directly affects the 505’s cascade
setpoint. The maximum rate at which the remote input signal can change the
cascade setpoint is programmable and can be changed in the Run mode. When
the remote setpoint is enabled, the cascade setpoint will move at a much slower
rate until the two settings are matched at which the setpoint will be allowed to
move at the maximum rate. The remote cascade function can be enabled and
disabled as required from the front-panel keypad, the remote contact inputs or
the communication links.
Valve Limiter
The valve limiter limits the actuator output signal or valve position to aid in
starting up and shutting down a turbine. The output of the valve limiter is low-
signal-selected with the output of the speed/load and auxiliary control channels.
The control or limiter channel asking for the lowest valve position will control
valve position. Thus, the valve limiter limits the maximum valve position. The
valve limiter can be adjusted through the keypad, external contact closures, or
Modbus commands.
The valve limiter can also be used to troubleshoot system dynamics problems. If
it is believed that the 505 is the source of system instability, the valve limiter can
be positioned to manually take control of the valve position. Care should be taken
when using the valve limiter in this fashion, so as to not allow the system to reach
a dangerous operating point.
10 Woodward
Starting Features
The 505 provides options for three different starting modes: automatic, semi-
automatic, and manual. One of these modes must be programmed to get the
turbine from a shutdown state to speed control at minimum speed. The start
mode configured and minimum governor controlling speed will depend on normal
plant starting procedures and turbine manufacturer’s recommendations.
If an idle speed is programmed (either idle/rated or auto start sequence modes),

the 505 can provide automatic speed control and critical speed avoidance. A
‘Run’ command can be given through the 505 keypad, a remote contact input, or
Modbus communications. In addition, an optional ‘Start Permissive’ contact input
can be programmed to prevent a start if, for example, the trip-throttle or stop
valve is not closed.
Idle/Rated
The idle/rated function gives an operator the ability to move between a
programmed idle speed and a programmed rated speed at a configured rate. The
selection of idle or rated speed setpoint positions can be made through the front
panel keypad, through remote contact inputs, or through the Modbus
communications links. The idle/rated function can also be programmed as a
ramp-to-rated function only.
Auto Start Sequence

The auto start sequence function gives the operator the ability to start from a
programmed low idle speed, hold there until the programmed warm-up time has
expired, then go to a programmed high idle speed, hold there until the
programmed high idle warm-up time has expired, and finally move to the
programmed rated speed setpoint. The hold times and the acceleration rates are
dependent on whether the turbine is considered ‘hot’ or ‘cold’ based on the time
the turbine has been shut down. When the turbine is between hot and cold
conditions, the control interpolates between the hot and cold data points to
determine the appropriate startup rates and hold times.
The auto start sequence can be stopped and started, if desired, by programming
and using the auto start sequence halt/continue commands. The selection of halt
or continue can be made through the 505 keypad, remote contact inputs or
Modbus communications. In addition, the auto start sequence can be
programmed to automatically halt at each idle setpoint.
Critical Speed Avoidance

In many turbines, it is desirable to avoid certain speeds or speed ranges (or pass
through them as quickly as possible) due to excessive turbine vibration or other
factors. During programming, two critical speed avoidance bands may be
selected. These bands may be any speed ranges that is less than the minimum
governor speed setting. Either the Idle/Rated or the Auto Start Sequence
functions must be programmed to perform critical speed avoidance. Within a
critical speed range, the 505 moves the speed setpoint at the critical speed rate
programmed and does not allow the speed setpoint to stop within the critical
speed avoidance band. If the turbine is accelerating through a critical avoidance
band and excessively high vibrations are experienced, selecting the speed
setpoint lower command will bring the unit back to the lower limit of the band.
Woodward 11
Block Diagrams
Overviews of possible 505 configurations are shown in Figures 1-5 through 1-7.
Use these block diagrams to match the control features to the site-specific
application requirements. Figure 1-4 lists symbols and their respective
explanations. The Cascade and auxiliary PIDs are optional controllers, and are
shown in the following diagrams for PID relationship purposes only.
Figure 1-4. Overview of 505 Functionality Notes
12 Woodward
ENABLE
INPUT
REMOTE LSS
INPUT
(4−20mA) RAISE SETPOINT
LOWER SPEED SCALING ACTUATOR
DRIVER 1
TURBINE SPEED
VALVE ACTUATOR
LIMITER SCALING
DRIVER 2
855−668
02−12−31
Figure 1-5. Single or Split-Range Turbine Configurations

(Speed PID with Remote Setpoint)
TIE BREAKER DROOP

ENABLE
GEN BREAKER LOGIC
ENABLE CASCADE KW/UNIT LOAD

DROOP
SETPOINT PERCENT LSS

CASC TO RPM SETPOINT
CASCADE INPUT CONVERSION SPEED
TURBINE SPEED
SCALING ACTUATOR
DRIVER 1
SETPOINT
AUX
AUXILIARY INPUT
SCALING ACTUATOR
DRIVER 2
VALVE
LIMITER 855−669
02−12−31

(Auxiliary PID Configured as a Limiter)
Woodward 13
TIE BREAKER DROOP

ENABLE
GEN BREAKER LOGIC
KW/UNIT LOAD
ENABLE CASCADE DROOP
SETPOINT PERCENT
CASC TO RPM SETPOINT
CASCADE INPUT CONVERSION SPEED LSS
TURBINE SPEED
TRACKING ACTUATOR
C SCALING DRIVER 1
SETPOINT ENABLE
AUX AUX CONTROL
AUXILIARY INPUT
ACTUATOR
VALVE SCALING DRIVER 2
LIMITER
855−670
02−12−31

(Auxiliary PID Configured as a Controller)
Keypad and Display

The 505’s service panel consists of a keypad and LED display located on the
front of the control. The LED display has two, 24 character lines that can be used
to display operating parameters and troubleshooting parameters in plain English.
Also, there are 30 keys available to provide complete control from the front of the
505. No additional control panels are required to operate the turbine, every
turbine control function can be performed from the 505’s front panel.
Figure 1-8. 505 Key Pad and Display
14 Woodward
A description of each key’s function follows. Some descriptions refer to the
function blocks contained in the programming (Chapter 4) and operating
flowcharts (Chapter 5).
SCROLL :
The large diamond shaped button in the middle of the keypad with arrows at each
of it’s four corners. The < > (scroll left, right) moves the display left or right through
the function blocks of the Program or Run Mode. The , (scroll up, down)
moves the display up or down within a function block of the Program or Run Mode.
SELECT:
The Select key is used to select control of the 505 display’s top or bottom line
variable. The @ sign is used to indicate which line (variable) can be adjusted by
the adjust keys. Only when there is a changeable variable on both lines
(dynamics, valve calibration modes) does the “select key” and @ sign determine
which line variable can be adjusted. When there is only one variable per screen
the “select key” and @ sign’s position are irrelevant.
ADJ (adjust):
In the Run Mode, “ “ moves any adjustable parameter up (larger) and “ “ moves
any adjustable parameter down (smaller).
PRGM (program):
When the control is shutdown this key selects the Program Mode. While in the
Run Mode this key selects a Program Monitor Mode. In the Program Monitor
Mode the program can be viewed but not changed.
RUN:
Initiates a turbine run or start command from the (CONTROLLING
PARAMETER/PUSH RUN or PRGM) state.
STOP:
Initiates a controlled turbine shutdown (Run Mode) once verification is given. The “Stop”
command can be disabled through a Service Mode setting (under ‘Key Options’).
RESET:
Resets/clears Run Mode alarms and shutdowns. Pressing the key also returns
the control to the (CONTROLLING PARAMETER/PUSH RUN OR PRGM) status
after a shutdown.
0/NO:
Enters 0/NO or disable.
1/YES:
Enters 1/YES or enable.
2/ACTR (actuator):
Enters 2 or displays the actuator position (Run Mode).
3/CONT (control):
Enters 3 or displays the parameter which is in control (Run Mode); press the
Scroll down arrow to display the control’s last trip cause, highest speed reached,
and local/remote status (if used).
4/CAS (cascade):
Enters 4 or displays the cascade control information (Run Mode).
5/RMT (remote):
Enters 5 or displays the remote speed setpoint control information (Run Mode).
Woodward 15
6/LMTR (valve limiter):
Enters 6 or displays the valve limiter information (Run Mode)
7/SPEED:
Enters 7 or displays the speed control information (Run Mode).
8/AUX (auxiliary):
Enters 8 or displays the auxiliary control information (Run Mode).
9/KW (load):
Enters 9 or displays the kW/load or first stage pressure information (Run Mode).
CLEAR:
Clears Program Mode and Run Mode entries and takes control out of it’s present
mode.
ENTER:
Enters new values in the Program Mode, and allows the “direct entry” of specific
setpoint values in the Run Mode.
DYNAMICS (+/–):
Accesses the dynamic settings of the parameter controlling the actuator position
in the Run Mode. The dynamics adjustments can be disabled through a Service
Mode setting (under ‘Key Options’). This key will also change the sign of a value
being entered.
 (DECIMAL KEY)
Enters decimal point in number being entered from front panel.
ALARM (F1):
Displays the reason for any alarm condition (last/newest alarm) when the key’s
LED indicator is illuminated. Press the Scroll down arrow (diamond key) to
display additional alarms.
OVERSPEED TEST ENABLE (F2) :

Permits the speed reference to be raised beyond the maximum controlling speed
set point to test either the electrical or mechanical overspeed trip.
F3 (function key):
Programmable function key for enabling or disabling programmable control
functions.
F4 (function key):
Programmable function key for enabling or disabling programmable control
functions.
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN BUTTON:

Large red octagonal button on the front of the enclosure. This is an Emergency
Shutdown command for the control.
Watchdog Timer/CPU Fault Control

A watchdog timer and CPU fault circuit monitors the operation of the
microprocessor and microprocessor memory. If the microprocessor fails to reset
the timer within 15 milliseconds of the last reset, the CPU fault-control will
activate the reset output. This resets the CPU, de-energizes all relay outputs and
turns off all milliamp outputs.
16 Woodward
Chapter 2.
Installation Procedures
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions on how to mount and connect the 505 into a
system. Hardware dimensions, ratings, and jumper configurations are given to
allow a customer to mount, wire, and configure the 505 package to a specific
application.
Electrical ratings, wiring requirements, and options, are provided to allow a

customer to fully install the 505 into a new or existing application.
Mechanical Data and Hardware Installation

If so labeled on the enclosure, the 505 is UL/CUL listed for use in hazardous
locations in UL file E156028. This Equipment is suitable for use in Class I,
Division 2 , Groups A, B, C, and D (Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC) or non-hazardous
locations only.
The 505s are suitable for use in European Zone 2, Group II environments per
compliance with EN60079-15, Electrical apparatus for explosive atmospheres –
Type of protection ‘n’
identification.



Division 2.
Do not use any test points on the power supply or control boards
unless the area is known to be non-hazardous.

Ne pas utiliser les bornes d’essai du block d’alimentation
ou des cartes de commande à moins de se trouver dans un
emplacement non dangereux.
Woodward 17
Enclosures
Figure 2-1 shows 505 control layout and mounting pattern. The 505 digital control
is housed in a flush mount enclosure. This enclosure is designed for installation
within a control room panel or cabinet, and by itself, cannot be bulkhead-
mounted. The 505 package, once properly installed within a NEMA4X panel or
cabinet meets NEMA 4X ratings. A gasket is attached to the rear side of the
package’s bezel to properly seal the 505’s face-plate to a panel. All field wiring
connects to the 505 through removable terminal blocks located on the 505’s back
side.
The 505’s internal components are industrial grade. These components include
the CPU (central processing unit), its memory, the switching power supply, all
relays, all Input/Output circuitry, and all circuitry for the front panel display, touch
keypad, and the serial communications.
An optional NEMA-4X enclosure is available to allow the 505 to be bulkhead

mounted (Figure 2-2). The 505 digital control mounts on the front door of the
enclosure. This allows for easy service access through the enclosure’s front
door. This bulkhead mounted enclosure has two removable gland plates
attached to the bottom. A user may cut appropriately sized conduit openings (up
to 1.5”) as required, in the removable gland plates for wiring access. For EMI
reasons, it is recommend that all low-current wire (terminals 52 through 121) be
separated from all high-current wire (terminals 1 through 51).
Mounting
The standard 505 package must be mounted to allow sufficient room for wiring
access. Eight front panel screws permit secure mounting. The standard 505
weighs approximately 4 kg (9 lb), and has an operating range of –25 to +65 °C
ambient air temperature.
The optional enclosure permits the control to be bulkhead mounted. See Figure
2-2 for mounting dimensions. This enclosure weighs approximately 10 kg (22 lb),
and allows an operating range of –20 to +60 °C ambient air temperature.
505 Hardware Jumpers

To allow the 505 the flexibility of interfacing with different types of speed probes,
transducers, and communication cables, user changeable jumpers are used.
These jumpers are accessed by taking the 505’s back cover off and are located
on the I/O module. Refer to Table 2-1 for jumper options and Figure 2-4 for
jumper locations. Each set of jumpers is used to select between two or three
interface options for one circuit (see Figure 2-3). Of the three position jumper
options provided only one interface option at a time can be selected. Power
should be removed before the jumpers are accessed, and proper ESD
precautions should be taken before any contact is made with any part of the
circuit board.
18 Woodward
Figure 2-1. 505 Control Layout (Standard Enclosure)
Woodward 19
Figure 2-2. 505 Bulkhead-Mounted Enclosure
20 Woodward
Figure 2-3. Jumper Options
Figure 2-4. Jumper Locations
Woodward 21
Function Jumpers
SPEED SENSOR #1 MPU JPR7, JPR21 *
SPEED SENSOR #1 PROX. PROBE JPR6, JPR20
SPEED SENSOR #2 MPU JPR5, JPR19 *
SPEED SENSOR #2 PROX. PROBE JPR4, JPR18
ANALOG INPUT #1-LOOP POWERED-(2—WIRE) JPR10
ANALOG INPUT #1-SELF-POWERED JPR11 *
ANALOG INPUT #2—SELF-POWERED JPR9 *
ANALOG INPUT #3—SELF-POWERED JPR15 *
ANALOG INPUT #4—SELF—POWERED JPR13 *
ANALOG INPUT #5—SELF—POWERED JPR17 *
COMM PORT #1 NO TERMINATIONS JPR23, JPR26 *
COMM PORT #1 RS485/RS422 RECEIVE TERMINATION JPR22, JPR25
COMM PORT #1 RS422 TRANSMIT TERMINATION JPR24, JPR27
COMM PORT #2 NO TERMINATIONS JPR29, JPR32 *
COMM PORT #2 RS485/RS422 RECEIVE TERMINATION JPR28, JPR31
COMM PORT #2 RS422 TRANSMIT TERMINATION JPR30, JPR33
* = DEFAULT
Table 2-1. Jumper Options Chart
Electrical Connections
Refer to Figure 2-7 for a representative 505 I/O interface schematic, and Volume
2 of this manual, for hardware Input/Output specifications.
All inputs and outputs to the 505 are made through “CageClamp” terminal blocks
on the bottom of the 505 package. For EMI reasons, it is recommend that all low-
current wire (terminals 52 through 121) be separated from all high-current wire
(terminals 1 through 51).
The terminal blocks are screwless CageClamp style blocks. The spring clamp
can be actuated by using a standard 3 mm or 1/8in flat bladed screwdriver or a
snap-on thumb lever (Figure 2-5). Two snap-on thumb levers are provided with
the 505 unit. The 505 terminal blocks accept wires from 0.08–2.5 mm² (27–12
AWG) wire. Two 0.8 mm² (18 AWG) or three 0.5 mm² (20 AWG) wires can be
easily installed in each terminal.
The 505 control’s terminal blocks are designed to be removed by hand. After 505
input power is disconnected, the terminal blocks can be removed one at a time
by prying them off using ones finger tips. When removing a terminal block, never
pull on the wires connected to the terminal block.
Wires for the fixed mounted power terminals should be stripped 5–6 mm (0.22”)
long. Wire for the pluggable I/O terminals should be stripped 8–9 mm (0.33”)
long.
When a bulkhead enclosure is required, all electrical connections must be made

through the gland plates provided on the bottom of the bulkhead mount
enclosure to the terminal blocks inside. See Figure 2-2.
22 Woodward
Figure 2-5. CageClamp Terminal Blocks
Power Supplies
The 505 is available with three different input power source selections. The part
number of the 505 depends on the rating of the input power source it can accept.
The ratings of the required input power source on each unit can be identified by
the back panel sticker or control part number. The sticker will show the correct
source power ratings for each unit by a punched hole next to the rating. Refer to
Volume 2 for all power supply specifications.
The 505’s input power supply terminal blocks accept wires from 0.08–2.5 mm²
(27–12 AWG) wire. Internal fuses, in series with each input power trace, are used
to protect the 505’s input circuitry. All fuses are rated as slow-blow type fuses.
These fuses are accessed by taking the 505’s back cover off and are located on
its power supply module (bottom module). Refer to Figure 2-8 for fuse locations.
The ratings for the different sources of input power accepted by the 505 and the
505’s internal fuse sizes are listed as follows:
18–32 Vdc (6.25 A internal fuse, 77 VA maximum draw)

88–132 Vac @ 47–63 Hz
or 90–150 Vdc (2.5 A internal fuse, 143 VA maximum draw)
180–264 Vac @ 47–63 Hz (1.5 A internal fuse, 180 VA maximum draw)
Each 505 requires a power source capable of a certain output voltage and
current. In most cases this power rating is stated in Volt-Amps (VA). The
maximum VA of a source can be calculated by taking the rated output voltage
times the maximum output current at that voltage. This value should be greater
than or equal to the 505 VA requirement.
Woodward 23
Figure 2-6. Control Wiring Diagram
24 Woodward
Figure 2-7. Representative 505 I/O Schematic
Woodward 25
505 power supply holdup times are determined by the 505 power supply and
input power used. The below times are based on worse case conditions (88 Vac
with a possible range of 88–132 Vac when power is lost). These holdup times
should be used when the 505 is powered by an Uninterruptible Power Source
(UPS) to evaluate if the UPS’s switch over time is quick enough avoid a system
trip. A UPS’s switch-over time must be less than the below specified holdup
times:
Power Supply Holdup Times

18–32 Vdc Power Supply 14 milliseconds
88–132 Vac @ 47–63 Hz
or 90–150 Vdc Power Supply 30 milliseconds
180–264 Vac @ 47–63 Hz Power Supply 58 milliseconds
A 24 V power supply is available, within the 505, to power external transducers

or devices. This supply has two breaker protected output channels. One power
supply channel (VA1) is capable of providing 24 Vdc ±10%, @ 200 mA maximum
output current, to power 505 current inputs and auxiliary devices. Power
connections can be made through terminals 55, 59, 63, 70, and 74 with terminal
78 as the common. Refer to Figure 2-7.
The total current draw through terminals 55, 59, 63, 70, and 74 cannot
exceed 200 mA or the 505’s internal power supply breaker (CB1) will
open resulting in a possible CPU reset and trip condition. All load
must be removed from the specified terminals to allow the breaker to
reset.
The second power supply channel is capable of providing 24 Vdc ±10%, @ 200
mA maximum output current, to power 505 current outputs and auxiliary devices.
Power connections can be made through terminals 85, 88, 91, 97, 100, and 103
with terminal 78 as the common. Refer to Figure 2-7.
The total current draw through terminals 85, 88, 91, 97, 100 and 103
cannot exceed 200 mA or the 505’s internal power output breaker
(CB2) will open resulting in a possible CPU reset and trip condition.
All load must be removed from the specified terminals to allow the
breaker to reset.
Figure 2-8. Fuse location
26 Woodward
Shields and Grounding

An individual shield termination is provided at the terminal block for each of the
speed sensor inputs, actuator outputs, analog inputs, analog outputs, and
communications ports. All of these inputs should be wired using shielded,
twisted-pair wiring. The shields should be connected to earth ground at all
intermediate terminal blocks, as well as terminated at the control terminal block.
The exposed wire length, beyond the shield, should be limited to one inch. Relay
outputs, contact inputs, and power supply wiring do not normally require
shielding, but can be shielded if desired.
For EMI reasons, it is recommend that all low-current wire (terminals 52 through
121) be separated from all high-current wire (terminals 1 through 51). Input
Power ground terminal #3 should also be wired to external ground. Refer to
Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-9. Shielded Wire Connections
Speed Sensor Inputs

To sense speed, the control accepts signals from one or two passive magnetic
pickup units (MPUs) or active proximity probes mounted off of a gear which is
connected or coupled to the turbine’s rotor.
Because of the differences between passive MPUs, active proximity probes, and
the sensing circuits required for each type, jumpers are provided to allow field
configuration of each speed input depending on the type of probe used. See
Table 2-1 for jumper options, and Figure 2-4 for jumper locations. Verification of
jumper location is recommended before system startup or operation.
A passive MPU provides a frequency output signal corresponding to turbine

speed by sensing the movement of a gear’s teeth past the MPU’s pole piece.
The closer the MPU’s pole piece is to a gear’s teeth and the faster the gear turns
the higher a passive MPU’s output amplitude will be. The 505 must sense an
MPU voltage of 1 to 25 Vrms for proper operation.
With proper MPU, gear size, and MPU-to-gear clearance, speed measurement
should be capable down to 100 Hz. Standard MPU clearance is recommended to
be 0.25 to 1.02 mm (0.010 to 0.040”) from tooth face to pole piece. For
information on selecting the correct MPU or gear size please refer to Woodward
manual 82510. See Figure 2-7 for wiring schematic.
Woodward 27
A proximity probe may be used to sense very low speeds. With a proximity
probe, speed can be sensed down to 0.5 Hz. The input voltage must be between
16 and 28 Vdc for proper operation. The speed sensor input channels are
isolated, so either channel can be jumper configured for a MPU or proximity
probe. By being able to sense turbine speed down to this level, the 505 can be
programmed to turn on or off a turbine turning gear, via a relay output. See
Figure 2-7 for proximity probe wiring schematic.
It is not recommended that gears mounted on an auxiliary shaft coupled to the

turbine rotor be used to sense turbine speed. Auxiliary shafts tend to turn slower
than the turbine rotor (reducing speed sensing resolution) and have coupling
gear back-lash, resulting in less than optimum speed control. For safety
purposes it is also not recommend that the speed sensing device sense speed
from a gear coupled to a generator or mechanical drive side of a system’s rotor
coupling.
An application may use two of the same type of speed probes, or two different
types of speed probes (one MPU and one proximity probe). Both speed sensing
inputs use the same programmed gear ratio and number of teeth to calculate
speed, thus the speed probes used should sense speed from the same gear.
The 505 can be programmed to sense only one speed input signal. However, it is
recommended that the 505 be programmed to sense two speed inputs, and that
two speed probes be used with all applications to increase system reliability.
The speed signal that the 505 can accept must be within the
following limits:
(T x M x R)/60 must be < 15000 Hz
T = Gear Teeth
M = Overspeed Test Limit Setting
R = Gear Ratio
If the signal is not within these limits, the 505 will respond with a speed sensor
frequency error during the program checking procedure.
Contact Inputs
In general, contacts must change state for a minimum of 15 milliseconds for the
control to sense and register a change in state. All contact inputs accept dry
contacts. Contact wetting voltage is available through terminals 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
and 10. If desired, an external 18–26 Vdc power source can be used for the
circuit wetting voltage. In this case terminal 11 (contact input common) must be
connected to the external power source’s common to establish a common
reference point. Each contact input pulls 2.5 mA when closed and requires at
least 1 mA and 14 V to recognize a closure command. See Figures 2-6 and 2-7
for wiring information, and Volume 2 for input specifications.
The total current draw through terminals 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 cannot

exceed 100 mA or the 505’s internal power output breaker (CB5) will
open resulting in a possible CPU reset and trip condition. all load
must be removed from the specified terminals to allow the breaker to
reset.
28 Woodward
If the 16 contact inputs available, four have functions already assigned to them
(preset) and cannot be changed, the other 12 are user-configurable. The Preset
Contact Inputs are:
 External Emergency Shutdown
 External Reset
 Raise Speed Setpoint
 Lower Speed Setpoint
Before starting, the External Emergency Shutdown contact must have an

external switch wired in and closed or be jumpered closed. The control will
initiate an emergency shutdown any time the contact is opened. This input is
typically tied into the system’s trip string and provides trip feedback to the control.
The external reset contact can be used to remotely clear alarms and return the
control to the (Controlling Parameter/Push Run or Prgm) state after a shutdown.
The raise and lower speed setpoint contact inputs can be used to remotely raise
and lower speed or load.
Applications requiring external contact inputs must have the desired function
assigned or configured to a specific input. There is a choice of twelve possible
contact inputs and twenty-seven programmable functions. If the 505 is configured
for a generator application two of the contacts must be configured for the
Generator and Utility breaker inputs. The Generator Breaker contact must be
wired so it is closed when the generator breaker is closed. The Utility Tie Breaker
contact must be wired so it is closed when the utility tie breaker is closed.
Refer to Chapter 4 of this manual for a complete list of programmable contact

input functions.
Analog Inputs
Analog inputs # 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 may be used with two-wire ungrounded (loop
powered) transducers or isolated (self-powered) transducers. Jumpers are
available to match the analog input circuit to the transducer being interfaced with,
or the power supply common may be jumpered on the terminal block. Verification
of jumper location is recommended before system startup or operation. See
Table 2-1 for jumper options and Figure 2-4 for jumper locations.
Because inputs 1-5 are not fully isolated, care must be taken in their application
and maintenance to avoid “ground-loop” type problems. If interfacing to a non-
isolated device with one of these inputs, the use of a loop isolator is
recommended to break any return current paths, which could result in erroneous
readings.
Analog input # 6 is a fully isolated input and is designed to be used with a non-
isolated source such as a Distributed Control System (DCS). This input does not
use or have jumpers for hardware configuration options. Refer to Figure 2-7,
Option #1 for correct wiring configuration.
All six analog inputs are programmable, and have an input impedance of 200 .
Refer to Chapter 4 of this manual for a complete list of programmable analog
input options.
Woodward 29
Analog Outputs
Applications using a 505 current output must have the desired analog value
assigned or configured to a specific output. There is a choice of six possible 4–20
mA output drivers of which to use to display a parameter externally. Optionally, if
Actuator Driver #2 is not being utilized to drive an actuator, it can be programmed
to function as a 4–20 mA driver to display one of the values listed below. The
analog output connections for the 505 are shown in Figure 2-7. All 505 analog
outputs can drive into a maximum of 600 .
Refer to Chapter 4 of this manual for a complete list of programmable analog

output options.
Actuator Outputs
Two actuator outputs are available and programmable to interface with
Woodward Governor Company actuators (20–160 mA drive currents) or non-
Woodward actuators (4–20 mA drive currents).
Each actuator output can be individually configured to interface with Woodward

or non-Woodward type actuators. Actuator drive current is selected in the
Program Mode. Maximum impedance for each 4 to 20 mA actuator output driver
is 360  (actuator impedance + wire resistance). Maximum impedance for each
20 to 160 mA actuator output is 45  (actuator impedance + wire resistance).
Dither is available for either output.
Each actuator driver senses the drive current to allow over- and under-current
shutdowns. The 505 can be configured to use one or two actuators. If only one
actuator is used and programmed, it must be wired to actuator #1’s output
terminals. If two actuators are used they can be programmed to operate in a
staggered or parallel mode. If the “Actuator #2 Offset” percentage is set to 50%
then actuator #2 will begin opening when actuator #1 reaches 50%. The control
will continue to open both valves to 100% with a position difference of 50%. To
operate the two actuators in parallel set “Actuator #2 Offset” percentage to zero.
This will force both actuators to operate at the same level or in parallel.
Optionally, if actuator #2 driver is not used as an actuator output driver it can be

used as a 4–20 mA current output to drive a meter or DCS input. Refer to
Chapter 4 of this manual for a complete list of programmable analog output
options.
In addition, an eleven (11) point actuator linearization adjustment curve is

available through the Service Mode for each actuator output (see Service Mode
adjustments in volume 2).
Relay Outputs
There are eight relay outputs available from the 505. All relay contacts are Form
C type contacts.
For relay load ratings, refer to Appendix A in Volume 2.
30 Woodward
Before installation verify that the 505’s relay contacts meet the power
requirements of the circuit with which it is being interfaced.
Interposing relays are required, in cases where the interfaced circuit
demands relay contacts with a higher power rating. If interposing
relays are required, it is recommended that interposing relays with
surge (inductive kick-back) protection be used. Improper connection
could cause serious equipment damage.
Two of the eight relay outputs available are dedicated to a function and are as
follows:
 Alarm relay—energizes for any alarm condition
 Shutdown relay—de-energizes for any shutdown condition
The remaining six relays can be programmed to energize upon a function change
of state or an analog value level. Applications requiring programmable relay
outputs must have the desired switch condition, or specific analog value
assigned to them. Refer to Chapter 4 of this manual for a complete list of
programmable relay output options.
Serial Communications
There are three serial communications ports on the 505. Ports one and two are
for Modbus communications and can be configured for RS-232, RS-422, or RS-
485 communications. Figures 2-10, 11, and 12, show the communications port
connections for ports #1, and #2. Ports one and two are accessed though
terminal blocks located on the 505’s back side. RS-422 and RS-485
communication lines can function up to a length of 4000 feet Refer to the Modbus
section of this manual for a list of all the commands and parameters available
through ports one and two. The third port, utilizing a 9-pin Sub-D connector, is
dedicated for uploading and downloading unit configuration values at the factory.
The Program Mode can not be accessed through the communication ports.
Program configuration must be done from the keypad on the front of the control.
Modbus Wiring
The 505 control can communicate to two devices via RS-232, RS-422, RS-485
using an ASCII or RTU Modbus transmission protocol. The communications port
is brought out to terminal blocks for wiring. Each communications mode is wired
to different terminals. The following sections identify the terminal landings
required for each mode.
RS-232 Wiring
A RS-232 link is limited to a distance of 50 feet. The 505 control utilizes terminal
blocks 114-117 and 106-109 for RS-232 connections. Figure 2-10 shows typical
RS-232 communications connection. The transmit data (TXD), receive data
(RXD), and signal ground (SIG GND) must be properly connected as shown. In
addition the shield (SHLD) should be connected in at least one location..
Woodward 31
Figure 2-10. Typical RS-232 Communications
RS-422 Wiring
An advantage of RS-422 communications is that it uses a differential voltage and
can accommodate much longer transmission distances. A RS-422 link can
communicate up to a distance of 4000 feet. The 505 control utilizes terminal
blocks 108-113 and 116-121 for RS-422 connections. Figure 2-11 shows a
typical RS-422 communications connection. The transmit data pairs (422T+ and
422T-), receive data pairs (422R+ and 422R-), and signal ground (SIG GND)
must be properly connected as shown. In addition, the shield (SHLD) should be
connected in at least one location. The last unit in the Modbus network chain,
and only the last unit, should have it’s receiver terminated with a resistor. The
505 control has termination resistors built-in. See the jumper option chart (Table
2-1) to connect the termination resistor..
32 Woodward
RS-485 Wiring
RS-485 communications can also accommodate transmission distances of up to
a distance of 4000 feet. The 505 control utilizes terminal blocks 108-111 and
116-119 for RS-485 connections. Figure 2-12 shows a typical RS- 485
communications connection. The data lines (422R+/485+ and 422R-/485-) and
signal ground (SIG GND) must be properly connected as shown. In addition, the
shield (SHLD) should be connected in at least one location. The last unit in the
Modbus network chain, and only the last unit, should have it’s receiver
terminated with a resistor. The 505 control has termination resistors built-in. See
the jumper option chart (Table 2-1) to connect the termination resistor.
Communications Grounding and Shielding

All three 505 communications ports are fully isolated from earth ground. The RS-422
and RS-485 specifications state that a ground wire is needed if there is no other ground
path between units. the preferred method to do this for isolated ports is to include a
separate wire in the ground cable that connects the circuit grounds together. Connect
the shield to earth ground in at least one location, see Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13. Preferred Multipoint Wiring with a Separate Signal Ground Wire
Woodward 33
Non-isolated nodes may not have a signal ground available. If signal ground is
not available, use the alternate wiring scheme as shown in Figure 2-14. The
alternate way is to connect all circuit grounds of isolated nodes to the shield, and
then connect the shield to earth ground at a non-isolated node.
Figure 2-14. Alternate Multipoint Wiring without a Separate Signal Ground Wire
34 Woodward
Chapter 3.
505 Control Description
Introduction
The 505 uses a digital Low Signal Select (LSS) bus to allow the lowest of three
signals to position the turbine’s governor valve. The three signals available to
control governor valve position, are a Speed PID output, a programmable
Auxiliary PID output, and a valve limiter output. The output of the LSS directly
sets the actuator output current.
Figure 3-1. Basic Control Overview
Turbine Start
The 505 has three turbine start modes (manual, semi-automatic or automatic)
from which to choose from. One of these start modes must be chosen and
programmed to perform a system startup. Once a ‘RUN’ command is issued, the
speed setpoint and valve limiter are manipulated automatically by the 505 or
manually by the operator, depending on which start mode is selected. After a
turbine start has been completed, turbine speed will be controlled at a minimum
controlling speed. The minimum controlling speed may be idle if idle/rated is
being used, low idle if the auto start sequence is used, or minimum governor if
neither idle/rated or auto start sequence is used.
Woodward 35
A ‘RUN’ command may be issued from the 505 keypad, an external contact, or
through Modbus communications. If an ‘External Run’ contact is programmed, a
‘RUN’ command is issued when the contact is closed. If the contact is closed
prior to start-up it must be opened and re-closed to issue a ‘RUN’ command.
If turbine speed is sensed when a ‘RUN’ command is issued, the control will
instantly match the speed setpoint to the sensed speed and continue towards the
minimum controlling speed. In the event the sensed turbine speed is greater than
the minimum controlling speed setting, the speed setpoint will match this sensed
speed, the Speed PID will control at this point, and the control will wait for further
action to be taken by the operator (unless auto start sequence is configured). If the
turbine speed is first sensed within a critical speed avoidance band when ‘Run’ is
selected, the speed setpoint will match the actual speed and increase to the upper
end of the critical avoidance band and wait for action to be taken by the operator.
Start Permissive
An external contact may be used as a turbine startup permissive. When
programmed for this functionality, the contact input must be closed in order for a
‘RUN’ command to be executed. Should the contact be open when a ‘RUN’
command is given, an alarm will be issued and the 505 display will indicate that
the start permissive was not met (Start Perm Not Met). The alarm does not need
to be cleared but the contact must be closed before the 505 will accept the ‘RUN’
command. After ‘RUN’ has been accepted, the start permissive contact will have
no effect on operation. If used, this input is typically connected to a Trip &
Throttle valve’s closed limit switch to verify that it is in the closed position before
a turbine startup is performed.
Zero Speed Signal Override

The 505 issues a shutdown if no speed signal is detected (magnetic pickup
voltage less than 1 Vrms or speed is less than the ‘Failed Speed Level’). To allow
the control to start with speed not being sensed, this shutdown logic must be
overridden. The control can be configured to provide a manual or an automatic
speed override. For added protection, a timed limit on the override is available.
The status of the MPU override logic may be viewed in the Service mode or
through Modbus communications. The override logic applies to both passive and
active speed probes.
Manual Speed Override

If the ‘Override MPU Fault’ function is assigned to a contact input, the loss-of- speed
detection logic is overridden as long as this contact is closed; until the maximum time
expires. Opening the assigned contact input, disables the override logic, and re-arms
the loss-of-speed detection circuit. Once re-armed, a system shutdown is executed if
the sensed speed drops below the ‘Failed Speed Level’ setting.
A maximum override time limit is provided as an extra level of protection, in the

event the contact input is left closed. A ten minute maximum time limit is applied
to a Manual override command (as defaulted in the Service Mode). This time
starts when the RUN command is initiated and re-arms the loss-of-speed
detection when the time expires. The 505 will execute a system shutdown if
turbine speed isn’t above the ‘Failed Speed Level’ setting when the time expires.
36 Woodward
Automatic Speed Override

If the Manual Speed Override option is not programmed, the Automatic Speed
Override logic is used by the 505 to override the loss-of-speed signal shutdown
during a turbine startup. With the Automatic Override logic, the loss-of-speed
signal failure is armed when the turbine trips and remains armed until the sensed
turbine speed exceeds the programmed (‘Failed Speed Level’ setting + 250 rpm).
Once turbine speed exceeds this level, the loss of speed detection circuit is re-
armed and the control will execute a system shutdown if sensed speed drops
below the ‘Failed Speed Level’ setting.
For added protection, a timed limit is available on the automatic speed override
function. The timed speed override timer deactivates the loss-of-speed override
logic after the programmed time expires. If programmed, this timer starts
counting down once a ‘RUN’ command has been issued. This timer when
programmed provides an extra level of protection, in the event both speed input
probes are failed when the unit is started. This timer may be programmed in the
505’s Service mode.
Turbine Start Modes

Manual Start Mode
The following startup procedure is employed when the Manual start mode is
configured:
1. Issue a RESET command (to reset all alarms and shutdowns)
2. Issue a RUN command (verify T&T valve is closed before issuing)
 At this point the 505 will ramp open the governor valve to its maximum
position at the ‘Valve Limiter Rate’.
 The speed setpoint will ramp from zero to the minimum controlling
speed setting at the ‘Rate To Min’ rate.
3. Open Trip & Throttle valve at a controlled rate
 When turbine speed increases to the minimum controlling speed, the
505’s Speed PID will take control of turbine speed by controlling turbine
inlet valve position.
4. Open Trip & Throttle valve to 100%
 Speed remains controlled at the minimum controlling point until action is
taken by the operator or the ‘Auto Start Sequence’, if programmed,
begins controlling.
The ‘Limiter Max Limit’, ‘Valve Limiter Rate’ and ‘Rate To Min’ settings are
tunable in the Service mode.
The trip-and-throttle valve must be closed before pushing the ‘RUN’

key in Manual Start mode. If a RUN command is given while the trip-
and-throttle valve is open, there exists a possibility of turbine
runaway with resultant serious injury or loss of life.
Woodward 37
100% VALVE LIMITER
TRIP & THROTTLE

VALVE
SPEED
ACTUATOR
Operator Must Throttle

Open Trip & Throttle Valve
0%
START SPEED TIME
COMMAND CONTROL
Figure 3-2. Manual Start Mode Example
Semiautomatic Start Mode

The following startup procedure is employed when the Semiautomatic start mode
is configured:
2. Open the Trip & Throttle valve (verify that the turbine does not accelerate)
3. Issue a RUN command
 At this point the speed setpoint will ramp from zero to the minimum
controlling speed setting at the ‘Rate to Min’ rate.
4. Raise the 505’s VALVE LIMITER at a controlled rate.
 When turbine speed increases to the minimum controlling speed, the
505’s Speed PID will take control of turbine speed by controlling turbine
inlet valve position.
5. Raise the 505’s VALVE LIMITER to 100%.
taken by the operator or the ‘AUTO START SEQUENCE’, if
programmed, begins controlling.
The valve limiter will open at the ‘Valve Limiter Rate’ and may be moved using
the 505 keypad, external contacts or Modbus communications. The ‘Limiter Max
Limit’, ‘Valve Limiter Rate’ and ‘Rate To Min’ settings are tunable in the Service
mode.
38 Woodward
100%
TRIP & THROTTLE VALVE LIMITER

VALVE
SPEED
ACTUATOR
Operator Must Manually

Raise Valve Limiter
0%
START SPEED TIME
COMMAND CONTROL
Figure 3-3. Semiautomatic Start mode Example
Automatic Start Mode

The following startup procedure is employed when the Automatic start mode is
configured:
2. Open the Trip & Throttle valve (verify that the turbine does not accelerate)
3. Issue a RUN command
 At this point the 505 will ramp open the governor valve to its maximum
position at the ‘Valve Limiter Rate’ setting.
 The speed setpoint will ramp to the minimum controlling speed setting at
the ‘Rate to MIN’ rate.
 When turbine speed increases and matches the ramping speed
setpoint, the 505’s Speed PID will take control of turbine speed by
controlling turbine inlet valve position.
taken by the operator or the ‘Auto Start Sequence’, if programmed,
begins controlling.
The ‘Limiter Max Limit’, ‘Valve Limiter Rate’ and ‘Rate To Min’ settings are
tunable in the Service mode. The automatic start routine may be aborted at any
time by issuing valve limiter raise or lower commands, or an emergency
shutdown.
Woodward 39
100%
TRIP & THROTTLE VALVE LIMITER

VALVE
SPEED
ACTUATOR
0%
START SPEED TIME
COMMAND CONTROL
Figure 3-4. Automatic Start Mode Example
Critical Speed Avoidance

In many turbines, it is desirable to avoid certain speeds or speed ranges (or pass
through them as quickly as possible) due to excessive turbine vibration or other
factors. During programming, two critical speed ranges may be configured. The
Idle/Rated or Auto Start Sequence function must be programmed to perform
critical speed avoidance.
The speed setpoint cannot be stopped in the critical band. If a Raise/Lower

Speed Setpoint command is issued while in a critical band, the speed setpoint
will ramp up or down (depending on raise or lower command) to the extent of the
critical range. Since the lower speed setpoint has priority over a raise setpoint,
issuing a lower command while increasing through the band will reverse the
setpoint direction and return it to the lower limit of the band. If a lower speed
setpoint command is given while in a critical band, turbine speed must reach the
bottom of the band before another command can be executed.
A speed setpoint value cannot be directly entered (with the ENTER key) within
the programmed critical speed band settings. In the event this is attempted, an
error message will appear on the 505 front panel display.
If another controlling parameter, besides the Speed PID, drives the turbine’s
speed into a critical band for longer than five seconds, the speed setpoint will
instantly go to the idle setting and an alarm will occur (Stuck in Critical).
During a startup routine if the Speed PID cannot accelerate the unit though a
programmed band within a calculated length of time, a “Stuck in Critical” alarm
will be issued and the speed setpoint will instantly return to idle. The “calculated
length of time” is a value of five times the length of time it should normally take to
accelerate through the band (based on the “Critical Speed Rate” setting). If the
“Stuck in Critical” alarm occurs on a regular basis, it may be indicating that the
“Critical Speed Rate” is set too fast for the turbine to respond to.
40 Woodward
Critical speed bands are defined in the Program mode under the SPEED
SETPOINT VALUES header. All critical speed band settings must be set below
the ‘Min Governor Speed Setpoint’. A configure error will occur if an idle setpoint
is programmed within a critical speed band. The rate in which the speed setpoint
moves through a critical speed band is set by the ‘Critical Speed Rate’ setting.
The ‘Critical Speed Rate’ setting should be set at but no higher than the turbine’s
rated maximum acceleration rate.
Idle/Rated
The 505 is equipped with an Idle/Rated function which allows the 505 to
automatically ramp turbine speed to the application’s Rated speed setting. When
deselected, the turbine speed ramps down to the application’s Idle speed setting
(as defaulted in the Service Mode).
The Idle/Rated function can be used with any 505 start mode (manual,
semiautomatic, automatic). When a RUN command is issued, the speed setpoint
will ramp from zero rpm up to and hold at the ‘Idle Setpt’ setting. When a ramp-
to-rated command is given, the speed setpoint ramps to the ‘Rated Setpt’ setting
at the ‘Idle/Rated Rate’. While ramping to a Rated speed, the setpoint can be
stopped by a raise or lower speed command or a valid entered speed setpoint.
The 505 will inhibit a ramp-to-idle speed or ramp-to-rated speed command, if the
Generator Breaker is closed, Remote Speed Setpoint is enabled, Cascade PID is
in control, or the Auxiliary PID is in control (as defaulted in the Service Mode).
Alternatively, the 505’s ‘Idle Priority’ and ‘Use Ramp to Idle Function’ Service
mode settings can be configured to change the defaulted idle/rated logic.
Ramp to Rated Feature

The Idle/Rated function can be changed to a “Ramp to Rated” function (see
Service Mode). With this configuration, the speed setpoint holds at the idle speed
setting until a Ramp-to-Rated command is given. Upon command the speed
setpoint will accelerate to the Rated speed setpoint, however, it will not ramp
back to the idle speed setting. When Rated is de-selected, the speed setpoint
stops as opposed to returning to Idle. When this configuration is used, there is no
Ramp- to-Idle option; it is not used.
If Rated is de-selected while in a critical speed avoidance band (using Ramp to

Rated only feature), the speed setpoint will stop at the top end of the avoidance
band. If the Ramp to Rated function is stopped/halted using a raise or lower
speed setpoint command, the setpoint will continue to the upper limit of the band
if a Raise command was used or will reverse direction to the lower limit of the
band if a Lower command was used.
If Idle is selected while in a critical speed avoidance band (not using Ramp to
Rated only feature), the speed setpoint will return to the Idle setpoint, continuing
to move at the critical avoidance rate while within the band. The speed setpoint
cannot be stopped within a critical speed avoidance band. Attempting to stop the
ramp to rated while in a critical band will continue the speed setpoint to the upper
limit of the band if a Raise command was used or will reverse direction to the
lower limit of the band if a Lower command was used.
Woodward 41
Figure 3-5. Idle/Rated Start
A Ramp-to-Idle speed or Ramp-to-Rated speed command may be selected from

the 505 keypad, contact input, or Modbus communications. The last command
given from any of these three sources dictates the function performed.
If a 505 contact input is programmed to select between Idle or Rated speeds, Idle
speed is selected when the contact is open and rated speed is selected when it
is closed. The Idle/Rated contact can be either open or closed when a trip
condition is cleared. If the contact is open, it must be closed to initiate a Ramp-to-
Rated speed. If the contact is closed, it must be opened and re-closed to initiate
a Ramp- to-Rated speed.
When the turbine is used for mechanical drive applications, rated speed may be
set at the minimum governor speed setting. When the turbine is used to drive a
generator, the ‘rated speed’ setting may be set at or between the minimum
governor and synchronous speed settings.
All pertinent Idle/Rated parameters are available through the Modbus links, refer
to Chapter 6 for a complete listing.
Automatic Start Sequence
This function is not the same as the ‘AUTOMATIC START MODE’.

The Automatic Start Sequence can be used with any one of the three
start modes.
42 Woodward
The 505 can be configured to utilize an Automatic Start Sequence to start the
turbine. This sequencing logic allows the 505 to perform a complete controlled
system startup from zero speed to rated speed. With this function, the turbine’s
starting ramp rates and idle speed hold times depend on the length of time the
unit was shutdown. This sequence logic may be used with any of the three start
modes (manual, semiautomatic, automatic), and is initiated by a ‘RUN’
command.
With this function, when a ‘RUN’ command is given, the Automatic Start
Sequence ramps the speed setpoint to a low idle setpoint, holds at this setting for
a duration, ramps the speed setpoint to a high idle setpoint, holds at this setting
for a duration, then ramps the speed setpoint to a rated speed setting. All ramp
rates and hold times are programmable for both hot start and cold start
conditions. The control differentiates between hot and cold starts by using a
hours-since-trip timer. This timer starts when a shutdown has been executed and
turbine speed has decreased below the low idle speed setting.
Figure 3-6. Automatic Start Sequence
With this sequence, a set of hot-start ramp rates and hold times is programmed
for use when a ‘RUN’ command is given and the turbine has been shutdown for
less than the programmed ‘HOT START’ time setting. A set of cold-start ramp
rates and hold times is also programmed for use when a ‘RUN’ command is
given and the turbine has been shutdown for longer than the programmed ‘COLD
START’ time setting.
If a turbine ‘RUN’ command is given when the length of time the system has
been shutdown is between the ‘HOT START’ and ‘COLD START’ time settings,
the control will interpolate between the hot and cold programmed start values to
determine starting rates and hold times.
Woodward 43
For example, if the unit had the following Automatic Start Sequence settings:
COLD START ( > xx HRS) = 22 HRS
HOT START ( < xx HRS) =2 HRS
LOW IDLE SETPT = 1000 rpm
LOW IDLE DELAY (COLD) = 30 MIN
LOW IDLE DELAY (HOT) = 10 MIN
HI IDLE SETPT = 2000 rpm
RATE TO HI IDLE (COLD) =5 rpm/sec
RATE TO HI IDLE (HOT) = 15 rpm/sec
HI IDLE DELAY TIME (COLD) = 20 MIN
HI IDLE DELAY TIME (HOT) = 30 MIN
RATE TO RATED (COLD) = 10 rpm/sec
RATE TO RATED (HOT) = 20 rpm/sec
RATED SETPT = 3400 rpm
If the unit was tripped for 12 hours, the 505 would interpolate between the Hot
and Cold parameters and use the following rates and delays (viewed in the
Service Mode):
LOW IDLE DELAY = 20 MIN
RATE TO HI IDLE = 10 rpm/sec
HI IDLE DELAY = 10 MIN
RATE TO RATED = 15 rpm/sec
HOURS SINCE TRIP = 12 HOURS
Based on the example’s configuration and trip time, the speed setpoint would
ramp to 1000 rpm at the ‘Rate to Min’ setting and hold for 20 minutes, move to
2000 rpm at 10 rpm/sec and hold there for 10 minutes, and lastly, move to 3400
at 15 rpm/sec. At 3400 rpm, the sequence would be completed.
If the unit was tripped for 2 hours or less and restarted, the 505 would use the
Hot Start parameters. If the unit was tripped for 22 hours or longer and restarted,
the 505 would use the Cold Start parameters. . The ‘Hours since Trip’ timer starts
counting when the unit shuts down and the speed has coasted down below the
low idle speed setting.
The 505 will automatically set the hours-since-trip timer to its

maximum setting of 200 hours to ensure a cold start is selected after
a power up or upon exiting the Program mode. The hours-since-trip
timer will reset only when the turbine speed has increased above the
minimum governor speed setting.
The Auto Start Sequence can be halted at any time from the 505 keypad, contact
input or through Modbus. The sequence can be halted by a halt command, a
raise or lower speed setpoint command, or when a speed setpoint is directly
‘Entered’ from the 505 keypad or through Modbus communications. When the
sequence is halted, the delay timers do not stop if they have already started
counting down. The sequence will resume when a ‘Continue’ command is issued.
If there were 15 minutes remaining to hold at an idle speed and the Halt
command was issued for 10 minutes before a issuing a Continue command, the
sequence would remain at the idle speed for the remainder of the ‘Hold Time’—
which in this example is 5 minutes.
The halting and continuing of the Auto Start Sequence can be performed through
the 505 keypad, contact input, or Modbus. The last command given from any of
these three sources determines the mode of operation. However, a shutdown
condition will disable this function, requiring it to be re-enabled after a start-up
has been performed.
44 Woodward
If a 505 contact input is programmed to function as an Halt/Continue command,
the sequence is halted when the contact is open, and continued when the
contact is closed. The Halt contact can be either open or closed when a Reset
command is given. If the contact is closed, it must be opened to allow the
sequence to be halted. If the contact is open, it must be closed and reopened to
issue a halt command. Alternatively, a relay can be programmed to indicate
when the Auto Start Sequence is halted.
An option is available to automatically halt the auto start sequence at the idle
setpoints. This feature would result in the unit automatically stopping or halting at
the low idle setpoint and at the high idle setpoint. If the unit is started and the
speed is above the low idle setpoint, the sequence will initialize as halted. The
sequence must be given a ‘Continue’ command once halted. The hold timers are
still active with this option. If ‘Continue’ is selected and the hold timer has not
expired, the sequence will remain in a timed wait until the hold timer has expired
and then continue from that point.
When the ‘Auto Halt at Idle Setpts’ option is programmed, the Auto Start
Sequence Continue contact input only requires a momentary closure to continue
the sequence.
No Idle Programmed
If neither the Idle/Rated or Auto Start Sequence functions are programmed, the
speed setpoint will ramp from zero to the minimum governor setpoint at the ‘Rate
To Min’ setting rate. Critical speed bands cannot be programmed with this
configuration.
Speed Control Overview

Turbine speed is sensed through one or two MPUs or proximity probes. The
‘MPU Gear Ratio’ and the ‘Teeth Seen By MPU’ settings are configured to allow
the 505 to calculate actual turbine speed. One MPU and one proximity probe can
be used at the same time, however, they must be mounted on the same gear
since the ‘gear ratio’ and ‘teeth seen by the MPU’ must be the same for both
inputs. The Speed PID (proportional, integral, derivative control amplifier) then
compares this signal to the its setpoint to generate an output signal to the
governor valve actuator (through a low signal select bus).
The 505 is factory set (jumpers installed) to interface with passive

MPUs, if proximity probes are used, the jumpers must be changed
(see Chapter 2 for jumper options).
Woodward 45
Figure 3-7. Speed Control Functional Diagram
Speed PID Operational Modes

The Speed PID operates in one of the following modes, depending on
configuration and system conditions:
1. Speed Control
2. Frequency Control
3. Unit Load Control (droop)
 Turbine inlet valve position (505 LSS position) control
 Generator Load control
When not programmed for generator applications, the 505 Speed PID operates
in a Speed control mode at all times. When programmed for generator
applications, the state of the generator and utility tie breakers determine the
operational mode of the Speed PID. When the Generator breaker contact is
open, the Speed PID operates in a Speed control mode. When the generator
breaker is closed and the utility tie breaker is open, the Frequency control mode
is selected. When both the generator and utility tie breakers are closed, a Unit
Load control mode is selected.
46 Woodward
Speed Control
While in the Speed Control mode, the Speed PID will control a turbine at the
same speed or frequency regardless of the load it is supplying (up to the unit’s
load capability). With this configuration, no form of droop or second controlling
parameter is used by the PID for stability or control. Refer to Figure 3-6.
The following Speed PID mode descriptions are based on the 505 program’s
default settings. For information on how to change the 505’s defaulted breaker
logic, refer to Volume 2 of this manual. All pertinent speed control parameters are
available through Modbus communications. See Chapter 6 for a list of all Modbus
parameters.
Figure 3-8. Speed PID Control Modes
Woodward 47
Frequency Control
The following Frequency Control mode descriptions are based on the 505
program’s default settings. For information on how to change the 505’s defaulted
breaker logic, refer to Volume 2 of this manual.
The Speed PID operates in the Frequency control mode when the generator
breaker is closed and the utility tie breaker is open. In the Frequency control
mode, the unit will operate at the same speed or frequency regardless of the load
it is supplying (up to the unit’s load capability). Refer to Figure 3-5.
When breaker positions result in the Speed PID switching to Frequency control,
the speed setpoint is instantly stepped to the last turbine speed (frequency)
sensed before Frequency control was selected. This allows a bumpless transfer
between modes. If the last speed sensed was not at the ‘Rated Speed Setpoint’
(synchronous speed) setting, the speed setpoint will ramp to the ‘Rated Speed
Setpoint’ setting at a defaulted rate of 1 rpm/sec (tunable through the Service
mode).
In the Frequency control mode the speed setpoint can be varied with the Speed
Setpoint Raise/Lower commands, as desired, to allow manual synchronization
across a tie breaker to an infinite bus. See the Synchronization section in this
Chapter.
For indication purposes, a relay can be programmed to energize when the unit is
in Frequency control.
Unit Load Control

The 505’s Speed PID can control two independent parameters when the
generator breaker is closed; frequency when the generator is isolated, and unit
load when the generator is paralleled with an infinite bus. When the generator
breaker and utility tie breaker inputs are both closed, the Speed PID operates in
a Unit Load mode. This method of allowing a PID to control a second parameter
is referred to as Droop.
Giving the Speed PID two parameters to control allows it to control unit load and
act as a stabilizing effect for any change in bus frequency. With this
configuration, when bus frequency decreases or increases, unit load increases
and decreases respectively, based on the unit’s droop setting. The net effect is a
more stable bus. See Figure 3-6 for a frequency and load relationship diagram.
The term “droop” was derived from an isolated unit’s speed reaction to an
increase in load when another parameter (unit load) is fed back to a Speed PID’s
summing junction. The Droop term, as used throughout this manual refers to a
PID’s second controlling parameter. A second parameter representing unit load
is fed back into the 505’s Speed PID to allow it to control two parameters; speed
when operating in an isolated mode, and unit load when paralleled to an infinite
bus. See Figure 3-5.
48 Woodward
Figure 3-9. Frequency and Unit Load Relationship
Because the 505’s Speed PID and setpoint are used to control turbine speed and
a second parameter, this second parameter (unit load) is normalized to allow all
three terms (speed, setpoint, unit load) to be summed together within the PID
summing junction. This normalization is based on a percentage of rated speed
and creates a direct relationship between unit load and the Speed PID’s setpoint.
Once unit load (0-100%) is represented as a percent of rated speed, the speed
setpoint can be varied by this percent, above rated speed, to increase load from
0- 100% when paralleled to the utility. Unit load is converted to a percentage of
rated speed as shown in the following example calculation:
DROOP % x (gen load or valve position-%) x Rated Speed = Speed

Setpoint change in rpm
Example: 5% x 100% x 3600 rpm = 180 rpm
For this example when paralleled to a utility bus, the speed setpoint can be
adjusted from 3600 rpm to 3780 rpm to vary unit load from 0 to 100%.
Droop feedback allows the Speed PID to control unit load (generator power or
turbine valve position) once it is paralleled with a utility bus or other generating
systems which do not have droop or loadsharing capability. When a turbine
generator set is paralleled with a utility bus, the utility determines the unit
frequency/speed, thus the governor must control another parameter. The 505
uses turbine inlet valve position (LSS bus position) or generator load as a second
parameter to control when paralleled to an infinite bus.
Woodward 49
It is recommended that a Woodward Real Power Sensor or equivalent watt
transducer be used to sense generator load and feed it back to the 505’s KW
input for KW droop control. However, if KW droop is not used or programmed,
the 505 uses its LSS bus position to represent or sense turbine inlet valve
position when paralleled with an infinite bus. If while controlling generator load,
the KW input signal fails the 505 will issue an alarm and revert to turbine inlet
valve position to control from.
The generator load or turbine inlet valve position droop percentage cannot be set
greater that 10%, and is typically set to 5%.
To configure the 505 for generator load control when paralleled to a infinite bus,
program the ‘KW DROOP’ setting to ‘YES’, and program the 505 to accept an
analog input from a Watt transducer sensing generator load.. To configure the
505 for turbine valve position control when paralleled to an infinite bus, program
the KW DROOP setting to ‘NO’. The generator load or turbine inlet valve position
droop percentage cannot be set greater that 10%, and is typically set to 5%.
If the 505 is programmed to control unit load using turbine inlet valve position
droop (LSS bus position), the 505 calculates load based on the valve position at
the time the generator breaker was closed. This valve position is considered to
be zero load. In a typical application where turbine inlet and exhaust pressures
are at rated levels when the generator breaker is closed, this type of calculation
allows unit load to be accurately sensed, and controlled.
However, in an application where turbine inlet or exhaust pressures are not at

rated levels when the generator breaker is closed, the considered zero load level
will be incorrect when system pressures do reach rated levels. With this type of
application it is recommended that the Minimum Load setpoint not be used. To
disable the use of the Minimum Load Setpoint, configure the ‘Use Min Load’
setting (under the Service mode’s ‘BREAKER LOGIC’ header) to ‘No’.
Speed Setpoint
The Speed PID’s setpoint may be adjusted from the 505 keypad, external
contacts, Modbus commands, or through a 4–20 mA analog input. A specific
setpoint setting can also be directly entered through the 505 keypad or Modbus
communications. The Cascade PID also directly controls this setpoint when it is
used.
The Speed PID’s setpoint may be adjusted a variety of ways. It can be adjusted
up or down from the 505 keypad, external contacts, or through Modbus
commands. It can be directly entered to a specific value from the 505 keypad or
through Modbus commands. It can be remotely set by the Remote Speed
Setpoint analog input or it can be manipulated by the Cascade controller to
control the cascade input parameter.
The speed setpoint range must be defined in the program mode. Program
settings ‘Min Governor Speed Setpoint’ and ‘Max Governor Speed Setpoint’
define the normal operating speed range of the turbine. The speed setpoint
cannot be raised above ‘Max Governor Speed Setpoint’ setting unless an
Overspeed Test is performed. Once the speed setpoint is taken above the ‘Min
Governor Speed Setpoint’ setting, it cannot be varied below this setting again
unless the Idle/Rated ramp-to-Idle command is selected or a Controlled Stop is
selected.
50 Woodward
Figure 3-10. Speed Relationships
Once turbine speed is equal to or greater than the ‘Min Governor Speed Setpoint’
setting, the speed setpoint may be adjusted through discrete raise and lower
commands. When a raise or lower speed command is issued, the setpoint moves
at the programmed ‘Speed Setpoint Slow Rate’. If a speed raise/lower command
is selected for longer than three seconds, the speed setpoint will then move at
the fast rate which is three times the speed setpoint slow rate. The speed
setpoint slow rate, fast rate delay, and fast rate can all be adjusted in the Service
mode.
The shortest length of time a setpoint will move for an accepted raise or lower
command is 40 milliseconds (120 milliseconds for a Modbus command). If the
speed setpoint slow rate is programmed for 10 rpm/sec, the smallest increment it
will move is 0.4 rpm (1.2 rpm for Modbus).
The speed setpoint may be set to a specific level, by directly entering a setpoint
value through the 505 keypad or Modbus communications. To “enter” a specific
setpoint from the 505 keypad, press the SPEED key to view the speed control
screen, press the ENTER key, enter the setpoint level desired, then press the
ENTER key again. If a valid number was entered, the setting will be accepted
and the Speed setpoint will ramp to the “entered” setpoint level. If an invalid
number is “entered” the setting will not be accepted and the 505’s screen will
momentarily display a value out-of-range message. When a valid setpoint value
is entered, the setpoint will ramp at the speed setpoint slow rate to the newly
entered setpoint value. This ‘Entered’ rate is tunable through the Service mode.
When using the ENTER key from the front panel keypad, the 505 checks the
validity of the new entered setpoint. The speed setpoint must be below the
maximum governor setting and above the idle setting and not within a critical
speed avoidance band. Once the speed setpoint is above the minimum governor
setting, the setpoint cannot be lowered below minimum governor. Also, if the unit
is driving a generator and the unit is on-line, the speed setpoint cannot be set
below the minimum load setting. The minimum load setting is defaulted to 5 rpm
above the isochronous speed setpoint (changeable in the Service Mode).
The speed setpoint can also be directly entered from either of the Modbus links,
however, the allowed range is between the minimum governor and the maximum
governor speed settings. The allowed setpoint range is limited to between the
minimum load and the maximum governor settings if the unit is driving a
generator and the unit is on-line.
Woodward 51
When the 505 is configured for a generator application, a special speed setpoint
rate (Sync Window Rate) is used to increase setpoint resolution around
synchronous speed. This allows for tighter setpoint control to accommodate
synchronizing manually or by an automatic synchronizer which interfaces to the
505 discretely. This Sync Window Rate is defaulted to two rpm/sec and is only
used when the generator breaker is open and the speed setpoint is within 10 rpm
of rated speed. Both the synchronizing rate and the synchronizing window are
tunable in the Service mode.
When configured for generator applications a Minimum Load setpoint is used by

the 505 to reduce the chance of reverse powering a unit upon closing the
generator breaker. With the utility tie breaker closed, when a generator breaker
closed indication is received, the Speed setpoint is stepped to the Minimum Load
setting. The Minimum Load setting is defaulted to 3% (changeable in the Service
Mode). To disable the use of the Minimum Load Setpoint, configure the ‘Use Min
Load’ setting (under the Service mode’s ‘BREAKER LOGIC’ header) to ‘No’.
See Chapter 6 for a list of all speed setpoint related Modbus parameters.
Frequency Arm/Disarm
The Frequency Arm/Disarm feature can be used only when loadsharing is not
being performed, to allow multiple units to operate on the same isolated bus.
With this feature, one unit on a multiple unit isolated bus controls frequency and
the other units operate in a unit-load mode. The unit controlling frequency is
referred to as the “Swing Machine” because its load will swing (vary) depending
on the load of the plant. Caution should be taken with this configuration to not
overload or reverse power the “Swing Machine”.
This feature, when programmed, allows an operator to Arm or Disarm a unit’s

Frequency control mode while it is in operation. When Armed, a unit will switch to
Frequency control if the plant-to-utility tie breaker opens. When Disarmed, a unit
will stay in a unit-load control mode when the plant-to-utility tie breaker opens.
To use this feature, the program’s ‘Use Freq Arm/Disarm’ setting must be set to
‘Yes’, the Sync/Load Sharing mode cannot be programmed, and a discrete
command must programmed. The Frequency Arm/Disarm mode can be selected
from a programmed contact input, Function key, or Modbus command. When the
programmed contact input is closed the unit’s Frequency control mode is Armed.
When the programmed contact input is open the unit’s Frequency control mode
is Disarmed.
Depending on a unit’s size, health, and running status, an operator may select
which unit is designated as the plant Frequency control unit if or when the plant-
to-utility tie breaker opens. Frequency control can be Armed at any time, but it
will only go into control when the generator breaker is closed and the utility tie
breaker is open.
Only one unit at a time should be have its Frequency control mode
Armed. If multiple units try to control plant frequency at the same
time they may fight and cause system instability, with the potential of
damage to the equipment due to overloading or reverse powering a
machine.
52 Woodward
If the ‘Use Freq Arm/Disarm’ setting is set to ‘No’, Frequency control is always
Armed and the unit will go into Frequency control when the utility tie contact is
open. If the program’s ‘Use Freq Arm/Disarm’ setting is set to ‘Yes’ then
Frequency control must first be armed before the unit will switch into Frequency
control when the utility tie contact is open.
Speed Control Dual Dynamics

The Speed PID has a two sets of dynamics; off-line and on-line. When a system
needs variable response times, due to changing system conditions, these
dynamic variables allow the Speed PID to be tuned for optimal response.
When the 505 is configured for a generator application, the utility tie and
generator breakers determine which set of dynamics is used by the Speed PID.
The speed PID’s off-line dynamics are selected when either the utility tie or
generator breakers are open. The Speed PID’s on-line dynamics are selected if
both breakers are closed (see Table 3-1).
When not configured for a generator application, the 505 uses the programmed
‘Min Governor Speed Setpoint’ setting to determine which set of dynamic values
are used by the Speed PID. The Speed PID’s off-line dynamics are selected
when turbine speed is below the ‘Min Governor Speed Setpoint’ setting. The
Speed PID’s on-line dynamics are selected when turbine speed is above the ‘Min
Governor Speed Setpoint’ setting. (see Table 3-1).
When not configured for a generator application, the 505 will transfer from off-
line to on-line dynamics once minimum governor speed is reached.
Optionally a contact input may be programmed to perform a “Select On-Line

Dynamics” function. If this contact is programmed the utility tie and generator
breaker positions (gen applications), and the minimum speed setting status (non-
gen applications) do not effect dynamics selection. When the programmed
contact input is open, off-line dynamics are selected and used by the Speed PID.
When the programmed contact input is closed, on-line dynamics are selected
and used by the Speed PID.
A relay can be programmed to indicate that the On-Line Dynamics are selected
and used by the Speed PID.
Dynamic values are defined in the program mode and tunable at any time. Refer
to the PID Dynamic Adjustments section in this manual.
ON-LINE DYNAMICS OFF-LINE DYNAMICS

CONFIGURATION SELECTED SELECTED
GEN SET BOTH BREAKERS CLOSED EITHER BREAKER OPEN
NOT A GEN SET SPD > MIN GOV SETTING SPD < MIN GOV SETTING
*CONTACT INPUT CLOSED OPEN
*The contact input option has priority, when programmed.
Table 3-1. On-Line/Off-Line Dynamics Selection

The Speed setpoint can be positioned remotely through an analog signal by
programming the Remote Speed Setpoint analog input. This allows the Speed
setpoint to be set remotely by a process control or distributed plant control
system.
Woodward 53
The Remote Speed Setpoint (RSS) range is determined by the programmed
Analog input’s 4 mA and 20 mA settings. The Remote Speed Setpoint range is
tunable in the Service mode (under REMOTE SPEED SETTINGS), but cannot
control outside of the min governor and max governor speed setpoint values.
Since RSS is a secondary speed setting function, the Speed PID must be in-
control of the 505’s LSS bus to allow the RSS to position the actuator. When
configured as a generator application, the RSS will not take control unless both
breakers are closed and the speed PID is in control. When not configured as a
generator application, turbine speed must reach min governor before the RSS
can take control. The Cascade and Auxiliary (if configured to be
enabled/disabled) controls are automatically disabled if RSS is enabled.
The Remote Speed Setpoint may be enabled or disabled from the 505 keypad,
external contact or Modbus. The last command given from any of these three
sources dictates the enabled/disabled state. It does not matter whether the last
command was given from the keypad or other devices.
A contact input can be programmed to perform as an external “Remote Speed

Setpoint Enable” function. When this programmed contact is open the RSS is
disabled, and when it is closed the RSS is enabled. The contact can be either
open or closed when trip condition is cleared. If the contact is open it must be
closed to enable the RSS. If the contact is closed it must be opened and re-
closed to enable the RSS function.
If the milliamp signal to the Remote Speed setpoint input is out of range (below 2
mA or above 22 mA) an alarm will occur and the Remote Speed setpoint will be
inhibited until the input signal is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
Remote Speed Setpoint Status Messages

The Remote Speed Setpoint may be in one of the following states (505 front
panel screen messages):
 Disabled—The remote setpoint function is not enabled and will have no
effect on the speed setpoint.
 Enabled—The remote setpoint has been enabled.
 Active—The remote setpoint is in control of the Speed setpoint but the
speed PID is not in control of the actuator output.
 In Control—The remote setpoint is in control of the Speed setpoint and the
speed PID is in control of the actuator output.
 Inhibited—RSS cannot be enabled. The input signal has failed, a controlled
stop is selected, the unit is shut down, or RSS is not programmed.
When enabled, the Remote Speed setpoint may not match the Speed setpoint. In
this case, the Speed setpoint will ramp to the Remote Speed setpoint at the
programmed ‘Speed Setpoint Slow Rate’ setting (as defaulted in the Service
mode). Once in control, the maximum rate that the Speed setpoint will ramp, for
a RSS change, is at the programmed ‘Remote Speed Setpoint Max Rate’ setting.
If the ‘Remote Speed Setpoint Max Rate’ were set at 10 rpm/sec and the Remote
Speed setpoint analog input instantly moved from 3600 rpm to 3700 rpm, the
Speed setpoint will move to 3700 rpm at 10 rpm/sec.
Refer to Volume 2 of this manual for information on related Service mode

tunables.
All pertinent Remote Speed Setpoint parameters are available through the
Modbus links, refer to Chapter 6 for a complete listing of Modbus parameters.
54 Woodward
Synchronization
Automatic generator synchronization can be performed through a Woodward
Digital Synchronizer & Load Control (DSLC). The DSLC connects to a 505
analog input to bias the 505’s speed setpoint directly to vary generator speed,
frequency and phase. Optionally the DSLC can interface with the unit voltage
regulator to match system voltage across a generator breaker.
When the 505 is configured for a Generator application, a special speed setpoint
rate (Sync Window Rate) is used to increase setpoint resolution around
synchronous speed. This allows for tighter setpoint control to accommodate
synchronizing manually or by an automatic synchronizer which interfaces to the
505 discretely. This Sync rate is defaulted to two rpm/sec and is only adjustable
through the 505’s Service mode. This rate is only used when the generator
breaker is open the speed setpoint is within +10 rpm of rated speed (also tunable
through the Service mode).
The DSLC can be used as a synchronizer only or as a synchronizer and load

control. When the DSLC is used as a synchronizer only, the 505 must be
configured to accept the DSLC’s analog Speed Bias signal and have this input
enabled. A ‘Sync Enable’ contact input or function key (F3 or F4) can be
programmed to enable the 505’s synchronizing input when synchronization is
desired. The Sync Enable command becomes disabled when the generator
breaker closes, however, it may re-enabled again to allow the DSLC to perform
tie breaker synchronizations. To re-enable this input the ‘Sync Enable’ contact
must be opened and re-closed. Typically a double pole single throw (DPST)
switch is used on a site’s synchronizer control panel to select automatic
synchronizing by enabling both the DSLC sync mode and 505 analog input at the
same time.
To configure the 505 to utilize a DSLC for generator synchronization only,

program the ‘Synchronizing input’ function to the ‘ANALOG INPUT #6’ setting
and program the ‘Sync Enable” function to a ‘CONTACT INPUT X’ setting.
Analog Input #6 is isolated and is the only input directly compatible with the
DSLC’s output signal. The ‘Synchronizing input’ function has preset range and
gain settings that are tunable only in the Service mode. Thus the 4 mA and 20
mA Program Mode settings for the Synchronizing input are irrelevant and are not
used by the function’s operation. See Volume #2 of this manual or Woodward
manual 02007 for more information on applying the DSLC.
When programming a Function Key (F3 or F4), instead of a contact input, to

enable the 505’s analog Synchronizing input, a 505 relay output can also be
programmed to select a DSLC’s synchronizing mode. To configure the 505 for
this functionality, program the ‘Sync Enable’ function to a ‘FX KEY PERFORMS’
setting, and the ‘Sync Enabled’ function to a ‘RELAY X ENERGIZES ON’ setting.
Woodward 55
When the 505 is programmed to use the DSLC for Synchronization, the RMT key
can also be used to access and enable the Synchronizing function and monitor
all synchronization mode messages. See Chapter 5 for information on how to
enable this function through the RMT key. By pressing the RMT key and scrolling
up or down through the RMT screens, the following synchronizing mode
messages can be viewed:
 Disabled—The Synchronizing Input is disabled and will have no effect on
the Speed setpoint.
 Enabled—The Synchronizing Input has been enabled.
 In Control—The Synchronizing Input is biasing the Speed setpoint.
 Inhibited—The Synchronizing Input is inhibited and cannot be enabled. input
signal is failed, both the utility tie and generator breakers are closed, the
turbine is shut down, a controlled shutdown is being per-formed, or
synchronizing control is not programmed.
Synchronizing/Loadsharing
A Woodward Digital Synchronizer & Load Control (DSLC) is used with a 505 to
allow automatic generator synchronization to a bus and the sharing of load with
other units (using DSLCs on the same bus). The Woodward DSLC is a
microprocessor based generator load control designed for use on three-phase
AC generators with Woodward speed controls and automatic voltage regulators.
A DSLC with VAR/Power Factor control, allows all units with DSLCs to reactive
load share as well as real power load share. The DSLC senses unit load through
generator PTs & CTs and system load through the DSLC LON network (a
combination of all units on the network). The DSLC uses a digital Echelon
Network (LON) to communicate with other DSLCs on the same bus.
When used as a synchronizer and load control, the DSLC performs automatic
synchronization and controls unit load based on an internal base-load setting, a
system average load setting, a process loop’s control setting, or a Master
Synchronizer & Load Control’s (MSLC) demand setting.
After synchronization, unit load can be controlled by the DSLC through the
Sync/Load Share input or by the 505’s internal speed/load setpoint. The Utility
Tie Breaker Contact is used to select unit load control through the DSLC or
through the 505’s internal load setpoint. When the 505’s internal load control is
selected (utility tie contact closed), the Speed PID setpoint is used to control unit
load. Optionally the Cascade or Auxiliary control modes may be used to set unit
load based on another system parameter.
The DSLC interfaces to the 505 via its Speed Bias signal. To configure the 505 to
utilize a DSLC for generator synchronizing and load sharing, program the
‘Sync/Load Share input’ function to the ‘Analog Input #6’ setting and program the
‘Sync/Ld Share Enable” function to a ‘Contact Input #X’ setting. Analog Input #6
is isolated, and the only input directly compatible with the DSLC’s output signal.
The ‘Sync/Ld Share input’ function has preset range and gain settings that are
tunable only in the Service mode (see Volume 2). Thus the 4 mA and 20 mA
Program Mode settings for the Synchronizing input are irrelevant and are not
used by the function’s operation.
A combination of the Utility Tie Breaker contact, Generator Breaker contact, and
Sync/Ld Share Enable contact define the state of the 505’s synchronizing and
loadsharing operating modes (See Table 3-2).
56 Woodward
Figure 3-11. Loadsharing Logic
The Utility Tie breaker contact input is used to enable and disable Load Sharing
when the generator breaker is closed. If the Utility Tie contact is open,
loadsharing is enabled, and the 505’s internal Speed PID droop, Cascade, and
Auxiliary modes are disabled (as defaulted in Service mode). If the Utility Tie
contact is closed loadsharing is disabled and the 505’s Speed PID droop,
Cascade, and Auxiliary modes are enabled, if used.
The Generator Breaker contact input is used in conjunction with the utility tie
contact to activate loadsharing.
The ‘Sync/Ld Share Enable’ contact input option is used to enable the Sync/Load
Share analog input before the generator breaker is closed. Optionally a Function
Key (F3 or F4) can be programmed to enable the 505’s Sync/Load Share analog
input instead of an external contact. This discrete enable/disable function is
ignored after the generator breaker is closed, and must be reselected after the
generator breaker opens. Typically a double pole single throw (DPST) switch is
used on a site’s synchronizer control panel to select automatic synchronizing by
enabling both the DSLC sync mode and 505 analog input at the same time.
Woodward 57
Tie Breaker Contact Gen Breaker Contact Sync/Ld Share Speed Control Mode Cascade or Auxiliary
Status Status Enable Contact (if used)
closed open open Speed, Off-Line not active
Dynamics
closed closed XXXX Unit Load Control, On- active
Line Dynamics
open open open Speed, Off-Line not active
Dynamics
open open closed Synchronizing Off-Line not active
Dynamics
open closed XXXX Load Sharing, Off- not active
Line dynamics
Table 3-2. Load Sharing Logic
When programming a Function Key (F3 or F4) instead of a contact input to

enable the 505’s analog Sync/Load Share input, a 505 relay output, can be also
be programmed to select a DSLC’s synchronizing mode. To configure the 505 for
this functionality, program the ‘Sync/Ld Share Enable’ function to a ‘FX KEY
PERFORMS’ setting, and the ‘Sync/Ld Share Enabled’ function to a ‘RELAY X
ENERGIZES ON’ setting.
When the 505 is programmed to use the DSLC for Synchronization and Load
Sharing, the RMT key can be used to access and enable the Sync/Load Share
function and monitor all function mode messages. See Chapter 5 for information
on how to enable this function through the RMT key. By pressing the RMT key
and scrolling up or down through the RMT screens, the following Sync/Load
Share mode messages can be viewed:
 Disabled—The Sync/Load Share Input is disabled and will have no effect on
the Speed setpoint.
 Enabled—The Sync/Load Share Input has been enabled.
 In Control—The Sync/Load Share Input is biasing the Speed setpoint.
 Inhibited—The Sync/Load Share Input cannot be enabled; the input signal is
failed, the turbine is shut down, a controlled shutdown is being performed, or
the sync/load share feature is not programmed.
 All pertinent synchronizing and loadsharing parameters are available
through the Modbus links. See Chapter 6 for a complete listing of Modbus
parameters.
Cascade Control
The Cascade control can be configured to control any system process, related to
or affected by turbine speed or load. Typically this controller is configured and
used as a turbine inlet or exhaust pressure controller.
Cascade control is a PID controller that is cascaded with the Speed PID. The
Cascade PID compares a 4–20 mA process signal with an internal setpoint to
directly position the speed setpoint, thus changing turbine speed or load until the
process signal and setpoint match. By Cascading two PIDs in this fashion, a
bumpless transfer between the two controlling parameters can be performed.
When enabled, the Cascade PID can move the speed setpoint at a variable rate
up to the ‘Max Speed Setpoint Rate’ setting (programmed under the CASCADE
CONTROL header).
58 Woodward
Figure 3-12. Cascade Functional Diagram
Since Cascade is a secondary speed setting function, the Speed PID must be in
control of the 505’s LSS bus in order for Cascade to take control. When the 505
is configured for a generator application, both the utility tie and generator
breakers must be closed, before the Cascade PID can begin controlling a
process.
Cascade control may be enabled and disabled from the 505 keypad, a contact
input, or Modbus communications. The last command given from any of these
three sources dictates the Cascade PID’s control state.
If a contact input is programmed to function as a Cascade Enable contact, when

the contact is open Cascade control is disabled, and when it is closed Cascade
control is enabled. This contact can either be open or closed when a trip
condition is cleared. If the contact is open it must be closed to enable Cascade
control. If the contact is closed it must be opened and re-closed to enable
Cascade control.
Woodward 59
Cascade Control Status Messages
 Cascade is Disabled—Cascade control is not enabled and will have no

effect.
 Cascade is Enabled—Cascade has been enabled but is not active or in
control. Permissives have not been met (speed < min gov, generator or tie
breaker open).
 Casc Active/Not Spd Ctl—Cascade has been enabled but the Speed PID is
not in control of the LSS bus (either aux or valve limiter is in control).
 Cascade is In Control—Cascade is in control of the LSS bus.
 Casc Active w/Rmt Setpt—Cascade has been enabled and the Remote
Cascade setpoint is in control of the setpoint but the Speed PID is not in
control of the LSS bus.
 Casc Control w/Rmt Setpt—Cascade is in control of the LSS bus (via the
Speed PID) and the Remote Cascade Setpoint is positioning the Cascade
setpoint.
 Cascade is Inhibited—Cascade cannot be enabled; the Cascade input
signal has failed, a controlled stop is selected, the unit is shut down, or
cascade control is not programmed.
Cascade control is automatically disabled on a shutdown condition, and must be

re-enabled after a successful system startup. Cascade control is disabled if
Remote Speed Setpoint is used and enabled. Should another parameter on the
LSS bus take control of governor valve position from the Speed PID, Cascade
control will stay active, and begin controlling again when the Speed PID is the
lowest parameter on the LSS bus again.
All pertinent cascade control parameters are available through the Modbus links,
refer to Chapter 6 for a complete listing of Modbus parameters.
Cascade Dynamics
The Cascade PID control uses its own set of dynamic settings. These values are
programmable and may be tuned at any time. Refer to the PID Dynamic
Adjustments section in this manual.
Cascade Setpoint
The Cascade setpoint can be adjusted from the 505 keypad, external contacts,
Modbus commands, or through a 4–20 mA analog input. A specific setting can
also be directly entered from the 505 keypad or through Modbus commands.
The Cascade setpoint range must be defined in the program mode. Program
settings ‘Min Cascade Setpoint’ and ‘Max Cascade Setpoint’ define the range of
the Cascade setpoint and control.
Cascade setpoint raise/lower contact inputs act as speed setpoint

raise/lower contacts when Cascade is not active or in control. This
allows a single set of contacts (one SPDT switch) to control the
Speed setpoint when the generator breaker is open, the load setpoint
when paralleled to a utility, and the Cascade setpoint when enabled.
Alternatively, a second set of contacts (speed raise and lower) could
be used to independently control the speed and load setpoints.
60 Woodward
When a raise or lower Cascade Setpoint command is issued, the setpoint moves
at the programmed ‘Casc Setpt Rate’ setting. If a Cascade raise or lower
command is selected for longer than three seconds, the Cascade setpoint will
move at the fast rate which is three times the cascade setpoint rate. The
Cascade setpoint rate, fast rate delay, and fast rate can all be adjusted in the
Service mode.
Cascade setpoint slow rate is programmed for 10 psi/sec, the smallest increment
it will move is 0.4 psi (1.2 psi for Modbus).
A specific setpoint may also be directly entered from the 505 keypad or through
Modbus communications. When this is performed, the setpoint will ramp at the
‘Casc Setpt Rate’ (as defaulted in Service mode). To “enter” a specific setpoint
from the 505 keypad, press the CAS key to view the Cascade control screen,
press the ENTER key, enter the setpoint level desired, then press the ENTER
key again. If a valid number was entered, equal-to or between the min and max
setpoint settings, the setting will be accepted and the Cascade setpoint will ramp
to the “entered” setpoint level. If an invalid number is “entered”, the setting will
not be accepted and the 505’s screen will momentarily display a value out-of-
range message.
When a valid setpoint value is entered, the setpoint will ramp at the Cascade
Setpoint Rate to the newly entered setpoint value. This ‘Entered’ rate is tunable
through the Service mode.
Refer to Volume 2 of this manual for information on which programmed settings

are tunable through the 505’s Service mode. Service mode values can be
tuned/adjusted while the 505 is shutdown or in the RUN mode.
Cascade Setpoint Tracking

To allow a bumpless transfer from turbine Speed/load control to Cascade control,
the Cascade PID can be programmed to track its controlling process input when
disabled. When this tracking feature is programmed, the Cascade PID will be
satisfied when enabled, and no turbine speed or load correction will be
performed. After the Cascade control is enabled, its setpoint can moved, as
required, to another setting.
Cascade Setpoint with No Tracking

If the Cascade control is programmed not to use the setpoint tracking feature the
setpoint will remain at its last setting (running or shutdown). When the 505 is
powered-up the setpoint is reset to the ‘Setpt Initial Value’. With this
configuration, when Cascade control is enabled, and its sensed process signal
does not match setpoint, the Cascade control will ramp turbine speed/load up or
down to match the two signals, at a controlled “not-matched” rate (defaulted to
the ‘Speed Setpoint Slow Rate’ setting, and tunable through the Service mode).
If Cascade is the controlling parameter and one of the permissives is lost or

Cascade is disabled, the speed setpoint will remain at its last setting until another
parameter adjusts it.
Woodward 61
Cascade Droop
When sharing control of a parameter with another external controller, the
Cascade PID can also receive a programmable DROOP feedback signal for
control loop stability. This feedback signal is a percentage of the Cascade PID’s
output. By including this second parameter into the control loop, the Cascade
PID becomes satisfied, and does not fight with the other external controller over
the shared parameter. If Cascade droop is used, the Cascade input signal will
not match the Cascade setpoint when in control. The difference will depend on
the amount (%) of droop programmed and the output of the Cascade PID. The
Droop value fed back to the Cascade PID is equal to the following defaulted
settings:
PID OUTPUT % x ‘CASCADE DROOP %’ x ‘MAX CASC SETPOINT’ x

0.0001
Where the ‘CASCADE DROOP %’ and ‘MAX CASC SETPOINT’ values are
set in the Program Mode and the ‘PID output %’ is determined by the
Cascade demand.
Example: 25% x 5% x 600 psi x 0.0001 = 7.5 psi

tunables.
Invert Cascade
Depending on the control action required, the Cascade input signal can be
inverted. If a decrease in inlet governor valve position is required to increase the
Cascade process signal, program the ‘INVERT CASCADE INPUT’ setting to
‘YES’. An example of this required control action would be when the Cascade
PID is configured to control turbine inlet steam pressure. To increase turbine inlet
steam pressure, the inlet control valve position must be decreased.

The Cascade setpoint can be positioned through an analog signal. Optionally,
one of the 505’s six analog inputs can be programmed to position the Cascade
PID setpoint. This allows the Cascade setpoint to be positioned remotely by a
process control or distributed plant control system.
The Remote Cascade Setpoint (RCS) range is determined by the programmed

Analog input’s 4 mA and 20 mA settings. The Remote Cascade Setpoint range is
tunable in the Service mode, but cannot be set outside of the min and max
Cascade Setpoint settings.
The Remote Cascade Setpoint input may be enabled from the 505 keypad,
contact input, or Modbus communications. The last command given from any of
these three sources dictates enable/disable.
62 Woodward
If the milliamp signal to the Remote Cascade setpoint input is out of range (below
2 mA or above 22 mA) an alarm will occur and the Remote Cascade setpoint will
be inhibited until the input signal is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
Depending on configuration and system conditions, the Remote Cascade
Setpoint may be in one of the following states (505 front panel screen
messages):
 Disabled—The Remote Setpoint function is not enabled and will have no
effect on the Cascade setpoint.
 Enabled—The Remote Setpoint has been enabled but cascade control is
not active. The breakers are not closed, speed < min gov, or cascade has
not taken control.
 Active—The Remote Setpoint has been enabled but Cascade is not in
control. Cascade has been enabled and the Remote Cascade setpoint is in
control of the setpoint but the Speed PID is not in control of the LSS bus.
 In Control—Cascade is in control of the LSS bus (via the Speed PID) and
the Remote Cascade Setpoint is positioning the Cascade setpoint.
 Inhibited—Remote Setpoint cannot be enabled; input signal is failed,
Cascade input signal is failed, a controlled stop is selected, the unit is shut
down, or the remote cascade control is not programmed.
When enabled, the Remote Cascade setpoint may not match the Cascade
setpoint. In this case, the Cascade setpoint will ramp to the Remote Cascade
setpoint at the programmed ‘Casc Setpt Rate’ setting (as defaulted in the Service
mode). Once in control, the fastest the Remote Cascade setpoint will adjust the
Cascade setpoint is at the programmed ‘Rmt Cascade Max Rate’ setting. If the
‘Rmt Cascade Max Rate’ was set at 10 and the Remote Cascade setpoint analog
input instantly moved from 0 units to 1000 units, the Remote Cascade setpoint
will move to 1000 units at 10 units/sec).
Remote Cascade Enable Logic

There are three different options for enabling Remote Cascade Setpoint and
Cascade control as follows:
 One Remote Enable contact input or function key command
 Both enable commands programmed; Remote Casc Enable and Cascade
Enable
 No enable commands programmed
When only one Remote Enable command is programmed (either F-key or

contact input), selecting ‘Enable’ will enable both Cascade control and Remote
Cascade control. This configuration allows both functions to be enabled with one
command if this is the normal operation mode. If ‘Disable’ is selected, both
control modes are disabled.
A contact input can be programmed to enable and disable the Remote Cascade
Setpoint (RCS) input/function. When this contact is open the RCS is disabled,
and when it is closed the RCS is enabled. The contact can be either open or
closed when a trip condition is cleared. If the contact is open it must be closed to
enable the RCS input. If the contact is closed it must be opened and re-closed to
enable the RCS input.
Woodward 63
When both Remote Cascade Enable and Cascade Control Enable commands
are programmed, each function is enabled by its respective command selection.
If Remote Cascade Enable is selected, only the Remote Cascade Setpoint will
be enabled. If Cascade Control Enable is selected, only Cascade control will be
enabled. If Remote Cascade Disable is selected, only the Remote Cascade
Setpoint will be disabled. If Cascade Control Disable is selected, both Remote
Cascade control and Cascade control will be disabled. However, if before the
Cascade PID was ‘In-control’, a Cascade disabled command is given, only
Cascade control will be disabled.
If no external contact input or function keys are programmed for the ‘Enable’
commands, Cascade Control and Remote Cascade Control must be enabled
from either the front panel keypad or from Modbus. Since the front panel and
Modbus provide both Remote Cascade Enable and Cascade Control Enable
commands, they will operate in the same manner as ‘both enables programmed’.

tunables. All pertinent Remote Cascade control parameters are available through
the Modbus links. See Chapter 6 for a complete listing of Modbus parameters.
Auxiliary Control
The Auxiliary PID controller can be used to limit or control generator power, plant
import/export power, turbine inlet pressure, turbine exhaust pressure,
pump/compressor discharge pressure, or any other auxiliary parameters, directly
related to turbine speed/load. The Auxiliary input is a 4 to 20 mA current signal.
The PID control amplifier compares this input signal with the Auxiliary setpoint to
produce a control output to the digital LSS (low-signal select) bus. The LSS bus
sends the lowest signal to the actuator driver circuitry.
Figure 3-13. Aux Control Overview
64 Woodward
Auxiliary as a Limiter (not using Enable/Disable)

When configured as a limiter, the Auxiliary control is low signal selected (LSS)
with the Speed PID, allowing it to limit turbine speed/load based on any auxiliary
parameter which is directly related. To configure the Auxiliary controller to
function as a limiter, program the ‘Use Aux Enable’ setting to ‘NO’.
When Auxiliary is configured to act as a limiter the Auxiliary PID will ‘limit’ the
LSS bus when the input reaches the setpoint. The Aux setpoint initializes to the
programmed ‘Setpt Initial Value’ setting on a power-up-reset. This setpoint may
be adjusted at any time and will remain at a setting (running or shutdown),
provided a power-up-reset did not occur.
Depending on configuration and system conditions, the Auxiliary Limiter may be

in one of the following states (505 front panel screen messages):
 Auxiliary is Enabled—Auxiliary has been enabled but the generator and
utility tie breaker permissives have not been met (generator applications
only).
 Aux Active/Not Lmting—Auxiliary is configured as a limiter but is not limiting
the LSS bus.
 Aux Active w/Rmt Setpt—Auxiliary is not in control of the LSS bus and the
remote Auxiliary input is in command of the setpoint.
 Aux Control w/Rmt Setpt—Auxiliary is in limiting the LSS bus and the
remote Auxiliary analog input is in command of the setpoint.
 Auxiliary is Inhibited—Auxiliary cannot be enabled. The input signal has
failed.
For generator applications, Auxiliary control can be configured to be disabled

when the generator and/or utility tie breakers are open. Program settings ‘Genbkr
Open Aux Dsbl’ and ‘Tiebkr Open Aux Dsbl’ may be configured to deactivate
Auxiliary PID limiting, depending on system breaker positions. When both
settings are programmed ‘NO’, the Auxiliary limiter will always stay ‘active’. If
either setting is programmed ‘YES’, the Auxiliary limiter will be active only when
the tie breaker or generator breaker respectively, is closed.
If the unit is not configured for a generator application, the utility tie and generator
breaker inputs do not affect Auxiliary limiter status, and the Limiter will be active
at all times.
Auxiliary as a Controller (using Enable/Disable)

When configured as a controller, the Auxiliary PID may enabled and disabled on
command. With this configuration, when Auxiliary control is enabled it instantly
takes full control of the LSS bus, and the Speed PID is switched to a tracking
mode. When Auxiliary control is disabled the Speed PID instantly takes full
control of the LSS bus. To allow a bumpless transfer between modes, when the
Auxiliary PID is enabled, the Speed PID tracks a few % above the Auxiliary PID’s
LSS bus signal. When the Auxiliary PID is disabled, its setpoint tracks the
Auxiliary PID’s process signal.
To configure the Auxiliary controller to function as a controller, program the ‘Use

Aux Enable’ setting to ‘YES’.
The Speed PID will only track the Auxiliary PID LSS bus signal up to 100%
speed/load. Thus if turbine speed/load reaches 100%, the Speed PID will protect
the unit by limiting unit speed/load to less than or equal to 100%.
Woodward 65
Depending on the configuration and system conditions, the Auxiliary PID may be
in one of the following states (505 front panel screen messages):
 Auxiliary is Disabled—Auxiliary is disabled and will have no effect on the
LSS bus.
 Auxiliary is Enabled—Auxiliary has been enabled but the generator and
utility tie breaker permissives have not been met (generator applications
only).
 Aux Active/Not in Ctrl—Auxiliary has been enabled, permissives met, but is
not in control of the LSS bus.
 Aux Active w/Rmt Setpt—Auxiliary has been enabled but is not in control of
the LSS bus and the remote Auxiliary input is controlling the setpoint.
 Auxiliary in Control—Auxiliary is in control of the LSS bus.
 Aux Control w/Rmt Setpt—Auxiliary is in control of the LSS bus and the
remote Auxiliary analog input is in control of the setpoint.
 Auxiliary is Inhibited—Auxiliary cannot be enabled; input signal is failed, 505
is in Frequency Control, controlled shutdown is selected, unit is shut down
or Auxiliary control is not programmed.
For generator applications, Auxiliary control can be configured to be disabled

when the generator and/or utility tie breakers are open. Program settings
‘TIEBKR OPEN AUX DSBL’ and ‘GENBKR OPEN AUX DSBL’ may be
configured to deactivate Auxiliary control depending on system breaker positions.
When both settings are programmed ‘NO’, the Auxiliary control will always stay
‘active’.
If the unit is not configured for a generator application, the utility tie and generator
breaker inputs do not affect Auxiliary control status, and the controller will be
active at all times (capable of being enabled).
Auxiliary control may be enabled from the 505 keypad, remote contacts, or
Modbus communications. The last command given from any of these three
sources dictates which state the Auxiliary control is in. If an external Auxiliary
Enable contact is programmed, disable is selected when the contact is open and
enable is selected when it is closed. The contact can be either open or closed
when a trip condition is cleared. If the contact is open it must be closed to enable.
If the contact is closed it must be opened and re-closed to enable.
When configured as enable/disable controller, the Auxiliary control will

automatically be disabled upon a shutdown condition. Auxiliary control will be
disabled and inhibited when the 505 is in frequency control. If the Auxiliary
milliamp input signal is out of range (below 2 mA or above 22 mA) an alarm will
occur and Auxiliary control will be inhibited until the input signal is corrected and
the alarm is cleared. Optionally the unit can be programmed to issue a shutdown
on a loss of the Auxiliary input signal.
Auxiliary Dynamics
The Auxiliary PID control uses its own set of dynamic settings. These values are
programmable and may be tuned at any time. Refer to the PID Dynamic
Adjustments section in this manual.
66 Woodward
Generator Load Limiter/Control

On generator applications, the Auxiliary PID may be programmed to use the
‘KW/UNIT LOAD’ input signal instead of the Auxiliary input signal for limiting or
control. This is the same input signal (KW/Unit Load input) used by the Speed
PID for KW droop. This configuration allows the Auxiliary PID to limit or control
generator power. Program the ‘USE KW/UNIT LOAD INPUT’ to ‘YES’ if this
configuration is desired.
Auxiliary Droop
When sharing control of a parameter with another external controller, the
Auxiliary control amplifier can also receive a programmable DROOP feedback
signal for control loop stability. This feedback signal is a percentage of the LSS
bus (control valve position). By including this second parameter into the control
loop, the Auxiliary PID becomes satisfied, and does not fight with the other
external controller over the shared parameter. The Droop % fed back to the
Auxiliary PID is equal to the following defaulted settings:
LSS BUS OUTPUT % x ‘AUXILIARY DROOP %’ x ‘MAX AUX SETPOINT’ x

0.0001
Example: 25% x 5% x 600 psi x 0.0001 = 7.5 psi
Where the ‘AUXILIARY DROOP %’ and ‘MAX AUX SETPOINT’ values are
set in the Program Mode and the ‘LSS bus output %’ is determined by the
Auxiliary demand.
Invert Auxiliary Input

Depending on the control action required, the Auxiliary PID’s input signal can be
inverted. If a decrease in inlet control valve position is required to increase the
Auxiliary process signal, program the ‘INVERT AUX INPUT’ setting to ‘YES’. An
example of this control action would be when the Auxiliary PID is configured to
control turbine inlet steam pressure. To increase turbine inlet steam pressure,
inlet control valve position must be decreased.
Auxiliary Setpoint
The Auxiliary setpoint can be adjusted from the 505 keypad, external contacts,
Modbus commands, or through a 4–20 mA analog input. A specific setting can
also be directly entered from the 505 keypad or through Modbus commands.
The Auxiliary setpoint range must be defined in the program mode. Program
settings ‘Min Aux Setpoint’ and ‘Max Aux Setpoint’ define the range of the
Auxiliary setpoint and control.
When a raise or lower Auxiliary Setpoint command is issued, the setpoint moves
at the programmed ‘Aux Setpt Rate’ setting. If a Auxiliary raise or lower
command is selected for longer than three seconds, the Auxiliary setpoint will
move at three times at the fast rate which is three times the Auxiliary setpoint
rate. The Auxiliary setpoint rate, fast rate delay, and fast rate can all be adjusted
in the Service mode.
Woodward 67
Cascade setpoint slow rate is programmed for 10 psi/sec, the smallest increment
it will move is 0.4 psi (1.2 psi for Modbus).
‘Aux Setpt Rate’ (as defaulted in Service mode). To “enter” a specific setpoint
from the 505 keypad, press the AUX key to view the Auxiliary control screen,
setpoint settings, the setting will be accepted and the Auxiliary setpoint will ramp
to the “entered” setpoint level. If an invalid number is “entered”, the setting will
not be accepted and the 505’s screen will momentarily display a value out-of-
range message.
When a valid setpoint value is entered, the setpoint will ramp at the Auxiliary
Setpoint Rate to the newly entered setpoint value. This ‘Entered’ rate is tunable
through the Service mode.
Refer to Volume 2 of this manual for further information on Service mode and on-
line tunables. All pertinent auxiliary control parameters are available through the
Modbus links. See Chapter 6 for a complete listing of Modbus parameters.
Remote Auxiliary Setpoint

The Auxiliary setpoint can be positioned through an analog signal. Optionally,
one of the 505’s six analog inputs can be programmed to position the Auxiliary
PID setpoint. This allows the Auxiliary setpoint to be positioned remotely by a
process control or distributed plant control system.
The Remote Auxiliary Setpoint (RAS) range is determined by the programmed

Analog input’s 4 mA and 20 mA settings. The Remote Auxiliary Setpoint range is
tunable in the Service mode, but cannot be set outside of the min and max
Auxiliary Setpoint settings.
When enabled, the Remote Auxiliary Setpoint may not match the Auxiliary
setpoint. In this case, the Auxiliary setpoint will ramp to the Remote Auxiliary
Setpoint at the programmed ‘Aux Setpoint Rate’ setting (as defaulted in the
Service mode). Once in control, the fastest the Remote Auxiliary Setpoint will
adjust the Auxiliary setpoint is at the programmed ‘Rmt Aux Setpt Max Rate’
setting. If the ‘’Rmt Aux Setpt Max Rate’ were set at 10 and the Remote Auxiliary
Setpoint analog input instantly moved from 0 units to 1000 units, the Auxiliary
setpoint will move to 1000 units at 10 units/sec.
If the milliamp signal to the Remote Auxiliary Setpoint input is out of range (below
2 mA or above 22 mA) an alarm will occur and the Remote Auxiliary Setpoint will
be inhibited until the input signal is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
Depending on configuration and system conditions, the Remote Auxiliary
Setpoint may be in one of the following states (505 front panel screen
messages):
 Disabled—The Remote Setpoint function is disabled and will have no effect
on the Aux setpoint.
 Enabled—The Remote Setpoint has been enabled, but permissives are not
met.
 Active—The Remote Setpoint has been enabled, permissives are met, but
Auxiliary PID is not in control of the LSS bus.
68 Woodward
 In Control—The Remote Setpoint is in control of the Auxiliary setpoint, and
the Auxiliary PID is in control of the LSS bus.
 Inhibited—Remote Setpoint cannot be enabled; Remote Setpoint input
signal is failed, Auxiliary control is Inhibited, or Remote Auxiliary Setpoint is
not programmed.
Remote Auxiliary Enable Logic

The Remote Auxiliary Setpoint input may be enabled from the 505 keypad,
contact input, or Modbus communications. The last command given from any of
these three sources dictates the state of the RAS input. A contact input can be
programmed to enable and disable the Remote Auxiliary Setpoint input/function.
When this contact is open the RAS is disabled, and when it is closed the RAS is
enabled. The contact can be either open or closed when a trip condition is
cleared. If the contact is open it must be closed to enable the RAS input. If the
contact is closed it must be opened and re-closed to enable the RAS input.
When the Auxiliary PID is programmed to function as a limiter, the Remote

Auxiliary Setpoint may be enabled at any time when the 505 is in the RUN mode.
When the Auxiliary PID is programmed as a Controller (enabled/disabled), there

are three different options for enabling Remote Auxiliary Setpoint and Auxiliary
control as follows:
 One Remote Enable contact input or function key command
 Both enable commands programmed; Remote Aux Enable and Auxiliary
Enable
 No enable commands programmed
When only one Remote Enable command is programmed (either F-key or

contact input), selecting ‘Enable’ will enable both Auxiliary control and Remote
Auxiliary control. This configuration allows both functions to be enabled with one
command if this is the normal operation mode. If ‘Disable’ is selected, both
control modes are disabled.
When both Remote Auxiliary Enable and Auxiliary Control Enable commands are
programmed, each function is enabled by its respective command selection. If
Remote Auxiliary Enable is selected, only the Remote Auxiliary Setpoint will be
enabled. If Auxiliary Control Enable is selected, only Auxiliary control will be
enabled. If Remote Auxiliary Disable is selected, only the Remote Auxiliary
Setpoint will be disabled. If Auxiliary Control Disable is selected, both Remote
Auxiliary control and Auxiliary control will be disabled. However, if before the
Auxiliary PID was ‘In-control’ an Auxiliary Disable command is given, only
Auxiliary control will be disabled.
If no external contact input or function keys are programmed for the ‘Enable’
commands, Auxiliary Control and Remote Auxiliary Control must be enabled from
either the front panel keypad or from Modbus. Since the front panel and Modbus
provide both Remote Auxiliary Enable and Auxiliary Control Enable commands,
they will operate in the same manner as ‘both enables programmed’.

tunables. All pertinent Remote Auxiliary Setpoint parameters are available
through the Modbus links. See Chapter 6 for a complete listing of Modbus
parameters.
Woodward 69
Valve Limiter
The valve limiter, limits the actuator output signal (governor valve position) to aid
in starting up and shutting down the turbine. The output of the valve limiter is
Low-Signal-Selected with the output of the Speed and Auxiliary PIDs. The PID or
limiter asking for the lowest valve position will control valve position. Thus, the
valve limiter, limits the maximum valve position.
The valve limiter can also be used to trouble shoot system dynamics problems. If
it is believed that the 505 is the source of system instability, the valve limiter can
be positioned to manually take control of the valve position. Care should be taken
when using the valve limiter in this fashion, so as to not allow the system to reach
a dangerous operating point.
The valve limiter level is adjusted through the 505 keypad, contact input, or
through Modbus communications. When raise or lower commands are received,
the limiter ramps up or down, at the ‘VALVE LIMITER RATE’. The maximum the
limiter can increase is 100%. The Valve Limiter ‘Rate’ and ‘Max Valve position’
settings can be adjusted in the Service mode.
Valve limiter slow rate is programmed for 10 %/sec, the smallest increment it will
move is 0.4 % (.2 % for a Modbus command).
‘Valve Limiter Rate’ (as defaulted in Service mode). To “enter” a specific setpoint
from the 505 keypad, press the LMTR key to view the Valve Limiter screen,
setpoint settings, the setting will be accepted and the Valve Limiter will ramp to
the “entered” level. If an invalid number is “entered”, the setting will not be
accepted and the 505’s screen will momentarily display a value out-of-range
message.
When a valid setpoint value is entered, the setpoint will ramp at the ‘Valve Limiter
Rate’ to the newly entered setpoint value. This ‘Entered’ rate is tunable through
the Service mode.
Refer to Volume 2 of this manual for further information on Service mode and on-
line tunables. All pertinent valve limiter parameters are available through the
Modbus links. See Chapter 6 for a complete listing of Modbus parameters.
Emergency Shutdown
When an Emergency Shutdown condition occurs, the actuator output signal is
stepped to zero milliamps, the Shutdown relay de-energizes, and the shutdown
cause (first shutdown condition sensed) is displayed on the 505’s front panel.
Pressing the scroll down key from this screen will reveal any additional shutdown
conditions that were sensed. See Chapter 5 for a detailed list of the possible
shutdown (Trip) conditions.
70 Woodward
Up to five Emergency Shutdown inputs (contact inputs) can be programmed to
allow the 505 to indicate the cause of an emergency shutdown. By wiring trip
conditions directly into the 505, instead of a trip string, the 505 can pass a trip
signal directly to its output relay (to trip the T&T valve), and also indicate the first
trip condition sensed. The 505’s total throughput time is 20 milliseconds (worse
case). All trip conditions are indicated through the 505’s front panel, and Modbus
communications.
The cause of the last trip can also be seen by pressing the ‘CONT’ key, then
pressing the scroll down key. The last trip indication, is latched-in and can be
viewed at any time after a trip and before the next trip condition is latched in.
Once latched-in the last trip indication cannot be reset. This allows an operator to
confirm what the trip condition was hours or days after the unit has been reset
and restarted.
In addition to the dedicated Shutdown relay, the other programmable relays may
be configured as Shutdown condition or Trip relays.
The Shutdown Condition relay may be programmed to indicate a shutdown

condition on a remote panel or to a plant DCS. The Shutdown Indication relay is
normally de-energized. This relay will energize upon any shutdown condition and
stay energized until all trips have been cleared. The ‘Reset Clears Trip’ function
has no effect on the programmable Shutdown Indication relay.
When programmed as a Trip relay, the respective relay will function like the
dedicated Shutdown relay (normally energized and de-energizes on a shutdown)
to indicate the position of the dedicated Shutdown relay.
Controlled Shutdown
The 505’s Controlled Shutdown function is used to stop the turbine in a controlled
manner, as opposed to an Emergency Trip. When a STOP command (controlled
shutdown) is issued the following sequence is performed:
1. All control PIDs and functions are disabled except the Speed PID controller
2. The Speed Setpoint is ramped to zero at the speed setpoint slow rate
3. After the Speed Setpoint reaches zero, the valve limiter is instantly stepped
to zero
4. When the valve limiter reaches zero, the 505 executes a Shutdown
command
5. A “TRIP/Shutdown Complete” message is displayed on the 505 front panel
With the control in the run mode and the turbine turning, when the 505’s “STOP”
key is pressed, the control will display a message prompting the operator to
verify the command (Manual Shutdown ?/Push YES or NO). At this point if the
“YES” key is pressed the control will perform the controlled shutdown sequence
explained above. Pushing the “NO” key will cause no change in the 505’s
operation, and the ‘CONTROLLING PARAMETER’ screen will be displayed. This
verification feature prevents an unwanted shutdown if the STOP key is
accidentally pushed.
A controlled shutdown can be initiated or aborted from the 505 front panel, a
programmed contact input or either Modbus communication link. Verification is
not required, if a controlled shutdown command is initiated by an programmed
contact input or Modbus communication link.
Woodward 71
The controlled shutdown sequence can be aborted at any time. During a
controlled shutdown sequence, by pressing the STOP key, the 505 will display a
‘Manual Shutdown In Ctrl/Push NO to Disable’ message. Pressing the “NO” key
from this screen will cause the shutdown sequence to be aborted, and the control
to display a ‘Manual Shutdown Stopped/Push YES to Continue’ message. At this
point the shutdown sequence can be re-initiated when desired, or the unit can be
brought back to a fully operational state.
If an external contact is programmed to issue a controlled shutdown command,

closing the contact will initiate the controlled shutdown sequence. The shutdown
sequence will go through the same steps described above, with the exception
that verification of the shutdown sequence is not needed. Opening the
programmed contact will stop the sequence. The contact can be either open or
closed when a trip condition is cleared. If the contact is open it must be closed to
issue the command. If the contact is closed it must be opened and re-closed to
issue the command. The Modbus initiated Control Shutdown Sequence requires
two commands, one to start the sequence and the other to stop it.
The speed sensor failure trip, generator breaker open trip, and tie breaker open
trip commands are overridden when a controlled shutdown is initiated.
This command can be disabled through the Service Mode, if desired

(see Key Options). When disabled, the Controlled Stop feature is
disabled from front panel, Modbus, and contact commands.
See Chapter 5 of this Volume for all 505 service panel messages.
Overspeed Test Function

The 505’s Overspeed Test function allows an operator to increase turbine speed
above its rated operating range to periodically test turbine electrical and/or
mechanical overspeed protection logic and circuitry. This includes the 505’s
internal overspeed trip logic and any external overspeed trip device’s settings
and logic. An Overspeed Test will allow the control’s speed setpoint to be
increased above the normal maximum governor limit. This test can be performed
from the front panel of the control or with external contacts. This test is not
permissible through the Modbus.
An overspeed test is allowed only under the following conditions:

 The Speed PID must be in control
 The Auxiliary, Cascade, and Remote Speed Setpoint PIDs/functions must
be disabled
 If configured for a generator application the Generator breaker must be
open.
 The Speed Setpoint must be at the, “Max Governor Speed” setting.
If the ‘OSPD’ key is pressed or an external Overspeed Test contact is closed (if
programmed) and the above conditions are not met the control will display a
“Overspeed Test/Not Permissible” message.
An overspeed test can be performed through an external contact, if the

‘Overspeed Test’ function is programmed to a ‘Contact Input # Function’ setting.
When configured this contact performs the same function as the 505’s front panel
OSPD key.
72 Woodward
There are two programmable relay options available to indicate overspeed
status. One programmable relay option indicates an Overspeed Trip condition.
The second relay option provides indication that an Overspeed Test is being
performed.
See Chapter 5 of this manual for a complete Overspeed Test Procedure. All
pertinent overspeed test parameters are available through the Modbus links. See
Chapter 6 for a complete listing of Modbus parameters.
Local/Remote Function
The 505’s Local/Remote function allows an operator at the turbine skid or 505 to
disable any remote command (from a remote Control Room) that may put the
system in a unsafe condition. This function is typically used during a system
startup or shutdown to allow only one operator to manipulate the 505 control
modes and settings.
The Local/Remote function must first be programmed before a Local or Remote

mode can be selected by an operator. This function can be programmed under
the OPERATING PARAMETERS BLOCK. If this function is not programmed all
contact inputs and Modbus commands (when Modbus is programmed) are active
at all times. If the Local/Remote function is programmed, Local and Remote
modes can be selected through a programmed contact input, programmed
function key (F3, F4), or Modbus command.
When Local mode is selected, the 505 is defaulted to be operable from its front
panel only. This mode disables all contact inputs and Modbus commands, with
exceptions noted below:
External trip Contact In (defaulted in program)
External trip 2 Contact In (active at all times, if programmed)
Override MPU Fault Contact In (active at all times, if programmed)
Frequency Arm/Disarm (active at all times, if programmed)
Generator breaker Contact In (active at all times, if programmed)
Utility tie breaker Contact In (active at all times, if programmed)
Start permissive Contact In (active at all times, if programmed)
Switched dynamics Contact In (active at all times, if programmed)
Local/Remote Contact In (active at all times, if programmed)
Local/Remote Modbus Command (active at all times, if Modbus
programmed)
Trip Command Modbus Command (active at all times, if Modbus
programmed)
When the Remote mode is selected the 505 can be operated through its front
panel, contact inputs, and/or all Modbus commands.
When using a contact input to select between Local and Remote modes, a
closed contact input selects the Remote mode and an open contact input selects
the Local mode.
Optionally a relay can be programmed to indicate when Local mode is selected

(energizes when the Local mode is selected). There is also indication of the
Local/Remote mode selection through Modbus (address = true when the Remote
mode is selected and false = when the Local mode is selected).
Woodward 73
The 505 is defaulted to only allow control operation though its front panel when
the Local mode is selected. If desired, this defaulted functionality can be changed
through the 505’s Service mode. The 505 can be modified to also allow operation
through contacts inputs, or Modbus port #1 or Modbus port #2 when the Local
mode is selected.
All pertinent local/remote control parameters are available through the Modbus
links. See Chapter 6 for a complete listing of all Modbus parameters.
Function Keys
Function keys, F3 & F4 are located on the 505’s front panel, and can be
programmed independently to function as a control panel switch. These keys
allow functions to be enabled and disabled from the 505’s front panel, without
requiring the use of an external switch. The following is a list of the
programmable options for the function keys:
Local/Remote Cascade Enable
Idle/Rated Remote Cascade Setpoint Enable
Halt Continue Auto Start Seq Auxiliary Enable
Remote Speed Setpoint Enable Remote Auxiliary Setpoint Enable
Sync Enable Relay Output
Frequency Control Arm/Disarm
A two step process is required to enable or disable any function. Pressing a

programmed function key will cause the 505’s service panel to display the current
state of the function and prompt the operator to press the YES or NO keys to
enable or disable the function.
A function’s prompt will change depending on the state of the function at that
time. As an example, if the F3 key is programmed to allow an operator to enable
and disable the 505’s Remote Speed Setpoint, when the F3 key is pressed a
(Push Yes to Enable/Rmt Spd Setpt Disabled) message will appear on the front
panel display. Pressing YES will enable the Remote Speed Setpoint function and
the message will change to (Push No to Disable/Rmt Spd Setpt In Control).
Relays
The 505 has eight relay outputs available. Two of these relays are dedicated;
one for a system shutdown command from the 505 and one for alarm indication.
The other six relays can be programmed for a variety of indications, and system
functions.
For fail-safe operation, the dedicated Shutdown relay is energized during normal
system operation, and will de-energize when a shutdown occurs.
The dedicated Alarm relay is normally de-energized. This relay will energize
upon an alarm condition and stay energized until the alarm condition is cleared.
Optionally this relay can be configured, through the 505’s Service mode, to
toggle on and off repeatedly when an alarm conditions has occurred. With this
configuration if a reset command is given and the alarm condition still exists, the
relay will stop toggling and stay energized. The relay will start toggling again,
upon a new alarm condition. This option can be used to inform the operator when
another alarm condition has occurred.
74 Woodward
Any of the other six relays can be programmed to function as a level switch or
mode indication. When programmed as a level switch the relay will change state
when the selected parameter reaches the programmed level (energizes when
value is higher the programmed level). The following is a list of the 505’s relay
options for level indication:
Speed Aux Setpoint
Speed Setpoint Actuator Demand
KW Input Actuator 1 Demand
Sync/Load Share Input Actuator 2 Demand
Cascade Input Valve Limiter
Casc Setpoint First Stage Pressure
Aux Input
The present relay state (energized/de-energized) and relay configuration is

indicated through both Modbus communication links.
Relays not used as level switches can be programmed to indicate control states.
Except for the Trip relay, when programmed to indicate a state or event, relay will
energize upon the respective state or event occurring. The following is a list of
options for relays if used to indicate a control mode or state:
Shutdown Condition Sync Enabled
Trip Relay (additional trip relay output) Sync or Load Share Enabled
Alarm Condition Load Share Control Enabled
505 Control Status OK Casc Control Enabled
Overspeed Trip Cascade Control Active
Overspeed Test Enabled Remote Casc Setpt Enabled
Speed PID in Control Remote Casc Setpt Active
Remote Speed Setpt Enabled Aux Control Enabled
Remote Speed Setpt Active Aux Control Active
Underspeed Switch Auxiliary PID in Control
Auto Start Sequence Halted Remote Aux Setpt Enabled
On-Line PID Dynamics Mode Remote Aux Setpt Active
Local Control Mode Valve Limiter in Control
Frequency Control Armed F3 Key Selected
Frequency Control F4 Key Selected
Modbus Command
Relay Clarifications
The Shutdown Condition relay may be programmed to indicate a shutdown
condition on a remote panel or to a plant DCS. The Shutdown Indication relay is
normally de-energized. This relay will energize upon any shutdown condition and
stay energized until all trips have been cleared. The ‘RESET CLEARS TRIP’
function has no effect on the programmable Shutdown Indication relay.
When programmed as a Trip relay, the respective relay will function like the
dedicated “Shutdown” relay (normally energized and de-energizes on a
shutdown) to indicate the position of the dedicated Shutdown relay. This relay
output can be programmed to indicate a 505 initiated trip by setting the ‘Ext trips
in Trip Relay’ option to NO. Using this option, 505 trip annunciation will only
occur if the 505 tripped the turbine and not annunciate when the other external
devices shuts down the unit (external trips).
Woodward 75
The Alarm Condition relay may be programmed to indicate an alarm condition on
a remote control panel or to a DCS. The Alarm Indication relay is normally de-
energized. This relay will energize upon any alarm condition and stay energized
until all alarms have been cleared. If the ‘BLINK ALARMS’ option is ‘YES’ the
programmable Alarm Condition relay will toggle on and off repeatedly when an
alarm condition has occurred. With this configuration if a reset command is given
and the alarm condition still exists, the relay will stop toggling and stay energized.
The 505 Control Status OK relay is normally energized, and will only de-energize
if unit inlet power is lost, the 505’s CPU fails, or the 505 is in the program mode.
The Overspeed Test Enable relay will energize when an Overspeed Test is
performed. This relay functions like the 505 OSPD key’s LED (it repeatedly
toggles on and off when turbine speed is above the turbine Overspeed trip
setting).
An Underspeed Switch function can be programmed to indicate a turbine

underspeed or overpower condition. If the Underspeed option is configured, once
turbine speed reaches a level above the minimum governor speed setting, then
decreases 100 rpm below the minimum governor speed setting, the respective
relay energizes (indicating an underspeed condition). The ‘Underspeed setting’ is
adjustable through the Service mode, under the ‘Speed Values’ header.
When the Sync Enabled function is programmed, the assigned relay energizes
when a synchronize command is given. After the unit generator or utility tie
breaker is closed this function becomes disabled and the relay de-energizes. The
505’s Synchronization function can be used to synchronize across a generator
breaker or utility tie breaker.
When the Sync or Load Share Active function is programmed, the assigned relay
energizes when a synchronizing or Load Sharing is active. When both the
generator and utility tie breaker inputs are closed (Load Sharing not selected)
this function becomes disabled and the relay de-energizes.
When the (F3,F4) Key Selected function is programmed, the assigned relay
energizes when the respective function key is pressed and an enable/disable
command issued. This feature allows the 505’s F3 and F4 function keys to be
used as panel switches to select and/or enable system related functions
(synchronizers).
When the Modbus Command function is programmed, the assigned relay

energizes when the respective Modbus command “Turn On Modbus Relay X” is
issued, then de-energizes when the respective Modbus command “Turn Off
Modbus Relay X” is issued. This feature allows a 505 relay to be driven directly
from Modbus to control a system related function (synchronizing). In addition, the
assigned relay can be momentarily energized using the Modbus command
“Momentarily Energize Modbus Relay X” is issued (voltage raise/lower
commands). Refer to Chapter 6 of this manual for more information on Modbus
commands.
76 Woodward
Chapter 4.
Configuration Procedures
Program Architecture
The 505 is easy to program, due in large part to the menu-driven software. Basic
program architecture is illustrated in Figure 4-1. When the control is powered up,
and after the brief CPU self test has been completed, the control displays a ready
status (Controlling Parameter/Push Run or Program). The operating procedures
are divided into two sections: the Program Mode (Figure 4-3) and the Run Mode
(refer to Chapter 5 for RUN Mode information). The Program Mode is used to
configure the 505 for the specific application and set all operating parameters.
The Run Mode is the normal turbine operation mode and is used to view
operating parameters and run the turbine.
Figure 4-1. Basic Program Architecture
The program cannot be changed or altered while the turbine is running, however,
it can be accessed and all programmed values monitored. This minimizes the
possibility of introducing step disturbances into the system. To monitor or review
the program while in the run mode, simply press the ‘PRGM’ key then step
across or step down as necessary. If a wrong key is pressed the display will
revert to the last screen displayed before entering the program mode or the
screen designated to the key pressed.
Woodward 77
The touch keypad has several dual-function keys. Pushing any dual-function key
in the Program Mode enters the appropriate numeric or yes/no value printed on
the key. Pushing the key in the Run Mode enters the operating parameter printed
on the key, unless the “ENTER” key has been pressed to enter a specific
numeric setpoint value.
Programming the 505

Before the 505 can be used to operate any turbine, it must be configured with a
valid program. A handy 505 Program Mode Worksheet is provided at the end of
this manual. This chapter contains additional information related to completing
this worksheet and programming the specific application. It is recommended that
this worksheet be completed and used to document your specific program.
Figure 4-2 illustrates the 505 screens displayed when power is applied and how
to enter the Program Mode from this point. The password is required to protect
against both intentional and inadvertent program changes. The password can be
changed if desired, refer to Volume 2 for information on changing passwords.
Figure 4-2. Initial 505 Program Mode Entry

78 Woodward
The 505 program mode (configuration) may be accessed once the configuration
check is complete and the turbine is not running. For safety reasons the program
may be monitored only and no changes will be accepted if the turbine is running.
By pressing the PRGM key and entering the password (1113) then pressing
ENTER on the 505 keypad the SHUTDOWN CONTROL Y/N prompt will appear.
If YES is pressed the 505 will issue a shutdown and the program mode will be
accessed. If NO is pressed the 505 will revert to the Select Mode screen and the
program mode will not have been accessed.
All configuration (program mode) values and saved service mode changes are
stored in the nonvolatile memory (EEPROMs) of the 505 control. If power is
removed from the 505 all saved values will return once power is restored. No
batteries or back up power is required.
The field-configured portion of the program will be zeroed out after

factory repair. To prevent damage to your equipment, you must
reconfigure the Program Mode before the unit is put back into
service.
Using Program Menus

Once the Program Mode has been entered with the password, the specific
application information must be entered into the 505. Figure 4-3 illustrates the
505 configuration menus and the questions/options available under each
header/column.
The arrow keys (SCROLL LEFT, SCROLL RIGHT) allow you to move right or left
across the tops of the function the Program mode columns. The SCROLL UP
and SCROLL DOWN keys allow you to move up or down the columns. In the
Program Mode, the control will not step down beyond the current step with an
invalid entry (or with no entry). A valid entry must be made before the control will
allow you to step down to the next parameter.
The control displays previously entered values with each program step. If a
displayed value is satisfactory, press the SCROLL UP, SCROLL DOWN, or
ENTER keys to continue. If a new value is required, enter it, then press ENTER.
The ENTER key must be pressed to enter any new value. Also, when the
ENTER key is pressed, the control will automatically advance to the next step.
To return to the header of a program block, press the CLEAR key. To completely
exit out of the Program Mode, press the CLEAR key from the top of the header.
This will save the programmed values and initiate the program configuration
check procedure.
All steps in the program must contain valid entries. The default values are listed
along with any adjustment ranges, where applicable. If an invalid entry is made,
the control displays an invalid entry message. If ENTER is pressed, the control
displays the program step again so a valid entry can be made.
Woodward 79
Program Blocks
Figure 4-3 shows the 13 program columns. To program the control, simply step
through the blocks as described above and configure the control features for the
desired application. The first seven program columns must be programmed for
every installation. The remaining six columns contain optional features which can
be selected if desired. The 13 columns and their basic functions are described in
detail below.
Required Configuration Blocks:

Turbine Start– to configure start mode, idle/rated, and auto start
sequence settings;
Speed Control– to configure MPU or PROX PROBE information
and speed control dynamics settings;
Speed Setpoint Values– to configure speed setpoints, overspeed trip
setpoint, remote speed setting control and
critical speed avoidance bands;
Operating Parameters– to configure the unit for generator application
and to use the local/remote function;
Driver Configuration– to configure driver outputs and, if not using
driver 2, to use driver 2 for a 4–20 mA readout;
Analog Inputs– to configure analog input options;
Contact Inputs– to configure contact input options;
Optional Configuration Blocks:

Function Keys– to configure F3 and F4 function keys options;
Auxiliary Control– to configure auxiliary control information;
Cascade Control– to configure pressure, temperature control
information;
Readouts– to configure analog readout options;
Relays– to configure relay options;
Communications– to configure Modbus communication options.
80 Woodward
Figure 4-3a. Program Mode Blocks
Woodward 81
Figure 4-3b. Program Mode Blocks
82 Woodward
Figure 4-3c. Program Mode Blocks
Woodward 83
Figure 4-3d. Program Mode Blocks
84 Woodward
Each of the program blocks are described in detail below. Figure 4-3 can be
referred to for a graphical program block reference. After a column has been
configured and the display is back at the top of the column, use the left or right
arrow keys to select the next column to configure or check.
All control program questions will be displayed on the top line of the display; all
entries made will be displayed on the lower line of the display. At the beginning of
each column the control will display the header, pushing the down arrow will
access the column.
The program blocks (Figure 4-3) contain information detailing each question
and/or 505 program configuration option. Each question/option shows the default
(dflt) value and the adjustable range of that parameter (shown in parentheses). In
addition, any additional constraints on the configuration are shown in italics
following the description. There is a program mode worksheet in the appendix of
this manual that should be completed/filled-in and used as a guide for your
particular application. This worksheet can also be used for future reference to
document your application program.
Turbine Start Block

When this header appears in the display, press the down arrow key to configure
this block or press a left or right arrow key to select another block to configure.
MANUAL START? dflt= NO (Yes/No)

Select YES followed by the ENTER key to configure a manual start mode.
When configured for a manual start mode, the operator controls the turbine
speed from zero up to the minimum control speed using an external trip-
throttle valve. The Manual Start Sequence would be: Push RUN. The
actuator(s) automatically move to max position. Lastly, the operator slowly
opens the trip-throttle valve until the governor takes control.
AUTOMATIC START? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by the ENTER key to configure an automatic start
mode. When configured for an automatic start mode, the 505 controls the
turbine speed from zero up to the minimum control speed. The Automatic
Start Sequence would be: Operator opens the T&T valve, then push RUN.
The valve limiter opens automatically until the governor takes control.
SEMIAUTOMATIC START? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by the ENTER key to configure a semiautomatic start
mode. When configured, the 505 valve limiter must be manually opened by
the operator, slowly, to open the control valve and bring the turbine speed
from zero up to the minimum control speed. The Semi-automatic Start
Sequence would be: Open the T&T valve, then push RUN. The valve limiter
must then be raised by the operator until governor takes control.
(One of the three start modes must be selected before the unit will run.)
RATE TO MIN ( rpm/sec) dflt= 10.0 (0.01, 2000)
Enter the speed setpoint acceleration rate to minimum followed by the
ENTER key. This is the rate the setpoint moves from zero to the lowest
controlling speed on a start command (assuming the turbine is at zero
speed). The minimum controlling speed will be either ‘idle’ if idle/rated is
used or ‘low idle’ if the auto start sequence is used. If neither of these
startup features is used, the min speed will be the minimum governor speed
setpoint.
Woodward 85
VALVE LIMITER RATE ( %/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.1, 25)
Enter the Valve Limiter Rate, in percent per second, followed by ENTER.
This is the rate at which the valve limiter moves when RUN is selected or
when the limiter setting is changed through open/close commands. When
using a semiautomatic or automatic start, this setting should be very slow—
typically less than 2 %/sec. When using a manual start, this setting is less
critical and can be left at the default of 5 %/sec.
USE IDLE/RATED ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER if this function is desired. If NO, skip to ‘Use
Auto Start Sequence’. If YES is selected, the control will ramp from a
programmable Idle speed to a programmable Rated speed setpoint when
Rated is selected through keypad, Modbus or external switch.
IDLE SETPT (rpm) dflt= 1000 (0.0, 20000)
Enter the Idle Speed setpoint desired followed by the ENTER key. This is
the lowest speed control setpoint when using the Idle/Rated function.
RATED SETPT (rpm) dflt= 3600 (0.0, 20000)
Enter the Rated Speed setpoint desired followed by the ENTER key. This is
the speed control setpoint that the unit accelerates to when using the
Idle/Rated function.
(Must be greater than or equal to the ‘Minimum Governor Speed’ Setting)
IDLE/RATED SETPT RATE ( rpm/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 2000)
Enter the Idle/Rated rate (rpm/second) followed by ENTER. This is the at
which the speed setpoint moves between Idle and Rated speed setpoints
when using the Idle/Rated commands.
USE AUTO START SEQUENCE ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Enter YES followed by ENTER if this function is desired. If NO is selected
followed by ENTER, then the program will step to ‘Reset Clears Trip Output’
question. If this function is programmed and RUN is selected, the 505
automatically accelerates the speed setpoint to a programmable low idle
speed and holds for a programmable time then ramps to a programmable
high idle speed and holds for a programmable time then ramps to
programmable rated speed setpoint. The start sequence can be actuated or
halted through the keypad, Modbus or external switch.
COLD START ( > xx HRS ) dflt= 10 (0.0, 200)
Enter the time in hours allowed after a trip before the ‘cold start’ sequence
curves are to be used followed by the ENTER key. If this much time has
expired (or more) after a trip condition, then the control will use the cold start
values. If less than this time has expired, the control will interpolate between
the hot and cold start values to determine rates and hold times.
HOT START ( < xx HRS) dflt= 1.0 (0.0, 200)
Enter the maximum time allowed after a trip for the ‘hot start’ sequence
curves to be used followed by the ENTER key. If less than this time has
expired after a trip condition, then the control will use the hot start values.
(Must be less than or equal to the ‘Cold Start’ Hours)
LOW IDLE SETPT (rpm) dflt= 1000 (0.0, 20000)
Enter the Low Idle Speed Setting followed by the ENTER key. This is the
first hold speed when using the automatic start sequence. The speed
setpoint will remain at this setting until the low idle delay/hold time has
expired.
LOW IDLE DELAY TIME—COLD (MINUTES) dflt= 1.0 (0.0, 500)
Enter the cold start hold time desired at low idle followed by ENTER. This is
the programmable time, in minutes, that the turbine will wait/hold at the low
idle speed when a cold start is determined.
86 Woodward
LOW IDLE DELAY TIME- HOT (MINUTES) dflt= 1.0 (0.0, 500)
Enter the hot start hold time at low idle followed by ENTER. This is the
programmable time, in minutes/seconds, that the turbine will wait/hold at the
low idle speed when a hot start is determined. If the turbine has been
shutdown for longer than the Hot time but shorter than the Cold time, the
control will interpolate between the Hot and Cold delays to determine the
low idle hold time.
(Must be less than or equal to the ‘Low Idle Delay—Cold’ Setting)
RATE TO HI IDLE—COLD (rpm/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 500)
Enter the cold start rate to high idle followed by ENTER. This is the
programmable rate, in rpm per second, that the speed setpoint will
accelerate at when moving to high idle when a cold start is determined.
RATE TO HI IDLE—HOT (rpm/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 500)
Enter the hot start rate to high idle followed by ENTER. This is the
programmable rate, in rpm per second, that the speed setpoint will
accelerate at when moving to high idle when a hot start is determined. If the
turbine has been shutdown for longer than the Hot time but shorter than the
Cold time, the control will interpolate between the Hot and Cold rates to
determine the acceleration rate to the hi idle setpoint.
(Must be greater than or equal to the ‘Rate to Hi Idle—Cold’ Setting
HI IDLE SETPT (rpm) dflt= 2000 (0.0, 20000)
Enter the Hi Idle Speed Setting followed by the ENTER key. This is the
second hold speed when using the automatic start sequence. The speed
setpoint will remain at this setting until the Hi Idle Delay/hold time has
expired.
(Must be greater than the ‘Low Idle’ Setting)
HI IDLE DELAY TIME—COLD (MINUTES) dflt= 1.0 (0.0, 500)
Enter the cold start hold time desired at hi idle followed by ENTER. This is
the programmable time, in minutes, that the turbine will wait/hold at the hi
idle speed when a cold start is determined.
HI IDLE DELAY TIME—HOT (MINUTES) dflt= 1.0 (0.0, 500)
Enter the hot start hold time desired at hi idle followed by ENTER. This is
the programmable time, in minutes, that the turbine will wait/hold at the hi
idle speed when a hot start is determined. If the turbine has been shutdown
for longer than the Hot time but shorter than the Cold time, the control will
interpolate between the Hot and Cold delays to determine the hi idle hold
time.
(Must be less than or equal to the ‘Hi Idle Delay—Cold’ Setting)
RATE TO RATED SETPT—COLD (rpm/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 500)
Enter the cold start rate to the rated speed setpoint followed by ENTER.
This is the programmable rate, in rpm per second, that the speed setpoint
will accelerate at when moving to rated when a cold start is determined.
RATE TO RATED SETPT—HOT (rpm/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 500)
Enter the hot start rate to the rated speed setpoint followed by ENTER. This
is the programmable rate, in rpm per second, that the speed setpoint will
accelerate at when moving to rated when a hot start is determined. If the
turbine has been shutdown for longer than the Hot time but shorter than the
Cold time, the control will interpolate between the Hot and Cold rates to
determine the acceleration rate to the rated setpoint.
(Must be greater than or equal to the ‘Rate to Rated—Cold’ Setting)
RATED SETPT (rpm) dflt= 3600 (0.0, 20000)
Enter the Rated Speed Setting followed by the ENTER key. This is the final
speed setting when using the automatic start sequence. Once this speed
setpoint is reached, the start sequence is complete.
(Must be greater than or equal to the ‘Minimum Governor’ Setting)
Woodward 87
AUTO HALT AT IDLE SETPTS? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by the ENTER key to automatically halt the auto start
sequence at the idle setpoints. This feature would result in the unit
automatically stopping/halting at the low idle setpoint and at the high idle
setpoint. Also, if the unit is started and the speed is above the low idle
setpoint, the sequence will be halted. Select NO to allow the control to
perform its automatic start sequence routine without interruption.
EXTERNAL TRIPS IN TRIP RELAY ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by the ENTER key to allow the external trip input(s) to
de- energize the Trip Relay output. When set to NO, an external trip contact
input to the 505 will shut down the 505 control but will not de-energize the
505’s trip relay output.
RESET CLEARS TRIP OUTPUT ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by the ENTER key to configure the Reset Clears Trip
Relay output function. When set to YES, a Reset command will energize the
trip relay output even when a trip condition is still sensed by the 505—
typically due to one of the external trip inputs. Once reset, the unit will be
‘Ready to Start’ as soon as all external trip inputs are closed. When NO, the
trip relay output will be de-energized on a 505 trip and will not energize until
all trips have cleared and a ‘Reset’ command is given.
Speed Control Block

(The maximum turbine speed is 20000 rpm and the maximum speed input
frequency is 15000 hertz.)
TEETH SEEN BY MPU dflt= 60.0 (1, 300)

Enter the number of teeth on gear that the speed probe is mounted on
followed by the ENTER key.
MPU GEAR RATIO dflt= 1.0 (0.05, 100)
Enter the speed sensor gear ratio followed by the ENTER key. This value is
the ratio of the speed sensor gear to the turbine shaft. This gear ratio is the
result of dividing the speed of the speed sensor gear by the speed of the
turbine shaft.
FAILED SPEED LEVEL (rpm) dflt= 250 (0.5, 1000)
Enter the Failed Speed Level (in rpm) followed by the ENTER key to set the
speed probe input failure level. If speed drops below this level, the control
will determine the speed input device is failed and issue an alarm. If all
speed inputs fail, the 505 will issue a trip on loss of speed inputs.
(Must be greater than or equal to 0.0204 x Overspeed Test Limit Setting)
USE SPEED INPUT #2? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER if both speed inputs are to be used.
FAILED SPEED LEVEL (rpm) dflt= 250 (0.5, 1000)
Enter the failed speed level (in rpm) followed by the ENTER key to set the
speed probe input failure level. If speed drops below this level, the control
will determine the speed input device is failed and issue an alarm. If all
speed inputs fail, the 505 will issue a trip on loss of speed inputs.
(Must be greater than or equal to 0.0204 x Overspeed Test Limit Setting)
88 Woodward
OFF-LINE PROPORTIONAL GAIN dflt= 5.0 (0.0, 100)
Enter the off-line PID proportional gain percentage followed by ENTER. This
value is used to set speed/load control response when the Generator or
Utility Tie breaker contacts are open (if the unit is a generator) or if the
turbine speed is below minimum governor speed (if the unit is not a
generator) or when the Select Dynamics function is used and the contact is
open. This value can be changed in the Run Mode while the turbine is
operating. A recommended starting value is 5%.
OFF-LINE INTEGRAL GAIN dflt= 0.5 (0.01, 50)
Enter the off-line PID integral gain percentage followed by ENTER. This
value is used to set speed/load control response when the Generator or
Utility Tie breaker contacts are open (if the unit is a generator) or if the
turbine speed is below minimum governor speed (if the unit is not a
open. This value can be changed in the Run Mode while the turbine is
operating. A recommended starting value is 0.5%.
OFF-LINE DERIVATIVE RATIO dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 100)
Enter the off-line PID derivative ratio followed by ENTER. This value is used
to set speed/load control response when the Generator or Utility Tie breaker
contacts are open (if the unit is a generator) or if the turbine speed is below
minimum governor speed (if the unit is not a generator) or when the Select
Dynamics function is used and the contact is open. This value can be
changed in the Service Mode while the turbine is operating. A
recommended starting value is 5% .
ON-LINE PROPORTIONAL GAIN dflt= 5.0 (0.0, 100)
Enter the on-line PID proportional gain percentage followed by ENTER. This
value is used to set speed/load control response when the Generator and
Utility Tie breaker contacts are closed (if the unit is a generator) or if the
turbine speed is above minimum governor speed (if the unit is not a
closed. This value can be changed in the Run Mode while the turbine is
operating. A recommended starting value is 5%.
ON-LINE INTEGRAL GAIN dflt= 0.5 (0.01, 50)
Enter the on-line PID integral gain percentage followed by ENTER. This
value is used to set speed/load control response when the Generator and
Utility Tie breaker contacts are closed (if the unit is a generator) or if the
turbine speed is above minimum governor speed (if the unit is not a
closed. This value can be changed in the Run Mode while the turbine is
operating. A recommended starting value is 0.5%.
ON-LINE DERIVATIVE RATIO dflt= 5.0 (0.01,100)
Enter the on-line PID derivative ratio followed by ENTER. This value is used
to set speed/load control response when the Generator and Utility Tie
breaker contacts are closed (if the unit is a generator) or if the turbine speed
is above minimum governor speed (if the unit is not a generator) or when
the Select Dynamics function is used and the contact is closed. This value
can be changed in the Service Mode while the turbine is operating. A
recommended starting value is 5% (see Chapter 5—PID Dynamics Settings
for more information).
Speed Setpoint Values Block

(The maximum turbine speed is 20000 rpm and the maximum speed sensor
input frequency is 15000 hertz.)
Woodward 89
OVERSPEED TEST LIMIT (rpm) dflt= 1100 (0.0, 20000)
Set the overspeed test limit (in rpm) followed by the ENTER key. This is the
maximum speed setpoint the control will increase to when overspeed testing
the unit. The setpoint can only be raised to this level when the overspeed
test function is being performed.
OVERSPEED TRIP LEVEL (rpm) dflt= 1000 (0.0, 20000)
Set the 505’s overspeed trip level (in rpm) followed by the ENTER key. This
is the governor overspeed trip setpoint only and is not to be used as ultimate
overspeed protection.
(Must be less than the ‘Overspeed Test Limit’ Setting)
MAX GOVERNOR SPEED SETPOINT (rpm) dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 20000)
Set the maximum governor control speed followed by the ENTER key. This
is the normal governor operation upper limit. For turbine/generator
applications, this value must be at least equal to [Rated Speed + (Droop % x
Rated Speed)].
(Must be less than the ‘Overspeed Trip Level’ Setting)
MIN GOVERNOR SPEED SETPOINT (rpm) dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 20000)
Set the minimum governor control speed followed by the ENTER key. This
is the normal governor operation lower limit.
(Must be less than the ‘Maximum Governor Speed’ Setting)
SPEED SETPOINT SLOW RATE (rpm/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 100)
Enter the speed setpoint slow rate in rpm per second followed by the
ENTER key. This the rate of speed change for normal operation.
USE REMOTE SPEED SETPOINT ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES followed by ENTER if using an analog input to set the
Speed/Load Setpoint.
RMT SPEED SETPT MAX RATE (rpm/sec) dflt= 50.0 (0.01, 500)
Enter the Maximum Rate of speed change for remote speed setpoint
operation followed by the ENTER key.
USE CRITICAL SPEEDS ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES followed by ENTER to use the critical speed avoidance logic.
When set to YES, allows up to two critical speed avoidance bands to be
programmed. Within the band, the speed setpoint cannot be stopped. These
bands are used to protect the turbine and driven device from speeds that
have inherently high vibration.
(Must program either ‘Idle/Rated’ or ‘Auto Start Sequence’ to use critical
speed avoidance. The lowest critical speed min must be greater than idle or
low idle.)
CRITICAL SPEED RATE (rpm/sec) dflt= 50.0 (0.1, 2000)
Set the rate that the speed setpoint will move through the critical speed
avoidance ranges (in rpm/second) followed by the ENTER key
(Must be greater than the ‘Speed Setpt Slow Rate’ Setting)
CRITICAL SPEED 1 MAX (rpm) dflt= 1.0 (1.0, 20000)
Set the upper limit of the critical speed avoidance band followed by the
ENTER key.
(Must be less than the ‘Minimum Governor Speed’ Setting)
CRITICAL SPEED 1 MIN (rpm) dflt= 1.0 (1.0, 20000)
Set the lower limit of the critical speed avoidance band followed by the
ENTER key.
(Must be less than the ‘Critical Speed 1 Max’ Setting)
USE CRITICAL SPEED 2 ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by the ENTER key to use the second critical speed
avoidance band.
CRITICAL SPEED 2 MAX (rpm) dflt= 1.0 (1.0, 20000)
Set the upper limit of the critical speed avoidance band followed by the
ENTER key.
(Must be less than the ‘Minimum Governor Speed’ Setting)
90 Woodward
CRITICAL SPEED 2 MIN (rpm) dflt= 1.0 (1.0, 20000)
Set the lower limit of the critical speed avoidance band followed by the
ENTER key.
(Must be less than the ‘Critical Speed 2 Max’ Setting)
Operating Parameters Block

GENERATOR APPLICATION? dflt= NO (Yes/No)

Select YES followed by the ENTER key if the turbine is driving a generator.
If YES, requires a Generator breaker and Utility Tie breaker to be
programmed as contact inputs. If NO, skip to the ‘Use Local/Remote’
question.
USE GEN BREAKER OPEN TRIP? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by the ENTER key if opening the generator breaker is
to initiate a turbine trip. If YES, the unit will trip when the generator breaker
opens after being closed, unless a Controlled Stop is selected. If NO, the
speed setpoint will instantly reset to the ‘Gen Open Setpoint’ which is
defaulted to 50 rpm below rated speed.
USE TIE BREAKER OPEN TRIP? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by the ENTER key if opening the utility tie breaker is to
initiate a turbine trip. If YES, the unit will trip when the utility tie breaker
opens after being closed, unless a Controlled Stop is selected. If NO and
the generator breaker is closed, the speed setpoint will instantly reset to the
speed last seen by the unit and move to the ‘Rated Speed Setpoint’ and an
alarm is issued. If NO and the generator breaker is open, there is only an
alarm when the utility tie breaker opens.
USE KW DROOP? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to use KW droop (generator load control) or NO to use internal
Speed droop (turbine inlet valve position) followed by the ENTER key. If
YES, generator KW feedback is used as the controlling parameter for
stability when the unit is on-line. If NO, internal LSS demand/actuator
position droop is used.
KW MAX LOAD (KW) dflt= 20000 (0.1, 20000)
Enter the max load followed by the ENTER key. This setting limits the
maximum load the turbine/generator can carry.
(Must be less than or equal to the ‘KW Input at 20 mA’ Setting)
DROOP ( % ) dflt= 5.0 (0.0, 10)
Enter the droop percentage followed by the ENTER key. Typically set
between 4-6% and not more than 10%.
RATED SPEED SETPOINT (rpm) dflt= 3600 (0.0, 20000)
Set the generator’s rated speed setpoint followed by the ENTER key.
(Must be greater than or equal to the ‘Minimum Governor Speed’ Setting
and less than the/Maximum Governor Speed’ setting)
USE FREQ ARM/DISARM? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES is using frequency control arm/disarm followed by the ENTER
key. If YES, frequency control must be armed before the unit will switch into
frequency control. If NO, frequency control is always armed and the unit will
go into frequency control whenever the generator breaker is closed and the
utility tie breaker is open.
(Cannot program both Freq Arm/Disarm and Loadsharing)
Woodward 91
USE LOCAL/REMOTE? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES if using Local/Remote control logic followed by the ENTER key.
If YES, permits the unit to go from REMOTE (Modbus, contact input and
front panel) control to LOCAL (front panel) control only. If NO, all
programmed inputs are active at all times. Refer to the Service Mode
information in Volume 2 for additional settings on the Local/Remote function.
Driver Configuration Block

ACTUATOR 1 IS 4–20 mA ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)

Select actuator #1 output current range. Select YES for 4–20 mA or NO for
20–160 mA followed by the ENTER key. Most Woodward actuators are 20–
160 mA.
INVERT DRIVER OUTPUTS ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to invert actuator driver output(s) followed by the ENTER key.
This is normally set to NO and is typically only used in certain applications
where the 505 has a backup controller that takes control when the 505 fails.
USE ACT 1 FAULT SHUTDOWN ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER to issue a trip whenever an actuator fault is
detected. If YES, the 505 will issue a shutdown if Actuator 1 has a fault. If
NO, an actuator fault alarm will be issued when a fault is detected. An
actuator fault will be determined if the current drops below or goes above
the failure levels, basically checking for an open or a short circuit in the
actuator wires/coil.
ACTUATOR 1 DITHER (%) dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 10)
Enter the dither percentage for actuator #1 followed by the ENTER key.
Enter 0.0 if no dither is required. Woodward TM-type actuators typically
require dither. This value can be changed in the Run Mode while the turbine
is operating. See Run Mode—Chapter 5.
USE ACTUATOR NUMBER 2? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER if using both Actuator outputs (Act 1 & Act
2). If NO skip to ‘Use Actuator 2 as a Readout’.
ACTUATOR 2 IS 4–20 mA ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select actuator #2 output current range. Select YES for 4–20 mA or NO for
20- 160 mA followed by the ENTER key. Most Woodward actuators are 20–
160 mA.
ACTUATOR 2 OFFSET ( % ) dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 100)
Enter the percentage actuator #1 is opened when actuator #2 begins to
open followed by the ENTER key. Enter 0.0 if both actuators open together.
USE ACT 2 FAULT SHUTDOWN? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER to issue a trip whenever an actuator fault is
detected. If YES, the 505 will issue a shutdown if Actuator 2 has a fault. If
NO, an actuator fault alarm will be issued when a fault is detected. An
actuator fault will be determined if the current drops below or goes above
the failure levels, basically checking for an open or a short circuit in the
actuator wires/coil.
ACTUATOR 2 DITHER ( % ) dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 10)
Enter the dither percentage for actuator #2 followed by the ENTER key.
Enter 0.0 if no dither is required. Woodward TM-type actuators typically
require dither. This value can be changed in the Run Mode while the turbine
is operating. See Run Mode—Chapter 5.
92 Woodward
USE ACTUATOR 2 AS A READOUT? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER to use the actuator output as an additional
readout. When set to NO, the actuator #2 output is not used for anything.
This option is available for customers who do not need two actuator drivers
and would like an additional readout.
ACTUATOR 2 READOUT IS: (must choose from list)
Scroll through the option list by using the Adjust Up/Down Arrows or by
selecting the NO key until the option desired appears, then press the YES or
ENTER keys to select the option/function.
OPTIONS FOR ACTUATOR 2 READOUT
Actual Speed Rmt Cascade Setpt
Speed Setpoint Auxiliary Input
Remote Speed Setpt Auxiliary Setpoint
Sync/Load Share Input Rmt Auxiliary Setpt
KW Input Valve Limiter Setpoint
Cascade Input Actuator 1 Readout
Cascade Setpoint First Stage Press Input
(The function that the readout uses must be programmed or an error
message will occur. For example, to use the Cascade Setpoint readout, the
‘Use Cascade’ function must be programmed)
READOUT 4 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)

Set the value (in engineering units) that corresponds to 4 milliamps (mA) on
the analog output followed by the ENTER key. If the value on the display is
correct, just select the ENTER key which will advance you to the next
question.
READOUT 20 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)
Set the value (in engineering units) that corresponds to 20 milliamps (mA)
on the analog output followed by the ENTER key. If the value on the display
is correct, just select the ENTER key which will advance you to the next
question.
(Must be greater than the ‘Readout 4 mA Value’ Setting)
Analog Inputs Block

No two analog inputs can be programmed for the same function. In addition, the
function that the analog input uses must be programmed or an error message will
occur. For example, to use the Cascade Input, the ‘Use Cascade’ function must
be programmed.
The first five (1-5) analog inputs are differential inputs that can be from a self-
powered or a loop-powered (24 Vdc from 505) transducer. However, analog input
#6 is an isolated analog input and should be used when isolation is required
(refer to Chapter 2 for information on the analog input hardware).
ANALOG INPUT # 1 FUNCTION (must choose from list)

ANALOG INPUT OPTIONS
Remote Speed Setpt Remote Cascade Setpt
Synchronizing Input Auxiliary Input
Sync/Load Share Input Remote Aux Setpt
KW/Unit Load Input First Stage Press Input
Cascade Input (Not Used)
Woodward 93
INPUT 1—4 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)
the analog input followed by the ENTER key. If the value on the display is
question.
INPUT 1—20 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 100 (-20000, 20000)
on the analog input followed by the ENTER key. If the value on the display
question.
(Must be greater than the ‘Input 4 mA Value’ Setting
Analog Inputs # 2 through # 6 are entered following the same rules as described
for Analog Input # 1.
Contact Inputs Block

If unit is configured as a ‘Generator Set’, then contact inputs must be

programmed for generator and tie breaker contacts. Also, each contact input
option may be configured only once. In addition, the function that the contact
input uses must be programmed or an error message will occur. For example, to
use the Cascade Control Enable contact input, the ‘Use Cascade’ function must
be programmed.
CONTACT INPUT 1 FUNCTION (must choose from list)

CONTACT INPUT OPTIONS
(Not Used) Casc Setpt Raise
Generator Breaker Casc Setpt Lower
Utility Tie Breaker Casc Control Enable
Overspeed Test Remote Casc Setpt Enable
External Run Aux Setpt Raise
Start Permissive Aux Setpt Lower
Idle/Rated Aux Control Enable
Halt/Continue Auto Start Sequence Remote Aux Setpt Enable
Override MPU Fault Valve Limiter Open
Select On-Line Dynamics Valve Limiter Close
Local/Remote External Trip 2
Remote Speed Setpt Enable External Trip 3
Sync Enable External Trip 4
Controlled Shutdown (Manual) External Trip 5
Freq Control Arm/Disarm
Contact Inputs # 2 through # 12 are entered following the same rules as

described for Contact Input # 1.
94 Woodward
Function Keys Block

Each function key option may be configured only once. In addition, the function
that the function key uses must be programmed or an error message will occur.
For example, to use the Cascade Control Enable function key, the ‘Use Cascade’
function must be programmed.
F3 KEY PERFORMS (must choose from list)

OPTIONS FOR FUNCTION KEYS F3 & F4
(Not Used) Freq Arm/Disarm
Local/Remote Casc Control Enable
Idle/Rated Remote Casc Setpt Enable
Halt/Continue Auto Start Sequence Aux Control Enable
Remote Speed Setpt Enable Remote Aux Setpt Enable
Sync Enable Energize Relay Output
BLINK F3 LED WHEN NOT ACTIVE? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER to blink the function key’s LED when the
function is not active but is enabled. The LED will be ON whenever the
function is active. If NO, the function key LED is ON when the function is
enabled, active, or in control.
F4 KEY PERFORMS (must choose from list)
BLINK F4 LED WHEN NOT IN CNTRL? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER to blink the function key’s LED when the
function is not active but is enabled. The LED will be ON whenever the
function is active or in control. If NO, the function key LED is ON when the
function is enabled, active, or in control.
Auxiliary Control Block

USE AUXILIARY CONTROL? dflt= NO (Yes/No)

Select YES followed by ENTER to configure the auxiliary control function.
Select NO if the auxiliary function is not used.
LOST AUX INPUT SHUTDOWN? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER if a shutdown command is to be given when
the auxiliary input fails. If NO, then no shutdown command will be given
when the auxiliary input fails, only an alarm.
USE KW INPUT? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If YES, allows the AUX control channel to use the KW Input programmed.
When YES, no AUX analog input is needed. When NO, an AUX analog
input must be programmed.
INVERT AUX INPUT? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER if the auxiliary control will be reverse acting.
If NO, then the control will be forward acting. Typically this will be set to NO,
the only time the input would be inverted is if the valve needs to open when
the input exceeds the setpoint. An example where the invert would be YES
is for turbine inlet pressure control.
Woodward 95
MIN AUX SETPOINT (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)
Set the min AUX setpoint followed by ENTER. This value is the minimum
setpoint value that the auxiliary setpoint can be decreased/lowered to (lower
limit of AUX setpoint).
MAX AUX SETPOINT (UNITS) dflt= 100 (-20000, 20000)
Set the max AUX setpoint followed by ENTER. This value is the maximum
setpoint value that the auxiliary setpoint can be increased/raised to (upper
limit of AUX setpoint).
(Must be greater than the ‘Min Aux Setpt’ Setting)
AUX SETPOINT RATE (UNITS/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 1000)
Set the AUX setpoint rate followed by ENTER. This value is the rate (in units
per second) at which AUX setpoint moves when adjusted.
USE AUX ENABLE? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER if using the Auxiliary control enable/disable
feature. If YES, Aux will require an ENABLE command to enable Aux
control. If NO, then the Auxiliary function will be enabled constantly and will
act as a controlling limiter. An example of using Aux as a limiter is using Aux
to limit the maximum KW load that the unit carries. The Aux PID is not
normally in control of the valve output. But if the Aux (KW) input exceeds the
setpoint, the Aux PID controller would decrease and take control of the
valve until the KW level decreases below the maximum kW(Aux) setting.
Alternatively, if the Aux enable is used, the Aux setpoint tracks the Aux
input. When enabled, the Aux PID takes control of the valve and the speed
setpoint tracks the speed/load of the unit for bumpless transfer between
modes.
SETPT INITIAL VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)
Set the setpoint initialization value followed by ENTER. When not using the
Aux Enable function, this is the value that the auxiliary setpoint initializes to
upon power- up or exiting the program mode.
(Must be less than or equal to the ‘Max Aux Setpoint’ Setting)
AUX DROOP (%) dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 100)
Enter the droop percentage followed by the ENTER key. If required, typically
set between 4-6%.
AUX PID PROPORTIONAL GAIN (%) dflt= 1.0 (0.0, 100)
Enter the AUX PID proportional gain value followed by ENTER. This value is
used to set auxiliary control response. This value can be changed in the
Run Mode while the turbine is operating. If unknown, a recommended
starting value is 1%.
AUX PID INTEGRAL GAIN (%) dflt= 0.3 (0.001, 50)
Enter the AUX PID integral gain value followed by ENTER. This value is
used to set auxiliary control response. This value can be changed in the
AUX PID DERIVATIVE RATIO (%) dflt= 100 (0.01, 100)
Enter the AUX PID derivative ratio followed by ENTER. This value is used to
set auxiliary control response. This value can be changed in the Service
Mode while the turbine is operating. If unknown, a recommended starting
value is 100%.
TIEBRKR OPEN AUX DSBL ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER if the auxiliary control will be disabled when
the utility tie breaker opens. If NO is selected, then auxiliary control will not
be disabled when the utility tie breaker is opened.
GENBRKR OPEN AUX DSBL ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER if the auxiliary control will be disabled when
the generator breaker opens. If NO is selected, then auxiliary control will not
be disabled when the generator breaker is opened.
USE REMOTE AUX SETTING ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to allow the aux setpoint to be adjusted from an analog input.
(Must program a ‘remote auxiliary setpoint’ analog input)
96 Woodward
REMOTE AUX MAX RATE (UNITS/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.1, 1000)
Enter the maximum rate at which the remote input will move the aux
setpoint followed by the ENTER key.
AUXILIARY UNITS OF MEASURE: (must choose from list)
Options:
psi t/h
kPa k#/hr
MW #/hr
KW kg/cm2
degF bar
degC atm
(none)
Cascade Control Block

USE CASCADE CONTROL? dflt= NO (Yes/No)

Select YES followed by ENTER to configure the cascade control function.
Select NO if the cascade function is not used.
INVERT CASCADE INPUT? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES followed by ENTER if the cascade control will be reverse acting.
If NO is selected, the control will be forward acting. Typically this will be set
to NO, the only time the input would be inverted is if the valve needs to open
when the input exceeds the setpoint. An example where the invert would be
YES is for turbine inlet pressure control.
MIN CASCADE SETPOINT (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)
Set the minimum cascade setpoint followed by ENTER. This value is the
minimum setpoint value that the cascade setpoint can be
decreased/lowered to (lower limit of cascade setpoint).
MAX CASCADE SETPOINT (UNITS) dflt= 100 (-20000, 20000)
Set the maximum cascade setpoint followed by ENTER. This value is the
maximum setpoint value that the cascade setpoint can be increased/raised
to (upper limit of cascade setpoint).
(Must be greater than the ‘Min Cascade Setpt’ Setting)
CASC SETPT RATE (UNITS/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.01, 1000)
Set the cascade setpoint rate followed by ENTER. This value is the rate (in
units per second) at which cascade setpoint moves when adjusted.
USE SETPOINT TRACKING? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Select YES or NO followed by ENTER. If YES, the cascade setpoint tracks
the cascade input to provide bumpless transfer to cascade control when it is
enabled. If NO, the cascade setpoint remains at the last position except on
power-up or exiting the program mode.
SETPT INITIAL VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 100.0 (-20000, 20000)
Set the setpoint initialization value followed by ENTER. When not using the
Setpoint Tracking function, this is the value that the cascade setpoint
initializes to upon power-up or exiting the program mode.
(Must be less than or equal to the ‘Max Cascade Setpt’ Setting)
SPEED SETPOINT LOWER LIMIT (rpm) dflt= 3605 (0.0, 20000)
Set the minimum speed setpoint that the cascade controller can lower the
speed setpoint to followed by ENTER. To protect the unit, this value should
be at or above rated speed if the unit is a generator.
(Must be greater than or equal to the ‘Minimum Governor Speed Setpt’
Setting)
Woodward 97
SPEED SETPOINT UPPER LIMIT (rpm) dflt= 3780 (0.0, 20000)
Set the maximum speed setpoint that cascade controller can raise the
speed setpoint to followed by the ENTER key.
(Must be less than or equal to the ‘Maximum Governor Speed Setpt’
Setting)
MAX SPEED SETPOINT RATE (rpm/sec) dflt= 20 (0.1, 100)
Set the maximum rate at which the cascade control can vary the speed
CASCADE DROOP (%) dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 100)
Enter the droop percentage followed by the ENTER key. If needed, typically
set between 4-6%.
CASCADE PID PROPORTIONAL GAIN (%) dflt= 5.0 (0.0, 100)
Enter the cascade PID proportional gain value followed by ENTER. This
value is used to set cascade control response. This value can be changed in
the Run Mode while the turbine is operating. If unknown, a recommended
CASCADE PID INTEGRAL GAIN (%) dflt= 0.3 (0.001, 50.0)
Enter the cascade PID integral gain value followed by ENTER. This value is
used to set cascade control response. This value can be changed in the
starting value is 0.3%.
CASCADE PID DERIVATIVE RATIO (%) dflt= 100 (0.01, 100)
Enter the cascade PID derivative ratio followed by ENTER. This value is
used to set cascade control response. This value can be changed in the
Service Mode while the turbine is operating. If unknown, a recommended
USE REMOTE CASCADE SETTING? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to allow the Cascade setpoint to be adjusted from an analog
input.
(Must program a ‘remote cascade setpoint’ analog input
RMT CASCADE MAX RATE (UNITS/sec) dflt= 5.0 (0.1, 1000)
Enter the maximum rate at which the remote input will move the cascade
CASCADE UNITS OF MEASURE: (must choose from list)
Options:
psi kPa
MW KW
degF degC
t/h k#/hr
kg/cm² bar
atm #/hr
(none)
Readouts
this block or press a left or right arrow key to select another block to configure. All
six 4–20 mA analog readouts may be configured. The function that the readout
uses must be programmed or an error message will occur. For example, to use
the Cascade Setpoint readout, the ‘Use Cascade’ function must be programmed.
98 Woodward
ANALOG READOUT # 1 FUNCTION (must choose from list)
ANALOG READOUT OPTIONS
Actual Speed Auxiliary Input
Speed Setpoint Auxiliary Setpoint
Remote Speed Setpt Rmt Auxiliary Setpt
Load Share Input Valve Limiter Setpoint
Sync Input Actuator Demand Readout
KW Input Actuator 1 Readout
Cascade Input Actuator 2 Readout
Cascade Setpoint First Stg Press Input
Rmt Cascade Setpt (Not Used)
READOUT 1—4 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)
the analog output followed by the ENTER key. If the value on the display is
question.
READOUT 1—20 mA VALUE (UNITS) dflt= 100 (-20000, 20000)
on the analog output followed by the ENTER key. If the value on the display
question.
(Must be greater than the ‘Readout 4 mA Value’ Setting)
Readouts # 2 through # 6 are entered following the same rules as described for
Readout # 1.
Relays Block
You may configure up to six relays in addition to the two pre-assigned relays
(Alarm, Shutdown). The relay can be configured as either a level switch or as an
indication. An example of a level switch is a Speed Switch and an example of an
indication is Cascade Control Enabled.
USE RELAY # 1? dflt= NO (Yes/No)

Press Set to YES followed by ENTER to use this relay output. Press NO
followed by ENTER to skip to the next ‘USE RELAY’ question.
IS RELAY # 1 A LEVEL SWITCH? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Press YES followed by ENTER to use this relay output as a level switch.
Press NO followed by ENTER to skip to the ‘RELAY ENERGIZES ON:’
question..
RELAY 1 IS LEVEL SWITCH FOR : (must choose from list)
LIST OF OPTIONS FOR LEVEL SWITCH
Actual Speed Level Aux Setpoint Level
Speed Setpoint Level Valve Limiter Level
KW Input Level Actuator Demand (hand valve)
Sync/Load Share Level Act 1 Output Level
Cascade Input Level Act 2 Output Level
Cascade Setpoint Level First Stg Press Level
Aux Input Level Switch
Woodward 99
RELAY 1 ON LEVEL (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)
Enter the level switch ON setting in engineering units followed by the
ENTER key. There is an ON and an OFF setting for each level switch
option. This allows the user to program the desired hysteresis for the
function selected.
RELAY 1 OFF LEVEL (UNITS) dflt= 0.0 (-20000, 20000)
Enter the level switch OFF setting in engineering units followed by the
ENTER key.
(Must be less than the ‘Relay On Level’ Setting)
RELAY 1 ENERGIZES ON : (must choose from list)
OPTIONS FOR RELAYS IF USED TO INDICATE STATE
Shutdown Condition Sync Enabled
Trip Relay (add’l trip relay output) Sync/Load Share Active
Alarm Condition Load Share Control
505 Control OK Casc Control Enabled
Overspeed Trip Cascade Control Active
Overspeed Test Enabled Remote Casc Setpt Enabled
Speed PID in Control Remote Casc Setpt Active
Remote Speed Setpt Enabled Aux Control Enabled
Remote Speed Setpt Active Aux Control Active
Underspeed Switch Auxiliary PID in Control
Auto Start Sequence Halted Remote Aux Setpt Enabled
On-Line PID Dynamics Mode Remote Aux Setpt Active
Local Control Mode Valve Limiter in Control
Frequency Control Armed F3 Key Selected
Frequency Control F4 Key Selected
Modbus Command Selected
Relay outputs # 2 through # 6 are entered following the same rules as described
for Relay output # 1.
Communications Block
USE COMMUNICATIONS? dflt= NO (Yes/No)

Set to YES followed by ENTER to use the Modbus communications feature
of the 505. There are two identical Modbus ports available. Either or both
can be configured for use. Select NO followed by ENTER if Modbus
communications will not be used.
USE MODBUS PORT 1? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES followed by ENTER to use the Modbus Port 1. Set to NO
followed by ENTER to skip to ‘Use Modbus Port 2’. If the displayed value is
already correct, simply select ENTER.
MODE: ASCII OR RTU dflt= 2 (1, 2)
Enter the integer corresponding to the Modbus transmission mode required
followed by the ENTER key. Enter a ‘1’ for ASCII mode or a ‘2’ for RTU
mode. For more information on the difference between these modes, refer
to Chapter 6. If the displayed value is already correct, simply select ENTER.
MODBUS DEVICE NUMBER dflt= 1 (1, 247)
Enter the integer corresponding to the Modbus device number/address
required followed by the ENTER key. If the displayed value is already
correct, simply select ENTER.
100 Woodward
COMMUNICATIONS MODE dflt= 1 (1, 3)
Enter the integer corresponding to the serial communications mode required
followed by the ENTER key. Enter a ‘1’ for RS-232, a ‘2’ for RS-422 or a ‘3’
for RS-485 communications. If the displayed value is already correct, simply
select ENTER.
PORT1 BAUD RATE dflt= 9 (1, 11)
Enter the integer corresponding to the communications baud rate followed
by the ENTER key. If the displayed value is already correct, simply select
ENTER.
1 = 110 2 = 300 3 = 600 4 = 1200
5 = 1800 6 = 2400 7 = 4800 8 = 9600
9 = 19200 10 = 38400 11 = 57600
PORT 1 STOP BITS dflt= 1 (1, 3)
Enter the integer corresponding to the stop bits required followed by the
ENTER key. If the displayed value is already correct, simply select ENTER.
Enter a ‘1’ for 1 stop bit, a ‘2’ for 1.5 stop bits or a ‘3’ for 2 stop bits.
PORT 1 PARITY dflt= 1 (1, 3)
Enter the integer corresponding to the parity required followed by the
ENTER key. If the displayed value is already correct, simply select ENTER.
Enter a ‘1’ for none, a ‘2’ for odd parity or a ‘3’ for even parity.
USE MODBUS PORT 2? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES followed by ENTER to use the Modbus Port 2. If the displayed
value is already correct, simply select ENTER. Modbus Port # 2 is entered
following the same rules as described for Modbus Port # 1.
Exiting the Program Mode
Figure 4-4. Exiting the Program Mode
Woodward 101
Once the programming steps have been completed, the Program Mode can be
exited (refer to Figure 4-4 Exiting the Program Mode). To exit the Program mode
the “CLEAR’ key is pressed twice. This initiates the 505 to save the configuration
and to begin a Configuration Check procedure. If there are no errors in the
programming, the 505 front-panel will return to the ready state and display the
‘Controlling Parameter/Press Run or Program’ screen. However, if there is an
error in the program, the ‘Config ERROR—Press PRGM’ display will appear
along will the programming error(s) discovered. The next section identifies the
various configuration error messages and explains the meaning of the error.
Program Configuration Error Messages

When the Program Mode is exited, the control automatically performs a
completeness check on the configured program to assure that required program
blocks have values loaded into them. This check cannot determine if the values
entered are realistic, but it makes sure that values have been loaded into
required parameters. If any errors are found in the program, the ‘Config
ERROR—Press PRGM’ display will appear along with the programming error(s)
discovered. If there is more than one error discovered, they can be displayed by
pressing the down arrow key. This key will scroll through all the error messages
and allow you to determine their cause(s).
The configuration error message alerts you that a programming change is

required before the configured program can operate the turbine. You must re-
enter the Program Mode and fix the problem before the control will allow the
turbine to run. The completeness check will continue to fail until the control is
satisfied that the configured program is complete.
This section of the manual identifies the various configuration error messages
that may appear and explains the meaning of the error.
Start/Speed Program Errors

No Start Mode Selected—RUN was selected but no start mode was selected in
the Program mode. One of the three start modes must be selected in the
Program mode under the Start Block.
Speed > 15000 Hz—The maximum speed input is 15000 hertz. This is a
limitation of the 505’s hardware/speed sensing circuitry. The frequency input of
the speed sensor must be less than this value. The gear the speed sensor is
mounted on may need to be changed to one with less teeth, this will decrease
the frequency seen by the speed probes.
Spd #1 Fld < Freq Range—The failed speed setting for speed input #1 is below
the minimum allowed setting. The minimum allowed setting is calculated as
follows: (Overspeed Test Limit) * (0.0204).
Spd #2 Fld < Freq Range—The failed speed setting for speed input #2 is below
the minimum allowed setting. The minimum allowed setting is calculated as
follows: (Overspeed Test Limit) * (0.0204).
102 Woodward
Critical Speed Program Errors

Crit Rate < Slow Rate—The acceleration rate (rpm/second) through the critical
speed avoidance band must be faster than the normal speed setpoint rate.
Crit Spd Err/No Idle—A critical speed avoidance band was programmed but
neither idle/rated or auto start sequence was programmed. To use the critical
speed avoidance logic one of these functions that uses an idle speed must be
programmed.
Lo Idle set in Critical—Either the idle speed setpoint (when using idle/rated) or
the low idle setpoint (when using the auto start sequence) was programmed
within a critical speed avoidance band.
Hi Idle set in Critical—The hi idle speed setpoint (when using the auto start
sequence) was programmed within a critical speed avoidance band.
Idle Program Errors

Idle Setpt > Min Gov—The Idle Speed setpoint was programmed at a higher
speed than the minimum governor speed setpoint.
Rated Speed > Max Gov—The Rated Speed setpoint was programmed at a
higher speed than the maximum governor speed setpoint.
Generator Program Errors

KW Max Load > KW Input—The KW Max Load setting was programmed at a
higher value than the maximum KW input (KW input at 20 mA).
No Utility Brkr Config—The unit is programmed for a generator application but no

utility tie breaker contact input was programmed. This is a requirement.
No Gen Brkr Config—The unit is programmed for a generator application but no

utility tie breaker contact input was programmed. This is a requirement.
No Freq Arm/Dsarm Prgmd—The frequency arm/disarm function was

programmed but no means of arming or disarming were programmed. Either a
function key or a contact input must be programmed to arm/disarm frequency
control if you wish to use the frequency arm/disarm function.
Sync & Sync/Ld Shr Pgmd—Both the synchronizing analog input and the
sync/load share or load share analog inputs were programmed. If the application
needs to perform both synchronizing and load sharing with analog signals, only
the sync/load sharing analog input needs to be programmed.
Freq Arm & Ld Shr Pgmd—Both the frequency arm/disarm function and the load
share control functions were programmed. Only one of these modes can be
programmed — either freq arm/disarm OR Load Sharing.
Contact Input Program Errors

Two Identical Contacts—Two contact inputs were programmed for the same
function.
Woodward 103
Contact #xx Program Err—The specified contact input was programmed for a
function that is not also programmed to be used. Either the contact input was
mis-programmed or the function required is mis-programmed. For example,
contact input #1 is programmed for Remote Cascade Setpoint Enable but
Remote Cascade Setpoint was not programmed under the Cascade Program
Block.
Analog Input Program Errors

Two Identical Analogs—Two analog inputs were programmed for the same
function.
Analog #x Program Err—The specified analog input was programmed for a

function that is not also programmed to be used. Either the analog input was mis-
programmed or the function required is mis-programmed. For example, analog
input #1 is programmed for Remote Cascade Setpoint but Remote Cascade
Setpoint was not programmed under the Cascade Program Block.
No Rmt Speed Input Prgm—The remote speed setpoint control function was
programmed but no remote speed setpoint analog input was configured.
No KW Analog Input—Either the auxiliary control function was programmed to

use the KW input or KW droop was programmed but no KW analog input was
configured.
No Sync Analog Input—A synchronizing contact input was programmed but no

synchronizing analog input was configured.
No Ld Share Analog In—A load share or sync/load share contact input was
programmed but no load share analog input was configured.
No Cascade Analog Input—The cascade control function was programmed but

no cascade analog input was configured.
No Rmt Casc Input Prgm—The remote cascade setpoint control function was
programmed but no remote cascade setpoint analog input was configured.
No Aux Analog Input—The auxiliary control function was programmed but no

auxiliary analog input was configured.
KW & Aux Config for Aux—The auxiliary control function was programmed to use
the KW analog input but an auxiliary analog input was configured also. With this
configuration, only the KW analog input is used for the auxiliary controller.
No Rmt Aux Input Prgm—The remote auxiliary setpoint control function was
programmed but no remote auxiliary setpoint analog input was configured.
Function Key Program Errors

Identical Function Keys—Both function keys were programmed for the same
function.
No F-Key Relay Prgmd—A function key was programmed to energize a relay but
no relay outputs were configured for F3 or F4 key relays.
104 Woodward
F3 Key Program Error—The F3 key was programmed for a function that is not
also programmed to be used. Either F3 was mis-programmed or the function
required was mis-programmed. For example, the F3 key is programmed for
Remote Cascade Setpoint Enabled but Remote Cascade Setpoint was not
programmed under the Cascade Program Block.
F4 Key Program Error—The F4 key was programmed for a function that is not
also programmed to be used. Either F4 was mis-programmed or the function
required was mis-programmed. For example, the F4 key is programmed for
Relay Program Errors

Relay #x Program Error—The specified relay was programmed for a function that
is not also programmed to be used. Either the relay was mis-programmed or the
function required is mis-programmed. For example, relay #1 is programmed for
Readout Program Errors

Readout #x Program Err—The specified readout was programmed for a function
that is not also programmed to be used. Either the readout was mis-programmed
or the function required is mis-programmed. For example, readout #1 is
programmed for Cascade Setpoint but Cascade Control was not programmed
under the Cascade Program Block.
Driver 2 Readout Err—The Actuator/Driver 2 readout was programmed for a

function that is not also programmed to be used. Either the readout was mis-
programmed or the function required is mis-programmed. For example, driver 2
is programmed for Cascade Setpoint but Cascade Control was not programmed
under the Cascade Program Block.
Valve/Actuator Calibration & Test

Before initial operation or after a turbine overhaul where any actuator or valve
travel may have been affected, the below Valve Calibration procedure should be
followed to insure that the 505 is correctly calibrated to the turbine control
valve(s). When calibration is complete, 0 to 100% actuator position as displayed
by the 505 must equal 0 to 100% actual valve travel.
After a valid program has been entered the actuator and valve minimum and
maximum positions can be adjusted and tested, if needed. Actuator and valve
positions are determined by the drive current to the actuator. The maximum
actuator current can not be adjusted lower than the minimum actuator current
(see table 4-1 below). The minimum actuator current can not be adjusted higher
than the maximum actuator current. The driver current ranges are determined by
the setting in the Program Mode under the Driver Configuration Block.
When adjusting or testing actuator and valve travel, verify that sufficient valve
overtravel at the minimum stop is achieved (1%). This assures that each valve
can fully close to completely shut off the steam flow to the turbine.
Woodward 105
Driver Limits 20–160 mA Range 4–20 mA Range
Overcurrent 217 mA 26 mA
Undercurrent 5 mA 0.6 mA
Max Output Current Range 10-200 mA 2-24 mA
Max Output Impedance 45  360 
Min Stop Adjust Range 10-80 mA 2-20 mA
Max Stop Adjust Range 100-200 mA 10-24 mA
Table 4-1. Actuator Driver Limits
To ensure proper control to actuator resolution do not calibrate the span of the
actuator output to less than a range of 100 mA (20–160 mA output) or 12 mA (4-
20 mA output). If necessary, the actuator to valve linkage may need to be
adjusted to ensure proper 505 to valve resolution.
Figures 4-5 and 4-6 graphically show the steps available to stroke the actuator
output(s). The stroking option is only available when the 505 control is in a
shutdown state. Also, the screens displayed varies with the number of actuators
programmed.
After enabling the stroke mode, there are options available to adjust the minimum
and maximum stops and to manually stroke the output(s). The manual
adjustment mode can be used to stroke the actuator and valves from 0 to 100%
after the minimum and maximum positions have been adjusted. This allows both
the actuator and valve to be tested for binding, play, resolution, linearity, and
repeatability. The actuator and valve positions can be varied by using the ADJ
UP and DOWN keys or keying in the position desired and pressing the ENTER
key. When the ENTER key is pressed, the actuator output will step to the entered
position.
Press any available Run Mode key to exit the STROKE ACTUATORS mode. For
example, pressing the SPEED key will disable the stroking function and display
the ‘speed’ information. To return to the STROKE ACTUATORS mode, the ACT
key must be selected again and the keystrokes to enter this mode must be
repeated. As a safety precaution, if the turbine speed ever exceeds 1000 rpm,
the STROKE ACTUATORS mode is disabled.
As a safety precaution, if turbine speed ever exceeds 1000 rpm, the STROKE
ACTUATORS mode will be automatically disabled, and actuator currents taken to
zero.
Calibration/Stroking Procedure
(for single actuator output configuration)
Before calibrating or testing, the unit must be tripped and the steam
supply removed. This is to ensure that opening the control valve(s)
will not allow steam into the turbine. Overspeed sensing and its relay
are disabled during this process. Overspeeding the turbine may
cause damage to turbine and can cause severe injury or death to
personnel. STEAM TO THE TURBINE MUST BE SHUT OFF BY OTHER
MEANS DURING THIS PROCESS.
106 Woodward
1. The 505’s Emergency shutdown contact input must be closed or jumpered
throughout this procedure (or the 505’s actuator current output will go to
ZERO current).
2. Execute a system RESET command (Press the 505 “Reset” key).
3. Press the 505’s front panel “Emergency Shutdown” button.
4. Press the ‘ACT’ key then the SCROLL DOWN key until the “Stroke
Actuators—Dsbled, Steam Must be Off” message appears. (Verify that the
turbine’s steam supply has been shutoff before by an external Trip and
Throttle valve.)
5. Press the “YES” key (This will cause the screen to display a “Stroke to Min—
Enabled, Min Curr Adjust * 20.000” message).
6. Press the “YES” key to enable this mode or the “Scroll Down Arrow” to step
to the mode desired. (Refer to Figure 4-5).
6a. Stroke to Min—Enabld, Min Curr Adjust * XXX.XX—Press YES to
force the actuator output to the minimum stop. The message will
display ‘At Min’ and the actuator output current will move to its
minimum setting. The minimum current value can be adjusted only
when the ‘at sign’ (@) is on the bottom line of the display. Press the
SELECT key to move the @ symbol between the top and bottom lines.
Press the ADJ UP or DOWN keys to change the 0% actuator current
level. Press the SCROLL DOWN ARROW to step the next desired
mode, or the “CLEAR” key twice to save changes, and exit Calibration
mode.
6b. Stroke to Max—Enabld, Max Curr Adjust * XXX.XX—Press YES to
force the actuator output to the maximum stop. The message will
display ‘At Max’ and the actuator output current will move to its
maximum setting. The maximum current value can be adjusted only
DOWN ARROW to step the next desired mode, or the “CLEAR” key
twice to save changes and exit Calibration mode.
6c. Manually Adjust—Enabld, Stroke Valve XXX.XX—Press the ADJ
UP, ADJ DOWN keys from this screen to move the valve’s output
current between 0-100% at a 5%/second rate. This allows both the
actuator and valve to be tested for binding, play, resolution, linearity,
and repeatability.
Press the “YES” key at any time to allow a setting to be directly

‘Entered’. The message will display ‘Manual’ when the ENTER mode is
allowed. When in the ‘Manual’ mode, press the “ENTER” key, enter the
setting desired, then press the “ENTER” key again. This will step the
actuator output to a specific position instantly. Press the “ADJ
UP/DOWN” or “No” keys at any time to switch back to the “Enabld”
mode.
When calibration is complete, 0 to 100% valve position as displayed by

the 505 must equal 0 to 100% actual valve travel. Press the SCROLL
7. Press the CLEAR key twice to permanently save any minimum or

maximum actuator settings into the 505. If variables are tuned or
changed but not stored in EEPROM by pressing the CLEAR key twice,
then those changes will be lost if power is removed from the control or
if the control receives a CPU reset.
Woodward 107
Calibration/Stroking Procedure
(for dual actuator output configuration)
Before calibrating or testing, the unit must be tripped and the steam
supply removed. This is to ensure that opening the control valve(s)
will not allow steam into the turbine. Overspeed sensing and its relay
are disabled during this process. Overspeeding the turbine may
cause damage to turbine and can cause severe injury or death to
personnel. STEAM TO THE TURBINE MUST BE SHUT OFF BY OTHER
MEANS DURING THIS PROCESS.
1. The 505’s Emergency shutdown contact input must be closed or jumpered

throughout this procedure (or the 505’s actuator current output will go to
ZERO current.
2. Execute a system RESET command (Press the 505 “Reset” key).
3. Press the 505’s front panel “Emergency Shutdown” button.
4. Press the ACT key then the SCROLL DOWN key until the “Stroke
Actuators—Dsbld, Steam Must be Off” message appears. (Verify that the
turbine’s steam supply has been shutoff before by an external Trip and
Throttle valve.)
5. Press the “YES” key (This will cause the screen to display a “Act #1 to Min—
Enabld, Min Curr Adjust * 20.000” message).
6. Press the “YES” key to enable this mode or the “Scroll Down Arrow” to step
to the mode desired. (Refer to Figure 4-6).
6a. Act #1 to Min—Enabld, Min Curr Adjust * XXX.XX—Press YES to
mode.
6b. Act #1 to Max—Enabld, Max Curr Adjust * XXX.XX—Press YES to
6c. Manually Adjust—Enabld, Stroke Valve XXX.XX—Press the ADJ
UP, ADJ DOWN keys from this screen to move the valve’s output
current between 0-100% at a 5%/second rate. This allows both the
actuator and valve to be tested for binding, play, resolution, linearity,
and repeatability.

Entered. The message will display ‘Manual’ when the ENTER mode is
mode.
108 Woodward
7. Similarly, for Act #2:

7a. Act #2 to Min—Enabld, Min Curr Adjust * XXX.XX — Press YES to
mode.
7b. Act #2 to Max—Enabld, Max Curr Adjust * XXX.XX— Press YES to
7c. Manually Adjust—Enabld, Stroke Valve XXX.XX — Press the ADJ UP,
ADJ DOWN keys from this screen to move the valve’s output current
between 0-100% at a 5%/second rate. This allows both the actuator
and valve to be tested for binding, play, resolution, linearity, and
repeatability.

Entered. The message will display ‘Manual’ when the ENTER mode is
mode.

8. Press the CLEAR key twice to permanently save any minimum or

changed but not stored in EEPROM by pressing the CLEAR key twice,
then those changes will be lost if power is removed from the control or
if the control receives a CPU reset.
If changes are made to the minimum or maximum current values, they can be
recorded on the Program Mode worksheets under the ‘Driver Configurations’
block.
Woodward 109
Pressing any available Run Mode key will exit the STROKE
ACTUATORS/VALVE mode. Exiting the STROKE ACTUATORS/VALVE mode
by a RUN MODE key will not permanently save any calibration changes.
Press the CLEAR key twice to permanently save any minimum or

changed but not stored in EEPROM by pressing the CLEAR key
twice, then those changes will be lost if power is removed from the
control or if the control receives a CPU reset.
Figure 4-5. Stroke Actuator
110 Woodward
Stroke Actuator Messages
Message 7 Meaning
Dsbld Stroke actuators function is disabled
Enabld Stroke actuators function is enabled
At Min Actuator output is set to the minimum value ( 0% )
At Max Actuator output is set to the maximum value ( 100% )
Manual Actuator output is in manual mode
Press the CLEAR key twice to permanently save any minimum or

changed but not stored in EEPROM by pressing the CLEAR key
twice, then those changes will be lost if power is removed from the
control or if the control receives a CPU reset.
Figure 4-6. Stroking Dual Actuators
Woodward 111
Chapter 5.
505 Operation
Run Mode Architecture

The 505 is designed to be interfaced with through a user-friendly service panel,
discrete and analog input/outputs or Modbus communications. Basic program
architecture is illustrated in Figure 5-1. When the control is powered up and after
the brief CPU self test has been completed, the control displays a ready status
(Controlling Parameter/Push Run or Program). The 505’s normal operating
architecture is divided into two sections: the Run Mode and the Program Mode.
The Program Mode is used to configure the 505 for the specific application and
set all operating parameters (see Chapter 4). The Run Mode is simply the normal
turbine operation mode and is used to view operating parameters and run the
turbine. A Service Mode is also available to make additional on-line adjustments
while the unit is running. See Volume 2 for information on the Service Mode.
Figure 5-1. Basic Program Architecture
An overview of Run mode keys and screens is shown in Figure 5-2. This diagram
shows all of the potential screens that could appear. However, only the screens
that are related to the 505’s programmed functionality will appear. Figure 5-2 also
shows the keys that are active for each screen. The ‘hot’ keys (Speed, Aux, etc.)
are always active if the function is programmed. The ADJUST UP/DOWN,
ENTER, YES/NO keys, however, are only active with certain screens. Figure 5-2
can be referred to, when determining what keys are active and what screens will
appear on the display.
112 Woodward
Figure 5-2a. Overview of Run Mode
Woodward 113
Figure 5-2b. Overview of Run Mode
114 Woodward
Trip Controlling Parameter Remote
Messages Messages Messages
Message 8 Message 7 Message 4
External Trip Input Shutdown Disabled
Enter Shutdown Button Controlled Shutdown Inhibited
Overspeed Max Actuator Enabled
All Speed Probes Failed Valve Limiter Active
Actuator #1 Fault Remote Auxiliary In Control
Actuator #2 Fault Auxiliary Control
Aux Input Failed Configuration Error Cascade Control
External Trip 2 Start Perm Not Met Messages
External Trip 3 Ready to Start Message 6
External Trip 4 Manual Start Disabled
External Trip 5 Auto Start Inhibited
Comm Link #1 Trip Semi Auto Start Enabled
Comm Link #2 Trip Idle/Rated Start In Control
KW Input Failed Auto Start Sequence Active/Not Spd Ctrl
Tie Breaker Opened Frequency/Speed Active w/Rmt Setpt
Generator Breaker Open Synchronizing In Ctrl w/Rmt Setpt
Power Up Trip Load Share/Speed
Shutdown Complete Remote Cascade/Speed Units Options
Cascade/Speed (for Aux/Casc)
Idle/Rated Messages Remote/Speed psi
Message 1 Speed/On-Line kPa
Stopped Speed/Off-Line MW
Speed/Off-Line KW
Mvg to Idle Aux Messages degF
At Idle Spd (if using aux enable) degC
In Crit Band Message 5 t/h
Mvg to Rated Disabled k#/hr
At Rated Spd Inhibited #/hr
Rtd Inhibited Enabled kg/cm2
Idle Inhibited Active/Not in Ctrl bar
Active w/Rmt Setpt atm
Auto Start Messages In Control (none)
Message 2 Remote Control
Disabled
Halted Aux Messages
Mvg Low Idle (if using aux as a limiter)
At Low Idle Message 5
Mvg Hi Idle Inhibited
In Crit Band Enabled
At High Idle Enabled w/Rmt Setpt
Mvg to Rated Active w/Rmt Setpt
Completed Active/Not Lmting
Control w/Rmt Setpt
Control Messages In Control
Message 3
Disabled
Inhibited
Enabled
In Control
Remote Control
Table 5-1. Overview of Run Mode
Woodward 115
Keypad and Display

The 505 is a field configurable steam turbine control and operator control panel
(OCP) integrated into one package. The 505’s service panel consists of a 30-key
keypad and LED display located on the front of the control. The LED display has
two, 24 character lines that can be used to display operating parameters and
trouble-shoot parameters in plain English. The service panel is used to configure
the 505, make On-Line program adjustments, and operate the turbine/system.
No additional panels are required to operate the turbine, every turbine control
function can be from the 505’s front panel. However, the turbine can also be
operated remotely. Every front panel control operation can be performed
remotely through contacts or Modbus communications. For safety purposes,
however, the 505’s Overspeed Test function cannot be performed through a
Modbus link.
Figure 5-3. 505 Keypad and Display
Run Mode Front Panel Keys

For a detailed description of each 505 key functionality see Chapter 1.
Of the thirty front panel keys, not all are active at all times in the Run mode.
However, from the 505’s service panel, the keys that are active will be apparent
since there is immediate display feedback when an active key is pressed. When
a respective “Hot” key (Aux, Casc, KW, etc.) function is not programmed, a
FUNCTION NOT PROGRAMMED message will be appear if the key is pressed.
The following are generalizations when determining what keys will function:
116 Woodward
 The ADJUST UP/DOWN keys are active when a setpoint is displayed and
the setpoint is not in a remote control or tracking mode.
 The ENTER key is active whenever the ADJUST UP/DOWN keys are
active. This is when the setpoint is shown on the display and the setpoint is
not in remote control or tracking mode.
 The YES/NO keys are active whenever a status indication is shown on the
display and an enable/disable function is valid.
 The CAS, AUX, KW, and RMT keys are only active if the function is
configured in the Program Mode.
 The SPEED, ACTR, LMTR, CONT, and DYN keys are always active.
 The PRGM, RUN, STOP, RESET, and ALARM keys are always active.
 The F3 and F4 function keys are only active if they are configured.
 The OVERSPEED TEST ENBL is conditionally active (only active when
OSPD test is permissible).
Starting Procedures
Refer to the turbine manufacturer’s operating procedures for complete
information on turbine start up, and Chapter 3 of this manual for a step by step
procedure, depending on the start mode selected. The following is a typical start-
up procedure:
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be

equipped with an overspeed shutdown device to protect against
runaway or damage to the prime mover with possible personal injury,
loss of life, or property damage.
The overspeed shutdown device must be totally independent of the
prime mover control system. An overtemperature or overpressure
shutdown device may also be needed for safety, as appropriate.
1. Press the RESET key to clear all alarms and trips. If the 505’s RESET
CLEARS TRIP setting is programmed "YES", the 505's shutdown relay will
reset or energize upon pressing the RESET key after a shutdown. If the
RESET CLEARS TRIP OUTPUT setting is programmed "NO", the 505's
shutdown relay will reset or energize upon pressing the Reset key ONLY
after all trip conditions are cleared.
2. Press the RUN key to initiate the selected start-up mode. The front panel
display will automatically jump to the SPEED screen (if auto or manual start
is programmed) or to the LMTR screen (if semi-auto start is programmed). If
a semi-automatic start mode is configured, the valve limiter must be manually
increased to open the control valve.
 A ‘Start Perm Not Closed’ alarm will be issued if the application is using
a Start Permissive contact input and this contact input was not closed
when the RUN command was issued.
3. After the selected start-up mode has been performed, the turbine will operate
at the minimum or idle speed setting. The 505’s speed setpoint will move to
minimum governor speed unless an idle speed is programmed. The
Idle/Rated or Auto Start Sequence functions must be programmed for the
turbine to control at idle speed. An operator at this time may vary turbine
speed through the 505's keypad, external switches or communication links.
The ‘Run’ and ‘Reset’ commands can be selected from the 505’s service panel,
contact input closures (if programmed), or from a Modbus communications link.
In addition, the following indications are available through the Modbus links:
Speed Setpt Moving to Min, Start Permissive closed, and Start Permissive Not
Closed Alarm indication.
Woodward 117
Speed Key Screens

Figure 5-4 shows the possible screens that may appear if the SPEED key is
pressed. Only the screens related to the Speed control’s programmed
functionality will be displayed. In addition, the order of the screens may change
depending on the status of the control. Screens 4, 5 and 6 will always appear. If
idle/rated is programmed, screen 1 will appear. If the auto start sequence if
programmed, screens 2 and 3 will appear. Once the auto start sequence is
complete, these screens no longer appear.
Figure 5-4. SPEED Key Screens
Idle/Rated Start
For details on the idle/rated startup, refer to Chapter 3. When a RUN command is
issued, the 505 automatically displays the SPEED screen and shows the
Idle/Rated status. The speed setpoint is instantly set to the actual turbine’s
speed. To increase the speed to the programmed ‘Rated Setpt’ setting, select the
Rated command. A Rated command can be issued by pressing the front panel
YES key from the Idle/Rtd screen (screen 1), closing the Idle/Rated contact (if
programmed) or selecting a Go To Rated command from Modbus
communications.
118 Woodward
When the speed setpoint is ramping to the Rated Setpoint setting it can be
stopped at any point that is not within a critical speed avoidance band by issuing
a Speed Setpt Raise or Lower command. This can be done by pressing the
ADJUST UP or DOWN from the front panel SPEED screen (screens 1,2,3 or 4),
closing a Speed Raise/Lower contact input or selecting Speed Raise or Lower
from a Modbus communications link.
The Speed setpoint will again ramp to the Rated Speed setting if the Rated
command is re-issued. To re-issue the Rated command press the front panel
YES key from the Idl/Rtd screen (screen 1), toggle the Idle/Rated contact open
and closed again (if programmed) or select Go To Rated from a Modbus
communications link.
The Speed setpoint will ramp to the Idle Speed setting upon startup. However,
the Idle Speed setting can be re-selected, when conditions allow, (see Chapter 3)
by pressing the front panel NO key from the Idl/Rtd screen (screen 1), opening
the Idle/Rated contact (if programmed), or selecting Go To Idle from a Modbus
Another feature of Idle/Rated function is the ‘Ramp to Rated’ option which allows
the Speed setpoint to only move to the Rated Speed setting; Idle is not
selectable. This feature is configurable in the Service Mode only. When this
feature is used with the Idle/Rated contact input, closing the contact results in the
Speed setpoint ramping to the Rated Speed setting and opening the contact
stops the speed setpoint ramp—rather than selecting Idle. To continue ramping
to the Rated Speed setting, re-close the contact, press the front panel YES key
from the Idl/Rtd screen (screen 1) or select Go To Rated from Modbus
communications.
Table 5-2 lists the Idle/Rated status messages that may appear on the front
panel display and the meanings of each.
Message 1 Meaning
Stopped Idle/Rated ramp has been stopped
Mvg to Idle Speed Setpt is moving to idle
At Idle Spd Speed Setpt is at the idle Setpt
In Crit Band Speed Setpt is moving through the critical avoidance band
Mvg to Rated Speed Setpt is moving to the rated Setpt
At Rated Spd Speed Setpt is at the rated Setpt
Rtd Inhibited Selection of rated is not allowed
Idle Inhibited Selection of idle is not allowed
Table 5-2. Idle/Rated Messages
The following indications are available through the Modbus links: Ramping to
Idle, At Idle, Turbine in Critical Speed Band, Ramping to Rated, and At Rated. In
addition to these indications, the Idle Speed Setpoint and Rated Speed Setpoint
analog values are also available.
Woodward 119
Auto Start Sequence

When a RUN command is issued, the 505 automatically displays the SPEED
screen (unless used with the Semiautomatic start mode) and shows the Status of
the Auto Start Sequence (screen 2). The Speed setpoint is instantly set to the
turbine’s actual speed and the sequence will continue from this point. This
sequence is automatic, however the sequence can be halted. Halting the Auto
Start Sequence can be performed by pressing the front panel NO key from the
Sequence Status screen (screen 2), opening the Halt/Continue contact (if
programmed), selecting Halt from a Modbus communications link, or selecting
Speed Setpt Raise or Lower. To provide feedback, a relay can be programmed
to indicate the Auto Start Sequence is Halted.
The Sequence can be restarted again by pressing the front panel YES key from
the Sequence Status screen (screen 2), closing the Halt/Continue contact, or
selecting Continue from a Modbus communications link. Table 5-3 lists the Auto
Start status messages that may appear on the display and the meanings of each.
Message 2 Meaning
Disabled Auto Start Sequence is disabled
Halted Sequence has been halted
Mvg Low Idle Speed Setpt is moving to low idle
At Low Idle Speed Setpt is holding at the low idle Setpt
Mvg Hi Idle Speed Setpt is moving to high idle
In Crit Band Speed Setpt is moving through the critical avoidance band
At High Idle Speed Setpt is holding at the high idle Setpt
Mvg to Rated Speed Setpt is moving to rated Setpt
Completed Auto Start Sequence is completed
Table 5-3. Auto Start Messages
The following Auto Start Sequence indications are available through the Modbus
links: Setpt Moving to Min, Setpt at Low Idle, Ramping to High Idle, Setpt at High
Idle, Turbine in Critical Speed Band, Ramping to Rated, and At Rated. In addition
to these indications, the Low Idle Speed Setpoint, Low Idle Delay Time, Time
Remaining at Low Idle, Low Idle to High Idle Rate, High Idle Speed Setpoint,
High Idle Delay Time, Time Remaining at High Idle, High Idle to Rated Rate,
Rated Speed Setpoint, Run Time (hours), and Hours Since Trip analog values
are also available providing comprehensive sequence information.
Direct Setpoint Entry

The Speed setpoint can be directly set to a specific value, that is not within a
critical speed avoidance band, using the ENTER key from the Speed Setpt
screen (screen 4). The messages that appear on the display are shown in Figure
5-5. There are limits on the range of the Speed setpoint that can be entered. The
Speed setpoint must be below the maximum governor setting and above the idle
setting. Also, if the unit is driving a generator and the unit is on-line, the speed
setpoint cannot be set below the minimum load setting (tunable in the Service
Mode).
120 Woodward
The Speed setpoint can also be directly entered from either of the Modbus links,
however, the allowed range is between the minimum and maximum governor
speed settings. The allowed setpoint range is limited between the minimum load
and the maximum governor settings if the unit is driving a generator and the unit
is on-line. Both the speed setpoint and the Modbus Entered Speed setpoint are
available over the communication link to provide feedback for directly entered
Modbus values.
Figure 5-5. Direct Setpoint Entry
Speed Control
Once the turbine is in speed control at minimum governor speed or rated speed,
the speed setpoint can be adjusted with the ADJUST UP or DOWN front panel
keys from the Speed screen (screen 4), Speed Setpoint Raise or Lower contact
inputs, or commands through a Modbus link. In addition the setpoint can be
directly entered using the ENTER key from a Setpoint display or through the
communication links (see Direct Setpoint Entry above).
The following speed control indications are available through the Modbus links:
Speed PID in Control and Speed at or above Min Gov. In addition to these
indications the Speed Setpoint, Actual Turbine Speed, Speed Sensor #1 Input,
Speed Sensor #2 Input, and Speed Control PID Output analog values are also
available.
Woodward 121
Overspeed Test Function

The 505’s Overspeed Test function allows an operator to increase turbine speed
above its rated operating range to periodically test turbine electrical and/or
mechanical overspeed protection logic and circuitry. This includes the 505’s
internal overspeed trip logic and any external overspeed trip device’s settings
and logic. Figure 5-6 shows the screens that are displayed when the ‘OSPD’ key
is pressed. These will only be displayed when the speed setpoint has been
raised to the maximum governor and the unit is Off-Line (if driving a generator).
Before these conditions are met, the screen will indicate the overspeed test
permissives are not met.
Figure 5-6. Overspeed Test Enable Key Screens
Overspeed Test Procedure

(from the 505’s Service Panel)
 Raise the Speed Setpoint to the maximum governor setting.

 If desired, clear the ‘Highest Speed Reached’ value, to record the highest
speed reached during this overspeed test. (Press the OSPD key, scroll
down to screen 2 and press the YES key. Note: This value can also be
cleared or read from under the Control (CONT) key.
 Press the OSPD key and Adjust Up command at the same time to allow the
Speed Setpoint to be raised for testing. The Overspeed Test Enable LED in
the OSPD key will turn ON when the setpoint is raised above the maximum
governor setting.
If the OSPD key is released, the speed setpoint will move back to the
maximum governor setting.
 Once turbine speed reaches the 505’s internal OVERSPEED TRIP LEVEL
setting, the OSPD key’s LED will blink and the screen will flash a ‘Speed >
Trip’ message.
 If the OSPD key is released while the Overspeed Test LED is blinking, the
unit will trip on overspeed.
122 Woodward
 If an external device’s trip setting is being tested the Speed Setpoint can be
raised up to the 505’s OVERSPEED TEST LIMIT setting, by not releasing
the OSPD key and continuing to adjust the 505’s Speed Setpoint. The
Overspeed Test LED will blink at a faster rate when the OVERSPEED TEST
LIMIT is reached, indicating the maximum speed setpoint is reached and the
unit should have tripped on the external trip device.
Alternatively the turbine’s overspeed logic and circuitry can be tested remotely,
by programming an Overspeed Test contact input. The Overspeed Test contact
functions as the OSPD key on the 505’s service panel. When the conditions
outlined in the above procedure are met, closing this contact allows the Speed
setpoint to be increased up to the “Overspeed Test limit” setting. The testing
procedure is similar to using the OSPD key. An Overspeed Test Enabled relay
can be programmed to provide the same status feedback as the front panel
Overspeed Test LED.
The Overspeed Test function cannot be performed over the Modbus

communications, however, the Overspeed Test Permissive, Overspeed Test In
Progress, Overspeed Alarm, and Overspeed Trip indications are available
through Modbus.
F3 and F4 Keys
The F-key (F3 & F4) screens appear only when programmed for a specific
function. The screens that appear will vary depending on the function
programmed. The F-keys can be programmed to perform a variety of functions
including:
Local/Remote Casc Control Enable
Idle/Rated Remote Casc Setpt Enable
Halt/Continue Auto Start Sequence Aux Control Enable
Remote Speed Setpt Enable Remote Aux Setpt Enable
Sync Enable Energize Relay Output
Freq Arm/Disarm
In the RUN mode, the assigned function may be selected or deselected by

pressing the assigned function key, then the Yes or No keys respectively. The
screen will display the present status of the function and prompt the appropriate
(Yes/No) key required to change the status.
Limiter (LMTR) Key Screens

Figure 5-7 shows the screens that appear when the LMTR key is pressed. These
screens are always active and always displayed. During normal operation the
Valve Limiter setting is at 100% and not limiting.
Typically, the only time this parameter is adjusted is during a start sequence or to
troubleshoot system dynamics problems. The actuator demand and the limiter
setpoint can be viewed from screen 2. To manually position the governor valve
with the Valve Limiter setpoint, the limiter setpoint must be decreased below the
actuator demand signal (LSS bus output). Once below or equal to this signal, the
limiter setting will be the actuator output signal and thus governor valve position
will be set manually by the limiter.
Woodward 123
The valve limiter can be adjusted with the ADJUST UP or DOWN front panel
keys from any Limiter screen, Valve Limiter Raise or Lower contact inputs (if
programmed), or commands through a Modbus link. In addition the setpoint can
be directly entered using the ENTER key from any Limiter screen.
The following valve limiter indications are available through the Modbus links:
Valve Limiter at Min, Valve Limiter at Max, and Valve Limiter In Control of
actuator output. In addition to these indications the Valve Limiter Setpoint,
Actuator LSS, Actuator #1 Output and Actuator #2 Output analog values are also
available.
Figure 5-7. LMTR Key Screens
Actuator (ACTR) Key Screens

Figure 5-8 shows the possible screens that may appear if the ACTR key is
pressed. The only parameter that can be adjusted from these screens is the
dither setting. To adjust the dither setting (if required), the @ symbol must be on
the display line containing the asterisk/dither value to tune. The @ symbol is
moved using the SELECT key.
The dual actuator output option displays both actuator output demand values as
well as the LSS demand. If the Actuator #2 offset is zero, all of these values will
be the same. If the offset is not zero, the LSS will display the total lift demand for
both outputs. The LSS will be zero when Actuator #1 is zero and reach 100%
when Actuator #2 reaches 100%. The communications links will display the
Actuator LSS, Actuator #1 Demand, Actuator #2 Demand values as well as the
actual Actuator Output Current for both actuators in milliamps.
124 Woodward
Figure 5-8. ACTR Key Screens
Control (CONT) Key Screens

Figure 5-9 shows the screens that appear when the CONT key is pressed. The
CONT key allows operators to monitor what 505 parameter (PID or limiter) is
controlling governor valve position (screen 1). From screen 2 the cause of the
last turbine shutdown can be viewed and from screen 3 the highest turbine speed
reached can be viewed and cleared, if desired.
Woodward 125
Figure 5-9. CONT Key Screens
Table 5-4 shows a complete listing of all possible controlling parameters and
their meanings.
Message 7 Meaning
Shutdown Control is tripped
Controlled Shutdown A controlled shutdown is being executed
Start Perm Not Met The start permissive contact input is not closed
Max Actuator The actuator output is at its maximum position
Valve Limiter The Valve Limiter is in control of the actuator output
Ready to Start The unit’s start permissives are OK and the unit is ready to
start
Manual Start The 505 is running and in the Manual start mode
Auto Start The 505 is running and in the Automatic start mode
Semi Auto Start The 505 is running and in the Semi-automatic start mode
Idle/Rated Start The 505 is running and in the Idle/Rated sequence mode
Auto Start Sequence The 505 is running and in the Automatic Start Sequence mode
Remote/Speed Speed PID is in control, the Speed Setpoint is in remote control
Speed/On-Line Speed PID is in control using On-Line dynamics
Speed/Off-Line Speed PID is in control using Off-Line dynamics
Frequency/Speed Speed PID is in control with the gen. breaker closed and tie
breaker open
Synchronizing Speed PID is in control with the Synch. analog input biasing its
setpoint
Load Share/Speed Speed PID is in control with Sync/Ld Share analog input
biasing its setpoint
Auxiliary Control Aux PID is in control of the actuator output
Remote Auxiliary Aux PID is in control and the Aux Setpt is in remote control
Cascade/Speed Casc & Speed PIDs are in control
Rmt Cascade/Speed Casc & Speed PIDs are in control, and Casc Setpt is in remote
control
Configuration Error The 505 program has been configured incorrectly
Table 5-4. Controlling Parameter Messages
126 Woodward
For a complete listing of Shutdown/Trip causes, refer to the Trips section later in
this chapter.
The Controlling Parameter and Highest Speed Reached values are also
available through the Modbus links.
Dynamics (DYN) Key Screens

Figure 5-10 shows the possible screens that may appear if the DYN key is
pressed. This mode is used to adjust controller dynamics. When the DYN key is
pressed, the dynamics for the parameter that is in control, at that time will be
displayed. To tune the dynamic settings of the other controllers, the key for the
specific controller must be pressed and the STEP DOWN selected until the
dynamics parameters appear. For information on tuning PIDs, refer to Chapter 3
of this manual.
To adjust the gain settings, the @ symbol must be on the respective display line
of the value to be adjusted. The @ symbol is moved by pressing the SELECT
key.
The controller dynamics are adjustable from the 505’s Service panel only, they
cannot be adjusted remotely.
Figure 5-10. DYN Key Screens
Woodward 127
Stop Key Screens

Figure 5-11 shows the possible screens that may appear if the STOP key is
pressed. The STOP key is used to perform a controlled/manual turbine shutdown
or stop. To perform a Manual Shutdown, select YES from the Status screen or
close the Controlled Shutdown contact input (if programmed) or select Controlled
Shutdown from a Modbus communications link. This function can be stopped or
aborted by pressing the front panel NO key from the Manual Shutdown Status
screen, opening the contact, or selecting Abort Controlled Shutdown from a
Modbus communications link.
The Controlled Shutdown sequence can be restarted again by pressing the front
panel YES key from the Manual Shutdown Status screen, re-closing the contact,
or re-selecting Controlled Shutdown from a Modbus communications link. The
link will display the Controlled Stop In Progress and Controlled Shutdown Trip
completed status’.
Figure 5-11. STOP Key Screens
Auxiliary (Aux) Key Screens

For this key to be active, the Auxiliary function must be programmed. Figure 5-12
shows the possible screens that may appear if the AUX key is pressed. Only the
screens related to the Auxiliary control’s programmed functionality will be
displayed. If Remote Aux Setpoint is programmed, screen 3 will appear. The
Auxiliary PID dynamics and droop level (if required) can be adjusted from these
screens.
128 Woodward
Figure 5-12. AUX Key Screens
Auxiliary as a Controller (using Enable/Disable)

When auxiliary control is used as a controller, as opposed to a limiter, the
enable/disable function is used to select Auxiliary control. Auxiliary control can be
enabled by pressing the front panel YES key from the Status screen (screen 2)
or by closing the Aux Control Enable/Disable contact (if programmed) or by
selecting Aux Enable from either Modbus communications link.
With this configuration, prior to enabling Auxiliary control, the Auxiliary setpoint
tracks the Auxiliary analog input to accommodate bumpless transfers between
control modes. As a result, the Auxiliary setpoint cannot be changed until the
Auxiliary PID is enabled. Once enabled, the Auxiliary setpoint can be changed by
pressing the ADJUST UP or DOWN from the front panel Aux Setpt screen
(screen 1), closing a Aux Setpt Raise/Lower contact input, or selecting Aux
Setpoint Raise or Lower from either Modbus communications link. In addition, the
Auxiliary setpoint can be directly set to a value by pressing the front panel
ENTER key from the Auxiliary Setpoint screen or by “Entering” a new Auxiliary
Setpoint through either Modbus communications link.
Woodward 129
Auxiliary control is disabled by pressing the front panel NO key from the Aux
Status screen (screen 2), opening the Aux Control Enable/Disable contact (if
programmed), or selecting “Aux Disable” from either Modbus communications
link see Table 5-5). Auxiliary control is also disabled if Cascade control is
enabled, or Remote Speed Setpoint control is enabled. Aux control is disabled
and ‘inhibited’ if a controlled shutdown is selected, the Auxiliary input fails or the
unit shuts down. Auxiliary control can be enabled but not active if the generator
and/or utility tie breaker disable features are programmed.
Message 5 Meaning
Disabled Aux control is disabled
Inhibited Aux is inhibited and cannot be enabled
Enabled Aux is enabled but not in control due to gen/tie breaker status
Active/Not In Ctrl Aux is active but the PID is not in control (valve limiter control)
Active w/Rmt Setpt Aux is active but not in control and the Setpt is in remote
control
In Control Aux is active and in control of the actuator output
Remote Control Aux is in control and the Setpt is in remote control
Table 5-5. Auxiliary Messages (if using Aux enable)
Auxiliary as a Limiter (not using Enable/Disable)

When Auxiliary control is used as a limiter, as opposed to a controller, the
enable/disable function is not used and Auxiliary control is always enabled.
The Auxiliary setpoint can be changed by issuing Auxiliary Setpt Raise or Lower
commands. This can be done by pressing the ADJUST UP or DOWN from the
front panel Aux Setpt screen (screen 1), closing the Auxiliary Setpoint
Raise/Lower contact inputs, or selecting Auxiliary Setpoint Raise or Lower from
either Modbus communications link. In addition, the Auxiliary setpoint can be
directly set to a value by selecting the front panel ENTER key from the Aux Setpt
screen or “Entering” a new Aux Setpt through either Modbus communications
link.
Auxiliary control is inhibited if a controlled shutdown is selected, the Auxiliary

input fails, or the unit shuts down. See Table 5-6. Auxiliary control can be
‘enabled’ but not ‘active’ if the generator and/or utility tie breaker disable features
are programmed. Aux will be In Control if the Auxiliary PID is active and limiting
the Auxiliary input parameter.
Message 5 Meaning
Inhibited Aux is inhibited and is not active
Enabled Aux is enabled but generator or tie breaker is open
Enabled w/Rmt Setpt Aux is enabled but not active and the Setpt is in Remote
control
Active w/Rmt Setpt Aux is active but not limiting and the Setpt is in Remote control
Active/Not Lmting Aux is active but not limiting the actuator output
Control w/Rmt Setpt Aux is in control (limiting) and the Setpt is in Remote control
In Control Aux is in control and limiting the actuator output
Table 5-6. Auxiliary Messages (if using Aux as a limiter)
The following auxiliary control indications are available through the Modbus links:
Aux is Enabled, Aux is Active, Aux is In Control, Aux is Inhibited, Aux Active/Not
Limiting, Aux Active/Not In Control, and the Aux Input Failed Alarm. In addition to
these indications the Aux Setpoint, Aux Input, and Aux PID Output analog values
are also available.
130 Woodward
Relay indications can be programmed to indicate Aux Control Active, Aux Control
Enabled, or Aux PID In Control status’.
Remote Aux Setpoint

The Remote Auxiliary Setpoint function is used to allow the Auxiliary setpoint to
be remotely positioned by an analog input. When configured to an analog input,
this function/input can be enabled by pressing the front panel YES key from the
Remote Aux Status screen (screen 3), closing the Remote Aux Setpoint
Enable/Disable contact (if programmed), or selecting Remote Aux Enable from
either Modbus communications link.
Remote Auxiliary Setpoint is disabled by pressing the front panel NO key from
the Remote Aux Status screen (screen 3), opening the Remote Aux Control
Enable/Disable contact (if programmed), or selecting Remote Aux Disable from
either Modbus communications link. See Table 5-7 for all possible Remote Aux
control messages.
Message 4 Meaning
Disabled Remote Aux Setpoint is not selected
Inhibited Remote Aux Setpoint is inhibited and cannot be enabled
Enabled Remote Aux Setpoint is enabled but not in control of the Setpt
Active Remote Aux Setpoint is in control, Aux PID is not controlling
the actuator
In Control Remote Aux Setpoint is in control, Aux PID is controlling the
actuator
Table 5-7. Remote AUX Messages
The following remote auxiliary control indications are available through the
Modbus links: Remote Aux is Enabled, Remote Aux is Active, Remote Aux is In
Control, Remote Aux is Inhibited, and Remote Aux Input Failed Alarm. In addition
to these indications, the Remote Aux Input Setpoint is also available.
Relay indications can be programmed to indicate Remote Aux Control Active and
Remote Aux Control Enabled status’.
Remote/Speed Bias (RMT) Key Screens

For this key to be active, the Remote Speed Setting, Synchronizing, or Load
Sharing functions must be programmed. The Synchronizing and Load Sharing
functions are configured by programming the respective function to an analog
input. Figure 5-13 shows the possible screens that may appear if the RMT key is
pressed. Only the screens related to the functions programmed will be displayed.
Screens 3 and 4 appear when the Synchronizing analog input is programmed,
screens 1 and 2 appear when Sync/Load Sharing analog input is programmed,
and screens 5 and 6 appear when Remote Speed Setpoint input is programmed.
Woodward 131
Figure 5-13. RMT Key Screens

The Speed PID setpoint can be remotely set by an analog input, if programmed.
This Remote Speed Setpoint input can be enabled by pressing the front panel
YES key from the Remote Speed Status screen (screen 6), closing the Remote
Speed Setpoint Enable/Disable contact (if programmed), or selecting Enable
Remote Speed Setpt Control from either Modbus communications link (see Table
5-8).
Remote Speed Setpoint input is disabled by pressing the front panel NO key
from the Remote Speed Status screen (screen 6), opening the Remote Speed
Control Enable/Disable contact (if programmed), or selecting Disable Remote
Speed Setpt Control from either Modbus communications link.
Message 4 Meaning
Disabled Remote is not selected
Inhibited Remote is inhibited and cannot be enabled
Enabled Remote is enabled but not in control of the Setpt
Active Remote is in control of the Setpt but not in control of the
actuator output
In Control Remote is in control of the Setpt and in control of the actuator
output
Table 5-8. Remote Speed Messages
132 Woodward
The following Remote control indications are available through the Modbus links:
Remote Speed Setpt is Enabled, Remote Speed Setpt is Active, Remote Speed
Setpt is In Control, Remote Speed Setpt is Inhibited, and the Remote Speed
Setpt Input Failed Alarm. In addition to these indications, Remote Speed Setpt
Input analog value is also available.
Relay indications can be programmed to indicate Remote Speed Setpt Active

and Remote Speed Setpt Enabled status’.
Synchronizing and/or Loadsharing

The Synchronizing feature allows an analog input to bias the speed setpoint
when using a DSLC for synchronization. The Synchronizing analog input is
enabled by pressing the front panel YES key from the Sync Status screen
(screen 4), closing the Sync Enable contact (if programmed), issuing an enable
demand through a “F” key, or selecting Sync Enable from either Modbus
The Synchronizing & Load Sharing feature allows an analog input to bias the
speed setpoint when using a DSLC for synchronizing and load sharing. Load
sharing is enabled automatically based on the generator and utility tie breaker
status inputs. The Sync/Load Share input is enabled by pressing the front panel
YES key from the Sync Status screen (screen 4), closing the Sync/Ld Share
Enable contact (if programmed), issuing an enable command through a “F” key,
or selecting Sync Enable from either Modbus communications link.
The Synchronizing or Sync/Ld Share inputs are disabled by pressing the front
panel NO key from the respective Status screen, opening the respective
function’s Enable/Disable contact (if programmed), or selecting the Sync Disable
command from either Modbus communications link. The Synchronizing analog
input is automatically disabled when the generator breaker closes, but can be re-
enabled with the generator breaker closed, to allow synchronization across a tie
line breaker. The Sync/Load Share analog input is automatically disabled when
the generator breaker opens. Table 5-9 lists the possible
synchronizing/loadsharing control messages.
Message 3 Meaning
Disabled Function is in disabled mode
Inhibited Function is inhibited and cannot be enabled
Enabled Function is enabled but not in control of the Setpt
In Control Function is in control of the actuator output
Table 5-9. Control Messages
The following synchronizing and loadsharing control indications are available

through the Modbus links: Generator Breaker Status, Utility Tie Breaker Status,
Frequency Control, Sync is Enabled, Sync or Loadshare is In Control, Sync or
Loadshare is Inhibited, and the Sync/Loadshare Input Failed Alarm. In addition to
these indications, Sync/Loadshare Input analog value is also available.
Relay indications can be programmed to indicate Sync Enabled, Sync/Loadshare

Enabled, Loadshare Control and Frequency Control status’.
Woodward 133
Unit Load (KW) Key Screens

This key is active if the unit is programmed for a generator application or if a first
stage pressure analog input is configured. Figure 5-14 shows the possible
screens that may appear if the KW key is pressed. Only the screens related to
the functions programmed will be displayed. If a first stage pressure analog input
is configured, screen 4 will appear. When the unit is programmed for a generator
application, only one of the first three screens will appear, depending on the
mode of operation (governor valve position droop or KW/unit load input signal
droop).
Screen 1 or 2 is displayed when the unit is programmed with a KW/Unit Load

analog input and the input is not failed. Screen 3 is displayed if no KW/Unit Load
analog input is programmed or the input is failed. When the units on the ‘Load’
parameter are ‘KW’ or ‘MW’, the screen is displaying actual load units from the
KW/Unit Load analog input. When units on the ‘Load’ parameter is ‘%’, the
screen is displaying a calculated load value.
The bottom line of the display on screens 1, 2, & 3 show the Load Setpoint. This
value and units change depending on the droop mode the 505 is presently using.
If the droop is based on the KW input, the units are in ‘KW’ or ‘MW’. If the droop
is LSS/Speed Demand (governor valve position), the units are in ‘rpm’.
The Load Setpoint can be changed when the unit is On-Line from screens 1, 2,
or 3 by selecting the ADJUST UP or DOWN. In addition, the Load Setpt can be
adjusted by closing a Speed Setpoint Raise/Lower contact inputs or selecting
Speed Setpoint Raise or Lower commands from either Modbus communications
link. In addition, the Load setpoint can be directly set to a value by pressing the
ENTER key from the SPEED screen and entering a speed setpoint value, or
Entering a new Speed/Load Setpoint through either Modbus communications
link.
Figure 5-14. KW Key Screens
134 Woodward
Cascade (CAS) Key Screens

For this key to be active, the Cascade function must be programmed. Figure 5-15
shows the possible screens that may appear if the CAS key is pressed. Only the
screens related to the Cascade functionality programmed will be displayed. Only
when the Remote Cascade Setpoint is programmed, will screen 3 appear. The
Cascade PID dynamic and droop values can be adjusted from these screens.
Cascade control can be enabled by pressing the front panel YES key from the
Status screen (screen 2), closing the Cascade Control Enable/Disable contact (if
programmed), or selecting Cascade Enable from either Modbus communications
link.
Cascade control is disabled by pressing the front panel NO key from the
Cascade Status screen (screen 2), opening the Cascade Control Enable/Disable
contact (if programmed), or selecting Cascade Disable from either Modbus
communications link. Cascade control is also disabled if Auxiliary control is
enabled or Remote Speed Setpoint input is enabled. Cascade control is disabled
and ‘inhibited’ if a controlled shutdown is selected, the cascade input fails, or the
unit shuts down. Cascade control can be ‘enabled but not active’ if the generator
and/or utility tie breaker are open. Since the Cascade PID controls through the
Speed setpoint and Speed PID, Cascade will only be “In Control” when the
Speed PID is “In Control” of the actuator output. See Table 5-10 for all possible
cascade control messages.
Figure 5-15. CAS Key Screens
Woodward 135
The Cascade setpoint can be configured to either track the input for bumpless
transfer into control or remain at the last setting. When using the tracking option,
the cascade setpoint cannot be changed until Cascade control is enabled.
The Cascade setpoint can be changed by pressing the ADJUST UP or DOWN

keys from the Cascade setpoint screen (screen 1), closing a Cascade Setpt
Raise/Lower contact input, or selecting Cascade Setpoint Raise or Lower
commands from either Modbus communications link. In addition, the Cascade
setpoint can be directly set to a value by pressing the front panel ENTER key
from the Cascade Setpt screen or by Entering a new Cascade Setpt through
either Modbus communications link.
The Cascade Setpt Raise/Lower contact inputs have a dual function. If either
contact is closed and the Cascade control is active, the cascade setpoint will be
adjusted. If either contact is closed and the cascade control is not active, the
Speed setpoint will be adjusted. The advantage of this feature is that only one set
of raise/lower switches is required to adjust either setpoint.
The Cascade setpoint can be directly set to a value by selecting the front panel
ENTER key from the Cascade Setpt screen or by Entering a new Cascade Setpt
through either Modbus communications link.
Message 5 Meaning
Disabled Cascade control is disabled
Inhibited Cascade is inhibited and cannot be enabled
Enabled Cascade is enabled but not in control of actuator
In Control Cascade is in control of actuator output
Active/Not Spd Ctrl Cascade is active but Speed PID is not in control of actuator
Active w/Rmt Setpt Cascade is active but Speed PID is not in control, Setpt is in
remote control
In Ctrl w/Rmt Setpt Cascade is in control, Speed PID is in control, Setpt is in
remote control
Table 5-10. Cascade Control Messages
The following Cascade control indications are available through the Modbus
links: Cascade is Enabled, Cascade is Active, Cascade is In Control, Cascade is
Inhibited, and the Cascade Input Failed Alarm. In addition to these indications the
Cascade Setpoint, Cascade Input, and Cascade PID Output analog values are
also available.
Relay indications can be programmed to indicate Cascade Control Active, and

Cascade Control Enabled.

The Cascade control setpoint can be remotely positioned by an analog input (if
programmed). The Remote Cascade Setpoint input can be enabled by pressing
the front panel YES key from the Remote Cascade Status screen (screen 3),
closing the Remote Cascade Setpoint Enable/Disable contact (if programmed),
or selecting Remote Cascade Enable from either Modbus communications link.
Remote Cascade Setpoint input is disabled by pressing the front panel NO key
from the Remote Cascade Status screen (screen 3), opening the Remote
Cascade Enable/Disable contact (if programmed), or selecting Remote Cascade
Disable from either Modbus communications link. See Table 5-11 for all possible
Remote Cascade control messages.
136 Woodward
Message 4 Meaning
Disabled Remote is not selected
Inhibited Remote is inhibited and cannot be enabled
Enabled Remote is enabled but not in control of the Setpt
Active Remote is in control of the Setpt but not in control of the
actuator output
In Control Remote is in control of the Setpt and in control of the actuator
output
Table 5-11. Remote Cascade Messages
The remote cascade control indications shown in Table 5-11 are available
through the Modbus links: Remote Cascade is Enabled, Remote Cascade is
Active, Remote Cascade is In Control, Remote Cascade is Inhibited, and Remote
Cascade Input Failed Alarm. In addition to these indications, the Remote
Cascade Input Setpoint is also available.
Relay indications can be programmed to indicate Remote Cascade Control

Active and Remote Cascade Control Enabled status’.
Alarms
The ALARM key is always active in the RUN mode. Figure 5-16 shows the
screen that appears when this key is pressed. If there are no alarms detected,
the screen will display the ‘Alarms Cleared’ message. When an alarm is
detected, the Alarm relay is energized and the front panel Alarm key illuminates.
In addition, the screen will automatically “jump” to the ALARM screen (as
defaulted in the Service mode) and display the alarm condition.
Table 5-12 lists all the potential alarm conditions and their cause. If more than
one alarm condition is present, pressing the Down Arrow key will scroll through
all active alarms. To view the most recent alarm, select the ALARM key. To clear
any alarms that are no longer present, press the front panel RESET key, close
the Reset contact input, or select Reset from either Modbus communications link.
Figure 5-16. ALARM Screen
Woodward 137
Alarm Messages Meaning
Speed Probe #1 Failed Speed probe #1 failure—( < Failed Speed Level or 1 Vrms)
Speed Probe #2 Failed Speed probe #2 failure—( < Failed Speed Level or 1 Vrms)
Cascade Input Fld Cascade analog input failure detected ( > 22 mA or < 2 mA)
Aux Input Fld Auxiliary analog input failure detected ( > 22 mA or < 2 mA)
KW Input Failed KW analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or < 2 mA)
FSP Input Failed FSP analog input failure detected (> 22 mA or < 2 mA)
Remote Spd Input Failed Remote Speed Setpt analog input failure ( > 22 mA or < 2
mA)
Remote Casc Input Fld Remote Cascade Setpt analog input failure ( > 22 mA or < 2
mA)
Remote Aux Input Fld Remote Aux Setpt analog input failure ( > 22 mA or < 2 mA)
Load Share Input Fld Load Share analog input failure detected ( > 22 mA or < 2
mA)
Act #1 Fault Actuator #1 fault detected (an open or short circuit was
sensed)
Act #2 Fault Actuator #2 fault detected (an open or short circuit was
sensed)
Start Perm Not Closed Run was selected while the Start Perm contact in was not
closed
Comm Link #1 Failed Modbus com link #1 was detected as failed—time out error
Comm Link #2 Failed Modbus com link #2 was detected as failed—time out error
Turbine Trip Turbine is tripped alarm indication
Overspeed Turbine overspeed alarm
Tie Breaker Opened Utility Tie breaker was opened after it was closed
Gen Breaker Opened Generator breaker was opened after it was closed
Tie Brkr Open/No Casc Utility Tie breaker was opened when Cascade was active
Gen Brkr Open/No Casc Generator breaker was opened when Cascade was active
Tie Brkr Open/No Remote Util. Tie breaker was opened when Remote Spd Setpt was
active
Gen Brkr Open/No Remote Generator breaker was opened when Remote Spd Setpt
was active
Tie Brkr Open/No Aux Utility Tie breaker was opened when Auxiliary was active
Gen Brkr Open/No Aux Generator breaker was opened when Auxiliary was active
Alarms Cleared All alarms are cleared—no alarms are present
Table 5-12. Alarm Messages
Each individual alarm condition is available through the Modbus links to monitor
the control status. A common alarm indication is also provided.
Relay indications can be programmed to indicate a 505 Common Alarm, in

addition to the dedicated Alarm Relay output.
Trips
Figure 6-17 shows the screen that appears when there is a trip condition. The
cause of the last trip can be seen under the CONT key (screen 2). Table 5-13
lists all the potential trip conditions and their cause.
Figure 5-17. TRIP Screen
138 Woodward
Message 6 Meaning
External Trip Input External Trip contact input was opened
External Trip 2 External Trip #2 contact input was opened
Emer Shutdown Button Emergency Shutdown on the 505 front panel was pressed
Overspeed Turbine overspeed was sensed
All Speed Probes Failed Loss of all speed probes was sensed
Actuator #1 Fault Actuator #1 fault detected (an open or short circuit was
sensed)
Actuator #2 Fault Actuator #2 fault detected (an open or short circuit was
sensed)
Aux Input Failed Aux analog input failure detected ( > 22 mA or < 2 mA)
Comm Link #1 Trip Modbus #1 communication link trip was commanded
Comm Link #2 Trip Modbus #2 communication link trip was commanded
KW Input Failed KW analog input failure detected ( > 22 mA or < 2 mA)
Tie Breaker Opened Utility tie breaker was opened after it was closed
Generator Breaker Open Generator breaker was opened after it was closed
Power Up Trip 505 lost power and CPU was reset or the Program mode
was exited
Shutdown Complete Controlled shutdown was performed and completed
Table 5-13. Trip Messages
Each individual trip condition is available through the Modbus links to monitor the
control status. A common trip indication is also provided.
Relay indications can be programmed to indicate a 505 Shutdown Condition

(energizes for a shutdown condition) or a Trip Relay (de-energizes for a
shutdown/trip), in addition to the dedicated Emergency Trip Relay output.
Speed, Cascade, and Auxiliary Dynamics

Adjustments
Dynamic control values are programmed in the program mode and adjusted in
the RUN mode. While in the run mode, pressing the DYN key calls up the
dynamic adjustments of the parameter in control. The Proportional and Integral
Gain dynamic adjustments are available under their respective keys (SPEED,
CAS, & AUX). The Derivative term adjustments are made in the Service Mode—
see volume 2). To adjust the gain settings, the @ symbol must be on the display
line containing the asterisk/gain value to tune. The @ symbol is moved using the
SELECT key. The ADJUST UP and DOWN keys can then be used to adjust the
function on the line with the @ symbol.
The Speed, Cascade and Auxiliary controls are PID controllers. The response of
each control loop can be adjusted by selecting the dynamics mode as described
above. Proportional gain, integral gain (stability), and DR (derivative ratio) are the
adjustable and interacting parameters used to match the response of the control
loop with the response of the system. They correspond to the P (proportional), I
(integral), and D (derivative) terms, and are displayed by the 505 as follows:
P = Proportional gain (%)
I = Integral gain (%)
D = Derivative (determined by DR and I)
If an older type 505 is being replaced by a new 505, the “ P & D ” terms will be
the same, however, the “ I ” term should be reduced by a factor of 10 from the old
505’s reset value to achieve the same control response.
Woodward 139
Tuning P & I Gains

Proportional gain must be tuned to best respond to a system transient or step
change. If system response is not known, a typical starting value is 5%. If
proportional gain is set too high the control will appear to be overly sensitive, and
may oscillate with a cycle time of less than 1 second.
Integral gain must be tuned gain for best control at steady state. If system
response is not known a typical starting value is 5%. If the integral gain is set too
high the control may hunt or oscillate at cycles times of over 1 second.
For best response the proportional gain and integral gain should be as high as
possible. To obtain a faster transient response, slowly increase the proportional
gain setting until the actuator or final driver output begins to oscillate or waver.
Then adjust the integral gain as necessary to stabilize the output. If stability
cannot be obtained with the integral gain adjustment, reduce the proportional
gain setting.
A well tuned system, when given a step change, should slightly overshoot the
control point then come into control.
A PID control loop’s gain is a combination of all the gains in the loop. The loop’s
total gain includes actuator gain, valve gain, and valve linkage gain, transducer
gain, internal turbine gains, and the 505’s adjustable gains. If the accumulated
mechanical gain (actuators, valves, valve linkage, etc.) is very high, the 505’s
gain must be very low to be added to the system gain required for system
stability.
In cases where a small change in the 505's output results in a large speed or
load change (high mechanical gain) it may not be possible to take the 505's gains
low enough to reach stable operation. In those cases the mechanical interface
(actuator, linkage, servo, valve rack) design and/or calibration should be
reviewed and changed to achieve a gain of one where 0-100% 505 output
corresponds to 0- 100% valve travel.
Dual Dynamics (Speed/Load)

The Speed PID has two sets of dynamics, On-Line and Off-Line; each include
Proportional Gain, Integral Gain, and Derivative Ratio (DR) variables. There are
three cases that determine when the dynamics switch between On-Line and Off-
Line:
 A “Select On-Line Dynamics” contact input is programmed
 Unit is driving a generator
 Unit is driving a mechanical drive (not a generator)
If a contact input is programmed to “Select On-Line Dynamics”, it has priority

regardless of the driven device. When the contact is closed, On-Line dynamics
are selected; when open, Off-Line dynamics are selected.
If the unit is driving a generator and no “Select On-Line Dynamics” contact input
is programmed, the Speed Off-Line dynamics are used by the Speed PID when
the generator or utility tie breaker contacts are open. The speed On-Line
dynamics are used by the speed PID when the generator and utility tie breaker
contacts are closed. If the speed dynamics select contact is programmed, the
generator and utility tie contacts do not effect the dynamics selection.
140 Woodward
If the unit is not driving a generator and no “Select On-Line Dynamics” contact
input is programmed, the Speed Off-Line dynamic settings are used when the
turbine speed is below minimum governor speed; .On-Line dynamics are used if
the turbine speed is above minimum governor speed. If the speed dynamics
select contact is programmed, the turbine speed does not effect the dynamics
selection.
A relay can be programmed to indicate that the On-Line Dynamics mode is

selected.
Cascade/Auxiliary Droop
The Cascade and Auxiliary controllers can be programmed to use droop for
control loop stability. If the parameter being controlled (Cascade or Auxiliary) is
also being controlled by another device (letdown station, boiler, or other turbine),
droop is typically required for control loop stability. If required, no less than 5%
droop is recommend for stable operation.
Tuning Derivative
The value of the Derivative Ratio (DR) term can range from 0.01 to 100. If unsure
of the correct value, set the Speed control’s DR term to 5% and the Aux &
Cascade controllers’ DR terms to 100%. In order to simplify adjustment of the
dynamics, adjusting the integral gain value sets both the I and D terms of the PID
controller. The DR term establishes the degree of effect the integral gain value
has on the "D" term, and changes the configuration of a controller from input rate
sensitive (input dominant) to feedback rate sensitive (feedback dominant) and
vice versa.
Another possible use of the DR adjustment is to reconfigure the controller from a

PID to a PI controller. This is done by adjusting the DR term to its upper or lower
limits, depending on whether an input or feedback dominant controller is desired.
 A DR setting of 1 to 100 selects feedback dominant mode.
 A DR setting of .01 to 1 selects input dominant mode.
 A DR setting of .01 or 100 selects a PI only controller, input and feedback
dominant respectively.
The change from one of these configurations to the other may have no effect
during normal operation, however, it can cause great differences in response
when the governor is coming into control. (at startup, during a full load change, or
during transfer of control from another channel).
An input dominant controller is more sensitive to the change-of-rate of its input

(Speed, Cascade in or Auxiliary in), and can therefore prevent overshoot of the
setpoint better than a feedback dominant controller. Although this response is
desirable during a startup or full load rejections, it can cause excessive control
motions in some systems where a smooth transition response is desired.
A controller configured as feedback dominant is more sensitive to the change-of-

rate of its feedback (LSS). A feedback dominant controller has the ability to limit
the rate of change of the LSS bus when a controller is near its setpoint but is not
yet in control. This limiting of the LSS bus allows a feedback dominant controller
to make smoother control transitions than an input dominant controller.
Woodward 141
Tuning Example
If the system is unstable, make sure the governor is the cause. This can be
checked by closing the valve limiter until it has control of the actuator output. If
the governor is causing the oscillation, time the oscillation cycle time. A rule-of-
thumb is, if the system’s oscillation cycle time is less than 1 second reduce the
Proportional gain term. A rule-of-thumb is, if the system’s oscillation cycle time is
greater the 1 second reduce the Integral gain term (proportional gain may need
to be increased also).
On an initial startup with the 505, all PID dynamic gain terms will require
adjustment to match the respective PID’s response to that of its control loop.
There are multiple dynamic tuning methods available that can be used with the
505’s PIDs to assist in determining the gain terms that provide optimum control
loop response times (Ziegler Nichols, etc.). The following method is a simplified
version of other tuning methods, and can be used to achieve PID gain values
that are close to optimum:
1. Increase Derivative Ratio (DR) to 100 (This is the default setting).
2. Reduce integral gain to minimum.
3. Increase proportional gain until system just starts to oscillate.
4. Record the system gain (G) and oscillation period (T).
5. Set the dynamics as follows:
 For PID control set the proportional gain=0.60*G; integral gain=20/T;
DR=5
 For PI control set the proportional gain=0.45*G; integral gain=12/T;
DR=100
This method of tuning will get the gain settings close, they can be fine-tuned from
this point. Figure 5-18 shows the typical response to a load change when the
dynamics are optimally adjusted.
Figure 5-18. Typical Response to Load Change
For additional information on PID settings, refer to Volume 2.
142 Woodward
Chapter 6.
Communications
Modbus Communications
The 505 control can communicate with plant distributed control systems and/or
CRT based operator control panels through two Modbus® * communication ports.
These ports support RS-232, RS-422, RS-485 communications using ASCII or
RTU MODBUS transmission protocols. Modbus utilizes a master/slave protocol.
This protocol determines how a communication network’s master and slave
devices establish and break contact, how a sender is identified, how messages
are exchanged, and how errors are detected.
Monitor Only
The two Modbus communication ports, as defaulted from the factory, are not
programmed. Although these ports are not programmed they continue to update
all information to all registers. This allows the 505 to be monitored but not
controlled from an external device. By simply connecting a monitoring device,
configured to communicate through Modbus, and to the 505’s defaulted protocol
settings (parity, stop bits, etc.), this device can be used to monitor all the 505’s
controlling parameters, modes, etc. without effecting control.
To use a 505 port to only monitor 505 parameters and operational modes or not
use the port at all (Boolean and analog write commands are ignored), program
the port’s ‘Use Modbus Port’ setting to ‘NO’.
Monitor and Control

Once a Modbus port is configured within the 505’s Program Mode, the 505 will
accept RUN mode commands from an external network master device (DCS,
etc.). This allows a Modbus compatible device to monitor and perform all 505
RUN mode parameters and commands except for the Overspeed Test enable,
On- Line/Off-Line Dynamics select, and Override Failed Speed Signal
commands.
Both Modbus ports are independent of each other, and can be used
simultaneously. The last command given between the two ports has priority or is
the mode or function selected.
To use a 505 Modbus port to monitor and operate the 505 through, program the
port’s ‘Use Modbus Port’ setting to ‘YES’.
Modbus Communication
The 505 control supports two Modbus transmission modes. A mode defines the
individual units of information within a message and the numbering system used
to transmit the data. Only one mode per Modbus network is allowed. The
supported modes are ASCII (American Standard Code for Information
Interchange), and RTU (Remote Terminal Unit). These modes are defined in the
following table.
Woodward 143
Characteristic ASCII RTU
Coding System hexadecimal (uses 8-bit binary
ASCII printable binary
characters: 0-9,A-F)
Start Bits 1 1
Data Bits per Char 7 8
Parity even, odd even, odd
or none or none
Stop Bits 1, 1.5, or 2 1, 1.5, or 2
Baud Rate 110, 300, 600, 1200 110,300, 600, 1200
1800,2400, 4800, 9600 1800, 2400, 4800, 9600
19200, 38400, or 57600 19200, 38400, or 57600
Error Checking LRC(Longitudinal CRC(Cyclical
Redundancy Check) Redundancy Check)
Table 6-1. ASCII vs RTU Modbus
In the RTU mode, data is sent in 8-bit binary characters and transmitted in a
continuous stream. In the ASCII mode, each binary character is divided into two
4-bit parts (high order and low order), changed to be represented by a
hexadecimal equivalent, then transmitted, with breaks of up to 1 second possible.
Because of these differences, data transmission with the ASCII mode is typically
slower (see Figure 6-1 below).
Figure 6-1. ASCII/RTU Representation of 3
The Modbus protocol allows one master and up to 247 slaves on a common
network. Each slave is assigned a fixed, unique device address in the range of 1
to 247. With the Modbus protocol, only the network master can initiate a
transaction. A transaction consists of a request from the master to a slave unit
and the slave’s response. The protocol and Modbus device number are set in the
Program Mode and can be adjusted in the Service Mode, if required.
The 505 control is programmed to function as a slave unit only. As a slave unit,
the 505 will only respond to a transaction request by a master device. The 505
can directly communicate with a DCS or other Modbus supporting device on a
single communications link, or through a multi-dropped network. If multi-dropping
is used, up to 246 devices (505s or other customer devices) can be connected to
one Master device on a single network. The control address is programmed
under the 505’s communications block and can be changed in the service mode,
if needed.
Each message to or from a master has a defined structure called the message
“frame”. A frame consists of the slave device address, a code defining the
requested data, and error checking information. See Figure 6-2.
144 Woodward
Figure 6-2. Modbus Frame Definition
The Modbus function code tells the addressed slaves what function to perform.
The following table lists the function codes supported by this control.
Modbus Function Codes

Code Definition Reference Address
01 Read Digital Outputs 0XXXX
(Raise/Lower and Enable/Disable Commands)
02 Read Digital Inputs 1XXXX
(Status Indications/Alarms and Trips)
03 Read Analog Outputs 4XXXX
04 Read Analog Inputs 3XXXX
(Speed, Setpt, etc.)
05 Write Single Discrete Output 0XXXX
(Raise/Lower and Enable/Disable Commands)
06 Write Single Register 4XXXX
(Enter Setpt Directly)
08 Loopback Diagnostic Test N/A
(Subfunction 0 only)
15 Write Digital Outputs 0XXXX
16 Write Analog Outputs 4XXXX
Table 6-2. Modbus Function Codes
When a Modbus message is received, it is checked for any errors or invalid data.
If there is invalid data in the message, an error code is sent back to the master
and the control issues an alarm message. The error codes are defined in the
following table. The exception error status and respective error codes can be
viewed in the Service mode under PORT # SETTINGS, where # is the number of
the port (1 or 2).
If the control has not received a message for the configured time-out period, the
control will alarm with an error message, but no message is sent to the master.
This time-out is defaulted to 2 seconds and only applies to units using both
monitor and control (adjustable in the Service Mode).
Woodward 145
Modbus Slave Exception Error Codes

Error Error Code Sent
Code Message To Master Description
0 No Error 0 No Error
1 Bad Modbus function 1 The specified function is not
supported for this control.
2 Bad Modbus data address 2 The Modbus value addressed
is not valid for this control.
3 Bad Modbus data value 3 Too many values requested or
the on/off indicator in function
code 5 is invalid.
9 Bad Modbus checksum None Message checksum did not
match.
10 Bad Modbus message None Message could not be
decoded.
N/A Lost Modbus link None No messages received for the
configured time-out period
Table 6-3. Modbus Error Codes
Port Adjustments
Before the 505 will communicate with the master device, the communication
parameters must be verified. These values are set in the Program Mode and can
be adjusted, if required, from the Service Mode.
Modbus Communication Port Adjustments

Parameter Adjustment Range
Baud Rate 110 TO 57600
Parity NONE, ODD or EVEN
Stop Bits 1 TO 2
Driver RS232, RS422, or RS485
505 Control Modbus Addresses

The Modbus communication ports in the 505 control are programmed for unique
Modbus addresses. A complete listing of these addresses for your application is
located at the end of this section in the manual. The Modbus address listing
consists of Boolean Writes, Boolean Reads, Analog Reads, and Analog Writes.
The Boolean reads and writes are also referred to as input and holding coils. The
analog reads and writes are also referred to as input registers and holding
registers.
All values that can be addressed by Modbus are considered to be discrete and
numeric. The discrete values are a 1 bit binary, on or off value and the numerics
are 16 bit values. Discrete values are sometimes referred to as coils or digitals
and numerics are referred to as registers or analogs. All read/write registers are
interpreted by the 505 as signed 16 bit integer values. Since Modbus can only
handle integers, values that require a decimal point in the Modbus Master Device
are multiplied by a scaling constant before being sent by 505. See Tables 6-7 &
6-8 for defaulted communication constants and ranges.
The maximum number of discretes and registers that can be transmitted in one
packet is dependent on each implementation of Modbus. The following table
defines these limits.
146 Woodward
Mode Of Max Max
Transmission Discretes Registers
ASCII 944 59
RTU 1188 118
Table 6-4. Maximum Modbus Discrete and Analog Values
Boolean Writes (Holding Coils)

Holding coils are logical signals that are both readable from and writable to the
505 control. An example of a Boolean write value would be raise or lower
commands. A logical true denoted by the value 1 will cause the command listed
in the description to be executed. For example, if a 1 is written to address 0:0010
and this corresponded to a speed raise command, the manual speed setpoint will
increase until a 0 is written to address 0:0010. The 505 control supports function
codes 1, 5, and 15. These correspond to reading selected holding coils, writing to
a single holding coil, and writing to multiple holding coils, respectively. The
holding coils available are listed in Table 6-5.
Boolean Reads (Input Coils)

Input coils are logical signals that are readable from, but not writable to, the 505
control. An example of an Boolean read value would be a turbine trip status
indication. The input coil will have the value 1 if the statement in the description
column is true and a 0 if false. The `1:’ term in the address identifies an input coil.
The 505 control supports Modbus function code 2, which involves reading
selected input coils. The input coils available are listed in Table 6-6.
Analog Reads (Input Registers)

Input registers are analog values that are readable from, but not writable to, the
505 control. An example of an analog read value would be turbine speed. The
values of the input registers are stored internal to the control as floating point
numbers representing engineering units (kPa or rpm). The values that are
transmitted are integer values ranging from -32767 to +32767. Since Modbus can
only handle integers, values that have a decimal point are multiplied by a
constant before being sent by Modbus. For example, these input registers may
be listed as the Modbus value `x100’ or `x10’ under the description heading to
denote the value is multiplied by a scaling constant. This will allow transmission
of decimal parts of a unit if this is necessary for better resolution.
See the 505 Service mode for defaulted communication constants and ranges.
The 505 control supports Modbus function code 4, which involves reading
selected input registers. The input registers available are listed in Table 6-7.
Woodward 147
Analog Writes (Holding Registers)

Holding registers are analog values that are writable to the 505 control. These
values can also be read from by a device performing error checking. An example
of an analog write value would be a direct speed setpoint value as opposed to
raise and lower commands. The value of the holding registers are also stored in
the control as numbers representing engineering units (psi or rpm). The 505
control supports Modbus function codes 3, 6, and 16. These correspond to
reading selected holding registers, writing to a single holding register, and writing
to multiple holding registers, respectively. The holding registers available are
listed in Table 6-8.
The following tables give the address and description of all Boolean and analog,
reads and writes:
Addr Description Addr Description

0.0001 Emergency Shutdown 0.0041 Spare
0.0002 Emergency Shutdown Acknowledge 0.0042 Modbus Alarm Acknowledge
0.0003 Controlled Shutdown 0:0043 Turn On/Energize Modbus Relay 1
0.0004 Abort Controlled Shutdown 0:0044 Turn Off/De-Energize Modbus Relay 1
0.0005 System Reset 0:0045 Turn On/Energize Modbus Relay 2
0.0006 Start/Run 0:0046 Turn Off/De-Energize Modbus Relay 2
0.0007 Manual Open Valve Limiter 0:0047 Turn On/Energize Modbus Relay 3
0.0008 Manual Close Valve Limiter 0:0048 Turn Off/De-Energize Modbus Relay 3
0.0009 Lower Speed Setpoint 0:0049 Turn On/Energize Modbus Relay 4
0.0010 Raise Speed Setpoint 0:0050 Turn Off/De-Energize Modbus Relay 4
0.0011 Go To Rated (Idle/Rated) 0:0051 Turn On/Energize Modbus Relay 5
0.0012 Go To Idle (Idle/Rated) 0:0052 Turn Off/De-Energize Modbus Relay 5
0.0013 Halt Auto Start Sequence 0:0053 Turn On/Energize Modbus Relay 6
0.0014 Continue Auto Start Sequence 0:0054 Turn Off/De-Energize Modbus Relay 6
0.0015 Enable Remote Speed Setpt Control 0:0055 Spare
0.0016 Disable Rmt Speed Setpt Control 0:0056 Spare
0.0017 Go To Modbus Entered Speed Setpt 0:0057 Spare
0.0018 Spare 0:0058 Spare
0.0019 Arm Frequency Control 0:0059 Spare
0.0020 Disarm Frequency Control 0:0060 Spare
0.0021 Sync Enable 0:0061 Spare
0.0022 Sync Disable 0:0062 Spare
0.0023 Enable Cascade Control 0:0063 Spare
0.0024 Disable Cascade Control 0:0064 Spare
0.0025 Lower Cascade Setpoint 0:0065 Spare
0.0026 Raise Cascade Setpoint 0:0066 Spare
0.0027 Enable Rmt Cascade Setpt Control 0:0067 Spare
0.0028 Disable Rmt Cascade Setpt Control 0:0068 Spare
0.0029 Go To Modbus Entered Cascade Setpoint 0:0069 Spare
0.0030 Spare 0:0070 Spare
0.0031 Enable Aux control (Aux controller only) 0:0071 Spare
0.0032 Disable Aux Control (Aux controller only) 0:0072 Spare
0.0033 Lower Aux setpoint 0:0073 Spare
0.0034 Raise Aux Setpoint 0:0074 Spare
0.0035 Enable Rmt Aux Setpt Control 0:0075 Momentarily Energize Modbus Relay #1
0.0036 Disable Rmt Aux Setpt Control 0:0076 Momentarily Energize Modbus Relay #2
0.0037 GoTo Modbus Entered Aux Setpt 0:0077 Momentarily Energize Modbus Relay #3
0.0038 Spare 0:0078 Momentarily Energize Modbus Relay #4
0.0039 Select Remote Ctrl (Remote/Local) 0:0079 Momentarily Energize Modbus Relay #5
0.0040 Select Local Ctrl (Remote/Local) 0:0080 Momentarily Energize Modbus Relay #6
Table 6-5. Boolean Write Addresses
148 Woodward
Addr Description Addr Description
1:0001 Alarm—MPU #1 Failed 1:0043 Trip—Overspeed Trip
1:0002 Alarm—MPU #2 Failed 1:0044 Trip—Loss of Speed Signals
1:0003 Alarm—Cascade Input Failed 1:0045 Trip—Actuator # 1 Fault
1:0004 Alarm—Aux Input Failed 1:0046 Trip—Actuator # 2 Fault
1:0005 Alarm—KW Input Failed 1:0047 Trip—Aux Input Failed
1:0006 Alarm—Sync Input Failed 1:0048 Trip—External Trip 2
1:0007 Alarm—First Stage Press Input Failed 1:0049 Trip—External Trip 3
1:0008 Alarm—Remote Speed Input Failed 1:0050 Trip—Modbus Link #1 Trip
1:0009 Alarm—Remote Cascade Input Failed 1:0051 Trip—Modbus Link #2 Trip
1:0010 Alarm—Remote Aux Input Failed 1:0052 Trip—spare
1:0011 Alarm—Loadshare Input Failed 1:0053 Trip—Tie Breaker Open
1:0012 Alarm—Actuator #1 Failed 1:0054 Trip—Gen Breaker Open
1:0013 Alarm—Actuator #2 Failed 1:0055 Trip—Power up
1:0014 Alarm- Start Permissive Not Met 1:0056 Trip—Manual Stop
1:0015 Alarm—Communication Link #1 Failed 1:0057 Trip—External Trip 4
1:0016 Alarm—Communication Link #2 Failed 1:0058 Trip—External Trip 5
1:0017 Alarm—Generator Breaker Open 1:0059 Trip—spare
1:0018 Alarm—Turbine Trip 1:0060 Trip—spare
1:0019 Alarm—Tie Breaker Open 1:0061 Trip—spare
1:0020 Alarm—Overspeed Alarm 1:0062 Trip—spare
1:0021 Alarm—Tie Breaker Open/No Aux 1:0063 Trip—spare
1:0022 Alarm—Gen Breaker Open/No Aux 1:0064 Shutdown Exists (Trip Indication)
1:0023 Alarm—Tie Breaker Open/No Casc 1:0065 ESD Acknowledge Enable
1:0024 Alarm—Gen Breaker Open/No Casc 1:0066 Moving to Min Setpoint
1:0025 Alarm—Tie Breaker Open/No Remote 1:0067 Idle/Rated—Ramping to Idle
1:0026 Alarm—Gen Breaker Open/No Remote 1:0068 Idle/Rated—At Idle
1:0027 Alarm—Stuck in Critical Alarm 1:0069 Idle/Rated—Ramping to Rated
1:0028 Alarm—spare 1:0070 Idle Rated—At Rated
1:0029 Alarm—spare 1:0071 Auto Seq—Setpt at Lo Idle
1:0030 Alarm—spare 1:0072 Auto Seq—Ramping to High Idle
1:0031 Alarm—spare 1:0073 Auto Seq—Setpt at High Idle
1:0032 Alarm—spare 1:0074 Auto Seq—Ramping to Rated
1:0033 Alarm—spare 1:0075 Auto Seq—At Rated
1:0034 Alarm—spare 1:0076 Speed PID In Control
1:0035 Alarm—spare 1:0077 Speed Sensor 1 Failed Override ON
1:0036 Alarm—spare 1:0078 Speed Sensor 2 Failed Override ON
1:0037 Alarm—spare 1:0079 Overspeed Test Permissive
1:0038 OpView Alarm latch 1:0080 Overspeed Test In Progress
1:0039 Alarm Acknowledge 1:0081 Speed At or above Min Gov
1:0040 Alarm Exists (Common Alarm Indication) 1:0082 Turbine In Critical Speed Band
1:0041 Trip—External Trip 1:0083 Remote Speed Setpt Is Enabled
1:0042 Trip—ESD Button 1:0084 Remote Speed Setpt Is Active
1:0085 Remote Speed Setpt Is In Control 1:0129 Spare
1:0086 Remote Speed Setpt Is Inhibited 1:0130 Spare
1:0087 Spare 1:0131 Spare
1:0090 Generator Breaker Closed 1:0134 Spare
1:0091 Utility Tie Breaker Closed 1:0135 Spare
1:0092 Synchronizing Rate Selected 1:0136 Spare
1:0093 Synchronizing Is Enabled 1:0137 Valve Limiter Is Open
1:0094 Sync or Load Share Is In Control 1:0138 Valve Limiter Is Closed
1:0095 Sync/Load Share Is Inhibited 1:0139 Valve Limiter In Control
1:0096 Spare 1:0140 Remote/Local-Remote Selected
1:0097 Frequency Control Armed 1:0141 Remote/Local—Modbus #1 Active
1:0098 Frequency Control 1:0142 Start Permissive
1:0099 Spare 1:0143 Controlled Stop In Progress
1:0100 Cascade Is Enabled 1:0144 Spare
1:0101 Cascade Is Active 1:0145 Spare
1:0102 Cascade Is In Control 1:0146 Spare
Woodward 149
1:0103 Cascade Is Inhibited 1:0147 Spare
1:0104 Rmt Cascade Is Enabled 1:0148 Spare
1:0105 Rmt Cascade Is Active 1:0149 Spare
1:0106 Rmt Cascade Is In Control 1:0150 Spare
1:0107 Rmt Cascade Is Inhibited 1:0151 Shutdown Relay Energized
1:0108 Spare 1:0152 Alarm Relay Energized
1:0109 Auxiliary Is Enabled 1:0153 Relay 1 Energized
1:0110 Auxiliary Is Active 1:0154 Relay 2 Energized
1:0111 Auxiliary Is In Control 1:0155 Relay 3 Energized
1:0112 Aux Active/Not Limiting 1:0156 Relay 4 Energized
1:0113 Aux Active/Not In Control 1:0157 Relay 5 Energized
1:0114 Auxiliary is Inhibited 1:0158 Relay 6 Energized
1:0115 Remote Aux Is Enabled 1:0159 ESD Contact Input Closed
1:0116 Remote Aux Is Active 1:0160 Reset Contact Input Closed
1:0117 Rmt Aux Is In Control 1:0161 Raise Speed Contact Input Closed
1:0118 Rmt Aux Is Inhibited 1:0162 Lower Speed Contact Input Closed
1:0119 Spare 1:0163 Contact In 1 Closed
1:0173 Contact In 11 Closed 1:0187 Gen Set Configured
1:0174 Contact In 12 Closed 1:0188 Cascade Control Configured
1:0175 Aux Limiter Configured 1:0189 Remote Cascade Configured
1:0176 Sync Function Configured 1:0190 Aux Control Configured
1:0177 ESD Control Configured 1:0191 Remote Aux Configured
1:0178 Manual Start Configured 1:0192 Enables Mod1 in local
1:0179 Auto Start Configured 1:0193 Start Permissive Configured
1:0180 Semi-Auto Start Configured 1:0194 Frequency Arm/Disarm Configured
1:0181 Idle/Rated Start Configured 1:0195 Frequency Control Configured
1:0182 Auto Start Sequence Configured 1:0196 MPU 2 Configured
1:0183 First Stage Pressure Configured 1:0197 Local/Remote Configured
1:0184 Remote Control Configured 1:0198 Local Trip Enabled
1:0185 Loadsharing Configured 1:0199 Casc Tracking Configured
1:0186 Actuator 2 Configured 1:0200 KW Signal OK
Table 6-6. Boolean Read Addresses
Addr Description Units Multiplier

3:0001 Control Parameter * none none
3:0002 Speed Sensor #1 Input rpm none
3:0003 Speed Sensor #2 Input rpm none
3:0004 Actual Turbine Speed rpm none
3:0005 Actual Speed (%) % 100
3:0006 Speed Setpoint (%) % 100
3:0007 Speed Setpoint rpm none
3:0008 Speed Droop Setpoint rpm none
3:0009 Speed Droop % 100
3:0010 Speed PID Output % 100
3:0011 Min Governor Speed Setpoint rpm none
3:0012 Highest Speed Reached rpm none
3:0013 Idle/Rated—Idle Speed rpm none
3:0014 Idle/Rated—Rated Speed rpm none
3:0015 Auto Seq-Low Idle Speed Setpt rpm none
3:0016 Auto Seq-Low Idle Delay Time min 100
150 Woodward
3:0017 Auto Seq-Time Left At Low Idle min 100
3:0018 Auto Seq-Low Idle to High Idle Rate rpm/sec none
3:0019 Auto Seq-High Idle Speed Setpoint rpm none
3:0020 Auto Seq-High Idle Delay Time min 100
3:0021 Auto Seq-Time Remaining At High Idle min 100
3:0022 Auto Seq-High Idle to Rated Rate rpm/sec none
3:0023 Auto Seq—Rated Speed Setpt rpm none
3:0024 Auto Seq—Run Time Hours hrs none
3:0025 Auto Seq—Hours Since Alarm hrs none
3:0026 Cascade Setpoint (Scaled) Casc units cascade scale factor
3:0027 Cascade PID Output % 100
3:0028 Cascade Input (%) % 100
3:0029 Cascade Setpoint (%) % 100
3:0030 Cascade Scale Factor none none
3:0031 Cascade Input (Scaled) Casc units cascade scale factor
3:0032 Remote Cascade Input (Scaled) Casc units cascade scale factor
3:0033 Aux Setpoint (Scaled) aux units aux scale factor
3:0034 Aux PID Output % 100
3:0035 Aux Input (%) % 100
3:0036 Aux Setpoint (%) % 100
3:0037 Aux Scale Factor none none
3:0038 Aux Input (Scaled) aux units aux scale factor
3:0039 Remote Aux Input (Scaled) aux units aux scale factor
3:0040 Remote Speed Setpoint Input rpm none
3:0041 FSP Scale Factor none none
3:0042 FSP Input (Scaled) FSP units FSP scale factor
3:0043 Loadshare Scale Factor none none
3:0044 Sync/Loadshare Input (Scaled) rpm ldshr scale factor
3:0045 KW Scale Factor none none
3:0046 KW Input (Scaled) kW units kW scale factor
3:0047 Vlv Limiter Setpt % 100
3:0048 Actuator Demand % 100
3:0049 Actuator 1 Demand % 100
3:0050 Actuator 2 Demand % 100
3:0051 Spare
3:0052 Spare
3:0053 Spare
3:0054 Spare
3:0055 Spare
3:0056 Spare
3:0057 Spare
3:0058 Spare
3:0059 Spare
3:0060 Modbus Entered Speed Setpoint (fdbk) rpm none
3:0061 Modbus Entered Cascade Setpt (fdbk) Casc units Casc scale factor
3:0062 Modbus Entered Aux Setpt (fdbk) Aux units Aux scale factor
3:0063 Spare
3:0064 Spare
3:0065 Spare
3:0066 Spare
3:0067 Spare
3:0068 Spare
3:0069 Spare
3:0070 Spare
3:0071 Spare
3:0072 Analog Input 1 % 100
3:0078 Analog Output 1 mA 100
Woodward 151
3:0084 Actuator #1 Output mA 100
3:0085 Actuator #2 Output mA 100
3:0086 Last Trip none none
3:0087 KW units (3 = MW, 4 = KW) none none
3:0088 Analog Input 1 Configuration * none none
3:0094 Analog Output 1 Configuration * none none
3:0100 Relay 1 Configuration * none none
3:0106 Contact Input 1 Configuration * none none
3:0118 Aux Units Configured * none none
3:0119 Cascade Units Configured * none none
3:0120 Spare
* Look up table at end of section
Table 6-7. Analog Read Addresses

4:0001 Modbus Entered Speed Setpoint rpm none
4:0002 Modbus Entered Casc Setpoint Casc units Casc scale factor
4:0003 Modbus Entered Aux Setpoint Aux units Aux scale factor
4:0004 Spare
4:0005 Spare
4:0006 Spare
4:0007 Spare
4:0008 Spare
Table 7-8. Analog Write Addresses
152 Woodward
Last Turbine Trip Cause

The cause of the last turbine trip (address 3:0086) is an integer that represents
the following cause:
Value Description
1. External Trip Input
2. Emergency Shutdown Button (front panel push-button)
3. Overspeed Trip
4. All Speed Probes Failed
5. Act #1 Fault
6. Act #2 Fault
7. Aux Input Failed
8. External Trip 2
9. External Trip 3
10. Comm Link #1 Trip
11. Comm Link #2 Trip
12. KW Input Failed
13. Utility Tie Breaker Opened
14. Generator Breaker Opened
15. Power up Shutdown
16. Manual (controlled) Shutdown
17. External Trip 4
18. External Trip 5
Table 6-9. Last Turbine Trip Cause
505 Controlling Parameters

The controlling parameter status of the 505 uses an Analog Read register
(3:0001) to identify the parameters that are in control. This variable follows what
is displayed on the controlling parameter screen, under the ‘CONT’ key. The
variable gives the current status of the control and is defined in the following
table.
Value Description
1. Speed/Off—Line
2. Speed/On—Line
3. Remote/Speed
4. Cascade/Speed
5. Remote Cascade/Speed
6. Frequency/Speed
7. Load Share/Speed
8. Synchronizing
9. Auto Start Sequence
10. Idle/Rated Start
11. Semi Auto Start
12. Auto Start
13. Manual Start
14. Ready to Start
15. Start Perm Not Met
16. Configuration Error
17. Auxiliary
18. Remote Auxiliary
19. Valve Limiter
20. Max Actuator
21. Spare for future use
22. Controlled Shutdown
23. Shutdown
Table 6-10. Control Status
Woodward 153
Analog Read addresses 3:0088—0093 give the configuration value of the analog
inputs, one to six in order. The configuration for the analog inputs are defined in
the table below.
Value Description
1. Remote Speed Setpt
2. Synchronizing Input
3. Sync/Load Share Input
4. KW/Unit Load Input
5. Cascade Input
6. Remote Cascade Setpt
7. Auxiliary Input
8. Remote Aux Setpt
9. First Stage Press Input
10. (Not Used)
Table 6-11. Analog Input Configuration
Analog Read addresses 3:0094—0099 give the configuration value of the analog
outputs, one to six in order. The configuration for the analog outputs are defined
in the table below.
Value Description
1. Actual Speed
2. Speed Setpoint
3. Remote Speed Setpt
4. Load Share Input
5. Sync Input
6. KW Input
7. Cascade Input
8. Cascade Setpoint
9. Rmt Cascade Setpt
10. Auxiliary Input
11. Auxiliary Setpoint
12. Rmt Auxiliary Setpt
13. Valve Limiter Setpoint
14. Actuator Demand Readout
15. Actuator 1 Readout
16. Actuator 2 Readout
17. First Stg Press Input
18. (Not Used)
Table 6-12. Analog Output Configuration
154 Woodward
Analog Read addresses 3:0100—0105 give the configuration value of the relays,
one to six in order. The configuration for the relays are defined in the table below.
Value Description
Relay Configured As Level Switch
0. Under speed Switch
1. Speed Level Switch
2. Speed Setpoint Level Switch
3. KW Level Switch
4. Load Share Level Switch
5. Cascade Level Switch
6. Cascade Setpoint Level Switch
7. Aux Level Switch
8. Aux Setpoint Level Switch
9. Actuator Demand Level Switch
10. Act 1 Demand Level Switch
11. Act 2 Demand Level Switch
12. Valve Limiter Level Switch
13. First Stage Pressure Level Switch
Relay Configured To Indicate State
21. Shutdown Condition
22. Trip Relay (additional trip relay output)
23. Alarm Condition
24. Control Status OK
25. Overspeed Trip
26. Overspeed Test Enabled
27. Speed PID in Control
28. Remote Speed Setpt Enabled
29. Remote Speed Setpt Active
30. Underspeed Switch
31. Auto Start Sequence Halted
32. On-Line PID Dynamics Mode
33. Local Control Mode
34. Frequency Control Armed
35. Frequency Control
36. Sync Enabled
37. Sync/Load Share Active
38. Load Share Control
39. Casc Control Enabled
40. Cascade Control Active
41. Remote Casc Setpt Enabled
42. Remote Casc Setpt Active
43. Aux Control Enabled
44. Aux Control Active
45. Auxiliary PID in Control
46. Remote Aux Setpt Enabled
47. Remote Aux Setpt Active
48. Valve Limiter in Control
49. F3 Key Selected
50. F4 Key Selected
51. Modbus Command
52. (Not Used)
Table 6-13. Relay Configuration
Woodward 155
Analog Read addresses 3:0106—0117 give the configuration value of the contact
inputs, one to twelve in order. The configuration for the contact inputs are defined
in the table below.
Value Description
1. Generator Breaker
2. Utility Tie Breaker
3. Overspeed Test
4. External Run
5. Start Permissive
6. Idle/Rated
7. Halt/Continue Auto Start Sequence
8. Override MPU Fault
9. Select On-Line Dynamics
10. Local/Remote
11. Remote Speed Setpt Enable
12. Sync Enable
13. (Not Used)
14. Freq. Control Arm/Disarm
15. Casc Setpt Raise
16. Casc Setpt Lower
17. Casc Control Enable
18. Remote Casc Setpt Enable
19. Aux Setpt Raise
20. Aux Setpt Lower
21. Aux Control Enable
22. Remote Aux Setpt Enable
23. Valve Limiter Open
24. Valve Limiter Close
25. External Trip 2
26. External Trip 3
27. External Trip 4
28. External Trip 5
30. Controlled Shutdown (Manual)
31. (Not Used)
Table 6-14. Contact Input Configurations
Analog Read addresses 3:0118-0119 give the configuration value of the Aux
units and the Cascade units, in order. The configuration for the units are defined
in the table below.
Value Description
1. psi
2. kPa
3. MW
4. KW
5. degF
6. degC
7. t/h
8. k#/hr
9. #/hr
10. kg/cm2
11. bar
12. atm
13. (none)
Table 6-15. Units Configuration
156 Woodward
Specific Address Information

Entering Setpoint from Modbus
 The setpoint for the Speed, Cascade and Auxiliary can be entered from the
Modbus. When the setpoint is entered for any of these functions the setpoint
will not move to the entered setpoint instantly, but the setpoint will move
towards the entered setpoint at the entered rate defined for the function in
the program mode. This functions the same as entering the setpoint from
the front panel of the control.
 There is feedback provided to let the operator know what value was
entered. This value will not change until a new value is entered from the
Modbus. The addresses, 3:0060-:0062, are for speed, cascade, and
auxiliary respectively. When the a new value is entered from the Modbus,
the setpoint will move to the new value. If the entered setpoint that is the
same as the feedback, the operator can use a go to the setpoint command
instead of entering the setpoint again. This command needs to be used
when the setpoint to be entered is the same as the feedback.
Modbus Scale Factors

Modbus has two limitations:
 only integers can be sent across
 the value is limited between -32767 and 32767
These limitations can be overcome by scaling the value before it is sent across
the Modbus. The default scale factor for the analog values is 1. The scale factor
can be changed in the service mode between 1 and 100. The following input and
setpoint values that are sent across the Modbus have independent scale factors:
Casc (3:0030), Aux (3:0037), FSP (3:0041), KW (3:0045), and Sync/Load Share
(3:0043). These scaled parameters and their scale factor are available through
the Modbus. Values that require a decimal point must be multiplied by the scale
factor (10 or 100) prior to being sent across the Modbus. The value sent must
then be divided by the scale factor in the Master.
The Scale Factor adjusts all associated analog reads and writes accordingly. For
example, the Cascade Scale Factor adjusts the cascade input and setpoint
analog read values as well as the Entered Setpt analog write value.
For example, if the Cascade setpoint of 60.15 needs to be sent across the
Modbus and have two decimal places, the Cascade Scale Factor would be set to
100 in the Service Mode. This will change the value so that the decimal places
can be sent across the Modbus communications link (60.15 * 100 = 6015). After
the value is sent across the Modbus, it must be rescaled in the Master to the
original value (6015/100 = 60.15). A Directly Entered Cascade Setpoint (4:0002)
of 61.5 would be sent across the link as 6150 and the 505 automatically divides
the value by the Casc Scale Factor and uses the value of 61.5 as the setpoint
desired.
Modbus Percentage
Some of the analog read addresses have percentages sent across. The formula
used in the percentage calculation is (actual/max) * 100). The percentage is
multiplied by 100 before being sent across the Modbus to provide up to 2 decimal
places, if desired
Woodward 157
Modbus Emergency Shutdown

Two different types of shutdown commands (emergency and controlled) can be
issued through Modbus. The Emergency Shutdown command instantly takes the
speed setpoint and actuator current to zero. Optionally the 505 can be configured
to ignore this Emergency Shutdown command if it is desired to not allow the unit
to be tripped through Modbus.
To avoid an inadvertent trip, the emergency shutdown command from Modbus

can be configured to require a two step process before a shutdown command is
issued. When the shutdown is a two step process Boolean write address 0001
starts the shutdown process. An “ESD ACKN ENABLE” feedback (1:0065) is
given and an acknowledge on address 0002 has to be given within five seconds
for the control to issue a shutdown command.
See Volume 2 for Service mode tunables.
For More Modbus Information

Detailed information on the Modbus protocol is presented in “Reference Guide
PI-MBUS-300” published by AEC Corp./Modicon Inc., formerly Gould Inc. To
implement your own source code, you must register with Modicon. Registration
includes purchasing document PI-MBUS-303 and signing a non-disclosure
agreement. You can register to use Modbus at your nearest Modicon field office.
To find the office nearest you, contact Modicon Technical Support at 1-800-468-
5342.
158 Woodward
Chapter 7.
Service Options
Product Service Options

If you are experiencing problems with the installation, or unsatisfactory
performance of a Woodward product, the following options are available:
 Consult the troubleshooting guide in the manual.
 Contact the manufacturer or packager of your system.
 Contact the Woodward Full Service Distributor serving your area.
 Contact Woodward technical assistance (see “How to Contact Woodward”
later in this chapter) and discuss your problem. In many cases, your problem
can be resolved over the phone. If not, you can select which course of action
to pursue based on the available services listed in this chapter.
OEM and Packager Support: Many Woodward controls and control devices are
installed into the equipment system and programmed by an Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) or Equipment Packager at their factory. In some cases, the
programming is password-protected by the OEM or packager, and they are the best
source for product service and support. Warranty service for Woodward products
shipped with an equipment system should also be handled through the OEM or
Packager. Please review your equipment system documentation for details.
Woodward Business Partner Support: Woodward works with and supports a

global network of independent business partners whose mission is to serve the
users of Woodward controls, as described here:
 A Full Service Distributor has the primary responsibility for sales, service,
system integration solutions, technical desk support, and aftermarket
marketing of standard Woodward products within a specific geographic area
and market segment.
 An Authorized Independent Service Facility (AISF) provides authorized
service that includes repairs, repair parts, and warranty service on Woodward's
behalf. Service (not new unit sales) is an AISF's primary mission.
 A Recognized Engine Retrofitter (RER) is an independent company that
does retrofits and upgrades on reciprocating gas engines and dual-fuel
conversions, and can provide the full line of Woodward systems and
components for the retrofits and overhauls, emission compliance upgrades,
long term service contracts, emergency repairs, etc.
 A Recognized Turbine Retrofitter (RTR) is an independent company that
does both steam and gas turbine control retrofits and upgrades globally, and
can provide the full line of Woodward systems and components for the
retrofits and overhauls, long term service contracts, emergency repairs, etc.
A current list of Woodward Business Partners is available at

www.woodward.com/support.
Woodward 159
Woodward Factory Servicing Options

The following factory options for servicing Woodward products are available
through your local Full-Service Distributor or the OEM or Packager of the
equipment system, based on the standard Woodward Product and Service
Warranty (5-01-1205) that is in effect at the time the product is originally shipped
from Woodward or a service is performed:
 Replacement/Exchange (24-hour service)
 Flat Rate Repair
 Flat Rate Remanufacture
Replacement/Exchange: Replacement/Exchange is a premium program

designed for the user who is in need of immediate service. It allows you to
request and receive a like-new replacement unit in minimum time (usually within
24 hours of the request), providing a suitable unit is available at the time of the
request, thereby minimizing costly downtime. This is a flat-rate program and
includes the full standard Woodward product warranty (Woodward Product and
Service Warranty 5-01-1205).
This option allows you to call your Full-Service Distributor in the event of an
unexpected outage, or in advance of a scheduled outage, to request a
replacement control unit. If the unit is available at the time of the call, it can
usually be shipped out within 24 hours. You replace your field control unit with
the like-new replacement and return the field unit to the Full-Service Distributor.
Charges for the Replacement/Exchange service are based on a flat rate plus
shipping expenses. You are invoiced the flat rate replacement/exchange charge
plus a core charge at the time the replacement unit is shipped. If the core (field
unit) is returned within 60 days, a credit for the core charge will be issued.
Flat Rate Repair: Flat Rate Repair is available for the majority of standard
products in the field. This program offers you repair service for your products with
the advantage of knowing in advance what the cost will be. All repair work carries
the standard Woodward service warranty (Woodward Product and Service
Warranty 5-01-1205) on replaced parts and labor.
Flat Rate Remanufacture: Flat Rate Remanufacture is very similar to the Flat
Rate Repair option with the exception that the unit will be returned to you in “like-
new” condition and carry with it the full standard Woodward product warranty
(Woodward Product and Service Warranty 5-01-1205). This option is applicable
to mechanical products only.
160 Woodward
Returning Equipment for Repair

If a control (or any part of an electronic control) is to be returned for repair,
please contact your Full-Service Distributor in advance to obtain Return
Authorization and shipping instructions.
When shipping the item(s), attach a tag with the following information:
 return number;
 name and location where the control is installed;
 name and phone number of contact person;
 complete Woodward part number(s) and serial number(s);
 description of the problem;
 instructions describing the desired type of repair.
Packing a Control
Use the following materials when returning a complete control:
 protective caps on any connectors;
 antistatic protective bags on all electronic modules;
 packing materials that will not damage the surface of the unit;
 at least 100 mm (4 inches) of tightly packed, industry-approved packing
material;
 a packing carton with double walls;
 a strong tape around the outside of the carton for increased strength.

Replacement Parts
When ordering replacement parts for controls, include the following information:
 the part number(s) (XXXX-XXXX) that is on the enclosure nameplate;
 the unit serial number, which is also on the nameplate.
Woodward 161
Engineering Services
Woodward offers various Engineering Services for our products. For these services,
you can contact us by telephone, by email, or through the Woodward website.
 Technical Support
 Product Training
 Field Service
Technical Support is available from your equipment system supplier, your local Full-
Service Distributor, or from many of Woodward’s worldwide locations, depending
upon the product and application. This service can assist you with technical
questions or problem solving during the normal business hours of the Woodward
location you contact. Emergency assistance is also available during non-business
hours by phoning Woodward and stating the urgency of your problem.
Product Training is available as standard classes at many of our worldwide

locations. We also offer customized classes, which can be tailored to your needs
and can be held at one of our locations or at your site. This training, conducted
by experienced personnel, will assure that you will be able to maintain system
reliability and availability.
Field Service engineering on-site support is available, depending on the product

and location, from many of our worldwide locations or from one of our Full-
Service Distributors. The field engineers are experienced both on Woodward
products as well as on much of the non-Woodward equipment with which our
products interface.
For information on these services, please contact us via telephone, email us, or
use our website and reference www.woodward.com/support, and then
Customer Support.
How to Contact Woodward

For assistance, call one of the following Woodward facilities to obtain the address
and phone number of the facility nearest your location where you will be able to
get information and service.
Electrical Power Systems Engine Systems Turbine Systems

Facility --------------- Phone Number Facility --------------- Phone Number Facility --------------- Phone Number
Australia ----------- +61 (2) 9758 2322 Australia ----------- +61 (2) 9758 2322 Australia ----------- +61 (2) 9758 2322
Brazil ------------- +55 (19) 3708 4800 Brazil ------------- +55 (19) 3708 4800 Brazil ------------- +55 (19) 3708 4800
China ------------+86 (512) 6762 6727 China ------------+86 (512) 6762 6727 China ------------+86 (512) 6762 6727
Germany: Germany:
Kempen --- +49 (0) 21 52 14 51
Stuttgart ----- +49 (711) 78954-0 Stuttgart ----- +49 (711) 78954-0
India --------------- +91 (129) 4097100 India --------------- +91 (129) 4097100 India --------------- +91 (129) 4097100
Japan -------------- +81 (43) 213-2191 Japan -------------- +81 (43) 213-2191 Japan -------------- +81 (43) 213-2191
Korea--------------- +82 (51) 636-7080 Korea--------------- +82 (51) 636-7080 Korea--------------- +82 (51) 636-7080
The Netherlands - +31 (23) 5661111 The Netherlands - +31 (23) 5661111
Poland -------------- +48 12 618 92 00
United States----- +1 (970) 482-5811 United States----- +1 (970) 482-5811 United States----- +1 (970) 482-5811
You can also contact the Woodward Customer Service Department or consult our
worldwide directory on Woodward’s website (www.woodward.com/support)
for the name of your nearest Woodward distributor or service facility.
For the most current product support and contact information, please refer to the
latest version of publication 51337 at www.woodward.com/publications.
162 Woodward
Technical Assistance
If you need to telephone for technical assistance, you will need to provide the following information.
Please write it down here before phoning:
General
Your Name
Site Location
Phone Number
Fax Number
Prime Mover Information

Engine/Turbine Model Number
Manufacturer
Number of Cylinders (if applicable)
Type of Fuel (gas, gaseous, steam, etc)
Rating
Application
Control/Governor Information
Please list all Woodward governors, actuators, and electronic controls in your system:
Woodward Part Number and Revision Letter
Control Description or Governor Type
Serial Number
Serial Number
Serial Number
If you have an electronic or programmable control, please have the adjustment setting positions or
the menu settings written down and with you at the time of the call.
Woodward 163
Appendix.
505 Program Mode Worksheets
Governor Serial Number ______________________
Application ________________________________ Date ___________
For details on individual settings, refer to Chapter 4.
TURBINE START SPEED SETPOINT VALUES

Manual Start YES _____ NO _____ Overspeed Test Lmt (rpm) rpm
Automatic Start YES _____ NO _____ Overspeed Trip (rpm) rpm
Semiautomatic Start YES _____ NO _____ Max Governor Speed (rpm) rpm
Rate to Min (rpm/Sec) rpm/sec Min Governor Speed (rpm) rpm
Valve Lmtr Rate (%/Sec) %/sec Setpt Slow Rate(rpm/sec) rpm/sec
Use Idle/Rated? YES _____ NO _____ Use Remote Speed Setpt ? YES ____NO _____
Idle Setpt (rpm) rpm Rmt Spd Setpt Max Rate rpm/sec
Rated Setpt (rpm) rpm Use Critical Speeds? YES _____ NO _____
Idle/Rtd Rate (rpm/sec) rpm/sec Critical Speed Rate rpm/sec
Use Auto Start Sequence YES _____ NO _____ Critical Speed 1 Max rpm
Cold Start = ( > xx Hrs) HRS Critical Speed 1 Min rpm
Hot Start = ( < xx Hrs) HRS Use Critical Band 2 ? YES _____NO _____
Low Idle Setpt (rpm) rpm Critical Speed 2 Max rpm
Low Idle Delay (Cold) MIN Critical Speed 2 Min rpm
Low Idle Delay (Hot) MIN
Rate to Hi Idle (Cold) rpm/sec OPERATING PARAMETERS
Rate to Hi Idle (Hot) rpm/sec Generator Application? YES _____NO _____
High Idle Setpt (rpm) rpm Use Gen Brkr Open Trip ? YES _____NO _____
High Idle Delay (Cold) MIN Use Tie Brkr Open Trip ? YES _____NO _____
High Idle Delay (Hot) MIN Use KW Droop? YES _____NO _____
Rate to Rated (Cold) rpm/sec KW Max Load __________KW
Rate to Rated (Hot) rpm/sec Droop (%) %
Rated Setpt (rpm) rpm Rated Spd Setpt rpm
Auto Halt at Idle Setpts YES ____NO ____ Use Freq Arm/Disarm ? YES _____ NO _____
Ext Trips in Trip Relay YES ____NO ____ Use Local/Remote YES _____ NO _____
Reset Clears Trip Output YES ____NO ____
DRIVER CONFIGURATION
SPEED CONTROL Act #1 is 4–20 mA? YES _____NO _____
Teeth Seen by MPU Invert Driver Outputs ? YES _____NO _____
Gear Ratio 1 : Use Act 1 Flt Shutdown YES _____NO _____
Failed Speed Level(rpm) rpm Act #1 Dither %
Use Speed Input #2? YES ____NO _____ Use Actuator #2? YES _____NO _____
Failed Speed Level(rpm) rpm Act #2 is 4–20 mA? YES _____NO _____
Off-Line Prop Gain % Act #2 Offset (%) %
Off-Line Int Gain rps Use Act 2 Flt Shutdown YES _____NO _____
Off-Line Deriv Ratio % Act #2 Dither (%) %
On-Line Prop Gain % Use Act #2 as Readout? YES _____NO _____
On-Line Int Gain rps Act #2 Readout is: %
On-Line Deriv Ratio % Readout 4 mA Value Units
Readout 20 mA Value Units
164 Woodward
ANALOG INPUTS CASCADE CONTROL
Analog Input # 1 Function Use Cascade Control? YES _____NO _____
Input 1 4 mA Value Units Invert Cascade ? YES _____NO _____
Input 1 20 mA Value Units Min Cascade Setpt Units
Analog Input # 2 Function Max Cascade Setpt Units
Input 2 4 mA Value Units Casc Setpt Rate (/sec) Units/sec
Input 2 20 mA Value Units Use Setpoint Tracking ? YES _____NO _____
Analog Input # 3 Function Setpt Initial Value Units
Input 3 4 mA Value Units Speed Setpt Lower Limit rpm
Input 3 20 mA Value Units Speed Setpt Upper Limit rpm
Analog Input # 4 Function Max Speed Rate(rpm/sec) rpm/Sec
Input 4 4 mA Value Units Cascade Droop %
Input 4 20 mA Value Units Casc PID Prop Gain %
Analog Input # 5 Function Casc PID Integral Gain rps
Input 5 4 mA Value Units Casc Derivative Ratio %
Input 5 20 mA Value Units Use Remote Casc Setting YES _____NO _____
Analog Input # 6 Function Remote Casc Max Rate Units/sec
Input 6 4 mA Value Units Casc Units of Measure
Input 6 20 mA Value Units
READOUTS
CONTACT INPUTS Analog Readout 1 Is
Contact Input 1 Function Readout 1 4 mA Value Units
Contact Input 3 Function Analog Readout 2 Is
Contact Input 10 Fctn Readout 4 4 mA Value Units
Contact Input 11 Fctn Readout 4 20 mA Value Units
Contact Input 12 Fctn Analog Readout 5 Is
Readout 5 4 mA Value Units
FUNCTION KEYS Readout 5 20 mA Value Units
F3 Key Performs Analog Readout 6 Is
Blink when not Active? YES _____NO _____ Readout 6 4 mA Value Units
F4 Key Performs Readout 6 20 mA Value Units
Blink when not Active? YES _____NO _____
AUXILIARY CONTROL
Use Auxiliary Control ? YES _____ NO _____
Lost Aux Input Shutdown? YES_ ____ NO _____
Use KW Input ? YES _____ NO _____
Invert Aux ? YES _____ NO _____
Min Aux Setpt Units
Max Aux Setpt Units
Aux Setpt Rate units/sec Units/sec
Use Aux Enable? YES _____ NO _____
Setpt Initial Value Units
Aux Droop %
Aux PID Prop Gain %
Aux PID Integral Gain rps
Aux Derivative Ratio %
Tiebrkr Open Aux Disable YES ____NO _____
Genbrkr Open Aux Disable YES ____NO _____
Use Remote Aux Setting YES _____ NO ____
Remote Aux Max Rate Units/sec
Aux Units of Measure
Woodward 165
RELAYS COMMUNICATIONS
Use Relay #1? YES ____NO _____ Use Communications ? YES _____ NO _____
Relay # 1 is Level Switch? YES ____NO _____ Use Modbus Port 1? YES _____ NO _____
Relay 1 Is Level Sw For Mode Ascii=1 Rtu=2
Relay 1 ON Level Units Modbus Device #
Relay 1 OFF Level Units Port #1 Driver
Relay 1 Energizes On Port #1 Baud Rate
Use Relay # 2? YES _____NO _____ Port #1 Stop Bits
Relay # 2 is Level Switch? YES ____NO _____ Port #1 Parity
Relay 2 Is Level Sw For Use Modbus Port 2? YES _____NO _____
Relay 2 On Level Units Mode Ascii=1 Rtu=2
Relay 2 Off Level Units Modbus Device #
Relay 2 Energizes On Port #2 Driver
Use Relay # 3? YES _____NO _____ Port #2 Baud Rate
Relay # 3 is Level Switch? YES ____NO _____ Port #2 Stop Bits
Rly 3 Is Level Sw For Port #2Parity
Relay 3 On Level Units
Relay 3 Off Level Units
Relay 3 Energizes On
Use Relay # 4? YES _____NO _____
Relay # 4 is Level Switch? YES ____NO _____
Rly 4 Is Level Sw For
Relay # 5 is Level Switch? YES ____NO _____
Relay # 6 is Level Switch? YES ____NO______
166 Woodward
Declarations
We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.
Send comments to: icinfo@woodward.com
Please reference publication 85017V1C.
PO Box 1519, Fort Collins CO 80522-1519, USA

1000 East Drake Road, Fort Collins CO 80525, USA
Phone +1 (970) 482-5811  Fax +1 (970) 498-3058
Email and Website—www.woodward.com
Woodward has company-owned plants, subsidiaries, and branches,

as well as authorized distributors and other authorized service and sales facilities throughout the world.
Complete address / phone / fax / email information for all locations is available on our website.
2009/11/Fort Collins
Installation and Operation Manual
505 Digital Governor for Steam Turbines

with Single or Split-Range Actuators
9907-162, 9907-163, 9907-164

Volume 2
Manual 85017V2 (Revision D)

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.
 DANGER—Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
DEFINITIONS  WARNING—Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
 CAUTION—Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
 NOTICE—Indicates a hazard that could result in property damage only (including
damage to the control).
 IMPORTANT—Designates an operating tip or maintenance suggestion.
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be equipped with an
overspeed shutdown device to protect against runaway or damage to the prime
mover with possible personal injury, loss of life, or property damage.
The overspeed shutdown device must be totally independent of the prime mover
control system. An overtemperature or overpressure shutdown device may also
be needed for safety, as appropriate.
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be performed before
installing, operating, or servicing this equipment. Practice all plant and safety instructions and
precautions. Failure to follow instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.
This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was produced. To verify that
you have the latest revision, be sure to check the Woodward website:
www.woodward.com/pubs/current.pdf
The revision level is shown at the bottom of the front cover after the publication number. The latest
version of most publications is available at:
www.woodward.com/publications
If your publication is not there, please contact your customer service representative to get the
latest copy.
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified mechanical,
electrical, or other operating limits may cause personal injury and/or property damage, including
damage to the equipment. Any such unauthorized modifications: (i) constitute "misuse" and/or
"negligence" within the meaning of the product warranty thereby excluding warranty coverage
for any resulting damage, and (ii) invalidate product certifications or listings.
To prevent damage to a control system that uses an alternator or battery-charging

device, make sure the charging device is turned off before disconnecting the battery
from the system.
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper handling, read

and observe the precautions in Woodward manual 82715, Guide for Handling and
Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed Circuit Boards, and Modules.
Revisions—Text changes are indicated by a black line alongside the text.
Woodward Governor Company reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information
provided by Woodward Governor Company is believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed
by Woodward Governor Company unless otherwise expressly undertaken.
© Woodward 1997
All Rights Reserved
Contents
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE ........................................................................III

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS ................................................. IV
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 1
CHAPTER 1. PERIPHERAL DEVICES .............................................................. 2
Overview .................................................................................................................2
505 HMI Software ...................................................................................................2
CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION NOTES ............................................................. 12
Overview ...............................................................................................................12
Example Applications ...........................................................................................13
CHAPTER 3. OPERATOR INTERFACE .......................................................... 39
Introduction ...........................................................................................................39
Keypad and Display..............................................................................................39
Service Panel Modes............................................................................................40
Using the Service Mode .......................................................................................40
CHAPTER 4. SERVICE MODE PROCEDURES ................................................ 60
Overview ...............................................................................................................60
The 505 Service Mode .........................................................................................61
Service Mode Blocks ............................................................................................70
Service Mode Worksheet Parameters..................................................................72
CHAPTER 5. UNDERSTANDING PID SETTINGS ............................................ 92
Overview ...............................................................................................................92
Proportional Response .........................................................................................93
Proportional + Integral (closed loop) ....................................................................95
Derivative Response ............................................................................................96
Proportional + Derivative (closed loop) ................................................................97
Proportional + Integral + Derivative (closed loop) ................................................99
Controller Field Tuning General .........................................................................100
CHAPTER 6. HARDWARE/OPERATING SYSTEM FAULTS ............................ 103
General ...............................................................................................................103
General ...............................................................................................................103
APPENDIX A. 505 DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 107
Hardware Specifications .....................................................................................107
Software Specifications ......................................................................................110
APPENDIX B. 505 SERVICE MODE WORKSHEET ....................................... 111
APPENDIX C. PASSWORD INFORMATION .................................................. 114
General ...............................................................................................................114
Service Mode Password .....................................................................................114
Debug Mode Password ......................................................................................114
Configure Mode Password .................................................................................115
OS_FAULTS Mode Password ............................................................................115
Download Configuration Function Password .....................................................115
DECLARATIONS ....................................................................................... 117
Woodward i
Figure 1-1. 505 HMI Software ................................................................................3

Figure 1-2. Digital Remote Final Driver ..................................................................4
Figure 1-3. Real Power Sensor ..............................................................................5
Figure 1-4a. Digital Synchronizer and Load Control ..............................................7
Figure 1-4b. Digital Synchronizer and Load Control Functional Diagram ..............8
Figure 1-5. DSLC Interface Wiring .........................................................................9
Figure 1-6a. Master Synchronizer and Load Control ...........................................10
Figure 1-6b. Master Synchronizer and Load Control Functional Diagram ...........11
Figure 2-1. Pump or Compressor Discharge Pressure Control with Turbine Inlet
Pressure Limiting .............................................................................15
Figure 2-2. Inlet Pressure Control with Automatic Synchronizing & Generator
Power Limiting .................................................................................18
Figure 2-3. Exhaust Pressure Control with Generator Power Limiting and Plant
Import/Export Limiting ......................................................................22
Figure 2-4. Plant Import/Export Control with DRFD Servo Interface....................27
Figure 2-5. Inlet Pressure Control with Isochronous Loadsharing Control in Island
Mode ................................................................................................31
Figure 2-6. Import/Export Control or Exhaust Pressure Control with Isoch Load
Sharing in Island Mode ....................................................................34
Figure 3-1. 505 Keypad and Display ....................................................................39
Figure 3-2. Software Structure Overview .............................................................41
Figure 3-3. The Select Mode Level ......................................................................42
Figure 3-4. Header Level ......................................................................................42
Figure 3-5. Block Level .........................................................................................43
Figure 3-6. Debug Information Arrangement........................................................49
Figure 3-7. OS_FAULTS Mode Information Arrangement ...................................50
Figure 3-8. SYS_INFO Mode Information Arrangement ......................................55
Figure 4-1. Service Mode Entry ............................................................................60
Figure 4-2a. Service Mode Blocks........................................................................61
Figure 4-2b. Service Mode Blocks........................................................................62
Figure 4-2c. Service Mode Blocks ........................................................................63
Figure 4-2d. Service Mode Blocks........................................................................64
Figure 4-2e. Service Mode Blocks........................................................................65
Figure 4-2f. Service Mode Blocks.........................................................................66
Figure 4-2g. Service Mode Blocks........................................................................67
Figure 4-2h. Service Mode Blocks........................................................................68
Figure 4-2i. Service Mode Blocks .........................................................................69
Figure 5-1. Proportional Gain Setting Effects .......................................................93
Figure 5-2. Open Loop Proportional and Integral Response ...............................94
Figure 5-3. Closed Loop Proportional and Integral Response .............................95
Figure 5-4. Integral Gain (Reset) Setting Responses ..........................................96
Figure 5-5. Closed Loop Proportional and Derivative Action ...............................98
Figure 5-6. Derivative Setting Effects ...................................................................98
Figure 5-7. Closed Loop Proportional, Integral and Derivative Action .................99
Figure 5-8. Typical Response to Load Change ..................................................101
Table 2-1. Example Summary ..............................................................................14
ii Woodward
Regulatory Compliance
European Compliance for CE Marking:
These listings are limited only to those units bearing the CE Marking.
EMC Directive: Declared to 89/336/EEC COUNCIL DIRECTIVE

of 03 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws
of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility.
ATEX – Potentially Declared to 94/9/EEC COUNCIL DIRECTIVE of

Explosive 23 March 1994 on the approximation of the laws
Atmospheres of the Member States concerning equipment
Directive: and protective systems intended for use in
potentially explosive atmospheres.
EEx nA II T3 X
C-Tick Declared to Australian Radiocommunications

(ACA/RSM): Act of 1992 and the New Zealand
Radiocommunications Act of 1989.
North American Compliance:

These listings are limited only to those units bearing the UL agency identification.
UL: UL Listed for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C,

& D, 3C
UL File E156028
Woodward iii
Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

All electronic equipment is static-sensitive, some components more than others.
To protect these components from static damage, you must take special
precautions to minimize or eliminate electrostatic discharges.
Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.
1. Before doing maintenance on the electronic control, discharge the static

electricity on your body to ground by touching and holding a grounded metal
object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.).
2. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing
made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend materials as much
as possible because these do not store static electric charges as much as
synthetics.
3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or Styrofoam

cups, cup holders, cigarette packages, cellophane wrappers, vinyl books or
folders, plastic bottles, and plastic ash trays) away from the control, the
modules, and the work area as much as possible.
4. Do not remove the printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cabinet
unless absolutely necessary. If you must remove the PCB from the control
cabinet, follow these precautions:
 Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
 Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the

components with conductive devices or with your hands.
 When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic antistatic
protective bag it comes in until you are ready to install it. Immediately
after removing the old PCB from the control cabinet, place it in the
antistatic protective bag.

iv Woodward
Introduction
Manual 85017 Volume 2 is a dual purpose manual. It includes application-

specific notes and 505 specific Service mode information.
The first part of this volume gives users an idea of the 505 Digital Control’s
capabilities, and how to apply them to a system. Typical applications are
schematically shown and their functionality explained. Programming and
Start/Run mode notes are given for each application to assist application
programmers in configuring the 505 for their application.
The second part of this volume includes 505 program modes not covered in
Volume 1 of this manual (Service, Debug, SYS_INFO, OPSYS Faults), PID
dynamic setting specifics, and Hardware rating information.
General Installation and Operating Notes and Warnings

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2 , Groups A, B, C, and D
(Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC) or non-hazardous locations.
This equipment is suitable for use in European Zone 2, Group II environments

per compliance with EN60079-15, Electrical apparatus for explosive
atmospheres – Type of protection ‘n’
identification.




Division 2.


Woodward 1
Chapter 1.
Peripheral Devices
Overview
This chapter provides a brief explanation of peripheral devices, that can be used
with the 505. By understanding the functionality of a peripheral device, a better
understanding of the overall control configuration can be achieved.
All the devices covered in this section are manufactured or supported by the
Woodward Governor Company. Peripheral devices manufactured by other
companies can be used with the 505 to perform the functions detailed bellow,
however, the compatibility of them to the 505 and the application should be
verified before system operation.
505 HMI Software

Woodward offers two different HMI software packages, OpView™ and 505View,
which allow an operator to remotely view operating inputs, adjust control
setpoints, issue Run mode commands, and monitor/troubleshoot the turbine
control. Both HMI packages are self-configuring which eliminates all field
engineering–they automatically configure their screens to match the control's
programmed application.
The OpView is comprised of an industrialized NEMA 4 touchscreen hardware

package bundles together with a Woodward developed software interface
program. The 505View is a unbundled Intellution-based software package that
runs on a pc (hardware can be optionally purchased). Both HMI packages are
pre–configured to communicate via Modbus® * protocol with either a 505 or 505E
Woodward steam turbine control and offer the following features:
*—Modbus is a trademark of Schneider Automation Inc.
 Automatic Screen Generation based on control configuration
 Security with multiple User Levels
 Remote Access Capability1
 Real-Time and Historical Trending2
 Alarm/Trip Status Indication
 Alarm/Trip Log with Time Tagging and First-Out Indication
 I/O and System Troubleshooting
 Graphic System Control screens
 Event Status Logging and History3
Notes:
1 505View only
2 OpView has Real-Time Trending only; 505View has both
3 OpView has Logging only; 505View has Logging and History
By connecting the OpView or 505View to either 505 Modbus port, it automatically

configures its screens to match the 505’s programmed application. If the 505 is
not configured to accept Modbus commands, the HMI functions as a system
monitor only. If the 505 is configured to accept Modbus commands, all 505 Run
Mode operations can be monitored and performed through it (start, stop, mode
enable/disable, setpoint raise/lower). For safety purposes, the Overspeed test
function can not be performed through the HMI. See Volume 1, Chapter 7 of this
manual for more information on programming Modbus ports.
2 Woodward
Figure 1-1. 505 HMI Software
User-friendly touch screens allow operators to view and control multiple modes of
operation and setpoints from one screen. Ten different screens are available to
allow operators the flexibility of viewing. These screens display the following
information:
 Controlling parameter information
 Complete starting sequences
 Turbine and/or Generator information
 Speed, Extr/Adm, Aux, Casc, & Limiter information
 Analog Input and Output levels
 Contact Input and Relay Output states
 Alarm and Shutdown Log
The OpView or 505View can interface with the 505 through serial RS-232, RS-
422, or RS-485 communications. By using RS-422 or RS-485 communications,
the HMI can be located up to 1220 m (4000 ft) from the 505 digital control.
Digital Remote Final Driver

A Digital Remote Final Driver (DRFD) is used to interface the 505 digital control
to existing valve operators or Woodward actuators that are integrating in action
or are not compatible with the 505.
Woodward 3
The 505’s actuator outputs have the capability of driving a 4–20 mA or 20–160
mA (200 mA max) proportional signal into an actuator coil. These 505 actuator
output signals represent a demand signal equal to desired valve position
(proportional). If the application’s actuator or servo assembly requires a different
drive signal, or control action (integrating with a null setting), a Digital Remote
Final Driver or equivalent device must be used.
Figure 1-2. Digital Remote Final Driver
Woodward Digital Remote Final Drivers accept a 4–20 mA actuator-drive signal

proportional to desired valve position, and position a servo assembly accordingly.
Integrating or proportional type DRFDs are available depending on the servo
assembly being interfaced to. Woodward DRFDs have the capability of driving
unipolar or bipolar actuator demand signals, up to 0–400 mA or +400 mA
respectively.
The Digital Remote Final Driver is housed in a NEMA-4X enclosure with a hinged
cover and consists of driver and power supply modules. The driver module uses
plug-in jumpers and an alphanumeric display to facilitate field configuration and
calibration.
Proportional type DRFDs can provide an output drive signal of up to 400 mA, to
be compatible with existing servo assemblies. This drive signal is proportional to
the 4–20 mA input signal received from the 505 digital control.
Integrating type DRFDs sense actual valve position (through, LVDTs, RVDTs,
MLDTs, or dc position feedback devices), compare this signal to the input
position demand signal from the 505, and output a drive signal to position a servo
assembly accordingly. See Figure 1-2.
Real Power Sensor

A Real Power Sensor is used to sense the real power being produced by a
generator, or flowing through a tie line. Woodward Real Power Sensors sense
three phase volts, three phase amps, compare each phase’s voltage to current
relationship, and develop a 4–20 mA output proportional to real power.
4 Woodward
Figure 1-3. Real Power Sensor
Woodward manufactures two types of Real Power Sensors. The first type of RPS
is designed to sense power flow in one direction only (0 to +5 A CT current only),
and output a proportional 4–20 mA signal. This type of RPS was designed for
and should be used to sense generator power output. Many different real power
sensors of this type exist. Some of the optional RPS features include VAR
sensing, Loadsharing, 0–1 A CT current sensing, and multiple combinations of
these. Please consult a Woodward certified distributor or a Woodward factory for
the recommended RPS for your application.
The second type of RPS manufactured by Woodward is designed to sense

power flow through a bus-to-bus tie line. This RPS (8272-726) senses –5 A to +5
A CT current to allow its output to represent power flow in both directions. This
RPS provides a 4–20 mA power indication output signal where 12 mA represents
0 power flow. It is recommended that this RPS be used to sense power flow
through a tie line only. This RPS or equivalent is required to sense plant Import
and Export power.
Woodward Real Power Sensors have terminals labeled “Output” and terminals
labeled “KW Readout”. The “KW Readout” terminals provide a 4–20 mA signal
proportional to real power which is used by and compatible with the 505 control.
Thus the RPS terminals labeled “Output” are designed and typically compatible
only to Woodward’s 2301 type of control.
Woodward manufactured Real Power Sensors have a 2.5 Hz Low pass filter (400
ms lag time) on their output to filter out the high frequency noise typically created
in a switch gear type environment. Thus if another vendor’s watt transducer is
used, verification that it has similar filtering criteria should be performed before it
is applied with the 505. For more information on Woodward Real Power Sensors,
please refer to Woodward manual 82018.
Woodward 5
Digital Synchronizer and Load Control (DSLC™)

The Woodward DSLC™ control is a microprocessor based generator load control
designed for use on three-phase ac generators with Woodward speed controls
and automatic voltage regulators. The DSLC is a synchronizer, a load control, a
dead bus closing system, a VAR/PF control, and a process control, integrated
into one package.
The 505 can be programmed to use the DSLC as a synchronizer only, or as a

synchronizer and load control. The DSLC provides either phase match or slip
frequency synchronizing, and ties into the unit automatic voltage regulator to
match voltages before paralleling. It interfaces with the 505 via a Speed bias
signal to control generator frequency and phase. When configured to use the
DSLC as a synchronizer only, the 505 must be programmed to receive the DSLC
Speed Bias signal through an analog input and have this input enabled through a
contact input or function key.
The DSLC communicates over a LAN using a digital Echelon network with other
system DSLCs to enable it to perform safe deadbus closings. Because the DSLC
performs all synchronizing functions simultaneously, synchronization typically
takes only a few seconds.
When used as a synchronizer and load control, the DSLC performs automatic
synchronization, and controls unit load based on the DSLCs mode of operation.
The DSLC can be in a base-load, loadsharing, remote load setting, or Process
control mode, depending on configuration and system conditions.
The DSLC’s baseload mode of operation allows an operator to set the unit to a
specified load. A proportional or integrating control action can be used with this
mode of operation. The integrating mode of operation can be used with systems
tying to an unstable grid to allow the unit to control at a constant load and not
vary based on grid frequency.
The DSLC’s loadsharing mode is used to share load with any other units using a
DSLC and tied to the same isolated bus. This mode is used in conjunction with a
Master Synchronizer & Load Control when paralleled to a utility to allow the
MSLC to control plant frequency or load depending on its state of operation.
The DSLC’s remote load setting mode allows load to be set by a remote 4–20
mA signal. The DSLC’s Process control mode allows any process directly related
to generator load to be controlled.
When using the DSLC as both a synchronizer and load control, the 505 control
must be programmed to receive the DSLC Speed Bias signal through an analog
input and have this input enabled through a contact input or function key.
After synchronization, unit load can be controlled by the DSLC (through the 505
Sync/Ld input) or by the 505’s internal speed/load setpoint. When the Sync/Ld
Share input is programmed, the position of the Utility Tie Breaker Contact selects
unit load control through the DSLC or through the 505’s internal load setpoint.
The DSLC interfaces to the 505 via a Speed Bias signal. From the many different
types of DSLCs manufactured by Woodward only a few have a Speed Bias
output (1–5 Vdc) compatible with the 505 control. The 505’s isolated analog #6
input is the only analog input that is directly compatible with the DSLC. Thus the
DSLC’s speed bias output should only be connected to the # 6 analog input. The
DSLC’s speed bias output is designed to drive into the 505’s low impedance
input.
6 Woodward
Once the generator is synchronized the DSLC soft-loads the unit to the load
setting determined by the mode of operation (base load, loadsharing, Process
control). When commanded the DSLC can also soft-unload the unit and issue a
breaker-open command at a set power level.
Figure 1-4a. Digital Synchronizer and Load Control
Woodward 7
Figure 1-4b. Digital Synchronizer and Load Control Functional Diagram
Installation Notes
A Hand-held Programmer (9905-292) is required and used by the DSLC to
configure and calibrate it to the site specific application.
The DSLC requires a power source of +24 Vdc @ 1 A. The 505 power supplies
can not supply this much power, thus an external power supply may be required.
The DSLC can interface with the unit Automatic Voltage Regulator through
contacts or a +9 volt bias signal.
For more information on Woodward’s Digital Synchronizer & Load Control,

please refer to Woodward manual 02007.
8 Woodward
Figure 1-5. DSLC Interface Wiring
Master Synchronizer and Load Control (MSLC)

The Woodward MSLC is a microprocessor based plant load control designed for
use in three-phase electric power generation sites equipped with Woodward
DSLCs which operate in parallel with the utility. The MSLC is a tie-line
synchronizer, a plant import/export load control, reactive load control (power
factor), and a master process control integrated into one package.
Used as a synchronizer, the MSLC provides phase (or slip frequency) and
voltage match synchronizing of the local plant bus to a main power grid. It
communicates over a LAN using a digital Echelon network with system DSLCs to
control plant frequency, phase, and voltage to perform automatic plant
synchronization.
After the utility tie breaker is closed manually or by the MSLC, the MSLC then
controls plant load to a baseload setting, remote load setting, import/export
demand setting, or process control demand setting. If programmed, reactive tie
line power can also be controlled by the MSLC through each DSLC interfacing to
each unit’s automatic voltage regulator.
Woodward 9
The MSLC’s baseload mode of operation allows an operator to set the plant to a
specified load. A proportional or integrating control action can be used with this
mode of operation. The integrating mode of operation can be used with systems
tying to an unstable grid to allow the plant to control at a constant load and not
vary based on grid frequency.
Figure 1-6a. Master Synchronizer and Load Control
10 Woodward
Figure 1-6b. Master Synchronizer and Load Control Functional Diagram
The MSLC’s remote load setting mode allows plant load to be set by a remote
4–20 mA signal.
The MSLC’s import/export control mode, when enabled senses plant-to-utility tie
line power flow and controls this flow based on a import/export setpoint.
The MSLC’s process control mode allows any process directly related to plant
load to be controlled.
Once the plant-to-utility tie breaker is closed the MSLC soft-loads the plant to a
load setting determined by the mode of operation (base load, import/export,
Process control). When commanded the MSLC can also soft-unload the plant
and issue a plant-to-utility tie breaker open command at a set power level.
When using the MSLC as both a synchronizer and load control, the system
DSLCs must be in their Loadsharing mode to enable the MSLC to control them.
The MSLC is only active when synchronizing a plant bus to a utility bus, or when
the utility tie breaker is closed to control tie line power (real & reactive). Once the
utility tie breaker opens, the MSLC becomes disabled and does not effect DSLC
load sharing control. Because the MSLC/DSLC network only allows one master
controller at a time, only one MSLC at a time can be utilized to control plant load.
For more information on Woodward’s Master Synchronizer & Load Control and
how to apply it, please refer to Woodward manual 02022.
Installation Notes
A Hand-held Programmer (9905-292) is required and used by the MSLC to
configure and calibrate it to the site specific application.
The MSLC requires a power source of +24 Vdc @ 1 A. The 505 power supplies
can not supply this much power, thus an external power supply may be required.
Woodward 11
Chapter 2.
Application Notes
Overview
This chapter is provided to give users an idea of the 505 Digital Control’s
capabilities, and how to apply them to a system. Typical applications are
schematically shown and their functionality explained. Programming and Start/
Run mode notes are given for each application to assist application programmers
in configuring the 505 for their application. Basic peripheral device connections
are shown in each application drawing to allow an understanding of how these
devices interface to the 505 and expand system capabilities.
Speed/Load PID
The Speed PID can control and limit:
 Unit Speed/Frequency
 Unit Load
The 505’s Speed PID can be used to control unit speed/frequency when isolated
and unit load when paralleled to an infinite bus (utility). The Speed PID can be
programmed to sense unit load via its actuator output signal or a 4–20 mA
analog input signal from a generator power sensor. When programmed to sense
and control generator load via a analog input true unit load is sensed and
controlled. By using the generator load signal to control from, any turbine inlet or
exhaust pressure variation is sensed and compensated for, thus providing true
load control.
A combination of the Speed PID and its setpoint limits allow this PID to limit unit
load. When used as a unit load limiter, it is recommended that the 505 be
configured to sense and control only true generator load. If applying the 505
system to a soft grid (utility frequency varies greatly) it is recommended that unit
load limiting be performed by the Auxiliary PID not the Speed PID.
Auxiliary PID
The 505’s Auxiliary PID can be programmed to control or limit:
 Turbine Inlet Steam Pressure
 Turbine Inlet Steam Flow
 Turbine Exhaust Steam pressure
 Turbine Exhaust Steam Flow
 Generator Power output
 Plant or Tie line Import/Export Power
 Process Temperature
 Compressor Suction pressure
 Compressor Suction Flow
 Compressor Discharge pressure
 Compressor Discharge Flow
 Any process parameter related to unit load, inlet pressure/flow, or exhaust
pressure/flow (depending on configuration)
12 Woodward
The 505’s Auxiliary PID can be used as a limiter or controller (enabled/disabled
on command). When programmed as a limiter this PID’s output is Low Signal
Selected with the Speed PID’s output. This configuration allows the Auxiliary PID
to limit the unit’s load based on the parameter being sensed.
When the Auxiliary PID is configured as a controller, it must be enabled and

disabled by commands given through the 505’s front panel, contact input, or
Modbus communications. With this configuration when the Aux PID is enabled
the Speed PID is disabled and tracks the Auxiliary PID’s output.
To control or limit any of the listed parameters, the 505 must be programmed to
accept an Auxiliary analog input signal representing that parameter’s level. The
exception to this rule is when controlling or limiting generator load, the Auxiliary
PID can be programmed to use and share the KW/Unit load input with the Speed
PID.
Cascade PID
The 505’s Cascade PID can be programmed to control:
 Turbine Inlet Steam Pressure
 Turbine Inlet Steam Flow
 Turbine Exhaust Steam pressure
 Turbine Exhaust Steam Flow
 Generator Power output
 Plant or Tie line Import/Export Power
 Process Temperature
 Compressor Suction pressure
 Compressor Suction Flow
 Compressor Discharge pressure
 Compressor Discharge Flow
 Any process parameter related to unit load, inlet pressure, or exhaust
pressure (depending on the configuration)
The 505’s Cascade PID can be used to control any of the listed parameters. This
PID must be enabled and disabled by commands given through the 505’s front
panel, contact input, or Modbus communications.
The Cascade PID is cascaded with the Speed PID to vary unit speed/load. By
directly positioning the Speed PID’s setpoint, the Cascade PID can vary unit
speed/load to control its input parameter. This configuration allows for bumpless
transfers between the two control modes (Speed/Load and Cascade).
Example Applications
The example applications in this chapter do not show every possible control
configuration or combination. However, these examples can also be used as a
reference to apply any of the controlling combinations or parameters not listed or
shown. To apply a desired control parameter or combination not shown, refer to
one or more of the typical application configurations that are shown and
resemble the control configuration desired, then substitute the shown control
parameters with the required control parameters.
To apply a desired control parameter or combination not shown, refer to one or

more of the typical application configurations that are shown and resemble the
control configuration desired, then substitute the shown control parameters with
the required control parameters.
Woodward 13
Example–To configure the 505 to perform a Turbine Exhaust pressure limiting
function use Example 1, the “Pump or Compressor Discharge Pressure Control
with Turbine Inlet Pressure Limiting” application for reference. With this example
substitute exhaust pressure for inlet pressure and disregard any program settings
specified to control pump or compressor discharge pressure.
The examples shown in this chapter are summarized as follows:

 Example 1: Pump or Compressor Discharge Pressure Control with Inlet
Pressure Limiting
 Example 2: Inlet Pressure Control with Auto Synchronizing and Generator
Power Limiting
 Example 3: Exhaust Pressure Control with Plant Import/Export Power
Limiting
 Example 4: Plant Import/Export Power Control with DRFD Servo Interface
 Example 5: Inlet Pressure Control with Isochronous Load Share Control in
Island Mode
 Example 6: Plant Import/Export Power Control with Isochronous Load Share
Control in Island Mode
 Example 7: Induction Generator Control
The features and functionality shown in each example are summarized in table
2–1.
Table 2-1. Example Summary
14 Woodward
Example 1–Pump or Compressor Discharge Pressure Control

with Turbine Inlet Pressure Limiting
Figure 2-1. Pump or Compressor Discharge Pressure Control with Turbine Inlet
Pressure Limiting
This is an example of a typical pump or compressor application. With this

application the 505 is configured to normally control pump/compressor discharge
pressure, and limit governor valve position based on low turbine inlet steam
pressure. Both the Auxiliary and Cascade modes were used for this example
application. Other applications may or may not use all the functionality shown in
Figure 2-1 and described below.
With this application pump/compressor discharge pressure control is performed

within the 505 through the Cascade controller. Because the discharge pressure
being controlled, typically affects many other plant processes, a plant Distributed
Control System (DCS) may be used to monitor plant process conditions and set
the Cascade setpoint position. This can be performed through Modbus
communications, discrete raise and lower commands, or with a Analog setpoint
signal.
For this application a limiting type of control function was required to help
preserve inlet header pressure in case of system header problems. Because the
Auxiliary PID is the only controller that has this capability, it is used to sense
turbine inlet pressure and limit governor valve position, based on a low inlet
pressure setting.
Woodward 15
If a plant Distributed Control System is used to sense and control a process by
positioning the load of multiple pumps or compressors (loadsharing), the DCS
may interface directly to the 505 Speed PID setpoint through a programmed
Remote Speed Setpoint analog input. This allows a DCS to monitor and
compensate for plant and system conditions by directly changing the speed of
multiple pumps or compressors simultaneously.
All 505 PID controller setpoints (Speed, Auxiliary, Cascade) may be changed
through programmed raise and lower contacts, programmed 4–20 mA inputs,
Modbus commands, or the 505 service panel.
The following list of notes is provided as a reference for application programmers

to follow when configuring the 505 to achieve any of the control and limiting
actions shown in figure 2-1:
505 Configuration Notes for Example 1

Operating Param:
This is not a Generator application. (Generator Application? No)
Cascade Control:
The Cascade control loop was configured to receive a pump/compressor
discharge pressure signal through Analog input #1. (Analog Input #1
Function: Cascade Input)
Because a two wire, loop powered transducer is used to interface with this
signal, the 505 back cover was removed and JPR10 installed.
The 505 was configured to accept a contact from a panel mounted switch to
externally enable and disable discharge pressure control. (Contact Input 1
Function: Casc Control Enable)
Pump/compressor discharge pressure is directly proportional to turbine inlet

valve position, thus input inversion is not required. (Invert Cascade Input?
No)
With this application, Setpoint Tracking is not used because the system’s
pressure setpoint never changes. (Use Setpoint Tracking? No)
To protect the generator from being reverse powered by the Cascade PID,
the ‘Speed Setpoint Lower Limit’ value was set to 3% above synchronous
speed or 3605.4 rpm (5.4 rpm if rated speed is 3600 rpm and using 5%
droop). The 505 will automatically limit the Speed Setpoint Lower Limit to a
minimum of 3% (min load). If it is desired to allow the Cascade PID to lower
load below this setting, the Service mode’s (Cascade Control Settings, Use
Min Load) setting must be set to “No”.
In this case, because the Cascade PID is not sharing control of discharge
pressure with another control, Droop is not needed. (Cascade Droop = 0%)
Auxiliary Control:
The Auxiliary control loop was configured to receive a turbine inlet header
pressure signal through Analog input #2. (Analog Input #2 Function:
Auxiliary Input)
16 Woodward
The Auxiliary Input was inverted to allow the correct control action. To
increase turbine inlet header pressure, the governor valve must decrease.
This is considered an indirect action and requires the input to be inverted.
(Invert Aux Input? YES)
The Auxiliary PID was programmed to perform as a limiter. (Use Aux

Enable? No)
Because the Auxiliary PID is used only as a limiter and is not sharing control
of inlet pressure with another control, Droop is not needed. (Aux Droop =
0%)
Trips:
In this example the turbine can be tripped by several devices, one of these
devices is the 505 control. To provide feedback to the 505 control that the
turbine is tripped, a contact from the trip string is wired into the External
Emergency Shutdown input (TB12). With this application, the ‘governor trip’
annunciation should only occur if the 505 tripped the turbine and not
annunciate when the other external devices shuts down the unit (Turbine
Start: Ext Trips in Trip Relay ?–No.)
Because the Shutdown relay is used in the trip string to shut down the
turbine should the 505 initiate a trip, additional relays are required for
annunciating any turbine trip and annunciating a 505 initiated trip. Relay #3
was programmed to annunciate any turbine trip as follows: (Relays: Use
Relay #3–Yes ; Relay #3 is a Level Switch?–No ; Relay #3 Energizes on–
Shutdown Condition) Relay #4 was programmed to indicate a 505 initiated
trip as follows: (Relays: Use Relay #4–Yes ; Relay #4 is a Level Switch?–No
; Relay #4 Energizes on–Trip Relay) Note that Relay #4 de-energizes on a
trip condition (excluding external trip inputs) and Relay #3 energizes on a
trip (shutdown) condition.
Starting and Run Mode Notes for Example 1

Starting and ramping to an idle or minimum speed position can be performed
automatically, semi-automatically, or manually. After the unit is started, the Idle/
Rated or Auto Start Sequence functions, if programmed, can be used to assist
ramping the control to a rated speed position or an operator can give a raise
command to manually increase turbine speed.
After the unit has been started and is controlling at a minimum/desired speed
position, Cascade control (pump/compressor discharge pressure) can be
enabled through contacts, Modbus commands, or the 505 service panel. When
Cascade control is enabled, if actual discharge pressure does not match the
setpoint, the control will automatically ramp turbine speed at the ‘SPEED
SETPOINT SLOW RATE’ setting until the pump/compressor discharge pressure
does match the setpoint.
With this application the Auxiliary control is used as a limiter, thus it does not
need to be enabled. If turbine inlet pressure decreases below the Auxiliary
setpoint at any time the Auxiliary PID will take control of the governor valve and
lower it to help preserve inlet header pressure.
See the Service mode section of this manual, for information on related tunable
values and rates.
Woodward 17
Example 2–Inlet Pressure Control with Automatic

Synchronizing & Generator Power Limiting
Figure 2-2. Inlet Pressure Control with Automatic Synchronizing & Generator
Power Limiting
18 Woodward
This is an example of a typical turbine generator application where plant process
steam (turbine inlet header pressure) is desired to be controlled at a single
pressure. With this type of application, turbine load varies based on the plant
process steam demand. Both the Auxiliary and Cascade modes were used for
this example application. Other applications may or may not utilize all the
functionality shown in Figure 2-2 and described below.
With this application turbine inlet header pressure control is performed within the
505 through the Cascade PID controller. This is an ideal controller for this type of
function because it can be enabled and disabled as desired by a system
operator. This gives a system operator full authority of when to transfer process
pressure control to or from a letdown station or turbine bypass valve.
As shown in Figure 2-2 generator load is being sensed with a Woodward Real
Power Sensor and supplied to the 505’s KW/unit load input. This allows
generator load to be set and controlled by the Speed PID when paralleled to the
utility during unit start-up and shutdown.
During normal operation unit load is determined by the Cascade PID controlling
inlet header pressure. Because turbine load may vary greatly with this
application, a limiter is used to protect the generator from being over powered.
This protection is performed by the Auxiliary PID configured as a limiter. By
configuring the Auxiliary PID as a limiter and to use the generator load input as
the PID’s controlling parameter, the maximum load the generator can operate at
can be limited.
This application uses a DSLC for synchronization only. Because the DSLC
interfaces to the 505 through an analog signal, a 505 analog input must be
programmed. The 505’s Analog Input #6 is the only analog input directly
compatible with the DSLC, thus it is required that this input be programmed to
receive the DSLC’s Speed Bias signal. When a Synchronizing input/function is
programmed, the input can be enabled, through a contact input, function key,
Modbus command, or the 505 service panel. As shown in Figure 2-2 a panel
mounted (DPST) switch is used with this application to select automatic
synchronization in both the DSLC and 505.
The following list of notes are provided as a reference for application

programmers to follow when programming the 505 to achieve any of the control
and limiting actions shown in Figure 2-2.

OPERATING PARAM:
This is a Generator application. (Generator Application? Yes)
Generator and Utility Tie breaker contact inputs are required to be

programmed when a generator application is selected. (Contact Input #1
Function: Generator Breaker), (Contact Input #2 Function: Utility Tie
Breaker).
The 505 was configured to sense the Real Power Sensor’s generator load
signal through Analog input #1. (Analog Input #1 Function: KW/Unit Load
Input)
Woodward 19
Because the Real Power Sensor’s ‘KW readout’ is self powered, the 505
back cover was removed and JPR11 installed.
Generator load control (when paralleled to the utility) is controlled through

the Speed PID and programmed by selecting KW Droop. (Use kW Droop?
Yes) For good response and load adjustment resolution, Droop was set to
5% of rated speed. (Droop = 5 %)
It was desired to switch to Frequency control at all times, if the plant became
isolated form the Utility bus. (Use Freq Arm/Disarm? No)
CASCADE CONTROL:
The Cascade control loop was configured to receive an inlet header
Cascade Input)
externally enable and disable inlet header pressure control. (Contact Input
#3 Function: Casc Control Enable)
The Cascade Input was inverted to allow the correct control action. To
increase turbine inlet header pressure, the governor valve position must
decrease. This is considered an indirect action and requires the input to be
inverted. (Invert Cascade Input? Yes)
With this application, Setpoint Tracking is not used because the system’s
pressure setpoint never changes, thus system start-up is simpler. (Use
Setpoint Tracking? No)
the ‘Speed Setpoint Lower Limit’ value was set to 5 rpm above synchronous
speed.
In this case, because the Cascade PID, during normal operation, is not
sharing control of inlet header pressure with another controller, Droop is not
needed. (Cascade Droop = 0%)
AUXILIARY CONTROL:
The Auxiliary control loop was configured to receive a generator load signal
through the KW/Unit Load input, also being used for KW Droop. (Use KW
Input? Yes)
Unit load is directly proportional to turbine inlet valve position, thus no input
inversion is required. (Invert Aux Input? No)
The Auxiliary PID was programmed to perform as a load limiter. (Use Aux
Enable? No)
In this case, because the Auxiliary PID is used only as a limiter, and is not
sharing control of generator load with another control, Droop is not needed.
(Aux Droop = 0%)
With this application, it was desirable to only enable the Auxiliary PID if
paralleled to the utility. (Tiebkr Open Aux Dsbl? Yes), (Genbkr Open Aux
Dsbl? Yes)
20 Woodward
AUTO SYNCHRONIZING:
The 505’s Analog input #6 was programmed to receive the DSLC’s speed
bias signal for automatic synchronization (Analog Input #6 Function:
Synchronizing Input) With this configuration, the analog input’s range is
defaulted to provide a certain gain factor for best performance, thus the
input’s 4 mA and 20 mA program settings are not used and do not require
programming.
A contact input was programmed to enable the Synchronizing analog input

(Contact Input #4 Function: Synch Enable).
Starting and Run Mode Notes For Example 2

ramping the control to a rated speed position. Alternatively an operator can give
a manual raise command to increase turbine speed as desired.
After the unit has been started and is controlling at a rated speed position, the
turbine generator can be synchronized manually, or automatically. The system
operator can select automatic synchronization through the Auto-Synch select
switch (switch SW1 in Figure 2-2). When this switch is closed the 505’s
Synchronizing input is enabled and the DSLC’s automatic synchronizing function
is selected.
When the plant-to-utility tie-line breaker is closed, and the unit generator breaker
closes, the 505 steps the speed/load setpoint up to a minimum load level to
reduce the chance of reverse powering or motoring the generator. This minimum
load level is based on the speed/load setpoint and is defaulted to a “3% 5 rpm”
step change of the speed/load setpoint. The defaulted value is adjustable
through the 505’s Service mode (Breaker Logic–Min Load Bias = 5 ).
After synchronization the 505’s load setpoint can be positioned through raise and
lower Speed/Load setpoint contacts, a programmed 4–20 mA input, Modbus
commands, or the 505 service panel. This load control mode may be used to
slowly increase turbine load, and take control away from a letdown station or
turbine bypass valve.
Cascade control (turbine exhaust pressure) can be enabled at any time after the
Utility Tie breaker and Generator breakers are closed, through a contact input,
Modbus command or the 505 service panel. With this configuration, when
Cascade control is enabled, if actual inlet header pressure does not match
setpoint, the control will increase generator load at the ‘SPEED SETPOINT
SLOW RATE’ setting until the inlet header pressure matches setpoint.
With this application the Auxiliary control is programmed to be used as a limiter,

and be automatically enabled when both the Utility Tie and Generator breakers
are closed. When paralleled to the utility, if inlet header pressure demand, and/or
other system conditions try to force the generator to operate above its load limit
setting, the Auxiliary PID will take control of the governor valve to limit generator
load. Once system conditions demand unit load below that of the Auxiliary
setpoint, the Cascade/Speed PIDs will again take control of generator load.
Woodward 21
Example 3–Exhaust Pressure Control with Generator Power

Limiting and Plant Import/Export Limiting
Figure 2-3. Exhaust Pressure Control with Generator Power Limiting and Plant
Import/Export Limiting
This is an example of a typical turbine generator application where plant process

steam (turbine exhaust pressure) is desired to be controlled at a single pressure
level. With this type of application, turbine load varies based on the plant process
steam demand. Both the Auxiliary and Cascade modes were used for this
example application. Other applications may or may not utilize all the functionality
shown in Figure 2-3 and described below.
22 Woodward
With this application turbine exhaust pressure control is performed within the 505
through the Cascade PID controller. This is an ideal controller for this type of
Because turbine load may vary greatly with this application, a limiter is used to
protect the generator from being over powered. In order to limit generator load,
the 505 control must be able to sense generator load. As shown in Figure 2-3
generator load is being sensed with a Woodward Real Power Sensor and
supplied to the 505’s KW droop input. With this application generator over-load
protection is performed by a combination of the Speed PID and the Speed
Setpoint Maximum limit. By programming the Speed Setpoint Maximum limit to
that of rated speed plus the % droop value at 100% load, the speed setpoint
cannot be taken over 100% load and the Speed PID will limit generator load to
100%.
For this application a limiting type of control function was required to limit the
plant export power to zero. The plant does not get reimbursed for any power
exported, and it is more economical to make power than purchase it form the
utility, thus a zero plant import/export power level is desired. Because the
Auxiliary PID is the only 505 controller that has this limiting capability, it was used
to sense tie line power and limit turbine/generator output, based on a zero export
limit setting.
A second Real Power Sensor #8272-726 was used with this application to sense
utility tie line power. This RPS is special, in that it senses –5 A to +5 A CT current
to allow its output to represent power flow in both the import and export
directions. With this RPS 12 mA represents zero power flow. Because of this
feature the RPS #8272-726 can not, be used with the 505 to sense generator
load/ power. Please check with a Woodward certified distributor or factory for the
correct RPS to use as a generator load sensor.
receive the DSLC’s Speed Bias signal. When a synchronizing input/function is

programmers to follow when programming the 505 to achieve the control and
limiting actions shown in Figure 2-3.
Woodward 23

OPERATING PARAM:

Function: Generator Breaker) (Contact Input #2 Function: Utility Tie
Breaker)
The 505 was configured to sense a Real Power Sensor’s generator load
signal through Analog input #1. (Analog Input #1 Function: KW/Unit Load
Input)
Because the RPS’s KW readout is self powered, the 505 back cover was
removed and JPR11 installed.
Generator load (when paralleled to the utility) is controlled by the Speed PID
and programmed by selecting the KW/Unit load input. (Use KW Droop?
YES) For good response and load adjustment resolution, Droop was set to
5% of rated speed. (Droop = 5 %)
CASCADE CONTROL:
The Cascade control loop was configured to receive an exhaust header
Cascade Input)
The Function Key F3 was programmed to allow an operator to easily enable

and disable Cascade control. (F3 Key Performs: Casc Control Enable).
Exhaust header pressure is directly proportional to turbine inlet valve

position, thus no input inversion is required. (Invert Cascade Input? No)
With this application, Setpoint Tracking is used to allow the 505’s Cascade
control, when disabled, to track exhaust header pressure being controlled by
a letdown station. (Use Setpoint Tracking? Yes)
speed.
sharing control of exhaust header pressure with another control, Droop is
not needed. (Cascade Droop = 0%)
GEN LOAD LIMITING:

To limit generator load to 100% the Speed setpoint’s maximum limit was set
at the 100% load setting. 5% Droop was programmed for this application.
(Max Governor Speed Setpoint = Rated speed x 1.05)
24 Woodward
AUXILIARY CONTROL:
The Auxiliary control loop was configured to receive a utility tie line power
signal through Analog input #3. (Analog Input #3 Function: Auxiliary Input)
he minimum analog input value was programmed for import power based on
the tie line power level at –5 A CT current (Input #3 4 mA Value =–XXXX).
he maximum analog input value was programmed for export power based
on the tie line power level at +5 A CT current (Input #3 20 mA Value =
+XXXX).
The utility-tie Real Power Sensor’s CT inputs were wired to allow the RPS’s
4 mA value to represent full import power and the RPS’s 20 mA value to
represent full export power. Because this signal is directly proportional to
turbine inlet valve position, no input inversion is required. (Invert Aux Input?
No)
The Auxiliary PID was programmed to perform as a limiter. (Use Aux

Enable? No)
In this case, because the Auxiliary PID is used as a limiter, and is not
sharing control of inlet pressure with another control, Droop is not needed.
(Aux Droop = 0%)
With this application, it was desirable to only enable the Auxiliary PID if
paralleled to the utility. (Tiebkr Open Aux Dsbl? Yes), (Genbkr Open Aux
Dsbl? Yes)
AUTO SYNCHRONIZING:
Synchronizing Input). With this configuration, the analog input’s range is
defaulted to a certain gain value, for best performance, thus the input’s 4
mA and 20 mA settings are not used and do not require programming.
A contact input was programmed to enable the Synchronizing analog input

(Contact Input #4 Function: Synch Enable).

ramping the control to a rated speed position. Alternatively, an operator can give
switch ( SW1 in Figure 2-3 ). When this switch is closed the 505’s Synchronizing
input is enabled and the DSLC’s automatic synchronizing function selected.
Woodward 25
When the plant to utility tie line/breaker is closed, and the unit generator breaker
load level is based on the speed/load setpoint and is defaulted to 3%. The
defaulted value is adjustable through the 505’s Service mode (Breaker Logic–Min
Load Bias = 5).
lower speed/load setpoint contacts, a programmed 4–20 mA input, Modbus
commands, or the 505 service panel.
utility tie breaker and generator breaker input contacts are closed. Cascade
control can be enabled through a programmed contact, Modbus command, or the
505 service panel. Exhaust pressure control can be transferred from a letdown
station or turbine bypass valve in one of the following ways; enabling Cascade
control, and backing down the letdown station’ s setpoint, or slowly increasing
turbine load with the Speed PID’s setpoint, to allow the letdown station to close,
then enable Cascade control.
After exhaust pressure control has been transferred to the 505’s Cascade PID,
the letdown station or turbine bypass valve must be closed or in a manual control
mode. This will stop the two controllers (505 Cascade PID and system letdown
station) from fighting for control of one parameter and causing system instability.
With this application the Auxiliary control is programmed to be used as a limiter

and be automatically enabled when both the utility tie and generator breakers are
closed. When paralleled to the utility this 505 and RPS combination allows the
plant to import power from the utility, but not export power. If the utility-to-plant tie
line power reaches a zero import/export level the Auxiliary PID will begin limiting
generator output, until plant conditions require power to be imported again.
Optionally the Auxiliary PID’s setpoint can be varied to limit plant power to a
different import or export power level as required.
Example 4–Plant Import/ Export Control with DRFD Servo

Interface
This is an example of a typical turbine generator application where plant import/
export control is desired when paralleled with the utility, and frequency control
when isolated from the utility. With this type of application, when paralleled to the
utility, turbine load varies based on the plant power demand. Other applications
may or may not use all the functionality shown in Figure 2-4 and described
below.
With this application, plant import/export control is performed within the 505
through the Auxiliary PID controller. Optionally the Cascade PID controller could
have been used instead. For this application the Auxiliary PID is configured to be
enabled and disabled on command, instead of performing a limiting action. This
gives a system operator full authority of when to enable or disable plant
import/export control.
When programmed for this type of control action, the Speed PID is disabled
when the Auxiliary PID is enabled, and can only limit the 505’s valve output
signal if unit load reaches 100%. Also, the Auxiliary setpoint automatically tracks
the PID’s input value when not in-control.
26 Woodward
Figure 2-4. Plant Import/Export Control with DRFD Servo Interface
A Real Power Sensor #8272-726 was used with this application to sense utility
tie line power flow. This RPS is special, in that it senses –5 A to +5 A CT current
to allow its output to represent power flow in both the import and export
directions. With this RPS 12 mA represents zero power flow. Because of this
feature the RPS #8272-726 can not, be used with the 505 to sense generator
load/power.
To save buying a second Real Power Sensor, with this application, unit load is
sensed through turbine inlet valve position (505 LSS bus), not a generator load
signal. Optionally, another Real Power Sensor could be used with this application
to sense generator power, and allow true unit load to be sensed, controlled, and
limited. With this configuration, when the generator is paralleled to the utility, the
Speed PID controls governor valve position, instead of generator power. Thus
100% governor valve position is considered 100% unit load, no matter if system
conditions are at rated or not.
Woodward 27
receive the DSLC’s Speed Bias signal. When a synchronizing input/function is
With this application the existing servo assembly had an actuator which required
+50 mA for pilot valve positioning, and a LVDT mounted to the valve rack to
feedback actual rack position. Because the 505 does not have a bipolar drive
circuit, and cannot perform closed loop servo position control, a Woodward
Digital Remote Final Driver (DRFD) was used to interface with the existing servo
actuator. The integrating type of DRFD used, accepts a 4–20 mA valve demand
signal from the 505, monitors actual valve position (through, LVDTs, MLDTs, or
other dc position feedback devices), compares the two signals, and outputs a
drive signal to the servo assemblies actuator accordingly. The DRFD interfaces
directly with an LVDT, (providing excitation, and demodulation) thus no external
converter was required or used.

programmers to follow when programming the 505 to achieve any control and

OPERATING PARAM:

Breaker)
Because no RPS was used to sense unit load, turbine inlet steam valve
position, when paralleled to the utility, is controlled by the Speed PID and
programmed by not selecting KW Droop. (Use KW Droop? No) For good
response and load adjustment resolution, Droop was set to 5% of rated
speed. (Droop = 5 %)
DRIVER CONFIGURATION:
Because the Digital Remote Final Driver used to interface with the servo
assembly only accepts a 4–20 mA valve demand signal, the 505 was
configured to output a 4–20 mA valve demand signal. (Actuator Is 4–20
mA? Yes)
28 Woodward
Dither is a low frequency ac current modulated on to the 505’s dc actuator–
drive current to reduce stiction in linear type actuators. Because the 505’s
actuator output is connected to the DRFD, dither was not required or used
with this application. (Actuator #1 Dither = 0.0%)
AUXILIARY CONTROL:
The Auxiliary control loop was configured to receive a utility tie line power
signal through Analog input #3. (Analog Input #3 Function: Auxiliary Input)
he minimum analog input value was programmed for import power based on
the tie line power level at –5 A CT current (Input #3 4 mA Value =–XXXX).
he maximum analog input value was programmed for export power based
on the tie line power level at +5 A CT current. (Input #3 20 mA Value =
+XXXX).
The 505 was configured to accept a contact from a plant distributed control
system to enable and disable import/export control. (Contact Input #3
Function: Aux Control Enable)
The utility-tie Real Power Sensor’s CT inputs were wired to allow the RPS’s
4 mA value to represent full import power and the RPS’s 20 mA value to
represent full export power. Because this signal is directly proportional to
turbine inlet valve position, no input inversion is required. (Invert Aux Input?
No)
The Auxiliary PID was programmed to be enabled and disabled on

command. (Use Aux Enable? Yes)
In this case, because the Auxiliary PID is the sole import/export controller,
Droop is not needed. (Aux Droop = 0%)
With this application, it was desirable to only allow the Auxiliary PID to be
enabled if paralleled to the utility. (Tiebkr Open Aux Dsbl? Yes), (Genbkr
Open Aux Dsbl? Yes)
AUTO SYNCHRONIZING:
Synchronizing Input). With this configuration, the analog input’s range is
defaulted to a certain gain value, for best performance, thus input’s 4 mA
and 20 mA settings are not used and do not require programming.
A contact input was programmed to enable the Synchronizing analog input.

(Contact Input #4 Function: Sync Enable)

Woodward 29
The DSLC provides either phase matching or slip frequency synchronizing, and
ties into the unit automatic voltage regulator to match voltages before paralleling.
It communicates over a LAN using a digital Echelon network with other plant
DSLCs to perform safe dead bus closing.
When the plant-to-utility tie line/breaker is closed, and the unit generator breaker
load level is based on the speed/load setpoint and is to 3%. The defaulted value
is adjustable through the 505’s Service mode (Breaker Logic–Min Load Bias = 5).
With this configuration, Import/Export control (Auxiliary PID) can be enabled at

any time after the utility tie breaker and generator breaker input contacts are
closed. Auxiliary control can be enabled through the programmed contact, a
Modbus command, or the 505 service panel. Because the Auxiliary Setpoint
tracks plant Import/Export power before being enabled, the transfer to Auxiliary
control is bumpless. Once enabled, the Auxiliary PID’s setpoint can then be
positioned to the desired import or export level.
Because of the 505’s configuration, this unit will automatically switch to

Frequency control, upon the opening of the plant-to-utility tie breaker.
Example 5–Inlet Pressure Control with Isochronous

Loadsharing Control in Island Mode
For this application, it is desired to control Inlet Pressure when paralleled to the
utility, and Frequency while loadsharing with three other units, when isolated
from the utility. With this type of application, when paralleled to the utility, load
varies based on plant process steam demand, and when isolated load varies
based on plant power demand. Other applications may or may not utilize all the
functionality shown in Figure 2-5 and described below.
With this application, turbine inlet header pressure control is performed within the
505 through the Cascade PID controller. This is an ideal controller for this type of
To save buying a Real Power Sensor, for this application, unit load is sensed
through turbine inlet valve position (505 LSS bus), not a generator load signal.
Optionally, another Real Power Sensor could be used with this application to
sense generator power, and allow true unit load to be sensed and controlled.
With this configuration, 100% governor valve position, is considered to be 100%
unit load, no matter what system conditions are.
30 Woodward
Figure 2-5. Inlet Pressure Control with Isochronous Loadsharing Control in Island
Mode
This application uses a DSLC for synchronization and isochronous loadsharing.

With this configuration, the DSLC is disabled when the generator is paralleled to
the utility, and enabled when isolated from the utility. When the unit is paralleled
to the utility, the DSLC is disabled and the 505’s internal load setpoint or
Cascade PID (plant import/export power) is used to control/set unit load. When
the plant becomes isolated from the utility, (utility tie breaker opens), the DSLC is
enabled, Cascade control is disabled, and the 505 is switched to a Frequency
control/loadsharing mode.
A DSLC can only interface to a 505 through an analog input signal. The 505’s
Analog Input #6 is the only analog input directly compatible with the DSLC, thus it
is required that this input be programmed to receive the DSLC’s Speed Bias
signal. When a Sync/LD Share analog input is programmed, the input is
automatically enabled if the generator breaker input is closed and the utility tie
breaker input is open.
Woodward 31
Before the generator breaker is closed, the Synch/Ld Share input can be
enabled, to allow automatic synchronization by the DSLC. This synchronizing
function/ input can be enabled, through a contact input, function key, Modbus
command, or the 505 service panel. As shown in Figure 2-5 a panel mounted
(DPST) switch is used with this application to select automatic synchronization in
both the DSLC and 505.

505 Programming Notes for Example 5

OPERATING PARAM:

Breaker)
Because no RPS was used to sense unit load, turbine inlet steam valve
position, when paralleled to the utility, is controlled by the Speed PID and
programmed by not selecting KW Droop. (Use KW Droop? No) For good
response and load adjustment resolution, Droop was set to 5% of rated
speed. (Droop = 5 %)
CASCADE CONTROL:
The Cascade control loop was configured to receive an inlet header
Cascade Input).
signal, the 505 back cover was removed and JPR8 was installed.
externally enable and disable inlet header pressure control. (Contact Input
#3 Function: Casc Control Enable)
The Cascade Input was inverted to allow the correct control action. To
increase turbine inlet header pressure, the governor valve must decrease.
This is considered an indirect action and requires the input to be inverted.
(Invert Cascade Input? Yes)
With this application, Setpoint Tracking is not used because the desired
system pressure level never changes, thus system start-up is simpler. (Use
Setpoint Tracking? No)
speed.
32 Woodward
In this case, because the Cascade PID is sharing control of inlet header
pressure with the boiler control, Droop was set at 5%. This allows the
Cascade PID to assist the boiler control with inlet header pressure control,
without having the two fight over the same parameter. (Cascade Droop =
5%).
SYNCH/LD SHARING:
The 505’s Analog Input #6 was programmed to receive the DSLC’s speed
bias signal for automatic synchronization, and load sharing. (Analog Input
#6 Function: Synch/Load Share Input) With this configuration, the analog
input’s range is defaulted to a certain gain value, for best performance, thus
input’s 4 mA and 20 mA settings are not used and do not require
programming.
A contact input was programmed to enable the Synch/Load Share analog

input to allow synchronization through the DSLC before the generator
breaker is closed. (Contact Input #4 Function: Synch/Ld Share Enable).

When the unit has been started and is controlling at a rated speed position, the
switch ( SW1 in Figure 2-5 ). When this switch is closed the 505’s Synch/Load
Sharing input is enabled and the DSLC’s automatic synchronizing function is
selected.
After synchronization, generator load is determined by the mode of operation

selected, (the position of the utility tie breaker contact input). If the utility tie
breaker contact is closed, generator load is determined by the 505’s internal load
setpoint, or when enabled, inlet header pressure control (Cascade control). If the
utility tie breaker contact is open generator load is determined by the DSLC. The
DSLC can be configured to operate in several different load control modes. For
this application the DSLC is only used for isochronous loadsharing, when the
plant is isolated from the utility.
In this plant four generating units use DSLCs, and upon the plant-to-utility tie
breaker opening they all switch to Frequency control and communicate with each
other via a digital LON network to share load. Thus plant frequency is controlled
by all units, and plant load is shared proportionally by all four units. With this
configuration plant frequency will be the average frequency of all units. The 505,
has a feature that resets its frequency setpoint to the ‘RATED SPEED
SETPOINT’ setting upon the utility tie breaker opening, thus assuring that all
units will be at synchronous speed. A DSLC’s Frequency Trimmer function may
be programmed to hold frequency within +.1% of the desired frequency.
Inlet header pressure (Cascade control) can be enabled any time after the utility
tie and generator breaker contacts are closed. Cascade control can be enabled
through a programmed contact, a Modbus command, or the 505’s service panel.
Woodward 33
Example 6–Import/Export Control or Exhaust Pressure Control

with Isoch Load Sharing in Island Mode
Figure 2-6. Import/Export Control or Exhaust Pressure Control with Isoch Load
Sharing in Island Mode
This application utilizes multiple turbine generators, and requires that all units
have the capability to control different plant parameters depending on the status
and health of each unit. Normal operation is to have one unit control plant
process steam (turbine exhaust pressure) and the other units be controlled
based on plant import/export demand. Other applications may or may not utilize
all the functionality shown in Figure 2-6 and described below.
34 Woodward
For this application one unit at a time, based on system, health is used to control
plant process steam. The other units are used to control a plant export power
level of 5 MW. Because the plant is contractually obligated to provide this level of
power to the utility, and because it is more economical to make power than
purchase it form the utility, a 5 MW plant export power level is desired.
Each unit control panel has a mode selection switch which allows an operator to
place a unit in one of three different modes of operation. The three modes of
operation are Manual load (used to manually load and unload a unit), Plant
Process Steam control (turbine exhaust pressure), and Loadsharing (used for
plant import/export control or unit loadsharing).
When a unit is switched to a Manual load control mode, its 505’s internal load
setpoint determines unit load. This allows an operator to manually load or unload
a unit to a set level if desired.
With this application when a unit is switched to the Plant Process control mode,
turbine exhaust pressure control is performed within the 505 through the
Cascade PID controller. This is an ideal controller for this type of function
because it can be enabled and disabled as desired by a system operator. This
gives a system operator full authority of when to transfer process pressure
control to or from a letdown station or turbine bypass valve.
To save buying a Real Power Sensor, turbine inlet valve position (505 LSS bus)
is used to sense unit load, not a generator load signal. With this configuration,
100% governor valve position, is considered to be 100% unit load, no matter
what the system conditions. Thus unit overload protection is only performed by
limiting the 505’s output to 100%. Optionally, a Real Power Sensor could be used
with this application to sense generator power, and allow true unit load to be
sensed, controlled and limited.
This application uses Woodward DSLCs and a MSLC to allow all units to
communicate, share plant load , and control plant export power. The DSLC is
used on each unit, for synchronization and loadsharing. One Master
Synchronizer & Load Control is used for plant synchronization and import/export
power control. When a unit is in the Loadsharing mode, the MSLC determines its
load with the plant-to-utility tie line is closed, and the DSLC’s loadsharing circuitry
when the plant-to-utility tie line is open. The MSLC, when enabled, sets the load
setpoint of each unit DSLC (in the Loadsharing mode) to control a plant export
level. When the plant-to-utility tie breaker is open, the MSLC is disabled, and
each unit communicates with the other units in the Loadsharing mode via the
DSLC’s LON network to share plant load.
A DSLC interfaces to a 505 through an analog input signal. The 505’s Analog
Input #6 is the only analog input directly compatible with the DSLC, thus it is
required that this input be programmed to receive the DSLC’s Speed Bias signal.
When a Sync/LD Share analog input is programmed, the input is automatically
enabled if the generator breaker input is closed and the utility tie breaker input is
open.
Before the generator breaker is closed, the 505’s Sync/Ld Share analog input
can be enabled, to allow automatic synchronization by the DSLC. This
synchronizing function/input can be enabled, through a contact input, function
key, Modbus command, or the 505 service panel. As shown in Figure 2-6 a panel
mounted (DPST) switch is used, with this application, to select automatic
Woodward 35
All 505 PID controller setpoints (Speed, Cascade) may be changed through
programmed raise and lower contacts, programmed 4–20 mA inputs, Modbus


OPERATING PARAM:

Function: Generator Breaker), (Contact Input #2 Fnction: Utility Tie
Breaker).
Generator load is limited by the Speed PID sensing governor valve position
through its LSS bus, and programmed by not selecting KW Droop. (Use KW
Droop? No)
For good response and load adjustment resolution, Droop (LSS bus
position) was set to 5% of rated speed. (Droop = 5 %)
It was desired to switch to Frequency/Loadsharing control at all times, if the

plant becomes isolated from the Utility bus. (Use Freq Arm/Disarm? No)
CASCADE CONTROL:
The Cascade control loop was configured to receive an exhaust header
Cascade Input)
A contact input was programmed to allow an operator to easily enable and

disable Cascade control via a control panel switch. (Contact Input #3
Function: Casc Control Enable).
Exhaust header pressure is directly proportional to turbine inlet valve

position, thus no input inversion is required. (Invert Cascade Input? No)
With this application, Setpoint Tracking is used to allow the 505’s Cascade
control, when disabled, to track exhaust header pressure being controlled by
a letdown station. (Use Setpoint Tracking? Yes)
speed.
sharing control of the exhaust header pressure with another control, Droop
is not needed. (Cascade Droop = 0%)
36 Woodward
GEN LOAD LIMITING:
To limit generator load to 100% the Speed setpoint maximum limit was set
at the 100% load setting. 5% Droop was programmed for this application.
(Max Governor Speed Setpoint = Rated Speed X 1.05)
SYNC & LOAD SHARING:

bias signal for automatic synchronization and loadsharing (Analog Input #6
Function: Sync/Load Share input). or best performance, the analog input’s
range is defaulted to a certain gain value, thus the input’s 4 mA and 20 mA
settings are not used and do not require programming.
A contact input is programmed to enable the Sync/Load Share analog input

before the generator breaker is closed to enable synchronizing through the
DSLC (Contact Input #4 Function: Sync/Ld Share Enable).

With this configuration the mode of operation the system operates in is

dependent on SW2’s position. When SW2 is not selecting the Loadsharing
mode, and the generator breaker is closed, unit load is set by the 505’s internal
Speed/load setpoint, or the Cascade PID if enabled. Upon the generator breaker
closing, the 505 steps the speed/load setpoint up to a minimum load level to
load level is based on the speed/load setpoint and is defaulted to 3%. The
defaulted value is adjustable through the 505’s Service mode (Breaker Logic–Min
Load Bias = 5).
utility tie breaker and generator breaker input contacts are closed. The Cascade
control can be enabled through a programmed contact, Modbus command, or the
505 service panel.
When SW2 is switched to select Loadsharing, the DSLC bumplessly ramps load
to match the MSLC’s load setpoint, or to a load setting determined by the DSLC’s
loadsharing circuitry, depending on utility-to-tie breaker position. The MSLC can
be used to set all the units in the Loadsharing mode to a base load setting, or
vary their load based on a plant import/export demand setting.
Woodward 37
With this application, during normal operation, one unit is switched to control
plant process steam and the other units are switched to the loadsharing mode
and are loaded based on the MSLC plant load demand. If the plant should
become isolated from the utility, the MSLC will become disabled and all units in
the loadsharing mode will share plant load. When desired the MSLC can be
enabled to re-synchronize the plant bus to the utility bus and close the plant-to-
utility tie breaker. After synchronization the MSLC will either ramp plant power to
a 5 MW export power level, or ramp plant load to a base load setting, depending
on the mode of operation selected.
Woodward DSLCs can interface directly with a unit’s automatic voltage regulator.
This allows units with DSLCs to share reactive power as well as real power. This
configuration also allows the MSLC to control plant power factor when the utility
to tie breaker is closed.
Example 7–Induction Generator Applications

When the 505 is configured for induction generator applications, typically there
are only two differences in the programming of the 505 verses programming for
synchronous generator applications.
The induction generator’s slip frequency must be taken into account. This is
achieved by compensating for the slip frequency with the 505’s maximum Speed
Setpoint setting. The ‘MAX GOVERNOR SPEED SETPOINT’ setting must be
equal to synchronous speed plus the droop percentage plus the full load slip
frequency percentage.
1. MAX GOVERNOR SPEED SETPOINT = SYNC SPEED + (SYNC SPEED *

DROOP) + MAX SLIP rpm.
2. The USE TIE BREAKER OPEN TRIP setting must be set to “Yes” if a
synchronous generator is not sharing the same plant bus. This will cause the
generator to trip when the utility tie breaker opens.
38 Woodward
Chapter 3.
Operator Interface
Introduction
Interface to the control may be performed through the 505’s service panel
(located on the front of the control), remote switch contacts, analog inputs, meter
readouts, relays, or a Modbus communications line to an operator interface
device.
Keypad and Display

The control’s service panel consists of a keypad and LED display (two lines, 24
characters each) located on the front of the control.
Figure 3-1. 505 Keypad and Display
The system operator uses the service panel to communicate with the 505
system. The service panel can be used only occasionally to communicate with
the system, or it can continuously monitor a value for the operator to view.
The Service Panel, shown in Figure 3-1, includes the 30 key keypad and the split
screen display. An overview of the software and information arrangement
scheme for the Service Panel is shown in Figure 3-2.
Woodward 39
Service Panel Modes

The 505 Service Panel operates in several access modes, each of which has a
different purpose. These modes are: SERVICE, CONFIGURE, DEBUG,
OS_FAULTS, and SYS_INFO. See Figure 3-2 , Software Structure Overview.
The SERVICE mode can be used while the turbine is running. The SERVICE
mode permits displaying the value of any SERVICE mode block, and changing
the value of any of those blocks that are tunable. Entry into the SERVICE mode
requires a password.
The CONFIGURE mode is also referred to as the PROGRAM mode and is used
to set up the parameters for a specific application prior to operation of the unit.
The turbine must be shut down (and the password entered correctly) to change
any CONFIGURE values. If the control is not shutdown, pressing the PRGM key
will allow viewing of CONFIGURE, but will not permit any changes to be made.
The DEBUG mode is used to troubleshoot a system during development and is

not intended for general use. It should be used only by properly trained
Woodward personnel or when expressly authorized by Woodward Governor
Company. Entry into the DEBUG mode requires a password.
The OS_FAULTS mode displays any operating system faults or alarms that have
occurred, and permits resetting (clearing) the list of detected alarms. Entry into
the OS_FAULTS mode requires a password.
The SYS_INFO mode is used to display system information, change passwords,

or download a configuration file into the control.
Using the Service Mode

Information that can be displayed by the SERVICE mode and CONFIGURE
mode is all arranged in the same way. There are three tiers or levels: modes,
headers, and blocks. The modes each have a number of headers under them
and each header usually has many blocks under it. The DEBUG mode, the
OS_FAULTS mode, and the SYS_INFO use different arrangements and will be
described later.
Top Level/Root System Block

This is normally the first block to appear on the display after power up, but may
be overwritten by the application program. To get to the Root System block at
any time push the CLEAR key once or sometimes twice depending where the
user is in the programmable service. The block looks like this:
Pressing the scroll _ key takes the system to the first level, the mode level.
40 Woodward
Figure 3-2. Software Structure Overview
Woodward 41
Select Mode Level

This first level (below the Top Level/Root System block) contains the five
different programmable service mode blocks. The five mode blocks are arranged
within the first level as shown in Figure 3-3. Scroll left () or right () to display
each mode.
Figure 3-3. The Select Mode Level
When entering the mode level, the SERVICE mode will always be the
one displayed first in the mode-level message.
Header Level
The second level is the header level. This level contains the programmable
service header blocks as shown in Figure 3-4. Scroll left () or right () to get to
each header. Press CLEAR to get back to the Select Mode Level. Scroll down
() to get to any block under a header.
Figure 3-4. Header Level
42 Woodward
Block Level
The third level, the block level, is shown in Figure 3-5. The programmable service
blocks containing the values to be monitored or changed are found at this level.
Scroll down () or up () to get to a different block. Push CLEAR to get back to
the header level.
Figure 3-5. Block Level
Service Mode
The SERVICE mode can be used while the engine/turbine is running or shut
down. The SERVICE mode permits displaying the value of any SERVICE mode
block, and changing the value of any of those blocks that are tunable. Entry into
the SERVICE mode requires a password.
In the SERVICE mode, the value displayed for a block can be changed by using
either the ADJ _ or ADJ _ keys. The value can be changed if it is a tunable
variable; in this case there will be a * before the value.
Woodward 43
This mode can also be used to make direct numeric entries. However, because
this mode is intended to be used while the turbine is running, the Service Panel
will accept the entry of numeric values for a block only if the proposed change is
very small. The block value proposed for entry must be within 1 percent of the
current displayed value of that block, unless that current displayed value is
between –0.1 and +0.1. If the current displayed value is between –0.1 and +0.1,
the system will accept any entry between –0.1 and +0.1.
To make direct numeric entries, first bring the displayed value to within 1% of the
value to be entered. Press the ENTER key. Press the numerical keys to input the
value and press ENTER again.
If the value entered is less than the value displayed by more than 1% or greater
than the value displayed by more than 1%, an appropriate message will be
displayed indicating the value entered is too large or too small.
When using the SERVICE mode, refer to the Service Mode worksheet in
Appendix B.
Entering the Service Mode

1. At the select mode level, the following message will appear on the display.
(MMMMMMMM = name of mode: SERVICE, CONFIGURE, DEBUG,

OS_FAULTS or SYS_INFO)
2. Press the scroll right () key until the message indicates the SERVICE mode
(unless it already does).
3. Press the ENTER key. The following message will be on the display.
For password information see Appendix C at the back of this manual.

If the password information is not in this manual, see the supervisor
or equipment engineer.
4. Enter the password on the numeric keys, then press the ENTER key. The
display will show a SERVICE mode header. An example is shown below.
44 Woodward
The headers and blocks are assigned their names by the application
programmer; this is only an example.
5. The @ indicates which half of the split screen display that key entry will
affect. Use the SELECT key to select either the top or bottom of the split
screen display. (The Xs indicate another header or block which is being
shown on the bottom half of the split screen display.)
6. Use the scroll right () or scroll left () key to select the desired SERVICE
mode header.
7. Use the scroll up () key or scroll down () key to select the desired
SERVICE mode block. A message similar to the one below will be displayed.
(The * indicates this block contains a tunable variable).
8. Use the ADJ _ or ADJ _ keys to increase or decrease the value of the block
being displayed. If a faster rate of change is desired simply hold the key
down and the rate of change will increase after two seconds and again after
six seconds. If a slower rate of change is desired, repeatedly release the key
after holding one second then press again.
This mode can also be used to make direct numeric entries.

However, because this mode is intended to be used while the engine/
turbine is running, the Service Panel will accept the entry of numeric
values for a block, only if the proposed change is very small. The
block value proposed for entry must be within 1 percent of the
current displayed value of that block, unless that current displayed
value is between –0.1 and +0.1. If the current displayed value is
between –0.1 and +0.1, the system will accept any entry between –0.1
and +0.1.
9. When setting the value of the block has been completed, either go to another
block or exit out of the mode.
 To scroll to another block under the same header, use the scroll down
() or scroll up () keys.
 To go back to the same header, press the CLEAR key.
 From header level, to go to a block under a different header, scroll to the
new header by using the scroll right () or scroll left () key, then scroll
to the new block by using the scroll down () or scroll up () key.
Woodward 45
 To exit the mode, use the CLEAR key to get back to the header. Then
press CLEAR again to get back to the Top Level/Root block. The values
of all variables that were changed will then be stored in EEPROM.
If the display will not be used for a while, it is a good idea to return to
the Top Level/Root display and permit the system to blank the screen
to save power and prolong the life of the display.
Exiting Modes
When leaving the SERVICE mode or the CONFIGURE mode and returning to
the Root level (by pressing CLEAR), the values of all variables that were
changed (while in SERVICE mode or CONFIGURE mode) are stored in
EEPROM.
If variables are tuned or changed but not stored in EEPROM by

pressing CLEAR to return to the root level, then those changes will
be lost if power is removed from the control or if the control is reset.
When the display is showing the Top Level/Root block (shown

below) the display will turn off if approximately 5 minutes elapse
without a key being pressed. If the unit is powered up but the display
is blank, press the CLEAR, scroll down (), PRGM, or any hot key to
turn the display on. This will turn the display block on.
Configure Mode
The CONFIGURE mode is used to set a system up for a specific application,
before actual operation of that system starts. The engine/turbine must be shut
down when using the CONFIGURE mode, and numeric entries of any value
(within the allowed range for that block) may be made.
Entry into the CONFIGURE mode requires a password. If the control is not
shutdown, pressing the PRGM key will allow viewing of CONFIGURE, but will not
permit changing the value of a block.
The structure of the CONFIGURE mode is identical to that of the SERVICE mode
(see Figure 3-5).
Entry into the CONFIGURE mode will cause an automatic shutdown

of all control outputs. The control will prompt “SHUTDOWN
CONTROL? Y/N”. Entering YES will cause all milliamps outputs will
go to zero and all relays will de-energize. Entering NO will abort the
shutdown.
When using the CONFIGURE mode, refer to CONFIGURE/PROGRAM MODE

worksheet in Appendix A of Volume 1.
46 Woodward
Since configuring a control or viewing how a control is configured is such a
commonly used mode the PRGM (program) key has been designed to take the
user directly to step 4 below from anywhere in programmable service except
DEBUG, OS_FAULTS, or SYS_INFO. The CONFIGURE mode can also be
reached like the other modes by following the steps below.
1. At the mode level the following message will appear on the display.

2. Press the scroll right () or scroll left () key until the message indicates the
CONFIGURE mode.
For password information see Appendix C at the back of this manual. If the
password information is not in this manual, see the supervisor or equipment
engineer.
system will display the following message.
If the NO key is pressed, the system will return to the mode level. If the YES
key is pressed, the system will enter the CONFIGURE mode; all control
outputs will shut off. The display will show a CONFIGURE mode header. An
example is shown below.
Woodward 47
The headers and blocks are assigned their names by the application
programmer; this is only an example. The CONFIGURE mode does
not use the split-screen as does SERVICE, and DEBUG mode. In the
CONFIGURE mode the prompt is displayed on the top line and the
variable to be configured is displayed on the second line.
5. Use the scroll right () or scroll left () key to select the desired
CONFIGURE mode header.
6. Use the scroll down () key or scroll up () key to select the desired
CONFIGURE mode block.
7. Enter the desired value on the numeric keys and press the ENTER key.
8. When setting the value of the block has been completed, either go to another
block or exit out of the mode.
 To scroll to another block under the same header, use the scroll down
() or scroll up () keys.
 To go back to the header, press the CLEAR key.
 From header level, to go to a block under a different header, scroll to the
new header by using the scroll right () or scroll left () key, then scroll
to the new block by using the scroll down () or scroll up () key.
 To exit the mode, use the CLEAR key to get back to the header. Then
press CLEAR again to get back to the Top Level/Root block. The values
of all variables that were changed will then be stored in EEPROM.
If the display is not going to be used for a while, it is a good idea to

return to the Top Level/Root display and permit the system to blank
the display to save power and prolong its life.
DEBUG Mode
The DEBUG mode is used to troubleshoot a system during development and is
not intended for general use. It should be used only by properly trained
Woodward personnel or when expressly authorized by Woodward Governor
Company. Entry into the DEBUG mode requires a password.

The DEBUG mode is intended for use only by authorized and trained
personnel to maintain and troubleshoot the system. Use of the
DEBUG mode by untrained or unauthorized personnel could result in
inadvertently changing critical system values; changing critical
system values could cause equipment damage or personnel injury or
death. Do not permit unauthorized personnel to use the DEBUG
mode.
48 Woodward
The information in the DEBUG mode is arranged as shown in Figure 3-6. Scroll
down to go from a MOE category to a MOE block; scroll up or down to go to
another MOE block. Scroll left or right to go from a MOE block to a field of that
MOE block, or from one field to another field of the same MOE block.
All tunable values that are used in SERVICE or CONFIGURE modes will not
show up in DEBUG mode. Any value that is tunable but is not used in SERVICE
mode or CONFIGURE mode will appear as a tunable, and can be tuned, in
DEBUG mode.
When exiting the DEBUG mode, all tunable values that have been changed will
be stored in EEPROM memory.
Figure 3-6. Debug Information Arrangement
Pressing the ‘.’ key while in the DEBUG mode will switch the display to the
SERVICE mode; pressing the ‘.’ key again will switch the display back to the
DEBUG mode.
OS_FAULTS Mode
The OS_FAULTS mode displays all operating system faults or alarms that have
occurred since the last Faults Reset operation. It also permits resetting (clearing)
the alarm list.
The OS_FAULTS mode headers are:

 Faults Detected–Displays faults detected since the last power down.
 Alarms Detected–Displays alarms detected since the last time the alarm list
was cleared.
 Clear Alarms Detected–Clears the alarm list.
The information in the OS_FAULTS mode is arranged as shown in Figure 3-7.
Woodward 49
Figure 3-7. OS_FAULTS Mode Information Arrangement
1. To Enter the OS_FAULTS mode:
The following message will be displayed when the system is at the select mode
level.

2. Press the scroll left () or scroll right () key until the message indicates the
OS_FAULTS mode.
50 Woodward

4. Enter the password on the numeric keys and press the ENTER key. The
header shown below will be displayed.
5. Use the scroll left () or scroll right () key to select the desired
OS_FAULTS mode header. The header will display as shown below.
or
or
Faults Detected Header

1. While the Faults Detected header is displaying, use the scroll down () key
or scroll up () key to display the faults detected under it. A message
describing the most recent fault detected will display under the header
message, as shown below.
Woodward 51
2. Press scroll down () to see the next fault detected. Each time scroll down
() or scroll up () is pressed, another fault detected under this header will
display. An example is shown below.
If no faults have been detected, the following message will display for one
second.
After one second, only the header message will display.
3. From a displaying fault message, to go back to the Faults Detected header,

press the CLEAR key.
4. To go from the Faults Detected header to the Top Level/Root display, press
the CLEAR key again.

The meanings of the fault messages generated by the 505 System are shown in
Chapter 7.
Alarms Detected Header

1. While the Alarms Detected header is displaying, use the scroll down () key
to display the alarms detected under it. A message describing the most
recent alarm detected will display under the header message, as shown
below.
52 Woodward
2. Press scroll down () to see the next alarm detected. Each time scroll down
() or scroll up () is pressed, another detected alarm will display. An
example is shown below.
If no faults have been detected, the following message will display for one
second.
After one second, only the header message will display.
3. From a displaying alarm message, to go back to the Alarms Detected

header, press the CLEAR key.
4. To go from the Alarms Detected header to the Top Level/Root display, press
the CLEAR key.

The meanings of the alarm messages generated by the 505 System are shown
in Chapter 7.
Clear Alarms Detected Header

1. To clear the alarm list, while the Clear Alarms Detected header is displaying,
press the scroll down () key. The following message will be displayed.
2. To clear the alarm list, press Y (for Yes). The alarm list will be cleared. The
following message will appear for one second.
Woodward 53
If any other key is pressed, the display will return to the header level and
only the following message will appear.
3. To go from the Clear Alarms Detected header to the Top Level/Root display,

SYS_INFO Mode
The SYS_INFO mode displays information about the system. It also permits
changing passwords for the different modes and loading a configuration file from
a personal computer.
The SYS_INFO mode headers are:

 System Information—Displays software version and information about the
application program.
 Change Password—Allows user to change all the system passwords for the
various modes.
 Download Configuration—Allows the user to download a configuration file
from a personal computer.
The information in the SYS_INFO mode is arranged as shown in Figure 3-8.
54 Woodward
Figure 3-8. SYS_INFO Mode Information Arrangement
To enter the SYS_INFO mode:
1. The following message will be displayed when the system is at the select
mode level.

2. Press the scroll left () or scroll right () key until the message indicates the
SYS_INFO mode.
Woodward 55
3. Press the ENTER key. The header shown below will be displayed.
4. Use the scroll left () or scroll right () key to select the desired SYS_INFO
mode header. The header will display as shown below.
or
or
System Information Header

1. While the System Information header is displaying, use the scroll down ()
key to display the system information under it. A message will display as
shown below.
This is information about the version being used.
56 Woodward
2. Continue to Press scroll down () to see more system information. The
messages will appear as shown below.
3. From a system information message, to go back to the System Information

4. To go from the System Information header to the Top Level/Root display,


Change Password Header
If any password is changed and that new password is forgotten or

lost, the user will be locked out of that mode or function forever. It is
suggested that changed passwords be documented and kept in a
secure place so that authorized personnel have access to them.
1. While the Change Password header is displaying, use the scroll down ()
key or scroll up () key to enter the Change Password blocks. The following
message will be displayed:

OS_FAULTS, or EEPROM_DNLD)
Woodward 57
2. Press scroll left () or scroll right () to see the next passworded mode or
function. Push ENTER when the desired mode or function is displayed.
Carefully follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
3. From a change password message, to go back to the Change Password

4. To go from the Change Password header to the Top Level/Root display,

press the CLEAR key again.

Download Configuration Header

The Download function is to be used only by Woodward certified
technicians.
1. While the Download Configuration header is displaying, use the scroll down
() key to enter this function. A message will display as shown below.
For password information, see Appendix D at the back of this

manual. If the password information is not in this manual, see the
supervisor or equipment engineer.
system will display the following message.
Entry into the SYS_INFO/Download configuration mode while the

engine/turbine is running will cause an automatic shutdown of the
engine/turbine with resulting process stoppage. The control will
prompt “SHUTDOWN CONTROL? Y/N”. Entering YES will shutdown
the engine/turbine. All milliamps outputs will go to zero and all relays
will de-energize. Entering NO will abort the shutdown.
58 Woodward
3. If the NO key is pressed the system will return to the Download Configuration
header. If the YES key is pressed, the system will display the following
message.
4. Push CLEAR to abort the configuration download, else download the

configuration as described in Chapter 6 under Transferring Configuration
Files. Then push the CLEAR key to begin running the control with the new
configuration parameters.
Woodward 59
Chapter 4.
Service Mode Procedures
Overview
The service mode of the 505 control has the same easy to follow format as the
program mode. The service mode can be used to customize the control to be
more application specific. The parameters that are tuned in the service mode
may affect system performance, caution is advised.
The service mode of the 505 can be accessed at any time the control is powered
up. The turbine doesn’t need to be shutdown. This will allow tuning while the
turbine is on-line. Figure 4-1 illustrates the steps to enter the service mode.
The service mode is password protected. The password is required to protect

against both intentional and inadvertent program changes. The password can be
changed if desired, refer to Appendix C of this manual for information on
changing passwords.
Figure 4-1. Service Mode Entry
60 Woodward
The 505 Service Mode

Using Service Menus
Once the Service Mode has been entered with the password, any of service
value that has a * before it can be adjusted. A work sheet is provided at the end
of this manual, to document any changes for future reference. Figure 4-2
illustrates the 505 service menus and the questions/options available under each
block.
The arrow keys (STEP LEFT, STEP RIGHT) allow you to move right or left
across the tops of the function the Service mode columns. The STEP UP and
STEP DOWN keys allow you to move up or down the columns.
Not all of the service headers listed below will appear at all times. Only the
headers that are necessary for the application will appear. Some of the headers
will not appear unless the turbine is shutdown.
Figure 4-2a. Service Mode Blocks
Woodward 61
Figure 4-2b. Service Mode Blocks
62 Woodward
Figure 4-2c. Service Mode Blocks
Woodward 63
Figure 4-2d. Service Mode Blocks
64 Woodward
Figure 4-2e. Service Mode Blocks
Woodward 65
Figure 4-2f. Service Mode Blocks
66 Woodward
Figure 4-2g. Service Mode Blocks
Woodward 67
Figure 4-2h. Service Mode Blocks
68 Woodward
Figure 4-2i. Service Mode Blocks
Woodward 69
Service Mode Blocks

Figure 4-2 shows the 29 service columns/blocks. The actual blocks that appear
will vary with the program configuration. To enter the Service Mode, use the
procedure described above. To use the Service mode, simply step through the
blocks as described above and change the control features for your application.
The first twelve service columns will appear for every installation. The remaining
seventeen columns contain optional features which can be selected if desired.
The 29 columns and their basic functions are described in detail below.
Service Blocks
Speed Control Settings—monitor or change the program or default settings of;
rate to min; setpoint slow rate; delay for the fast rate; setpoint fast rate; speed
setpoint entered rate; underspeed setting; on-line and off-line derivative;
Alarm Settings—monitor or change the program or default settings of; is trip an

alarm indication; blink alarm relay; jump to alarm screen;
Key Options—allow or disable controlled stop and dynamics adjustments;
MPU Override Settings—monitor or change program or default settings of; MPU

override timer; MPU override time; MPU (s) override timer is on;
Valve Limiter Settings—monitor or change program or default settings of; valve

limiter rate; entered rate; limiter max limit;
Monitor Contact Inputs—monitor the status of the contact inputs;
Monitor Relay Outputs—monitor the status of the relay outputs;
Force Relay Outputs—forcing of the relays, between de-energized and energized

state, when the turbine is shutdown;
Monitor Speed Inputs—monitors the speed input (s)
Monitor Analog Inputs—monitor the status of the analog inputs;
Analog Input Adjustments—offset and gain adjustments to the analog inputs;
Monitor Analog Outputs—monitor the status of the analog outputs;
Valve Linearization—provides actuator 1 and actuator 2 output linearization

adjustments;
Port Configurations—change or view the default settings of baud rate, stop bits,
parity, driver, communications mode, device number, time out delay for port.
Optional Service Blocks

Speed Control Droop Settings—change the program or default settings of; droop
percentage; use KW droop; select gen load units;
Auto Start Sequence Settings—monitor the status of; low idle delay; rate to hi
idle; hi idle delay; rate to rated; hrs since trip;
70 Woodward
Idle/Rated Ramp Settings—change the program or default settings of; idle rated
rate; use ramp to idle; idle priority;
Sync/Load Share Settings—change the program or default settings of; input bias
gain; input bias deadband; lag-tau value;
Remote Speed Settings—change the program or default settings of; not matched
rate; speed setpt max rate; min speed setpt; max speed setpt; rmt deadband
value; lag-tau value;
Cascade Control Settings—change the program or default settings of; slow rate;
fast rate delay; setpt fast rate; setpt entered rate; droop %; rated casc setpt; casc
not matched rate; max speed rate; max speed setting; min speed setting; casc
deadband; casc derivative ratio;
Remote Cascade Settings—change the program or default settings of; rmt not
matched rate; rmt casc max rate; min rmt casc setting; max rmt casc setting; rmt
deadband value; lag-tau value;
Auxiliary Control Settings—change the program or default settings of; slow rate;
fast rate delay; setpt fast rate; setpt entered rate; droop % ; rated aux setpt; aux
derivative ratio; aux threshold;
Remote Auxiliary Settings—change the program or default settings of; rmt not
matched rate; rmt aux max rate; min rmt aux setting; max rmt aux setting; rmt
deadband value; lag-tau value;
Breaker Logic Values—change the program or default settings of; freq cntrl
armed; sync window rpm; sync window rate; tiebrkr open ramp; tie open rate;
gen open setback; gen open setpt; use min load; min load bias;
Local/Remote Functions—monitor or change the program or default settings of;

remote ennobled; enable contacts; contacts enabled; enable Modbus 1; Modbus
1 enabled; enable Modbus 2; Modbus 2 enabled;
Driver 2 Readout—monitor the current output of actuator 2 when configured for

readout; offset and gain adjustments of actuator 2 when configured for Readout;
Port 1 Settings—monitor or change the program or default settings of; port 1 link
error; exception error, error code; use Modbus 1 trip; use 2-step trip; enabled
when local; trip always enabled;
Port 2 Settings—monitor or change the program or default settings of; port 2 link
error; exception error, error code; use Modbus 2 trip; use 2-step trip; enabled
when local; trip always enabled;
Communication Analog Scaling Settings—change the default settings of;

cascade scale factor; auxiliary scale factor; kW scale factor; fsp scale factor; ld
shr scale factor;
Each of the service blocks are described in detail below. Figure 4-2 can be
referred to for a graphical service mode block reference. Pressing the down
arrow key will step through the column and back to the top of the column, use the
left or right arrow keys to select the next column to change/check.
Woodward 71
All service program questions will display on the left side of the line the @ symbol
is on, all entries made will be displayed on the right side of the same line. At the
beginning of each column the control will display the header, pushing the down
arrow will access the column. The line the @ symbol is on will be affected, the
other line of the display will not change, use the SELECT button to move the @
symbol to the other line of the display so another parameter can be displayed.
This gives the operator the flexibility in the service mode to display or tune two
different values by using the SELECT button .
The service blocks contain information detailing each question and/or 505
program service option. Each question/option shows the default (dflt) value and
the adjustable range of that parameter (shown in parentheses). In addition, any
additional constraints on the configuration are shown in italics following the
description. There is a service mode worksheet in the appendix of this manual
that should be completed and filled-in and used as a guide the site specific
application. This worksheet can also be used for future reference to document
your application program.
Service Mode Worksheet Parameters

Speed Control Settings
When this header appears in the display, press the down arrow key to view or
change this block or press the left or right arrow key to select another block to
change.
RATE TO MIN ( RPM/SEC ) dflt= xxx (0.01, 2000)

Adjusts the rate the setpoint moves from zero to the minimum controlling
speed when the unit is started. The minimum controlling speed will be either
‘idle’ if idle/rated is used or ‘low idle’ if the auto start sequence is used. If
neither of these startup features is used, the min speed will be the minimum
governor speed setpoint. This value is set in the program mode.
SETPOINT SLOW RATE (RPM/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 100)
Normal speed setpoint rate of change. This value is set in the program
mode.
FAST RATE DELAY (SEC) dflt= 3.0 (0, 100)
Delay, in seconds, before the ‘Setpt Fast Rate’ is selected.
SETPT FAST RATE (RPM/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 500)
This rate is defaulted to three times (3x) the ‘Setpoint Slow Rate’. This value
can be changed to a new value, however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt
must be set to YES to retain the change. If not, the value will return to the
default on the next initialization.
SETPT ENTERED RATE (RPM/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 100)
This is the rate that the Speed setpoint will move when setpoint is entered
from the front panel of the control or from the communication links. This rate
is defaulted to the Speed setpoint slow rate. This value can be changed to a
new value, however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to
retain the change. If not, the value will return to the default on the next
initialization.
UNDERSPEED SETTING (RPM) dflt= xxx (0.0, 20000)
Only used if an underspeed relay is programmed. Speed setting for the
underspeed indication. This rate is defaulted to 100 rpm below the ‘Minimum
Governor Speed Setpt’. This value can be changed to a new value,
however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to retain the
change. If not, the value will return to the default on the next initialization.
72 Woodward
ON-LINE DERIVATIVE RATIO dflt= xxx (0.01, 100)
Speed PID Derivative Ratio when in on-line mode. When this value is
between 0.01 and 1.0, the derivative term is considered to be ‘input
dominant’ and the derivative is equal to (Deriv Ratio)/(Integral Gain). When
this value is between 1.0 and 100, the derivative term is considered to be
‘feedback dominant’ and the derivative is equal to 1.0/[(Deriv Ratio)*(Integral
Gain)]. This value is set in the program mode.
OFF-LINE DERIVATIVE RATIO dflt= xxx (0.01, 100)
Speed PID Derivative Ratio when in off-line mode. When this value is
between 0.01 and 1.0, the derivative term is considered to be ‘input
dominant’ and the derivative is equal to (Deriv Ratio)/(Integral Gain). When
this value is between 1.0 and 100, the derivative term is considered to be
‘feedback dominant’ and the derivative is equal to 1.0/[(Deriv Ratio)*(Integral
Gain)]. This value is set in the program mode.
HOLD SPEED CHANGES ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to permanently Hold the changes made to the Setpoint Fast
Rate, the Entered Rate, and Underspeed settings. To permanently save
these changes into the 505, set to YES and select the ‘CLEAR’ key twice.
Alarm Settings
change.
IS TRIP AN ALARM ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)

When set to YES, any trip condition will also be annunciated as an alarm.
When NO, a trip condition will not necessarily mean an alarm will be issued.
BLINK ALARMS ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES if want an indication if another alarm occurs when an alarm is
already present. When set to YES, the alarm relay blinks when an alarm
condition occurs until a reset command is issued. If the alarm still exists, the
relay will stay energized, but will stop blinking until another alarm occurs.
When NO, the alarm relay indicates an alarm continuously whenever an
alarm condition exists.
JUMP TO ALARMS SCREEN ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
When set to YES, the alarm (F1) menu automatically appears on the front
panel display identifying the cause of the alarm at the time of the alarm.
When NO, the alarm only shows up when the F1 key is pressed. Also
disables the controlling parameter message from automatically appearing
when all alarms are cleared.
Key Options
change.
USE ‘STOP’ COMMAND ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)

When set to YES, allows the Controlled Stop command to be used. When
NO, the Controlled Stop feature is disabled from front panel, Modbus, and
contact commands.
USE DYNAMICS KEY ADJUSTMENTS ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
When set to YES, allows the dynamics of all PIDs to be adjusted. When NO,
the DYN (dynamics) key and PID proportional and integral gain adjustments
are no longer available.
Woodward 73
Speed Control Droop Settings (only if generator unit)

change.
DROOP (%) dflt= xxx (0.0, 10)

Speed/load control droop setting. This value is set in the program mode.
USE KW DROOP ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
When set to NO, the unit is forced to use speed demand/actuator position
droop. This setting is only used and relevant if KW Droop was programmed.
GEN LOAD UNITS = MW ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
When set to NO the generator load units are ‘KW’. When YES the units are
set to ‘MW’ under the KW/9 key of the 505 front panel. This allows the 505
to display load units in terms of MW as opposed to KW.
MPU Override
change.
USE MPU OVERRIDE TIMER ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)

When set to YES, the MPU override will go OFF when the MPU Override
Time expires after a start is initiated. This provides a maximum time for
speed to be sensed on startup before a loss of speed is detected.
MPU OVERRIDE TIME (SEC) dflt= 600.0 (00, 600)
Sets the maximum time after a start is initiated for speed to be sensed
above the failure level. Only valid if ‘Use MPU Override Timer?’ is YES.
MPU #1 OVERRIDE ON STATUS (status indication only)
Indicates when the speed probe failure override is on.
MPU #2 OVERRIDE ON STATUS (status indication only)
Indicates when the speed probe failure override is on. This status message
only appears if the application is using two speed probes.
Auto Start Sequence (only displayed if configured)

change.
The following information is provided to display the information useful to the auto
start sequence. It allows the operator to check all the times and rates that the
505 is using for the present start sequence.
LOW IDLE DELAY (MIN) (status indication only)

Indicates the hold time any Low Idle, in minutes.
RATE TO HI IDLE (RPM/SEC) (status indication only)
Indicates the acceleration rate, in rpm/sec; used by the control from Low Idle
to High Idle.
HI IDLE DELAY (MIN) (status indication only)
Indicates the hold time at High Idle, in minutes.
RATE TO RATED (RPM/SEC) (status indication only)
Indicates the acceleration rate, in rpm/sec; used by the control from High
Idle to Rated.
74 Woodward
HOURS SINCE TRIP (HRS) (status indication only)
Indicates the number of hours the unit was tripped, as determined by the
control.
Idle/Rated Ramp (only displayed if configured)

change.
IDLE/RATED RATE (RPM/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 2000)

Rate at which the speed setpoint will ramp from idle to rated speed. This
value is set in the program mode.
USE RAMP TO IDLE FUNCTION? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Set to YES if want to return to idle speed with this function. If set to NO, the
Idle/ Rated function acts as a ‘Ramp to Rated’ function and will not return to
idle. When set to NO, closing the Idle/Rated contact accelerates the speed
setpoint towards Rated and opening the contact stops the acceleration.
IDLE PRIORITY ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If YES, the setpoint will move to Idle whenever Idle is selected. If NO, the
setpoint will move to Idle only if Remote Speed Setpoint is not enabled,
Cascade control is not enabled, Auxiliary ‘controller’ is not enabled, and the
Generator Breaker is open.
Sync/Load Share Settings (Only Displayed If Configured)

change.
INPUT BIAS GAIN (%) dflt= xxx (0.0, 100)

Affects the RPM bias the Sync/Load Sharing input has on the speed setting.
This setting is defaulted to the Droop (%) value or 3%, whichever is higher.
This value can be changed to a new value, however, the HOLD CHANGES
prompt must be set to YES to retain the change. If not, the value will return
to the default on the next initialization.
INPUT BIAS DEADBAND VALUE dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 100)
Load Share deadband in RPM.
LAG-TAU VALUE dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 10)
Load Sharing input lag setting.
HOLD BIAS CHANGES ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to permanently Hold the changes made to the Load Share Gain
(%). To permanently save these changes into the 505, set to YES and
select the ‘CLEAR’ key twice.
Remote Speed Settings (only displayed if configured)

change.
Woodward 75
NOT MATCHED RATE dflt= xxx (0.01, 200)
Rate the setpoint moves when remote is enabled and the remote input
doesn’t match the actual setpoint. This rate is defaulted to the setpoint slow
rate. This value can be changed to a new value, however, the HOLD
CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to retain the change. If not, the value
will return to the default on the next initialization.
SPEED SETPT MAX RATE dflt= xxx (0.01, 500)
Rate the setpoint moves once the remote input and actual setpoint are
matched. This is a maximum rate. Normally the setpoint will follow the
remote input setting. This value is set in the program mode.
MINIMUM SPEED SETTING dflt= xxx (0.0, 20000)
Minimum setting allowed by the remote input. This setting is defaulted to the
Speed Setpoint Minimum Governor Speed Value. This value can be
changed to a new value, however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be
set to YES to retain the change. If not, the value will return to the default on
the next initialization.
(Must be between the ‘Minimum Governor Speed’ and the ‘Maximum
Governor Speed’ settings)
MAXIMUM SPEED SETTING dflt= xxx (0.0, 20000)
Maximum setting allowed by the remote input. This setting is defaulted to
the Speed Setpoint Maximum Governor Speed Value. This value can be
Governor Speed’’ settings and greater than Minimum Speed Setting)
REMOTE DEADBAND VALUE dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 100)
Remote speed setting deadband in RPM.
REMOTE LAG-TAU VALUE dflt= 0.0 (0.0, 10)
Remote Setpoint input lag setting.
USE MIN LOAD ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
When set to YES, the speed setpoint cannot be lowered/decreased by the
remote speed setpoint input below the rated/synchronous speed setpoint
plus the ‘Min Load Bias’ setting. This is used to prevent a reverse power
condition as well as allowing the plant to utilize a minimum load setting for
the generator. When NO, the remote speed setpoint can move the speed
setpoint down to the higher of the minimum governor setting or the RSS 4
mA value.
HOLD RMT CHANGES ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to permanently Hold the changes made to the Remote Not
Matched Rate and the Maximum and Minimum Speed Settings. To
permanently save these changes into the 505, set to YES and select the
‘CLEAR’ key twice.
Cascade Control (only displayed if configured)

change.
SLOW RATE (UNITS/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 1000)

Normal setpoint rate of change. This value is set in the program mode.
FAST RATE DELAY (SEC) dflt= 3.0 (0.0, 100)
Delay, in seconds, before the ‘Setpt Fast Rate’ is selected.
76 Woodward
SETPT FAST RATE (UNITS/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 5000)
This rate is defaulted to three times (3x) the setpoint ‘Slow Rate’. This value
SETPT ENTERED RATE (UNITS/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 1000)
This is the rate that the Cascade setpoint will move when setpoint is entered
from the front panel of the control or from the communication links. This rate
is defaulted to the Cascade setpoint slow rate. This value can be changed to
a new value, however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to
initialization.
Cascade control droop setting. This value is set in the program mode.
RATED CASC SETPT dflt= xxx (-20000, 20000)
This setting is only used to determine the cascade control droop. This
setpoint is defaulted to the cascade maximum setpoint limit. This value can
be changed to a new value, however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be
(Must be between the ‘Minimum Cascade Setpoint’ and the ‘Maximum
Cascade Setpoint’ settings)
CASC NOT MATCHED RATE dflt= xxx (0.01, 1000)
This rate is defaulted to the ‘Speed Setpoint Slow Rate’. This value can be
MAX SPEED SETPT RATE dflt= xxx (0.1, 100)
The maximum rate at which the cascade control can vary the speed
setpoint. This value is set in the program mode.
MAXIMUM SPEED SETTING dflt= xxx (0.0, 20000)
This setting is defaulted to the maximum speed setpoint value set in the
program mode. This value can be changed to a new value, however, the
HOLD CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to retain the change. If not,
the value will return to the default on the next initialization.
MINIMUM SPEED SETTING dflt= xxx (0.0, 20000)
This setting is defaulted to the minimum speed setpoint value set in the
program mode. This value can be changed to a new value, however, the
HOLD CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to retain the change. If not,
the value will return to the default on the next initialization.
CASC PID INT DEADBAND dflt= 0.1 (0.0, 50)
Cascade PID controller integrator deadband setting in percent.
CASC PID DERIV RATIO dflt= xxx (0.01, 100)
Cascade PID controller derivative ratio setting. When this value is between
0.01 and 1.0, the derivative term is considered to be ‘input dominant’ and
the derivative is equal to (Deriv Ratio)/(Integral Gain). When this value is
between 1.0 and 100, the derivative term is considered to be ‘feedback
dominant’ and the derivative is equal to 1.0/[(Deriv Ratio)*(Integral Gain)].
This value is set in the program mode.
RAISE /LOWER CASCADE SETPOINT ONLY ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
When set to NO, the cascade raise/lower commands will adjust the speed
setpoint when cascade control is disabled and adjust the cascade setpoint
when cascade control is enabled. When YES, the cascade raise/lower
commands adjust the cascade setpoint only.
Woodward 77
When set to YES, the speed setpoint cannot be lowered/decreased by the
cascade control PID below the rated/synchronous speed setpoint plus the
‘min load bias’ setting. This is used to prevent a reverse power condition as
well as allowing the plant to utilize a minimum load setting for the generator.
When NO, the cascade control PID can move the speed setpoint down to
the cascade minimum speed setting value.
HOLD CASC CHANGES ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to permanently Hold the changes made to the Fast Rate,
Entered Rate, Rated Setpt, Casc Not Matched Rate, Maximum Speed
Setting and Minimum Speed Setting. To permanently save these changes
into the 505, set to YES and select the ‘CLEAR’ key twice.
Remote Casc Settings (only displayed if configured)

change.
REMOTE NOT MATCHED RATE dflt= xxx (0.01, 1000)

doesn’t match the actual setpoint. This rate is defaulted to the ‘Cascade
Setpoint Slow Rate’. This value can be changed to a new value, however,
the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to retain the change. If
not, the value will return to the default on the next initialization.
RMT CASC SETPT MAX RATE dflt= xxx (0.01, 1000)
remote cascade input setting. This rate is set in the Program Mode.
MINIMUM CASC SETTING dflt= xxx (-20000, 20000)
Minimum Cascade Setpoint Value. This value can be changed to a new
value, however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to retain
the change. If not, the value will return to the default on the next
initialization.
MAXIMUM CASC SETTING dflt= xxx (-20000, 20000)
the Maximum Cascade Setpoint Value. This value can be changed to a new
initialization.
Remote cascade setting input deadband in engineering units.
HOLD RMT CASC CHANGES ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Matched Rate and the Maximum and Minimum Casc Settings. To
78 Woodward
Aux Control Settings (only displayed if configured)

change.
SLOW RATE (UNITS/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 1000)

Normal setpoint rate of change. This value is set in the program mode.
FAST RATE DELAY (SEC) dflt= 3.0 (0.0, 100)
Delay, in seconds, before the ‘Fast Rate’ of change is selected.
FAST RATE (UNITS/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 5000)
This rate is defaulted to three times (3x) the ‘Setpoint Slow Rate’. This value
SETPT ENTERED RATE (UNITS/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.01, 1000)
This is the rate that the Aux setpoint will move when setpoint is entered from
the front panel of the control or from the communication links. This rate is
defaulted to the Aux setpoint slow rate. This value can be changed to a new
initialization.
Aux control droop setting. This value is set in the program mode.
RATED AUX SETPT dflt= xxx (-20000, 20000)
Only used to determine the auxiliary control Droop. This setpoint is
defaulted to the aux maximum setpoint limit. This value can be changed to a
new value, however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to
initialization.
(Must be between the ‘Minimum Auxiliary Setpoint’ and the ‘Maximum
Auxiliary Setpoint’ settings)
AUX PID DERIV RATIO dflt= 100 (0.01, 100)
Aux PID controller derivative ratio setting. When this value is between 0.01
and 1.0, the derivative term is considered to be ‘input dominant’ and the
derivative is equal to (Deriv Ratio)/(Integral Gain). When this value is
between 1.0 and 100, the derivative term is considered to be ‘feedback
dominant’ and the derivative is equal to 1.0/ [(Deriv Ratio)*(Integral Gain)].
This value is set in the program mode.
AUX PID THRESHOLD (LIMITER) dflt= 100 (0.0, 110)
Aux PID threshold setting when aux is used as a limiter.
AUX PID THRESHOLD (CONTROLLER) dflt= 10 (0.0, 110)
Aux PID threshold setting when aux is used as a controller.
AUX PID MIN OUTPUT dflt= 0.00 (0.0, 50)
Auxiliary PID min output setting. The auxiliary PID can not output a lower
value to the LSS. This can be used to stop the aux PID from taking the LSS
low enough to take the unit off-line or below min gov.
HOLD AUX CHANGES ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to permanently Hold the changes made to the Setpoint Fast
Rate, Entered Rate, and Rated Aux Setpoint. To permanently save these
changes into the 505, set to YES and select the ‘CLEAR’ key twice.
Woodward 79
Remote Aux Settings (only displayed if configured)

change.
REMOTE NOT MATCHED RATE dflt= xxx (0.01, 1000)

doesn’t match the actual setpoint. This rate is defaulted to the ‘Aux Setpoint
Slow Rate’. This value can be changed to a new value, however, the HOLD
CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to retain the change. If not, the value
will return to the default on the next initialization.
RMT AUX SETPT MAX RATE dflt= xxx (0.01, 1000)
remote input setting. This value is set in the program mode.
MINIMUM AUX SETTING dflt= xxx (-20000, 20000)
Aux Setpoint Minimum Value. This value can be changed to a new value,
however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be set to YES to retain the
change. If not, the value will return to the default on the next initialization.
MAXIMUM AUX SETTING dflt= xxx (-20000, 20000)
the Aux Setpoint Maximum Value. This value can be changed to a new
initialization.
Remote aux setting input deadband in engineering units.
HOLD RMT AUX CHANGES ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Matched Rate and the Maximum and Minimum Aux Settings. To
Breaker Logic (only displayed if a generator)

change.
FREQ CONTROL ARMED (status indication only)

SYNC WINDOW (RPM) dflt= 10.0 (0.0, 200)
A setpoint window, in rpm, that the setpoint moves at a slower rated to
accommodate synchronizing to the bus. This rate is only active while within
this window and the generator breaker is open.
SYNC WINDOW RATE (RPM/SEC) dflt= 2.0 (0.1, 100)
The rate the speed setpoint moves at when within the ‘Sync Window’ and
the generator beaker is open. This is normally slower than the slow rate to
accommodate synchronizing to the bus.
80 Woodward
TIEBRKR OPEN SYNC RAMP ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
If NO, the speed setpoint is instantly set to the last utility bus speed setting
and holds. When set to YES, the speed setpoint is instantly set to the last
utility bus speed setting and moves to the synchronous (rated) speed
setpoint after the utility tie breaker opens and the generator breaker is still
closed.
TIEBRKR OPEN RATE (RPM/SEC) dflt= 1.0 (0.1, 20000)
Rate the setpoint moves to rated speed after the utility tie breaker opens
(only used if ‘Tiebrkr Open Sync Ramp’ is YES).
GEN BRKR OPEN SETBACK ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
When set to YES, the speed setpoint is instantly set to the ‘Gen Breaker
Open Setpt’ when the generator breaker opens.
GEN BRKR OPEN SETPT (RPM) dflt= xxx (0.0, 20000)
This setpoint is defaulted to 50 rpm below the synchronous (rated) speed
setpoint (only used if ‘Gen Breaker Open Setback’ is YES). This value can
be changed to a new value, however, the HOLD CHANGES prompt must be
(Must be between the ‘Minimum Governor’ and ‘Rated Speed Setpt’
settings)
When set to YES, the speed setpoint automatically increases to the
rated/synchronous speed setpoint plus the ‘Min Load Bias’ setting when the
generator breaker is closed and the unit is on-line (the utility tie breaker is
closed). When NO, no automatic setpoint action occurs.
MIN LOAD BIAS (RPM) dflt= xxx (0.0, 500)
This value is the rpm bias above rated speed and the default is calculated
as 3% of full load. This is the value the speed setpoint will increase to upon
the generator breaker closure (when the utility tie is closed).
ZERO LOAD VALUE (%) dflt= xxx (0.0, 100)
This value is automatically sampled and held at the actuator/load demand
value when the generator breaker is closed. When the steam conditions are
not at rated conditions when the breaker is closed, this value can be
adjusted to a more reasonable value (2–10%). Every time the generator
breaker closes, this value is re-sampled.
HOLD BREAKER CHANGES ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to permanently Hold the changes made to the Gen Breaker
Open Setpoint and Min Load Bias. To permanently save these changes into
the 505, set to YES and select the ‘CLEAR’ key twice.
Valve Limiter
change.
LIMITER RATE (%/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.1, 25)

The rate at which the valve limiter will move when a raise or lower command
is given from the contact inputs or the Modbus connections. This rate is set
in the program mode.
LIMITER ENTERED RATE (%/SEC) dflt= xxx (0.1, 100)
This is the rate the valve limiter will move at when a new position is entered
from the front panel of the control. This rate is defaulted to the slow rate.
This value can be changed to a new value, however, the HOLD CHANGES
prompt must be set to YES to retain the change. If not, the value will return
to the default on the next initialization.
Woodward 81
LIMITER MAX LIMIT (%) dflt= 100.0 (0, 101)
Valve Limiter Maximum setting. Normally set to 100%, but this can be set
lower to provide a maximum valve lift setting.
HOLD LIMITER CHANGES ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to Hold the changes made to the Entered Rate. To permanently
save these changes into the 505, set to YES and select the ‘CLEAR’ key
twice.
Local/Remote Functions (only displayed if configured)

change.
Normally the Local/Remote function will disable all inputs except the front panel
commands when Local is selected. The following questions can customize this
feature by allowing the Contacts, Modbus 1, and/or Modbus 2 to be active also
when local is selected.
REMOTE MODE ENABLED ? (status indication only)

Indicates when the Remote mode is enabled. When the indication is NO,
remote control is disabled and local control only is selected.
ENABLE CONTACTS ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
When set to YES, the contacts are always active regardless of the
Local/Remote selection. When set to NO, the contact inputs are disabled
when the local mode is selected.
CONTACTS ENABLED ? (status indication only)
Indicates the status of the Contact input commands. When the indication is
NO, local control is selected and remote control from the contact inputs is
disabled.
ENABLE MODBUS 1 ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
When set to YES, the Modbus #1 commands are always active regardless
of the Local/Remote selection. When set to NO, the Modbus #1 commands
are disabled when the local mode is selected.
MODBUS 1 ENABLED ? (status indication only)
Indicates the status of the Modbus #1 commands. When the indication is
NO, local control is selected and remote control from the Modbus #1 inputs
is disabled.
ENABLE MODBUS 2 ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
When set to YES, the Modbus #2 commands are always active regardless
of the Local/Remote selection. When set to NO, the Modbus #2 commands
are disabled when the local mode is selected.
MODBUS 2 ENABLED ? (status indication only)
Indicates the status of the Modbus #2 commands. When the indication is
NO, local control is selected and remote control from the Modbus #2 inputs
is disabled.
Monitor Contact Inputs

change.
This block monitors the status of the contact input and can be used when
troubleshooting or for initial wiring checkout procedures. Normally will be closed
or YES unless the unit is tripped and then it will be open or NO.
82 Woodward
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN CLOSED ? (status indication only)
RESET INPUT CLOSED ? (status indication only)
RAISE SPEED INPUT CLOSED ? (status indication only)
LOWER SPEED INPUT CLOSED ? (status indication only)
CONT IN #1 CLOSED ? (status indication only)
Monitor Relay Outputs

change.
SHUTDOWN RELAY ENERGIZED ? (status indication only)

This block monitors the status of the relay output command and can be
used when troubleshooting or for initial wiring checkout procedures when
used with the ‘Force Relay Outputs’ function in the Service Mode. Normally
will be energized or YES unless there is an shutdown condition and then it
will be de-energized or NO.
ALARM RELAY ENERGIZED ? (status indication only)
will be de-energized or NO unless there is an alarm condition and then it will
be energized or YES.
RELAY 1 ENERGIZED ? (status indication only)
will be de-energized or NO unless the relay function is issued and then it will
be energized or YES.
Force Relay Outputs (only displayed if shut down)

change.
Woodward 83
FORCE RELAYS ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
Set to YES to allow testing of the relay outputs or associated external logic.
Only active if the ‘Force Relays Enabled’ value is true (next display value-
below). To be active, the unit must be shut down and the turbine speed less
than 1000 rpm.
FORCE RELAYS ENABLED ? (status indication only)
FORCE SHUTDOWN RELAY ON ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
FORCE ALARM RELAY ON ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
FORCE RELAY #1 ON ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
TURN ON LEDs ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
When set to YES, turns on all front-panel LEDs to test them.
LED ON STATUS ? (status indication only)
Monitor Speed Inputs

change.
Used to monitor the speed inputs. The input is shown in RPM.
SPEED INPUT #1 = (status indication only)

SPEED INPUT #2 = (status indication only)
Monitor Analog Inputs

change.
Used to monitor the analog input. The input is shown in percent (%).
ANALOG IN #1 = (status indication only)

Analog In Adjustments
change.
Used to adjust the analog input. The offset units are in percent (%).
84 Woodward
INPUT #1 OFFSET? dflt= 0.0 (-20, 20)
INPUT #1 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
INPUT #2 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
INPUT #3 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
INPUT #4 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
INPUT #5 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
INPUT #6 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
Monitor Analog Outputs

change.
Indication of the milliamp signal demanded by the control. This is not actual
milliamps.
ANALOG OUT #1 Demand (mA) = (status indication only)

Analog Output Adjustments

change.
Used to adjust the analog output. The offset units are milliamps (mA).
OUTPUT #1 OFFSET? dflt= 0.0 (-20, 20)

OUTPUT #1 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
OUTPUT #2 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
OUTPUT #3 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
OUTPUT #4 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
OUTPUT #5 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
OUTPUT #6 GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.00, 2.0)
Woodward 85
Act1 Linearization
change. The actuator linearization settings can be checked or verified by using
the actuator stroke feature when the unit is shut down.
X-1 VALUE dflt= 0.0 (-5, 110)

Input point #1 of the actuator linearization curve, in percentage.
(Must be less than the ‘X-2 Value’)
Y-1 VALUE dflt= 0.0 (-5, 110)
Output point #1 of the actuator linearization curve, in percentage.
X-2 VALUE dflt= 10.0 (-5, 110)
(Must be between the ‘X-1 Value’ and the ‘X-3 Value’ settings)
Y-2 VALUE dflt= 10.0 (-5, 110)
X-3 VALUE dflt= 20.0 (-5, 110)
Y-3 VALUE dflt= 20.0 (-5, 110)
X-4 VALUE dflt= 30.0 (-5, 110)
Y-4 VALUE dflt= 30.0 (-5, 110)
X-5 VALUE dflt= 40.0 (-5, 110)
Y-5 VALUE dflt= 40.0 (-5, 110)
X-6 VALUE dflt= 50.0 (-5, 110)
Y-6 VALUE dflt= 50.0 (-5, 110)
X-7 VALUE dflt= 60.0 (-5, 110)
Y-7 VALUE dflt= 60.0 (-5, 110)
X-8 VALUE dflt= 70.0 (-5, 110)
Y-8 VALUE dflt= 70.0 (-5, 110)
X-9 VALUE dflt= 80.0 (-5, 110)
Y-9 VALUE dflt= 80.0 (-5, 110)
X-10 VALUE dflt= 90.0 (-5, 110)
Y-10 VALUE dflt= 90.0 (-5, 110)
86 Woodward
X-11 VALUE dflt= 100.0 (-5, 110)
(Must be greater than the ‘X-10 Value’)
Y-11 VALUE dflt= 100.0 (-5, 110)
ACT1 DEMAND (%) = (status indication only)
Displays the actuator demand (%) before the linearization curve.
ACT1 OUTPUT (%) = (status indication only)
Displays the actuator demand (%) after the linearization curve.
ACT2 Linearization
change. The actuator linearization settings can be checked or verified by using
the actuator stroke feature when the unit is shut down.
X-1 VALUE dflt= 0.0 (-5, 110)

(Must be less than the ‘X-2 Value’)
Y-1 VALUE dflt= 0.0 (-5, 110)
X-2 VALUE dflt= 10.0 (-5, 110)
Y-2 VALUE dflt= 10.0 (-5, 110)
X-3 VALUE dflt= 20.0 (-5, 110)
Y-3 VALUE dflt= 20.0 (-5, 110)
X-4 VALUE dflt= 30.0 (-5, 110)
Y-4 VALUE dflt= 30.0 (-5, 110)
X-5 VALUE dflt= 40.0 (-5, 110)
Y-5 VALUE dflt= 40.0 (-5, 110)
X-6 VALUE dflt= 50.0 (-5, 110)
Y-6 VALUE dflt= 50.0 (-5, 110)
X-7 VALUE dflt= 60.0 (-5, 110)
Y-7 VALUE dflt= 60.0 (-5, 110)
X-8 VALUE dflt= 70.0 (-5, 110)
Y-8 VALUE dflt= 70.0 (-5, 110)
Woodward 87
X-9 VALUE dflt= 80.0 (-5, 110)
Y-9 VALUE dflt= 80.0 (-5, 110)
X-10 VALUE dflt= 90.0 (-5, 110)
Y-10 VALUE dflt= 90.0 (-5, 110)
X-11 VALUE dflt= 100.0 (-5, 110)
(Must be greater than the ‘X-10 Value’)
Y-11 VALUE dflt= 100.0 (-5, 110)
ACT2 DEMAND (%) = (status indication only)
Displays the actuator demand (%) before the linearization curve.
ACT2 OUTPUT (%) = (status indication only)
Displays the actuator demand (%) after the linearization curve.
Driver 2 Readout (only displayed if configured)

change.
DRIVER 2 OUT (mA) = (status indication only)

DRIVER 2 READOUT OFFSET? dflt= 0.0 (-20, 20)
Used to adjust the analog output. The offset units are milliamps (mA).
DRIVER 2 READOUT GAIN? dflt= 1.0 (0.0, 2.0)
Port 1 Settings (only displayed if configured)

change.
PORT 1 LINK ERROR (status indication only)

Displays a YES message if the port has a communication error. The `Time-
out Delay` or port configuration may need to be adjusted under `PORT
CONFIGURATIONS`.
EXCEPTION ERROR (status indication only
Displays a YES message if the port has a exception error
ERROR CODE (status indication only)
Displays the error code related to the communication problem.
0 = No Errors 1 = Illegal Function
2 = Illegal Data Address 3 = Illegal Data Value
9 = Checksum Error 10= Garbled Message
Press RESET to clear the port error.
USE MODBUS 1 TRIP ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Use trip command through the Modbus link from the Modbus device.
USE 2-STEP TRIP ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If using a Modbus Trip, is this a two-step trip. If YES, requires both the Trip
command and the Trip Acknowledge command to go YES before a trip from
the Modbus link will executed.
88 Woodward
ENABLED WHEN LOCAL IS SELECTED ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If using Local/Remote only. If YES, allows commands from Modbus to be
active even when LOCAL mode is selected. When NO, the Modbus
commands are disabled when in LOCAL.
ALWAYS ENABLE MODBUS TRIP ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If using Local/Remote only and if the Modbus is disabled on Local selection.
If YES, the TRIP from the Modbus is still active event though all other
Modbus commands are disabled. When NO, all Modbus commands are
disabled when in LOCAL.
Port 2 Settings (only displayed if configured)

change.
PORT 2 LINK ERROR (status indication only)

Displays a YES message if the port has a communication error. The `Time-
out Delay` or port configuration may need to be adjusted under `PORT
CONFIGURATIONS`.
EXCEPTION ERROR (status indication only
Displays a YES message if the port has a exception error
ERROR CODE (status indication only)
Displays the error code related to the communication problem.
0 = No Errors 1 = Illegal Function
2 = Illegal Data Address 3 = Illegal Data Value
9 = Checksum Error 10= Garbled Message
Press RESET to clear the port error.
USE MODBUS 2 TRIP ? dflt= YES (Yes/No)
Use trip command through the Modbus link from the Modbus device.
USE 2-STEP TRIP ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If using a Modbus Trip, is this a two-step trip. If YES, requires both the Trip
command and the Trip Acknowledge command to go YES before a trip from
the Modbus link will executed.
ENABLED WHEN LOCAL IS SELECTED ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If using Local/Remote only. If YES, allows commands from Modbus to be
active even when LOCAL mode is selected. When NO, the Modbus
commands are disabled when in LOCAL.
ALWAYS ENABLE MODBUS TRIP ? dflt= NO (Yes/No)
If using Local/Remote only and if the Modbus is disabled on Local selection.
If YES, the TRIP from the Modbus is still active event though all other
Modbus commands are disabled. When NO, all Modbus commands are
disabled when in LOCAL.
Comm Analog Scaling (if communications is used)

change.
CASCADE SCALING FACTOR dflt= 1.0 (1.0, 100)

Multiplier constant for all Cascade analog values sent over both Modbus
links. When set to a value other than one (1.0), allows the Modbus device to
scale inputs that are too small or to allow decimal places to be displayed.
Woodward 89
AUX SCALING FACTOR dflt= 1.0 (1.0, 100)
Multiplier constant for all Auxiliary analog values sent over both Modbus
KW SCALING FACTOR dflt= 1.0 (1.0, 100)
Multiplier constant for all KW analog values sent over both Modbus links.
When set to a value other than one (1.0), allows the Modbus device to scale
inputs that are too small or to allow decimal places to be displayed.
FSP SCALING FACTOR dflt= 1.0 (1.0, 100)
Multiplier constant for all First Stage Pressure analog values sent over both
Modbus links. When set to a value other than one (1.0), allows the Modbus
device to scale inputs that are too small or to allow decimal places to be
displayed.
LOAD SHARE SCALING FACTOR dflt= 1.0 (1.0, 100)
Multiplier constant for all Load Share analog values sent over both Modbus
Port Configurations
change.
PORT 1 SETTINGS
STATUS (status indication only)
Indicates a hardware communications problem.
BAUD dflt = scroll thru options
This value is set in the program mode
STOP BITS dflt = scroll thru options
PARITY dflt = scroll thru options
DRIVER dflt = scroll thru options
ASCII OR RTU dflt= xx (1, 2)
1 = ASCII 2 = RTU This value is set in the program mode.
MODBUS DEVICE NUMBER dflt= xx (1, 247)
Enter a number from 1 to 247. This value is set in the program mode.
TIME-OUT DELAY (SEC) dflt= 10.0 (0, 100)
Sets the delay for no communication on the Modbus link before the link
is considered failed and issues an alarm.
PORT 2 SETTINGS
DRIVER dflt = scroll thru options
ASCII OR RTU dflt= xx (1, 2)
1 = ASCII 2 = RTU This value is set in the program mode.
90 Woodward
MODBUS DEVICE NUMBER dflt= xx (1, 247)
Enter a number from 1 to 247. This value is set in the program mode.
TIME-OUT DELAY (SEC) dflt= 10.0 (0, 100)
Sets the delay for no communication on the Modbus link before the link
is considered failed and issues an alarm.
PC PORT SETTINGS
BITS/CHAR dflt = scroll thru options
READ MODE dflt = scroll thru options
FLOW dflt = scroll thru options
ECHO dflt = scroll thru options
ENDLINE dflt = scroll thru options
IGNORE CR dflt = scroll thru options
Woodward 91
Chapter 5.
Understanding PID Settings
Overview
The Speed, Cascade and Auxiliary controls utilize PID controllers. The response
of each control loop can be adjusted for optimum response, however it is
important to understand what a PID controller is and the effect each controller
adjustment has on the controller response. Proportional gain, integral gain
(stability), and DR (speed derivative ratio) are the adjustable and interacting
parameters used to match the response of the control loop with the response of
the system. They correspond to the P (proportional), I (integral), and D
(derivative) terms, and are displayed by the 505 as follows:
 P = Proportional gain (%)
 I = Integral gain (%)
 D = Derivative (determined by DR and I)
Proportional Control
Proportional response is directly proportional to a process change.
Analogy: Setting hand throttle to keep constant speed on straight and level.
Proportional control (using the same analogy) results in a certain speed as long
as the car is not subjected to any load change such as a hill. If a throttle is set to
any particular setting, the speed of the car will remain constant as long as the car
remains straight and level. If the car goes up a hill, it will slow down. Of course,
going down a hill the car would gain speed.
Integral Control
Integral compensates for process and setpoint load changes.
Analogy: Cruise control maintains constant speed regardless of hills.
Integral, sometimes called reset, provides additional action to the original

proportional response as long as the process variable remains away from the
setpoint. Integral is a function of the magnitude and duration of the deviation. In
this analogy the reset response would keep the car speed constant regardless of
the terrain.
Derivative
Derivative provides a temporary over-correction to compensate for long transfer
lags and reduce stabilization time on process upsets (momentary disturbances).
Analogy: Accelerating into high speed lane with merging traffic.
92 Woodward
Derivative, sometimes called “preact” or “rate”, is very difficult to draw an
accurate analogy to, because the action takes place only when the process
changes and is directly related to the speed at which the process changes.
Merging into high speed traffic of a freeway from an “on” ramp is no easy task
and requires accelerated correction (temporary overcorrection) in both increasing
and decreasing directions. The application of brakes to fall behind the car in the
first continuous lane or passing gear to get ahead of the car in the first
continuous lane is derivative action.
Proportional Response
The amount of controller change is directly related to the process change and the
Proportional gain setting on the controller; Controller output change is
Proportional to the process change. If there is no process change, there is no
change in output from the controller (or valve change) regardless of the
deviation. This results in an undesired offset between the original desired
Setpoint and the resulting drop in the Control Point.
Figure 5-1. Proportional Gain Setting Effects
Woodward 93
Proportional Gain (effect of settings)

Figure 5-1 shows the effect of Proportional gain settings on control. Starting at
the top of the graph a load change is introduced. With a small Proportional gain
(meaning a large process change is required to produce full valve travel), stability
is good but offset is very high. With a moderate gain setting (higher number
setting) stability is still good–offset is still fairly high. With a high setting, offset is
considerably smaller but the stability is poor. The 0.25 ratio effects a minimum
area whereby the offset is reduced to a minimum while stability is in a decaying
manner at 0.25% ratio. The decay ratio used (0.25%) means that if the second
cycle is 1/4 of the first cycle, then each succeeding cycle will be 1/4 of the
preceding cycle until the cycle is not visible.
Since Proportional gain is adjusted to produce (only) the proper stability of a

process, do not continue increasing its effect to correct offset conditions. The
amount of stability and offset is directly related to the setting of the Proportional
setting. Stability is of course also affected by the stability of the process. In
essence, the amount of output from the controller due to the Proportional setting
is from the error. If there is no error, then there is no Proportional effect.
Integral Response
Integral Gain as stated in the Woodward controls is repeats per minute (or Reset
Rate). Therefore, a high amount of Integral gain (high number) would result in a
large amount of Reset action. Conversely, a low Integral gain (low number)
would result in a slower reset action.
Figure 5-2. Open Loop Proportional and Integral Response
94 Woodward
Integral response is provided to eliminate the offset that resulted from straight
Proportional control. Figure 5-2 shows how the controller action is Proportional to
the measurement change, but as we saw earlier, this results in offset. The
Integral (or Reset) action is a function of both time and magnitude of the
deviation. As long as an offset condition (due to load changes) exists, Integral
action is taking place.
The amount of Integral action is a function of four things:

 The magnitude of the deviation
 The duration of the deviation
 The Proportional gain setting
 The Integral setting
In this Open Loop figure (5-2), the Integral response is shown increasing due to the
offset condition existing between the temperature and the setpoint. The resultant
action is the top curve showing the step Proportional response that ends as soon
as the measurement stops changing. Then the Integral (or reset) action is added to
the Proportional action in an amount equal to the Integral of the deviation. In other
words, Reset action continues (in either or both directions) as long as there is a
difference (deviation) between the setpoint and the process measurement.
In this case, the deviation will never be eliminated (or even reduced) because the
system is in Open Loop.
Proportional + Integral (closed loop)

Figure 5-3 shows the closed loop effects of integral action. The bottom curve
displays the load change. The next curve up shows the setpoint and the
measured variable, temperature. With the load change the temperature droops or
deviates from the setpoint.
The next highest curve is the Proportional action and follows the measured
variable proportionately. The Integral curve adds to the Proportional curve resulting
in a different valve position, thereby returning the process to the Setpoint.
Figure 5-3. Closed Loop Proportional and Integral Response
Woodward 95
In Closed Loop, however (as opposed to Open Loop), as the measurement
decays toward the Setpoint the Proportional action is taking place Proportionally
to the measurement change, and the Integral action is decaying proportionately
to the magnitude and duration of the deviation until the measurement reaches
the setpoint at which time the Integral action is zero.
Integral (effects of settings)

Figure 5-4 shows the effect of fast or slow Integral action. For a given load
change an offset results with Proportional response only. Since recovery time (for
a given load change) is important, the Integral setting should remove the offset in
minimum time without adding additional cycling. If two cycles are added, then too
much Integral Gain has been added. Of course, Proportional only must first
establish the 1/4 decay ratio. If increased cycling occurs, the Integral must be
turned off or the controller switched to “manual” if allowed to go too far. Ideally,
the process should not continue to cycle after the setpoint has been reached as
in the second curve from the bottom.
Figure 5-4. Integral Gain (Reset) Setting Responses
Derivative Response
In a process control loop the Derivative action is directly related to how fast the
process changes (rate of change). If the process change is slow then the
Derivative action is proportional to that rate of change. Derivative acts by
advancing the Proportional action. Derivative acts at the start of the process
change, when the process changes its rate and when the process stops its
change.
96 Woodward
Derivative action takes place at only three times:
 When the process starts to change
 When the rate of change takes place in the process
 When the process stops changing
The net result of Derivative action is to oppose any process change and
combined with Proportional action to reduce stabilization time in returning the
process to the setpoint after an upset. Derivative will not remove offset.
Woodward Derivative is split into two working domains, Input dominant and
Feedback dominant. The allowed values for DR range from 0.01 to 100. The
most common derivative is Feedback dominant, it is automatically selected with
an Derivative Ratio (DR) from 1 to 100. The Input dominant domain is selected
with DR values between 0.01 to 1.
Feedback dominant applies the derivative action to the integrator feedback term
of the PID equation and is more stable than input dominant derivative. This will
not take corrective action as early and it will be less noise sensitive. When tuning
the derivative, the DR will be established in the 1 to 100 range because it is
easier to tune and more forgiving of excessive values. Most PIDs will employ
feedback dominant derivative.
Input dominant derivative applies the DR term before the integrator term of the
PID equation. When the DR is less than 1, the derivative is input dominant and
reacts very quickly to process upsets. This function is very adapted for PIDs that
control the load parameter, such as load shaft turbine speed. Since the input
dominant derivative is so sensitive, it should be reserved only for applications
without high frequency noise.
Except for input dominant and feedback dominant features, the reciprocal of one
domain will appear identical in the other domain. As an example, consider an DR
of 5.0, the reciprocal being 1/5. That means that an DR of 5.0 will appear the
same as DR of 0.200. The difference in response between these values of 5.0
and 0.2 is in the dominance feature.
If in doubt about the type of derivative to use, then set up for feedback dominant,
1 < DR < 100.
Proportional + Derivative (closed loop)

Figure 5-5 shows how Derivative acts to oppose a change in process in either
direction. The dashed line shows the Derivative action going through zero to
oppose the process deviation traveling toward zero. Notice offset still exists
between the desired setpoint and the drooped control point that resulted from the
load change. The top curve is the resultant controller output, Proportional plus
Derivative.
If an upset (momentary) had occurred rather than a load change, there would be
no offset.
Woodward 97
Figure 5-5. Closed Loop Proportional and Derivative Action
Derivative (effects of settings)
Figure 5-6. Derivative Setting Effects
98 Woodward
Figure 5-6 shows the effect of different Derivative settings. The curves are
relative since it depends on what type of control is desired in order to properly
adjust Derivative time. For example, if minimum cycling is desired (as is shown
here) then Derivative is added to the 1/4 decay cycle provided by Proportional
until more than one cycle is removed and of course the 1/4 decay is destroyed.
However, in most cases it is desirable to retain the 1/4 decay cycle, in which
case Derivative is added to the point of removing only one cycle from the 1/4
decay ratio then the gain is increased until the 1/4 decay ratio is restored.
In all the above curves, you will note offset exists since offset can only be
eliminated by the addition of Integral (or Reset).
Proportional + Integral + Derivative (closed loop)

Figure 5-7 shows the relationship of valve position to the interaction of the PID
modes of control whenever a load change takes place in closed loop. As the
temperature drops due to the load change, the proportional action moves the
control valve proportionately to the measurement (temperature) change. The
integral gain/reset adds to the proportional action as a result of the magnitude
and time (duration) of the deviation. And the derivative temporarily over-corrects
based on the speed at which the measurement moves in any direction. The
resultant curve (at the top) shows a similar over-correction (in this case), but in
addition the valve will stay at the new position required to keep the measurement
at the setpoint.
Figure 5-7. Closed Loop Proportional, Integral and Derivative Action
Woodward 99
In summary, Derivative provides a temporary over-correction to compensate for
long transfer lags and reduce stabilization time on process upsets (momentary
disturbances).
Do not use if high frequency noise is normally in the measured

variable or the main lag is dead time. After Proportional is set to 1/4
decay ratio and Derivative is adjusted to remove one cycle as well as
decreasing the 1/4 decay ratio, then the Proportional gain can be
increased to restore the 1/4 decay ratio.
Adding Derivative
The value of the Derivative Ratio (DR) term can range from 0.01 to 100. In order
to simplify adjustment of the dynamics of the 505, adjusting the integral gain
value sets both the I and D terms of the PID controller. The DR term establishes
the degree of effect the integral gain value has on the “D” term, and changes the
configuration of a controller from input rate sensitive (input dominant) to feedback
rate sensitive (feedback dominant) and vice versa.
Another possible use of the DR adjustment is to reconfigure the controller from a

PID to a PI controller. This is done by adjusting the DR term to its upper or lower
limits, depending on whether an input or feedback dominant controller is desired.
 A DR setting of 1 to 100 selects feedback dominant mode
 A DR setting of .01 to 1 selects input dominant mode
 A DR setting of .01 or 100 selects a PI only controller, input and feedback
dominant respectively
The change from one of these configurations to the other may have no effect
during normal operation, however, it can cause great differences in response
when the governor is coming into control. (i.e. at startup, during a full load
change, or during transfer of control from another channel).
An input dominant controller is more sensitive to the change-of-rate of its input

(i.e. Speed, Cascade in or Auxiliary in), and can therefore prevent overshoot of
the setpoint better than a feedback dominant controller. Although this response is
desirable during a startup or full load rejections, it can cause excessive control
motions in some systems where a smooth transition response is desired.
A controller configured as feedback dominant is more sensitive to the change-of-

rate of its feedback (LSS). A feedback dominant controller has the ability to limit
the rate of change of the LSS bus when a controller is near its setpoint but is not
yet in control. This limiting of the LSS bus allows a feedback dominant controller
to make smoother control transitions than an input dominant controller.
Controller Field Tuning General

The quality of regulation obtained from an automatic control system depends
upon the adjustments that are made to the various controller modes. Best results
are obtained when the adjustment (tuning) is done systematically. Prior training
and experience in controller tuning are desirable for effective application of this
procedure.
100 Woodward
This procedure will lead to controller settings which will provide after a load
change:
 Process control without sustained cycling
 Process recovery in a minimum time
Controller settings derived for given operating conditions are valid over a narrow
range of load change. The settings made for one operating set of conditions may
result in excessive cycling or highly damped response at some other operating
condition. This procedure should be applied under the most difficult operating
conditions to assure conservative settings over the normal operating range.
It is good practice to keep the average of the setpoint changes near the normal
setpoint of the process to avoid excessive departure from normal operating level.
After each setpoint change, allow sufficient time to observe the effect of the last
adjustment (see Figure 5-8). It is wise to wait until approximately 90% of the
change has been completed.
Figure 5-8. Typical Response to Load Change
Tuning Example
If the system is unstable, make sure the governor is the cause. This can be
checked by closing the valve limiter until it has control of the actuator output. If
the governor is causing the oscillation, time the oscillation cycle time. A rule-of–
thumb is, if the system’s oscillation cycle time is less than 1 second reduce the
Proportional gain term. A rule-of-thumb is, if the system’s oscillation cycle time is
greater the 1 second reduce the Integral gain term (proportional gain may need
to be increased also).
On an initial startup with the 505, all PID dynamic gain terms will require
adjustment to match the respective PID’s response to that of its control loop.
There are multiple dynamic tuning methods available that can be used with the
505’s PIDs to assist in determining the gain terms that provide optimum control
loop response times.
Woodward 101
The following method can be used to achieve PID gain values that are close to
optimum:
1. Increase Derivative Ratio (SDR) to 100 (Service Mode adjustment)
2. Reduce integral gain to 0.01 (Run Mode adjustment)
3. Increase proportional gain until system just starts to oscillate (Run
Mode).The optimum gain for this step is when the system just starts to
oscillate and maintains a self-sustaining oscillation that does not increase or
decrease in magnitude.
4. Record the control gain (Kc) and oscillation period (T) in seconds.
5. Set the dynamics as follows:
For PI control: G=P(I/s + 1)
Set: Proportional gain = 0.45*Kc
Integral gain = 1.2/T
Derivative ratio = 100
For PID control : G=P(I/s + 1 + Ds)
Set: Proportional gain = 0.60*Kc
Integral gain = 2/T
Deriv ratio = 8/(T*Integral Gain) for fdbk dominant
= (T*Integral Gain)/8 for input dominant
This method of tuning will get the gain settings close, they can be fine-tuned from
this point.
102 Woodward
Chapter 6.
Hardware/Operating System Faults
General


General
Most 505 problems which will be encountered are covered in the manual. Use
the table of contents to locate the sections of the manual that may describe a
specific problem. Refer to the CONTROLLING PARAM DISPLAYS and ALARM
DISPLAYS sections of this manual for display descriptions and corrective
actions. This troubleshooting section contains a few guidelines that Woodward
field service technicians and engineers have suggested.
Off-line Diagnostics
When the 505 control is powered up the microprocessor and other hardware is
reset and the self-test begins. The first thing that the self-test does is turn off all
five of the LED lamps. If these LEDs do not turn off this means that the
microprocessor is not working and that the CPU module has failed. The self-test
tests the RAM, system clock, LED display, EEPROM, communications memory,
and application memory before beginning execution of the application program. If
an error is found during the self-test it is annunciated on the front panel LED
display. It also indicates the error by flashing the F1/Alarm LED a certain number
of times repetitively for errors when the LED display may not be functioning. The
table below shows the errors indicated by flashing LEDs:
LED Flashes Error

1 RAM Test Failed
2 Unexpected Exception
3 Clock Interrupt Test Failed
4 Display Test Failed
5 EEPROM Test Failed
6 Communications Memory Test Failed
7 Flash Memory Test Failed
It is also possible to see the errors below on the front panel LED display. These
errors could occur at anytime during the self-test or during execution of the
application program. These indicate that an illegal reset condition has occurred.
Woodward 103
“Reset caused by”
“WATCHDOG TIMEOUT”

“HALT MONITOR”

“LOSS OF CLOCK”

“SOFTWARE RESET”

“TEST SUBMODULE RESET”
All the above errors indicate a problem with the CPU module except the “Display
Test Failed” which indicates a problem with the display module.
On-line Diagnostics
As soon as the application program starts running, the system will use a small
portion of run time to continuously run the following on-line diagnostic tests.
Test Message On Failure

Local Memory Test This test gets a RAM location, saves the data
from that location, then writes several different
values to that location. It reads each value back,
and checks it to be sure it is correct. It then
restores the saved original data aback to the
RAM and repeats the process at another
location.
Application Memory Test This test reads all flash memory, then calculates
the sumcheck value and compares it to the
sumcheck value previously calculated offline
and stored in memory.
Task Overflow This test checks the last eight locations in the
task that has just completed to make sure that
the values that were set up when the task was
created have not changed. If they have, it
indicates that the task has overflowed its
memory, and destroyed memory in another task.
A failure of any one of the on-line tests results in the I/O lock being asserted and
display of a message as shown in the following table. The message will be
displayed on the Service Panel at the time the error occurs, and it also will go
into the Fault Mode Buffer so that it can be displayed in the Fault Mode.
Test Message On Failure

Local RAM Local Ram Railed
Application Checksum Checksum Error
During execution, an Task Overrun in Task XX
operating system task ran out
of memory, or its memory was
corrupted by a different task.
104 Woodward
Operation Errors and Faults

Certain other errors can also occur during system operation. If any of the below
error messages appear:
 Disconnect all field wiring to the 505 control, except input power.
 Perform a power-up reset (for 30 seconds or more, temporarily remove input
power, or press the “System Reset Switch”. See Volume 1, Figure 2-4 for
location).
If the problem disappears, troubleshoot field wiring errors or check for and
correct noise on the input power. If the problem does not disappear, replace the
control.
Operation Error Messages

System Error (#)
EEPROM Fault
Rate Group Slip (#)
EE Initialization Fault
Exception Error (#)
Wiring Problems
Most 505 problems are caused by wiring problems. Carefully and thoroughly
check all wiring connections at both ends. Be very careful when installing wires
into the 505 control terminal blocks. Check all shields for proper grounding.
All inputs and outputs can be measured directly at the terminal strips. In addition,
from the Service Mode, the LED display will show what the 505 measures. This
comparison can be used to determine if the 505 is interpreting the input signal
correctly. The Service Mode can be used to monitor and adjust analog inputs and
outputs, monitor speed inputs, monitor and adjust actuator outputs, monitor
contact inputs, and monitor and force relay outputs.
Contact inputs can be verified by measuring the voltage at the terminal blocks.
The contact power supply voltage should measure approximately 24 Vdc from
any contact (+) terminal to the contact GND terminal (11). If 24 Vdc is not the
voltage measured, disconnect all wiring to the 505 except input power, then re-
measure this power supply voltage. If 24 Vdc is not the voltage measured, check
for wiring problems. If 24 Vdc is not measured across the contact input (+) and
contact GND terminal (11) with input wiring disconnected, replace the 505.
The operation of a contact input to the 505 can be checked by verifying that the
voltage from the contact input’s (+) terminal measures 24 Vdc with respect to the
contact input GND, terminal (11), when the external contact is closed.
Any 4–20 mA input or output can be checked by placing a milliamp meter in

series with the input or output.
Refer to Volume 1 Chapter 3 for actuator wiring concerns or questions.
If the serial communications line is not working, check the wiring first. Then check
the Program Mode entries for matching communications setup.
Woodward 105
Control Adjustments
If, while trying to adjust the Speed Setpoint in the Run Mode, the ADJ up and
ADJ down keys will not work, check to make sure that CAS (cascade control)
and RMT (remote control) are both disabled.
If the system’s steam valve is unsteady or hunts, try manually positioning the
steam valve by closing the valve limiter. If the steam valve is blocked in this
manner and the actuator output is steady but the turbine still hunts, then the
problem is outside the governor. If an actuator hunts, or appears sticky, it may
need dither (especially TM type).
If the 505 control is not able to fully close or open the governor valves, check to
make sure that the actuators are calibrated correctly, and valve linkage is
correctly set.
If the 505 control is not able to control speed above or below a certain speed, the
steam valve may not be adjusted correctly. Verify that the steam valve position is
indeed in the position indicated by the 505 (by pressing the ACT key). If these
positions do not match, correct the problem (actuator linkage, or current
calibration).
If an overspeed condition is reached on start-up, verify that the governor valve is

closed. Next verify that the governor valve is seated correctly by opening the T&T
valve with the governor valve closed. If the T&T valve allows the turbine to turn,
then the governor valve is not correctly seated.
Other Operating Problems

If CAS or RMT will not work, check that the generator and tie breakers are both
closed.
From the (MANUAL SHUTDOWN) (PUSH YES OR NO) display, you cannot
initiate a shutdown.
If actual speed is less than the speed called for by the speed setpoint, check for
droop (kW or speed). Droop causes the actual speed to be less than the speed
reference.
106 Woodward
Appendix A.
505 Design Specifications
Hardware Specifications
Package
Flush mount package
Approximate physical size of 11” x 14” x 4”
Environmental Category:
Lloyd’s Type ENV2
NEMA: Type 4X or IEC 60529, IP 56
(applies only to front of flush mount package)
Optional bulkhead Enclosure (approximate size: 20” x 20” x 7”)
Humidity
Lloyd’s Test Specification No. 1, 1996, Humidity Test #1:
Two temperature cycles between 20 and 55 °C at 95% relative humidity
within 48 hours
Operating Temperature
Without Enclosure (8923-439) = -25 to +65 °C, still air, no external heat loads.
Passes Lloyd’s type ENV3 Dry Heat test
With Enclosure (8923-439) = –20 to +60 °C, still air, no external heat loads.
Passes Lloyd’s type ENV3 Dry Heat test
Storage Temperature
–40 to +85 °C. For longest life, store near room temperature and limit the thermal
cycle range.
Shock
US MIL-STD-810C, Figure 516.2-1 procedure 1b
(30 g 11 ms half-sine pulse)
Vibration
Lloyd’s Test Specification No. 1, 1996, Vibration Test #1: 5-13.2 Hz, 1.0 mm;
13.2–100 Hz, 0.7 g
Pollution Resistance
Particulates:
IEC 664-1 Pollution Degree 2 (Normally only nonconductive pollution
occurs. Temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected.)
Gaseous Pollutants:
The polyacrylate conformal coating withstands NO2, CO2, SO2, and H2S
gases per IEC 60068-2-60:1995 Part 2.60 Methods 1 and 4 (Flowing Mixed
Gas Corrosion Test). It will withstand levels typical of telecommunications
and computer installations as defined by Battelle Labs Class III (between
IEC 60721-3-3 classification 3C1 and 3C2, light industrial to urban industrial,
heavy traffic).
Woodward 107
Power Supply Specification
Insulation Resistance/HiPot
24 Vdc power supply: 707 Vdc from power input to chassis
120 Vac/dc and 220 Vac version: 2200 Vdc from power input to chassis
Power Inputs
1. Low Voltage dc (18–32 Vdc)
–input power fuse rating (F1 & F2)–6.25 A slow blow
–Holdup Time = 14 milliseconds
2. ac/dc (90–150 Vdc or 88–132 Vac, 47–63 Hz)
3. High Voltage ac (180–264 Vac, 47–63 Hz)
Power Outputs
Three 5 Vdc communications port isolated power supplies (100 mA max.)
5 Vdc digital power (2.5 A max.)
24 Vdc analog power (1.275 A max.)
15 Vdc analog power (150 mA max.)
–15 Vdc analog power (150 mA max.)
24 Vdc isolated contact input power (100 mA max.)
Microprocessor
Motorola 68332 Microcontroller/20 MHz
General I/O Specifications

Analog Inputs
1. Six 4–20 mA inputs
a. One isolated input (input #6).
b. Five non-isolated differential inputs or may use 24 V provided with
single common.
2. 16 Bit resolution over 0-25 mA full-scale range.
3. 200  input impedance on all inputs.
4. Accuracy
a. Non-isolated input: 0.145% of full-scale input worst case @ 25° C
ambient.
b. Isolated input: 0.186% of full-scale input worst case @ 25° C
ambient.
5. Temperature drift.
a. Non-isolated inputs: 130ppm/°C worst case, 40ppm/°C root sum
square.
b. Isolated input: 245ppm/°C worst case, 60ppm/°C root sum square.
6. Isolation
a. Non-isolated input: 2 M to chassis.
b. Isolated input: infinite ohms to chassis.
Speed Sensor Inputs

1. Two channels, jumper selectable between MPU input and Proximity input.
2. MPU input.
a. Two isolated, independent channels.
b. 1–25 VRMS input voltage range.
c. 100–15000 Hz.
d. Input impedance of approximately 1.5 k
108 Woodward
3. Proximity input.
a. Two isolated channels, independent channels.
b. 16–28 Vdc voltage range, at the input.
c. 0.5–15000 Hz.
d. Input impedance of approximately 7.1 k
4. Minimum of 12 bit resolution, 16 bit resolution at 100 Hz.
5. Speed range software selectable, 0-5000, 0–10000, or 0–15000.
6. Software filtering.
7. Accuracy is 0.027% worst case over temperature and time.
Actuator Drivers
1. Two channels, software selectable for 4–20 mA or 20–160 mA range.
2. Current readback on each channel, to detect over/under current.
3. Dither is software selectable (0–10 mA).
4. 45  maximum load on the 20–160 mA version.
5. 360  maximum load on the 4–20 mA version.
6. 10 bit resolution over 24 mA (4–20 mA range) or 196 mA (20–160 mA
range) full scale range.
7. Temperature drift is 153ppm/°C worst case and 143ppm/°C root sum
square.
8. Accuracy is 0.25% of full scale output worst case @ 25 °C ambient.
Analog Outputs
1. Six software configurable 4–20 mA outputs.
2. 600  maximum load.
3. 10 bit resolution over 25 mA full scale range.
4. Temperature drift is 118ppm/°C worst case and 100ppm/°C root sum
square.
5. Accuracy is 0.4% of 25 mA full scale output worst case @ 25° C ambient
Relay Outputs
1. Eight software configurable relay outputs
2. One set of form C contacts provided for each relay output.
a. European ratings
European ratings restrict use to applications with voltages not subject
to the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC).
Rated Voltage Resistive Inductive
28 Vdc 5A 1A
b. UL Recognized Ratings
Rated Voltage Resistive
28 Vdc 5A
115 Vac 0.5 A
c. Relay Manufacturer's Ratings
Rated Voltage Resistive Inductive
28 Vdc 5A 1A
115 Vac 0.5 A 0.3 A
125 Vdc 0.2 A 0.1 A
Discrete Inputs
1. 16 isolated discrete inputs.
2. Isolated +24 V power provided for discrete inputs.
3. 2.5 mA draw on each input when contact is closed.
4. 18–25 Vdc external contact power may be used instead of the 505’s
internal power supply.
5. Solid state relays may be used to drive any discrete input:
a. 505 Discrete Input Thresholds: <8 Vdc = “OFF”, >15 Vdc = “ON”
b. 505 Discrete Input Impedance = 25 k, at “ON” threshold
Woodward 109
Modbus Communications Ports
1. Two isolated Modbus communications ports.
2. Supports RTU and ASCII protocol.
3. Baud rates to 57600.
4. Supports RS-232, RS-422, and RS-485 hardware.
5. Maximum network cable length is 1220 m/4000 ft (15 m/50 ft with RS-232).
Personal Computer Communications Port

1. One isolated PC communications port.
2. Supports RS-232 only.
3. Baud rates to 57600.
4. Maximum cable length is 15 m (50 ft).
Built-In Operator Interface

1. Two line x 24 character LED display.
2. 30 key multi-function keypad.
3. Emergency stop and overspeed test buttons.
4. Alarm and overspeed test LED indicators.
Software Specifications
Speed/Load Control
NEMA D or better speed regulation.
Nominal Software Execution Rate

Speed/Load Control: 10 ms
Auxiliary Control: 20 ms
Cascade Control: 20 ms
Remote Speed Setpoint: 40 ms
Remote Aux Setpoint: 40 ms
Remote Cascade Setpoint: 40 ms
Sync/Load Share Control: 20 ms
Shutdowns: 10 ms
Alarms: 20 ms
Relays:
a. Trip Relay: 10 ms
b. Alarm Relay: 20 ms
c. Configurable Relays: 40 ms
Readouts: 40 ms
Contact Inputs:
a. External Trip & Configurable Inputs: 10 ms
b. Reset: 40 ms
c. Speed Raise & Lower: 20 ms
The “nominal rate” listed is the fastest update rate, the worst case
response would be twice the nominal rate.
110 Woodward
Appendix B.
505 Service Mode Worksheet
Governor Serial Number ______________________
Application ________________________________ Date ___________
For details on individual settings, refer to Chapter 4.
SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS REMOTE SPEED SETTINGS (if configured)

Rate to Min = RPM/SEC Not Mtchd Rate = RPM/SEC
Slow Rate /sec = RPM/SEC Spd Setpt Mx Rte = RPM/SEC
Fast Rate Dly = SEC Min Speed Set = RPM
Fast Rate = RPM/SEC Max Speed Set = RPM
Entered Rate = RPM/SEC Rmt Dbnd Value = RPM
Underspd Setting = RPM Lag-Tau Value = %
On-line Deriv Ratio= % Use Min Load? Yes ____ No ____
Off-line Deriv Ratio = % Hold Rmt Chng Yes ____ No ____
Hold Speed Chng Yes ____ No ____
CASCADE CTRL SETTINGS (if configured)
ALARM SETTINGS Slow Rate (/Sec) = UNITS/SEC
Is Trip an Alarm Yes ____ No ____ Fast Rate Delay = SEC
Blink Alarms Yes ____ No ____ Setpt Fast Rate = UNITS/SEC
Jump to Alm Scrn Yes ____ No ____ Septpt Entrd RatE = UNITS/SEC
Droop (%) = %
KEY OPTIONS Rated Casc Setpt = UNITS
Use ‘Stop’ Cmd Yes ____ No ____ Casc N Mtchd Rte = UNITS
Use Dyn Key Adj Yes ____ No ____ Max Speed Rate = RPM/SEC
Max Speed Set = RPM
SPD CNTRL DROOP SETTINGS (if generator) Min Speed Set = RPM
Droop (%) = % Cascade Dbnd = UNITS
Use KW Droop? Yes ____ No ____ Casc Deriv Ratio = %
Gen Load Units = MW Yes ____ No ____ R/L Casc Only? Yes ____ No ____
Use Min Load? Yes ____ No ____
MPU OVERRIDE Hold Casc Chng Yes ____ No ____
Use MPU Ovrd Tmr? Yes ____ No ____
MPU Ovrd Time = Sec REMOTE CASC SETTINGS (if configured)
MPU #1 Ovrd On (Status Only) Rmt N Mtchd Rte = UNITS/SEC
MPU #2 Ovrd On (Status Only) Rmt Casc Max Rte = UNITS/SEC
Min Casc Set = UNITS
AUTO START SEQUENCE (if configured) Max Casc Set = UNITS
Low Idle Delay (status only–MIN) Rmt Dbnd Value = UNITS
Rate To Hi Idle (status only–RPM/SEC) Lag-Tau Value = SEC
Hi Idle Delay (status only–MIN) Hld Rmt Cas Chng Yes ____ No ____
Rate To Rated (status only–RPM/SEC)
Hrs Since Trip (status only–HRS) AUX CONTROL SETTINGS (if configured)
Slow Rate (/Sec) = UNITS/SEC
IDLE/RATED SETTINGS (if configured) Fast Rate Delay = SEC
Idle/Rated Rate = RPM/SEC Setpt Fast Rate = UNITS/SEC
Use Ramp To Idle Yes ____ No ____ Setpt Entrd Rate = UNITS/SEC
Idle Priority? Yes ____ No ____ Droop (%) = %
Rated Aux Setpt = UNITS
SYNC/LD SHARE SETTINGS (if configured) Aux Deriv Ratio = %
Iput Bias Gain = % Aux Threshold = %
Input Bias Dband = RPM PID Min Output = %
Lag-Tau Value = % Hold Aux Chng Yes ____ No ____
Hold Bias Chng Yes ____ No ____
Woodward 111
REMOTE AUX SETTINGS (if configured) FORCE RELAY OUTPUTS (if shut down)
Rmt N Mtchd Rte = UNITS/SEC Force Relays ? (troubleshooting only)
Rmt Aux Max Rate = UNITS/SEC Force Rlys Enbl (status only)
Min Rmt Aux Set = UNITS Shutdn Rly (troubleshooting only)
Max Aux Set = UNITS Force Alarm Rly On? (troubleshooting only)
Rmt Dbnd Value = UNITS Relay #1 On (troubleshooting only)
Lag-Tau Value = % Relay #2 On (troubleshooting only)
Hold Rmt Aux Chng Yes ____ No ____ Relay #3 On (troubleshooting only)
Relay #4 On (troubleshooting only)
BREAKER LOGIC (if generator) Relay #5 On (troubleshooting only)
Freq Cntrl Armd (status only) Relay #6 On (troubleshooting only)
Sync Window Rpm = RPM Turn On LED’s (troubleshooting only)
Sync Window Rate = RPM/SEC LED’s ON Status (status only)
Tiebrkr Opn Rmp Yes ____ No ____
Tie Open Rate = RPM/SEC MONITOR SPEED INPUTS
Gen Open Setback Yes ____ No ____ Speed Input #1 = (status only)
Gen Open Setpt = RPM Speed Input #2 = (status only)
Use Min Load Yes ____ No ____
Min Load Bias = RPM MONITOR ANALOG INPUTS
Zero Load Value = % Anlg In #1 (%) = (status only)
Hold Brkr Chng Yes ____ No ____ Anlg In #2 (%) = (status only)
Anlg In #3 (%) = (status only)
VALVE LIMITER SETTINGS Anlg In #4 (%) = (status only)
Limiter Rate = %/SEC Anlg In #5 (%) = (status only)
Entered Rate = %/SEC Anlg In #6 (%) = (status only)
Limiter Max Limit = %
Hold Limiter Chng Yes ____ No ____ ANALOG IN ADJUSTMENTS
Input #1 Offset =
LOCAL/REMOTE FUNCTIONS (if configured) Input #1 Gain =
Remote Enabled (status only) Input #2 Offset =
Enable Contacts Yes ____ No ____ Input #2 Gain =
Contacts Enabled (status only) Input #3 Offset =
Enable Modbus 1 Yes ____ No ____ Input #3 Gain =
Modbus 1 Enabled (status only) Input #4 Offset =
Enable Modbus 2 Yes ____ No ____ Input #4 Gain =
Modbus 2 Enabled (status only) Input #5 Offset =
Input #5 Gain =
MONITOR CONTACT INPUTS Input #6 Offset =
ESD Input Clsd (status only) Input #6 Gain =
Rst Input Clsd (status only)
Rse Spd In Clsd (status only) MONITOR ANALOG OUTPUTS
Lwr Spd In Clsd (status only) Anlg Out # 1 (mA) = (status only)
Cont In #1 Closed (status only) Anlg Out # 2 (mA) = (status only)
Cont In #6 Closed (status only)
Cont In #7 Closed (status only) ANALOG OUTPUT ADJUSTMENTS
Cont In #8 Closed (status only) Out #1 Offset =
Cont In #9 Closed (status only) Out #1 Gain =
Cont In #10 Closed (status only) Out #2 Offset=
Cont In #11 Closed (status only) Out #2 Gain =
Cont In #12 Closed (status only) Out #3 Offset =
Out #3 Gain =
MONITOR RELAY OUTPUTS Out #4 Offset =
Sht Dn Rly Enrgzd (status only) Out #4 Gain =
Alrm Rly Enrgzd (status only) Out #5 Offset =
Relay 1 Enrgzd (status only) Out #5 Gain =
Relay 2 Enrgzd (status only) Out #6 Offset =
Relay 3 Enrgzd (status only) Out #6 Gain =
Relay 4 Enrgzd (status only)
112 Woodward
ACT1 LINEARIZATION PORT 2 SETTINGS (if configured)
X-1 Value = Port 2 Link Err (status only)
Y-1 Value = Exception Error (status only)
X-2 Value = Error Code (status only)
Y-2 Value = Use Mod 2 Trip Yes ____ No ____
X-3 Value = Use 2-Step Trp? Yes ____ No ____
Y-3 Value = Enbl When Local Yes ____ No ____
X-4 Value = Trp Always Enbld Yes ____ No ____
Y-4 Value =
X-5 Value = COMM ANALOG SCALING (if using Modbus)
Y-5 Value = Cas Scale Factor =
X-6 Value = Aux Scale Factor =
Y-6 Value = KW Scale Factor =
X-7 Value = FSP Scale Factor =
Y-7 Value = Load Share Scale =
X-8 Value =
Y-8 Value = PORT CONFIGURATIONS
X-9 Value = PORT 1 SETTINGS
Y-9 Value = STATUS (status only)
X-10 Value= BAUD =
Y-10 Value= STOP BITS =
X-11 Value = PARITY =
Y-11 Value = DRIVER =
ASCII OR RTU =
ACT2 LINEARIZATION MODBUS DEVICE # =
X-1 Value = TIME OUT DELAY (SEC) =
Y-1 Value = PORT 2 SETTINGS
X-2 Value = STATUS (status only)
Y-2 Value = TOP BITS =
X-3 Value = PARITY =
Y-3 Value = DRIVER =
X-4 Value = ASCII OR RTU =
Y-4 Value = MODBUS DEVICE # =
X-5 Value = TIME OUT DELAY (SEC) =
Y-5 Value = PC PORT SETTINGS
X-6 Value = STATUS (status only)
Y-6 Value = BAUD =
X-7 Value = STOP BITS =
Y-7 Value = PARITY =
X-8 Value = DRIVER =
Y-8 Value =
X-9 Value =
Y-9 Value =
X-10 Value=
Y-10 Value=
X-11 Value =
Y-11 Value =
PORT 1 SETTINGS (if configured)

Port 1 Link Error (status only)
Exception Error (status only)
Error Code (status only)
Use Modbus 1 Trip? Yes ____ No ____
Use 2-Step Trip? Yes ____ No ____
Enbl When Local Yes ____ No ____
Trp Always Enbld Yes ____ No ____
Woodward 113
Appendix C.
Password Information
General
The 505 Series control system requires a password to be entered before access
can be given to the SERVICE, CONFIGURE, DEBUG, or OS_FAULTS modes.
The Download Configuration function also requires a password. These
passwords are intended to help prevent unauthorized or untrained personnel
from accessing these modes and possibly making changes that could cause
damage to the turbine or associated process. If only certain people are to know
these passwords, remove this appendix and keep it in a separate place, apart
from the manual.
Service Mode Password

When the display reads:
The password for your control is: 1 1 1 1
Press the keys on the 505 front panel in this sequence followed by ENTER to
gain access to the SERVICE mode.
Debug Mode Password
gain access to the DEBUG Mode.
114 Woodward
Configure Mode Password

gain access to the CONFIGURE mode.
OS_FAULTS Mode Password

Press the keys on the 505 front panel in this sequence to gain access to the
OS_FAULTS mode.
Download Configuration Function Password

gain access to the Load Configuration function.
Woodward 115
116 Woodward
Declarations
We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.
Send comments to: icinfo@woodward.com
Please reference publication 85017V2D.
PO Box 1519, Fort Collins CO 80522-1519, USA

1000 East Drake Road, Fort Collins CO 80525, USA
Phone +1 (970) 482-5811  Fax +1 (970) 498-3058
Email and Website—www.woodward.com
Woodward has company-owned plants, subsidiaries, and branches,

as well as authorized distributors and other authorized service and sales facilities throughout the world.
Complete address / phone / fax / email information for all locations is available on our website.
2009/11/Fort Collins
DR22 pressure controller 8
8 DR22 pressure controller

▪ 025.0
See also
2 025.0 -- Pressure governor -- 49014201723 -- 300893 [➙ 3]
EQUI/900517/000- 8-1
8 DR22 pressure controller
8-2 EQUI/900517/000-
300893
300893
300893
SIPART DR22
Serial SIPART 6DR2210 Bus Interface
Operating Instructions C79000-B7476-C155-03
Explanation to the manual C79000-G7476-C154
Contents
Page
1 Hardware: SIPART 6DR2210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Software: Function “SIPART 6DR2210 bus interface” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 Possible applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3.1 Transmission procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3.2 Safety features, error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3.3 Offline parameters of the SES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.3.4 Structur device ”StrS” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3.5 Parameter ”onPA” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.3.6 Parameter ”OFPA” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3.7 Parameter ”PASt” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.3.8 Parameter ”CAE4”/”CAE5” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.3.9 Function definitions ”FdEF” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.3.10 Function conection ”FCon” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.3.11 Function position ”FPoS” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.3.12 Contents of status register and process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.3.13 Addresses for batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.3.14 Representation of parameters and process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3.15 Copy protection by means of a keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3 PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.1 PROFIBUS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2 Preparations before Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2.1 Settings on the SIPART DR Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2.2 Configuring the Slave for the Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2.3 Parameterization of the Slave for the Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2.4 Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.3 Transmission Procedure with job identification (AKZ) and
parameter number (PNU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.4 Description of the Communication Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.1 Interpretation of Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.2 Interpretation of Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.3 Interpretation of Variable Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.4 Interpretation of Conversion Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.5 Universal Communication Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.6 Writing Process Data (Cyclic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.7 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.8 Table of the DP communication objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
302232
SIPARTR, SITRANSR, SIMATICR
are Siemens registered trademarks. All other products or system names are (registered) trademarks of their
respective owners and must be treated accordingly.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for
damages.
All rights created by the granting of patents or registration of a design are reserved.
Technical data subject to change without notice
302232
Operation Instructions Serial SIPART 6DR2210 Bus Interface
1 Hardware: SIPART 6DR2210

Refer to the Instructions C79000-G7476-C154 for the installation and connections of the SES module 6DR2803-8A
or -8C and the bus driver C73451-A347-B202.
Quick Reference - connection to PC-COM:

PC-COM
DR-module
Name Pin-No. 9 pin D-Sub 25 pin D-Sub
Pin-No. Pin-No.
RxD 3 <----------------> 3 2
TxD 2 <----------------> 2 3
Gnd 7/8 <----------------> 5 7
2 Software: Function ”SIPART 6DR2210 bus interface”

2.1 Possible applications
The serial interface (SES) 6DR2803-8A or -8C and the bus driver C73451-A347-B202 can be used with the
SIPART 6DR2210 for point-to-point or bus connections to personal computers, automation systems, control systems
or process computers.
The protocol procedure described below and the data representation enable fast transfer of data between the
devices on the one hand and also ensure high transmission reliability on the other (Hamming distance d = 4
for the data section).
2.2 General
Alternatively:
D SIPART DR bus interface

- V.24/V.28 signals: Txd (103), Rxd (104) and Ground (102) (designations to CCITT V.24)
- Up to 32 DR controllers possible on one bus (a bus driver is required with 4 or more controllers or long lines)
- Transmission is also possible with TTY signals when using the bus driver
- Half-duplex mode
- (Full-duplex mode) -- 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 baud
- Asynchronous mode
D RS485 bus interface
2.3 Software
2.3.1 Transmission procedure

D Character frame
- 10-bit frame (start bit; 7 data bits of an ASCII character, starting with the LSB; parity bit; stop bit);
rest position = 1 = High (TTL) = -15 to -5 or -3 V (V.28) = 20 mA (TTY)
- Parity (cross-check sum) can be set to even or odd.
D Procedure
- To DIN 66258, Part 1, configuration A or B (can be set); either with or without longitudinal redundancy check (Lrc)
before (as 2 ASCII characters) or after the end-of-message character ETX
- Longitudinal redundancy check possible either normal or complemented
- Master/slave arrangement: the controller is passive, it only reacts to requests
- See ”Safety features, error handling” for procedure in event of fault.
D Protocol
- 4 different time-optimized messages to the controller:
" Command to a controller
" Controller scan
" Abbreviated scan (repetition of last valid scan)
" Controller alarm scan
C79000-B7476-C155-03 3
302232
Serial SIPART 6DR2210 Bus Interface Operation Instructions
D Character conventions
STX 02H
StNo 40H to 5FH Station number, 32 possible addresses from 00 to 31
StNoA 60H to 7FH Station number with alarm scan; StNoA = StNo + 20H
Station number with alarm scan; StNoA = StNo + 20H to detect a
StNoA 60H to 7FH supply voltage failure on the DR22; reset to StNo following scan
Station number in case of unaccepted message; StNoB: = StNo - 20H for
identification of
StNoB 20H to 3FH - Commands on disabled pages
- No enable or interrupted enable for parameterization or structuring
N0 40H to 5FH Number of n0 bytes transmitted by computer (min. 1 = 40H, max. 32 = 5FH)
Number of n1 bytes to be transmitted by DR22 (min. 1, max. 32)
N1 60H to 7FH N1 = N0 + 20H
HiAd.0 40H to 5FH High address
High nibble of the 8-Bit-in-page-address (30H to 39H, 41H to 46H) of 1st
LoAd.1 ASCII 0 to 9, A to F transmitted byte
Low nibble of the 8-Bit-in-page-address (30H to 39H, 41H to 46H) of 1st
LoAd.2 ASCII 0 to 9, A to F transmitted byte
Data 2*ASCII 0 to 9, A to F
8 bit as 2 hexadecimal characters (sequence: high nibble, low nibble)
byte (30Hto39H,41Hto46H)
STN 40H to 7FH Current stati (new values)
STN1 40H to 7FH
STA 40H to 7FH Stati, old values which have occurred since the last alarm scan and which
STA1 40H to 7FH have been obtained by bit-by-bit ORing of StA and StN once per DR22 cycle.
StA is set to 00H following an alarm scan.
Longitudinal redundancy check, block check character: obtained by
Lrc 7 Bit EXORing all 7-bit characters excluding STX, including ETX; the parity bit
for Lrc is formed from the 7 bit of the Lrc
Lrc.1 ASCII 0 to 7 High nibble of Lrc, (MSB = 0)
Lrc.2 ASCII 0 to 9, A to F Low nibble of Lrc (in this case longitudinal redundancy check excluding ETX)
# 23H Code to repeat the last valid request
ETX 03H
D Block conventions
(Representation in chronological order from left to right, data transmitted by computer in 1st line, transmitted
by the controller in 2nd line; examples according to block structure type 2).
Command to a controller*
. . . STX,StNo,N0,HiAd.0,LoAd.1,LoAd.2, 2*n0 characters (data),ETX,Lrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STX,StNo or StNoB,ETX,Lrc . . . . . . . . . . . .
controller scan *
. . . STX,StNo,N1,HiAd.0,LoAd.1,LoAd.2,ETX,Lrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STX,StNo,2*n1 characters (data),ETX,Lrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviated controller scan (repetition of last valid scan, e.g. for cyclic image updating):*
. . STX,StNo,#,ETX,Lrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STX,StNo,2*n1 characters (data),ETX,Lrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
controller alarm scan *

. . STX,StNoA,ETX,Lrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STX,StNo or StNoA ,STN,STA,ETX,Lrc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
* The commas are not part of the message
4 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
2.3.2 Safety features, error handling

Error monitoring of the controller always refers to the receiver side of the controller; the transmitter side must be monitored by
corresponding functions from the computer. Monitoring is used for the following task:
- Faulty data must be prevented from being transferred to the controller

- The controller must return to a defined initial status following transmission errors in order to be able to receive
new messages
D Time-out A: message interval (CB) monitoring

The monitoring time can be adjusted between 1 and 25 s or switched off by means of the structure switch
S107. It is only effective in computer mode via the serial interface and is used to check whether computer
readiness CB = 1 is still present. If messages do not follow in succession within the monitoring time, a
computer failure is assumed and the CB signal of the serial interface is set to zero, i.e. the associated
controller starts in stand-alone mode. Time-out A is retriggered by each complete, correctly received message,
even if this message does not contain the CB signal.
If computer failure has been detected, the message must contain CB in order to switch back to computer
mode.
D Time-out B: character interval monitoring

Monitoring time = 1 or 2 controller cycles (depending on when the last character was received with respect
to the controller cycle). Once the controller has received an STX and its station address as the start-of-message,
all further characters must occur in succession according to the monitoring time interval. A computer failure
is assumed if the monitoring time is exceeded, the character position of the controller is reset to the original
status. All characters received up to this point are ignored. This ensures that the controller is ready to receive
new messages following a temporary computer failure even if the failure occurred during a message.
Any message from the computer may be aborted at any time and the received message is declared as
invalid by the time-out monitoring (time-out B = 1 or 2 controller cycles) or with the next start-of-message
with STX; no reply is made.
D STX monitoring
A message has to be started from the computer with STX (02H). The controller remains in the original
status until it recognises an STX and its station number; only then will the internal interface course be established
and the time-out B function initiated.
D ETX monitoring
The controller expects an ETX (03H) at a fixed position.
D Lrc monitoring
The longitudinal redundancy check Lrc is expected at the last position of the received message if structured
accordingly. This is compared with the internal Lrc value generated during reception. If an error is detected,
the received data are ignored and no response is sent.
The Lrc is generated by EXORing all characters following the STX up to the last character to be transmitted
before Lrc. Comparison with the received Lrc by means of the EXOR function must result in 00, or 7FH
in the case of complementary Lrc formation. The Lrc results in a Hamming distance d = 4, without Lrc
d = 2.
D Protection from power failure of values for parameterization and structuring transmitted via the interface
The values are protected from power failure if the computer transmits the corresponding characters for end
of parameterization/structuring at the end of the transmission and if the enable conditions for receiving data
have not been changed in the meantime. The data are stored in a non-volatile EEPROM.
C79000-B7476-C155-03 5
302232
D Sequence of functions:
Receive
The controller receives the characters in an interrupt routine. The individual parities are checked for vertical
parity during this interrupt and the horizontal parity is continuously generated once the station number has
been received. The address and length are stored and a receiver buffer reserved according to the length.
The data 1 to n0 are entered into the receiver buffer. The data are transferred at the end of the cycle
from the receiver buffer to their destinations determined by the addresses HiAd, LoAd following EXT, and
are then available as input values for the new cycle. The current results (output values) are calculated from
these input values in the new cycle.
Transmit
The controller starts to transmit the data requested by the controller immediately after correctly receiving the
query message. An auxiliary memory in the main memory RAM is used as a transmitter buffer for this purpose
and is loaded once with the current process image during the controller cycle (but not when transmitting
is taking place). The initial address of the data to be transmitted is determined by HiAd, LoAd and the
number by n1. Transmission takes place sequentially from an interrupt routine and the vertical parity, bit
and horizontal parity are generated.
A special transmitter buffer area is not reserved for the transfer of parameters and structures to the computer
which means that these values cannot be manually adjusted during transmission.
Only the specified address ranges can be accessed via the SES. If other pages are addressed, an acknowledge-
ment is made with a station number reduced by 20H. The messages are ignored.
D Parameterization/structuring via the SES (write ! into the controller)

Parameterization and structuring must be initiated via ST1 (start) (see page 24), followed by the messages
with the parameter values or structures, and then terminated by ST1 (end). Either parameterization or structuring
is possible. The two functions cannot be selected at the same time. The function first requested using ST1
(start) is carried out. The operational stati parameterization and structuring are displayed in the process level
on w, x via the SES as a warning. The following appears: w:onPA; x:SES or w:StrU; x:SES. Parameterization/struc-
turing on the front module has priority. Since message transfer with parameter and structure values is aborted
or ignored when a front module entry is made, the multi-byte variables must always be accommodated without
gaps between the bytes in the messages.
D Parameterization via the SES (write ! into the controller)

1. The computer reads ST2 *) :
Bit ST2
7 0 Process operation level is quit

6 0 --
5 0 MEM Err
4 X offline system **) Enable conditions for parameterization
3 X onPA SES **) via the SES
2 0 StrU SES
1 0 Par. via Front module
0 0 Struc. via Front module
*) The bits of the STATi are represented in positive logic, i.e. the bits = 1 when they occur
**) x = don’t care
2. If the enable conditions are satisfied, the computer transmits ST1,bit7 = 1 (start parameterization).
3. The controller receives ST1,bit7 = 1 in an interrupt routine and subsequently tests the enable conditions in the basic
cycle. If the conditions are satisfied, onPA/SES is displayed on w/x. The keys +Dw/--Dw and + Dy/--Dy no effect. If the
enable conditions are satisfied, the following parameter messages are each acknowledged with the addressed station
number.
If they are not satisfied, the message acknowledgement is made with the station number StNoB = StNo -- 20H and
the parameter messages are ignored.
4. If parameter messages are transmitted without ST1,bit7 = 1 (start parameterization) having been transmitted
previously a station number reduced by 20H is also transmitted and the messages are ignored.
5. Once ST1,bit7 = 1 has been transmitted, the computer can transmit any number of parameter messages.
6 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
6. The DR22 stores each message for the destination into the RAM. The parameters are immediately effective in the
process.
7. During the transfer of the parameter values, any additional messages (except structuring messages) can be
exchanged between the computer and the DR22.
8. If the enable conditions change during transfer of the parameters (for example by parameterization on the front
module), the acknowledgement is also made with the station number reduced by 20H and the message is not
transferred to the RAM. Previously executed parameter messages have been transferred to the RAM and are
therefore effective. They cannot be transferred to the EEPROM via ST1,bit6 = 1 (end of parameterization),
however. ST1,bit7 = 1 (start parameterization) must be transmitted again for further parameter messages.
9. At the end of parameterization, the computer transmits ST1,bit6 = 1 (end parameterization).

10. The DR22 receives ”End parameterization” but only accepts it if ”Start parameterization” was previously present and
the enable conditions have not changed in the meantime, and transfers the parameters from the RAM to the EEPROM
(user memory).
11. The online parameters are stored in the RAM and are also effective if the computer does not transmit ”End parameteri-
zation”, but they are not stored in the non-volatile EEPROM. If a bus fault is present, the parameters can be transferred
from the RAM to the EEPROM by switching to the parameterization level using the front module when the parameteri-
zation level is left again.
12. The computer reads ST2/ST3 after the maximum write time of 20 s:
Bit ST2 ST3
7 0 Process operating level is quit 0 —

6 0 -- 0 Transmitting Yo-par. unsuccessful
5 0 MEM Err 1 Power on
4 0 offline system 0 Transmitting tv-par. unsuccessful
3 1 onPA SES 0 Sum err
2 0 SES StrU 0 ncon err
1 0 Par. via Front module 0 --PoS err
0 0 Struc. via Front module 0 nPoS err
and detects from ST3/bit 5 that a power failure was not present when the EEPROM was written. ST2/bit 3 provides
the acknowledgement that the DR24 was controlled into online parameterization via the SES.
D Structuring via the SES (write ! in the controller)

1. The computer reads ST2:
Bit ST2
7 0 Process operation level is quit

6 0 --
5 0 MEM err.
4 X offline system Release conditions for structuring via the SES
3 X onPA SES
2 X StrU SES
1 0 Par. via front module
0 0 Struc. via front module
2. If the enable conditions are satisfied, the computer transmits ST1,bit5 = 1 (start structuring).
3. The controller receives ST1,bit5 in an interrupt routine and subsequently tests the enable conditions in the basic cycle.
IIf the conditions are satisfied, the DR22 switches to offline mode, and StrU/SES is displayed on w/x. The LEDs and
the y display are switched off, and the analog and binary outputs are blocked.
The following structuring messages are each acknowledged with the addressed station number.
If the conditions are not satisfied, the message acknowledgement is made with a station number reduced by 20H and
the messages are ignored.
C79000-B7476-C155-03 7
302232
4. If the structuring messages are transmitted without ”Start structuring” having been transmitted previously, they are also
acknowledged with a station number reduced by 20H. The messages are ignored.
5. The computer can transmit any number of structuring messages once ST1,bit5 = 1 (start structuring) has been trans-
mitted.
6. The controller transfers each message for the destination to the RAM. The modified structures are not yet effective
because of the offline mode.
7. The structuring switch S101 to S107 may be contained in the structuring messages but are not transferred to the RAM.
This means that the data must be entered manually on the front module if they are to be stored in the user memory
(EEPROM).
8. Whilst the structuring messages are being transferred, any other additional messages (except onPA parameter mes-
sages) can be exchanged between the computer and the controller.
9. If the enable conditions change during transfer of the structures (for example by structuring on the front module), the
acknowledgement is also made with the station number StNoB = StNo -- 20H. The message is not transferred to the
RAM. Previous structuring messages have been transferred to the RAM and are also effective by returning to online
mode. They cannot be transferred to the EEPROM via ST1,bit4 (end structuring), however. ST1,bit5 = 1 (start structur-
ing) must be transmitted again for further structuring messages.
10. At the end of structuring, the computer transmits ST1,bit4 = 1 (end structuring).
11. The controller receives ”End structuring” but only accepts it if ”Start structuring” was previously present and the enable
conditions have not changed in the meantime. The structures are transferred from the RAM to the EEPROM. A return
is made to online mode if no errors have been detected during the error check.
12. The structures are stored in the RAM if the computer does not transmit ”End structuring” but are not effective because
of the offline mode which is still present and are not stored in the non-volatile EEPROM.
If a bus fault is present, offline mode can be selected again by switching over to structuring on the front module. These
structures are also transferred to the EEPROM when the structuring level is left again.
13. The computer reads ST2/ST3 after the maximum write time of 20 s:
Bit ST2 ST3
7 0 Process operation is quit 0 —

6 0 -- 0 Transmitting Yo-par. unsuccessful
5 0 MEM Err 1 Power on
4 1 offline system 0 Transmitting tv-par. unsuccessful
3 0 onPA SES 0 Sum err
2 1 StrU SES 0 ncon err
1 0 Par. via front 0 -PoS err
0 0 Struc. via front 0 nPoS err
It detects from ST3,bit5 that a power failure was not present during writing of the EEPROM and from ST3/bits 0 to 3,
that no connection or positioning errors were present. ST3/bit 4 and ST2/bit 2 provide the acknowledgements for offline
mode and structuring via the SES.
2.3.3 Offline parameters of the SES

1. S102 Data transfer rate adjustable to: 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200, 600, 300 characters per second
2. S105 Longitudinal parity formation: 0 = normal , 1 = complementary
3. S104 Longitudinal parity position: 0 = without Lrc, 1 = Lrc after ETX, 2 = Lrc before ETX
4. S103 Cross parity formation: 0 = even, 1 = odd
5. S106 Station number: 0 to 31 (to 125 for PROFIBUS)
6. S107 CB time monitoring as a multiple of the cycle time: without, 1, 2 to 25 s.
8 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
2.3.4 Structure switch ”StrS”

Note: adjustable range is from 0 to “Max”
Contents: Addresses of the structure switch from the menu ”StrS”
HiAd: 41H HiAd: 41H
LoAd: 00H to 2EH LoAd: 2FH to 64H
NAME LoAd Max NOTES NAME LoAd Max NOTES
S0 00H 254 Identification of the user memory S47 2FH 2 Control signal: CB
S1 01H 12 Controller type S48 30H 1 N
S2 02H 2 Output structure S49 31H 2 Switch over: intern/extern
S3 03H 1 Power frequency suppression S50 32H 1 x-tracking
S4 04H 1 Interconnection input range S51 33H 1 Set point at CB cut-out
S5 05H 3 input range: AE1 S52 34H 1 Tracking:internal: internal set point
S6 06H 3 AE2 S53 35H 1 Source: external set point
S7 07H 3 AE3 S54 36H 1 Direction of control action
S8 08H 7 AE4 controller I on xdI
S9 09H 7 AE5 S55 37H 3 D-element input controller I
S10 0AH 1 Root extraction: AE1 S56 38H 1 Direction of control action
S11 0BH 1 AE2 controller II on xdII
S12 0CH 1 AE3 S57 39H 3 D-element input controller II
S13 0DH 1 AE4 S58 3AH 2 Selection of adaption
S14 0EH 1 AE5 S59 3BH 2 Parameter control (PC)
S15 0FH 11 Alloc.: 0%,AE1,4,5... → FE1 S60 3CH 30 Control size for PC
S16 10H 11 0%,AE2,4,5... → FE2 S61 3DH 1 Priority N(DDC) or H
S17 11H 11 0%,AE3,4,5... → FE3 S62 3EH 1 Source: external manip. variable
S18 12H 11 0%,AE1,2,3,4 → FE4 S63 3FH 2 Man. control for meas. transd. dist.
S19 13H 11 0%,AE1,2,3,4 → FE5/6 S64 40H 4 Blocking: switch over H/A
S20 14H 1 Linearisation: I S65 41H 1 K-controller: split range
S21 15H 1 II S66 42H 1 DDC: ly-switching off
S22 16H 6 Module location: 5 S67 43H 3 Manipulated variable display (MVD)
assembling S68 44H 1 Direct. of control action of the MVD
S23 17H 6 6
S24 18H 19 Alloc.: CB S69 45H 1 Output signal: AA1
S25 19H 18 He S70 46H 1 AA2
S26 1AH 18 N S71 47H 1 0/4 to 20 mA AA3
S27 1BH 18 Si S72 48H 1 AA4
S28 1CH 18 BLS S73 49H 41 Alloc. on contr. signal: AA1
S29 1DH 18 BLPS S74 4AH 41 AA2
S30 1EH 18 PI S75 4BH 41 AA3
Binary
S31 1FH 18 PII inputs S76 4CH 16 Alloc.: RB
S32 20H 18 PAU S77 4DH 16 Binary outputs RC
S33 21H 18 +dw S78 4EH 16 H
S34 22H 18 -dw S79 4FH 16 N
S35 23H 18 +dy S80 50H 16 A1
S36 24H 18 -dy S81 51H 16 A2
S37 25H 18 +yBL S82 52H 16 A3
S38 26H 18 -yBL S83 53H 16 A4
S39 27H 1 Control signal: CB S84 54H 16 MTD
S40 28H 1 BE direction of control action He S85 55H 16 Int I
S41 29H 1 N S86 56H 1 Direct. of contr. action: RB
S42 2AH 1 Si S87 57H 1 Binary outputs RC
S43 2BH 1 PI/PII S88 58H 1 H
S44 2CH 1 +dw/-dw S89 59H 1 N
S45 2DH 1 +dy/-dy S90 5AH 1 A1/A2
S46 2EH 1 +yBL/-yBL S91 5BH 1 A3/A4
S92 5CH 1 MTD
S93 5DH 1 Int I
S94 5EH 37 Input A1, A2
S95 5FH 37 A3, A4
S96 60H 3 Function min/max: A1, A2
S97 61H 3 A3, A4
S98 62H 2 Setting & display A1 to A4
S99 63H 1 Re-start conditions
S100 64H 1 Optical signalling
C79000-B7476-C155-03 9
302232
D 1-byte structure switch which can only be read from the computer
HiAd: 41H
LoAd: 65H to 6BH
NAME LoAd Max NOTES

S101 65H 5 Data transfer
S102 66H 5 Baud rate
S103 67H 1 Cross parity
S104 68H 2 Longitudinal parity SES
S105 69H 1 Longitudinal parity normal/inverted
S106 6AH 125 Station number
S107 6BH 25 Time monitoring CBses
D byte structure switch which can be read/written from the computer

HiAd: 41H
LoAd: 6CH to B2H
NAME LoAd Max NOTES

S200 6CH 3 Input range AE6
S201 6DH 3 AE7
S202 6EH 3 AE8
S203 6FH 3 AE9
S204 70H 3 AE10
S205 71H 3 AE11
S206 72H 1 Root extraction: AE6
S207 73H 1 AE7
S208 74H 1 AE8
S209 75H 1 AE9
S210 76H 1 AE10
S211 77H 1 AE11
S212 78H 11 Allocation FE7
S213 79H 11 FE8
S214 7AH 11 FE9
S215 7BH 11 FE10
S216 7CH 11 FE11
S217 7DH 11 FE12
S218 7EH 18 Alloc. binary inputs: BLB
S219 7FH 19 CBII
S220 80H 18 HeII
S221 81H 18 NII
S222 82H 18 SiII
S223 83H 18 /tSI
S224 84H 19 /tSII
S225 85H 19 /wSLI
S226 86H 19 /wSLII
S227 87H 18 +yBLI
S228 88H 18 --yBLII
S229 89H 1 Binary inputs:
direction of control action /tSI and /tSII
S230 8AH 1 /wSLI and /wSLII
S231 8BH 2 Output structure controller II
S232 8CH 2 Switch over internalII/externalII
S233 8DH 1 x-tracking controller II
S234 8EH 1 set point at CBII cut-out
S235 8FH 1 Tracking internal setpoint wiII
S236 90H 2 Display ratio controller
S237 91H -- --
10 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232

HiAd: 41H (contd)
LoAd: 6CH to B2H (contd)
NAME LoAd Max NOTES

S238 92H 1 Priority NII (DDCII) or HII
S239 93H 2 Manual control controller II for meas.
transd. dist.
S240 94H 4 Blocking: switch over HII/AII
S241 95H 1 Function: split range controller II
S242 96H 1 NII/DDCII: Iy-switching off
S243 97H 3 Manipulated variable display of controller II
S244 98H 1 Direction of control action controller II
S245 99H 1 Manipulated variable limit of controller I
S246 9AH 1 Manipulated variable limit of controller II
S247 9BH 1 Output signal: AA5
S248 9CH 1 AA6
S249 9DH 1 0 to 20 mA AA7
S250 9EH 1 AA8
S251 9FH 1 AA9
S252 A0H 41 Alloc. on controller signal: AA4
S253 A1H 41 AA5
S254 A2H 41 AA6
S255 A3H 41 AA7
S256 A4H 41 AA8
S257 A5H 41 AA9
S258 A6H 16 Alloc.: Binary outputs: RBII
S259 A7H 16 RCII
S260 A8H 16 HII
S261 A9H 16 NII
S262 AAH 16 IntII
S263 ABH 16 FE9
S264 ACH 16 FE10
S265 ADH 16 FE11
S266 AEH 16 FE12
S267 AFH 38 Input A2
S268 B0H 38 Input A4
1)
S269 B1H 18 Allocation: tS_StopI
S270 B2H 18 tS_StopII 1)
1) from software version --C9 onwards
Meaning of contents of S15 to S19 and S212 to S217
Content S15 S16 S17 S19 S18, S212 to S217

0H 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%
1H AE1A AE2A AE3A AE1A AE1A
8H AEAA AEAA AEAA AE9A AE8A
9H AEBA AEBA AEBA AEAA AE9A
AH AE2A AE1A AE1A AEBA AEAA
BH AE3A AE3A AE2A AE4A AEBA
C79000-B7476-C155-03 11
302232
2.3.5 Parameter ”onPA”

Contents: Addresses of the online parameters from the menu ”onPA”
HiAd: 40H
LoAd: 00H to 55H
NAME LoAd BYTE TYPE RANGE DIM NOTES
tFI 00H 2 LOG OFF, 1.000 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
vvI 02H 2 ” 0.100 __ 10.00 1
cPI 04H 2 ” 0.100 __ 100.0 1
tnI 06H 2 ” 1.000 __ 9984 Sec.
tvI 08H 2 ” OFF, 1.000 __ 2992 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
AHI 0AH 2 LIN 0.000 __ 10.00 %
YoI 0CH 2 ” AUTO, 0.000 __ 100.0 % AUTO:=00H,01H
YAI 0EH 2 ” -10.000 __ 110.0 % YAI ≤YEI
YEI 10H 2 ” -10.000 __ 110.0 % YAI ≤YEI
tFII 12H 2 LOG OFF, 1.000 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
vvII 14H 2 ” 0.100 __ 10.00 1
cPII 16H 2 ” 0.100 __ 100.0 1
tnII 18H 2 ” 1.000 __ 9984 Sec.
tvII 1AH 2 ” OFF, 1.000 __ 2992 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
AHII 1CH 2 LIN 0.000 __ 10.00 %
YoII 1EH 2 ” AUTO, 0.000 __ 100.0 % AUTO:=00H,01H
YAII 20H 2 ” -10.000 __ 110.0 % YAII ≤ YEII
YEII 22H 2 ” -10.000 __ 110.0 % YAII ≤ YEII
dr 24H 2 FIX 1 __ 100 1 Factor × tc
ty 26H 2 LOG OFF 1.000 __ 1000 Sec.
tA 28H 2 FIX 1 __ 30 1 Factor × 20 ms
tE 2AH 2 ” 1 __ 30 1 Factor × 20 ms
tF1 2CH 2 LOG OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tF2 2EH 2 ” OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tF3 30H 2 ” OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tF4 32H 2 ” OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tF5 34H 2 ” OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
c1 36H 2 FIX -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % 00H,02H=0.001
c2 38H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
c3 3AH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
c4 3CH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
c5 3EH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
c6 40H 2 ” -1999 __ 1999 % 00H,02H=0.01
P01 42H 2 FIX -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % 00H,02H=0.001
P02 44H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P03 46H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P04 48H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P05 4AH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P06 4CH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P07 4EH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P08 50H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P09 52H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P10 54H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
12 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
HiAd: 59H
LoAd: 00H to 1DH
P11 00H 2 FIX -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % 00H,02H=0.001
P12 02H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P13 04H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P14 06H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
P15 08H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 0.1 % ”
tyII 0AH 2 LOG OFF 1.000 __ 1000 Sec.
tAII 0CH 2 FIX 1 __ 30 1 Factor × 20 ms
tEII 0EH 2 ” 1 __ 30 1 Factor × 20 ms
tF6 10H 2 LOG OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tF7 12H 2 ” OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tF8 14H 2 ” OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tF9 16H 2 ” OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tFA 18H 2 ” OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tFb 1AH 2 ” OFF, 0.100 __ 1000 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
c7 1CH 2 FIX -1999 __ 1999 % 00H,02H=0.01
c8 1EH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 % 00H,02H=0.001
c9 20H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 % ”
C79000-B7476-C155-03 13
302232
2.3.6 Parameter ”OFPA”

Contents: Addresses of the online parameters from the menu “oFPA”
HiAd: 40H
LoAd: 56H to 81H
dPI 56H 2 FIX 0 __ 3 1 1)
dAI 58H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 1
dEI 5AH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 1
dPII 5CH 2 FIX 0 __ 3 1 1)

dAII 5EH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 1
dEII 60H 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 1
A1 62H 2 LIN -110 __ 110 % 2)
A2 64H 2 ” -110 __ 110 % 2)
A3 66H 2 ” -110 __ 110 % 2)
A4 68H 2 ” -110 __ 110 % 2)
H1.2 6AH 2 LIN 0.1 __ 20.0 % for A1, A2

H3.4 6CH 2 ” 0.1 __ 20.0 % for A3, A4
SA 6EH 2 LIN -10.0 __ 110.0 % SA≤SE, 3)
SE 70H 2 ” -10.0 __ 110.0 % SA≤SE, 3)
SH 72H 2 ” -10.0 __ 110.0 % 3)
3)
Sb 74H 2 ” -10.0 __ 110.0 %
3)
tS 76H 2 LOG OFF, 0.100 __ 9984 Min.
VA 78H 2 FIX 0 __ 19999 0.1 % vA≤vE
VE 7AH 2 ” 0 __ 19999 0.1 % vA≤vE
YS 7CH 2 LIN -10.0 __ 110.0 %
Y1 7EH 2 LIN 0.0 __ 100.0 %
Y2 80H 2 ” 0.0 __ 100.0 %
HiAd: 5AH
LoAd: 00H to 15H
SAII 00H 2 LIN --10.0 __ 110.0 % SAII≤SEII
SEII 02H 2 ” -10.0 __ 110.0 % SAII≤SEII
tSII 04H 2 LOG OFF, 0.100 __ 9984 Min.
YSII 06H 2 LIN --10.0 __ 110.0 %
Pd 08H 2 FIX 0 __ 3 1 Display
Ad 0AH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 1 ratio
Ed 0CH 2 ” -1999 __ 19999 1 controller
H2. 0EH 2 LIN 0.1 __ 20.0 % for A2
H4. 10H 2 ” 0.1 __ 20.0 % for A4
Y3 12H 2 LIN 0.0 __ 100.0 %
Y4 14H 2 ” 0.0 __ 100.0 %
Comments:
1) Decimal interpretation: 0: 00H,00H = ----
1: 00H,02H = ---· -
2: 00H,04H = --· --
3: 00H,06H = -· ---
14 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
2) The display format for A1 to A4 is a function of the structure switches S94/S95 and S267/S268
S94/S95
INPUT DISPLAY AND EVALUATION
S267/S268
0 xdI dPI, dAI, dEI
for S1 = 4
1 xI ” and 6 only %
2 wI ”
3 xv ”
4 wv ”
5 xdII dPII, dAII, dEII
6 xII ”
7 wII ”
≥8 Y %
3) The display format for supporting value parameters and specified value parameters as well as specified values
is a function of the structure switch S1
S1 Evaluation: I) dPI, dAI, dEI; II) dPII, dAII, dEII

#
Supporting value parameters Setpoint parameters Setpoint Adjustment range ref.
(FE1) -1.1 to11.1 (FE3) -1.3 to11.3 SA SE SH Sb WiI WiII to dE* -- dA* = 100 %
0 I) I) I) I) I) — I) —
1 I) I) I) I) I) — I) —
-10 % to110 %
2 I) I) I) I) I) — I) —
3 I) I) I) I) I) — I) —
4 % % — — I) — I) — -199.9 % to199.9 %
5 II) I) II) II) II) — I) II) -10 % to110 %
6 % % II) II) II) — I) II) -199.9 % to199.9 %
7 I) II) I) I) I) II) I)
-10 % to110 %
8 I) II) I) I) I) II) I)
9 I) II) — — — — — — -10 % to110 %
10 I) I) I) I) — — I) — ”
11 I) I) I) I) — — I) — ”
12 I) II) I) I) — — I) II) ”
# dA* = -1999 to19999

dE* = -1999 to19999 (except S1 = 4 and S1 = 6)
C79000-B7476-C155-03 15
302232
Contents: Addresses of the offline parameters from the menu “oFPA” at S4:= 0/1
HiAd: 40H
LoAd: 82H to BDH
S4 = 0 S4 = 0/1 S4 = 1
NAME RANGE DIM LoAd BYTE TYPE NAME RANGE DIM

-1.1 82H 2 LIN -10/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
0.1 84H 2 ” 0/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
1.1 86H 2 ” 10/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
2.1 88H 2 ” 20/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
3.1 8AH 2 ” 30/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
see
4.1 8CH 2 ” 40/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
see comment 3) comment
5.1 3) 8EH 2 ” 50/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
(above)
6.1 90H 2 ” 60/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
(above)
7.1 92H 2 ” 70/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
8.1 94H 2 ” 80/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
9.1 96H 2 ” 90/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
10.1 98H 2 ” 100/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
11.1 9AH 2 ” 110/FU1 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
-1.3 9CH 2 LIN -10/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
0.3 9EH 2 ” 0/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
1.3 A0H 2 ” 10/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
2.3 A2H 2 ” 20/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
3.3 see A4H 2 ” 30/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
4.3 A6H 2 ” 40/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
see comment 3) comment
5.3 A8H 2 ” 50/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
(above) 3)
6.3 AAH 2 ” 60/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
7.3 (above) ACH 2 ” 70/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
8.3 AEH 2 ” 80/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
9.3 B0H 2 ” 90/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
10.3 B2H 2 ” 100/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
11.3 B4H 2 ” 110/FU2 -199.9 __ 199.9 %
B6H 2 FIX PA /rE 10 __ 1000 0.1 %
B8H 2 ” PE /rE 100 __ 9999 % 4)
BAH 2 ” tA /rE 10 __ 1000 0.1 %
BCH 2 ” tE /rE 100 __ 9999 % 4)
4) Interpretation of PE, tE:

An identification has been coded in bit 7 (MSB)
MSB = 0 → actual decimal value := stored FIX value/1000

→ range: 1.000 to 9.999
MSB = 1 → actual decimal value := stored FIX value/100
→ range: 10.00 to 99.99
16 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
2.3.7 Parameter ”PASt”

Contents: Addresses of the offline parameters from the menu ”PASt”
HiAd: 40H
LoAd: BEH to F1H
vvc BEH 2 LOG 0.100 __ 10.00 1
cP1 C0H 2 LOG 0.100 __ 100.0 1
cP3 C2H 2 ” ” 1
cP5 C4H 2 ” ” 1
cP7 C6H 2 ” ” 1
cP9 C8H 2 ” ” 1
tn1 CAH 2 LOG 1.000 __ 9984 Sec.
tn3 CCH 2 ” ” ”
tn5 CEH 2 ” ” ”
tn7 DOH 2 ” ” ”
tn9 D2H 2 ” ” ”
tv1 *) D4H 2 LOG OFF, 1.000 __ 2992 Sec. OFF:=00H,00H
tv3 *) D6H 2 ” ” ” ”
tv5 *) D8H 2 ” ” ” ”
tv7 *) DAH 2 ” ” ” ”
tv9 *) DCH 2 ” ” ” ”
AH1 DEH 2 LIN 0.000 __ 10.00 %
AH3 E0H 2 ” ” %
AH5 E2H 2 ” ” %
AH7 E4H 2 ” ” %
AH9 E6H 2 ” ” %
Yo1 **) E8H 2 LIN AUTO, 0.000 __ 100.0 % AUTO:=00H,01H
Yo3 **) EAH 2 ” ” % ”
Yo5 **) ECH 2 ” ” % ”
Yo7 **) EEH 2 ” ” % ”
Yo9 **) F0H 2 ” ” % ”
*) - In the exchange of “tv” parameters for “PASt” on oFF or ¹oFF, all 5 tv parameters in a message must be
transmitted simultaneously with the value oFF or ¹oFF, otherwise the present values remain!
- If all 5 tv parameters are ¹oFF, they can be altered individually or in groups in their value (with the exception
of oFF!) via the SES.
- Whether the transmission of at least one tv parameter has been successful or not, ST3.4 can be checked
after the transmission by means of a scan to the status.
- If ST3.4 = 1, then transmission failed; if not, then it was successful.
- The current status ST3.4 remains until at least one new tv parameter (tv1,3,5,7,9) has been transmitted via
the SES. The status is updated according to success!
**) As for *), but: AUto instead of oFF

Y0 instead of tv
ST3.6 instead of ST3.4
C79000-B7476-C155-03 17
302232
2.3.8 Parameter ”CAE4”/”CAE5”

D Parameters which can be read/written from the computer
HiAd: 5AH
Name Dimen
Dimen-
LoAd Byte TYPE Setting range Parameter meaning
dd2 dd3 sion
SEnS AE4 80H 1 BIN 0 to 7 Sensor type 1)
Temperature unit 2)
unit AE4 81H 1 BIN 0 to 2
Thermocouple type 3)
tc AE4 82H 1 BIN 0 to 10
Line resistance PT100 2-wire 4)
Mr AE4 83H 2 FIX 0.00 to 100.00 Ohm 5)
tb AE4 85H 2 FIX 0.0 to 400.0 degree Temperature reference point
MP AE4 87H 2 FIX 0 to 3 Decimal point
MA AE4 89H 2 FIX -1999 to 19999 Range start
ME AE4 8BH 2 FIX -1999 to 19999 Range end
CA AE4 8DH 2 FIX Calibration range start
CE AE4 8FH 2 FIX Calibration range end
SEnS AE5 91H 1 BIN 0 to 7 Sensor type 1)
Temperature unit 2)
unit AE5 92H 1 BIN 0 to 2
Thermocouple type 3)
tc AE5 93H 1 BIN 0 to 10
Line resistance PT100 2-wire 4)
Mr AE5 94H 2 FIX 0.00 to 100.00 Ohm 5)
tb AE5 96H 2 FIX 0.0 to 400.0 degree Temperature reference point
MP AE5 98H 2 FIX 0 to 3 Decimal point
MA AE5 9AH 2 FIX -1999 to 19999 Range start
ME AE5 9CH 2 FIX -1999 to 19999 Range end
CA AE5 9EH 2 FIX Calibration range start
CE AE5 A0H 2 FIX Calibration range end
1) 0 → mV linear (without message of line breakage) 3) only for SEnS = 1 to 2
1 → Thermocouple internal reference point 0 → TYPE L
2 → Thermocouple external reference point 1 → TYPE J
3 → Pt100 4-wire 2 → TYPE K (Display “H”)
4 → Pt100 3-wire 3 → TYPE S
5 → Pt100 2-wire 4 → TYPE B
6 → Resistor R < 600 Ohm 5 → TYPE R
7 → Resistore R < 2.8 KOhm 6 → TYPE E
2) only for SEnS = 1 to 5 7 → TYPE N
0 → Degree Celsius 8 → TYPE T
1 → Degree Fahrenheit 9 → TYPE U
2 → Degree Kelvin (absolute) 10 → any (without linearisation)
4) only for SEnS = 5
5) only for SEnS = 2
18 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
2.3.9 Function definitions ”FdEF”

Address of blocks which can not be activated (contents = 00H) or which can be activated (contents = C0H)
NAME LoAd BYTE NOTES

-- 00H 1 reserved
Ar1 01H 1 Arithmetic
Ar2 02H 1
Ar3 03H 1
Ar4 04H 1
Ar5 05H 1
Ar6 06H 1
FU1 07H 1 Function generator (Lineariser)
FU2 08H 1
MA1 09H 1 MAX selection
MA2 0AH 1
MA3 0BH 1
Mi1 0CH 1 MIN selection
Mi2 0DH 1
Mi3 0EH 1
rE1 0FH 1 Correction computer
AS1 10H 1 Analog switch
AS2 11H 1
AS3 12H 1
AS4 13H 1
AS5 14H 1
Co1 15H 1 Comparator
Co2 16H 1
nA1 17H 1 nand
nA2 18H 1
no1 19H 1 nor
no2 1AH 1
C79000-B7476-C155-03 19
302232
2.3.10 Function connection ”FCon”

The content of the interconnectable inputs determines the output (see next table)
Contents: FCon sinks (inputs)

HiAd: 49H
NAME LoAd BYTE NAME LoAd BYTE

Ar1.1 00H 1 Mi2.1 32H 1
Ar1.2 01H 1 Mi2.2 33H 1
Ar1.3 02H 1 Mi2.3 34H 1
Ar1.4 03H 1 Mi3.1 35H 1
Ar1.5 04H 1 Mi3.2 36H 1
Ar2.1 05H 1 Mi3.3 37H 1
Ar2.2 06H 1 rE1.1 38H 1
Ar2.3 07H 1 rE1.2 39H 1
Ar2.4 08H 1 rE1.3 3AH 1
Ar2.5 09H 1
AS1.1 3BH 1
Ar3.1 0AH 1 AS1.2 3CH 1
Ar3.2 0BH 1 AS1.3 3DH 1
Ar3.3 0CH 1
Ar3.4 0DH 1 AS2.1 3EH 1
Ar3.5 0EH 1 AS2.2 3FH 1
AS2.3 40H 1
Ar4.1 0FH 1
Ar4.2 10H 1 AS3.1 41H 1
AS3.2 42H 1
Ar4.3 11H 1
AS3.3 43H 1
Ar4.4 12H 1
Ar4.5 13H 1 AS4.1 44H 1
Ar5.1 14H 1 AS4.2 45H 1
Ar5.2 15H 1 AS4.3 46H 1
Ar5.3 16H 1 AS5.1 47H 1
Ar5.4 17H 1 AS5.2 48H 1
Ar5.5 18H 1 AS5.3 49H 1
Ar6.1 19H 1 Co1.1 4AH 1
Ar6.2 1AH 1 Co1.2 4BH 1
Ar6.3 1BH 1 Co1.3 4CH 1
Ar6.4 1CH 1 Co2.1 4DH 1
Ar6.5 1DH 1 Co2.2 4EH 1
FE1 1EH 1 Co2.3 4FH 1
FE2 1FH 1 nA1.1 50H 1
FE3 20H 1 nA1.2 51H 1
FE4 21H 1 nA1.3 52H 1
FE5 22H 1
nA2.1 53H 1
FE6 23H 1
nA2.2 54H 1
FU1.1 24H 1 nA2.3 55H 1
FU2.1 25H 1
no1.1 56H 1
MA1.1 26H 1 no1.2 57H 1
MA1.2 27H 1 no1.3 58H 1
MA1.3 28H 1
no2.1 59H 1
MA2.1 29H 1 no2.2 5AH 1
MA2.2 2AH 1 no2.3 5BH 1
MA2.3 2BH 1
FE7 5CH 1
MA3.1 2CH 1 FE8 5DH 1
MA3.2 2DH 1 FE9 5EH 1
MA3.3 2EH 1 FE10 5FH 1
Mi1.1 2FH 1 FE11 60H 1
Mi1.2 30H 1 FE12 61H 1
Mi1.3 31H 1
20 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
Identifications of outputs which can be entered into the FCon sinks (HiAd 49H)
RESPONSE CODE RESPONSE CODE

ncon 00H no1.4 33H
AE1A 01H no2.4 34H
AE2A 02H P11 35H
AE3A 03H P12 36H
AE4A 04H P13 37H
AE5A 05H P14 38H
Ar1.6 06H P15 39H
Ar2.6 07H AE6A 3AH
Ar3.6 08H AE7A 3BH
Ar4.6 09H AE8A 3CH
Ar5.6 0AH AE9A 3DH
Ar6.6 0BH AEAA 3EH
FU1.2 0CH AEBA 3FH
FU2.2 0DH BE01 40H
MA1.4 0EH BE02 41H
MA2.4 0FH BE03 42H
MA3.4 10H BE04 43H
BE05 44H
Mi1.4 11H
BE06 45H
Mi2.4 12H BE07 46H
Mi3.4 13H BE08 47H
P01 14H BE09 48H
P02 15H AE1 49H
P03 16H
AE2 4AH
P04 17H AE3 4BH
P05 18H AE4 4CH
P06 19H AE5 4DH
P07 1AH
P08 1BH AE 4EH
P09 1CH A1 4FH
P10 1DH A2 50H
rE1.4 1EH A3 51H
A4 52H
-1.000 1FH
-.500 20H Int1 53H
-.250 21H Int2 54H
-.050 22H wi1/SPi1 55H
0.000 23H wi2/SPi2 56H
0.050 24H w1/SP1 57H
0.100 25H w2/SP2 58H
0.200 26H yI 59H
0.500 27H yII 5AH
1.000 28H
1.050 29H SAA1 5BH
SAA2 5CH
AS1.4 2AH SAA3 5DH
AS2.4 2BH SAA4 5EH
AS3.4 2CH
AS4.4 2DH
AS5.4 2EH
Co1.4 2FH
Co2.4 30H
nA1.4 31H
nA2.4 32H
Example:
Input correction computer (rE1) = AE4A
Input lineariser 2 (FU2) = Output Ar2
HiAd LoAd Contents
49H 38H 04H
49H 25H 07H
C79000-B7476-C155-03 21
302232
2.3.11 Position functions ”FPoS”

Time processing of the defined functions is described by 1 byte which contains the function identification.
HiAd: 4DH
LoAd: 00H to 1EH for nr01 to nr31
contains the function identifications described in FdEF (e.g. 0AH for MA2)
Special case: nPoS = 00H
Example:
Block nr04 is set with Ar5
HiAd LoAd Contents
4D 03H 05H FdEF identification
2.3.12 Contents of status register and process variables
D Data which can only be read from the computer

Contents: Process variables (2 byte), stati (1 byte) which can only be read from the computer
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: 80H to DAH
NAME LoAd BYTE TYPE NOTES
VERSION 80H 1 STATUS Software version→ 01H = 1. version
GRT TYPE 81H 1 ” Apparatus type → 01H = Controller DR22
wEΔ 82H 2 LIN ext. specified value wext, adjustable via +dw, -dw
xd s 84H 2 ” Difference S-controller xds
BA 1 86H 1 STATUS effect. bin. output: BA8 (MSB) to BA1 (LSB)

BA 2 87H 1 ” effect. bin. output: BA16 (MSB) to BA9 (LSB)
BE 1 88H 1 STATUS effect. bin. input: BE8 (MSB) to BE1 (BIT 0 = LSB)
BE 2 89H 1 ” effect. bin. input: BE14 (BIT 5) to BE9 (LSB)
AA1 8AH 2 LIN Hardware analog output (% of output range)
AA2 8CH 2 ” ”
AA3 8EH 2 ” ”
AA4 90H 2 ” ”
Y1 92H 2 LIN Split range output y1 [%]
Y2 94H 2 ” Split range output y2 [%]
y 96H 2 ” Controller output y [%]
xdI 98H 2 LIN Controller I: xd [%]
xI 9Ah 2 ” x [%]
wI 9CH 2 ” w [%]
wiI 9EH 2 ” wvi,wi/wv [%]
XVI A0H 2 ” xv [%]
WVI A2H 2 ” wv [%]
YI A4H 2 ” y [%]
XDII A6H 2 LIN Controller II: xd [%]
XII A8H 2 ” x [%]
WII AAH 2 ” w [%]
wiII ACH 2 ” wi [%]
YII AEH 2 ” y [%]
E1 B0H 2 LIN Analog sink FE1: freely interconnectable range
E2 B2H 2 ” ” FE2: ”
E3 B4H 2 ” ” FE3: ”
E4 B6H 2 ” ” FE4: ”
E5 B8H 2 ” ” FE5: ”
E6 BAH 2 ” ” FE6: ”
22 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232

AE1A BCH 2 LIN Analog sink AE1: (f,r,l); [ f = filtert]
AE2A BEH 2 ” ” AE2: (f,r,l); [ r = root extracted]
AE3A C0H 2 ” ” AE3: (f,r,l); [ l = linearised]
AE4A C2H 2 ” ” AE4: (f,r,l)
AE5A C4H 2 ” ” AE5: (f,r,l)
AE1 C6H 2 LIN Hardware analog input (% of output range)
AE2 C8H 2 ” ”
AE3 CAH 2 ” ”
AE4 CCH 2 ” ”
AE5 CEH 2 ” ”
ST8 D0H 1 STATUS (CB,H.,Si,N,PI,PII,+yBL,-BL)
ST9 D1H 1 “ (BLS,BLPS,PAU,0,+dy,-dy,+dw,-dw)
STN D2H 1 “ (0,0/1,MUFS,0,A4,A3,A2,A1)
STN1 D3H 1 “ (0,0/1,0,I1,I2,0,H ext, Y ext)
STA D4H 1 “
STA1 D5H 1 “
ST2 D6H 1 “
ST3 D7H 1 “
ST10 D8H 1 STATUS CBII,HII,SII,NII,0,tSII,+yBLII,-yBLII
ST11 D9H 1 “ Measuring transducer disturbance (MTD)
ST12 DAH 1 “ Option error, tSII,BLB,WSLΙ,WSLΙΙ,MTD
D Data which can only be read from the computer

Contents: Process variables which can only be read from the computer
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: 00H to 31H
AE6A 00H 2 LIN Analog sink: AE6(F,r,l)
AE7A 02H 2 ” AE7(F,r,l)
AE8A 04H 2 ” AE8(F,r,l)
AE9A 06H 2 ” AE9(F,r,l)
AEAA 08H 2 ” AEA(F,r,l)
AEBA 0AH 2 ” AEB(F,r,l)
AE6 0CH 2 LIN Hardware analog inputs: AE6 (% of output range)
AE7 0EH 2 ” AE7 (% of output range)
AE8 10H 2 ” AE8 (% of output range)
AE9 12H 2 ” AE9 (% of output range)
AEA 14H 2 ” AE10 (% of output range)
AEB 16H 2 ” AE11 (% of output range)
E7 18H 2 LIN Analog sink: FE7
E8 1AH 2 ” FE8
E9 1CH 2 ” FE9
E10 1EH 2 ” FE10
E11 20H 2 ” FE11
E12 22H 2 ” FE12
AA5 24H 2 LIN Hardware analog outputs: AA5 (% of output range)
AA6 26H 2 ” AA6 (% of output range)
AA7 28H 2 ” AA7 (% of output range)
AA8 2AH 2 ” AA8 (% of output range)
AA9 2CH 2 ” AA9 (% of output range)
Y3 2EH 2 LIN Split range y3 (Controller II)
Y4 30H 2 ” Split range y3 (Controller II)
C79000-B7476-C155-03 23
302232
D Data which can be read/writte from the computer

HiAd: 45H
LoAd: E0H to FEH
ST1 E0H 1 STATUS PARAM, STRUCT,...
Wes (Wves) E1H 2 LIN wext
ST4 E3H 1 STATUS CB, Hext,...
Yes E4H 2 LIN yext
ST5 E6H 1 STATUS BLS, BLPS,...
ST6 E7H 1 STATUS BA8,...BA1
ST7 E8H 1 STATUS BA16,...BA9
wi1es,wiIIes E9H 2 LIN
wi2es,wiIIes EBH 2 LIN
YHes EDH 2 LIN
YIIHes EFH 2 LIN
ST20 F1H 1 STATUS CBII, HextII,...
WesII F3H 2 LIN
YesII F5H 2 LIN
SAA1 F7H 2 LIN interconnectable sources: SAA1
SAA2 F9H 2 ” SAA2
SAA3 FBH 2 ” SAA3
SAA4 FDH 2 ” SAA4
Contents: status register which can be written

HiAd: 45H
LoAd: E0H, 1 Byte
Byte ST1 Meaning
Bit SES parameterize/structure/acknowledge

7 Online parameterization via SES → start 1)
6 Online parameterization via SES → end 1)
5 Strukture via SES → start 2)
4 Strukture via SES → end 2)
3 Acknowledge via enter key 3)
2 Acknowledge via exit key 3)
1 don’t care 4)
0 don’t care 4)
1) Includes: onPA, AdAP

2) Includes: oFPA, StrS, PASt, FdEF, FCon, FPoS, CAE4, CAE5
3) If evaluated in Software
4) No effect
24 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
Writing into/reading
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: E3H, 1 Byte
Byte ST4 Meaning
Bit SES Control signals

7 SES: CB (Computer readiness)
6 SES: HeES = f(S64) H ext. (”Hand”) 1)
5 SES: Sa (Safety)
4 SES: T (Tracking)
3 SES: PI ! Switch over from Pi to P (Controller I)
2 SES: PII ! Switch over from Pi to P (Controller II)
1 SES: +yBL (+y blocking)
0 SES: -yBL (-y blocking)
1) S64 < 4 dependant from CB and Int
S64 = 4 independant from CB or Int
S64 = 3,4 HeES dynamic as Hi
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: F1H
Byte ST20 Meaning

7 SES: CBII (Computer readiness) Controller 2 to S1=12
6 SES: HIIext. (”Hand”) Controller 2 to S1=12 1)
5 SES: SiII (Safety) Controller 2 to S1=12

4 SES: NII (Tracking) Controller 2 to S1=12
3 SES: wSLII Controller 2 to S1=12
2 SES: tSII Controller 2 to S1=12
1 SES: +yBLII (+y blocking) Controller 2 to S1=12
0 SES: -yBLII (-y blocking) Controller 2 to S1=12
1) Function of S240, i.e. at S240 = 1 → H: = 0
HiAd: 45H
LoAd; E6H, 1 Byte
Byte ST5 Meaning

7 SES: BLS (blocking „StrU”)
6 SES: BLPS (blocking „Mode”) 1)
5 SES: PAS (parameter switch over)

4 SES: Int IES (internal setpoint controller I)
3 SES: Int IIES (internal setpoint controller II)
2 SES: tSI
1 SES: wSLI
0 SES: BLB
1) ”Mode”: quitting the process operation level
C79000-B7476-C155-03 25
302232
HiAd: 45H HiAd: 45H
LoAd: E7H LoAd: E8H
Byte ST61) Byte ST71)
Bit SES binary outputs Bit SES binary outputs
7 SES: BA8 7 SES: BA16
1) Only the binary outputs which have not been allocated (S76 to 85 = 0 resp. S258 to S266) can be set by the SES.
The signals are presented in positive logic, i.e. on occurence of the corresponding signals, the bits = „1”. The
status registers ST1, ST4 to ST7 can be written/read via the SES.
Contents of the read-only process variables
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: D6H, 1 Byte
Byte ST2 Meaning
Bit Enable conditions/Status messages

7 STATUS: Process operation level is quit 1)
6 0
5 ERROR: MEM Err 1)
4 STATUS: Offline system 2)
3 STATUS: onPA SES 2)
2 STATUS: StrU SES 2)
1 STATUS: Parameterizing via front module 1)
0 STATUS: Structurizing via front module 1)
1) Enable conditions for parameterizing/structurizing via the SES

2) ”don’t care” for enable conditions
26 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
only readable
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: D7H, 1 Byte
Byte ST3 Meaning
Bit Error-/status messages

7 STATUS: Last change of Hand or internal
0 = Front, 1 = SES
6 ERROR: Transmitting the param. Y01,3,5,7,9 failed 5)
5 STATUS: Power on 3)
4 ERROR: Transmitting the param. tv1,3,5,7,9 failed 4)
3 ERROR: Sum error 1)
2 ERROR: ncon Err (highest priority) 2)
1 ERROR: --PoS Err 2)
0 ERROR: nPos Err (lowest priority) 2)
1) OR linking of bits ST3.0 to ST3.2

2) Cannot be acknowledged
3) Is automatically erased after first alarm scan by the controller
4) In the exchange of the „tv” parameter for „PASt” on „oFF” or „≠oFF” , all 5 tv parameters must be transmitted
simultaneously, otherwise the present values remain! If all 5 tv parameters ≠oFF, they can be altered individually or in
groups in their value (with the exception of “oFF” !) via the SES.
5) As for point 4), but „AUto” instead of „oFF” and „Y0” instead „tv”
only readable
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: D0H, 1 Byte
Byte ST8 Meaning
Bit Actual, effective signals in the controller

7 CB (Computer readiness)
6 H (effective “Hand”) 1)
5 Si (Safety)
4 T (Tracking)
3 PI → Switch over from Pi to P (Controller I)
2 PII → Switch over from Pi to P (Controller II)
1 +yBL (+y blocking)
0 -yBL (-y blocking)
1) S64 function, i.e. at S64=1 →H:=0
H = Hi∨He
C79000-B7476-C155-03 27
302232
only readable
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: D1H, 1 Byte
Byte ST9 Meaning
Bit Actual, effective signals in the controller

7 BLS (blocking “StrU”)
6 BLPS (blocking “Mode”) 1)
5 PAU (Parameter switch over)

4 Controller I/II for override control 2)
3 +dy (incremental y)
2 -dy (incremental y)
1 +dw (incremental w)
0 -dw (incremental w)
1) ”Mode”: Quitting the process operation level
2) Controller I: ”0”, Controller II: ”1”
only readable
HiAd: 45H HiAd: 45H
LoAd: D2H, 1 Byte LoAd: D4H
Byte STN Meaning STA 2)
Bit Status in the alarm message Old status

7 manual variable I changed, not transmittable in the alarm message 0 3)
6 0: In the normal message, 1: In the alarm message 1
5 MTD (Measuring transducer disturbance) MTD
4 CONTROLLER I/II at override regulation Controller
I/II
3 A4 (Limit monitor channel 4) A4
1) Controller I: ”0”, Controller II: ”1”
2) ”STN” stored high states since the last alarm scan.
3) from software --C9 onwards
28 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
only readable
HiAd: 45H HiAd: 45H
LoAd: D3H, 1 Byte LoAd: D5H
Byte STN1 Meaning STA 2)
Bit Status in the alarm message Old status

7 manual variable II changed, not transmittable in the alarm message 03)
6 tS_Stop I 1: In the alarm message 1 3)
5 tS_Stop II 0 3)
4 I(1) (Internal, Controller I) I(1)
3 I(2) (Internal, Controller II) I(2)
2 0 0
1 H (effective „Hand”) 1) H
0 Yext. (Y external) Yext
1) H = Hi∨He
2) ”STN” stored high states since the last alarm scan.
3) from software --C9 onwards
only readable
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: D8H
Byte ST10 Meaning
Bit
7 CBII (Controller II if S1=12)
6 HII (Controller II if S1=12)
5 SiII (Controller II if S1=12)
4 NII (Controller II if S1=12)
3 Last change HandII or InternII (0:Front/1:SES)
2 tSII (Controller II if S1=12)
1 +yBLII (y-blocking [up] Controller II if S1=12)
0 --yBLII (y-blocking [down] Controller II if S1=12)
only readable
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: D9H
Byte ST11 Meaning
Bit
7 Measuring transducer disturbance (MTD): AE8
6 AE7
5 AE6
4 AE5
3 AE4
2 AE3
1 AE2
0 AE1
C79000-B7476-C155-03 29
302232
only readable
HiAd: 45H
LoAd: DAH
Byte ST12 Meaning
Bit
7 Error option (2/3/5/6)
6 tSI
5 BLB
4 wSLI
3 wSLII (Controller II at S1=12)
2 MTD: AE11
1 MTD: AE10
0 MTD: AE9
2.3.13 Addresses for batch mode

Copy of freely interconnectable area
HiAd LoAd NOTES

46H 00H--1AH FdEF: Function codes
49H 00H--61H FCon: Sinks
4DH 00H--1EH FPos: Position list
Copy of strukture devices
HiAd LoAd NOTES

41H 00H--B0H StrS: Offline mode
Copy of parameters
HiAd LoAd NOTES

40H 00H--55H onPA: Online parameters
59H 00H--23H
40H 56H--BDH oFPA: Offline parameters
5AH 00H--15H
40H BEH--F1H PAST: Offline parameters
5AH 80H--A1H CAE4/CAE5: Offline parameters
30 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
2.3.14 Representation of parameters and process variables

Compared to the DR22-internal floating-point representation, the parameters are transmitted in three different com-
pressed 2-byte representations.
D LOG
High Byte Low Byte
2-1 2-8 0 7-bit two’s complement
Mantissa (magnitude), left adjusted Sign (positive) Exponent

Examples:
1. 1.000 = 80H, 01H (= 0.5 ¢ 21)
2. Smallest parameter value = 0.100 = CDH, 7DH (approximation)
3. Largest parameter value = 9984 = 9CH, 0EH
Special case: parameter = oFF = 00H,00H
D FIX
High Byte Low Byte
2+14 20 Sign
Mantisse (magnitude) 0=+

1 = --
Examples:
1. 1 = 00H, 02H
2. Smallest parameter value = -1999 = 0FH, 9FH
3. Largest parameter value = 9999 = 4EH, 1EH
D LIN
High Byte Low Byte
20 2-14 Sign
Examples:
1. 100.0 % = 1.000 = 80H, 00H
2. Smallest parameter value = -199.9 % = -1.999 = FFH, DFH (approximation)
3. Largest parameter value = 199.9 % = 1.999 = FFH, DEH (approximation)
4. Special case: parameter = AUto = 00H, 01H
D Process variables (LIN)

The process variables are transmitted in a compressed 2-byte representation (LIN).
C79000-B7476-C155-03 31
302232
2.3.15 Copy protection by means of a keyword
From the software version C5 onwards, the configuration, consisting of
oFPA, CLPA, HdEF, CAE4/5, FdEF, FPoS
can be write and read protected by means of a programmable keyword.
Activating the copy protection:
-- Writing 3 bytes to HiAd 7FH/LoAd 30H

The 1st and 2nd bytes make up the keyword, the 3rd byte must be the sum of these two bytes
e.g.: 2AH, 18H, 42H
-- Keep the keyword in a safe place
-- Written values can be reread from the address HiAd 7FH/LoAd 80H
-- The copy protection is activated the next time the device is switched on
Changing configuration when the copy protection is activated:
-- Writing the 2-byte keyword to HiAd 7FH/LoAd 30H

-- The copy protection will be disabled for 4 to 6 minutes
Deactivating the copy protection:
-- Writing the 2-byte keyword to HiAd 7FH/LoAd 30H

-- Writing FFH to HiAd 7FH/LoAd 30H: FFH removes the copy protection permanently
Effect of the copy protection:
-- When reading the configuration, 00H will be transmitted instead of the data
-- Any attempt to write onto protected areas will be acknowledged with StNoB in the response
-- If an attempt is made to disable the copy protection with the wrong keyword, an attempt can only be repeated
after a defined time (dependent on the number of failed attempts)
1st failed attempt: ca. 1 min.

2nd failed attempt: ca. 5 min.
3rd failed attempt: ca. 10 min.
each further attempt: ca 1.5 hrs.
32 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
3 PROFIBUS
3.1 PROFIBUS Module

The PROFIBUS module 6DR2803--8P can also be used in the serial interface slot on all SIPART DR controllers.
This module works as a slave and supports communication in accordance with the DP standard (cyclic services),
with software version --C1 upwards also acyclic services (DP--V1). The module has been certified with the no.
Z00177 by the PNO (PROFIBUS user organization). The 9--pin connector pin assignment corresponds with the
standard EN50170
The device data base files (GSD) DR0200A7.GSD and DR0300A7.GSD (software version --C4 upwards) accompany
this and can also be downloaded from the Internet at www.ad.siemens.de/csi/gsd PROFIBUS GSD files/Control.
Special programs (standard function blocks) are available for the Siemens PLC Simatic S5/S7 masters to allow
interfacing with the SIPART DR.
The file DR0200A7.GSD is already contained in the PROFIBUS configuration tool from Siemens. It is also required
when the standard function blocks (FB) are used.
The file DR0300A7.GSD is recommended (from software version --C4!) if the standard function blocks (FB) are
not to be used for S5/S7 or a different master is used.
3.2 Preparations before Operation
3.2.1 Settings on the SIPART DR Device

The serial interface on the device must be configured in the following way:
- Interface on (if possible, e.g. DR19, DR21)

- Even parity
- Without LRC
- Baud rate 9600
- Parameters/process values writable (as desired)
- Station number 0--125 (each number may only be used once)
3.2.2 Configuring the Slave for the Master

The config bytes define the type and number of cyclically transmitted input/output bytes. The selection of configurations
can be taken from the GSD.
At least 3 config bytes have to be sent:
- 1st Config Byte:

0x00: Only processing of process data (AKZ and PNU not used)
0xF3: 8 byte input/output --> full functions of all writable/readable variables
- 2nd/ 3rd Config Byte:
each 0x00 or 0x50 to 0x5F: define the total number of cyclically readable process data
- 4th Config Byte (optional):
0x00: Use of the Simatic S5 floating--point format (otherwise IEEE)
From software version --C4 onwards additional process data can be transmitted by adding up to 8 config bytes
containing 0xA2 (otherwise only via job identification (AKZ) and parameter number (PNU)).
3.2.3 Parameterization of the Slave for the Master

The additional parameterization defines which process data (each 2 bytes) are transmitted cyclically in which
order.
C79000-B7476-C155-03 33
302232
Each process variable is defined (addressed) by 2 parameter bytes.
Parameter bytes 1 to 64 set the up to 32 readable process values.
Expansion from software version --C4 onwards:
- Parameter bytes 65 to --80 set the up to 8 writable process values,

- A further byte can be added (content 0x01) for using a special time monitoring function (see there) resulting in
an uneven number of parameter bytes.
3.2.4 Time Monitoring

The master can set parameters for a DP watchdog time. It becomes active when monitoring time parameters
are set in the SIPART DR. This time must be < 10 sec. The device reaction when there is a time out (sum
of DP watchdog and device monitoring time) then corresponds with the respective device configuration.
If the SIPART is also to react correspondingly to the ”Master only transmits zeros” (e.g. PLC in stop), an uneven
last parameter byte 0x01 must also be sent (software version --C4 onwards).
3.3 Transmission Procedure with job identification (AKZ) and

parameter number (PNU)
1. Config-Byte=0xF3
The 8 byte input/output (each consistent across all 8 bytes) is used in the following way for reading and writing
with AKZ (job identification) and PNU (parameter number):
Master --> Slave (command) Slave --> Master (reply)

1. Byte AKZ PNU AKZ PNU
2. Byte PNU PNU
3. Byte Subindex (if required) Subindex (if required)
4. Byte 0 0
5. Byte Data 1 (only double word) Data 1 (only double word)
6. Byte Data 2 (only double word) Data 2 (only double word)
7. Byte Data 3 Data 3
8. Byte Data 4 Data 4
Meaning of AKZ Meaning of AKZ

0: No job 0: No reply
1: Read parameter 1: Requested data in data 3 -- 4
2: Write parameter (word) 2: Requested data in data 1 -- 4
3: Write parameter (double word) 3: Requested description element in data 1 -- 4
4: Description element 4: Requested array element in data 1 -- 4
Read with subindex 1 -- 6 8: No operating hierarchy
6: Read parameter (element of an (e.g. parameterization on device front)
arrays) 7: Job cannot be carried out
7: Write parameter Data 4 then contains the following error no.:
(element of an array) 0: Invalid parameter number (PNU)
1: Parameter not writable
Note: 2: Value range invalid
Software version --C4 onwards 3: Incorrect subindex
No decision 4: No array
Between AKZ 2 and 3 5: Incorrect data type
11: No access achieved via ST_U
18: Other error (process data buffer full)
34 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
3.4 Description of the Communication Objects

Each communication object has a parameter number (PNU) and a parameter description in the form of a data
record. This description can be read out using job identification (AKZ) 4 and the subindex.
Subindex Byte-length Meaning Data type

1 2 Identification/data type octet string
2 1 Number of array elements for parameter unsigned char
3 4 Lower limit value as selected PNU
4 4 Upper limit value Parameter (Doppelwort) schreiben
5 2 Variable index/conversion index octet string
6 4 Name ASCII string
PNU = Parameter number
3.4.1 Interpretation of Identification

(byte 1/subindex 1)
Bit Meaning
7 PNU as process data (PCD) suitable for cyclic reading (writing)
6 PNU is an array (a sequence of data from the same type)
5 Writable only with PNU 0 = 2/3 (bit 1 in status ST_U)
4 Writable only with PNU 0 = 1/3 (bit 0 in status ST_U)
3 --
2 Special formats (”off” / ”auto” / ”nop”) permitted
1 Not writable
0 Limit values not relevant
PNU = Parameter number
3.4.2 Interpretation of Data Type

(byte 2/subindex 1)
Nro. Byte length Abbreviation Format Comments

3 2 int16 integer 16
4 4 int32 integer 32
8 4 FL float IEEE
10 2 os octet string
14 2 bs bit string
9 4 vs ASCII string
24 4 FL float Simatic-S5 format Only when 4th config byte = 0
Note:
1.) Order of bytes always from high to low
2). The two low mantissa bytes should be 0 when float values are written
Special formats (if permitted)

”oFF” with float values: 0x00000000
”oFF” / ”auto” / ”nop” with int16 values: 0x8000
C79000-B7476-C155-03 35
302232
3.4.3 Interpretation of Variable Index

(byte 1/subindex 5)
According to actuator--sensor profile of PNO.
Examples:
No. Meaning Unit

4 Time
17 Temperature Degree
23 Resistance Ohms
3.4.4 Interpretation of Conversion Index

(byte 2/subindex 5)
This value contains the 10th power with which the transmitted value has to be multiplied.
e.g.:
Transmitted PNU value: 0x0064 (int16 ----> 100)
Conversion index: 0XFF (--1 in 2 complement)
:----> valid value: 100 * 10Exp--1 = 10
Special cases:
-- 0x7F (127) : Conversion factor: * 1/16384

Example:
int16 0x2000 = 8192 ----> 8192 * 1/16384 = 0.5 = 50%
-- 0xE9 (--23): Conversion factor: * 20 (msec)
36 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
3.5 Universal Communication Objects

The following objects (PNU < 100) are the same for all SIPART DR. The device-specific objects are listed from
PNU 100 onwards.
PNU Description element (subindex)

(dec.) 1 2 3 4 5 6
Identification/data type Array Min. Max. Variable Name
number value value index/conver-
sion index
0 00000000 / bs16 0 0 3 0/0 ST_U 1.)
1 00000011 / int16 0 0 0 0/0 MAX 2.)
2 10000001 / bs16 0 0 0 0/0 ST_C 3.)
3 00000011 / os2 0 0 0 0/0 Typ 4.)
4 00000011 / os2 0 0 0 0/0 V_Gr 5.)
5 00000011 / os2 0 0 0 0/0 V_Op 6.)
6 bis 9 00000001 / vs4 0 0 0 0/0 KNZ1 to KNZ4 7.)
10 bis 41 00000001 / int 16 0 0 0 0/0 PZ01 to PZ32 8.)
42 bis 49 00000001 / int 16 0 0 0 0/0 PZW1 to PZW8 9.)
PNU = Parameter number; PZ = Process value; PZW = Process value writable
1.) Control byte for parameterization/structuring (writable/readable)
Method for writing ”onPA” parameters

-- Filling bit 1 of the PNU 0 with 1
-- Writing any parameters with bit 5 identifier possible in corresponding identification
-- Filling bit 1 of the PNU 0 with 0 (--> data are transferred into device)
Method for writing ”stru” parameters
-- Filling bit 0 of the PNU 0 with 1
-- Writing any parameters with bit 5 identifier possible in corresponding identification
-- Filling bit 0 of the PNU 0 with 0 (--> data are transferred into device)
Note: Bit 0 and bit 1 can also be changed in a common write job.
2.) Highest PNU (only readable)
3.) Status C (writable/readable)
Bit Meaning
4 Front parameterization enabled
3 Front structuring enabled
2 Write protection for job to be carried out available
1 Front access to ”onPA” parameter with identifier bit 5 in identification has occurred (not with DR20!)
0 Front access to ”Stru” parameter with identifier bit 4 in identification has occurred (not with DR20!)
Note: Identifiers in bit 0 / .1 / .2 can be acknowledged by filling with 0
4.) Device type (only readable):

= 0: SIPART DR20
= 1: SIPART DR22
= 2: SIPART DR24
= 3: SIPART DR21
= 4: SIPART DR19
= 5: SIPART DR19P (with time scheduler)
5.) Software version SIPART DR basic unit (only readable)
6.) Software version PROFIBUS module (only readable)
C79000-B7476-C155-03 37
302232
7.) The system identifier consisting of 4*4 byte ASCII is writable/readable. The data are saved on the module
with no--volt protection.
8./9.) The PNUs 10 to 41 or 42 to 49 are a replica of the extended parameters for setting the read/write
data in the cyclic data transfer. They only have to be filled when the master does not have extended
parameter capability.
The data are then saved on the module with no--volt protection.
3.6 Writing Process Data (Cyclic)

This function is only possible with software version --C4 onwards.
These data must be written using AKZ and PNU in earlier versions.
Each config byte from the 0xA2 form creates 3 byte output with consistency over all 3 bytes. This allows one
process variable for each to be written.
The PNU number of the variable to be written must be set in the extended parameters from byte no. 65.
Master ----> Slave

1.Byte High byte process date
2.Byte Low byte process date
3.Byte Status: 0x80 --> sent data valid / otherwise invalid
3.7 Examples
Using job identification (AKZ) and parameter number (PNU) (1. Config Byte = 0xF3)
1.) Reading DR2210 PNU 100 [0x64]

(Device value: Parameter tFI = 3.000)

1.Byte 1 0 2 0
2.Byte 0x64 0x64
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0x40
6.Byte 0 0x40
7.Byte 0 0x00
8.Byte 0 0x00
2.) Reading DR2210 PNU 260 [0x104]

(Device value: structure switch S38 = 1)

1.Byte 1 1 1 1
2.Byte 0x04 0x04
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0
8.Byte 0 0x01
38 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
3.) Reading DR2210 PNU 520 [0x208] (if not via cyclical process data)
(device value: AA5 = 0,75 = 75 %)

1.Byte 1 2 1 2
2.Byte 0x08 0x08
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0x30
8.Byte 0 0x00
4.) Reading DR2210 PNU 109 [0x6D] / description element 1

(reply according to device specific paramater tables)

1.Byte 4 0 3 0
2.Byte 0x6D 0x6D
3.Byte 1 1
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0x24
8.Byte 0 0x08
5.) Reading DR2210 PNU 380 [0x17C] / array element 2

(device value: FdeF Ar2=YES)
Master-->Slave (command) Slave-->Master (reply)

1.Byte 6 1 4 1
2.Byte 0x7C 0x7C
3.Byte 2 2
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0
8.Byte 0 0x80
C79000-B7476-C155-03 39
302232
6.) Writing ”onpa” parameter VV1 = 2500 PNU 101 [0x65] and c7 = 10.00 PNU 399 [0x18F]
6.1.) Writing ST_U Bit.1 = 1 --> writing of ”onpa” parameters possible

1.Byte 2 0 1 0
2.Byte 0x00 0x00
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0
8.Byte 0x02 0x02
6.2.) Writing 1st parameter

1.Byte 3 0 1 0
2.Byte 0x65 0x65
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0x40 0x40
6.Byte 0x20 0x20
7.Byte 0x00 0x00
8.Byte 0x00 0x00
6.3.) Writing 2nd parameter

1.Byte 2 1 1 1
2.Byte 0x8F 0x8F
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0x03 0x03
8.Byte 0xE8 0xE8
40 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
6.4.) Writing ST_U Bit.1 = 0

1.Byte 2 0 1 0
2.Byte 0 0
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0
8.Byte 0x00 0x00
Note:
as of software version --C4 of the modules and --C7 of the controller DR2210 it is possible to write single
parameters without controlling with ST_U.
7.) Writing ”stru” parameter YS = 25 % PNU 162 [0xA2] and S266 = 10 PNU 497 [0x1F1]
7.1.) Writing ST_U Bit.0 = 1 --> Writing of ”stru” parameters possible

1.Byte 2 0 1 0
2.Byte 0x00 0x00
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0
8.Byte 0x01 0x01
7.2.) Writing 1. Parameter

1.Byte 2 0 1 0
2.Byte 0xA2 0xA2
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0x10 0x10
8.Byte 0x00 0x00
C79000-B7476-C155-03 41
302232
7.3.) Writing 2. Parameter

1.Byte 2 1 1 1
2.Byte 0xF1 0xF1
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0
8.Byte 0x0A 0x0A
7.4.) Writing ST_U Bit.0 = 0

1.Byte 2 0 1 0
2.Byte 0 0
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0
8.Byte 0x00 0x00
8.) Reading DR2210 process variables x_1 PNU 341 [0x155] via AKZ and PNU (device value for x = 35 %)

1.Byte 1 1 1 1
2.Byte 0x55 0x55
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0 0x16
8.Byte 0x00 0x66
42 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
9.) Writing DR2210 process variables YH_2 PNU 527 [0x20F] via AKZ and PNU (transmitted value = 11%)

1.Byte 2 2 1 2
2.Byte 0x0F 0x0F
3.Byte 0 0
4.Byte 0 0
5.Byte 0 0
6.Byte 0 0
7.Byte 0x07 0x07
8.Byte 0x0A 0x0A
10.) Reading cyclical of DR2210 of 4 process values in the following sequence:

Actual value 1 (x_1) PNU 341 [0x155] value: 80 %
Setpoint (w_2) PNU 349 [0x15D] value: 30 %
Analog input 1 (AE1) PNU 363 [0x16B] value: --1 %
Analog output 9 (AA9) PNU 524 [0x20C] value: 10 %
Config bytes: 0xF3 / 0x53 (for 4 (process data (PZD)) / 0x00
Extended parameterization (8 additional user parameters):

(or writing once of the parameter numbers (PNU) 10 -- 17)
1.Param. 0x01
2.Param. 0x55
3.Param. 0x01
4.Param. 0x5D
5.Param. 0x01
6.Param. 0x6B
7.Param. 0x02
8.Param. 0x0C
Slave --> Master (reply)

1.Byte x x
2.Byte x
3.Byte x
4.Byte x
5.Byte x
6.Byte x
7.Byte x
8.Byte x
9.Byte 0x33 80 %
10.Byte 0x33
11.Byte 0x13 30 %
12.Byte 0x33
13.Byte 0xFF --1 %
14.Byte 0x5C
15.Byte 0x06 10 %
16.Byte 0x66
Note:
the first 8 byte contain the reaction of a master request.
If the 1st Config byte is = 0x00 these 8 byte will be cancelled.
C79000-B7476-C155-03 43
302232
11.) Writing cyclical of DR2210 of 4 process values in the following sequence:
Status Stes PNU 373 [0x0175] value: 0x80

Setpoint 1 (w1es) PNU 377 [0x0179] value: 40 %
Manual variable 1 (YH1) PNU 379 [0x017B] value: 20%
Manual variable 2 (YH2) PNU 527 [0x020F] value: (don’t care)
Config bytes: 0xF3 / 0x55 (for e.g. 6 PZDs) / 0x00 / 0xA2 / 0xA2 / 0xA2 / 0xA2
Extended parameterization (72 additional user parameters):

(or writing once of the parameter numbers (PNU) 43 -- 47)
65.Param 0x01
66.Param 0x75
67.Param 0x01
68.Param 0x79
69.Param 0x01
70.Param 0x7B
71.Param 0x02
72.Param 0x0F
Master --> Slave

1.Byte x x
2.Byte x
3.Byte x
4.Byte x
5.Byte x
6.Byte x
7.Byte x
8.Byte x
9.Byte 0x00
10.Byte 0x80 value: 0x80
11.Byte 0x80 status: valid
12.Byte 0x19
13.Byte 0x99 value: 40 %
15.Byte 0x0C
16.Byte 0xCC value: 20 %
18.Byte x
19.Byte x
20.Byte 0x00 status: invalid
44 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
3.8 Table of the DP communication objects
Parameter ”onPA”
| Description element (subindex)

| |variabl/|
PNU |Identification/|Array| min | max |convers.|
(dez)|datatype |numb.| value | value |index | Name | Note
----------------------------------------------------------------------
0000 | 76543210/ | | | | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------------
100 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tF_1”|** oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
101 | 00100000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 10.00 | 0 / 0 |”vv_1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
102 | 00100000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 100.0 | 0 / 0 |”cP_1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
103 | 00100000/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 9984 | 4 / 0 |”tn_1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
104 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 2992 | 4 / 0 |”tv_1”|** oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
105 | 00100000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 10.0 | 0 /7FH |”AH_1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
106 | 00100100/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y0_1”|** Auto
----------------------------------------------------------------------
107 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 / 7FH|”YA_1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
108 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 / 7FH|”YE_1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
109 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tF_2”|** oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
110 | 00100000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 10.00 | 0 / 0 |”vv_2”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
111 | 00100000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 100.0 | 0 / 0 |”cP_2”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
112 | 00100000/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 9984 | 4 / 0 |”tn_2”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
113 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 2992 | 4 / 0 |”tv_2”|** oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
114 | 00100000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 10.0 | 0 /7FH |”AH_2”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
115 | 00100100/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y0_2”|** Auto
----------------------------------------------------------------------
116 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 / 7FH|”YA_2”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
117 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 / 7FH|”YE_2”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
118 | 00100000/int16| 0 | 1 | 100 | 4 / -1 |”dr ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
119 | 00100100/Fl | 0 | 1 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tY ”|** off
---------------------------------------------------------------------
120 | 00100000/int16| 0 | 1 | 30 | 4 /-23 |”tA ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
121 | 00100000/int16| 0 | 1 | 30 | 4 /-23 |”tE ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
122 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tF1 ”|** oFF
---------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 45
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
123 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tF2 ”|** oFF
---------------------------------------------------------------------
124 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tF3 ”|** oFF
---------------------------------------------------------------------
125 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tF4 ”|** oFF
---------------------------------------------------------------------
126 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tF5 ”|** oFF
---------------------------------------------------------------------
127 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”c1 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
128 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”c2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
129 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”c3 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
130 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”c4 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
131 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”c5 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
132 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 1999 | 0 / -2 |”c6 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
133 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P01 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
134 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P02 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
135 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P03 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
136 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P04 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
137 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P05 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
138 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P06 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
139 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P07 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
140 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P08 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
141 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P09 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
142 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P10 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------
385 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P11 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
386 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P12 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
387 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P13 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
388 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P14 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
389 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”P15 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
390 | 00100000/ Fl | 0 | 1 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”ty2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
46 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
391 | 00100000/int16| 0 | 1 | 30 | 4 /-23 |”ta2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
392 | 00100000/int16| 0 | 1 | 30 | 4 /-23 |”te2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
393 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tf6 ”| off
---------------------------------------------------------------------
394 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tf7 ”| off
---------------------------------------------------------------------
395 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tf8 ”| off
---------------------------------------------------------------------
396 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tf9 ”| off
----------------------------------------------------------------------
397 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tf10”| off
----------------------------------------------------------------------
398 | 00100100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 1000 | 4 / 0 |”tf11”| off
----------------------------------------------------------------------
399 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 1999 | 0 / -2 |”c7 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
400 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”c8 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
401 | 00100000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”c9 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
402 | --------------| - | ------ | ------ | ------ | ---- |no access
----------------------------------------------------------------------
403 | --------------| - | ------ | ----- | ------ | ---- |no access
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Parameter ”oFPA”
----------------------------------------------------------------------
143 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”dP1 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
144 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”dA1 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
145 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”dE1 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
146 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”dP2 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
147 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”dA2 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
148 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”dE2 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
149 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -110.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”A1 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
150 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -110.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”A2 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
151 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -110.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”A3 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
152 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -110.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”A4 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
153 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.1 | 20.0 | 0 /7FH |”H1.2”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 47
302232

| |variabl/|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
154 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.1 | 20.0 | 0 /7FH |”H3.4”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
155 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”SA ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
156 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”SE ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
157 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”SH ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
158 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”Sb ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
159 | 00010100/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 9984 | 4 / 70 |”tS ”|** oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
160 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”vA ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
161 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 19999 | 0 / -3 |”vE ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
162 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”YS ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
163 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y1 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
164 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y2 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
165 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”-1.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
166 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 0.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
167 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 1.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
168 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 2.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
169 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 3.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
170 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 4.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
171 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 5.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
172 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 6.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
173 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 7.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
174 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 8.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
175 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 9.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
176 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”10.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
177 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”11.1”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
178 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”-1.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
179 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 0.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
180 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 1.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
48 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232

| |variabl/|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
181 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 2.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
182 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 3.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
183 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 4.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
184 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 5.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
185 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 6.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
186 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 7.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
187 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 8.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
188 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |” 9.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
189 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”10.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
190 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”11.3”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
191 | 00010000/int32| 0 | 10 | 1000 | 0 /-3 |”PA ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
192 | 00010000/int32| 0 | 1000 | 99990 | 0 /-3 |”PE ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
193 | 00010000/int32| 0 | 10 | 1000 | 0 /-3 |”T_A ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
194 | 00010000/int32| 0 | 1000 | 99990 | 0 /-3 |”T_E ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
404 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”SA2 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
405 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”SE2 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
406 | 00010100/Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 9984 | 4 / 70 |”tS2 ”|** off
----------------------------------------------------------------------
407 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”YS2 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
408 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”Pd ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
409 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”Ad ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
410 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”Ed ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
411 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.1 | 20.0 | 0 / 7FH|”H2 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
412 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.1 | 20.0 | 0 / 7FH|”H4 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
413 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 / 7FH|”Y3 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
414 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 / 7FH|”Y4 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 49
302232
Parameter ”PASt”

| |variabl/|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
195 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 10.00 | 0 / 0 |”vvc ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
196 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 100.0 | 0 / 0 |”cP1 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
197 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 100.0 | 0 / 0 |”cP3 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
198 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 100.0 | 0 / 0 |”cP5 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
199 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 100.0 | 0 / 0 |”cP7 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
200 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 0.100 | 100.0 | 0 / 0 |”cP9 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
201 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 9984 | 4 / 0 |”tn1 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
202 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 9984 | 4 / 0 |”tn3 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
203 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 9984 | 4 / 0 |”tn5 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
204 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 9984 | 4 / 0 |”tn7 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
205 | 00010000/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 9984 | 4 / 0 |”tn9 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
206 | 00010100/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 2992 | 4 / 0 |”tv1 ”| oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
207 | 00010100/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 2992 | 4 / 0 |”tv3 ”| oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
208 | 00010100/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 2992 | 4 / 0 |”tv5 ”| oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
209 | 00010100/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 2992 | 4 / 0 |”tv7 ”| oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
210 | 00010100/ Fl | 0 | 1.000 | 2992 | 4 / 0 |”tv9 ”| oFF
----------------------------------------------------------------------
211 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 10.0 | 0 /7FH |”AH1 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
212 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 10.0 | 0 /7FH |”AH3 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
213 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 10.0 | 0 /7FH |”AH5 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
214 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 10.0 | 0 /7FH |”AH7 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
215 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 10.0 | 0 /7FH |”AH9 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
216 | 00010100/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y01 ”|** Auto
----------------------------------------------------------------------
217 | 00010100/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y03 ”|** Auto
----------------------------------------------------------------------
218 | 00010100/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y05 ”|** Auto
----------------------------------------------------------------------
219 | 00010100/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y07 ”|** Auto
----------------------------------------------------------------------
220 | 00010100/int16| 0 | 0.0 | 100.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y09 ”|** Auto
----------------------------------------------------------------------
50 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
Parameter ”CAE4/CAE5”

| |variabl/|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
415 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 7 | 0 / 0 |”Sen4”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
416 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”uni4”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
417 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 10 | 0 / 0 |”typ4”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
418 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 10000 |23 / -2 |”Mr4 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
419 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 4000 |17 / -1 |”tb4 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
420 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”MP4 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
421 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”MA4 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
422 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”ME4 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
423 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 7 | 0 / 0 |”Sen5”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
424 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”uni5”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
425 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 10 | 0 / 0 |”typ5”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
426 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 10000 |23 / -2 |”Mr5 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
427 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 4000 |17 / -1 |”tb5 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
428 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”MP5 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
429 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”MA5 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
430 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1999 | 19999 | 0 / 0 |”ME5 ”|
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Structure switches ”StrS”
---------------------------------------------------------------------
221 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 254 | 0 / 0 |”S0 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
222 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 12 | 0 / 0 |”S1 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
223 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
224 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S3 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
225 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S4 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
226 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S5 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
227 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S6 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 51
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
228 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S7 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
229 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 7 | 0 / 0 |”S8 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
230 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 7 | 0 / 0 |”S9 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
231 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S10 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
232 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S11 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
233 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S12 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
234 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S13 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
235 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S14 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
236 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S15 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
237 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S16 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
238 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S17 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
239 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S18 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
240 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S19 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
241 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S20 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
242 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S21 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
243 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 6 | 0 / 0 |”S22 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
244 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 6 | 0 / 0 |”S23 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
245 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S24 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
246 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S25 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
247 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S26 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
248 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S27 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
249 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S28 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
250 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S29 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
251 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S30 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
252 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S31 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
253 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S32 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
254 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S33 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
52 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
255 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S34 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
256 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S35 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
257 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S36 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
258 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S37 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
259 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S38 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
260 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S39 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
261 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S40 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
262 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S41 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
263 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S42 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
264 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S43 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
265 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S44 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
266 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S45 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
267 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S46 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
268 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S47 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
269 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S48 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
270 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S49 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
271 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S50 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
272 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S51 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
273 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S52 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
274 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S53 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
275 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S54 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
276 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S55 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
277 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S56 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
278 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S57 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
279 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S58 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
280 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S59 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
281 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 30 | 0 / 0 |”S60 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 53
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
282 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S61 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
283 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S62 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
284 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S63 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
285 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 4 | 0 / 0 |”S64 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
286 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S65 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
287 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S66 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
288 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S67 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
289 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S68 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
290 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S69 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
291 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S70 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
292 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S71 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
293 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S72 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
294 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 41 | 0 / 0 |”S73 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
295 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 41 | 0 / 0 |”S74 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
296 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 41 | 0 / 0 |”S75 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
297 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S76 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
298 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S77 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
299 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S78 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
300 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S79 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
301 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S80 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
302 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S81 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
303 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S82 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
304 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S83 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
305 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S84 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
306 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S85 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
307 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S86 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
308 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S87 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
54 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
309 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S88 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
310 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S89 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
311 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S90 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
312 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S91 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
313 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S92 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
314 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S93 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
315 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 39 | 0 / 0 |”S94 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
316 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 39 | 0 / 0 |”S95 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
317 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S96 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
318 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S97 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
319 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S98 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
320 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S99 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
321 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S100”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
322 | 00010010/int16| 0 | 0 | 5 | 0 / 0 |”S101”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
323 | 00010010/int16| 0 | 0 | 5 | 0 / 0 |”S102”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
324 | 00010010/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S103”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
325 | 00010010/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S104”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
326 | 00010010/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S105”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
327 | 00010010/int16| 0 | 0 | 125 | 0 / 0 |”S106”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
328 | 00010010/int16| 0 | 0 | 25 | 0 / 0 |”S107”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------
431 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S200”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
432 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S201”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
433 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S202”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
434 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S203”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
435 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S204”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
436 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S205”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 55
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
437 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S206”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
438 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S207”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
439 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S208”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
440 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S209”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
441 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S210”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
442 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S211”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
443 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S212”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
444 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S213”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
445 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S214”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
446 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S215”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
447 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S216”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
448 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 11 | 0 / 0 |”S217”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
449 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S218”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
450 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S219”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
451 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S220”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
452 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S221”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
453 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S222”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
454 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S223”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
455 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S224”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
456 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S225”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
457 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S226”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
458 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S227”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
459 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S228”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
460 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S229”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
461 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S230”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
462 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S231”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
463 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S232”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
56 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
464 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S233”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
465 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S234”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
466 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S235”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
467 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S236”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
468 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S237”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
469 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S238”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
470 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 2 | 0 / 0 |”S239”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
471 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 4 | 0 / 0 |”S240”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
472 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S241”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
473 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S242”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
474 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 3 | 0 / 0 |”S243”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
475 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S244”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
476 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S245”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
477 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S246”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
478 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S247”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
479 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S248”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
480 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S249”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
481 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S250”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
482 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S251”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
483 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 / 0 |”S252”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
484 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 41 | 0 / 0 |”S253”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
485 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 41 | 0 / 0 |”S254”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
486 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 41 | 0 / 0 |”S255”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
487 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 41 | 0 / 0 |”S256”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
488 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 41 | 0 / 0 |”S257”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
489 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S258”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
490 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S259”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 57
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
491 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S260”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
492 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S261”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
493 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S262”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
494 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S263”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
495 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S264”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
496 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S265”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
497 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 16 | 0 / 0 |”S266”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
498 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1 | 39 | 0 / 0 |”S267”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
499 | 00010000/int16| 0 | -1 | 39 | 0 / 0 |”S268”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------
535 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S269”| 1.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
536 | 00010000/int16| 0 | 0 | 18 | 0 / 0 |”S270”| 1.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
1.) from Software –C9 onwards
Freely interconnectable area

---------------------------------------------------------------------
380 | 01010000/ os2 | 26 | 00 | 00C0 | 0 / 0 |”FDEF”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
381 | 01010000/ os2 | 59 | 00 | 00FF | 0 / 0 |”FD_I”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
382 | 01010000/ os2 | 42 | 00 | 00FF | 0 / 0 |”FD_O”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
383 | 01010000/ os2 | 98 | 00 | 005E | 0 / 0 |”FCON”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
384 | 01010000/ os2 | 31 | 00 | 001A | 0 / 0 |”FPOS”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Processvalues (read only)

---------------------------------------------------------------------
329 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”we_d”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
330 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”xds ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
331 | 10000010/bs16 | 0 | 0000 | FFFF | 0 / 0 |”BA ”| 1.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
332 | 10000010/bs16 | 0 | 0000 | FFFF | 0 / 0 |”BE ”| 2.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
333 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AA1 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
334 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AA2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
335 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AA3 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
58 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
336 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AA4 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
337 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”Y1 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
338 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”Y2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
339 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”Y ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
340 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”xd_1”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
341 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”x_1 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
342 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”w_1 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
343 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”wi_1”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
344 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”xv_1”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
345 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”wv_1”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
346 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”Y_1 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
347 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”xd_2”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
348 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”x_2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
349 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”w_2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
350 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”wi_2”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
351 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”Y_2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
352 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”E1 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
353 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”E2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
354 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”E3 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
355 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”E4 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
356 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”E5 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
357 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”E6 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
358 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE1A”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
359 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE2A”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
360 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE3A”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
361 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE4A”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
362 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE5A”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 59
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
363 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE1 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
364 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE2 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
365 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE3 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
366 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE4 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
367 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 /7FH |”AE5 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
368 | 10000010/bs16 | 0 | 0 | FFFF | 0 / 0 |”ST8 ”| 3.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
369 | 10000010/bs16 | 0 | 0 | FFFF | 0 / 0 |”STN ”| 4.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
370 | --------------| | | | | | n.def.
---------------------------------------------------------------------
371 | 10000010/bs16 | 0 | 0 | 00FF | 0 / 0 |”ST3 ”| 5.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------
500 | 10000000/bs16 | 0 | 0 | 00FF | 0 / 0 |”ST10”| 8.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
501 | 10000010/bs16 | 0 | 0 | FFFF | 0 / 0 |”ST11”| 9.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
502 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE6A”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
503 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE7A”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
504 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE8A”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
505 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE9A”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
506 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AEAA”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
507 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AEBA”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
508 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE6 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
509 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE7 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
510 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE8 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
511 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE9 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
512 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE10”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
513 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AE11”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
514 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”E7 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
515 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”E8 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
516 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”E9 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
517 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”E10 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
60 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232

| |variabl/|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
518 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”E11 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
519 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”E12 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
520 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AA5 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
521 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AA6 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
522 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AA7 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
523 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AA8 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
524 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”AA9 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
525 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”Y3 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
526 | 10000010/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”Y4 ”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 61
302232
Processdata (read-/writeable)

| |variabl/|
--------------------------------------------------------------------
372 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”w_es” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
373 | 10000000/bs16 | 0 | 0 | 00FF | 0 / 0 |”STes” | 6.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
374 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”Y_es” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
375 | 10000000/bs16 | 0 | 0 | 00FF | 0 / 0 |”ST5 ” | 7.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
376 | 10000000/bs16 | 0 | 0 | FFFF | 0 / 0 |”STBA” | 11.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
377 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”w1es” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
378 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”w2es” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
379 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 /7FH |”YHes” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------
527 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 / 7FH|”YHes2”|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
528 | 10000000/bs16 | 0 | 0 | 00ff | 0 / 0 |”ST20” |10.)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
529 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 / 7FH|”Wes2” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
530 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -10.0 | 110.0 | 0 / 7FH|”Yes2” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
531 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”SAA1” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
532 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”SAA2” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
533 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”SAA3” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
534 | 10000000/int16| 0 | -199.9 | 199.9 | 0 / 7FH|”SAA4” |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Meaning of the bits:
---------------------------------------------------------------------
1.) PNU 331: readable binary outputs ”BAxx”

11.) PNU 376: writeable binary outputs ”StBA”
| BIT 15: BA8 | BIT 7: BA16

| BIT 14: BA7 | BIT 6: BA15
| BIT 13: BA6 | BIT 5: BA14
| BIT 12: BA5 | BIT 4: BA13
| BIT 11: BA4 | BIT 3: BA12
| BIT 10: BA3 | BIT 2: BA11
| BIT 9: BA2 | BIT 1: BA10
| BIT 8: BA1 | BIT 0: BA9
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
62 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
2.) PNU 332: binary inputs ”BExx”
| BIT 15: BE8 | BIT 7: x

| BIT 14: BE7 | BIT 6: x
| BIT 13: BE6 | BIT 5: BE14
| BIT 12: BE5 | BIT 4: BE13
| BIT 11: BE4 | BIT 3: BE12
| BIT 10: BE3 | BIT 2: BE11
| BIT 9: BE2 | BIT 1: BE10
| BIT 8: BE1 | BIT 0: BE9
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3.) PNU 368: Status ”ST8”
| BIT 15: CB | BIT 7: BLS

| BIT 14: He | BIT 6: BLPS
| BIT 13: Si | BIT 5: PAU
| BIT 12: N | BIT 4: controller I,II (Override)
| BIT 11: P/PI (I) | BIT 3: +dy
| BIT 10: P/PI (II) | BIT 2: -dy
| BIT 9: +yBL | BIT 1: +dw
| BIT 8: -yBL | BIT 0: -dw
----------------------------------------------------------------------
4.) PNU369: Status ”STN”
| BIT 15: manual (I) changed | BIT 7: manual (II) changed

| BIT 14: X | BIT 6: tS_STOP (I)
| BIT 13: MUFS | BIT 5: tS_STOP (II)
| BIT 12: contr.I,II(Overr.) | BIT 4: Internal (I)
| BIT 11: A4 | BIT 3: Internal (II)
| BIT 10: A3 | BIT 2: X
| BIT 9: A2 | BIT 1: H
| BIT 8: A1 | BIT 0: Yext
Function BIT 15: from software –C7 onwards

Function BIT 7 : from software –C7 onwards
Function BIT 6 : from software –C9 onwards
Function Bit 5 : from software –C9 onwards
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
| BIT 15: 0 | BIT 7: LBQ last change H/I

| BIT 14: 0 | BIT 6: Y0-Error (PAST)
| BIT 13: 0 | BIT 5: X
| BIT 12: 0 | BIT 4: tv-Error
| BIT 11: 0 | BIT 3: Sum-Error
| BIT 10: 0 | BIT 2: ncon Error
| BIT 9: 0 | BIT 1: -Pos Error
| BIT 8: 0 | BIT 0: nPos Error
----------------------------------------------------------------------
C79000-B7476-C155-03 63
302232
6.) PNU 373: Status ”STes” (writeable)
| BIT 15: 0 | BIT 7: CB

| BIT 14: 0 | BIT 6: H
| BIT 13: 0 | BIT 5: Si
| BIT 12: 0 | BIT 4: N
| BIT 11: 0 | BIT 3: P/PI (I)
| BIT 10: 0 | BIT 2: P/PI (II)
| BIT 9: 0 | BIT 1: +yBL
| BIT 8: 0 | BIT 0: -YBL
----------------------------------------------------------------------
7.) PNU 375: Status ”ST5” (writeable)
| BIT 15: 0 | BIT 7: BLS

| BIT 14: 0 | BIT 6: BLPS
| BIT 13: 0 | BIT 5: PAU
| BIT 12: 0 | BIT 4: Intern (I)
| BIT 11: 0 | BIT 3: Intern (II)
| BIT 10: 0 | BIT 2: tS (I)
| BIT 9: 0 | BIT 1: wSL(I)
| BIT 8: 0 | BIT 0: BLB
---------------------------------------------------------------------
| BIT 15: 0 | BIT 7: CB (II)

| BIT 14: 0 | BIT 6: H (II)
| BIT 13: 0 | BIT 5: Si (II)
| BIT 12: 0 | BIT 4: N (II)
| BIT 11: 0 | BIT 3: LBQ (II)
| BIT 10: 0 | BIT 2: tS (II)
| BIT 9: 0 | BIT 1: +yBL (II)
| BIT 8: 0 | BIT 0: -yBL (II)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
| BIT 15: MUF AE8 | BIT 7: Option-Error

| BIT 14: MUF AE7 | BIT 6: tS (I)
| BIT 13: MUF AE6 | BIT 5: BLB
| BIT 12: MUF AE5 | BIT 4: wSL (I)
| BIT 11: MUF AE4 | BIT 3: wSL (II)
| BIT 10: MUF AE3 | BIT 2: MUF AE11
---------------------------------------------------------------------
10.) PNU 528: Status ”ST20” (writeable)
| BIT 15: 0 | BIT 7: CB (II)

| BIT 14: 0 | BIT 6: H (II)
| BIT 13: 0 | BIT 5: Si (II)
| BIT 12: 0 | BIT 4: N (II)
| BIT 11: 0 | BIT 3: wSL (II)
| BIT 10: 0 | BIT 2: tS (II)
| BIT 9: 0 | BIT 1: +yBL (II)
| BIT 8: 0 | BIT 0: -yBL (II)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
64 C79000-B7476-C155-03
302232
302232
Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Geschäftsgebiet A&D PA
D-76181 Karlsruhe E Siemens AG 1999 All rights reserved
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. C79000-B7476-C155

AG 0400 66 GB
302232
SIPART DR22
6DR 2210
Edition 01/2003
Manual
SIPART DR22 6DR2210 1

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Block diagram
S5 S10 S20
F
+ 1/20 I,U AE1A S15 r
AE1 Standard o
U t FE1 settings
- 1/19 n
S0 to S4 t
S6 S11 S20
+ 1/22 S16 Analog inputs 0000 m
I,U AE2A
AE2 S5 to S21, o
- 1/21 U t FE2
S200 to S217 d
u
S7 S12 S20 l
I,U S17
Assembly e
+ 1/24 AE3A
Slot 5 and 6
AE3 FE3 S22, S23
1/23
U t
- U
1/12
Digital inputs AA1
S24 to S48,
S218 to S228
S8 U
Setpoint command 1/13 AA2
2/4 I,U,R S49 to S53
UNI, S13
2/3
P, AE4A S18
AE4 2/2 T,
Control algorithm
2/1 V t FE4 S54 to S60 U
U 1/14 AA3
Y switching I
Slot 2 drawn: S61 to S66

Options S9 S4 = 0 5V
at S4 = 1 freely Y display
3/4 I,U,R connectable S67 to S68
S14 24 V I
UNI,
3/3 P, S98
AE5
AE5A Analog outputs 1/4 BA1
T,
3/2 V t FE5/6 S69 to S75,
U S247 to S257 1/5 2
3/1 S212 to S217
Digital outputs 1/6 3
Slot 3 FE7
FE8 S76 to S93,
1/7 4
S258 to S266
FE9
1/8 5
FE10 Limit value alarms
FE11 S94 to S98, 1/9 6
FE12 S267 to S268
1/10 7
Restart
conditions 1/11 BA8
24 V
S99, S100
5V Serial interface
3AE
BE1 1/15 bE01 S101 to S107 6/6
1AA yhold
6/5
2 1/16 bE02 5BE
6/4
4BA24V
3 1/17 bE03 6/3
+2BE
6/2
BE4 1/18 bE04 2BA Rel.
6/1
3AO/3BE
Slot 6
Options
L+ 1/3
3AE 5/6
I User
M 1/2 program 1AA yhold
5/5
memory for: 5BE
M 1/1 5/4
onPA on 4BA 24V
5/3
S3 AdAP line +2BE
M 5/2
L  + 24 V oFPA
2BA Rel.
3AO/3BE
5/1
FdEF
N +5V FCon off Slot 5
FPoS line Options
PE – UREF
APSt
FPST 4/2
RS 232
« RS 485 4/7
PROFIBUS 4/8
4/3
Slot 4
6DR2210-4 24 V UC
6DR2210-5 115/230 V AC switchable Slot Terminal
2 SIPART DR22 6DR2210

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual
Classification of safety--related notices
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well
as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual
by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
DANGER
! indicates an immenently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious inury.
WARNING
! indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
CAUTION
! used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTICE
indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable
result or state.
. NOTE
highlights important information on the product, using the product, or part of the
documentation that is of particular importance and that will be of benefit to the
user.
Copyright e Siemens AG 1999 All rights reserved Disclaimer of Liability

The reproduction, transmission or use of this docu- We have checked the contents of this manual for
ment or its contents is not permitted without ex- agreement with the hardware and software descri-
press written authority. Offenders will be liable for bed. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely,
damages. All rights, including rights created by pa- we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the
tent grant or registration of a utility model or design, data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any
are reserved. necessary corrections included in subsequent edi-
tions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungs-- und Antriebstechnik e Siemens AG 1999
Geschäftsgebiet Prozessinstrumentierung-- und Technical data subject to change.
Analytik
D--76181 Karlsruhe

C79000-G7476-C154--02
305735
Trademarks
SIMATICR, SIPARTR, SIRECR, SITRANSR registered trademarks of Siemens AG.

Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trade-
marks might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual Contents
Conents
Page
1 Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Safety notes and scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 Range of Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3 Design (Hardware) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.4 Function principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.4.1 Standard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.4.2 Description of the option modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.4.3 CPU self-diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.4.4 Data storage, User program memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.5 Functional description of the structure switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.5.1 Analog input signal processing permanently connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.5.2 Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.5.2.1 Arithmetic Ar1 to Ar6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5.2.2 Function transmitter Fu1 and Fu2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5.2.3 Maximum value selection MA1 to MA3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5.2.4 Minimum value selection Mi1 to Mi3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.2.5 Correction computer for ideal gases rE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.2.6 Switch for analog variables AS1 to AS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.5.2.7 Comparator with adjustable hysteresis Co1, Co2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.5.2.8 AND NOT function (NAND) nA1, nA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.5.2.9 OR NOT function (NOR) no1, no2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.5.3 Digital input signal processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.5.3.1 Digital inputs BE1 to BE14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.5.3.2 Assignment and direction of effect of the digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.5.3.3 Linking the digital inputs BE1 bis BE14 to the control signals via the SES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.5.3.4 Functional explanation of the digital control signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.5.4 Controller types (S1, S49 to S53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.5.4.1 General, recurrent functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.5.4.2 S1 = 0: Fixed setpoint controller with 2 independent setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.5.4.3 S1= 1: Fixed setpoint controller with 2 dependent setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.5.4.4 S1 = 2: DDC fixed setpoint controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1.5.4.5 S1 = 3: Follow-up controller, synchronized controller, SPC-controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.5.4.6 S1 = 4: commanded ratio controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.5.4.7 S1 = 5: Cascade control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.5.4.8 S1 = 6: Ratio-cascade control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.5.4.9 S1 = 7/8: Override control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1.5.4.10 S1 = 9: Process display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
1.5.4.11 S1 = 10: Fixed setpoint controller with 1 setpoint (control system coupling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1.5.4.12 S1 = 11: Follow-up controller without Int/Ext switching (control system coupling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1.5.4.13 S1=12: Double fixed setpoint/follow-up controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1.5.5.1 Control algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1.5.6 Controller output structures (S2, S61 to S68) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.5.6.1 S2 = 0: Continuous (K) controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.5.6.2 S2 = 1: Three-position step (S) -controller with internal feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
1.5.6.3 S2 = 2: Three-position step (S) -- controller with external feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.5.7 Analog output signal processing (S69 to S75, S247 to S257) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
1.5.8 Digital output signal processing (S76 to S93 and S258 to S266) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
1.5.9 Limit value alarms (S94 to S100, S267 to S268) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
1.5.10 Restart conditions (S99, S100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
1.5.11 Serial interface and PROFIBUS-DP (S101 to S107) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
1.6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1.6.1 General data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1.6.2 Standard Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
1.6.3 Technical data of the options modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Contents Manual
2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2.1 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2.2 Electrical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
2.2.1 Connection standard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.2.2 Wiring of option modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.2.3 Alternative connection for I- and U-input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.2.4 Connection of the interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.1 Process operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3.2 Selection level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.3 Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
3.3.1 Paramterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
3.3.2 Parameterization mode onPA (online parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3.3.3 Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.3.4 Structuring mode oFPA (offline Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3.3.5 Structuring mode PASt (parameter control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3.3.6 Structuring mode StrS (structure switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3.3.7 Structuring mode FdEF (define functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3.3.8 Structuring mode FCon (connect functions, connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3.3.9 Structuring mode FPoS (position functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3.3.10 Structuring mode FPSt (Functions Preset, factory setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
3.3.11 Structuring mode APSt (All Preset, factory setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
3.3.12 Set structuring mode CAE4/CAE5 -- UNI module(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
3.3.12.1 Measuring range for mV (SEnS=Mv.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
3.3.12.2 Measuring range for U, I (SEnS=Mv.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
3.3.12.3 Measuring range for thermocouple with internal reference point (SEnS=tc.in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
3.3.12.4 Measuring range for thermocouple with external reference point (SEnS=tc.EH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
3.3.12.5 Measuring range for PT100-4-wire and PT100-3-wire connection (SEnS=Pt.3L/PT.4L) . . . . . . . . 213
3.3.12.6 Measuring range for PT100-2-wire connection (SEnS=Pt.2L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3.3.12.7 Measuring range for resistance potentiometer
(SEnS=r._ for R < 600 W, SEnS=r. for R< 2.8 kW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
4 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.1 Adapting the controller direction of effect to the controlled system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.2 Setting the split range outputs and the actuating time in K-controllers (S2 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.3 Adaptation of the S-controller to the actuating drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
4.4 Setting the filter and the response threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.5 Automatic setting of control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4.6 Manual setting of the control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
4.7 Manual setting of the control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.1 General information and handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5.2 Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
6 Ordering data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
7 Application examples for configuring the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

8 Configuring tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
9 Explanation of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 1 Technical Description
1.1 Safety notes and scope of delivery
1 Technical Description
1.1 Safety notes and scope of delivery
! WARNING
This device is electrically operated. When operating electrical
equipment, certain parts of this equipment automatically carry
dangerous voltages. Failure to observe these instructions could
therefore lead to serious injury or material damage. Only properly
trained and qualified personnel are allowed to work on this
equipment. This personnel must be fully conservant with all the
warnings and commissioning measures as described in this user’s
guide.
The perfect and safe operation of this equipment is conditional upon
proper transport, proper storage, installation and assembly as well as
on careful operation and commissioning.
D Scope of delivery
When the controller is delivered the box contains:

1 Controller as ordered
1 three-pin plug at 115/230 V AC or special plug at 24 V UC
2 Clamps, pluggable
1 Assembly and installation instructions
Order number C79000-M7474-C38
D Basic equipment
The following variants of the SIPART DR22 are available:

Order number Power Supply
6DR2210-4 24 V UC
6DR2210-5 115/230 V AC, switchable
D Option modules
Signal convertors have separate ordering and delivery items. For handling reasons basic
equipment and signal convertors which were ordered at the same time may be delivered by
separate mail.
D Documentation
This user’s guide is available in the following languages:
English C79000-G7476-C154
German C79000-G7400-C154

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1 Technical Description Manual
1.2 Range of Application
D Subject to change
The user’s guide has been compiled with great care. However, it may be necessary within
the scope of product care to make changes to the product and its operation without prior
notice which are not contained in this user’s guide. We are not liable for any costs ensuing
for this reason.
1.2 Range of Application
The SIPART DR22 is a digitally operating device in the top class range. Its program memory
contains a large number of prepared function blocks for calculating, controlling, regulating in
technical processes which the user can implement without programming knowledge and
additional tools.
In addition a robust adaptation procedure is available in this device which makes it much easier
to commission even critical controlled systems. The controller determines the optimized control
parameters independently on request without the user being expected to have any prior
knowledge of how the control loop may respond. The applied procedure is suitable for systems
with compensation and aperiodic transient behavior; even greater dead times are taken into
account.
For more complicated applications the fixed connection of the individual functions can be
canceled in the input range and replaced by a free structuring. The user can easily add extra
analog function blocks and connect them to each other and to the interfaces of the input range
with the software. This achieves optimum adaptation even to complex problems.
The named programming possibilities guarantee a great flexibility in the use of the controller
and allow fast, easy adapting of the device to the problem so that the SIPART DR22 can be
used universally for control jobs in processing engineering, e.g. as
-- fixed setpoint controller for one, two or three-component control, optionally with two
setpoints
-- DDC fixed setpoint controller for one-, two- or three-component control
-- follow-up controller (synchronized controller, SPC controller) with internal/external switching
-- fixed or commanded ratio controller with Internal/External switching
-- cascade controller (double controller)
-- ratio-cascade controller (double controller)
-- override controller with Min or Max selection of the manipulated variable (double controller)
-- double controller with two independent control channels
The extensive hardware equipment of the instrument by which numerous interfaces are
available for connecting the field cables is of advantage for the universal utilization. The
instrument can also be connected to master systems via a plug-in serial interface or operated
and monitored centrally by a Personal Computer.
The SIPART DR22 can be used alternatively as a continuous controller with a current output
signal or as a three-position step controller for controlling electric motor drives without changing
the hardware equipment.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.3 Design (Hardware)
The process controller SIPART DR22 has a modular structure and is therefore maintenance
friendly and easy to convert and retrofit. Other signal convertors can be installed in the gener-
ously equipped, fully functional standard controller to expand the range of application. These
modules are inserted in backplane slots of the enclosed instrument (Fig. 1-2, page 11).
The standard controller consists of
-- the front module with the control and display elements

-- the main board with CPU and terminal strips
-- the plastic casing with an interface board
-- the power supply unit.
The electrical connections between the modules are made by an interface board screwed into
the casing. The main board is pushed into rear slot 1 and locked. It holds a 10-pin and a 14-pin
terminal strip to which all inputs and outputs of the standard controller are connected. Five other
slots can be equipped with option modules if the number of terminals to the process available in
the standard controller are not sufficient for the planned task.
The standard controller always has three permanently installed analog inputs (AE) with elec-
tronic potential isolation which can be wired alternatively with standardized voltage signals
(0/0.2 to 1 V or 0/2 to 10 V) or current signals (0/4 to 20 mA). There are also four digital inputs
(BE, 0/24 V) and eight digital outputs (BA, 0/24 V, 50 mA) which can be used for different func-
tions depending on the configuration.
The SIPART DR22 also has three analog outputs (AA) which can all supply a current signal
from 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA and be assigned to different variables.
A short-circuit-proof L+--output (DC 24 V, 100 mA) is available for supplying transmitters.
The power supply unit is located in a fully enclosed metal casing and is screwed tightly to the
plastic casing of the controller. This power supply is available in two different versions so that
two types of SIPART DR22 are available:
6DR2210-4 for power supply connection UC 24 V

6DR2210-5 for power supply connection AC 230 V
switchable to AC 115 V
Many applications can be implemented with the three permanently available analog inputs of
the standard controller alone. Two additional input modules can be inserted in slots 2 and 3 for
complex jobs or for the connection of other input signals. These input modules are available in
addition to for processing normalized current and voltage signals for the direct connection of
resistance thermometers Pt100 and all common thermocouples and resistance sensors or
potentiometers. In addition a module with 3 analog inputs (equipment as in the standard
controller) can be inserted in slots 5 and 6. This increases the number of inputs to a total of 11.
Slot 4 serves to accommodate an interface module (SES) with V.28-point-pointoutput or

SIPART bus interface for serial communication with a master system. A PROFIBUS interface
module can be equipped optionally here.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The slots 5 and 6 can accommodate signal convertors of different functions and can be
equipped optionally with modules for expanding digital inputs or digital outputs.
The following assemblies are possible:
2 relays
4 digital outputs/2 digital inputs
5 digital inputs
3 analog outputs/3 digital inputs
1 analog output with digital fault output (yholdfunction) with remote supply
3 analog inputs
1 Power supply unit

3 2 Casing
3 Front module
Figure 1-1 Front view of the SIPART DR22

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
12
11
Legend:
2 1 PE conductor -- contact spring
10 2 Slot 6
3 Slot 5
4 Slot 1 (basic board)
5 Slot 2
9 6 Slot 3
7 Slot 4 (SES: RS 232/
RS 485, Profibus DP)
8 Grounding screw
9 DIN rail (delivered with the
8 interface relay)
10 Selector switch Mains voltage
3 11 Mains plug
12 Power supply unit
7 6 5 4
Figure 1-2 Rear view of the SIPART DR22

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.4 Function principle
1.4.1 Standard controller
1.4.1 Standard controller

The standard controller consists of three function blocks:
-- Power supply unit

-- Front module
-- Main board
Power supply unit

Primary clocked power supply plug with high efficiency for AC 115/230 V (switchable) or for UC
24 V. It generates the secondary internal supply voltages +24 V and +5 V from the power
supply. The metal body is mounted on PE conductors (protection class I). The power supply
and internal supply voltages are isolated from each other by safe separation by a protective
shield. The internal supply voltages are functional extra-low voltages due to overvoltage cutoff
in the event of an error. Since no other voltages are generated in the instrument, these
statements apply for all field signal cables (used standards, see chapter 1.6, page 127). A total of
450 mA are available for the outputs L+, AA and BA due to the design for a high power output.
Front module
The front module contains the control and display elements and the appropriate trigger compo-
nents for the displays.
All display elements are designed in LED technology which provides a longer service life and
higher light density as well as a good viewing angle. The control elements are short-stroke
switches with a tangible ”pressure point” and high return force.
Main board
The main board contains the field signal conditioning of the standard controller, the CPU
(Central Processing Unit) and the connections (through the interface board) to the module slots.
The field signals are fed through protective circuits for external static or dynamic overvoltages
and then adapted to the signal levels of the CPU by the appropriate circuits. This adaptation is
performed for the analog inputs, the analog outputs and the digital outputs by modern thick-film
circuits.
The microcontroller used has integrated AD- and DA converters and operates with 32k battery-
backed RAM. The user-specific configuration is stored in an user program memory with a serial
4k EEPROM. When replacing the main board the user memory can be plugged from the old
onto the new module. The whole CPU is designed in C-MOS technology.
A process image is generated at the start of every routine. The analog and digital inputs and
actuation of the front buttons is included and the process variables received from the serial
interface are accepted. All calculations are made with these input signals according to the
configured functions. Then the data are output to the display elements, the analog outputs and
the digital outputs as well as storage of the calculated variables on standby for the serial
interface transmitter. The interface traffic runs in interrupt mode.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.4.2 Description of the option modules
A large number of prepared functions for controlling processing plants as well as machines and
apparatus is stored in the set value memory of the SIPART DR22. The user programs the
instrument himself by selecting the desired functions by setting structure switches. The total
functioning of the instrument is given by the combination of the individual structure switches.
Programming knowledge is not necessary for the settings. All settings are made without an
additional programming unit exclusively through the front panel of the SIPART DR22 or through
the serial interface. The job-specific program written in this way is saved in the non-volatile user
program memory.

The following option modules are described in this chapter
6DR2800-8A Module with 3 AE, U- or I-input

6DR2800-8J I/U module
6DR2800-8R R module
6DR2800-8V UNI module
6DR2805-8A Reference junction terminal
6DR2805-8J Measuring range for TC, internal connector
6DR2801-8D Module with 2 BA (relays)
6DR2801-8E Module with 2 BE and 4 BA
6DR2801-8C Module with 5 BE
6DR2802-8A Analog output module with y-hold function
6DR2802-8B Module with 3AA and 3BE
6DR2803-8P Serial interface PROFIBUS-DP
6DR2803-8C Serial interface RS 232 / RS 485
6DR2804-8A Module with 4 BA relays
6DR2804-8B Module with 2 BA relays
6DR2800-8A Module with 3 AE, U- or I-input
D Inputs for current and voltage
To expand the analog inputs.

For a description of the module and technical data, see chapter 1.6.2, page 129 (Inputs standard
controller).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
6DR2800-8J I/U module
D Input variables current 0/4 to 20 mA or voltage 0/0.2 to 1 V or 0/2 to 10 V

The input amplifier of the module is designed as a differentiating amplifier with jumperable gain
for 0 to 1 V or 0 to 10 V input signal. For current input signals the 49.9 Ω 0.1 % impedance is
switched on by plug-in bridges on the module. The start value 0 mA or 4 mA or 0 V or 0.2 V
(2 V) is defined by configuration in the standard controller. The differentiating amplifier is
designed for common mode voltages up to 10 V and has a high common mode suppression.
As a result it is possible to connect the current inputs in series as for electrical isolation when
they have common ground. At voltage inputs this circuit technique makes it possible to
suppress the voltage dips on the ground rail by two--pole wiring on non floating voltage supplies.
We refer to an electronic potential isolation.
6DR2800-8R R module
D Input for resistance or current potentiometer

Potentiometers with rated values of 80 Ω to 1200 Ω can be connected as resistance
potentiometers. A constant current of Is = 5 mA is fed to the potentiometer wiper. The wiper
resistance is therefore not included in the measurement. Resistances are switched parallel to
the potentiometer by a slide switch on the module and a rough range selection made. Range
start and end are set with the two adjusting pots on the back of the module.
This fine adjustment can be made by the displays on the front module (with the appropriate
structuring). For adjustment with a remote measuring instrument, the analog output can be as-
signed to the appropriate input.
The external wiring must be changed for resistance potentiometers which cannot withstand the
5 mA wiper current or which have a rated resistance > 1 kΩ. The constant current is then not
fed through the wiper but through the whole resistance network of the potentiometer. A voltage
divider measurement is now made through the wiper. Coarse adjustment is made by a remote
parallel resistor to the resistance potentiometer.
This module can also be used as a current input with adjustable range start and full scale. The
load is 49.9 Ω and is referenced to ground.
6DR2800-8V UNI module
D Direct connection of thermocouple or Pt100 sensors, resistance of mV transmitters

Measured value sensors such as thermocouples (TC), resistance thermometers Pt100 (RTD),
resistance potentiometers (R) or voltage transmitters in the mV range can be connected di-
rectly. The measuring variable is selected by configuring the controller in the HdeF level
(AE4/AE5); the range and the other parameters are set in the CAE4/CAE5 menu. The sensor-
specific characteristics (linearization) for thermocouples and Pt100 resistance thermometers are
stored in the contoller’s program memory and are automatically taken into account. No settings
need to be made on the module itself.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The signal lines are connected by a plug terminal block with screw terminals. When using ther-
mocouples with internal reference junction terminal, this terminal block must be replaced by the
terminal 6DR2805-8A. With the measuring for TC, internal connector 6DR2805-8J in place of
the terminal block, the measuring range of the direct input (0/20 to 100 mV) can be extended to
0/2 up to 10 V or 0/4 up to 20 mA.
The UNI module operates with an AD converter with 18 bit resolution. The measuring inputs
and ground of the standard controller are electrically isolated with a permissible common mode
voltage of 50 V UC.
6DR2805-8A reference junction terminal
D Terminal with internal reference junction terminal for thermocouples

This terminal is used in connection with the UNI module for temperature measuring with ther-
mocouples at an internal reference junction terminal. It consists of a temperature sensor which
is pre-
assembled on a terminal block and plated to avoid mechanical damage.
6DR2805-8J measuring for TC, internal connector
D measuring for TC, internal connector for current 0/4 to 20 mA or voltage 0/2 to 10 V
The measuring for TC, internal connector is used in connection with the UNI module to
measure current orvoltage. The input variable is reduced to 0/20 to 100 mV by a voltage divider
or shunt resistors in the measuring for TC, internal connector.
Wiper resistors with 250 Ω or 50 Ω are available optionally at 2 different terminals for 0/4 to
20 mA signals.
The electrical isolation of the UNI module is retained even when the measuring for TC, internal
connector is used.
6DR2801-8D Module with 2 BA relays
D Digital output module with 2 relay contacts
To convert 2 digital outputs to relay contacts up to 35 V UC.
This module is equipped with 2 relays whose switching contacts have potential free outputs.
The RC combinations of the spark quenching elements are respectively parallel to the rest and
working contacts.
In AC consumers with low power the current flowing through the capacitor of the spark
quenching element when the contact is open may interfere (e.g. the hold current of some
switching elements is not exceeded). In this case the capacitors (1 μF) must be removed and
replaced with low capacitance capacitors.
The 68 V suppressor diodes parallel to the capacitors act additionally to reduce the induced
voltage.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
! WARNING
The relays used on the digital output module are designed for a
maximum rating up to UC 35 V. The same applies for the air and creep
lines on the circuit board. Higher voltages may therefore only be
switched through appropriately approved series connected circuit
elements under observance of the technical data and the pertinent
safety regulations.
6DR2801-8E Module with 2 BE and 4 BA
D Digital signal module with 2 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs

The module serves to extend the digital inputs and digital outputs already existing in the stan-
dard controller.
The inputs are designed for the 24 V logic and are non-floating. The functions are assigned to
the inputs and outputs by the configuration of the controller.
The digital outputs are short-circuit-proof and can drive commercially available relays or the
interface relays 6DR2804--8A/8B directly.
6DR2801-8C Module with 5 BE
D Digital input module with 5 digital inputs
The module serves to extend the digital inputs already existing in the standard controller.
The inputs are designed for the 24 V logic and are non-floating. The function is assigned to the
input by the configuration of the controller.
6DR2802-8A Analog output module with y-hold function

For auxiliary control device function when servicing and for extending the analog outputs AA1 to
AA3 existing in the standard controller.
Can be inserted in slot 5/6, S22/S23=4 to be set in the structure mode StrS,
Start value of the outputs S72/S249 can be set in StrS.
The yholdmodule contains a microprocessor which maintains serial data communication with the
processor on the main board through the Rxd/Txd lines. The processor feeds the U/I converter
and the CPU fault message output St through its analog output. The module can be externally
supplied through an auxiliary voltage input which is OR--linked with the controller power supply.
The analog output of the module is freely available.
-- yhold-function
If data communication to the yhold processor is interrupted, the analog output receives its last
value. The processor reads the current variable first when data traffic is recovered. The out-
put current is maintained if:

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- the self diagnostics of the CPU (see chapter 1.4.3, page 20) responds.
-- the supply voltage of the SIPART DR22 fails and the yhold-module is powered externally.
-- all modules except the power supply unit are removed (if the yhold module is powered
externally).
-- the yhold module is removed (Attention: electrostatically sensitive module! Observe the
safety precautions!), if it is powered externally (error message on the front module
oP. *.6 Err/oP.*.5, see chapter 5, page 227). *.6 Err/oP.*.5, see chapter 5).
In this way it is possible to perform all maintenance work right up to replacing the instrument
whilst maintaining the controller controlled variable.
Handling during module replacement, see chapter 5 ”Maintenance”.
-- St Fault message output

This digital output is always high when there is no error and becomes low in the event of an
error. It responds when:
-- the self diagnostics of the CPU (see chapter 1.4.3, page 20) responds.
-- the controller power supply fails,
-- the Yhold module is removed,
-- the main board is removed.
6DR2802-8B Module with 3AA and 3BE
To extend the analog outputs (0/4 to 20 mA) and digital inputs

can be inserted in slot 5: AA7, AA8, AA9 BE5, BE6, BE7
and in slot 6: AA4, AA5, AA6 BE10, BE11, BE12
6DR2803-8P Serial interface PROFIBUS-DP
The module 6DR2803-8P is a PROFIBUS-DP interface module with RS 485 driver and electri-
cal isolation to the controller. It operates as an intelligent converter module and adapts the pri-
vate SIPART to the open PROFIBUS-DP protocol.
This optional card can be inserted in all SIPART-DR controllers in slot 4. The following settings
must be made with the appropriate configurations for the serial interface:
-- Interface on
-- Even parity
-- LRC without
-- Baud rate 9600
-- Parameters/process values writable (as desired)
-- Station number according to selection 0 to 125
Make sure that the station number is not assigned double on the bus. The PROFIBUS module
serves to connect the SIPART controllers to a master system for control and monitoring.
In addition the parameters and configuring switches of the controller can be read and written.
Up to 32 process variables can be selected and read out cyclically by configuration of the
PROFIBUS module.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The process data are read out of the controller in a polling procedure with an update time <
300 ms. If the master writes process data to the slave, these become active after a maximum 1
controller cycle.
The description and the controller base file (*.GSD) can be downloaded from Internet under
www.fielddevices.com.
A technical description including the controller base file (*.GSD) is available for creating a mas-
ter-slave linking software for interpreting the identifications and useful data from and to the SI-
PART controller.
The programs SIPART S5 DP and S7 DP are offered for certain hardware configurations.
6DR2803-8C Serial interface RS 232 / RS 485
D Serial interface for RS 232 or RS 485 with electrical isolation

Can be inserted in slot 4.
For connecting the controller SIPART DR22 to a master system for control and monitoring. All
process variables can be sent, the external setpoint, tracking variable, operating modes, param-
eters and configurations sent and received.
The interface traffic can take place as follows:
RS 232 as point-to-point connection

The SIPART bus is no longer available. Therefore please implement multipoint
SIPART Bus
connections via RS 485 or PROFIBUS DP.
RS 485 As a serial data bus with up to 32 users.
The interface module 6DR2803-8C offers electrical isolation between Rxd/Txd and the control-
ler. Switching can be performed between RS 232, SIPART bus and RS 485 with a plug-in
bridge.
A detailed technical description of the telegram traffic is available for creating an interface soft-
ware.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
RS 485 + 150R
RS 485
24 V
+7.5 V
24 V
+7.5 V SIPART 0V
bus +7.5 V 8 Rxd/
-7.5 V
0V Txd A
+ 7.5 V RS 232 Txd
+7.5 V 3
Rxd/
2 Txd B
Txd +1 Txd
7 Rxd
-7.5 V
-7.5 V
-1 3
Rxd Rxd Rxd/
8 Txd
2, 7 NC
Other connections: NC Other connections: NC
Figure 1-3 Block diagram serial interface Figure 1-4 Block diagram serial interface for
for RS 232 / SIPART BUS RS 485
6DR2804-8A Module with 4 BA relays

6DR2804-8B Module with 2 BA relays
D Interface relay module with 2 or 4 relays
To convert 2 or 4 binary outputs to relay contacts up to 230 V UC.
The module can be snapped onto a mounting rail on the back of the controller. The mounting
rail is delivered with the interface relay module.
One or two relay modules with 2 relays each are installed depending on the version. Every relay
has a switching contact with spark quenching in both switching branches. In AC consumers with
a very low power, the current flowing (e.g. hold current in contactors) through the spark quench-
ing capacitor (33nF) when the contact is open interferes. In this case they should be replaced
by capacitors of the same construction type, voltage strength and lower value.
The switching contact is fed to the plug terminals with 3 poles so that rest and working circuits
can be switched. The relays can be controlled directly from the controller’s digital outputs by
external wiring.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.4.3 CPU self-diagnostics
! WARNING
The relays used on the interface relay module are designed for a
maximum rating of AC 250 V in overvoltage class III and
contamination factor 2 according to DIN EN 61010 Part 1.
The same applies for the air and creep lines on the circuit board.
Resonance increases up to twice the rated operating voltage may
occur when phase shift motors are controlled. These voltages are
available at the open relay contact. Therefore such motors may only
be controlled under observance of the technical data and the
pertinent safety conditions via approved switching elements.
1.4.3 CPU self-diagnostics

The CPU runs safety diagnostics routines which either can only after a reset or cyclically. The
CPU is familiar with two different types of reset.
-- Power on reset
Power-On-Reset always takes place when the 5-V supply drops below 4.45 V, i.e. the power
supply is interrupted for longer than specified in the technical data.
All parameters and configurations are reloaded from the user program memory into the
RAM.
At S100 = 1 the digital x-display flashes as indication after a Power-On-Reset, it is

acknowledged by the Shift key (12).
Flashing is suppressed by S100 = 0.
-- Watch dog reset

When a watch-dog-reset occurs the parameters and configurations from the user program
memory are reloaded into the RAM. The current process variables and the status signals are
read out of the RAM for further processing.
There are no flashing signals on the front module.
CPU-tESt appears in the digital displays dd1 and dd2 for a maximum 5 s after every reset.
Every error detected by the self-diagnostics leads to a flashing error message on the digital dis-
plays dd1 and dd2 with defined states of the analog and digital outputs. The fault message out-
put St of the yholdmodule becomes low. The reactions listed in the table are only possible of
course (since this is a self-test) if the errors occur in such a way that the appropriate outputs or
the front module can still be controlled properly or the outputs themselves are still functioning.
There are other error messages for the input range which indicate defective structurings within
this range (see chapter 1.5.6 ”Error messages”, page 99).
In addition error messages are output in the adaptation (see chapter 3.3.2
”Parameterization mode AdAP”, page 173).
The digital displays flash in the case of error messages.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.4.4 Data storage, User program memory
1.4.4 Data storage, User program memory

All data are written in the RAM first and then transfered to the user program memory
(EEPROM) when returning to the process operation mode (manually or via the SES).
Writing time
The writing time after leaving the parameterization and configuring modes is up to 30 s. Then
the data are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Error messages of the CPU
Reactions
Error
E Standard
mes- yhold-module Options 2) Primary
Monitoring
g Monitoring
g controller
sages Error cause/
off ti
time Remedy
dd1 AA4/7 AA4/7
dd2 AA1 BA1 BA9 BA13
St with without
UH UH to 3 to 8 to 12 to 16
Monitored compo-
Power nents of the CPU
0 mA
EEPROM, On-Reset defective/change
CPU last main board
RAM 0 0 mA 0 0 0
Err value User program
EPROM Watch last memory not plugged
Dog-Reset value or defective/plug or
change
Monitored compo-
Power nents of the CPU
0 mA
On-Reset last
defective/change
0 mA 0 0 0 main board
User
U value
MEM Watch last
program Dog-Reset 0 value
Err User program
p g
memory memory not plugged
continues or defective/plug or
when
operating with change
storing current data
conti- Option not plugged,
continues operating with current defective or setting in
nues
data last hdEF oP5 does not
Data com- opera- match the plugged
oP.5.*. state
1) munication cyclic 0 ting option.
or un- Plug option or replace
μP-slot 5 with or correct oP5 3)
defined
current
data
pulled conti-
pulled nues Option not plugged,
last last defective or setting in
Data com- 0 mA continues opera-
oP.*.6. value state hdEF oP5 does not
1) munication cyclic 0 operating with ting match the plugged
μP-slot 6 current data or un
un- option.
defective, with
defined Plug option or replace
undefined current or correct oP6 3)
data
1) Also double error display oP.5.6 possible,
* means digit dark.
2) At BE5 to 9 and BE10 to 14 the effect of the digital inputs (after inversion) are set to 0 in the event of an error.
Table 1-1 Error message of the CPU

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5 Functional description of the structure switches
1.5.1 Analog input signal processing permanently connected

(S0 to S107, S200 to S268)
In the factory setting (setting when the device is delivered) most of the structure switches are
set to 0. This corresponds to the most usual setting of the individual functions so that only few
structure switches need to be set selectively during commissioning. However, it is recommend-
able to compare the individual structure switch settings with the task.
With structure switch S0 the user program can be identified by a number from 1 to 254 in the
structuring mode Strs. The setting 0 corresponds to the factory setting and is regenerated auto-
matically in the APSt function (All Preset). All changes in parameters or structures in relation to
the factory setting automatically set S0 from 0 to 1.
The structure switches S1 and S2 are fundamentally significant. With S1 the controller type is
set and thus the processing of command variable, main controlled variable and auxiliary con-
trolled variables up to control difference generation determined. With S2 the controller output
structure is set and thus the processing of the automatic-, manual-, safety- and follow--up vari-
ables as well as the manipulated variable output determined as a K- or S-output.

(S3 to S21, S200 to 205)
In the structure switch setting S4=0 the analog input range is permanently connected
(see figure 1-5, page 24). With S4=1 the permanent connection is canceled and converted into
a freely connectable input range (see chapter 1.5.2, page 25).
Every one of the maximum 11 analog inputs is fed through an AD converter which performs the
50 or 60 Hz interference suppression by averaging over 20 or 16 2/3 ms. After this the signal
range 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA is normalized to 0 to 100% calculated value per channel with
S5 to S9 or S200 to S205.
At the same time it is decided with S5 to S9 or S200 to S205 whether operation is to take place
with or without range monitoring (transmitter fault). The monitor signals per channel on dropping
below --2.5 % or exceeding +106.25 % with a hysteresis of 0.25 % to the digital x and w display.
By an OR link of all single messages the group transmitter fault MUF is formed which can be
assigned to the digital outputs and negated optionally (see chapter 1.5.8, page 121). Only the
analog inputs selected with the transmitter fault monitor are monitored, displayed on the front
panel (the appropriate position stays dark in the case of analog inputs not selected with trans-
mitter fault) and signaled with the OR link. The error message is acknowledged with the Shift
key (12). The fault message signal via the OR link is available until the appropriate analog in-
puts are back in the working range.
After the range monitoring the 11 analog inputs are fed through a 1st order filter which can be
set by the parameters tF1 to tFb in the range of oFF, 0.1 to 1000 s in the parameterization
mode onPA. The factory setting is 1 s.
With S10 to S14 or S206 to S211 every channel can now be root extracted optionally. After root
extraction, the 11 analog inputs are available for further processing as AEA1 to AEbA.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The function inputs FE1 and FE3 are preceded by a linearizer which enables non-linear process
variables to be displayed physically correctly (for operating method see chapter 1.5.2, page 25)
function block Fu, setting of the 13 vertex values, see chapter 1.5.4, figure 1-19, page 45 to
figure 1-23, page 46).
The outputs of the analog inputs AE1A to AEbA are now assigned to the function inputs FE1 to
FE12 by the structure switches S15 to S19 or S212 to S217. The outputs AE1A to AEbA and
the function inputs FE1 to FE12 are available for the assignment to analog outputs, the limit
value alarm and the parameter control and can be read through the SES. With this input
structure most control tasks can be solved in connection with the different controller types and
controller output structures.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Outputs of the S4 = 1 drawn function inputs
tF1 --1.1
+ A analog outputs at S4 = 1 freely 0
24
AE1 1/20 o% to 11.1 0 S20
-- 0, 1 S5 connectable 1 FE1
I, U 1/19 U D AE1A
0 AE1A 2
AE1A AE2A
1 3 S15 1
Figure 1-5
2, 3 S10 AE3A
.
..
4 bis 20 mA 11
AEbA
+ A tF2
AE1 1/22 0
0, 1 S6 o%
I, U 1/21 -- U D 1
0 AE1A
AE2A 2
AE2A FE2
fig. 1-44 (pg. 83)
AE2A
2, 3 1 3 S16
S11 AE3A
..
.
4 to 20 mA 11
tF3 AEbA
see fig. 1-24 (pg. 48) to
AE1 1/24 + A --1.3

0, 1 S7 0 S21
I, U 1/23 -- U D o% to 11.3 0
0 1 FE3
AE3A AE1A
AE3A 2
2, 3 1 S12 AE2A
3 S17 1
AE3A
.
4 to 20 mA ..
Slot 2 11
AEbA
AE4 A tF4
I, U, R, S8 0
U D 0, 1 o%
P, T 1
0 AE4A AE1A
AE4A 2
FE4
(pg. 90)
1 AE2A
2, 3 S13 3 S18 Z
see fig. 1-50
Slot 3 AE3A
4 to 20 mA 11
AE5 A tF5 AEbA
I, U, R, D 0, 1 S9 0
U o% FE5
P, T 0 1
AE5A AE1A S2 yN
AE5A 2
1 S14 AE2A 0
2, 3 3 S19
AE3A
.
4 to 20 mA .. 1, 2 FE6
11
Slot 6 AEbA yR
AE6 tF6
I, U o% 0
0, 1 S200
fig. 1-62 (pg. 109)
1
AE7 A 0 AE1A
2
Analog input signal processing permanently connected (S4 = 0)

AE6A
see fig. 1-58 (pg. 102) to
I, U D AE6A AE2A FE7

1 3 S212
2, 3 S206 AE3A
.
AE8 ..
4 bis 20 mA AE7A 11
I, U AEbA
. . . AE8A
Slot 5 . . .
AE9 . . .
...
I, U
AE9A
AE10 A
tFb
I, U D o% 0
0, 1 S205 AEAA (AE10A) 1
(AE11A) AE1A
AE11 0 AEbA 2
I, U AEbA (AE11A) AE2A FE12
1 3 S217
2, 3 S211 AE3A
.
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
Manual
..
4 to 20 mA 11
AEbA
305735
1.5.2 Analog input signal processing freely connected (S4 = 1)

The structure switch setting S4=1 cancels the permanent connection at S4=0 in the analog in-
put range and replaces it with a freely connectable input range. The freely connectable input
range basically represents a multifunctional unit, configuring takes place according to the same
rules.
Up to the outputs AE1A to AEbA (AE11A), the signal processing is identical to that described in
chapter 1.5.1, page 22. The function inputs FE1 to FE12 also operate in the same way with the
difference that FE5 (follow-up input) and FE6 (position feedback input) can be used in parallel
and with the difference that FE5 (follow--up input) and FE6 (position feedback input) can be
used in parallel and connected with different signals.
Nine different function blocks which occur with different frequency can now be connected
absolutely freely between the outputs AE1A to AEbA and the function inputs FE1 to FE12. The
outputs AE1A to AEbA represent data sources whilst the function inputs FE1 to FE12 are data
sources. Parallel to the outputs, 15 connectable linear parameters are arranged with a setting
range of -1.999 to 19.999 (corresponding to -199.9 % to 1999.9 %), a number of normal
constants as well as other variables gained from the controller as data source.
The function blocks have a different number of inputs (data sinks) and 1 output each (data
source) depending on the function depth.
The function blocks ”function transmitter” and ”correction computer” have assigned parameters
which can be set in the structuring mode oFPA. The connectable parameters P1 to P15 are set
in the parameterization mode onPA.
By structuring on the front module the necessary functions are selected or defined (structuring
mode FdEF), connected (structuring mode FCon) and correctly positioned in time in the cycle
(structuring mode FPoS), see chapter 3.3.7, page 201 to 3.3.9, page 205. Connection is abso-
lutely free, i.e. any data source can be connected with any data sink. The operating effort is
minimized by fading the data sources and sinks from undefined function blocks. In addition the
data sinks which are not obliagatory for a function are pre--occupied by constants which can be
overwritten. The inputs pre--occupied with ncon (not connected) are absolutely essential for the
function and must be connected. This very variable connection facility in the analog input range
also enables complex control tasks to be solved.
No distinction is made between analog and digital signals. Digital inputs have a threshold value
of 0.5. Digital outputs supply a value of 0 % (0) or 100 % (1).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Data sources Data sinks Data sources Data sinks
AE1 AE1.A Ar .F Ar1 to Ar6 nr FE1

Ar .1 E1
AE2 AE2.A Ar .2 E2
A
E1 · E2+E3-E4
E3 Ar .6 FE2
Ar .3 E5
AE3 AE3.A Ar .4
E4
E5
Ar .5 FE3
AE4 AE4.A
Fu .F Fu1, Fu2 nr
AE5 AE5.A FE4
E A A Analog
Fu .1 Fu .2
signals
AE6 AE6.A FE5
E
Parameter:
AE11 AEb.A Vertex value at -10, 0, 10 to 90, 100, 110 FE6
P01
MA .F MA1 to MA3 nr FE7
Connectable .. MA .1 E1
.
parameters MA .2 E2 A
P15 Max MA .4
MA .3 E3 FE8
--1,0
Constants .. Mi .F Mi1 to Mi3 nr
.
Mi .1 E1
1.05 E2 A
Mi .2 Min. Mi .4
E3
FE9
BE01 Mi .3
..
Digital inputs . FE10
rE1 .F rE1 nr Analog
BE09 or
rE1 .1 ΔP
E2 x A digital
AE1 rE1 .2 rE .4 FE11
f(E2·E3) signals
.. E3
rE1 .3
.
Fault message Parameter. tA, tE, PA, PE FE12
AE5
AE AS .F AS1 to AS5 nr
AS .1 E1
A1 E2 A
AS .2 AS .4
.. E3 SPI 1/2: internal setpoint
Alarms A1 to A4 . AS .3
controller 1/2
A4 SP 1/2: active setpoint
Co .F Co1, Co2 nr controller1/2
Status message Int1 Co .1 E1
+ A
Int2 Co .2 E2 - Co .4
Co .3 E3
H
SPI1 *) y1: Manipulated value
SPI2 y controller 1
Setpoints w1/w2 *) y2: Manipulated value
SP1 nA .F nA1, nA2 nr y controller 2
SP2 nA .1 E1
(for S1 = 12)
E2 A
nA .2 & nA .4
yI E3
Manipulated nA .3
variable y *) yII
SAA1 no .F no1, no2 nr

no .1 E1
..
Serial analog value . E2 A
no .2 ≥1 no .4
SAA4 E3
no .3
Figure 1-6 Analog input signal processing freely connectable (S4=1)

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The individual function blocks are described below.
1.5.2.1 Arithmetic Ar1 to Ar6
Ar1 to Ar6
Ar .F nr E1 · E2 + E3 - E4
ncon Ar .1 E1 A=
E2 E5
ncon Ar .2 E1 · E2+E3-E4 A
0.000 E3 Ar .6 E5 is limited to values ≥0.5 %.
Ar .3 E5
0.000 Ar .4
1.000 E4
Ar .5
E5
Figure 1-7 Function block Arithmetic Ar1 to Ar6
-- With this function block the four basic arithmetic functions are implemented with appropriate
assignment of inputs 0 and 1 respectively. The preset E3=E4=0, E5=1 gives A = E1×E2.
-- Typical process-technical applications are dosing or evaluation (E1×E2), range fade-outs
(E1×E2+E3) or differentiations (E3 - E4).
1.5.2.2 Function transmitter Fu1 and Fu2

Fu1, Fu2
Fu .F nr
E A A
Fu .2
ncon Fu .1
E A = f(E)
-10, 0, 10 bis 90, 100, 110oFPA
Figure 1-8 Function block function transmitter
The function transmitter assigns every value of the input variable E in the range from -10 % to
+110 % an output variable A in the range from -199,9 % to +199,9 % with the function entered
by the user: A = f(E). The function is entered by the parameters ”vertex value 1 to 13” for -10 %
to +110 % of E in intervals of 10 %. Parabolae are set by the computing program between
these vertex values which interlink tangentially the vertex values so that a constant function is
produced. The vertex values at -10 % and +110 % of E are required for the overflow. The last
rise remains constant in the case of further overmodulation of E. When used as a linearizer for
the displays, the linearization function is entered by the 13 vertex values so that the series
circuiting of the sensor function gives a linear equation with the linearization function
(see chapter 1.5.4, figure 1-20 to figure 1-23, page 46).
1.5.2.3 Maximum value selection MA1 to MA3

MA1.F to MA3.F
MA .F nr
MA .1 E1 A = max (E1,E2, E3)
ncon
E2 A The greatest of the three input values is
ncon MA .2 Max MA .4
E3 connected through to the output.
0.050 MA .3
Figure 1-9 Function block maximum value selection
With the preset the greater value of E1 or E2 is connected through to A and at the same time
limited to the value of E3 (-5 %). Typical applications are maximum value selection circuits and
minimum value limitings.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
If only 2 inputs are required, the 3rd input must be set outside the working range of the two
inputs to a minimum value otherwise minimum value limiting takes place.
1.5.2.4 Minimum value selection Mi1 to Mi3
Mi1.F to Mi3.F
Mi .F nr
E1 A = min (E1, E2, E3)
ncon Mi .1
E2 A The smallest of the three input values is
ncon Mi .2 Min. Mi ..4
E3 connected through to the output.
1.050 Mi .3
Figure 1-10 Function block minimum value selection
With the preset the smaller value of E1 or E2 is connected through to A and at the same time
limited to the value of E3 (105%). Typical applications are minimum value selection circuits. If
only 2 inputs are required, the 3rd input must be set outside the working range to a maximum
value, otherwise a maximum value limiting takes place.
1.5.2.5 Correction computer for ideal gases rE1
rE1
A = Δp · f (E2, E3)
rE1 .F nr
1.000 rE1 .1 ΔP x A
rE1 .2 E2 rE .4
ncon
E f(E2·E3)
ncon rE1 .3 3
(PE – PA) E2 + PA
f (E2, E3) =
(tE – tA) E3 + tA
tA, tE, PA, PE (oFPA)
Figure 1-11 Function block correction computer rE1 for ideal gases
The rooted signal of the active pressure must be applied at input c**.1. The measuring ranges
are normalized to the calculation state with the parameters PA, PE, tA, tE (correction quotients
start/end for pressure and temperature).
Range of Application
The correction computer is used to calculate the flow of gases from the active pressure Δp
depending on pressure and temperature. The medium must be in pure phase, i.e. so that no
liquid separations may take place. This should be noted particularly for gases close to the
saturation point.
Errors due to fluctuating status variables of the medium (pressure, temperature) are corrected
by the flow correction computer here.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Pressure p Temperature t Active pressure Δp
Kp/cm2
Measured value
transmission
Δp
t
Calculation
e Function block rE
Figure 1-12 Active pressure measuring method, Principle
Physical notes
The active pressure measuring method is based on the law of continuity and Bernoulli’s energy
equation.
According to the law of continuity the flow of a flowing liquid in a pipe is the same at all places.
If the cross-section is reduced at one point, the flow speed at this point should increase. Ac-
cording to Bernoulli’s energy equation the energy content of a flowing material is made up of the
sum of the kinetic energy (due to the speed) and the potential energy (of the pressure).
An increase in speed therefore causes a reduction in pressure.
This drop in pressure, the so-called ”active pressure” Δp is a measure of the flow q.
The following applies: q = c · Δp
with c as a factor which depends on the dimensions of the pipe, the shape of the constriction,
the density of the flowing medium and some other influences.
The equation states that the active pressure generated by the constriction is in the same ratio
as the square of the flow.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Δp
1.00
0.81
0.49
0.25
0.09
0 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.0 q
Figure 1-13 Relationship between flow q and active pressure Δp
To measure the flow, a choke is installed at the measuring point which constricts the pipe and
has two connections for tapping the active pressure.
If the properties of the choke and the measuring material are known to the extent that the
equation specified above can be calculated, the active pressure is a measure of the flow.
If you have chosen a certain choke, the flow can be described in the calculation state or
operation state.
q B = K · ρB · Δp or q = K · ρ · Δp
Since the density is included in the measuring result according to the above equation,
measuring errors occur when the density in the operating state differs from the value based on
the calculation of the choke. Therefore a correction factor F is introduced for the density in
operating condition.
VB 1
F= = with V = as specific volume.
V
B
as specific volume.
In order to be able to perform the correction with the factor F, the current specific volume must
be determined first.
For the dry gases the densities change according to the laws for ideal gases:
V = R T 1
p = ρ The correction factor is then given as: F =  TB · p
pB · T
with p as absolute pressure and T as absolute temperature.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Pabs.A Pabs. q Flow

m3/kg Correction range bar
ρ Density
Δp Active pressure
p Pressure
Pabs.B
Â Temperature (_C)
T Temperature (K)
V Specific volume
VB R Gas constant
Pabs.E F Correction factor f (p, T)
Indices:
Â A Start
E End
ÂA ÂB ÂE B Calculation state
_C
abs Absolute variable
m Ground
v Volume
Pabs.A to Pabs.E Range of pressure of the transmitter
ÂA to ÂE Range of temperature of the transmitter
Figure 1-14 Display of the correction range
This gives for the corrected flow
q = F ·K · ρ B · Δp = K · ρB · Δp ·  TB · p

PB · T
The factor contained in the formula K · ρ B is already taken into account in the measurement of
the active pressure and can therefore be ignored by the computer.
Related to the correction factor it follows:
A = Δp · f (E2, E3) with F = f (E2, E3) =  (PE − PA) E2 + PA

(tE − tA) E3 + tA
The measuring ranges are normalized to the calculation state with the parameters PA, PE, tA,
tE (correction quotients start/end for pressure and temperature).
Mass flow computer, m2
A = qm, E2 = p, E3 = Â
P absA PabsE
PA = , PE = ,
PB PB
TA TE
tA = , tE = with T A∕E∕B [K]
TB TB

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Volume flow computer related to the operating status qV
Since the volume is reciprocally proportional to the density, a volume flow computer can be
made out of this mass flow computer by changing the inputs E2 and E3.
A = qv, E2 = Â, E3 = p
TA TE
PA = , PE = with T A∕E∕B [K],
TB TB
P absA PabsE
tA = , tE =
PB PB
Volume flow computer related to the standard status qVN
Since the output signal is now related to the volume flow in the standard status, TN = 273. 15 K,
PN = 1.01325 barabs and no longer to the operating state, it must be corrected accordingly.
A = qVN, E2 = p, E3 = Â
TA TE
tA = , tE = with T A∕E∕B [K],
TB TB
P absA PabsE
PA = , PE =
PB PB
The following applies for all computers:
pabsA to pabsE Transmitter range absolute pressure (bar)

TA to TE Transmitter range absolute temperature (K)
is formed from the transmitter range ÂA to ÂE by conversion:
T(K) = 273, 15 + Â (_C)
pB, TB Pressure and temperature range of the calculation state of the measuring
panel (absolute values)
pB and TB must be within the range of the transmitter; and may not be more than the factor 100
away from the range limits.
PA, tA = 0.01 to 1
PE, tE = 1 to 99.99
The input rE1.1 Δp is limited to values ≥0.
If the adjustable ranges for PA, PE, tA, tE are not sufficient a linear equation can be switched in
front of the appropriate input for adaptation (function block Ar).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.2.6 Switch for analog variables AS1 to AS5
AS1.F to AS5.F
E3 A
AS .F nr
0 (<0,5) E1 E1
ncon AS .1
E2 A AS .4
1 (≥0,5) E2 ncon AS .2
E3
0.0 AS .3
1.5.2.7 Comparator with adjustable hysteresis Co1, Co2
(two-position switch, e.g. limit value sensor)
Inputs Output A Co1.F to Co2.F

Co .F nr
E1≥(E2 + H/2) 1 H = E3 = hysteresis) ncon Co .1 E1
+ A
E2
E1<(E2 -- H/2) 0 ncon Co .2 - Co .4
0.050 E3
Co .3 H
1.5.2.8 AND NOT function (NAND) nA1, nA2
A = E1 ∧ E2 ∧ E3 = E1 ∨ E2 ∨ E3 nA1.F to nA2.F
with default: A = E1 (Negation of E1) nA .F nr
E1
ncon nA .1
E1 E2 E3 A E2 A
1.0 nA .2 & nA .4
E3
0 0 0 1 1.0 nA .3
1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1
1 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
1 0 1 1
0 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
1.5.2.9 OR NOT function (NOR) no1, no2
A = E1 ∨ E2 ∨ E3 = E1 ∧ E2 ∧ E3 no1.F to no2.F
with default: A = E1 (Negation of E1) no .F nr
E1
E1 E2 E3 A ncon no .1
A
E2 no .4
0.0 no .2 ≥1
0 0 0 1 0.0 no .3
E3
1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0
1 1 1 0

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.3 Digital input signal processing

(S24 to S48, S219 to S230)
1.5.3.1 Digital inputs BE1 to BE14
The inputs BE1 to BE4 are located on the basic board. BE5 to 9 and 10 to 14 are connected to
the module 6DR2801-8C at the slots 5 or 6. The digital output modules 6DR2801-8E also con-
tain another two digital inputs in addition to the outputs so that in this case the two digital inputs
BE5/BE6 or BE10/BE11 can be used.
24 V
5V
BE1
1/15 bE01
BE2
1/16 bE02
BE3
1/17 bE03
BE4 bE04
1/18
Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5

3AA + 3BE 4BA + 2BE 6DR2801--8C
6DR2802--8B 6DR2801-8E 5BE
24 V
24 V 5V
BE5 BE5 BE5
5/1 24 V 5/1 5/1 bE05
BE6 5V BE6
5/2 5/2 bE06
24 V
BE7 BE6 BE7
5/3 5V 5/6 5/3 bE07
5V BE8
5/4 bE08
BE9 bE09
5/5
S22 = 6 S22 = 1 S22 = 2
Slot 6 Slot 6 Slot 6

3AA + 3BE 4BA + 2BE 6DR2801--8C
6DR2802--8B 6DR2801-8E 5BE
24 V
BE10 24 V
6/1 5V
BE10 5V BE10
6/1 24 V 6/1 bE10
BE11 BE11 24 V BE11
6/2 6/6 6/2 bE11
BE12 5V 5V BE12
6/3 6/3 bE12
BE13 bE13
6/4
BE14 bE14
6/5
S23 = 6 S23 = 1 S23 = 2
Figure 1-15 Input function digital inputs

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.3.2 Assignment and direction of effect of the digital inputs
see fig. 1-16, page 37

The control signals CB, He ...+yBLII, -yBLII are assigned by the structure switches S24 to S38
and S219 to S228 to the digital inputs BE1 to BE14 or the status Lo. In the assignment of CB
(S24), CBII (S219), PI (S30), PII (S31), wSLI (S225) and wSLII (S226) the High status
(S** = --1) is also possible. The control signals can be negated optionally by the structure
switches S39 to S46 and S229 to S230.
The digital inputs BE1 to BE4 of the standard controller can be extended with the option
modules 6DR2801-8C, 6DR2801-8E, 6DR2802-8B in slot 5 and in slot 6.
When using option modules in slots 5 and 6 the structure switches S22 and S23 must be set
according to the assembly, otherwise it will lead to error messages (see chapter 1.4.3, page
20). All digital inputs can be read by the SES.
1.5.3.3 Linking the digital inputs BE1 bis BE14 to the control signals via the
SES
(S47 to S49, S101)

The control signals CB and N may be available optionally as static signals or as a pulse (key
operation on consoles) at the digital inputs. The setting is made by S47 for CB and S48 for N.
On selecting the pulse input, every positive edge flips the flip-flop. In the following descriptions
the output status of the flip--flop is assumed as CB or N.
All control signals except Δw and Δy can also be preset by the SES at S101 = 2, 3, 4, 5
and OR linked with the appropriate control signals through the digital inputs. The incremental
adjustment of w or y by the SES is not advisable on account of the bus run times. Since the top
operation hierarchy in a computer link should be with the autarcic single controller, the control
signals can be switched off by the SES by rounding with RC = Int∧CB via the Internal/External
key (2) of the controller or via CBES (optionally time-monitored) or via CBBE (central Computer
Fail line).
In addition the internal flip-flop can be activated at S101 = 2 to 5 parallel to pressing the keys
via IntES.
The CB signal is formed at S101 = 2, 4 as an OR function of CBES via the serial interface and
CBBE via a digital input so that operation can take place optionally with one signal.
At S101 = 3, 5 the OR function is replaced by an AND function so that the CB set by the SES
can be reset via a central Computer Fail line.
The function RC = Int∧CB (computer operation) also controls the command variable switching
in all controller types, i.e. also in SPC-mode or manipulated variable switching in DDC mode
(see chapter 1.5.4, page 40). The two controller types S1 = 10/11 operate without command
variable switching. The Internal key and the control signal CB are available with the link RC =
Int∨CB for locking operation through the serial interface (e. g. when coupling to control sys-
tems).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
At S47 = 0 static switching takes place due to the logic function RC = Int∧CB. In the case of
the preset to Int (Internal LED (1) off) you can switch statically with CB between controller
values and computer values (command and manipulated variables). The computer standby CB
is displayed negated by the C-LED (3) (C = CB, CB = 1 = C LED off). The computer standby of
the controller is signaled negated as a message signal RB = Int. The computer mode is also
signaled negated as a message signal RC = Int∧CB .
At S47 = 1 static switching with acknowledgement takes place. Every time the computer is re-
covered (CB from 0 ! 1) the internal flip--flop is set to 1 (Internal LED on, C LED off) so that
the computer mode RC = Int∧CB only becomes active after pressing the Internal key (Int=0).
With S49 the Internal/External key can be switched out of function and only internal or external
operation preselected.
The control signal H is generated as an OR-function by the Manual-/Automatic key (9) with sub-
sequent flip-flop (Hi) and the control signal He whereby He can be preset by the SES or the
digital inputs in the way described above.
With the structure switch S64 Automatic-/Manual switching can be blocked in the positions only
Automatic (H = 0) or only Manual (H = 1). The Manual LED (8) always indicates the active
status (see also chapter 1.5.6, page 99).
At S64 = 0 to 2, He is connected statically by both the SES and the digital inputs. At S64 = 3/4
the connection is made dynamically, i.e. every positive edge causes manual-automatic-manual
opeeration switching. Additionally interlocking of HeES with RC = Int∨CB is canceled at
structure switch S64 = 4.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
S** assignment with

S24 S39
0 CBBE
--1 1
S25 S40
according to fig. 1-17,
0 HeBE Page 38
--1 1
1 --1 1) S26 S41
0 NBE
--1 1
S27 0 S42
0 0 SiBE
--1 1
S28 bLSBE
S29 bLPSBE
S30 S43
0 PIBE
--1 1
S31 S43
0 PIIBE
--1 1
S32 PAUBE
BE01 1
S33 S44
BE02 2 0 +ΔwBE
--1 1
BE03 3
S34 S44
BE04 4 0 --ΔwBE
--1 1
S35 S45
0 +ΔyBE
BE05 5 --1 1 according to fig. 1-17,
BE06 6 Page 38
S36 0 S45
BE07 7 --ΔyBE
--1 1
BE08 8
S37 0 S46
BE09 9 +ybLBE
--1 1
S38 S46
0 --ybLBE
--1 1
BE10 10
S218 bLbBE
BE11 11
S219 S39
BE12 12 0 CBIIBE
--1 1
BE13 13
BE14 14 S220 S40
0 HeIIBE
--1 1
S221 S41
0 NIIBE
FE09 15 --1 1
FE10 16 S222 S42
0 SiIIBE
FE11 17 1
--1
FE12 18
S223 S229
0 /tSIBE according to fig. 1-17,
--1 1
Page 38
S224 S229
0 /tSIIBE
--1 1
S225 S230
0 wSLIBE
--1 1
S226 S230
0 wSLIIBE
--1 1
S227 S46
0
1 +ybLIIBE
--1
S228 S46
0 --ybLIIBE
--1 1
Figure 1-16 Assignment and direction of effect S24 to S38 and S218 to S228

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
+ΔwBE +Δw
-ΔwBE -Δw
+ΔyBE +Δy
-Δy BE -Δy
0
1
S64
from fig. 1-16, p. 37 1
0/2/3/4
4 ge
2/3(4/5) ≥
S64
3
0/1 S101 1
3
&
& 2
2/3(4/5) H
S64 ≥
HeES
0/1/2 0/1 S64 (II)
S101 0/1/3/4
3/4
HeBE (I/II) S64 0/1/2 2/3(4/5)
&
SiBE (II) SiES Si (II)
active control signals for the switching functions in the controller

bLbBE 0/1 S101 ≥ bLb
bLSBE bLS
bLPSBE bLbES bLPS
P IBE bLSES only active in CB∧Int or PI
PIIBE bLPSES CB∧Int II
PII
PAUBE 2/3(4/5) PAU
+ybLBE (II) &
tSHIIES +ybL (II)
-ybLBE (II) -ybL (II)
0/1 S101 ≥
tSHIBE **) tSHI
tSHIIBE **) tSHII
WSLIBE NES 2/3(4/5) WSLI
WSLIIBE & WSLII
NBE (II)
S48 0/1 S101 ≥ N (II)
0
1
S271*) 2
3/5 1
2/3/ & S101
4/5 0 1
CBES
SES 0/1
2/4
0/1 S101 ≥
CBBE (II) CB (II)
0/1
RC=Int∧CB
2 S47 & (single controller)
RC=Int II∧CB
(cascade)
IntES 2/3/4/5
1
S101 0 S49 RB=Int
0/1 1 (single controller)
2/3/4/5 0 or Int II
IntIIES
≥ 2 (cascade)
0/1
S101 S -1
1
S47 C ge
0/2 gn
1
*) as of software version --D06 **) as of software version --C09
Figure 1-17 Linking the digital inputs BE1 to BE14 with the control signals via the SES
(S47, S48, S49, S101)

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.3.4 Functional explanation of the digital control signals
bLb Blocking operation

Blocking the entire device operation and configuring.
Exception: Display of circuit
bLS Blocking structuring
With this signal the controller only allows switching to the online
parameterization levels outside process operation. In this way the parameters
for adapting the instrument to the process and the necessary settings for the
adaptation can be selected. Structuring is blocked.
bLPS Blocking parameterization and structuring
The entire configuring of the device is blocked, this means the parameterization
as well. Only the normal process operation according to the preselected
controller type is permitted.
CB Computer standby
Depending on the controller type this digital signal together with the
Internal/External key effects either switching in the setpoint range or DDC
operation begins. Central computer fail line in SPC and DDC operation.
He Manual external
This signal blocks the output of the controller and enables direct manual
adjustment of the manipulated variable on the front control panel.
N Follow-up
With this signal the output of the K--controller and the three-position step
controller with external position feedback is followed up to the follow-up signal
yN .
Si Safety operation
In K-controllers and three-position step controllers with external position
feedback, the manipulated variable adopts the parameterized safety value. In
three-position step controllers with internal position simulation, the manipulated
variable runs defined to 0 or 100 %.
tSHI/II Setpoint ramp/Setpoint changes
Setpoint changes via the setpoint ramp can be stopped by a binary input.
wSLI/II External setpoint -- preselection
Preselect whether external setpoint via analog input or SES/incremental.
PI P-operation controller I
With this signal the controller I (parameter set I) is switched to P-operation.
PII P-operation controller II
With this signal the controller II (parameter set II) is switched to P-operation.
PAU Parameter switching
The programmable controller types include single controllers and double
controllers (meshed controllers). Single controllers operate with the parameter
set I and can be switched by this digital signal to the parameter set II. Double
controllers are permanently assigned to the parameter sets I and II; the
switching possibility is then omitted.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.4 Controller types (S1, S49 to S53)
Δw Incremental setpoint adjustment

External setpoint or nominal ratio preset for incremental adjustment via digital
inputs
Δy Incremental manipulated variable adjustment
External manipulated variable default for incremental adjustment through digital
inputs in follow-up operation.
ybL Direction-dependent blocking of the manipulated variable
Direction-dependent limiting of the manipulated variable by external signals,
e.g. from the limit switches of the actuating drives. This limiting is effective in
every operating mode.
Signals with identification II relate logically to controller II at S1 = 12. Corresponding SES
signals are only effective when CBII=1 and IntII=0.

1.5.4.1 General, recurrent functions
-- Manual setpoint preset wi or nominal ratio preset wvi on the control front panel.
The internal setpoint can always be adjusted with the Δw-keys (6 Fig. 3-1) when the green
internal LED (1) lights up. The adjusting facility is marked by ↗ in the tables. Exceptions to
this rule are expressly mentioned in the individual controller types. The adjustment operates
incrementally, in the first step with a resolution of 1 digit and then an adjustment progression
so that major changes can also be performed fast enough. After every interruption in the
adjustment by releasing the keys, the progression starts again with the smallest adjustment
step.
-- Setpoint preset wi or nominal ratio preset wvi by the SES

Every time the internal setpoint can be adjusted by the keys (6) on the control front panel, it
is also possible to make a preset with the SES. Since only absolute and not incremental
adjustment is possible with the SES, it is advisable to use the setpoint ramp tS to avoid
steps.
In addition the control signal Int and the automatic/manual switching can be preset with the
manual manipulated variable adjustment with the SES so that a complete parallel process
operation is possible with the SES (see also chapter 1.5.6 ”Controller output structure”, sec-
tion ”Control system coupling via the serial interface” on page 113).
-- Source for the external setpoint S53 and S101

The external setpoint wE can come from a maximum of three different sources in the differ-
ent controller types:
external setpoint as an absolute value via the analog inputs (wEA)

Selection with S53
external setpoint incremental via the control signals Δw (wEΔ)
external setpoint as an absolute value via the SES (wES) SES (wES)selection with S101
In double controllers (S1 = 12) you can switch between wES and wEA respectively with
control signal wSLI or wSLII.
-- Setpoint ramp tS
(accordingly tSII at S1 = 12)
With the parameter tS (oFPA) the adjusting speed of the effective setpoint w (in ratio control-
ler S1 = 4 the effective nominal ratio) can be set in the range of oFF, 0.1 to 9984 min over

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
0 to 100%. At the same time, tS presets the floating time for 0 to 100% change in incremen-
tal setpoint adjustment via the control signals Δw. At tS = oFF the adjustment speed goes
to 1.
With the setpoint ramp, setpoint switchings can be effected to non-followed-up variables SH
and wi, wEΔ, wES at S52 = 1 and wEA, if the supplying controller has not been followed up
not suddenly but with the set ramp.
w tan α = 100 % = Δw
tS tw
wE
Δw Δw · tS
S μ tw = 100 %
H
t
tw
safe
external Setpoint
Setpoint
Figure 1-18 Setpoint switching with ramp
With the control signals tS and tSII the set setpoint ramps can be switched off.
-- Setpoint limits SA, SE

(accordingly SAII, SEII at S1 = 12)
With the parameters SA and SE (oFPA) the effective setpoint w can be limited to minimum
value (SA) and maximum value (SE) in the range from -10 to 110 %.
Exception: Ratio controller (S1 = 4) and ratio cascade, commanded ratio controller (S1 = 6)
-- Follow-up of the ineffective setpoint to the active setpoint (S52)

(accordingly S235 at S1 = 12)
Normally the ineffective setpoint is followed up to the effective setpoint so that the setpoint
switching is bumpless. The internal setpoint (wi), the external setpoint incrementally
adjustable via Δw (wEΔ) and the external setpoint via the SES (wES) can be followed up.
The safety setpoint SH cannot be followed up. The external setpoint wEA via the analog
inputs can only be followed up indirectly by following up the supplying device on the output
side. To do this the effective w is used as a follow-up variable, assigned to an analog output
and as a follow--up control signal the OR-operation H∨N∨Si, assigned to a digital output.
At S52 = 1 the follow-up is suppressed. This switch setting is always required especially in
follow-up controllers if the internal setpoint represents a kind of safety function or if multiple
setpoint operation is to be run in follow-up controller (S1 = 3).
-- x-tracking (S50)
(accordingly S233 at S1 = 12)
With the structure switch S50 = 1, x-tracking (ratio controller xv-tracking) can be switched
on. This means that the setpoint is followed up to the actual value or the nominal ratio is
followed up to the actual ratio and therefore a control difference xd is reset to 0. The follow
up always takes place when there is no automatic operation (A). This is the case in manual
mode (H), follow-up mode (N), DDC mode and in operation with safety manipulated variable
(Si): A = H∨N∨Si

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
x-tracking in direction-dependent blocking operation is not possible because the P-step

produced by resetting the driving control error to blocking direction would immediately cancel
the blocking.
x-tracking takes place without the set setpoint ramp tS. By following up the setpoint to the
actual value (nominal ratio to actual ratio), the control difference xd = 0 and automatic opera-
tion starts absolutely bumplessly. Since one can usually assume in manual mode and DDC
mode that the actual value has been driven to the desired value, the followed up setpoint
corresponds to the rated value.
x-tracking only takes full effect if the follow-up of the inactive setpoint is locked onto the
active setpoint (S52 = 0) so that not only the active setpoint w but also the setpoint source
which is supplying after switching to automatic operation is followed up.
At S52 = 1 (without follow-up) the control difference is 0 during the A-operation but after
switching to the automatic mode the old non-followed up setpoint is immediately active
again. With the setpoint ramp tS this step-shaped setpoint change takes place via a time
ramp.
This combination is always useful when it is not guaranteed during A-operation (especially in
safety mode) that the actual value will be driven to the desired rated value by the actuating
manipulation and the follow-up variable would not be correct in full x-tracking.
-- Constants c1 to c7
In the individual controller types the process variables are partially linked with each other
whereby the constants c1 to c3 are used for the controlled variable links and constants c4
and c5 for the command variable links. The constants are set in the parameterization mode
onPA in the range from -1.999 to 9.999.
The constants c6, c7 serve to dose the disturbance variable connection to the controller out-
put yI or yII (see chapter 1.5.5.1, figure 1-50, page 90 and figure 1-51, page 91). They can
be set in the parameterization mode onPA in the range from -19.99 to 19.99.
-- Control signals for the setpoint switching

If available in the single controller types, the setpoint switching takes place depending on the
control signals Int (Internal/External key) and CB (Computer standby) as an AND function
RC = Int∧CB and its negation. The status of the control signal CB and the Internal key (2) is
indicated by the C LED (3) and the Internal LED (1).
With S49 the Internal/External key (2) can be set out of function and can block in the
positions Internal or External (see chapter 1.5.3, figure 1-17, page 38). The factory setting is
S49 = 0 only Internal. With S24 the CB signal can be set to Lo or Hi or a digital input
assigned, (see chapter 1.5.3, figure 1-16, page 37). The factory setting is S24 = -1, CB = 1.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The setpoint switching can be varied freely with these structuring possibilities:
Switching to Int S49 CB S24 active active

Dependence on setpoint w setpoint w
S1=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 S1 = 0/1
Int and CB 0∨1 2 0∨1 1 to 14 wi (SH) or wE wi1 or wi2

only Int 0∨1 2 1 -1 wi or wE wi1 or wi2
only CB 0 1 0∨1 1 to 14 wi (SH) or wE wi1 or wi2
only external no 0 1 1 -1 wE wi1

only internal Switching 1 0 any any wi wi2
Table 1-2 Possibilities of setpoint switching depending on S24 and S49
-- Actual value and setpoint display

A red and a green analog display with 1.7% resolution and a red and a green 41/2digit digital
display are arranged on the front panel. The green displays are assigned to the setpoint, the
red displays to the actual value. In addition there is a 3-digit yellow digital display for the
y-display. The corresponding adjustment keys and status-LED’s are assigned in color and
position to the displays.
The two analog displays always indicate the active actual value. The difference between the
two displays is the control difference xd or the control error xw = --xd. The digital actual value
display also indicates the current actual value except in the ratio controllers (ratio controller:
actual ratio). The digital setpoint display indicates the setpoint before the setpoint ramp
except in ratio controllers (ratio controller: nominal ratio before the setpoint ramp).
Depending on the controller type the displays, the Internal/External-key (2) and the
Δw-adjustment keys (6) are switched by the Shift key (12) controller I/controller II.
The following symbols are used in the block diagrams below to simplify the representation:
Adjustable display range (digital displays only)
d*I Parameter set dP, dA, dE, I or II for setting the display
format
I Display level I or II, no identification means only 1 level or
both levels the same
0000 x Displayed variables x, w, xv or wv
Display type 0000 Digital display
↗ Analog display
↗ Digital and analog display

0000

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Display range
The digital displays are four-digit 7-segment displays, the display range of which can be set
in double controllers and process displays (S1>4) for the x- and w-display together, for the
two display levels I and II separately, with the parameter dP (decimal point), dA (start value)
and dE (full scale) in the structuring mode oFPA.
In single controllers (S1 ≤4) the parameters of the display level II are followed up to the
parameters of the display level I and are not adjustable.
With dAI or dAII the numeric value is set which is to be displayed at arithmetic value 0
(corresponding to 0 % display in the analog displays). With dEI or dEII the numeric value is
set which is to be displayed at arithmetic value 1 (corresponding to 100 % display in the
analog displays). With dPI or dPII the decimal point is set as a fixed point. If the starting
point is set less than the full scale, a rising display is given with increasing arithmetic values
and vice versa. The numeric range for the start and end values goes from -1999 to 19999,
beyond these numbers -oFL and oFL is displayed in the case of overmodulation in the
process operation level. The factory setting is 0.0 to 100.0 %.
With the refresh rate parameter dr (onPA) the digital displays can be calmed down in the
case of restless process variables. Non-linear process variables can be represented physi-
cally correctly by the linearization.
The display range set with dP, dA and dE is transferred depending on the controller type
(S1) to the parameters and setpoints which can be assigned to the displayed variable:
S1 Display format accordingly Parameter range

g
-1.1 to -1.3 to SA, SE, referenced to
Sb wi/wiI wiII
11.1 11.3 SH dE*-dA* = 100 %
0 d*I d*I d*I -- d*I -- -10 % to 110 %
1 # # # -- # -- #
2 # # # -- # -- #
3 d*I d*I # -- # -- -10 % to 110 %
d*I
4 % % -- # -- -199.9 to 199.9 %
d*II
5 d*II d*I -- # d*II -10 % to 110 %
d*II
6 % % -- # d*II -199.9 to 199.9 %
d*I
7 d*I d*II d*II # -- -10 % to 110 %
d*I
8 d*I d*II d*II d*I -- #
--
9 d*I d*II -- -- -- -10 % to 110 %
d*I
10 d*I -- -- d*I --
d*I
11 d*I -- -- d*I --
d*I
12 d*I d*II -- d*I d*II -10 % to 110 %
Table 1-3 Display format of parameters and setpoints assigned to the displays
With the appropriate asisgnment, this also applies to the limit value alarms A1 to A4, see
chapter 1.5.9, page 124.
The analog displays have a fixed display range of 0 to 100 %. The overshoot or undershoot
is displayed by the flashing 100 % or 0 %-LED. Display is by one or two alternately flashing
LEDs. The center of the illumination field represents the ”pointer”. This display technique
doubles the resolution. If a falling characteristic is set for the digital displays (d*E<d*A), the
analog displays are switched in direction of effect except for the ratio controllers.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Setting of the linearizer at S4 = 0

Set start and end of measuring with dA* and dE* and the decimal point dP* in the structuring
mode oFPA for the display.
Divide measuring range UA to UE including 10 % overflow in 10 % sections and determine
partial voltages.
U -U
Un = E A n+UA with n = -1 to 11
h10
Determine the respective physical value from the appropriate function tables for every Un or
graphically from the corresponding curve (interpolate if necessary) and enter the value for
the respective vertex value (-1* to 11*) in physical variables in the structuring mode oFPA.
UE
[mV]
60
UE n Un [mV] Vertex t [_C]
% value
110 11 52.732 ! 11* 1,048

50 UE=48,33 mV
100 10 48.33 ! 10* 1,000
90 9 43.928 ! 9* 951
80 40 8 39.526 ! 8* 900
70 7 35.124 ! 7* 846
60 6 30.722 ! 6* 790
30
50 5 26.32! 5* 729
40 4 21.918 ! 4* 664
20
30 3 17.516 ! 3* 593
20
2 13.114 ! 2* 514
10
10 1 8.712 ! 1* 420
UA=4,31 mV
0 0 4.31 ! 0* 300
0
-10 -1 -0.092 ! -1* 0
tA tE
t [_C]
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200
dA* dE*
Figure 1-19 Example of linearization of a thermocouple type B Pt30Rh/Pt6, measuring range 300 to
1000 _C

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Setting the function transmitter for linearizing at S4 = 1

Vertex x1 [%]
values
A we Int Int
Wi 110
D 100
100
d**
90
80
0000 0000 80
70
x w 60
60
50
40
40
--10 to 110
30
+ w 20
A x 20
E D
x1 x1 (l) -- xd y 10 [%] xPhys.
0 0 20 40 60 80 100
xPhys. --10 ˚C Measuring range
0 200 600 1,000 1,4001,600 1,800 200 to
1600 ˚C
Figure 1-20 Using the function transmitter to Figure 1-21 Sensor function, e.g. from table
linearize non-linear process
variables for the display and control
The vertex values of the function transmitters are given in % and not physically here
because of their free utilization.
Setting takes place in the structure mode oFPA in the range from --199.9 to +199.9 %.
The vertex values 0 and 100 are set with 0 % or 100 % so that x1 (l) is available again as a
standard variable and the reference junction terminals for determining the display range of
the digital display are correct. The display range is set with the parameters dA*, dE* and dP*
according to the physical measuring range.
To determine the vertex values, apply the sensor function as shown in fig. 1-21 and divide
the range into 10% steps (xphys in %). Then read off the % values in the vertex positions
--10 to 110 on the xphys-axis and enter one after the other in the structuring mode oFPA.
x1 (l) x1 (l)
[%] [%]
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
xPhys
x1 [%]
˚C
0 20 40 60 80 100
Vertex 200 600 1000 1,400 1,600 1,800
values
0 20 40 60 80 100
Figure 1-22 Linearization function Figure 1-23 Linearized controlled variable

x1(l)

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Function inputs FE1 to FE12
FE1
S1 FE2 FE3 (linearizable)
(linearizable)
0 Fixed setpoint controller x1 main controlled x2 auxiliary controlled x3 auxiliary controlled
2 independent setpoints variable variable variable
1 Fixed setpoint controller ” ” ”
2 dependent setpoints
2 DDC fixed setpoint ” ” ”
controller
3 Follow-up, ” ” wE external command
synchronized, variable
SPC controller
4 Ratio controller x1 commanded x2 commanded wvE external command
process variable process variable variable for ratio factor
5 Cascade control x1II main controlled x2II auxiliary control xI controlled variable slave
variable variable controller
master controller master controller
6 Ratio cascade control xII main controlled x2I commanding x1I commanded process
variable process variable variable
master controller slave controller slave controller
7/8 Override control x1I main controlled x2I auxiliary controlled xII controlled variable
variable variable limiting controller
main controller Main controller
9 Process display xI process variable 1 -- xII process variable2
10 Fixed setpoint controller x1 main controlled x2 auxiliary controlled x3 auxiliary controlled

(control system variable variable variable
coupling)
11 Follow-up controller x1 main controlled ” wE external command
(control system variable variable
coupling)
12 Double controller x1I main controlled wEAI external setpoint x1II main controlled variable
variable
Table 1-4 Control technical function of the inputs FE1 to FE3
Function inputs FE4 to FE12 have the following control-technical function:
FE4 disturbance variable connection (z) for the D-element or for the manipulated variable
y (selection by S55)
FE5 Follow-up input (yN) for the manipulated variable follow--up in K-controllers (S2 = 0)
and in S-controllers with external follow-up (S2 = 2)
FE6 Manipulated variable feedback supply (yR) for the y display in S-controllers with inter-
nal feedback (S2 = 1) or the manipulated variable feedback input (yR) in S-control-
lers with external feedback (S2 = 2); Process display (S1 = 9) with XIII
FE7 Manipulated variable connection (z) selection S57
FE8 External setpoint wEII
FE9 Follow-up input yNII
FE10 Manipulated variable feedback supply yRII
FE11 manipulated variable connection setpoint
The function inputs FE1 to FE3 have different control-technical functions depending on the
controller type (S1).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.4.2 S1 = 0: Fixed setpoint controller with 2 independent setpoints
0000 0000 000

W
x
yH
INT∧CB
wi1
tS y
W
wi2
+
P I D ya+c6 · z
-- ya
x1 x
FE1
x2
FE2 x = x1+c1· (x2-c2·x3+c3)
x3
FE3
z
FE4
Figure 1-24 Principle representation S1 = 0
This controller type can be used as a fixed setpoint controller with 2 independent setpoints (two
batch mode) or as a fixed setpoint controller with 1 setpoint, by blocking the Internal/External
switching (factory setting). By linking the inputs x1, x2, x3 with the constants c1, c2, c3, it can
be used as a three-component controller.
Switching between the two internal setpoints which are adjustable on the front separately as
one, two or three component takes place depending on the control signals Int and CB according
to table 1-5. Signaling of the active setpoint takes place on the LEDs Internal and C. As soon as
a LED lights, wi2 is active.
Control commands Message signals Digital Effective w

Digital inputs Front Front LED outputs at S50= Explanations
H∨N∨Si CB internal internal C RB RC 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 wi1 wi1 (n)1) switching switching
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 wi2 wi2 (n) mit CB, Int=0 with Int,CB=1
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 2) wi2 wi2 (n)
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 wi2 wi2 (n)
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 wi1 x switching switching
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 wi2 x with CB,Int=0 with Int,CB=1
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 2) wi2 x
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 wi2 x
1) follow up takes place at S52 = 0 and S50 = 1 to the controlled variable x, follow--up does not apply for the switching
wi1/wi2
at S52 = 1 automatic mode starts with wi=x (xd=0), the active setpoint runs to the old set value via the possibly set setpoint
ramp tS
2) factory setting, fixed setpoint controller with 1 setpoint (S49 = 0: only Internal, Int = 1, S24 = -1: CB = 1) RB = Int
RC = Int∧CB = Int∨CB
Table 1-5 Switching between wi1 and wi2

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
With the Shift key (12) the digital w display can be switched in the display level II to the inactive
setpoint and the digital x display to the main controlled variable x1 (display range I must be set,
display range II is automatically set the same). The active setpoint and the active actual value x
are still shown on the analog displays.
Selection by effective wi 1) LED LED displayed w 2) displayed x

Shift key controller I controller II
digital analog digital analog
I wi1 1 0 wi1↗4) wi1 x x
II wi1 0 0.5 3) wi2 ↗ wi1 x x
I wi2 1 0 wi2 ↗ wi2 x x
II wi2 0 0.5 3) wi1 ↗ wi2 x1 x
III 5) wi1 or wi2 0 0 wI wI x x
1) via CB and Int accordingly 5
2) only if there is no x-tracking
3) 0.5 = flashing rhythm 1:1
4) ↗ = adjustable
5) only at C8 ≠0
Table 1-6 Switching the display levels
The setpoint displayed with the digital w-displays can also be set with the Δw-adjustment
keys (6.1/6.2 Fig. 3-1, p. 168). The LEDs Controller I/ Controller II signal the display level.
Flashing light
signals that the displayed setpoint is not identical with the active setpoint.
Steady light signals that the displayed and active setpoints are identical.
If switching between wi1 and wi2 is blocked via S49 (Int) and S24 (CB), switching of the digital
w display to the display level II is omitted. Only the digital x-display is switched over. Signaling
of the display level II is with a steady light.
With the constants c8 and c9 a disturbance variable connection of FE11 can be made in the
setpoint branch.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Int∧CB wI--c8 · (wST+c9)

S52
0
d*I d*I d*I
wi1 Int∧CB II I III

n 0000 W 0000 0000
o
0/1 Int∧CB
S101 w=wi+c8⋅ SA,SE
wi1ES (wST+c9) A tS
2/3/4/5
wI
wi2 A
n
o A=H∨N∨Si
0/1
H=Hi∨He
S101
wi2ES
2/3/4/5
SES
S50
xdI
wST 0 1
FE11 x W see
c1, c2, c3 Fig.
see x1 1-50,
Fig. 1-5, FE1 page
page 24 xI
x2 x =x1+c1 · (x2-c2 · x3+c3) 90
FE2 xI
x3
FE3
d*I d*I
factory setting
c1=c2=c3=0
II I x
x1 0000 0000
tFI
Adaptation
Figure 1-25 Block diagram S1 = 0, fixed setpoint controller with 2 independent setpoints

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.4.3 S1= 1: Fixed setpoint controller with 2 dependent setpoints
0000 0000 000

W x
yH
INT∧CB
wi1
tS y
W
wi2=wi1 · c4+c5
+
P I D ya+c6⋅z
ya
--
x1 x
FE1
x2
FE2 x=x1+c1 · (x2 - c2·x3+c3)
x3
FE3
z
FE4
This controller type is always used when for example in two batch mode the second setpoint
needs to be in a specific ratio to the first. The ratio is set by the constants c4 and c5.
Factory setting is c4 = 1 and c5 = 0.
The switching and display functions are the same as at S1 = 0. Only the internal setpoint (wi1)
can be adjusted if it is displayed.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Int∧CB S5
w - c5 1 2
c4
d*I d*I
wi1 Int∧CB II I A=H∨N∨Si

wi1 0000 0000
n w
o H = Hi ∨He
Int∧CB
0/1 SA,SE tS
A
c4, c5 wI
wi1ES
2/3/4/5 S101
wi1 · c4+c5
wi2 A
factory setting
SES
c4=1, c5=0 S50 +
xdI
0 1 --
see
c1, c2, c3 x W Fig.
x1 1-50,
FE1 pg. 90
x2 xI
FE2 x=x1+c1 · (x2 - c2 · x3+c3) xI
x3
FE3
see d*I
factory setting d*I
Fig. 1-5, c1=c2=c3=0
page 24 II I x
tFI x1 0000 0000
Adaptation
Figure 1-27 Block diagram S1 = 1, fixed setpoint controller with 2 dependent setpoints
1.5.4.4 S1 = 2: DDC fixed setpoint controller
The DDC controller has the job of taking over the control circuit as bumpless as possible in the
case of a computer failure. During the DDC operation the process computer takes over the
control function, the controller is on standby, i.e. it is followed up to the computer manipulated
variable; the control difference is reset to zero for absolutely bumpless switching by x-tracking if
necessary.
In K-controller circuits, the actuating current can be output parallel by the computer periphery to
achieve full redundancy. In this case the actuating current of the K-controller is switched off
during computer operation (S66 = 1). If the actuating current of the computer is also to be
switched off during controller operation, the two currents simply need to be added by OR
diodes. This OR diode is integrated in the current outputs of the SIPART controllers.
If the UI-converter of the K-controller is to be used during computer operation to feed the final
control element, the actuating current cutoff must be canceled (S66 = 0).
The DDC mode corresponds to follow-up mode of the other controller types with the difference
that the switching to follow-up mode takes place not via the control signal N but as a function of

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
the control signal CB and the Internal/External key:

DDC operation ≙ RC=Int∧CB = 1
0000 0000 000

w x
wi
x-TRACKING yH
tS
W
+ Y
P I D ya+c6 · z
FE1 x1 -- ya INT∧CB
x yN
x2
FE2 x=x1+c1 · (x2-c2·x3+c3)
x3
FE3
YES
z
FE4
yN
FE5
SES
The DDC mode is signaled like the follow-up mode in the other controller types by the lit y-Ex-
ternal LED. The status of the control signal CB and the Internal/External key is displayed by the
LEDs C and Internal. During the DDC mode the setpoint is prepared by follow-up to the com-
puter failure. The setpoint is always displayed which would become active after the computer
failure.
With S50 a choice is made between x-tracking and wi, with S51 the safety setpoint is preset.
With S61 the priority between DDC-mode and manual mode is determined. If DDC-mode has
priority over manual mode, you can select with the manual-automatic switching whether opera-
tion is to continue after a computer failure in automatic or manual mode. If manual intervention
is necessary in computer operation, switching to Internal operation is necessary in addition to
switching to manual operation; the LEDs Internal (1) and Manual (8) light, the LED y-External
(10) goes out, the dark LED C (3) stil indicates computer standby.
If manual mode has priority over DDC-mode you can switch directly from computer operation to
manual operation. Then the manual LED (8) lights, the y-External LED (10) goes out, the dark
LEDs Internal (1) and C (3) still indicate computer standby of the controller or computer
standby.
Automatic mode is always switched to here in the event of a computer failure.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Table 1-7 DDC controller, S1 = 2, DDC operation has priority over manual operation S61 = 0

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Table 1-8 DDC controller, S1 = 2, manual operation has priority over DDC operation S61 = 1

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1) manual operation can be achieved by

Control signals Message signals
digital Front digital

Front
Hi manual output
input He LED H
0 0 0 1
1 0 0.9 6) 1
0 1 1 2
1 1 1 2
Table 1-9 Generation of the control signal H = Hi∨He
2) In DDC mode the actuating current of the controller is switched off at S66 = 1. The source for yE at
S62 = 0 is yN (FE5) or at S62=1 yNΔ (Δy), if S101 < 2. At S101=2 yES is active (SES). The external manipu-
lated variable is followed up which is fed in via Δy (yNΔ) and via the SES (yES). When feeding in via FE5
(yN) the feeding controller must be followed up.
3) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement, S47 = 0.
4) By OR linking of the digital output H with the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation
can be signaled in manual or safety mode.
5) 0.5 = Flashing rhythm 1 : 1
6) 0,9 = Flashing rhythm 0.1 off, 0.9 on
(↗) = adjustable
(n) = is followed up to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching.
The control signal Follow up (N) has no function in DDC controllers. The tables apply for
S52 = 0 (with follow up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint). At S52 = 1 (without
follow-up) and x-tracking automatic operation starts with wi = x (xd = 0), the active setpoint runs
to the old set value wi via the possibly set setpoint ramp tS.
With the Shift key (12) the digital x display can be switched to the main controlled variable x1 in
the display level II. Signaling of the display levels takes place via the LEDs Control I/Control II
by a steady light.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
xdI
xI
--
+
w
x
w
ts
w
d*I
0000
I
x
SA,SE
d*I
0000
I
x
Int
Int
d*I
0000
II
x1
CB
CB
Si
Si
Si
S61
H=Hi∨He
1
0
H
H
H
H
0 S52
S50
1
X
0
Adaptation
S50
1 S51
x=x1+c1⋅(x2-c2⋅x3+c3)
Factory setting
1
c1=c2=c3=0
0
0
SH
c1, c2, c3
wi1
tF I
2/3/ S101
wi1
<>
4/5
x1
x2
x3
wi1ES
FE1
FE2
FE3
SES
Figure 1-29 Block diagram S1 = 2, DDC fixed setpoint controller

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.4.5 S1 = 3: Follow-up controller, synchronized controller, SPC-control-

ler
0000 0000 000
w x
wi
wi
yH
SES
wES
tS y
INT∧CB w
wSL
Δw
wE=c4 · wE+c5 +
wE P I D ya+c6 · z
we -- ya
x
wEA
FE3
FE1
x1 x=x1+c1 · x2+c3
x
FE2
x2
FE4
z
In this controller type you can switch between the internal setpoint wi and the external setpoint
wE depending on the control signals CB and the Internal-/External key (2) (see table 1--11,
page 61 and table 1--12, page 62).
The external setpoint can be preset via the analog output FE3 (wEA) or via the digital signals
Δw as an incremental setpoint (wEΔ) (selection via S53) or via the SES (wES) (selection by
S101). The active setpoint w can be fed back by an appropriately assigned analog output to the
feeding controller for follow up when using wEA or for displaying when using wEΔ .
This controller type is used for cascade controls with 2 separate controllers (master and fol-
low-up controllers), for synchronized controls, fixed setpoint controls with external setpoint pre-
set (e.g. under console conditions via the incremental Δw-inputs) and SPC-controls (setpoint
control). This controller type attains special importance when coupled with the SIPART software
for operation and monitoring. Here this controller type is used for fixed setpoint control with
external setpoint preset (wES) and Automatic/Manual switching via the follow-up signal NES and
the input yES (see chapter 1.5.6, page 99).
-- SPC controls
Here a process computer takes over the setpoint command during computer operation
RC = Int∧CB = 1, in the event of a computer failure (CB from 1 ! 0) the controller takes
over either the last computer setpoint (followed up wi) or the safety setpoint SH (selection
via S51).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Cascade control
A command controller, e.g. a fixed setpoint controller (with the main controlled variable)
feeds the external setpoint of a slave controller with its manipulated variable (with the
auxiliary controlled variable, disturbance variable) and this the actuator. This gives faster
control of the main controlled variable in the event of changes in the auxiliary controlled
variable, e.g. furnace temperature control (furnace temperature, main controlled variable)
with different flow of the medium to be heated (auxiliary controlled variable).
-- Synchronized controls
A master controller feeds several synchronized controllers simultaneously whose individual

setpoints can be set in a ratio to each other by the constants c4 and c5 and then drag the
controlled variables accordingly (controlled variable synchronization).
-- Internal/External switching
The setpoint switching takes place via a logic link RC = Int∧CB and its negation
(see table 1--11, page 61 and table 1--12, page 62). Both control signals can be set statically
to 1 or 0 (int via S49, CB via S24) in addition to their normal functions as Shift key or control
signal with the states 1 and 0, see chapter 1.5.3 fig. 1-16, page 37 and fig. 1-17, page 38.
The factory setting is Int = 1 (S49 = 0) and CB=1 (S24 = -1), so that in the factory setting
the internal setpoint wi is always active and cannot be switched!
With this setting facility it is possible to perform the switching only dependent on Int (S49=2,
S24= -1) or only dependent on CB (S49=1, S24=1 to 14) as a slave controller with Internal/
External-switching. If the switching facility is blocked in External position (S49=1, S24=-1),
the controller operates as a follow-up controller without Internal/External-switching (see table
1-2, page 43).
-- Display of the external setpoint wE
With the Shift key (12) the digital w-display can be switched to the external setpoint wE and
the digital x-display to the main controlled variable x1 in the display level II (display range I
must be set, display range II is automatically set the same). The active setpoint and the
active actual value are still indicated on the analog displays.
The LEDs Controller I/Controller II signal the display level.
Flashing signals that the displayed external setpoint is not identical with the active setpoint.
Steady light signals that the displayed and active setpoints are identical.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
LED LED
Selection active controller controller displayed w 3) displayed x
by Shift w 1) I II
key
digital analog digital analog
I wi/SH 1 0 wi/SH wi/SH x x
II wi/SH 0 0.5 2) wE wi/SH x1 x
I wE 1 0 wE wE x x
II wE 0 1 wE wE x1 x
1) via CB and Int according to table 1--11 and 1-- 12
Table 1-10 Switching the display level
If the switching possibility between internal and external setpoint is blocked through S49 and
S24, switching of the digital w-display to the display level II is no longer used. Only the digi-
tal x-display is switched. The display level II is signaled by a steady light.
-- Operation with 2 or 3 setpoints
If follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint is blocked with S52 = 1, a multiple
setpoint operation (switching between wi, wE and SH is achieved (see table 1--12, page 62).
-- Controlled variable processing
A 2-component control is implemented (disturbance variable connection). With factors c1

and c3 the main controlled variable x1 can connect the auxiliary controlled variable x2 with
weighting.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735

Digital Digital active w at
Front Front Com-
inputs outputs
Explanations puter
H CB In- Inter- C RB RC fail
1) 4) 4) S50=0 S50=1 S50=0 S50=1
∨N ternal LED
S51=0 S51=0 S51=1 S51=1
∨Si nal LED
Automatic mode,
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 wE(n)2) wE(n)2)
SPC mode
SH3) Automatic mode,

computer switched
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 wi(n,↗) or
off, computer in
wi(n,↗) SPC standby
Automatic mode,
computer on
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 wi(n,↗) wi(n,↗) standby, controller
not in SPC
standby 5)
Automatic mode,
computer switched
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 wi(n,↗) wi(n,↗)
off, controller not in
SPC standby
wE wE
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 x x
(n)2) (n)2)
SH3)
wi or
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 x x
(n,↗) wi Manual, follow up
(n,↗) or safety mode 5)
wi wi
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 x x
(n,↗) (n,↗)
wi wi
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 x x
(n,↗) (n,↗)
1) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement (S47 = 0).
2) Source for wE at S53 = 0 is wEA (FE3) or at S53 = 1 wEΔ (Δw), when S101 < 2. At S101 = 2 wESis active (SES).
The external setpoint fed in via Δw (wEΔ) and via the SES (wES) is followed up. When feeding in the external setpoint
via FE3 (wEA) the feeding controller must be followed up.
3) SH can only be reached after w if Int = 0 and CB goes from 1 → to 0 (computer failure). If CB = 0 and Int is switched from
E
1 → 0, wi is still active. Since SH is not followed up, switching over to SH can take place with the setpoint ramp tS.
4) By OR-linking with the digital outputs H, N and the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation can be
signaled in manual, follow-up or safety operation.
5) Factory setting
(n) followed up to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching
↗ adjustable
Table 1-11 Follow-up/synchronized/SPC controller with Internal/External switching S1 = 3 with follow up

of the inactive setpoint

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735

Digital Digital active w at
Front Front
inputs outputs
Explanations
H CB Inter- Inter- C RB RC
1) 4) 4) S50=0 S50=1 S50=0 S50=1
∨N nal nal LED
S51=0 S51=0 S51=1 S51=1
∨Si LED
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 wE2) wE2)
SH3)
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 wi(↗) or
wi(↗) Automatic mode 5)
0 1 1 1 0 1 1 wi(↗) wi(↗)
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 wi(↗) wi,↗)
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 wE2) x wE2) x
SH3)
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 wi(↗) x or x Manual, follow up or safety
wi(↗)
mode 5)
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 wi(↗) x wi(↗) x
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 wi(↗) x wi(↗) x
1) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement (S47 = 0).
2) Source for wE at S53 = 0 is wEA (FE3) or at S53 = 1 wEΔ ( ¦Δw), when S101 < 2. At S101 = 2 wESis active (SES).
The external setpoint fed in via ¦Δw (wEΔ) and via the SES (wES) is followed up. When feeding in the external setpoint
via FE3 (wEA) the feeding controller must be followed up.
3) SH can only be reached after w if Int = 0 and CB goes from 1 → to 0 (computer failure). If CB = 0 and Int is switched from
E
1 → 0, wi is still active. Since SH is not followed up, switching over to SH can take place with the setpoint ramp tS.
4) By OR--linking with the digital outputs H, N and the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation can be
signaled in manual, follow-up or safety operation.
5) Factory setting
↗ adjustable
Table 1-12 Follow-up/synchronized/SPC controller with Internal/External switching (SPC controller),

S1 = 3 without follow-up of the active setpoint to the active setpoint S52 = 1, 2 or 3 setpoint
operation

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1
wI--c8⋅
0
Manual
S52 (wST+c9)
wi1
Figure 1-31
wi1 d*I d*I
II I
< >
wE w
0000 0000
1) Int
0 S51
C79000-G7476-C154-02
0/1
SIPART DR22 6DR2210

w- -c5 w+c8⋅
SES wi1ES SH CB (wST+c9) SA,SE
c4 1 A ts
2/3 Int
4/5 S101 w
CB1) A
wES A=H∨N∨Si
wES S50 H=Hi∨He
1
0
tS
w
c4, c5
wEΔ 2/3 S101 w I
+Δw SL
--Δw 1 wE+c8⋅
0 S53 0/1 wE = c4⋅we+c5 (wST+c9)
wSLI wE
4/5
wEA
FE3 Factory setting +
xdI
c4=1, c5=0 --
wST
FE11 x w
c1, c3
x1
FE1 x
see chapter 1.5.5, figure 1-50, page 90
x=x1+c1 ⋅ x2+c3 xI
x2
FE2

Factory setting d*I d*I
c1=c2=c3=0
II I w
Block diagram S1 = 3 slave controller, synchronized controller, SPC controller

0000 0000
1) factory setting
tF I x1 x
Adaptation
63
305735
1.5.4.6 S1 = 4: commanded ratio controller
0000 0000 000
wvi wv w xv x x w
wVES
SES wv
yH
tS Ts
w=v⋅x2+c5
wSL Int⋅CB y
Δw
x2 v = vA to vE
W
wSL v = wv·(vE - vA)
wV E
+vA +
FE3 -- P I D ya+c6⋅z
wVEA
X ya
FE2
x1 - c5
x2 vist=
x2
FE1
x1
FE4
z
In a ratio control the commanding process variable x2 is evaluated with the adjustable ratio fac-
tor and a basic value c5 added if necessary and forms the setpoint w for the following controlled
process variable x1:
w = v ⋅ x2 + c5
With xd = w - x1, xd = v ⋅ x2 + c5 -- x1 is given
In the controlled status (xd = 0), the following is given v = x1 -- c5 i.e. in the controlled status
x2
and at c5 = 0 x1 behaves according to the set ratio factor v.
x2
A typical application are combustion rules where a fuel volume x1 beongs to every air volume
x2 to guarantee optimum combustion.
The ratio factor range v = vA to vE is determined with the parameters vA and vE in the structur-
ing mode oFPA in the range from 0.0 to 9.999 (factory setting vA = 0, vE = 1). In addition a ba-
sic value c5 (parameterization mode onPA) can be connected in the range from -1.999 to 9.999
(factory setting = 0.0).
The standardized nominal ratio wv (wvi or wvE) in the range from 0 to 1 is converted to the ratio
factor range.
v = wv (vE -- vA) + vA
With w = v ⋅ x2 + c5 , w = wv [(vE -- vA) + vA] x2 + c5 is given.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
In the ratio controller the standardized nominal ratio wv and the standardized actual ratio xv are
displayed on the digital w and x displays respectively. Via d*I a physical display is possible. The
controlled variable x1 and the evaluated commanding procesan be switched to the external
nominal ratio (display level II) (display level I must be set, display level II is automatically set
the same). Signaling of the display levels, see S1 = 3, fos variable w are displayed on the ana-
log x and w displays respectively so that a direct control difference monitoring is possible at all
times.
With the Shift key (12) the digital w-display cllow-up controller. The digital x-display shows the
actual ratio xv in both display levels.
The actual ratio is gained by back calculating the ratio formula with the current process
variables x1, x2:
vis = x1--c5
x2 x1--c5 - vA
vis --vA x2
vist = xv (vE -- vA) + vA gives for xv = or xv =
vE--vA vE--vA
xv is displayed and is required for x-tracking mode. For the xv-display, x1 and x2 are limited to
+0,5 % so that the display does not become too restless for small x1 and x2 or flip from positive
to negative in the case of negative x2. The linearizers can be used for linearization of the com-
manding process variable x2 (via FE2 in the freely connectable input range) and the following
process variable x1 (via FE1 also in permanently connected input range).
The linearization then acts on the analog displays and the ratio formation and therefore indi-
rectly on the digital displays for nominal and actual ratio. The ratio controller has no nominal
ratio limiting because the ratio factor range already marks the limit. The commanding process
variable x2 can be limited by the freely connectable range (S4 = 1) if necessary.
The ratio controller behaves like slave controller S1 = 3 in switching of the setpoint ratio wv so
that the information and tables there apply accordingly. The variables wi and wE must be
replaced by wvi and wvE. This controller type can also be used as a ratio controller with fixed
ratio (manually adjustable) or with commanded ratio factor.
A fixed ratio factor is used for example in simple combustion rules, (see example in figure 1-33)
where the ratio factor is reset manually if necessary for varying fuels. If it is possible to measure
the effects of the ratio factor (combustion quality, pollutants in the flue gas) a commanded ratio
controller is used. Here a master controller adjusts the ratio factor (ratio cascade) with the com-
bustion quality as a control variable.
Another application for ratio cascades are concentration controls, e.g. pH-value controls. The
pH-value is the controlled variable of the master controller, the flow of alkali and acid the com-
manded process variable and the following (controlled) process variable of the ratio controller.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Example of a ratio control
v c
+
x w
+
+ y
-- xd
x2 x1
KL KG
QL QG
GAS
AIR
Figure 1-33 Control diagram ratio control
In a combustion control the air-/gas flow should be in a constant ratio. The command
variable (commanding process variable) is the air flow QL which is preset in the range 0 to
12,000 m3/h as a signal 4 to 20 mA. The controlled variable (following process variable)
is the gas flow QG with a measuring range 0 to 3,000 m3/h which is also available as a
4 to 20 mA signal. In an ideal combustion the air/gas ratio is
QL
L« ideal = = 4.
QG
QL
= L« ⋅ λ The air factor λ is then 1 and should be adjustable in the range from 0.75
QG
to 1.25 on the controller.
The ratio factor v (bei xd = 0) is determined partly by the transmission factors K of the trans-
mitter (measuring ranges).
100 %
x1 = QG ⋅ KG with the values from the example KG = 3,000 m 3/h
x2 = QL ⋅ KL 100 %
KL =
12,000 m 3/h
x1 QG ⋅ KG QG = 1
v= = with QL
x2 QL KL L« ⋅ λ
v= 1 ⋅ KG
L« ⋅ λ KL
With the values from the example
v= 1 ⋅
1 100 % ⋅ h ⋅ 12,000 m 3
4 ⋅
λ 3,000 m 3 ⋅ 100 % ⋅ h
1
gives v = λ i.e. the choice of the transmitter ranges has been made so that
KG 1 .
KL = L«

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The desired adjustment range of λ gives:
1 1 1 1
vA = = = 0.8 vE = = = 1.333
λE 1.25 λA 0.75
vA and vE are set in the structuring mode oFPA. By setting the nominal ratio wv from 0 to 1
the ratio factor v can now be adjusted from 0.8 to 1.33 or the air factor λ from 1.25 to 0.75.
λ v
0.75 1.33
1,3
0.8
1.2
0.9 1.1
1 1
1.1 0.9
1.2 0.8
1.25 wv
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Figure 1-34 Relationship ratio factor v and air factor λ to standardized nominal ratio wv
If the combustion is also to take place at small flow volumes with excess air, the constant c
must be set negative. Figure 1-35 shows the gas/air ratio in the controlled state at different
air factors λ and c = 0 as well as at λ = 1 and c <0, i.e. with excess air.
X X1 QG
1 Gas V=1.33 λ=0,75
mA % m3/h
120
3,500
22
110
V=1 λ=1
20 100 3,000
90 1)
18 V=0.8 λ=1.25
2,500
80
16 V=1, c<0 2)
70
2,000
14
60
12 50 1,500
40
10
30 1,000
8
20
500
6
10
4 0 0 QL
0 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 m3/h air
X2
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 % X2
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 mA
1) constant gas/air ratio

2) gas/air ratio with additional air excess
Figure 1-35 Display of gas/air ratio in controlled status

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
68
S236=0/2 S236=1/2
d*I d*I d*I
II wvE I I+II I+II
Figure 1-36
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0
S52 wv xv x w
<>
wi1 wvi
S51 Int1)
0 tS
A vA, vE, c5
SH CB
1 Int
0/1 wv w
⋅
A w=v x2+c5
SES wviES CB1)

2/3 S101 S50 x2
4/5 Factory setting
0 1
vA=0, vE=1, c5=0
wvES
wvES
tS
S101 W I v=vA to vE
Block diagram S1 = 4 commanded ratio controller

+Δw wvEΔ 2/3 SL wvE v=wv (vE- -vA)+vA
--Δw 1
0 S53 0/1
wvEA 4/5 WSLI A=H∨N∨Si xv
FE3 H=Hi∨He
x2
FE2
x1--c5 +
see fig. 1-5, page24

vactual= xd I
x2 --
x1 x w
FE1 xI
tF I 1) Factory vactual--vA
setting v= vE--vA
Adaptation When adjusting wvi the
setpoint ramp is not active
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
Manual
305735
1.5.4.7 S1 = 5: Cascade control
y
000
yH
yaI+c6⋅z
yaI
SLAVE CONTROLLER = CONTROLLER I
PID
wI
xI
wI
+ I
xI
0000
wI
wI
0000
INTI
yII=wEI
wi I
PID
wII
+ I
xIΙ
wIΙ
MASTER CONTROLLER = CONTROLLER II
wII
xII
xII
0000
tS
xII = x1II +c1 x2 II +c3

wII
INTII∧CB
0000
⋅
wSLII
wSLII
wEΔ
tS
wiII
x1II
x2II
xI
z
FE8
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
±Δw
SES

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
In this controller type a master controller (Controller II) and a follow-up controller
(Controller I) are interconnected in one controller in a cascade (application, see S1 = 3).
-- Master controller (controller II)
With respect to the setpoint switching the master controller has approximately the same
structure as the follow-up controller S1 = 3. It is therefore a fixed setpoint controller with the
possibility of external setpoint preset via analog signal, the serial interface or as an incre-
mental setpoint via the control signals Δw. Selection is made with wSLII and S101. In
computer coupling it is also possible here, in the case of a computer failure (CB from 1 ! 0)
to continue working with the last computer setpoint (followed-up wi) or with the safety set-
point SH (selection by S51). The master controller cannot be switched to manual operation
but the slave controller can be switched to the internal setpoint.
Follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint can be switched off with S52 = 1.
-- Follow-up controller (controller I)
The follow-up controller can be switched for disconnecting the cascade for startup proce-
dures via the Internal/External key (2) (Int I) between the internal setpoint wiI and the exter-
nal setpoint wEI which is equal to the manipulated variable of the master controller (yaII).
The internal operation of the follow-up controller corresponds to manual operation of the
master controller.
Setpoint limiting of the follow-up controller can be implemented by the y-limiting of the
master controller. The follow-up of the master controller in internal operation of the follow-up
controller and x-tracking (A) and the follow-up of the internal setpoint of the follow-up
controller in external operation and x-tracking (A) always takes place so that the switching
Internal/External is bumpless.
-- Display and operating level switching
With the Shift key (12) the digital and analog x- and w-displays and the function of the Inter-
nal/External key (2) including the Internal LED (1) and the Δw-adjustment keys (6) are
switched to the selected controller. The y-display (14), the Manual/Automatic key (9) and
the Δy-adjustment keys (13) are permanently assigned to the follow-up controller.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The LED’s Controller I/Controller II signal the display and operating level:
Selection by Controll. II Controll. I LED LED LED LED displayed adjustable

Shift key Master Slave C Internal Controll. I Controll. II is wi
controller controller Controll.
Int Int according 1 0 1 II wi II ↗ 1)

Controller II Ext Int to CB 0 0 0.5 II --
Master contr. Int Ext 1 0 0.52) II wi II ↗ 1)
Ext Ext C=CB 0 0 1 II --
Int Int 0 1 1 0 I wi I ↗ 1)
Controller I Ext Int 0 1 0.5 0 I wi I ↗ 1)
Slave contr. Int Ext 0 0 0.52) 0 I
Ext Ext 0 0 1 0 I
Table 1-13 Switching the display levels
Flashing light signals that the status displayed by the Internal LED is identical with that in the
unselected controller.
Steady light signals that the status displayed by the Internal LED is not identical with that in
the selected controller.
Normally the display level switch will be in the position Controller II (master controller) so
that the main controller variable xII can be monitored. The display level I is only used for
startup procedures. The Automatic/Manual switch for the slave controller is possible in both
display levels, depending on the selection of the display level the main controlled variable xII
or the auxiliary controlled variable xI can be monitored. The display range of the digital x and
w display can be adjusted separately for both controllers by the parameters d*I and d*II if
necessary in connection with the linearizers so that both controllers can be displayed
physically correctly.
-- x-tracking
With S50 =1, x-tracking is selected for both controllers together (S50). The slave controller
follows up the internal setpoint or the controller output to the auxiliary controlled variable xI
in A-operation. The master controller triggers this function in A-operation or Internal of the
follow-up controller (Int I corresponds like A to disconnected cascade).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
72
Table 1-14

At S52=1 (without follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint) the (n) is omitted at wII. If x-tracking is switched on (S50=1) automatic operation of the master
controller begins with w=x (xd=0), via the set setpoint ramp tS, the active setpoint runs to the old set value of w.
1) The table is shown for static computer switching without acknowledgement (S47=0).
2) Source for w IΙ at S101< 2 ist w Δ (±Δw), at S101=2 w
E E ES via the SES.
3) SH can only be reached after w Δ, if IntII=0 and CB go from 1 to 0 (computer failure). If CB=0 and Int is switched from 1 to 0, wiIΙ is still active. Since SH is not
E
followed up, you can switch to SH with the setpoint ramp tS.
4) By OR-linking with the digital outputs H, N, IntI and the control signal Si no computer standby or computer operation can be signaled at disconnected cascade.
5) When selecting controller I is C LED = 0
6) Manual operation or operation with external manipulated variable is always possible irrespective of the selection Controller I/ControllerΙI.
7) Switching only possible in the respective selected controller. Operating states are retained.
↗ adjustable
Cascade control S1 = 5 with follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint S52=0
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
Manual
305735
Master controller Follow-up controller
Manual
Figure 1-38
1
0 S52 d*II
II wII
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
0000
<>
wiII
IntII1)
0 S51 A∧IntI tS
0/1 SH CB IntII
1 A=H∨N∨Si
wiIIES A∨IntII
CB H=Hi∨He
2/3 S101
4/5 S50 wII wiI
<>
wiI IntI1)
0 1 A wI
0/1
IntI A
SES wiIES 2/3/ S101 S50
4/5 1
0
2/3 wSLII
wES
Block diagram S1 = 5 cascade control

S101
tS 0/1 wEII
4/5
+Δw wSLII
--Δw d*II
II xdII
II +
0000 yn
FE8
--
xII wII ya
x1ΙI c1, c3 xII PID yaII=wEI I I
FE1 xII xII +
x2II xII=x1II+c1⋅x2II+c3 controller II 0000 0000 xdI
--
FE2 xI wI

xI Factory setting c1=c3=0
FE3 xI
tFII Adap-
Controller I, see figure 1-50, page 90
Controller II see tation

Adaptation
Fig. 1-51, page 91,
Control parameter II
vv, cP, tn, Yo, tv, AH, YA, YE
1) Factory setting
73
305735
74
Master controller = Controller II Follow-up controller = Controller I
Figure 1-39
0000 0000 0000 0000
000
1.5.4.8 S1 = 6:
wiII wII xII wII wi I wv xv xI wI

wES
SES yH
wSLII tS
w II
tS
IntII∧CB
w II
+l
+
Δw wEΔ wSLII wI=v⋅x2+c5
PID IntI y
Principle representation S1 = 6
I
wI
FE8 x II v=vA to vE
v=wv(vA--vE)+vA
+
PID yaI=c6⋅z
FE1
I
xII yaI
Ratio-cascade control
FE2 x1I--c5 xI
x2I vis =
x2I
FE3
x1I
FE4
z
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
Manual
305735
In this controller type a master controller (Controller II) and a follow-up controller as a com-
manded ratio controller (Controller I) are interconnected in a ratio cascade.
(Applications see S1 = 4)
-- Master controller
The master controller has the same structure with respect to the setpoint switching as the
follow-up controller S1 = 3. It is therefore a fixed setpoint controller with the possibility of ex-
ternal setpoint preset via the analog signal, the serial interface or as an incremental setpoint
via the control signals Δw. Selection is made with wSLII and S101. In computer coupling it
is also possible here, in the case of a computer failure (CB from 1 ! 0) to continue working
with the last computer setpoint (followed-up wi) or with the safety setpoint SH (selection by
S51). The master controller cannot be switched to manual operation but the follow-up con-
troller can be switched to the internal setpoint. x-tracking in A-operation is possible by selec-
tion with S50 = 1. The follow-up of the inactive setpoint to the active setpoint can be
switched off by S52 = 1.
-- Follow-up controller
The follow-up controller is a ratio controller as described under S1 = 4. To disconnect the

cascade the Internal/External key (2) (Int I) can be used to switch between the internal ratio
factor wvi and the external ratio factor wvE, which is equal to the manipulated variable of the
master controller (yaII). The internal operation of the follow-up controller corresponds to
manual operation of the master controller.
xv-tracking is possible in A-operation by selection with S50 = 1. Setpoint limitings can be

performed via limiting of the manipulated variable of the master controller and possibly by
limiting the commanding process variable x2 I in the freely connectable input range (S4 = 1).
The follow-up of the master controller and xv-tracking in A-operation and the follow-up of the
internal ratio factor wvi in external operation and in x-tracking (A) always takes place so that
switching is bumpless.
Table 1-14, page 72 and the statements on x-tracking of the cascade controls apply accord-
ingly when wi is replaced by wvi and wE by wvE.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
76
A=H∨N∨Si
H=Hi∨He S236=1/2
Figure 1-40
Master controller Follow-up controller I+II I+II
S52 d*II
0 0000 0000
II
S236=0/2 x1 w1
0000
wiII d*I d*I
SA,
<>
SE II I
0/1 IntII1)
0 S51 A∧IntI tS
wiIIES SH 0000 0000
2/3 S101 1
CB IntII
wII wv xv
4/5
<>
A∨IntI wvi
CB1) IntI1) vA, vE, c5
S50 A
1 0/1 IntI wI
0 A
wviES wI=v⋅x2+c5
SES S50
2/3/ S101
4/5 1
0
2/3
wSLII wEII
wES
S101
0/1
tS 4/5 wSLII
+Δw d*II
Block diagram S1 = 6 ratio cascade control

--Δw A=H∨N∨Si II II xdII
H=Hi∨He 0000 + yn
FE8 -- I +
ya -- xdI
xII wII
xII xII PID wI
xII yaII=wvE
FE1 controller II
x2I x2I I
FE2 x1I--c5

vis =
x2I
xI
x1I x1I
FE3 xI
tFII v --vA tFI
xv= ist
Adaptation Controller II see vE--vA

Fig. 1-51, page 91,
Adaptation
Control parameter II Factory setting

vv, cP, tn, Yo, tv, AH, YA, YE vA=0, vE=1, c5=0
v=vA to vE
1) Factory setting v=wv (vE--vA)+vA
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
Manual
305735
1.5.4.9 S1 = 7/8: Override control
0000 0000 000

wi wI xI wI yH
wES
SES tS tS Main controller y
wSLI INT∧CB
wI
+ PID-controller I yaI
wSLI
Δw wEΔ --
xI YA YE
FE8
x1I
FE1 Min
xI=x1I+c1⋅x2I+c3
x2I selec-
FE2
tion
xII Max
FE3
xII
YE YA
--
yaII
+ PID-controller II
wII
Sb
wII xII wII Limiting controller
0000 0000
Figure 1-41 Principle representation S1 = 7/8
In the override control (limiting control, disconnecting control) two controllers are connected
parallel, the main controller (Controller I) and the limiting controller (Controller II) which act on a
common actuator. The manipulated variables of both controllers are mutually limited by the in
this case controlled parameters YA (S1=7) or YE (S1=8). This gives a controlled variable
limiting related to the setpoint set or active in both controllers.
One of the two controllers -- preferably the main controller -- is always intervening and controls
the process. The non-intervening controller then has a control difference which controls it to the
limited manipulated variable. In this case all further integration is prevented so that no integral
saturation takes place. Disconnection always takes place at the latest when the control diffrence
in the non-intervening controller reverses. Changes in the controlled variable in the direction of
the control difference reversal also lead to disconnection via the P-part (possibly also D-part).
This gives a particularly good dynamic behavior.
By the arrangement of two controllers, better adaptation to the different time behaviors of the
two controlled systems is achieved than with a Minimum- or Maximum selection of the control
differences. The possible implementation by Minimum or Maximum selection of the manipulated
variables can lead to dynamic problems due to integral saturation of the non-intervening
controller.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
- Example: Core temperature control with maximum casing temperature limiting
The core temperature of a reactor is to be controlled without the cooled casing of the reactor
exceeding a specific temperature (limiting setpoint Sb).
In error-free operation the main controller (Controller I) controls the core temperature to the
set setpoint wcore. Since the casing temperature is below the critical limiting setpoint Sb, the
limiting controller (Controller II) has a positive control difference. The manipulated variable of
the main controller is fed -- increased by 1% -- to the limiting controller as a maximum limiting
variable and forms its maximum manipulated variable. The limiting controller is driven to this
limit by the positive control difference.
Its manipulated variable is also fed to the main controller as a maximum manipulated
variable limit but remains ineffective because it is an increase of 1% above the manipulated
variable of the main controller.
In this situation the main controller can set its manipulated variable totally independently of
the limiting controller and control the core temperature of the reactor.
Sb=wcase
YE
xcase + Casing temperature controller
+ (Limiting controller)
Controller II
--
wcore S1=8
YE
+
+ Controller I
--
Core temperature controller
(Main controller)
xcore y
Figure 1-42 Core temperature control with max. casing temperature limiting
If the casing temperature rises above the set limiting value Sb, e.g. due to failure of the
cooling water, the limiting controller gets a negative control difference. As a result its
manipulated variable is released from the forced limit and the heating performance is
reduced. The limiting controller then forces the reduced manipulated variable on the main
controller as a maximum manipulated variable limit. Due to the reduced heating performance
the main controller receives a positive control difference which drives it to the manipulated
variable limit. Now the limiting controller controls the process to constant casing
temperature.
When the cooling is reinstated, the casing temperature drops. The limiting controller will now
increase the heating performance and maintain the casing temperature. With increasing
heating performance the core temperature also increases and the control difference of the
main controller becomes negative.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
As a result the main controller controls down its manipulated variable and with it the heating
performance and imposes the manipulated variable limit on the main controller. The case
temperature drops below the limiting setpoint and the limiting controller drives to the
manipulated variable limit via the now positive control difference. It is controlled to a constant
core temperature.
The disconnection therefore always takes place when the controlled variable of the
non-intervening controller becomes more positive than the set setpoint (xd negative), then
the manipulated variable limited to maximum is dropped below, i.e. a maximum value limiting
of the controlled variables takes place. The manipulated variable maximum value limiting
corresponds in this example to a minimum value selection of the manipulated variables.
Depending on the structure switch position (S1 = 7 or 8) and the set controller direction of
effect (normal: +Kp or reversed: -Kp) the limiting direction of the controlled variables is
reversed (Minimum- or Maximum value limits):
Limiting of the
Manipu- corres- Controller direction
Disconnection at controlled
lated ponds of effect
variables to
S1 variable to y-
limiting selec- Main Limit ing
Main controller Limiting
direction tion control- control- xI xII
I controller II
ler I ler II
7 yA Max norm +Kp norm +Kp xdI > 0, x I< wI xdII > 0, xII < Sb Min Min
7 yA Max rev -Kp rev -Kp xdI < 0, xI > wI xdII < 0, xII > Sb Max Max
8 yE Min norm +Kp norm +Kp xdI < 0, xI > wI xdII < 0, xII > Sb Max Max
8 yE Min rev -Kp rev -Kp xdI > 0, xI < wI xdII > 0, xII < Sb Min Min
7 yA Max norm +Kp rev -Kp xdI > 0, xI < wI xdII < 0, xII > Sb Min Max
7 yA Max rev -Kp norm +Kp xdI < 0, xI > wI xdII > 0, xII < Sb Max Min
8 yE Min norm +Kp rev -Kp xdI < 0, xI > wI xdII > 0, xII < Sb Max Min
8 yE Min rev -Kp norm +Kp xdI > 0, xI < wI xdII > 0, xII > Sb Min Max
Table 1-15 Limiting direction of the controlled variables depending on S1 = 7/8 and controller direction
of effect
The direction of effect of the transmitter, actuator and controlled system are included in the
determining of the controller direction of effect (see chapter 4.1, page 215). As a rule,
limiting controllers and main controllers have the same direction of effect so that the second
part of the table is irrelevant.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Main controller I
The main controller has the same structure with respect to the setpoint switching as the fol-
low-up controller (S1 = 3) with the difference that the external setpoint wE cannot be preset
via the analog inputs as an absolute value. It is therefore a fixed setpoint controller with the
possibility of external sepoint preset via the SES or as an incremental setpoint via the control
signals Δw. Selection is made by S101. In computer coupling it is also possible here, in
the case of a computer failure (CB from 1 ! 0) to continue working with the last computer
setpoint (followed--up wi) or with the safety setpoint SH (selection by S51).
x-tracking in A-operation is posssible by selection with S50 = 1. The follow-up of the inactive
setpoint to the active setpoint can be switched off by S52 = 1.
-- Limiting controller II
The limiting controller has a normal fixed setpoint structure without x-tracking and setpoint
switching possibilities. The limiting setpoint Sb is set physically in the structuring mode oFPA
in the range from -10 to 110 % related to the display range dEII - dAII = 100 %.
-- Display and operating level switching

The display and operating level switching Controller I or Controller II takes place in all oper-
ating modes with the Shift key (12). The LEDs Controller I, Controller II signal which control-
ler is displayed and which controller is intervening.
The digital and analog x- and w-displays are switched. In the operating level II the Internal
key (2) is inactive, the LED Internal (1) is off and the Δw adjusting keys (6) are inactive.
The y-display, the Manual/Automatic key (9) and the Δy-adjusting keys (13) are
always permanently assigned to the common controller output and active in both
display levels.
Selection by LED con- LED con- displayed adjustable

active controller
Shift key troller I troller II is setpoint
Main controller I Main controller I 1 0 I wi ↗1)

Limiting controller II Main controller I 0 0.52) II --
Main controller I Limiting controller II 0.5 2) 0 I wi ↗1)

1 II --
Limiting controller II Limiting controller II 0
1)only if there is no x-tracking
2)0.5 flashing rhythm 1:1
↗ adjustable
Table 1-16 Display level switching
Flashing of the Controller I/Controller II-LEDs signals that the displayed controller is not
identical with the active controller. Steady light signals that the displayed controller is not
identical with the active controller.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The process can be monitored at any time by manual switching. As a rule the display level
switch is in position I (main controller) so that the main controller variable x1I can be moni-
tored. Flashing of the Controller LED I signals that the limiting setpoint has been reached
and requests switching to the display level II (limiting controller) with the controlled variable
of the limiting controller.
The display range must be set separately for the digital x and w display for both controllers
with the parameters d*I and d*II if necessary in connection with the linearizers so that both
controllers can be displayed correctly.
-- Automatic/Manual switching
Since both controllers only generate one common automatic manipulated variable ya, the
Automatic/Manual switching of both controllers is also common. In manual-, follow-up-,
safety- or blocking operation, both controllers are followed up to the active y. The
manipulated variable limit which is only active in automatic operation via the parameters YAI
and YEI represents an absolute manipulated variable limit in automatic operation. The
mutual follow-up of YA or YE can only take place up to the set limits. By setting YAI and
YEI, YAII and YEII are set to the same value automatically on leaving the parameterization
mode onPA.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
82
S1
8 7
Sb
wII yE yA
Figure 1-43
Sb xd*II PID controller II
n
d*II d*II
l
see yn
II II chapter 1.5.5,
xII 0000 0000 wII
Figure 1-51, ya
xII
FE3 Page 91
1
S52 d*I Limiting controller
0
wiI I
0000 tFII
<>
Int1) SA,SE Adaptation

0 S51 tS
0/1 CB A
SH Int
SES wiIES 1
2/3 S101
4/5 A
CB1)
S50
1
0
Block diagram S1 = 7/8, Override control

A=H∨N∨Si
wES 2/3 H=Hi∨He
S101 wSLI
0/1
4/5 wSLI S1
tS
7
+Δw d*I 8
--Δw I I
+
xdI yE yA
n
0000
FE8
l
PID controller I
xI wI
see yn yn
c1, c3
x1I chapter 1.5.5,
FE1 xI xI Figure 1-50, ya ya

x2I xI =x1 I+c1 x2 I +c3 z
FE2 Page 90
z Factory setting c1=c3=0 Main controller

FE4
tFI
1) Factory setting
Adaptation
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
Manual
305735
1.5.4.10 S1 = 9: Process display
d*II
xII
FE3 gn (w)
0000
d*I
xI
FE1 rt (x)
0000
xIII
FE6 S67
2
1
oFF,0,1 ge (y)
0 S68 000
Figure 1-44 Block diagram, process display
The process display provides the possibility of displaying three process variables (xI to xIII).
The process variables xI and xII are indicated on the x- and w-display whereby the digital and
analog displays are connected in parallel. With the parameters d*I and d*II, if necessary in con-
nection with the linearizers, both process variables can be displayed separately physically cor-
rectly. The switching possibility of the display level is disabled. The LEDs Controller I/Controller
II are dark.
The process variable xIII is indicated by the y-display and can be switched off by the structure
switch S67 in the oFF position. The display range here is 0 to 100 %, according to the position
of S68 mit rising or falling characteristic. The display overrun is -10 to 110 %. Alarm messages
are possible by assigning the limit value alarms A1 to A4 to FE1, FE3 or FE6 (see chapter
1.5.9, page 124).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.4.11 S1 = 10: Fixed setpoint controller with 1 setpoint

(control system coupling)
S52 wI--c8(wST+c9)
0
d*I d*I
wi1
n w=wI1+c8⋅ II I
o (wST+c9) w 0000 w 0000
SA,SE
Int∨CB tS
A
0/1/3 A
2/4
0/1
S64 A = H∨N∨Si
wi1ES S101 H = Hi∨He
2/3/4/5
SES wST
S50 +
xdI
0 1 --
x w
FE11 see
c1, c2, c3 Fig. 1-50,
page 90
x1
FE1
x2 x =x1+c1 ⋅ xI
FE2 xI
(x2-c2 · x3+c3)
x3
FE3
d*I
factory setting d*I
c1=c2=c3=0
I
x
x1 0000
tFI
Adaptation
Note: S64 = 3 is recommended for this controller type
Figure 1-45 Block diagram S1 = 10, fixed setpoint controller for control system coupling
This fixed setpoint controller is designed specially for coupling to the control system.
The control interventions by the signals Int and CB which cannot be used otherwise in this con-
troller type are available for locking the control system operation via the SES.
With Int∨CB the setpoint signal wiES is separated and the manual intervention via HeES at
S64 = 3 suppressed.
S64 = 3 is expressly recommended for this connection.

The other connection of the input function is almost identical with the structure S1 = 0.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.4.12 S1 = 11: Follow-up controller without Int/Ext switching

(control system coupling)
This follow-up controller is designed specially for the control system coupling. It differs from the
structure S1 = 3 in that the setpoint switching to wi via Int and CB is omitted and thus these
control signals are available for locking the control system operation via the SES. With Int∨CB
the manual intervention via HeES at S64 = 3 is suppressed. S64 = 3 is expressly recommended
for this connection.
Disconnection of a cascade control is made by manual manipulation at the master controller.

The other functions are unchanged in relation to S1 = 3.
xdI
xI
--
+
w
x
w
w
tS
w
d*I
d*I
0000
I/II
0000
I/II
x
SA,SE
Factory setting
d*I
0000
I/II
wE
x1
Factory setting
wE=c4⋅wE+c5
c4=1, c5=0
1)
c4. c5
S52
1
wE
wSLI
wSL
Adaptation
Factory setting c1=c3=0
S53
x=x1+c1 x2+c3
w-c5
wEΔ
c4
1
0
⋅
c1, c3
tF I
tS
--Δw
+Δw
wEA
x2
x1
FE3
FE1
FE2
Figure 1-46 Block diagram S1=11 Follow-up controller for control system coupling

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.4.13 S1=12: Double fixed setpoint/follow-up controller
At S1=12, 2 independently operating controllers with fixed setpoint/follow-up controller function

are available. With the Shift key the operating and display levels are switched completely
between the two controllers.
Controller 1
0000 0000 000
wiI wI xI
wiI
yH
wesI
SES
tS yI
wEI INT∧CB(I)
wSLI
w
wSLI +
P I D ya+c6 · z
--
wEAI x
FE2
FE1 x
xI
FE4
z
Controller 2
0000 0000 000
wiII wiII wII xII
yH
wesII
SES
tS yII
INT∧CB(II)
wSLII wEII
w
wSLII +
P I D ya+c7 · z
--
wEAII x
FE8
FE3 x
xII
FE7
z
Figure 1-47 Principle representation S1 = 12 double controller

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
xdI
xI
--
+
w
x
w
tS
w
d*I
A=H∨N∨Si
0000
I
dI
H=Hi∨He
x
0000
I
SA,SE
S50
1
A
0
Int
Int
wiI
CB1)
CB
Adaptation
S52
S51
wE
x
0
tF I
wSLI
0 wSLI
2/3/ S101
wesI
<>
wiI
wEA
4/5
wES
wiIES
FE1
FE2

SES
Figure 1-48 Block diagram controller I at S1=12

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
xdII
xII
--
+
wII
xII
wII
wII
tSII
A=HII∨NII∨SiII
xII
dII
w
HII=HiII∨HeII
0000
I
xII
dII
0000
II
SAII,SEII
S233
1
AII
AII
0
IntII
IntII
wiII
CBII1)
CBII
Adaptation
S235
S234
wEII
0
tF I
wiII
wSLII
wSLII
2/3/ S101
<>
wiII
wEAII
4/5
wESII
wiIIES
FE3
FE8

SES
Figure 1-49 Block diagram controller II at S1=12

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.5 Control algorithm, parameter control, adaptation

(S54 to S60)
1.5.5.1 Control algorithm
The PiD control algorithm of controller I and II is implemented as an interaction-free parallel

structure and follows the ideal controller equations whilst neglecting the filter constants and the
cycle time.
-- P-controller
ya
ya = Kp ⋅ xd = yo or =  Kp
xd
-- Pi-controller
ya = Kp (xd +
1 t xd dt) +yo(t) o r
ya 1
=  Kp (1 + jω Tn )
Tn 0 xd
-- D-part (zD-part)
The D-part can be added optionally.
ya jω Tv
= Kp
E Tv
1 + jω
vv
The input variable E for the D-part is xd, x, -z, or +z depending on the setting of S55 or S57.
-- zy-part
The z-part can be added optionally to the controller output ya.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
see fig. 1-58, page 102 to fig. 1-63, page 110
yn
figure 1-17, page 38
yaI
see chapter 1.5.3,
S231
YAI, YEI
0/2
1
PII
n
+
+
p
d
i
yo=yn--(Kp⋅xd+c6⋅zy)
P
yoI
Pi
P
tv I
n
yo=yn--p
+ +
vv I
tn I
c6⋅zy
Kp I
c6
S54
S54
0
0
1
1
- -1
- -1
S55
At S55=2.3, zy=0 %!
0
3
1
2
Controller structure I
- -1
- -1
tF I
S55 0/1
zy
zΔ
2/3
xdI
xI
z
FE4
Figure 1-50 Block diagram controller structure I

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
see fig. 1-64, page 115 to fig. 1-68, page 119 or

Fig. 1-38 page 73 and fig. 1-40, page 76
yn
yaII
see figure 1-17
S231
YAII, YEII
0/2
1
PII
n
+
+
p
d
i
yo=ynII--(kp⋅xd+c7⋅zy)
P
yoII
P
P
tv II
yo=ynII--p
n
+ +
vv II
tnII
c7⋅zyII
Kp II
KpII
c7
S56
S56
0
0
1
1
- -1
- -1
AHII
S57
At S57=2.3, zy=0 %!
0
3
1
2
Controller structure II
- -1
- -1
tFII
zyII
S57 0/1
zΔ
xdII
2,3
xII
z
FE7
Figure 1-51 Block diagram controller structure II

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Controller direction of effect
The controller direction of effect is set with S54 (controller I) or S56 (controller II), it must
always have an opposite behavior (reverse coupling) to the controlled system (including
actuator and transmitter)
S54/56= 0, normally acting controller (+Kp, rising x causes falling y) for normally acting systems
(rising y causes rising x)
S54/56=1, reversing controller (--Kp, rising x causes rising y) for reversing systems (rising y
causes falling x).
Operating point yo for P-controller
-- The operating point yo of the P-controller can be set either automatically or as a parameter
(onPA).
-- Automatic operating point (Yo = Auto)

Whenever there is no automatic operation (manual, follow-up, safety or blocking operation)
the operating point yo is followed up so that switching to automatic operation is bumpless.
This gives an automatic setting of the operating point yo in manual mode:
yo = yH Kp (w--xH)c6⋅zyII in controller II or
yo = yH Kp (w--xH)c6⋅zy in controller I
If the actual value in manual mode (xH) is driven to the desired setpoint (w) by the appropri-
ate manual manipulated variable (yH), the operating point (yo) is identical to the manual ma-
nipulated variable (yH).
yo = yH or yo = yH c6⋅zy.
-- Set operating point (Yo = 0 to 100 %)

-- The controller operates in all operating modes with the operating point set as a permanent
parameter.
Bumpless switching to automatic mode
If there is no automatic operation (manual, follow-up, safety or active blocking operation) the
I-part or the operating point yo (only at Yo = Auto) is followed up so that the switching to auto-
matic operation is bumpless. Any still active D part is set to zero.
P-PI switching
With the control signal P*=1 the controller is switched from Pi to P-behavior, at Yo=Auto the
switching is bumpless.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manipulated variable limiting yA, yE (yAII, yEII at S1=12)
The manipulated variable limiting with the parameters YA and YE is active in automatic opera-
tion in any case. The limits of these parameters are at --10 and +110 %. However, it should be
taken into account that the controllers neither output negative actuating currents nor detect any
negative position feedback signals.
If the manipulated variable ya reaches one of the limits YA or YE in automatic mode, further in-
tegration is aborted to avoid integral saturation. This ensures that the manipulated variable can
be changed immediately after reversing the polarity.
In manual-, follow-up- (DDC) or safety operation the manipulated variable y can be driven out of
the limiting range (only at S245=0 or S246=0). When switching to automatic mode the last
manipulated variable is transfered bumplessly, then only changes in the manipulated variable in
direction of the range YA to YE are executed.
In controller I the manipulated variable limiting is only possible in K-controllers and
three-position step controllers with external position feedback (S2=0 and S2=3).
Adaptive filter
The control difference xd is fed through an adaptive filter. By adjusting tFI or tFII (onPA) from
oFF to 1 s the filter is switched on. By further increases to tF* the filter can be adapted to a low-
frequency disturbance frequency (seconds to hours time constant). Within a band in which
changes repeatedly take place, changes are seen as disturbances by the filter and are filtered
with the preset time constant tF*; Changes in a direction leading out of the band are passed
unfiltered to the Pi(D) algorithm to enable fast control. If the disturbance level changes in time,
the filter is automatically adapted to the new level.
Figure 1-52 Effect of the adaptive non-linear filter
The factory setting of tFI and tFII is 1 s. In controllers with D-part it should be set as great as
possible because of the input noise amplified by vv ·Kp and in the adaptation (see chapter 4.4,
page 219).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Response threshold AH
The response threshold AH (dead zone element) is in the control difference connected after the
adaptive filter.
xd output
-AH
xd input
AH
Figure 1-53 Effect of the dead zone element
The dead zone element lends the controller a progressive behavior, at small control differences
the gain is low or even 0, at larger control differences the specified Kp is reached. It should be
taken into account that the remaining control difference can adopt the value of the set response
threshold AH. The factory setting of AH is 0 % and can be set up to 10 % in the parameteriza-
tion mode onPA.
In S-controllers the minimum necessary setting of AH is given by the minimum Δx=ks⋅Δy (see
chapter 4.3, page 218) and can be increased for further calming of the controlled system. In
K-controllers a small threshold value is advisable for calming the control circuit and reducing
wear.
Parameter switching
The single controllers, i.e. fixed setpoint controllers with two independent setpoints, fixed
set-point controllers with two dependent setpoints, DDC-fixed setpoint controllers, follow-up
controllers (synchronized controllers, SPC-controllers) and ratio controllers operate with the
parameter set I and can be switched via the control signal PAU = 1 to the parameter set II .
Both parameter sets are separately adjustable in the parameter mode onPA. Every parameter
set contains the parameters vv, cP, tn tv, AH, Yo, YA and YE with the ID I or II. The switching
facility is conceived for 2-batch mode and should be performed manually since it cannot be
bumpless in automatic operation.
Double controllers (cascade control, ratio cascade control and override control) operate with the
separately adjustable parameter sets I and II for the controllers I and II. There is no longer a
possibility of parameter switching by the control signal PAU.
Parameter control
With the structure switch S59 the parameter sets I or II can be replaced by a controlled param-
eter set except for YA and YE. In double controllers one of the two controllers can operate with
controlled parameters. In single controllers the controlled parameter set can be used for opera-
tion and additionally it can be switched to a fixed parameter set by the control signal PAU. The

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
parameters cP (Kp), tn, tv, AH and Yo are controlled by a straight line with 5 vertex points at 10
%, 30 %, 50 %, 70 % and 90 % of the controlling variable. The controlling variable is selected
by S60. All control-relevant, controller-internal variables are available.
S59 PAU active parameter set
0 0 Parameter set I
0 1 Parameter set II
1 0 controlled parameter set

1 1 Parameter set II
2 0 Parameter set I
2 1 controlled parameter set
Table 1-17 active parameter sets for single controllers

depending on S59 and control signal PAU
The parameters are set manually per vertex point (identified by the suffix 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 for 10 %,
30 %, 50 %, 70 %, 90 % of the controlling variable in structuring mode PAST. Beyond the mar-
ginal vertex points 10 and 90 % the set values remain constant. (Exception: Yo can be control-
led over the whole range 0 to 100 %.)
For parameters which do not need to be controlled, same values are set for all vertex points.
The derivative action gain vvc is not controllable but can be set in the range from 0.1 to 10.
When controlling tv a supplementary condition must be satisfied: tv.1 to tv.9 must either be
all = oFF (Pi or P controller) or all ≠ oFF (PID or PD controller). Otherwise the error message
tv/Err appears when jumping out of the structuring mode PAST with the Exit key (see chapter
3.3.3, page 175).
Yo is controllable in the range from 0 to 100 % and then acts like a ”fixed set” operating point.
Yo = Auto can also be set, in this case no parameter control takes place but the operating point
is set automatically in non--automatic operation (see operating point in P-controller).
Yo.1 to Yo.9 must either be set all = Auto or all ≠ Auto. Otherwise the error message Yo/Err
appears when jumping out of the structuring mode PASt with the Exit key (see chapter 3.3.3,
page 175).
Typical controlling variables are the control difference xd (it acts as 10jxdj) for progressive
controls and x or y for operating point dependent controls (non-linear controlled systems).
If S60 = 17 is set, a controling variable of 10% is simulated in Pi operation and a controlling
variable of 30% in P operation. In this way you can work with large Kp (cP.3) for example in P
operation (control signal P=1) to reach the operating point quickly. After switching to Pi
operation (control signal P=0) a reduced Kp (cP.1) is active for a stable control.
The parameter values and the value of the controlling variable can be gained by adaptation (see
section ”Adaptation” on the next page).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
cP=Kp
10 cP.9
6
cP.7
cP.5
2
cP.3
cP.1
-9 -7 -5 -3 -1 +1 +3 +5 +7 +9 % xd
10 30 50 70 90 % SG=10 jxdj
Figure 1-54 Example of a Kp control with 10jxdj as a controlling variable for progressive control
Adaptation (S58)
The adaptation procedure represents a reliable and easy to operate commissioning tool. The
adaptation procedure is far superior to manual optimization especially in slow controlled
systems and in PIC controller types. It is activated by the operator and can be aborted at any
time in the event of danger. The parameters determined by the adaptation can be changed and
accepted specifically by the user. Non-linear control lines can also be mastered in connection
with the parameter control.
In the parameterization mode AdAP which is only accessible at S58 ≠0, the following preset-
tings are made for the adaptation procedure:
tU Monitoring time
dPv Direction of step command
dY Amplitude of step command
With the structure switch S58 the choice of the control behavior (with or without overshoot) is
made.
The adaptation principle is divided into line identification and controller design.
-- Line identification
The controller is driven to the desired operating point manually. By pressing the Enter key
the set manual manipulated variable is changed by a step adjustable in the direction (dPv)
and amplitude (dY). The y-step is output at the end of 10 % of the set monitoring time (tU) if
there was a fixed state of the controlled variable during this time. Otherwise there is an error
message with abortion of the identification (see chapter 3.3.3, table 3--2, page 177).
The step response of the controlled system is then accepted with a max. 84 value pairs
(time and amplitude). The respective main controlled variable of the different control types is

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
filtered adaptively -- (see figures 1-25, page 50 to figure 1-43, page 82) to use for controlled
variable measurement. The measured values are read in with a scanning rate according to
the cycle time. The noise level is suppressed by the adaptive filter. The storage procedure
operates with cyclic data reduction and subsequent refilling so that slow controlled systems
can be entered.
After the start ID has been run through (the controlled variable x must have left the start ID
band within 50% of the set monitoring time tU), 95% of the full range must have been
reached at the latest at 2/3 of tU. The set monitoring time (tU) must be ≥ 2 T95 of the
controlled system with safety reserve. The remaining time is required for the full scale
identification. The full scale identification can also take place immediately after the start
identification, but 1/3 of the performed measurements are always required for the full scale
identification. Recording of the measured value pairs is ended on identifying the full scale.
A comparison with the recorded transient function is now made based on the stored Ptn
models with n = 1 to 8 and equal time constants T by variation of n and T. The determined
line gain ks is transfered to the line models. The comparison is made over the minimum er-
ror area F (n, T)
Additionally a special entry of real dead times is made which then shifts the identified control
line to higher orders.
Control lines with compensation and periodic transient of 1st to 8th order with a transient
time T95 of 5 s to 12 h can be identified. Dead time parts are permissible. In S-controllers
the transient time T95 should be twice the positioning time Ty.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
y
Δy
ymanual
tU
x F(n,T)=min
xM
x measuring
process
Model curve xM Δx = ks⋅Δy
-10 0 50 67 % 100 %
tU
Start ID Full scale
ID
ID fixed state
Start of adaptation
Figure 1-55 Time curve of an adaptation without error messages in which tU = 2×T95
Error checks are made during line identification in order to be able to prematurely abort the
identification. There are 13 control steps altogether which are displayed by flashing on the
digital x- and w- displays when errors occur. As soon as an error message appears, the line
identification is aborted and it must be restarted after correcting the presettings in the para-
meterization mode AdAP if necessary. Acknowledgement of the error messages,
see table 3-2 ”Error messages of the adaptation procedure”, page 177.
-- Controller design
The controller is designed according to the amount optimum method (S58=2). This setting
method is very robust and also allows variation of the line amplification. However, it gener-
ates an overshoot of approx. 5 % in the event of changes in the command variables. If this is
not wanted, you can also work with the controller design without overshoot (S58 = 1), Kp is
reduced here to 80 %.
The controller is designed for PI and PID behavior, therefore kp, tn and for PID tv are calcu-
lated, whereby the derivative action gain is fixed at 5. A prerequisite is that the D-element is
connected with xd or x (S55 = 0 or 1).
In S-controllers the response threshold AH is calculated in addition to kp, tn, tv. The parame-
ters tA, tE and tY must be set beforehand according to the actuating drives used (see chap-
ter 4.3, page 218). If the transient time T95 is near to 2 tY (floating time) overshooting may
also occur in controller designs with D-part at S58=1.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.6 Controller output structures (S2, S61 to S68)
In controlled systems of the 1st order a Pi or PID controller design cannot be implemented ac-
cording to the amount optimum, in systems of 2nd order a PID controller design cannot be imple-
mented because in these cases Kp goes to 1. A controller design is made in which the ratio
of system time constant to control circuit constant is 3 (S58 = 1) or 10 (S58 = 2).
After completion of adaptation the previously active old parameters (identified by .o) and the
newly determined parameters (identified by .n) can be read in the parameterization mode AdAP.
The new parameters for Pi-controllers and for PID-controllers are offered.
In addition the determined line order 1 to 8 is displayed as a suffix to the Pi or PID identification.
The selected parameters **.0, **.n Pi.* or **.n PID.* (** = parameter name, * = line order 1 to
8) can be changed and accepted optionally.
The operating technique of the adaptation procedure is described in chapter 3.3.3, page 175,
the commissioning explained in chapter 4.5, page 220.

Three different controller output structures are connected after the controller I depending on the
structrue switch S2:
S2=0 K-controller
S2=1 S-controller with internal feedback
S2=2 S-controller with external feedback
1.5.6.1 S2 = 0: Continuous (K) controller
(Fig. 1-56, page 100 and fig. 1-57, page 101)
For activating P-action usually pnemumatic final control elements or as a master controller in
cascades.
In the K-controller the automatic manipulated variable ya of the controller I can be processed
directly without further conversion. The manipulated variable y is followed by two split
range-outputs y1 and y2 for 2 actuator operation. The manipulated variable y is divided into two
individual manipulated variables adjustable by the parameters Y1 and Y2 (structuring mode oFPA).
Via S65 you can select the split range functions rising -- falling (y1 actuator heating -- y2 actuator
cooling) or rising -- rising (y1 actuator control range 1 -- y2 actuator control range 2).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Split range function rising -- falling (S65 = 0)

y1, y2
[%]
100 Y2 ≤ Y1
80 tanα = 100 %
60 100 % - Y1
40 y2 y1 100 %
tanβ =
Y2
20 Cooling Heating
β α
y [%]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Y2 Y1
y-display
Figure 1-56 Split range function rising -- falling
With the parameters Y1 and Y2, the point of intersection of the characteristics y1 and y2 is
set with the 0 % line. Y1 can be set as you like in relation to Y2. As a rule a gap of 6 to 10%
is left between cooling end and heating start to save energy. Depending on the design of the
cooling and heating aggregate, related to the control range of the controlled variable, the
different line gains can be compensated by different slope settings and good control results
achieved in both branches. As a rule the cooling aggregate is underdimensioned for cost
reasons so that the slope of Y2 needs to be greater than that of Y1.
The manipulated variable display at S67=1 is made for the outputs y1 and y2 by an ID I and
II. Therefore only two positions are available for displaying the respective manipulated vari-
able value so that values from 100 % are identified by h. In the center of the dead zone the
display changes from y1 to y2.
When the characteristics Y1 and Y2 overlap, the display changes at Y = 50 %.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Split range function rising -- rising (S65 = 1)
y1, y2
[%]
100 Y2 ≤ Y1
80
tanα = 100 %
60 Y1
40 y1 100 %
y2 tanβ =
20 100 % - Y2
α β
y [%]
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Y2 Y1
y-display
Figure 1-57 Split range function rising -- rising
With the parameter Y1 the point of intersection of the manipulated variable y1 is set with the
100 % line, with parameter Y2 the point of intersection of the manipulated variable y2 of the
0 % line is set. Y1 can be set as you like in relation to Y2. Depending on the design of the
actuators, related to the control range of the controlled variable, the different system gains
can be compensated by different slope settings and good control results achieved over the
whole control range.
The manipulated variable display at S67=1 is made for the outputs y1 and y2 by an ID I and
II. Therefore only 2 positions are available for displaying the respective manipulated variable
value so that values above 100 % are identified by h. The output y1 is displayed until the
output Y2 has reached a value ≥ 0 %.
-- Floating time tY
At S62 = 0 (absolute value preset of YN) the positioning speed of the automatic variable is
set with tY. In the oFF position, no limiting takes place, in positions 1 to 1000 s the minimum
floating time for 0 to 100 % manuipulated variable is preset. The P, I and D part as well as
the disturbance variable Z is limited in the rise speed. This positioning speed limiting is al-
ways used when the following final control element has floating times > 1 s to prevent inte-
gral saturations or when the process cannot stand the hard impacts of the P, D or Z-part. In
this case it must be taken into account that the control time is greater.
At S62 = 1 (incremental preset of YN) tY is used for the positioning speed setting of the inte-
grator. The floating time for 0 to 100 % change is preset. In the oFF position the integrator
output changes suddenly.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
102
Controller I y
tY Y1
YA
Figure 1-58
YE y1
ya
PID Y2
A 1 S64
yN
H 0 3/4 2
1
Y2 y2
N/DDC 0
yE S65
4/5 Si
S101 0 DDC
2/3
S62 0/1 1 S66

yS f(y1,y2)
yNΔ yES
0
1 yN
1 S67
Block diagram K-controller S2 = 0

yH
2
tY 1
000 y
0/1 yES oFF 0 S68
S101
2/3 4/5 ty
+
<>
yH
yHES
Follow-up (DDC) has priority over manual operation S61 = 0

SES
yN +yBL --yBL yR
--Δy +Δy
FE5 FE6
see chapter 1.5.3, see chapter 1.5.1 see chapter 1.5.3, pg. see chapter 1.5.1
Fig. 1-17, page 38 figure 1-5, page 24 Fig. 1-17, page 38 fig. 1-5, page 24
and chapter 1.5.2,
fig. 1-6, page 26
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
Manual
305735
Controller I tY y
Manual
YA
YE Y1
Figure 1-59
ya y1
PID
A Y2
yN
1
C79000-G7476-C154-02
N/DDC
SIPART DR22 6DR2210

0 S64
yE
4/5 3/4 1
H 2 Y2 y2
S101 0 S65
0/1 2/3 Si
0 DDC
S62
1 S66
0 yS f(y1,y2)
1
yNΔ yN yES yH
1 S67
Block diagram K-controller S2 = 0

tY yH
0/1 2
1
yES 000 y
S101 oFF 0 S68
2/3/
4/5 ty
+
<>
yH
yHES
Manual operation has priority over follow-up (DDC) S61 = 1

SES
--Δy +Δy yN +yBL --yBL yR

FE5 FE6
see chapter 1.5.3, see chapter 1.5.1 see chapter 1.5.3, see chapter 1.5.1
Fig. 1-17, page 38 figure 1-5, page 24 Fig. 1-17, page 38 fig. 1-5, page 24
and chapter 1.5.2,
fig. 1-6, page 26
103
305735
1.5.6.2 S2 = 1: Three-position step (S) -controller with internal feedback
To control I-acting motorized actuating drives.

In S-controllers with internal feedback the K-controller is followed by an internal position
controller. The positioning control circuit consists of a comparator with following three-position
switch with hysteresis and an integrator in the feedback. The I-function of the actuator is
simulated by the integrator with adjustable floating time tY (parameterization mode onPA) which
replaces the position feedback. To ensure the internal integrator and the K-controller output do
not drift apart or into saturation in time, both are set back rhythmically by the same amount
(synchronized). The y-output is only a relative manipulated variable (y’). It is therefore not
possible to perform a manipulated variable limiting of ya and an absolute value preset of yE and
ys. The safety manipulated variable ys is preset as a direction-dependent continuous contact.
At YS < 50 % (oFPA), --Δy switches, at YS ≥ 50 %, +Δy switches to continuous contact so that
the end positions represent the safety position. The position controller has an adjustable
minimum pulse length (tE) and pause (tA) with which the response threshold of the position
controller is set indirectly:
100 % ⋅ tE
-- Switching on Aee = 2 tY
100 % ⋅ tE
-- Switching off Aea = tY
100 % ⋅ tE
-- Hysteresis Aee -- Aea = tY
100 % ⋅ tA
-- Pause Aa = tY
-- tY set floating time (parameterization mode onPA)
After a pulse pause Aee must be set up at least as a deviation until an actuating pulse with
length tE is output. Aea can remain as a constant control error of the position control circuit.
Aa can be set up after an actuating pulse as a deviation until an actuating pulse is output in the
same or opposite direction. When time tA has expired, the position controller reacts accordingly
to the set tE.
Setting criteria of tA and tE, see chapter 4.3, page 218.
The position feedback yR via FE6 is only used to display the manipulated variable in S-control-
lers with internal feedback. If it is not connected, S67 is set to 0, the y-display (14) is then dark.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual
Figure 1-60
Controller I
internal position control circuit

ya
PID
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
A 1
0 S64
tY
2 YA
YE +Δy
H BA7
N/DDC &
y’ +
BA8 y
Si -- &
YS
--Δy
yN yH yNΔ tY
YS
+
Syn. μ
YS< 50 YS> 50 see chapter E
1.5.8,
< > Fig. 1-70,
0 100 page 122
yH 0
S67 2 FE6
0 100 0 100 y
<> <> 1 yR
Block diagram S-controller with internal feedback S2 = 1

000 see chapter 1.5.1
S68 0 1,oFF fig. 1-5, page 24

<> and chapter 1.5.2,
yH fig. 1-6, page 26
--Δy +Δy +yBL --yBL

see chapter 1.5.3, see chapter 1.5.3,
Fig. 1-17, page 38 Fig. 1-17, page 38
105
305735
106
Controller I
ya internal position control circuit
Figure 1-61
PID
A
tY
N/DDC 1 S64 YA
0
YE +Δy
BA7
H 2 &
y’ +
BA8 y
Si -- &
YS
--Δy
YS tY
yN yH
+
yNΔ
Syn. μ
YS< 50 YS> 50 see chapter E
1.5.8,
< > Fig. 1-70,

0 100 page 122
yH
0
S67 2 FE6
0 100 0 100 y
<<>> 1 yR
000 see chapter 1.5.1
S68 0 1,oFF fig. 1-5, page 24
<> and chapter 1.5.2,
Block diagram S-controller with internal feedback S2 = 1

yH fig. 1-6, page 26

+Δy --Δy +yBL --yBL
see chapter 1.5.3, see chapter 1.5.3,
Fig. 1-17, page 38 Fig. 1-17, page 38
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
Manual
305735
1.5.6.3 S2 = 2: Three-position step (S) -- controller with external feedback
To control I-acting motorized actuating drives.

In S-controllers with external feedback the ”internal position control circuit” is replaced by a real
position controller (with the K-controller output y as a setpoint and the position feedback yR via
FE6 as an actual value). As a result a manipulated variable limiting of ya and an absolute value
preset of yE and ys are now possible.
With the absolute value preset of yE it is also possible to preset the manual manipulated vari-
able via the SES as an absolute value yES in follow-up operation. If yE is preset via the fol-
low-up input yN (FE5), the freely connectable input range (S4=1) must be used because in the
permanently connected input range, FE5 is not available at S2=2 (see fig. 1--14).
Here too the response threshold of the position controller is preset with the parameters tE (mini-
mum turn-on duration) and tA (minimum turn-off duration) in connection with tY (floating time).
100 % ⋅ tE
-- Switching on Aee = 4 tY
100 % ⋅ tE
-- Switching off Aea = 3 tY
100 % ⋅ tE
-- Hysteresis Aee -- Aea = tY
100 % ⋅ tA
-- Pause Aa = tY
If a control deviation of xds ≥ Aee is set up, the three-position switch switches direction-depen-
dently to continuous contact. xds is reduced by the negative follow-up of the position control
circuit until xds <Aea is reached. The continuous contact is now switched off. After the pause
time tA pulse of length tE are output with subsequent pause time tA until xds ≤Aee is reached.
+Δy
-Aea-Aee xdS
Aea Aee
-Δy
These single pulses are also output if xds coming from zero does not reach Aee. These single
pulses which are not fully transformed into the path change (rotational movement) additionally
calm the control circuit, i.e. in theory (without lag) the single pulses would switch off at 0.25 or
0.5 Aee. The opposite direction can only occur at appropriate control deviation after the pause
time tA.
The control difference of the position control circuit xds can be measured at assigmment to an
analog output.
Manual adjustment via the front panel is made at S67=2 here too as an incremental adjustment
by overmodulating the three-position switch so that manual adjustment is possible even when
the position feedback is interrupted.
To simplify commissioning of the position control circuit, the manual manipulated variable is
preset absolutely at S67=0 (manipulated variable of the K-controller) so that the setpoint of the
position control circuit is changed continuously in this structure switch position to enable
optimization (see chapter 4.3). It should be taken into account here that the manual

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
manipulated variable which is also displayed is changed faster by the floating time than the
active manipulated variable on the actuator and a lag therefore takes place. The controlling
status can be monitored on the Δy-LEDs (15) in the y-display. After optimization, S67 should be
set to 2 to display the active manipulated variable via the position feedback yR (FE6).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Controller I see fig. 1-69, page 120
Manual
tY
YA
Figure 1-62
YE
external position control circuit
ya
PID
1
A 0 S64 y xds tY
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
3/4 YA
H 2 YE +Δy
BA7
&
y’ +
N/DDC yE BA8 y
4/5 Si
yN yH S101
-- &
2/3 --Δy
0/1
S62 yS
yNΔ yES
0 α
1 see
yN E
Fig. 1-70,
yH page122
tY
0/1 yES 0
S101 S67 FE6
2
2/3 4/5 ty
+
1 yR
<> 000
0 1,oFF see figure 1-5,
yH y S68
Page 24
Block diagram S-controller with external feedback S2 = 2

yHES

SES
--Δy +Δy yN +yBL --yBL

FE5
see fig. 1-17,
see see page 38
Figure Figure 1-5,
1-17, Page 24
Page 38
109
305735
see
110
Controller I tY
YA Fig. 1-69,
YE page 120
Figure 1-63
ya
PID external position control circuit
A
yN y xds tY
1
S64 YA
N/DDC 0
yE YE +Δy
3/4 BA7
4/5 H &
2 +
S101 y’ y
BA8
0/1 2/3 Si -- &
yS
S62 --Δy
0 yS
1
yNΔ yN yES yH α
E
tY yH
0/1
yES
S101 0
2/3/ S67 2 FE6
4/5 ty
+
<> 1 yR
000
yH 0 1,oFF see fig. 1-70,
y
S68 page122
Block diagram S-controller with external feedback S2 = 2

yHES

SES
--Δy +Δy yN +yBL --yBL

FE5
see see see figure 1-17,
Figure 1-17, Figure 1-5, Page38
Page 38 Page 24
C79000-G7476-C154-02
SIPART DR22 6DR2210
Manual
305735

Digital inputs Front Front Digital outputs
active y Explanation
1) H y-Ext.
yBL Si N He Hi H N
LED LED
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ya (n) Automatic mode
0 0 0 1 0 0.95) 0 1 0 yH (n), (↗) Manual mode
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 yH (n), (↗) Manual mode
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 yH (n), (↗) Manual mode
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 yE (n) 2) Follow-up operation
0 0 1 1 0 0.95) 1 1 1 yE (n) Follow-up operation
0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 yE (n) Follow-up operation
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 yE (n) Follow-up operation
1 0 1 yBL 3) Blocking mode
1 1 as above 1 as above yBL 3) Blocking mode
0 1 1 yS 4) Safety operation
Table 1-18 Output switching of all controller types except DDC fixed setpoint controller (S1 = 2)
Follow-up operation has priority over manual operation (S61 = 0)
Control signals Message signals active y Explanation

Digital inputs Front Front Digital outputs
H y-Ext.
yBL Si N 1) He Hi H N
LED LED
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ya (n) Automatic mode
0 0 0 1 0 0,95) 0 1 0 yH (n), (↗) Manual mode
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 yH (n), (↗) Manual mode
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 yH (n), (↗) Manual mode
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 yE (n) 2) Follow-up operation
0 0 1 1 0 0,95) 0.5 1 1 yH (n), (↗) Manual mode
0 0 1 0 1 1 0.56) 1 1 yH (n), (↗) Manual mode
0 0 1 1 1 1 0.5 1 1 yH (n), (↗) Manual mode
1 0 1 yBL 3) Blocking mode
1 1 as above 1 as above yBL 3) Blocking mode
0 1 1 yS 4) Safety operation
Table 1-19 Output switching of all controller types except DDC fixed setpoint controller (S1 = 2)
Manual operation has priority over follow-up operation (S61 = 1)
1) The table is shown for static N--switching (S48 = 0)

2) Source for yE is at S62=0 yN via FE5, at S62=1 yNΔ via Δy if S101<2, at S101=2 yES via the SES. The external
manipulated variable is followed up which is fed in via Δy (yNΔ) and via the SES (yES). When feeding in via FE5 (yN)
the feeding controller must be followed up.
3) The blocking mode acts direction-dependently, changes in the opposite direction are possible.
4) Function y in S-controllers with internal feedback (S2 = 1) open or close otherwise parameterizable safety manipulated
S
variable.
5) 0.9 flashing rhythm 0.1 off, 0.9 on
6) 0.5 flashing rhythm 1:1
n Followed up to the value active before switching, therefore bumpless switching
↗ adjustable

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Automatic mode (y=ya)

Automatic operation is switched on with the Automatic/Manual key (yellow manual LED(8)
off). All other control signals He, N (DDC), Si and yBl must be 0. The automatic manipu-
lated variable is connected through to the controller output.
-- Manual mode (y=yH)

Manual operation is switched on by the Automatic/Manual key (yellow manual LED(8) an) or
the control signal He as an OR function. The control signals Si and yBl must be 0.
If follow-up operation has priority over manual operation (S61=0), the control signal N (DDC)
must also be 0. The manual manipulated variable is through connected to the controller out-
put. The manual manipulated variable is preset in K-controllers as an absolute value, in S-
controllers as a positioning increment.
-- Follow-up(DDC) mode (y=yE)

The follow-up mode is switched on by the control signal N (in DDC mode by the control
signal CB and the Internal/External key 1.5.4, page 40). The control signals Si and yBl
must be 0. If manual mode has priority over follow-up mode (S61=1) the control signal
H=Hi v He must be 0.
The external manipulated variable yE is connected through to the controller output. The
source for yE is preset at S101 = 0 or 1 as an absolute value (yN) via the function input FE5
(S62=0) or as an external manipulated variable with incremental adjustment by the control
signals Δy (yNΔ) (S62 = 1). The incremental adjustment runs at the adjustment speed
100 %/tY. With S101 = 2 the absolute value becomes active as an external manipulated vari-
able via the SES (yES). In S--controllers with internal feedback (S2 = 1) absolute value pre-
sets of the manipulated variable are not possible, only the external manipulated variable with
incremental adjustment (yNΔ) is available.
-- Safety operation (y = ys)

The safety operation is switched on by the control signal Si. The control signal yBl must
be 0. The safety manipulated variable ys is through conencted which can be set as a
parameter in the structuring mode oFPA in the range from --10 to 110 %. In S--controllers
with internal feedback (S2 = 1) absolute value preset is not possible. When safety operation
is active the output at YS<50 % is -- Δy continuous contact and at YS ≥ 50 % +Δy
continuous contact so that the actuator moves to the end positions.
-- Direction dependent blocking operation

Blocking operation is controlled by the control signals yBl. All other control signals have no
function. If a control signal is applied the manipulated variable output is blocked direction-de-
pendently, i.e. only changes in the opposite direction are allowed. If both control signals are
applied simultaneously, the output is blocked absolutely. The direction-dependent blocking is
necessary especially in S-controllers with internal feedback and actuators with limit stop
switches to avoid integral saturation. If the control circuit is opened on reaching the end posi-
tion of the actuator, further integration of the controller must be prevented in order to be able
to react immediately in the event of control difference reversal.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
As described above, the control signals yBL have priority over Si and H or N. Priority of
H or N can be selected via S61. All these operating modes have priority over automatic
operation.
Signaling of the switching states is made by the LEDs Manual (8) and y-external (10). If
manual operation is active or preselected (if the prioritized operating modes are active), the
Manual LED lights up. He = 1 (via control signal) is signaled by a flashing rhythm of 9.9
when Hi = 0 (via Manual/Automatic switch i.e. is in automatic operation). When switching the
control signal He from 1→0 automatic operation becomes active.
Follow-up (DDC), safety and blocking operation is signaled by the y-External LED. Flashing
rhythm 0.5 indicates that in manual operation priority over follow-up operation, manual
operation is active but follow-up operation is prepared and after switching to automatic
operation also becomes active.
-- Blocking of the manual/automatic switching (S64)

With S64 Manual/Automatic switching can be blocked in the operating modes only automatic
or only manual (see figure 1-16, page 37). The other operating modes are still possible. The
follow-up operation only if follow-up has priority over manual operation.
-- Manual mode in event of transmitter fault S63

With S63 it is possible to switch to manual mode when the transmitter group fault message
occurs (see chapter 1.5.1, page 22). Manual operation starts at S63=1 with the last y or at
S63 = 2 with the parameterized YS. In both cases the manual manipulated variable can be
adjusted with the Δy keys after switching.
-- Source and direction of effect of the y-display S67, S68

With S67 the y-display is switched to the different display sources or switched off. The
absolute manipulated variable y or the split range manipulated variables y1 and y2 can be
displayed in K-controllers or the position feedback message/command signal yR via FE6 in
S-controllers. With S68 the display direction rising -- falling can be selected (see chapter
4.1).
-- Control system coupling via the serial interface

In addition to the DDC controller (S1 = 2) the SPC controller (S1 = 3) a complete parallel
process operation is possible in all controller types via the serial interface. The control
signals Int and Hi (via HeES at S64 = 3/4, see chapter 1.5.3, page 34) and the process
variables wi and yH can be written at S101≥2 via the serial interface so that switching from
internal to external setpoint and Automatic/Manual switching is possible in all controller
types. If the internal setpoint wi or the manual manipulated variable yH is active it can also
be changed by the SES or the adjusting keys on the front panel. Since the SES can only
adjust absolutely and not incrementally, it is advisable to use the setpoint ramp (tS) or the
dynamic manipulated variable with ty to avoid steps.
This parallel ”front operation” via the serial interface can be locked at S64 = 3 via RC =
Int∨CB (see chapter 1.5.3). This locking facility for the operation via SES on the controller
front is only useful in the controller types fixed setpoint controller with a setpoint (S1 = 10)
and follow-up controller without Internal/External switching (S1 = 11) because in all other
controller types both the Internal key and the control signal CB have other additional

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
functions. At S64 = 4 this locking facility is omitted and operation is always parallel to the
front keys.
To avoid simultaneous actuation by the controller front and the SES the last switching action
can be read both on the process control system and the controller. For this, a status bit is
set when writing IntES and HeES which is only reset when the front keys Int or Hi are
actuated. By requesting the status bit, the process control system can issue a warning when
the last operation took place via the front.
If the last operation took place via the SES the warning SES flashes for 3 s in the x/w
display when the Internal key or the Manual key is pressed. This initial pressing of the keys
does not activate a switching function, only when the keys are pressed again is the desired
switching function triggered.
-- Output structure controller II at S1 = 12

With S1 = 12 a second parallel independent control channel is released. Operation and
monitoring of both control circuits take place on two levels which are selected with the Shift
key and signaled by the displays I or II.
The functions of the output structure of the controller II correspond to those of the
controller I; only exception: incremental manipulated variable adjustment is not possible.
The effect of the respective duplicated structure switches and parameters can be seen in the
following block diagrams.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
y3
yII
y4
f(y3,y4)
000
y
S244
S241
0
1
y3
y4
y4
S243
OFF
1 0
2
FE10
yRII
NII
S242
only S1=12
0
1
--yBLII
+yBLII
SiII
ySII
2/3
yIIES
yEII
FE9
yNII
S240
S101
0/1
4/5
3/4 2
AII 1
NII
0
tyII
yIIHE
HII
SES
S101
S
0/1
YEII
2/3 4/5
YAII
tYII
Controller II
<>
yH
yHII
PID
yNII
Figure 1-64 Block diagram K-controller S231 = 0

Follow-up has priority over manual operation S238 = 0

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
y3
yII
y4
f(y3,y4)
000
y
S244
S241
0
1
0
1
y3
y4
y4
S243
OFF
1 0
NII
FE10
yRII
S242
only S1=12
0
1
--yBLII
+yBLII
yIIHE
ty
SES
S101
S
SiII
4/5
0/1
ySII
S240
2/3
<>
yH
1
0
2
3/4
H
yIIES
2/3
0/1
4/5
A
YEII
YAII
NII
S101
tYII
Controller II
FE9
yNII
PID
Figure 1-65 Block diagram K-controller S231 = 0

Manual operation has priority over follow-up S238 = 1

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
E
α
--Δy
+Δy
BA5
BA6
yRII
FE10
internal position control circuit
&
&
--yBLII
+yBLII
tYII
tAII
tEII
+
tY
--
+
Syn.
only S1 = 12
1,oFF
0
S243
y’
YSII> 50
1
0
0 100
SiII
< >
S244
YSII< 50
000
y
YSII
YSII
S240
2
1
0
0 100
<>
<>
yH
HII
AII
Controller II
PID
Figure 1-66 Block diagram S-controller with internal feedback S231 = 1

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
E
α
--Δy
+Δy
BA5
BA6
FE10
yRII
&
&
--yBLII
+yBLII
tYII
tAII
tEII
--
+
1,oFF
S243 0
y
only S1 = 12
yII
1
0
S244
000
y
tYII
yIIHES
S101
SES
0/1
SiII
YSII
2/3/
4/5
S240
YS
<>
yH
1
2
0
3/4
H
2/3
S101
yIIES
0/1
A
4/5
NII
FE9
yNII
YEII
YAII
Controller II
PID
Figure 1-67 Block diagram S231 = 2

Manual operation has priority over follow-up S238 = 0

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
E
α
--Δy
+Δy
BA5
BA6
FE10
yRII
&
&
--yBLII
+yBLII
tYII
tAII
tEII
--
2
+
1,oFF
0
y
S243
only S1 = 12
yII
1
0
S244
SiII
YSII
000
y
yES
2/3
S101
yIIES
yE
0/1
4/5
S240
yN
FE9
yNII
3/4 2 0
1
NII
tYII
H
yIIHES
ya
SES
S101
0/1
2/3 4/5
YEII
YAII
Controller II
yH
<>
yH
yH
PID
yN
Figure 1-68 Block diagram S-controller with external feedback S231 = 2

Follow-up has priority over manual operation S238 = 1

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.7 Analog output signal processing (S69 to S75, S247 to S257)
1.5.7 Analog output signal processing (S69 to S75, S247 to S257)

The analog outputs AA1 to AA3 (standard controller) are assigned to the controller-internal
variables by the structure switches S73 to S75. By using the modules 1AA (6DR2802-8A) or
3AA (6DR2802-8B) in the slots 5 (S22=4/6) and 6 (S23=4/6) the number of analog outputs can
be increased to 9.
Every output can be structured alternatively to 0 or 4 to 20 mA.
The bipolar process variables xdI, xdII du xds are output with an offset of 50 % and optionally
reversed direction.
Assignment 0 S69
S** with
1 = U
0% 0 S73 AA1
1/12
y 1
⊃
4 to 20 mA I
y1 2
0 S70 = U AA2
1/13
y2 3
1
⊃
AE1A 4 S74 I
AE2A 5 = U AA3
4 to 20 mA 1/14
AE3A 6
⊃
0 I
AE4A 7
1 S71
AE5A 8 S75
FE1 9
4 to 20 mA Slot 6 Slot 6
FE2 10 6DR2802-8A (S23=4)
6DR2802-8B (S23=6)
FE3 11
FE4 12 0 S72 = U AA4
6/4
= U AA4
6/5
1
⊃
FE5 13
⊃
S252 I I
FE6 14
50 %+xdI 15 4 to 20 mA
50%--xdI 16 0 S247 = U AA5
6/5
1
⊃
xI 17 S253 I
wI 18 = U
4 to 20 mA AA6
xv 19 6/6
⊃
wv 20 0 I
50 %+xdII 21 1 S248
S254
50%--xdII 22
Slot 5 Slot 5
xII 23 4 to 20 mA 6DR2802-8A (S22=4)
6DR2802-8B (S22=6)
wII 24
50%+xds 25 0 S249 = U AA7
5/4
= U AA7 5/5
1
⊃
50%--xds 26 S255 I I
yII 27
y3 28 4 to 20 mA
y4 29 0 S250 = U AA8
5/5
1
⊃
AE6A 30 S256 I
AE7A 31 = U
4 to 20 mA AA8
AE8A 32 5/6
⊃
AE9A 33 0 I
AEAA 34 1 S251
S257
AEbA 35
FE7 36 4 to 20 mA
FE8 37
FE9 38
FE10 9
FE11 40
FE12 41
Figure 1-69 Assignment analog outputs

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.8 Digital output signal processing (S76 to S93 and S258 to S266)
see figure 1-70
The message signals RB, RC to MUF, IntI, RBII to IntII, FE9 to FE12 are negated by the struc-
ture switches S86 to S96 optionally and assigned to the digital outputs BA1 to BA16 by the
structure switches S76 to S85 and S258 to S266.
The digital outputs BA1 to BA8 of the standard controller can be extended with the option mod-
ules 4BA 24 V+2BE (6DR2801-8E) or 2BA relay 35 V (6DR2801-8A) in the slots 5 and 6 to a
maximum 16 digital outputs. When using 4BA 24 V+2BE in slot 5 by BA9 to BA12, in slot 6 by
BA13 to BA16. When using 2BA relay 35 V in slot 5 by BA9 and BA10, in slot 6 by BA13 and
14.
When using option modules in the slots 5 and 6 the structure switches S22 and S23 are set
according to the assembly, other settings lead to error messages (see chapter 1.4.3, page 20).
The control signals Δy (positioning increments of the S-controller) are not assigned and not
negatable. When structuring S-controllers (S2 = 1 or 2) they are always at BA7 and BA8, i.e.
BA7 and BA8 can only be assigned freely in K-controllers (S2 = 0).
At S1=12 and S231=1 or 2 the positioning increments of the S--controller II are output accord-
ing to BA5 and BA6.
On assigning different control signals to the same digital output an OR function of the control
signals is produced.
Unassigned digital outputs (switch position 0) are low and can be set by SES at S101 = 2.
All digital outputs have wired-or-diodes.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Assignment S** NO assignment BAs = 02)

with
0 5V
--1 1 24 V I
S76 1
RB = Int 0 S86 2 BA1 1/4
or IntII
--1 3 BA2 1/5
1 S77 4
0 S87 BA3 1/6
RC = Int∧CB 5 BA4 1/7
--1 6
1 S78 7
0 S88 0 S231 BA5
H 1/2 1/8
+ΔyII
8 0 S231 BA6
1/2 1/9
--ΔyII
0 S2 BA7
1/2 1/10
+Δy
0 S2 BA8
1/2 1/11
--Δy
--1 1 S79 Slot 5
0 S89
N 5V
--1 1 S80 24 V I
0 S90
A1 BA9
9 5/2
--1 1 S81 BA10 5/3
0 S90 10
A2 BA11
11 5/4
--1 1 S82 BA12
12 5/5
0 S91
A3 4BA+2BE S22=11)
--1 1 Slot 6
S83
0 S91
A4 5V
--1 1 S84 24 V I
0 S92 BA13
MuF 6/2
13
--1 1 BA14 6/3
S85 14
0 S93
S91 BA15
IntI 15 6/4
--1 1 BA16
S258 16 6/5
0 S86
RBII 4BA+2BE S23=11)
--1 1 S259
0 S87
RCII
--1 1 S260
0 S88
HII
--1 1 S261
0 S89
NII
--1 1 S262
0 S93
IntII 1) When using 2BA-relays 35 V, 6DR2801-8A
S263 (S22=3 or S23=3) only BA9 and BA10 or BA13 and
FE9 >50 %
BA14 are available.
2) At S**=0 there is no assignment, the digital outputs
FE10 >50 % S264
are then 0 and can be set at S101 > 2 by the SES.
3) Assignment of different control signals to one
FE11 >50 % S265
digital output causes an OR function.
FE12 >50 % S266
Figure 1-70 Assignment of digital outputs

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Functional explanation of the digital message signals
RB No computer standby of the controller

This signal indicates that the controller is in internal operation, i.e. not in
computer standby. In cascade controllers (double controllers) this signal relates
to the master controller, in override controls to the main controller.
RC No computer operation
This signal indicates the negated computer operation RC = Int∧CB and
controls the setpoint switching or the DDC operation. In cascade controllers this
message relates to the master controller, in override controls to the main
controller.
H Manual mode
The controller is in manual mode, triggered either by manual/automatic
switching on the front of the controller (Hi) or by the binary signal He if the
control signals Si, yBL and N (with follow-up over manual operation priority)
are Low.
N Follow-up mode
The controller is in follow-up mode when the control signals Si, yBL and H
(in manual over follow-up operation priority) are Low.
A1/A2 Alarm 1 and 2 indicate response of the limit value alarms A1 and A2.
A3/A4 Alarm 3 and 4 indicates response of the limit value alarms A3 and A4.
MUF Transmitter fault
The analog input signals of the controller can be monitored for exceeding of the
range. This signal gives a group alarm if an error is detected.
IntI Internal operation of the slave controller
This signal indicates that the cascade in cascade controllers (double
controllers) is disconnected to Internal by Internal/External switching of the
follow-up controller.
Δy Position increments for the Δy-adjustment in S-controllers
Message signals RBII, RCII, HII, NII, IntII, ΔyII are only active at S1=12 and have the same
meanings for controller II as above.
FE9 to FE12 The analog signals are converted by comparators into digital signals (> 50 % ≙1)

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.9 Limit value alarms (S94 to S100, S267 to S268)

Every limit value alarm A1, A2, A3, A4 is assigned by the structure switches S94, S95, S267,
S268 to the controller-internal variables xdI, xI to FE12.
With S267 = --1 or S268 = --1 (factory setting), the limit value alarms A1, A2 or A3, A4 are
combined as pairs.
In this case the assignment only takes place with S94 or S95, only hysteresis’ H1.2 or H3.4 are
active.
With S96 (A1, A2) or S97 (A3, A4) the monitoring function Max/Min, Min/Min, Max/Max,
Min/Max can be set.
The response thresholds A1 to A4 and the hysteresis H1.2, H3.4, H2., H4. can always be set in
the structuring mode oFPA. According to the switch position of S98 only the display or the dis-
play and adjustment of A1 to A4 is possible in the process operation level.
In this case the switching cycle of the Shift key (12) is extended by the response thresholds A1
to A4, displayed on the y-display (14):
Controller I -- Controller II - A1 - A2 - A3 - A4 -- Controller I ...
The response thresholds are set depending on the assignment physically corresponding to the
display format of the digital x or w display (see chapter 1.5.4, page 40) or in %:
S94, S95
S1 S267, S268 assigned to Display format Parameter range
0 xdI according to maximum -110 % to +110 %

≠4 1 xI dAI bis dEI related to
≠6 2 wI -1999 to 19999 dEI - dAI = 100 %
0 xdI %
1 xI % -110 % to +110 %
4
and 2 wI % maximum -110 % to
3 xv according to +110 % related to
6 dAI bis dEI dEI - dAI = 100 %
4 wv -1999 to 19999
5 5 xdII according to maximum -110 % to
to 6 xII dAII bis dEII 110% related to dEII
12 7 wII -1999 to 19999 - dAII = 100 %
0 8 y
to # # % -110 % to +110 %
12 37 FE12
Table 1-20 Display format of the limit values A1 to A4
The hysteresis H1.2, H3.4, H2., H4. is set in % in the range from 0.1 to 20 %.
The function of the limit values (Min oder Max) always relates to the display, i.e. in the case of a
falling characteristic (dE*<dA*) the direction is reversed. The set Min function for example
becomes a Max function related to the field signal.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Assignment A1 Min. H1.2

S** + 1
with S96
--
3 A1
xdI 0 +
Max 0 0
xI 1 --
wI 2 2
S94
xv 3
wv 4
xdII 5
--1
xII 6 ≠--1
S267 S267
wII 7
y 8
y1 9 H1.2
A2 + Min. 0
y2 10 S96
AE1A 11 -- 1 A2
AE2A 12 +
2 0
AE3A 13 -- Max
3
AE4A 14 H2.
AE5A 15 at S267≠--1
FE1 16
FE2 17
FE3 18
FE4 19 A3 Min 1 H2.3
+
FE5 20 . S97
--
FE6 21 3 A3
+
xds 22 0 0
-- Max
yII 23 2
y3 24 S95
y4 25
AE6A 26
AE7A 27 --1
≠--1
AE8A 28 S268 S268
AE9A 29
AEAA 30
AEbA 31 A4 Min. H2.3
+ 0
S97
FE7 32 --
1 A4
FE8 33 +
FE9 34 2 0
-- Max
FE10 35 3
H4
FE11 36 at S268≠--1
FE12 37
|xdI| 38
|xdII| 39
Figure 1-71 Assignment and function of the limit value alarms

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.5.10 Restart conditions (S99, S100)
1.5.10 Restart conditions (S99, S100)

With S99 the restart conditions after mains recovery and manual reset are determined. In
position 0 the controller starts after mains recovery and after a watchdog reset with the
operating mode and with the y which was active before the power failure. This variation must be
used when temporary mains failures are to be expected in slow control circuits.
In position 1 start takes place after mains recovery in manual and Internal operation (in
cascades also with IntI) with ys in the K-controller and with the last y in the S-controller. If only
external operating mode or only automatic operation was selected by the structuring, the restart
takes place in these operating modes.
With S100 the optical signaling of mains voltage recovery and reset is determined by flashing of
the digital x-display. The flashing is acknowledged by pressing the Shift key (12) or by an alarm
request via SES.
1.5.11 Serial interface and PROFIBUS-DP (S101 to S107)

With S101 the depth of the SES interventions is preset. Generally all available set data can be
read. In position 0 no transmission and reception of data to the controller is possible. In position
1 only parameters and structures can be transmitted. In the other positions the process
variables wES (external setpoint via the SES) and yES (external manipulated variable via the
SES) and all control signals can be transmitted by the SES. In this position the other possible
sources for the external setpoint or the external manipulated variable are switched off.
The structure switches S102 to S107 determine the transmission procedure through the serial
interface. For further details, see the description ”Serial SIPART DR22 V.28 bus interface”, or-
der number C79000-B7476-C155.
Settings for PROFIBUS-DP: see table 3-8 ”Structure switch tables”, page 187.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
1.6.1 General data
1.6 Technical Data
1.6.1 General data
Installation position any
Climate class according to IEC721

Part 3-1 Storage 1k2 --25 to +75 _C
Part 3-2 Transport 2k2 --25 to +75 _C
Part 3-3 Operation 3k3 0 to +50 _C
Type of protection according to EN 60529

Front IP64
Housing IP30
Connections IP20
Controller design
D Electrical safety
-- acc. to DIN EN 61 010 part 1,
-- Protection class I acc. to IEC 536
-- Safe disconnection between mains connection and field signals
-- Air and creep lines, unless specified otherwise, for overvoltage class III and degree of
contamination 2
D EC declaration of conformity number 691.001
D CE mark conformity regarding:

-- EMC regulation 89/336/EWG and
-- LV regulation 73/23/EWG
D Spurious emission, interference immunity according to EN 61 326, NAMUR NE21 8/98
The following licenses and identification nos. are available for the SIPART DR22 controllers:
D Certificate of the ”DIN CERTCO, Berlin”,

license as a temperature control and limiting device for heat generators, certification of
conformity with DIN 3440:1984--07,
register number: TR 93502 S
D TÜV--certificate of the awarding of a component identification for water level controllers,

award according to the VdTÜV information brochure ”Water level 100” and ”Water
level100/1”,
component identification no. TÜV.WRS(WR).01--363K
Weight, max. assembled approx. 1.2 kg
Color
Front module frame RAL 7037
Front surface RAL 7035
Material
Housing, front frame Polycarbonate, glass-fiber-reinforced

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
1.6.1 General data
Front foil Polyester

Rear panels, modules Polybutylenterephthalate
Connection technique
Power supply
115/230 V AC 3-pin plug IEC320/V DIN 49457A
24 V UC Special 2-pin plug
Field signals plug-in terminals for 1.5 mm2 AWG 14
Dimensions and panel cut-outs see figure 1-72 and 1-73
238 130
278
max. 40
72
Relay module
6DR2804-8A/B
144
8
223
4351)
1) Installation depth required to change the mainboard
Figure 1-72 Dimensions SIPART DR22, dimensions in mm
72.5+1
Nr. of controllers Cut-out width b
2 140 +1
68+0,7 3 212 +1
b 4 284 +1
≥145 1) :
:
:
10 716 +1
138+1
1) Installation close one above the other is allowed when the permissible ambient temperature is observed.
Figure 1-73 Panel cut-outs, dimensions in mm

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
1.6.2 Standard Controller
Power supply
Rated voltage
g 230 V AC 115 V AC 24 V UC
switchable
Operating voltage range 187 to 276 V 93 to 138 V 20 to 28 V AC 20 to 35 V
AC AC DC1)
Frequency range 48 to 63 Hz -- -- --
External current IExt2) 450 mA.
Power consumption
Standard controller without options 8 W/17 VA 8 W/13 VA 8 W/11 VA 8W
without IExt
active power/apparent power
(capacitive)
Standard controller with options 13 W/25 VA 13 W/20 VA 13 W/18 VA 13 W
without IExt
(capacitive)
Standard controller with options with 26 W/45 VA 26 W/36 VA 28 W/35 VA 28 W
IExt
(capacitive)
Permissible voltage interruptions3)
Standard controller without options
without IExt ≤ 90 ms ≤ 70 ms ≤ 55 ms ≤ 30 ms
Standard controller with options
without IExt ≤ 80 ms ≤ 60 ms ≤ 50 ms ≤ 25 ms
Standard controller with options
with IExt ≤ 50 ms ≤ 35 ms ≤ 35 ms ≤ 20 ms
1) including harmonic
2) current transmitted from L+, BA, AA to external load
3) The load voltage of the AA is reduced hereby to 13 V, L+ to 15 V and the BA to 14 V
Table 1-21 Power supply standard controller

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
Analog inputs AE1 to AE3 and AE6 to AE11 (analog input module 3AE 6DR2800-8A)
Technical data under rated power supply conditions, +20 _C ambient temperature unless stated
otherwise.
-- Voltage
Rated signal range (0 to 100 % 0/199.6 to 998 mV or 0/2 to 10 V
shuntable
Modulation range ≤ -4 to 110 %
Input resistance
Difference > 200 kΩ
Common mode > 500 kΩ
Common mode voltage 0 to +10 V
Filter time constant 50 ms
Zero error 0.1 % + AD converter error
End value error 0.2 % + AD converter error
Linearization error see AD converter
Common mode error 0.07 %/V
Temperature influence
Zero point 0.05 %/10 K
Full scale 0.1 %/10 K
Static destruction limit  35 V
-- Current
Rated signal range 0/4 to 20 mA
Modulation range --1 to 21 mA
Input resistance
Difference (load) 49.9 Ω  0.1 %
Common mode > 500 kΩ
Common mode voltage 0 to +10 V
Filter time constant 50 ms
Zero error see AD converter
End value error see AD converter
Linearization error see AD converter
Common mode error 0.07 %/V
Zero point 0.05 %/10 K
Full scale 0.1 %/10 K
Analog outputs AA1 to AA3

Rated signal range (0 to 100 %) 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Modulation range 0 to 20.5 mA or 3.8 to 20.5 mA
Load voltage From --1 to 18 V
No-load voltage ≤ 26 V
Inductive load ≤ 0.1 H
Time constant 300 ms
Residual ripple 900 Hz ≤ 0.2 %
Resolution 11 bit

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
Load dependence ≤ 0,1 %

Zero error ≤ 0,3 %
End value error ≤ 0,3 %
Linearity ≤ 0.05 %
Zero point ≤ 0.1 %/10 K
Full scale ≤ 0.1 %/10 K
Static destruction limit --1 to 35 V
Measuring transducer feed L+

Rated voltage +20 to 26 V
Load current ≤ 100 mA, short--circuit--proof
Short-circuit current ≤ 20 mA clocking
Static destruction limit --1 to +35 V
Digital inputs BE1 to BE4

Signal status 0 ≤ 4.5 V or open
Signal status 1 ≥ 13 V
Input resistance ≥ 27 kΩ
Static destruction limit  35 V
Binary outputs BA1 to BA8 (with wired or diodes)

Signal status 0 ≤ 1.5 V
Signal status 1 +19 to 26 V
Load current ≤ 50 mA
Short-circuit current ≤ 80 mA, clocking
Cycle time adaptive 60 ms to 120 ms

(typical 80 ms)
A/D-conversion
Procedure Successive approximation per input
>120 conversions and averaging
of 20 or 16.67 ms
Modulation range --4 to 110%
Resolution 11 bit ≙ 0.06 %
Zero error ≤ 0.2 %
Full scale error ≤ 0.2 %
Linearization error ≤ 0.2 %
Zero point ≤ 0.05 %/10 K
Full scale ≤ 0.1 %/10 K
D/A conversion See technical data ”Analog inputs AA1 to

AA3”

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
Setpoint and manipulated variable adjust-

ment
Setting With two keys (more -- less)
Speed progressive
Resolution wi 1 digit
y 0.1 %
Parameters
Setting With 2 keys (more -- less)
Speed progressive
Resolution
Linear parameters, % 0.1 %
Linear parameters, physical 1 digit
Logarithmic parameters 128 values/octave
Accuracy
Time parameters 1 %
All others Resolution accordingly, absolute
Display technique
-- x and w display digital 41/2digit 7-segment-LED
Color x red
w green
Digit height 7 mm
Display range Adjustable start and end
Number range --1999 to 19999
Overflow <--1999: --oFL
>19999: oFL
Decimal point adjustable (fixed point) _.------ to --------
Refresh rate adjustable 0.080 to 8,000 s 1)
Resolution 1 digit but better than AD converter
Display error corresponding to AD converter and analog
inputs
-- x and w display analog
Color x red
w green
Display range
Overflow flashing first or last LED
Resolution 1.7 % by alternate glowing of 1 or 2 LEDs,
the center of the illuminated field serves as
a pointer
Refresh rate cyclic
-- y display (digital) 3-digit 7-segment LED
Color yellow
Digit height 7 mm
Display range 0 to 100 %

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
1.6.3 Technical data of the options modules
Overflow --10 to 110 %

Refrseh rate adjustable 0.080 to 8.000 s 1)
Resolution 1%
1) typical cycle time
6DR2800-8A 3AE I/U module Analog inputs AE6 to AE8 (slot 6), AE9 to AE11 (slot 5),
see chapter 1.6.2, page 129, AE1 to AE3
6DR2800-8J/R Analog inputs AE4 (slot 2), AE5 (slot 3)
Signal transformer for 1AE 1AE 1AE

Current Voltage Resistance
potentiometer
Order number: 6DR2800-8J 6DR2800-8J 6DR2800-8R
Range start 0 or 4 mA 1) 0 V or 2 V1) 0Ω
or 199.6 mV 1)
Min. span (100 %) ΔR ≥ 0.3 R 3)
Max. zero point suppression RA ≤ 0.2 R 3)
Range full scale 20 mA 10 V, 998 mV RA + 1.1 R 3)
Dynamic range --4 to 110 % --4 to 110 % --4 to 110 %
Input resistance
Difference 49.9 Ω 0.1 % 200 kΩ
Common mode 500 kΩ ≥ 200 kΩ
Permissible common mode voltage 0 to +10 V 0 to +10 V
Supply current 5 mA 5%
Line resistance
Two-wire circuit --
Three-wire circuit per < 10 Ω
Four-wire circuit --
Filter time constant 20 % 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms
Error 2)
Zero point ≤ 0.3 % ≤ 0.2 % ≤ 0.2 %
Gain ≤ 0.5 % ≤ 0.2 % ≤ 0.2 %
Linearity ≤ 0.05 % ≤ 0.05 % ≤ 0.2 %
Common mode ≤ 0.07 %/V ≤ 0.02 %/V --
Influence of temperature 2)
Zero point ≤ 0.05 %/10 K ≤ 0.02 %/10 K ≤ 0.1 %/10 K
Gain ≤ 0.1 %/10 K ≤ 0.1 %/10 K ≤ 0.03 %/10 K
Stat. destruction limit
between the input 40 mA 35 V 35 V
referenced to M 35 V 35 V 35 V
1) Measuring start by structuring
2) without errors of the A converter
3) with R = RA +ΔR + RE adjustable in three ranges: R = 200 Ω, R = 500 Ω, R = 1000 Ω
Table 1-22 Technical data for I/U module 6DR2800--8J/R

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
6DR2800-8V UNI module: Analog inputs AE4 (slot 2), AE5 (slot 3)
Analog input AE4, AE5 mV 1) TC 2) Pt100 R R

Slot 2, 3 °C R ≤ 600 Ω R ≤ 2.8 kΩ
Range start MA ≥-175 mV ≥-175 mV ≥-200 °C ≥0 Ω ≥0 Ω
Range full scale ME ≤+175 mV ≤+175 mV ≤+850 °C ≤600 Ω ≤2.8 kΩ
Span Δ = ME - MA parameterizable 0 to Δmax
Min. recommended span 5 mV 5 mV 10 K 30 Ω 70 Ω
Measuring transducer -2.5 % ≥ MUF ≥ 106.25 % 3)
fault message MUF
Input current ≤1 μA ≤1 μA -- -- --
Supply current -- -- 400 μA 400 μA 140 μA
Potential isolation
Test voltage 500 V AC
perm. common mode voltage ≤50 V UC ≤50 V UC -- -- --
Line resistance
2L RL1+RL4 ≤1 kΩ ≤300 Ω ≤50 Ω -- --
3L: (RL1) = RL2 = RL4 -- -- ≤50 Ω -- --
4L: RL1 to RL4 -- -- ≤100 Ω -- --
Open loop signaling without ≥500 to all Open loop between
550 Ω terminals terminal 2--3
Error
Transmission ±10 μV ±10 μV ±0.2 K ±60 mΩ ±200 mΩ
Linearity ±10 μV ±10 μV ±0.2 K ±60 mΩ ±200 mΩ
Resolution/noise ±5 μV ±2 μV ±0.1 K ±30 mΩ ±70 mΩ
Common mode ±1 μV/10 V ±1 μV/10 V
Internal reference junction -- ±0.5 K -- -- --
terminal
Temperature error
Transmission ±0.05 %/10 K 3)
Internal reference junction -- ±0.1 K/10 K
terminal
Statistical destruction limit ±35 V ±35 V -- -- --
Cycle time 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 200 ms 200 ms
Filter constant adaptive <1.5 s <2 s <2 s <1.5 s <1.5 s
1) 20 mA, 10 V with measuring for TC, internal connector 6DR2805-8J
2) types see CAE menu, internal reference junction terminal (pluggable terminal block) 6DR2805-8A
3) Referenced to parameterizable span Δ = ME -- MA
Table 1-23 Technical data for UNI module 6DR2800-8V

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
6DR2805--8J Measuring range plug 20 mA/10 V
-- 20 mA
Conversion to 100 mV ±0.3 %
Load between terminal 1 -- 2 50 Ω
1 -- 3 250 Ω
Stat. destruction limit ±40 mA
-- 10 V
Divider to 100 mV ±0.2 %
Input resistance 90 kΩ
Statistical destruction limit ±100 V
6DR2801-8D 2BO Relay Binary outputs BA9 and BA10 (slot 5) or BA13 and BA14
35 V+ (slot 6)
-- Contact material Ag/Ni
-- Contact load capacity

Switching voltage
AC ≤ 35 V
DC ≤ 35 V
Switching current
AC ≤5A
DC ≤5A
Rating
AC ≤ 150 VA
DC ≤100 W for 24 V
≤ 80 W for 35 V
-- Service life
mechanical 2x107 switching cycles
electrical
24 V/4 A ohmic 2x106 switching cycles
24 V/1 A inductive 2x105 switching cycles
-- Spark quenching element

Series circuit 1 μF/22 Ω parallel to it varistor 75 Vrms

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
6DR2801-8E 4BA 24 V + Digital outputs BA9 to BA12 and digital inputs BE5 and
2BE BE6 (slot 5) or
digital outputs BA13 to BA16 and digital inputs BE10 and
BE11 (slot 6)
-- Digital outputs
Signal status 0 ≤ 1.5 V or open, residual current ≤ 50 μA
Signal status 1 19 to 26 V
Load current ≤ 30 mA
Short-circuit current ≤ 50 mA, clocking
Static destruction limit --1 V to +35 V
-- Digital inputs
Signal status 0 ≤ 4.5 V or open
Signal status 1 ≥ 13 V
Input resistance ≥ 2.4 kΩ
Static destruction limit 35 V
6DR2801--8C 5BE 24 V Digital inputs BE5 to BE9 (slot 5),

BE10 to BE14 (Slot 6)
Signal status 0 ≤4.5 V or open

Signal status 1 ≥13 V
Input resistance ≥27 kΩ
Statistical destruction limit ±35 V
6DR2802-8A 1AA(yhold) Analog outputs AA4 (Slot 6), AA7 (Slot 5)
-- Analog output AA4/AA7

Rated signal range (0 to 100 %) 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Modulation range 0 to 20.5 mA or 3.8 to 20.5 mA
Load voltage
for supply
from controller --1 to 18 V
by UH > 22,5 V --1 to 15 V
by UH = 20 V --1 to 12.5 V
No-load voltage ≤ 26 V
Inductive load ≤ 0.1 H
Time constant 300 ms
Residual ripple 900 Hz ≤ 0.2 %
Resolution 0.1 %
Load dependence ≤ 0.1 %
Zero error ≤ 0.2%
Full scale error ≤ 0.1 %
Linearity ≤ 0.05 %

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
Zero point ≤ 0,1 %/10 k

Full scale ≤ 0,1 %/10 k
-- Digital output St
Signal status 0 ≤ 1.5 V
Signal status 1 +19 to 26 V
Load current ≤ 30 mA, short-circuit-proof
Short-circuit current ≤ 50 mA clocking
-- Auxiliary voltage UH
Voltage range +20 to +30 V (including harmonic)
Current consumption
for supply from controllers ≤ 6 mA
for supply by UH ≤ 70 mA
6DR2802--8B 3AA and 3BE Analog outputs AA7 bis AA9, digital inputs BE5 to BE7
(slot 5);
Analog outputs AA4 bis AA6 (slot 6),
digital inputs BE10 to BE12 (slot 5);
-- Analog outputs
Rated signal range (0 to 100 %) 0 to 20 mA or 4 mA to 20 mA
Modulation range 0 to 20.5 mA or 3.8 mA to 20.5 mA
Load voltage from --1 to 18 V
No-load voltage ≤26 V
Inductive load ≤0.1 H
Time constant 10 ms
Residual ripple 900 Hz ≤0.2 %
Resolution 10 bit
Load dependence ≤0.1 %
Zero error ≤0.3 %
Full scale error ≤0.3 %
Linearity ≤0.05 %
Zero point ≤0.1 %/10 K
Full scale ≤0.1 %/10 K
Static destruction limit --1 to 35 V
-- Digital inputs
Signal status 0 ≤4.5 V or open
Signal status 1 ≥13 V

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
Input resistance ≥27 kΩ

6DR2803-8P PROFIBUS-DP
Transferable signals RS 485, PROFIBUS-DP-protocol

Transferable data Operating state, process variables, para-
meters and
structure switches
Transmission procedure PROFIBUS-/DP- According to DIN 19245, Part 1 and Part 3
protocol (EN 50170)
Transmission speed 9.6 kbit/s to 1.5 Mbit/s
Station number 0 to 125
Time monitoring of the data traffic structurable on the controller in connection
with DP-watchdog
Electrical isolation between Rxd/Txd-P/-N and
the controller 50 V UC common mode voltage
Repeater control signal CNTR--P TTL-level with 1 TTL load
Supply voltage VP (5 V) 5 V -0.4 V/+0.2 V; short-circuit proof
Line lengths; per segment at 1.5 Mbit/s 200 m; see ET200-Manual
6ES5 998-3ES12 for further details
6DR2803-8C Serial interface
Transferable signals RS 232, RS 485 or SIPART BUS*) shunta-

ble
*) SIPART bus operation no longer possible. The bus
driver is no longer offered.
Transferable data Operating state, process variables,
parameters and strucrture switches
Transmission procedure According to DIN 66258 A or B
Character format 10 bits (start bit, ASCII characters with
7 bits, parity bit and stop bit)
Hamming distance h 2 or 4
Transmission speed 300 to 9600 bit/s
Transmission Asynchronous, semiduplex
Addressable stations 32
Time monitoring of the data traffic 1 s to 25 s or without
Electrical isolation between Rxd/Txd
and the controller
max. common mode voltage 50 V UC

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
RS 232 RS 485
Receiver input Rxd Rxd
Signal level 0 0 to +12 V 2) UA > UB, +0,2 to +12 V
Signal level 1 1) -3 to -12 V 2) UA < UB, -0.2 to -12 V
Input resistance 13 kΩ 12 Ω
100 kΩ ab Erzeugnisstand 8
Send output Txd
Signal level 0 +5 to +10 V UA > UB, +1.5 to +6 V
Signal level 1 1) -5 to -10 V UA < UB, -1.5 to -6 V
Load resistance ≤1.67 mA 54 Ω
1) Signal status 1 is the rest state
2) Input protected with 14 V Z-diode, greater voltages possible with current limiting to 50 mA.
Line capacitance or lengths

at 9600 bits/s
Reference values line lengths
Power capacitance Ribbon cable Round cable
without shield with shield
RS 232 point-to-point ≤2.5 nF 50 m 10 m
RS 485 bus ≤250 nF 1000 m 1000 m
6DR2804-8A/B Coupling relay 230 V
1 relay module 6DR2804-8B

2 relay module 6DR2804-8A
per relay module 2 relays with 1 switching contact each with
spark quenching element
-- Contact material silver-cadmium oxide

Switching voltage
AC ≤250 V
DC ≤250 V
switching current
AC ≤8 A
DC ≤8 A
Rating
AC ≤1250 VA
DC ≤30 W at 250 V
≤100 W at 24 V
-- Service life silver-cadmium oxide

mechanical 2×107 switching cycles
electrical AC 230 V, ohmic 2×106/I(A)switching cycles

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
-- Spark quenching element Series circuit 33 nF/220 Ω parallel

plus varistor 420 Vrms
-- Exciter winding
Voltage +19 to +30 V
Resistance 1.2 kΩ 180 Ω
-- Electrical isolation between

Exciter winding -- contacts Safe isolation by reinforced isolation, air
Relay module -- relay module and creep lines for overvoltage class III
and (6DR2804-8A) degree of contamina-
tion 2
(DIN EN 61010 Teil 1)
contact -- contact Safe isolation by reinforced insulation, air

of a relay module and creep lines for overvoltage
class II and degree of contamination 2
(DIN EN 61010 Teil 1)
-- Type of protection
Casing IP50 according to DIN 40050
Connections (in plugged state) IP20 according to DIN 40050
-- Casing material Polyamide 66
-- Mounting rail assembly on NS 35/7.5 DIN EN 50022

NS 35/15 DIN EN 50035
NS 32 DIN EN 50035
-- Dimensioned diagram see figure 1-74

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data
NS 35/15
139
NS 32
136
NS 35/7.5
131.5
9
8
7 Center of the
6 mounting rail
5
66 4
39
3
2
1
18 12 36
100
130
Figure 1-74 Dimensioned diagram coupling relay, dimensions in mm

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1.6 Technical Data

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 2 Installation
2.1 Mechanical Installation
2 Installation
2.1 Mechanical Installation
D Selecting the Installation Site

Maintain an ambient temperature of 0 to 50 _C. Don’t forget to allow for other heat sources
in the vicinity. Remember that if instruments are stacked on top of each other with little or no
gap between them, additional heat will be generated. Front and rear sides of the controller
must be easily accessible.
D Panel mounting
The SIPART DR22 is installed either in individual panel cutouts or in open tiers (for dimen-
sioned diagram, see chapter 1.6.1, page 128 fig. 1-72, and fig. 1-73).
-- The upper edge of the panel cut-out must be left unpainted to ensure good interference
suppression of the controller even at high frequencies. A good HF ground connection is
established by the contact spring protruding from the top of the SIPART DR22.
-- If necessary: Push self-adhesive sealing ring for sealing front frame/front panel over the
tube and stick to the tube collar (see chapter 5.2, page 231, item 2.6).
-- Insert SIPART DR22 into the panel cut-out or open tier from the front and fit the two
clamps provided to the controller unit from the rear so that they snap into the cut-outs in
the casing.
-- Align SIPART DR22 and do not tighten the locking screws too tight. The tightening range
is 0 to 40 mm.
2.2 Electrical Connection
The arrangement of the connecting elements can be seen in fig. 2-1, page 145.
! WARNING
The ”Regulations for the installation of power systems with rated
voltages under 1000 V” (VDE 0100) must be observed in the electrical
installation!
D PE conductor connection
Connect the PE conductor to the ground screw (see figure 2-1) on the back of the controller.
When connecting to 115 or 230 V AC mains supply, the PE conductor can also be con-
nected through the three-pin plug (see figure 2-1). The controller’s ground connection may
also be connected with the PE conductor (grounded extra low voltages).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
2 Installation Manual
! WARNING
Disconnection of the PE conductor while the controller is powered up
can make the controller potentially dangerous. Disconnection of the PE
conductor is prohibited.
D Power Supply Connection

The power supply is connected on 115 V or 230 V AC systems by a three--pin plug IEC
320/V DIN 49457 A , on 24 V UC systems by a special 2--pin plug (polarity irrelevant). The
plugs are supplied with the unit.
! WARNING
Set the mains voltage selection switch (see figure 2-1) in the no--voltage
state to the existing mains voltage.
It is essential to observe the mains voltage specified on the rating plate
or on the mains voltage switch (115/230 V AC) or on the voltage plate
(24 V DC)!
Feed the power cables via a circuit breaker within easy reach (fire safety
according to IEC 66E (sec) 22/DIN VDE 0411 Part 100). When
connected to an unprotected power supply, the controller must be
supplied via a circuit breaker. The circuit breaker is not required if one
already exists (≤ 30 Vrms or ≤ 42,4 V DC and current ≤ 8 A or source
under all load conditions ≤ 150 VA or fuse element which responds at
≤ 150VA).
The circuit breaker can be omitted if the 24 V UC power supply is
protected by ≤ 4 A (35 V DC) (T 3,15 A is required at least).
D Connection of measuring and signal lines
The process signals are connected via plug-in terminal blocks that can accommodate cables
of up to 1.5 mm2 (AWG 14) cross-section.
Standard controller Slot 1 14- and 10-pin
Option modules Slots 2 and 3 4-pin
Slot 5 and 6 5- and 6-pin
Interface relays ”Slots” 7 and 8 3- and 6-pin
The slots 1 to 8 must be marked in the circuit diagrams and at the terminal blocks.
Signal lines should be laid separately from power cables to avoid the risk of interference
couplings. If this is not possible, or -- due to the type of installation -- the controller may not
function properly as a result of interference on the signal lines, the signal lines must be
shielded. The shield must be connected to the PE conductor of the controller or one of the
ground connections, depending on the fault source’s reference junction terminal. The shield
should only ever be connected to one side of the controller when it is connected to the PE
conductor to prevent creation of a ground loop.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
The SIPART DR22 is designed with a high electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and has a
high resistance to HF interference. In order to maintain this high operational reliability we
recommend that all inductances (e.g. relays, contactors, motors) installed in the vicinity of or
connected to the controllers should be assembled with suitable suppressors (e.g. RC com-
binations)!
7 1 Slot 1
Main board
AE1 to AE3 (I/U)
12 AA1 bis AA3
BE1 to BE4
BA1 to BA8 24 V
11 L+, M
2 Slot 2
AE4 (I/U, R, P, T, V)
6
10 3 Slot 3
AE5 (I/U, R, P, T,V)
4 Slot 4
Serial interface
9 5 Slot 5
4BA 24 V+2BE BA9 to BA12, BE5 to BE6
2BA relay BA9, BA 10
5BE BE5 to BE9
1AA AA7
8 5 3AE AE9 to AE11
3AA+3BA AA7 to AA9, BE5 to BE7
6 Slot 6
4BA 24 V+2BE BA13 to BA16, BE10 to BE11
2BA relay BA13, BA14
5BE BE10 to BE14
1AA(y-hold) AA4
3AE AE6 to AE8
3AA+3BE AA4 to AA6, BE10 to BE12
7 PE conductor contact spring
8 Grounding screw
9 Mounting rail
(contained in scope of delivery of relay module
4 3 2 1
6DR2804--8A/B)
10 Mains voltage selection switch
11 Mains plug
12 Power supply unit
Figure 2-1 Rear panel

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
D Connection of the serial interface

For V.28 point-to-point connections of the SES, a 9-pin socket strip for round cables is avail-
able.
SIPART DR 19/21/22/24
remote system
V. 28
point-to-point
≤ 10 m
-D39
serial
9 pol.
interface 74
6DR2803-8C
Figure 2-2 Plug for serial interface
9-pin socket strip for round cables (screw terminal) C73451-A347-D39
Recommended cable:
4-core unshielded round cable JE-LiYY 4x1x0.5 BdSi
D Zero volt system
The SIPART DR22 controllers only have a 0V conductor (ground, GND) on the process side
which is output double at terminals 1/1 and 1/2 of the standard controller. If these GND con-
nections are not sufficient, additional proprietary terminals can be snapped onto the DIN rail
on the power pack. The controller uses a common reference for both inputs and outputs, all
process signals are referred to this point.
The reference line is also connected to vacant terminal modules. These may only be used if
practically no current flows through this connection (see e.g. fig. 2-13, page 151, I 4L).
The power supply connection is electrically isolated from the process signals. In systems
with unmeshed control circuits, the SIPART DR22s need not be interconnected. In meshed
control circuits the GND connections of all controllers must be fed singly to a common ter-
mination or the continuous GND rail with a large cross-section. This common termination
may be connected with the system’s PE conductor at one point.
Since in analog signal exchange between the devices, only currents 0/4 to 20 mA are used
and these are evaluated as a four-pole measurement (differential amplifiers with electronic
potential isolation), voltage drops on the M-conductor are not interpreted as errors (see fig.
2-26, page 159 to fig. 2-32).
The signal-to-noise ratio on digital signals is so great that voltage dips on the GND rail can
be ignored.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
2.2.1 Connection standard controller
D Power supply connection

Attention:
Set mains voltage selection switch (see fig. 2-1) in no-voltage state according to the
available mains voltage!
-- 6DR2210-5 115/230 V AC, switchable

Three-pin plug IEC 320 IV
DIN 49457A
230 115
1A slow blow per controller + 24 V

L
~ + 5V
N
UREF
PE
=
L N PE
DR 22
other loads on the same 6DR2210-5
115 or 230 V AC signal loop; use larger
fuse if necessary
Alternative
Figure 2-3 Connection 115/230 V AC power supply
-- 6DR2210-4 24V UC
Special 2-pin plug
any polarity
3.15 A slow blow per controller

+ 24 V
+ 5V
UREF
=
24 V UC
other loads on the same DR 22
signal loop; use larger 6DR2210-4
fuse if necessary
Figure 2-4 Connection 24 V DC power supply

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
D AE1 to AE3
-- Wiring
U I
+UH 4L 2L
UH
AE1 AE2 AE3
+ + +
AE+ AE+ L+ L+ 1/3
U I
AE-- I AE- AE+ AE+ 1/24
- - 1/20 1/22
-
AE- AE-
1/19 1/21 1/23
M M
M M 1/1
≤500 Ω1)
Other connection possibilities, Set AE 1 to AE 3 to 0 or 4 mA in hdEF

see chapter 2.2.3, page 158
1) potential load impedance from additional instruments
Figure 2-5 Connections AE1 to AE3 U or I
-- Jumper settings
1V 10V I 1V 10V I 1V 10V I
AE3 AE2 AE1

factory setting I (0 to 20 mA)
Main board
C73451-A3001-L32
Figure 2-6 Jumper settings AE1 to AE3

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
D BE1 to BE4 D BA1 to BA8
1/4 BAS1
2
1/5
3
L+
1/3 1/6 4
≥ 19 V
1/7 5
BE1 1/15 ≤ 50 mA
6
BE2 1/16 1/8 7
>13 V or
1/9 8
BE3 1/17
<4.5 V
BE4 1/18 1/10
1/1 1/11
1/1 M
Figure 2-7 BE1 to BE4 connection diagram Figure 2-8 BA1 to BA8 connection
diagram
If S-controllers are CSi* structured, the Δy-outputs of the S-controllers are permanently
assigned to the digital outputs BA*.
Arithmetic block +Δy / terminal --Δy/terminal
S1=12 and S231>0 BA5 / 1/8 BA6 / 1/9
S2>0 BA7 / 1/10 BA8 / 1/11
D AA1 to AA3 D L+ (auxiliary voltage output)
1/12 AA1
1/13 0/4 ... 20 mA
AA2 L+
1/14 ≤ 900 Ω 1/3
AA3
1/2 M
≥ 20 V
M 1/1 ≤ 100 mA
1/1 M
Set AA 1 to AA 3 to 0 or 4 mA in hdEF
Figure 2-9 AA1 to AA3 connection Figure 2-10 L+ connection diagram

diagram

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
2.2.2 Wiring of option modules
D 6DR2800-8A 3AE, U or I-input

Slot 5: AE9 to AE11 in StrS set S22 = 5
Slot 6: AE6 to AE8 in StrS set S23 = 5
-- Wiring
24 V
+ L+
« 1/3 1/3
1V 10 V
I 2L
I 6/6 5/6
«
- AE8+ AE11+ +
49.9 Ω
6/5 5/5 I
∩
«
AE8-- AE11-- -
UH 1V 10 V
+ 6/4 5/4
«
AE7+ AE10+
I 4L +
49.9 Ω
I -
6/3 5/3 I
«
AE7-- AE10--
-
+UH
10 V
1V
U + 6/2 5/2
« #
AE6+ AE9+
U +
49.9 Ω
- 6/1 5/1
« AE6-- AE9-- -
6DR2800-8A
M « 1/1 1/1
Figure 2-11 Connection of 3AE module 6DR2800-8A
-- Jumper settings
1 V/10 V I 1 V/10 V I 1 V/10 V I
AE8/AE1 AE7/AE1 AE6/AE9

0
factory setting I (0 to 20 mA)
6DR2800-8A
Figure 2-12 AE6 to AE8 or AE9 to AE11 jumper settings

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
D 6DR2800-8J 1AE, U or I-input Ranges:

AE4 in slot 2 in StrS S8 set 0 to 3 0 to 1 V/10 V/20 mA or
AE5 in slot 3 in StrS S9 set 0 to 3 0.2 V/2 V/4 mA to
1 V/10 V/20 mA, plus 1 V/10 V
using jumpers on board
U I 4L
+UH *=2 or *=3
UH
+ +
*/4
U */4
I
-- */3
*/2 */2
*/1
M M
1/1 1/1
0/2 ... 10 V 0/0.2 ... 1 V 0/4 ... 20 mA

x5=x6/10 V x4=x5/1 V x4=x5/1 V
factory setting 1 V, x4=x5 (and x7=x8)
I 2L
L+ 1 V/10 V
+ 1/3 x4 x5 x6
I +
-- */4
49.9 Ω
*/3 -
*/2
M M
*/1
0 ... 500 Ω 1) 1/1
6DR2800-8J
1) potential load impedance from additional instruments
Further connection possibilities see chapter 2.2.3, page 158
Figure 2-13 Connection U/I-module 6DR2800-8J

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
D 6DR2800-8R 1AE, resistance input

AE4 in slot 2; in StrS S8 set 0 or 1
AE5 in slot 3; in StrS S9 set 0 or 1
-- Connection
I R 6DR2800-8R
UREF
*=2 or *=3 for potentiometer with
Is% 5 mA or Is=5 mA
R > 1 kΩ +24 V
*/4 */4 */4 +
UH
RE - R 5 mA -
*/3 ΔR */3 Is
IK 49.9 243 332
+
RA -
-- RE - 0
I */2 RP ΔR */2
M RA - R S1
*/1 */1
20mA 1kΩ500Ω200Ω
S1 = 20 mA S1=200 Ω
R S1
≤ 200 Ω 200 Ω
R P = R · 200 Ω ≤ 500 Ω 500 Ω
factory setting S1 = 200 Ω
R – 200 Ω
≤ 1 kΩ 1 kΩ
Figure 2-14 Connection of R module 6DR2800-8R
-- Calibration
1. Set sliding switch S1 according to the measuring range.
2. Set RA using 0 Set display or analog output (depending on the configuration) to
start-of-scale value or 4 mA.
3. Set RE using display or analog output to full-scale value or 20 mA.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
D 6DR2800-8V universal module for analog input

The universal module can be plugged into slot 2 (analog input AE4) and slot 3 (analog input
AE5). The measuring ranges are set using the menu CAE4/CAE5.
-- Pin assignment for mV transmitter

Direct input Umax = ±175 mV
mV im
+REF
U
4
RL4 3
+ + A
2
1 -- D
-- RL1
Sensor
RL1+RL4≤1 kΩ
6DR2800-8V
Block diagram of mV module 6DR2800-8V
Figure 2-15 Connection of UNI module
-- Pin assignment measuring range for TC, internal connector 6DR2805-8J for U or I
10 V 20 mA 20 mA SMART
4L 2L im
L+ +REF
U
10 V
+ 4 4
89k1
UH + -- A
3 3 +
+ + SMART 200R
8k95
-- 20 mA 2 2 -- D
L 50R 1k
-- -- 1 1
perm. common mode
voltage -- Sensor
50 V UC
M
Measuring range for TC, internal
connector 6DR2805-8J 6DR2800-8V

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Pin assignment for thermocouple TC
External reference Internal reference

im
junction terminal junction terminal +REF
U
+ + 4
RL4 RL4
T
3 + A
Tb
2 -- D
RL1 RL1
-- -- 1
RL1 + RL4≤300 Ω
Sensor
Internal reference
junction terminal
6DR2805-8A
6DR2800-8V
Figure 2-17 Connection of thermocouple TC
-- Pin assignment for Pt100 sensor RTD
im
4-wire 3-wire 2-wire +REF
U
RL4 RL4 RL4
4
3 A
RL3 +
Pt100 Pt100 Pt100 2
RL2 RL2 D
1 --
RL1 RL1 RL1

Sensor
RL per ≤100 Ω RL1 = RL2 = RL4 ≤50 Ω RL1 + RL4 ≤50 Ω
6DR2800-8V
Figure 2-18 Wiring of PT100 sensor RTD

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- Pin assignment for resistance potentiometer (R)
3-wire connection 2-wire connection im

U +REF
RL4 RL4
4 4
Rp 3 3 A
1) +
Rs 2 Rp 2
RL2 D
1 1 --
RL1 RL1
Sensor
RL4≤50 Ω RL1 + RL4≤50 Ω
RS⋅Rp 2.8 k,Rp > 5 KΩ not recommended 6DR2800-8V

RS + Rp
Block diagram of UNI module 6DR2800-8V
1) Rs jumper impedance only necessary if 2.8 kΩ < R ≤ 5 kΩ
D 6DR2801-8D 2BA relay 35 V
BA9 and BA10 in slot 5 in StrS set S22 = 3

BA13 and BA14 in slot 6 in StrS set S23 = 3
5/5 6/5
K1 BA10 BA14
1μ
5/4 6/4
K1
22R
5/6 6/6
5/3 6/3
K2
1μ BA9 BA13
5/2 6/2
K2
22R
6DR2801--8D 5/1 6/1
AC ≤ 35 V DC ≤ 35 V
≤ 5 A ≤ 5 A
≤ 150 VA ≤ 80 W at 35 V
100 W at 24 V
Figure 2-20 Connection of 2BA (relay) module 6DR2801-8D

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
D 6DR2801-8E 4BA 24 V + 2BE

BA9 to BA12 and BE5 to BE6 in slot 5, in StrS set S22 = 1
BA13 to BA16 and BE10 to BE11 in slot 6, in StrS set S23 = 1
5V
24V I
5/5 BA12 6/5 BA16

5/4 BA11 6/4 BA15
≥19 V
5/3 BA10 6/3 BA14
≤30 mA
5/2 BA9 6/2 BA13
5V 5/6 BE6 6/6 BE11
24V 5/1 BE5 6/1 BE10
6DR2801-8E
Figure 2-21 Connection of 4BA (24 V) module 6DR2801-8E
D 6DR2801-8C 5BE
BE5 to BE9 in slot 5, in StrS set S22 = 1

BE10 to BE14 in slot 6, in StrS set S23 = 1
L+
1/3 24V
5V
5/5 BE9 6/5 BE14
5/4 BE8 6/4 BE13
>13 V
or 5/3 BE7 6/3 BE12
<4.5 V 5/2 BE6 6/2 BE11
5/1 BE5 6/1 BE10
M
1/1
Figure 2-22 Wiring of 5BE module 6DR2801-8C

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
D 6DR2802-8A (1AA, yhold)

AA7 in slot 5 in StrS set S22 = 4
AA4 in slot 6 in StrS set S23 = 4
AA7AA4
U AA4 (y) 0/4 ... 20 mA
I 5/5 6/5 ≤ 625 Ω 2)
Rxd
5/4 6/4
M
5/3 6/3 --
Txd
= UH 20 ... 30 V, ≤ 70 mA
5/2 6/2 +
= UH
L24
≥ 19 V
5V
5/1 6/1 ≤ 30 mA
24 V I St
1) UH need only be connected if the output current is to be maintained even in the event of a power failure
in the controller or when removing the module for service work.
2) depending on the supply up to 900 Ω possible (see chapter 1.6.3, page 133).
Figure 2-23 Connection of yhold module 6DR2802-8A
D 6DR2802-8B 3AA + 3BE
AA7 to AA9 and BE5 to BE7 in StrS set S22 = 6

AA4 to AA6 and BE10 to BE12 in StrS set S23 = 6
U
I 5/6 AA9 6/6 AA6
Rxd
U
5/5 AA8 6/5 AA5
Txd I
U
5/5 AA7 6/5 AA4
I
5V
24V I
5/3 BE7 6/3 BE12
5/2 BE6 6/2 BE11
5/1 BE5 6/1 BE10
Figure 2-24 Connection 3AA/3BE module 6DR2802--8B

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
2.2.3 Alternative connection for I- and U-input
D 6DR2804-8A (interface relay 230 V, 4 relays)

6DR2804-8B (interface relay 230 V, 2 relays)
E.g. connection for Δy outputs in the S controller with interface relay 230 V, 2 relays
(6DR2804-8B)
1/10
BA7 7/1 7/6
+Δy
7/4
33n 420 V
1/11
220 Ω
7/5
M
BA8 7/2 7/9
--Δy
7/7
33n 420 V
1/1 220 Ω
M 7/3 7/8
N L
Figure 2-25 Connection of interface relay 230 V 6DR2804-8B
The interface relay 230 V, 4 relays (6DR2804-8A) contains 4 relays. Terminals 8/1 to 8/9 must
then be connected accordingly in addition to the terminals 7/1 to 7/8.
Attention: Observe the max. switching voltage! (excessive increases in resonance in phase
shift motors, see chapter 1.4.2, page 13)
AC 250 V DC 250 V
8 A 8 A
1,250 VA 30 W at 250 V
100 W at 24 V
D 0/4 to 20 mA signals
The 49.9 Ω input impedance is connected across the input signals AE+ and AE- (AE1 to
AE3 in the standard controller and in module 6DR2800-8A by means of jumper settings and
by external wiring on the option module for AE4 and AE5).
If the signal is still required during service work in which the terminal is disconnected, the
input 49.9 Ω input impedance 0.1 % must be connected to the terminal between AE+ and
AE--. The internal 49.9 Ω resistance must then be disconnected by appropriate jumper
settings or by rewiring.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
1 V/10 V
20 mA
AE+ +
Br I 49.9 Ω set 1 V jumper
49,9 Ω
AE - --
6DR2210
optionally
Figure 2-26 Signal input AE1 to AE3 of the standard controller, internal or external 49.9 Ω resistance or
signal input AE6 to AE8 via module 3AE, 6DR2800-8A
1 V/10 V
20 mA 20 mA
AE+ AE+ +
49.9 Ω 49.9 Ω set 1 V jumper
AE - AE - --
6DR2800-8J
optionally
Figure 2-27 Signal input AE4, AE5 via option module 6DR2800-8J, internal or external 49.9 Ω
resistance
UH
0/4 to 20 mA AE+
+
+
AE-- 49.9 Ω
I --
--
M
Figure 2-28 Connection of a 0/4 to 20 mA transmitter 0/4 to 20 mA with potential isolation

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
+UH
+ 0/4 to 20 mA AE+
+
I AE--
49.9 Ω
--
--
Figure 2-29 Connection of a 0/4 to 20 mA transmitter with negative polarity to ground
-UH
AE+
+
49.9 Ω
-- 0/4 to 20 mA AE--
--
I
+ M
Figure 2-30 Connection of a 0/4 to 20 mA 3-wire transmitter 0/4 to 20 mA with positive polarity to ground
+ L+
4 to 20 mA AE+
--
I +
49.9 Ω
AE--
--
Figure 2-31 Connection of a 4 to 20 mA 2-wire transmitter supplied from controller’s L+

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
+ L+
4 to 20 mA
AE+
I +
--
49.9 Ω
AE--
--
instrument 1
M
AE+
+
49.9 Ω
AE--
--
instrument 2
M
Figure 2-32 Connection of a 4 to 20 mA 2-wire transmitter to two instruments in series supplied by L+

from one of the instruments
Every input amplifier is supplied by a differential voltage of 0.2 to 1 V. Instrument 1 also has a
0.2 to 1 V common-mode voltage that is suppressed in this case. Several instruments with a
total common-mode voltage of up to 10 V can be connected in series. As the last instrument’s
input is connected to ground, its input impedance is referred to ground.
As there will be an increased impedance (maximum permissible common-mode voltage +10 V),
the permissible impedance voltage of the transmitter or the on-load voltage may not be
exceeded!
D Voltages 0/0.2 to 1 V or 0/2 to 10 V
UH
AE+
+
+
AE--
U --
--
Figure 2-33 Connection of a floating voltage supply

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
+UH
+ AE+
+
U AE--
--
--
Figure 2-34 Single-pin connection of a non-floating voltage supply with negative polarity to ground
UH
AE+
+
AE-- only permitted when

-- connected for 1 V
--
U
+ M
Figure 2-35 Single-pin connection of a non-floating voltage supply with positive polarity to ground
Figure 2-34 and Figure 2-35:

The voltage dip on the ground rail between the voltage source and the input amplifier appears
as a measuring error. Only use when ground cables are short or choose a circuit configuration
as shown in figure 2-36!
+UH
+ AE+
+
U
AE--
-- --
Figure 2-36 Double-pin wiring of a voltage source with negative polarity to ground

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
2.2.4 Connection of the interface
L+
+ AE+
+
U
AE--
-- -- Instrument 1
AE+
+
AE--
-- Instrument 2
Figure 2-37 Parallel wiring of a non-floating voltage source to two instruments. The voltage source
is supplied by L+ of one of the instruments and negative is referred to ground.
Figure 2-36 and Figure 2-37:

The voltage dip on the ground rail between the voltage source and the input amplifier appears
as a common mode voltage and is suppressed.
D Connection of the interface module 6DR2803-8C
-- RS 232 point-to-point
Can be inserted in slot 4
Remote
Controller system
Rxd
2
point-to-point
4/2
RS 232
SIPART
BUS
Txd
4/3 3
Reference
5
RS 485
RS 485
+150 R
4/7
4/8
Figure 2-38 Setting on the SES module 6DR2803-8C with RS 232 point-to-point

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
-- RS 485 bus
point-to-point
RS 232
SIPART
BUS
RS 485
RS 485
+150 R
Figure 2-39 Jumper settings serial interface module 6DR2803-8C in RS 485 bus
SES RS 485 Bus ≤1000 m

8 Rxd/Txd-A
Instrument 1 Rxd/Txd-A
Rxd/Txd-B
Jumper setting RS 485 3 Rxd/Txd-B
Remote system
SES 8 Rxd/Txd-A
Instrument 2
Note line termination:

The RS 485 bus must be terminated with its characte-
3 Rxd/Txd-B ristic impedance. To do this, the terminating resistor
to in the ”last” bus user is switched by plugging the co-
ding bridge appropriately.
SES 8 Rxd/Txd-A
Instrum. 32
3 Rxd/Txd-B
Jumper setting RS485 +
150R
9-pin bus plug for round cable C73451-A347-D39
Figure 2-40 RS 485 bus connection diagram

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
D Connecting the interface PROFIBUS-DP, 6DR2803-8P

Connection
PROFIBUS plug
3 B
PROFIBUS- RxD/TxD-P
module ON
390R
6 A
VP 6ES7972-
Instrument 1
220R
(Slave) 5 390R
A
DGND
8 B
RxD/TxD-N
to
3 B
PROFIBUS- RxD/TxD-P
module OFF
390R
6
VP
Instrument n
220R
(Slave) 390R
5 A
DGND
8 B
RxD/TxD-N
A
RxD/TxD-A
Master
RxD/TxD-B
max. number of instruments, without repeater: 32

max. number of bus users (Slave + Master): 126
Figure 2-41 Principle diagram SIPART DR22 via PROFIBUS-DP and bus plug to Master
Note line termination:
The RS 485 bus must be terminated with a characteristic impedance. To do this, the switch in
the bus connector must be switched ”ON” in the ”first” and ”last” bus users. The switch may not
be ”ON” in any of the other bus users. A detailed description and notes on cable laying and bus
cable laying can be found in the user’s guide Decentral Peripheral System ET200.
Order number 6ES5 998-3ES12.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 3 Operation
3.1 Process operation
3 Operation
The SIPART DR22 is operated exclusively and fully with the operating keys on the front module.
The function of the operating panel can be switched between three main levels:
-- Process operation level

-- Selection level
-- Configuring level (structuring and parameterization modes)
Some of the keys and displays on the front module are assigned different control and display
functions when the operating mode is changed. See the description of the respective main level
for details.
The operation of the SIPART DR22 in process mode requires no detailed explanation due
to the design and colour scheme of the operating panel, the control elements and the labeling.
(Fig. 3-1):
Red is the color of the actual value:

The four-digit red digital display (16) and the red vertical LED bargraph (17) display the actual
value.
Green is the color of the setpoint:

The four-digit green digital display (19) and the green LED bargraph (18) display the setpoint.
The green Internal/External key (2) is used to switch between the internal and external setpoint,
the internal setpoint is set with the green ±∆w-adjusting keys (6). The green internal LED (1)
signals operation with the internal setpoint, the C-LED (3) also lights green when there is no CB
control signal.
Yellow is the color of the manipulated variable:

The yellow H/A key is used to switch between manual and automatic operation. The yellow
manual LED (8) signals by lighting steadily or flashing that manual operation has been
activated. Lighting up of the yellow y-external LED (10) signals an external intervention in the
manipulated variable, i.e. a follow-up (DDC), safety or blocking operation. The manipulated
variable generally displayed in the yellow digital display (14) can be adjusted with the yellow
±∆y-keys (13) in manual operation. The yellow ±∆y-LEDs (15) indicate the output of the
adjusting increments in all operating modes of the S-controller.
The alarm LEDs (5) and (7) signal exceeding or dropping below of the limit values. The adapta-
tion LED (4) signals the progress of the parameter optimization during the adaptation process
by lighting steadily or flashing.
The displays and setpoint keys in the double controllers are switched over by the Shift key (12)
with which the displays can also be switched to different signal levels in single controllers. The
corresponding controller LEDs (11) signal the switching state.
The measuring point label (20) is exchangeable. To change it, open the plexiglass cover with a
pointed tool in the center and take out the label. Behind it a screw is revealed which can be
used to separate the front module from the controller (see chapter 5, page 227 ”Maintenance”).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
3 Operation Manual
1 Internal LED (green) ON: Internal setpoint

20 SIPART DR22 2 Internal-/External-key Switch setpoint or Exit-
1 key when configuring
19 2 3 C-LED (green) ON: no computer standby or
100 3 Exit LED when configuring
C
Int
ST 4 4 Adaptation LED (yellow) OFF: Adaptation prepared
18 Flashing: Adaptation in progress
80 A1 5.1 ON: Adaptation ended
A2 6.1 5.1 A1-LED (red) Response of limit value A1
SP--W
5.2
60 5.2 A2-LED (red) Response of limit value A2
A3 6.2
6.1 +Δw-key
A4 7.1 Adjusting keys internal setpoint
6.2 --Δw-key
40
7.2
7.1 A3-LED (red) Response of limit value A3
8
20 9 7.2 A4-LED (red) Response of limit value A4
10
8 Manual-LED (yellow) ON: Manual operation internal
17 Flashing: Manual operation external
0 I 12 9 H/A-key Shift Manual-/Automatic-
11.1 operation or Enter key when
II
11.2 configuring
16
OUT-Y
10 y-external LED (yellow) External y-intervention or Enter-LED
13.2 13.1 in configuring
11.1 Controller I-LED (green) Operation/Display level controller I
SIEMENS SIPART DR22
11.2 Controller II-LED (green) Operation/Display level controller II
Flashing: Display and active func-
15.2 14 15.1 tions are not identical
ON: Display and active
functions are identical
12 Shift key Switch Operation and Display
level controllerI /controller II
13.1 +Δy-key Adjusting keys manual manipulated
13.2 - Δy-key variable
14 Digital display (yellow) for the manipulated variable y
15.1 +Δy-LED (yellow) Display of the +Δy adjusting increments
in the S-controller
15.2 --Δy-LED (yellow) Display of the -Δy adjusting increments
in the S-controller
16 Digital display (red) for the controlled variable x
17 Analog display (red) for the controlled variable x
18 Analog display (green) for the setpoint w
19 Digital display (green) for the setpoint w
20 Exchangeable measuring point label, behind it screw for removing
the front module
Figure 3-1 Control and display elements in the process operation

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 3 Operation
3.2 Selection level
3.2 Selection level
You enter the selection level for the various configuring menus by pressing the Shift key (6) for
longer (approx. 5 s) until ”PS” flashes in the y-display.
Condition: Digital signal ”Block-Operate” bLb = 0 and

”Block-Parameterize, Structure” bLPS = 0
The controller operates in online mode in the selection level, i.e. its last operating mode is
retained, the current process variables can be traced on the analog displays (1), (2).
The configuring menus can be selected with the ±∆W-keys. If none of these menus is called
with the Enter key (9) within about 20 s (≙ enter the configuring level), the controller
automatically returns to the process operation level.
SIPART DR22
1 Internal LED: current status
(onPA) 19 2 Exit key ↗: Return to process operation
AdAP only at S58 ≠ 0 level
StrU only at bLS = 0 100 C 3 Exit LED: flashes
Int
or no, if bLPS=1 ST 4 Adaptation LED: off
80 A1
6.1
A2
Command variable w 18 Adjustment onPA-AdAP-StrU
SP--W
60
A3 6.2
A4
40
8 Manual LED: current status
9 Enter key ↗ : jump to parameterization mode
onPA-AdAP or in structuring
17 20
preselection level to oFPA
Controlled variable x
0 I
10 Enter LED: flashes
16 12 Shift key ↗: Continuous pressing switches
II process display to unsignaled
controller
OUT-Y
PS 14 11 Controller LEDs: steady or flashing light
(Parameterization/ signals displayed controller
structuring)
SIEMENS SIPART DR22
13.2 13.1
no function
Figure 3-2 Control and display elements in the selection level

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
3 Operation Manual
3.2 Selection level
When bLb = 1 only the display level

Operating and Monitoring
can be switched
Process operation level see
chapter 3.1, pg. 167
Shift key (12) bLb = 1 or

Exit key (2) bLPS = 0 to
(up to approx. 5 s) bLPS = 1
”PS” in the y- bLb or bLPS in the w-display,

1) display flashes PS in the y-display flashes
∆w-key (6)
+ Enter
key (9)
Online parameters ,
onPA see chapter 3.3.2, pg. 173
Exit
-- key (2)
∆w-key (6)
+ Enter
key (9)
Adaptation,
see chapter 3.3.3, pg. 175
AdAP, Exit
only appears key (2) Parameterization modes
in S58 ≠ 0
-- + ∆w-key (6)
only when bLS = 0
1 2 3
Figure 3-3 Selection level

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 3 Operation
3.2 Selection level
1 2 3
-- Structuring modes
+ ∆w-keys (6)
Enter key (9)
Offline parameters,
oFPA see chapter 3.3.4, pg. 182
-- Exit key (2)
∆w-keys (6)
+
Enter key (9)
Parameter control
PASt see chapter 3.3.5, pg. 184
Exit key (2)
--
∆w-keys (6)
+
Enter key (9)
Structure switches
StrS (5 s) see chapter 3.3.6, pg. 186
Exit key (2)
-- ∆w-keys (6)
This part only appears
+
when S4 = 1 Enter key (9)
Define functions,
FdEF see chapter 3.3.7, pg. 201
Exit key (2)
--
∆w-keys (6)
+
Enter key (9)
Wire functions,
FCon see chapter 3.3.8, pg. 202
Exit key (2)
--
∆w-keys (6)
+
Enter key (9)
Position functions,
FPos see chapter 3.3.9, pg. 205
Exit key (2)
--
∆w-keys (6)
+ ∆w-keys (6)
Enter key (9) All Preset (whole controller
APSt to factory setting), see chap-
ter 3.3.11, pg. 210
Exit key (2)
-- ∆w-keys (6)
+ only appears when:

S8 > 3
Enter key (9)
CAE4 Signal selection,
see chapter 3.3.12, pg. 211
Exit key (2)
-- ∆w-keys (6)
+ only appears when:
S9 > 3 Enter key (9) Signal selection,
CAE5 see chapter 3.3.12, pg. 211
Exit key (2)
Fig. 3-3 (continued) Selection level

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
3 Operation Manual
3.3 Configuring level (parameterization and structuring mode)
3.3.1 Paramterization
3.3.1 Paramterization
Parameterization including the selection level takes place online, i.e. the controller continues
operating in its last operating mode. The analog x-display (17) and W-display (18) still displays
the process image so that the reaction of the controlled system to parameter changes can be
read off directly. The Internal LED (1) and Manual LED (8) and the Alarm LEDs A1 to A4
indicate the current operating state. The Internal/External key (2) becomes the Exit key, the
corresponding C-LED (3) indicates ready to exit, i.e. whenever the LED flashes, pressing the
Exit key returns from the selected level to the higher level in the hierarchy.
The ±∆w-keys (6) serve to adjust the variables displayed in the digital w-display (mode name or
parameter value).
The Automatic/Manual key (9) becomes the Enter key, the corresponding y-external LED (10)
indicates ready to enter, i.e. whenever the LED flashes, pressing the Enter key causes a jump
down to the next level in the hierarchy. The digital x-display still indicates the controlled variable
x except in mode AdAP (see chapter 3.3.3, page 175). The ±∆y-keys (13) serve to adjust the
parameter name displayed in the y-display.
In double controllers the remaining process displays can still be switched over to the controllers
not selected in the process operation level with the Shift key (12) but now only for as long as
the Shift key (12) is pressed. The extension of the switch over cycle by A1 to A4 which may
have been selected with S98 is suppressed. The discrepancy signaling by the controller I /con-
troller II LEDs (11) is not changed with this switchover. Therefore the controller with the unlit
controller LED (steady or flashing light) is always displayed whilst the Shift key is pressed.
The parameters with a large numeric range can be adjusted rapidly in the parameterization
modes onPA and AdAP.
First select the adjustment direction with one ∆w-key and then switch on the rapid action by
simultaneously pressing the other ∆w-key.
If the control signal bLPS = 1, parameterization and structuring is blocked, no PS (w and

y-indicators) appears when you press the Shift key.
If the control signal bLS = 1, structuring is blocked, oFPA to CAE5 are hidden in the
parameterization preselection level.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 3 Operation
3.3.2 Parameterization mode onPA (online parameters)

The parameters which have a directly visible effect on the process when they are adjusted are
arranged in the parameterization mode onPA. The other parameters are arranged in the struc-
turing mode oFPA.
SIPART DR22
19 2 Exit key ↗: Return to the parameterization
Parameter value preselection level after onPA
100 C 3 Exit LED: flashes
Int
ST 4 Adaptation LED: off
80 A1
6.1
A2
Command variable w 18 SP--W Adjustment of parameter value with rapid action
60
A3 6.2
A4
40
8 Manual LED: current status

9 Enter key: no function
17 20
Controlled variable x
0 I
10 Enter LED: off
16 12 Shift key ↗: Continuous pressing switches
II process display to unsignaled
controller
OUT-Y
Parameter name 14 11 Controller LEDs: steady or flashing light
tFI, vvI ... P09, P10 signals displayed controller
flashing
SIEMENS SIPART DR22
13.2 13.1
Adjustment of parameter name
Figure 3-4 Control and display elements in the parameterization mode onPA

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
3 Operation Manual
Digital display Factory Resolution Di- Parameter meaning

setting men-
y x w sion
Adjustment/
display area
tFI oFF, 1 to 1000 1 128 values/octave s Filter time constant xdI
vvI 0.100 to 10,00 5.000 ↓ 1 Derivative action gain
cPI 0.100 to 100.0 0.100 ↓ 1 Proportional action factor
tnI 1,000 to 9984 9984 ↓ s Integral action time
tvI oFF, 1.000 to 2,992 oFF 128 values/octave s Derivative action time Parameter set I
AHI 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 0.1 % Response threshold xdI
Y0I Auto, 0.0 to 100.0 Auto 0.1 % Operating point P-controller
YAI1) --10.0 to 110.0 - -5.0 0.1 % Manipulated variable limiting start
YEI1) --10.0 to 110.0 105.0 0.1 % Manipulated variable limiting end
tFII oFF, 1 to 1,000 1 128 values/octave s Filter time constant xdII
vvII 0.100 to 10.00 5.000 ↓ 1 Derivative action gain
cPII 0.100 to 100.0 0.100 ↓ 1 Proportional action factor
tnII 1.000 to 9984 9984 ↓ s Integral action time
tvII oFF, 1.,000 to 2,992 oFF 128 values/octave s Derivative action time Parameter set II
AHII 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 0.1 % Response threshold xdII
Y0II Auto, 0.0 to 100.0 Auto 0.1 % Operating point P-controller
YAII1) --10.0 to 110.0 --5 0.1 % Manipulated variable limiting start
YEII1) --10.0 to 110.0 105,0,0 0.1 % Manipulated variable limiting end
ex
trolled variable
dr 0.080 to 8.000 2) 0,80 0.080 s Display refresh rate

tY oFF, 1 to 1000 oFF 128 values/octave s Floating time
tA 20 to 600 200 20 ms min. actuating pulse pause
tE 20 to 600 200 20 ms min. actuating pulse length
Contr
tYII oFF, 1 to 1,000 oFF 128 values/octave s Floating time Controller II

tAII 20 to 600 200 20 ms min. actuating pulse
pause when S1 = 12
tEII 20 to 600 200 20 ms min. actuating pulse length
tF1 oFF, 0.1 to 1000 1 128 values/octave s Filter time constant AE1
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
tFb oFF, 0.1 to 1000 1 128 values/octave s Filter time constant AEb
c1 -1.999 to 19.999 0 0.001 1 Multiplicative constant
c3 -1.999 to 19.999 0 0.001 100 % Additive constant
P01 -1.999 to 19.999 1 0.001 1 connectable parameters

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ only when S4 = 1
P15 -1.999 to 19.999 1 0.001 1 connectable parameters
1) YE >YA 2) typical cycle times
Table 3-1 Parameter list onPA

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 3 Operation
3.3.3 Parameterization mode AdAP (Adaptation)

This mode only appears in the parameterization preselection level when S58 ≠ 0 (with adapta-
tion). The Enter function into the parameterization mode AdAP is only possible when the con-
troller is in manual operation (when adapting the master controller in cascades (S1 = 5/6) only
in internal and automatic operation of the master controller).
In the parameterization mode AdAP, the controller influences the process online (but in manual
operation).
In double controllers (cascade, ratio cascade and override controllers), adaptation is always
made to the controller selected by the Shift key (12) in the process operation level.
The remaining process displays can still be switched over to the controllers not selected in the
process operation level with the Shift key (12) but only for as long as the Shift key (12) is
pressed. Steady or flashing lights in the controller I/controller II LEDs signal the adapted con-
troller. In override controllers (S1 = 7/8) the flashing controller LED signals that the other con-
troller would be active in automatic operation.
The parameterization mode AdAP has 4 different states:
-- Pre adaptation
-- During adaptation
-- Aborted adaptation
-- Post adaptation
The digital display and the keys are assigned different functions in the individual states which
are integrated smoothly in the operating concept of the controller.
In pre- and post-adaptation the digital displays and the keys are used for the parameter display
and -setting as is the case in the parameterization mode and structuring mode onPA or oFPA
(see figure 3-6, page 179).
The complete process image as described in chapter 3.1, page 167 is displayed during adapta-
tion (see figure 3-7, page 179).
In the case of aborted adaptation the error message flashes in the digital x- and w-displays. The
error messages are acknowledged with the Enter key (9) (see figure 3-7).
D Pre adaptation
The adaption LED (4) is off and indicates readiness for adaptation. First the parameters for the
presettings (tU, dPv, dY) are displayed. They must be set according to the desired step signal.
Then the old parameters **.o with the ID Pi or Pid with their value and the new parameters **.n
with the ID Strt AdAP appear on the displays. If there is parameter control (S59 ≠ 0) PAST is
displayed as a note in place of the value when **.o. The old and the new parameters are not
adjustable.
The adaptation can only be started with the Enter key (9) when the new parameters **.n
are selected with the display Strt AdAP (manual operation is a prerequisite).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
3 Operation Manual
D During adaptation
The adaption LED (4) flashes indicating that the adaptation is in progress. The process can be
monitored over the whole process display.
D Aborted adaptation
The adaptation LED (4) is off indicating readiness for adaptation after error acknowledgement.
The current adaptation can be aborted manually or automatically by the error monitor.
Manual abortion can be activated in the event of danger by pressing the Exit key (2). The pro-
gram then jumps to the parameterization preselection level after AdAP. From there you can re-
turn to the process operation level by pressing the Exit key (2) again. The controller is in
manual operation and the manual manipulated variable can be adjusted.
Automatic aborting is effected by the error monitors. The error messages are displayed on the
digital x- and w-displays. The error message is acknowledged by pressing the Enter key (9), the
parameterization mode AdAP is retained, tU is displayed, the presettings can be corrected if
necessary. The adaptation is aborted by the signals N (DDC), Si and ±ybL. Abortion by the SES
control signals NES (DDC), SiES, ±ybLES can be prevented by Internal operation.
D Post adaptation
The adaption LED (4) is on indicating the end of adaptation. The parameters **.o with the ID Pi
or Pid and the new parameters **.n with the ID Pi.1 to 8 and Pid.1 to 8 for Pi and Pid controller
design are offered. The digits after the Pi or Pid ID indicate the determined line order. If there is
parameter control (S59 ≠ 0) the old parameters **.o are displayed with PAST instead of the pa-
rameter value.
The old and new parameters are adjustable but the new parameters only if there is no
parameter control.
On pressing the Exit key the parameters **.o or **.n just selected are transferred when returning
to AdAP in the parameter preselection level. The LED (4) is now off. When transfering **.o,
these parameters remain unchanged if they have not been changed manually. When transfering
**.n the old parameters are overwritten by the new parameters. The new parameters are
deleted, i.e. after jumping back to the parameterization mode AdAP, the **.n parameters are
identified by Strt AdAP.
The transfered parameters do not affect the process until the process operation level has
switched to Automatic after pressing the Exit key (2).
When the Exit key (2) is pressed with parameter control (**.o PAST) and selection of **.n, the
error message no AUto appears (see fig. 3-5, page 178). It indicates that no automatic transfer
is possible, the **.n parameters and the controlling variable SG must be noted down (see chap-
ter 1.5.5, page 96 ”Adaptation”).

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 3 Operation
D Adaptation error messages
Error message Explanation

digital
x/w display
x, y y
not not stable at 10 % tU after
StAt start of adaptation
⇒ wait and restart adaptation
% tU
-10 0 100
no after expiry of Ty the y step

Check position feedback and drive of the final
dY in the S-controller is not executed correctly ⇒ control element
Y y outside the measuring span of 0 to 100% ⇒ yManual ±∆y too big or too small
oFL
ALL step response in wrong direction within
PASS 30 % tU x, y y
⇒ Change active direction of the controller
⇒ control loop undershoot (all pass loop),
all-pass loops not defined among % tU
loop models -10 0 30 100
x, y y
too x after 50 % tU still within starting band
SMAL
⇒ tU too short
⇒ y step too small
% tU
-10 0 50 100
x, y
no at 67 % tU full scale value not reached yet full y
scale
⇒ tU too short
⇒ loop cannot reach full scale value,
e.g. integrally active line
⇒ transient recovery time t95 > 12 h
-10 0 100 % tU
67
Pv x outside the measuring span 0 to 100 % ⇒ yManual ±∆y too big or too small
oFL
too because of too small a line time constant no
(transient recovery time t95 < 5 s)
FASt sufficiently accurate adaptation not possible
ovEr > 10 % overshoot of the transient function x, y y

Shot
⇒ sufficiently accurate adaptation not possible
-10 0 67 100 % tU
n.ddc Follow--up or DCC-mode

ModE via the control signals ⇒
Si safety operation via the control signals ⇒
ModE cancel mode of operation
YbL direction-dependent blocking operation via the
ModE control signals ⇒
HE Manual external operation by the control signals ⇒

ModE
Table 3-2 Adaptation error messages

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
3 Operation Manual
Process operation Selection level Parameterization mode AdAP

level, see chapt. 3.1, AdAP Enter
pg. 167 key Pre-adaptation ↗ Presettings
Adaptation (9) Adaptation LED (4) OFF
if nec. controller see
after process
selection fig. operation tU oFF,0.1 to 24 h Monitoring time
controller I 1) Direction of the step
3-3, dPv nEG, PoS
or controller II, page Amplitude trigger
Switch controller dY 0.5 to 90 %
170
to manual mode, Repeat
set the desired adaptation
operating point Start of adaptation
**.o Pi or Pid
and wait for Enter key (9)
stationary **.n Strt AdAP
Exit
condition! key
Filters tFI, tFII (2)
and tF1 to tFb During adaptation
and floating time Adaptation LED (4) flashing
tY must be set! Complete process display
In the S-controller
tA, tE and tY
Enter
must be set! key (9) aborted adaptation
Adaptation LED (4) OFF
by
error mes-
Switch controller Old Error sages manual
parameters Exit of the adap- via
to automatic Exit key message
operation, old **.o are display tation Exit key
key retained (2)
parameters **.o procedure
(2)
are active see table 3-2, pg. 177
Exit
key
(2) Post adaptation
Adaptation LED (4) ON
cP.o Pi or Pid
old
Exit parameters
AH.o
key
(2)
±∆y Keys (139
Old parameters 2)
Switch controller cP.n Pi.*
to automatic **.o are
Exit overwritten by cP.n Pid.*
operation, new Exit
key new parameters
parameters **.n key
(2) **.n
are active (2) new
2)
AH.n parameters
Figure 3-5 Parameterization mode AdAP
* loop order 1 to 8
** parameter name
1) Enter function only active in manual operation (in the case of adaptation of the master controller in cascades (S1 = 5/6) master controller
set to Internal and Automatic)
2) Error message no AUto
If new parameters are selected and there is parameter control, the flashing error message no AUto appears after pressing the Exit
key (no automatic transfer).
Press the Enter key: Error is acknowledged; return to parameterization mode AdAP; the parameters won by adaptation
can be noted.
Pressing the Exit key: Jump to the parameterization preselection mode AdAP; the new parameters **.n are deleted.
On jumping to the parameterization mode AdAP, Strt AdAP appears in **.n.

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 3 Operation
Pre adaptation SIPART DR22

**.o value or PAST 1 Internal LED: current status
**.n Strt 19 2 Exit key ↗: Return to AdAP in parameteri-
after adaptation zation preselection level
**.o value or PAST 100 C
Int
3 Exit LED: flashes
**.n value ST 4 Adaptation LED: pre-adaptation: off (adaptation
readiness)
80 A1 Post adaptation: On
6.1 (adaptation ended)
A2
Command variable w 18 pre-adaptation: no function
SP--W
60 post adaptation: adjustment of parameter value
A3 6.2
A4
40
8 Manual LED: ON (manual operation)

9 Enter key: pre-adaptation ↗: Start
Controlled variable x 17 20
adaptation
Post adaptation: no function
Pre adaptation 10 Enter key: Pre adaptation: flashes, only for
**.o Pi or Pid 0 I **.n; Post adaptation: off
**.n AdAP 16 12 Shift key ↗: Continuous pressing switches
after adaptation process display to the
**. o Pi or Pid II
unadapted controller
**.n Pi.* and Pid.* OUT-Y
Parameter name 14 11 Controller LEDs: steady or flashing light
tU, dPv, d, Y, SG, signals adapted controller
vv.o, vv.n ... AH.o,
AH.n SIEMENS SIPART DR22
* = Loop or-
der 1 to 8 13.2 13.1
** = Parameter
name Adjustment of parameter name
Figure 3-6 Control and display elements in pre- and post adaptation in the parameterization mode AdAP
SIPART DR22 1 Internal LED: current status

2 Exit key ↗: manual abortion of adaptation,
during adaptation 19 Return to the parameterization pre-
Command variable w selection level AdAP
after abortion
Int
Error messages ST 4 Adaptation LED: during adaptation: flashes
after abortion: off
80 A1
6.1
A2
Command variable 18 SP--W no function
w 60
A3 6.2
A4
40

Controlled 9 Enter key : during adaptation: no function
variable x 17 20
after abortion ↗:
error acknowledgement
10 Enter LED during adaptation: dark
0 I after abortion: flashes
during adaptation 16 12 Shift key ↗: Continuous pressing switches the
Controlled variable x process display to the unadapted
II
after abortion controller
Error messages 14
OUT-Y
11 Controller LEDs: Steady or flashing light signals
Manual manipulated adapted controller
variable yH
SIEMENS SIPART DR22
13.2 13.1
no function
Figure 3-7 Control and display elements during adaptation and at aborted adaptation in the
parameterization mode AdAP

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
3 Operation Manual
Pre adaptation
Digital display Factory Resolu- Di- Parameter meaning

setting tion men-
y x w sion
Adjustment/
display area
tU Con- oFF, 0.1 - 24.0 oFF 0.1 h Monitoring time Pre-
dPv trolled nEG, PoS PoS - - Direction of step response settings for the
dY varia- 0.5 - 90.00 0.5 0.1 % Amplitude of step response adaptation
ble x
vv.o Pi or 0.10 - 10.01) 5.000 128 1 previous derivative action gain at: Tv = oFF
Pid values Tv ≠ oFF
or PASt 1) per
octave previous derivative action gain parameter-control-
led
vv.n AdAP Strt 1) - - - Start adaptation
cP.o Pi or 0.100 - 100.01) 0.100 128 1 previous proportional action
Pid values factor at: Tv = oFF
or PASt 1) per Tv ≠ oFF
octave
previous proportional action factor parameter-
controlled
cP.n AdAP Strt 1) - - - Start adaptation
tn.o Pi or 1.000 - 99841) 9984 128 s previous integral action time at: Tv = oFF
Pid values Tv ≠ oFF
or PASt 1) per
octave previous integral action time parameter-controlled
tn.n AdAP Strt 1) - - - Start adaptation
tv.o Pi or oFF1) oFF 128 s previous derivative action time at: Tv = oFF
Pid 1.0 - 2992 1) values Tv ≠ oFF
or PASt 1) per
octave previous derivative action time parameter
-controlled
tv.n AdAP Strt 1) - - - Start adaptation
AH.o dark 0.0 - 10.01) 0.0 0.1 % previous response threshold
or
PASt 1) previous response threshold parameter-controlled
AH.n AdAP Strt 1) - - - Start adaptation
1) not adjustable
Table 3-3 Parameter list AdAP

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 3 Operation
Post adaptation
Digital display Factory Resolu- Di- Parameter meaning
setting tion men-
men
y x w sion
Adjustment/
display area
SG dark --0.5 - 105.01) - - % Controlling variable for parameter control

vv.o Pi or 0.100 -- 10.00 5.000 128 1 previous derivative action gain at: Tv = oFF
Pid or values Tv ≠ oFF
PASt 1) per
octave previous derivative action gain parameter-control-
led
vv.n Pid.* 5.000 - 128 1 new derivative action gain for PID controller
Pid.* values
per
octave
cP.o Pi or 0.100 - 100.0 0.100 128 1 previous proportional action
Pid or values factor at: Tv = oFF
PASt 1) per Tv ≠ oFF
octave
previous proportional action factor parameter-con-
trolled
cP.n Pi.* 0.100 - 100.02) - 128 1 new proportional action factorfor PI controller
cP.n Pid.* 0.100 - 100.02) - values 1 PID controller
per
octave
tn.o Pi or 1.000 - 9984 9984 128 s previous integral action time at: Tv = oFF
Pid or values Tv ≠ oFF
PASt 1) per
octave previous integral action time parameter-comtrolled
tn.n Pi.* 1.000 - 99842) - 128 s new integral action time for PI controller
tn.n Pid.* 1.000 - 99842) values s PID controller
per
octave
tv.o Pi or oFF oFF 128 s previous derivative action time at: Tv = oFF
Pid 1.0 - 2992 values Tv ≠ oFF
or per
PASt 1) octave previous derivative action time parameter-control-
led
tv.n Pid.* 1.000 - 29922) - 128 s new derivative action time for PID controller
values
per
octave
AH.o dark 0.0 - 10.0 0.0 0.1 % previous response threshold
or
PASt 1) previous response threshold parameter-controlled
AH.n dark 0.0 - 10.02) - 0.1 % new response threshold
* identification loop order 1 to 8
SG means: controlling variable for the parameter control
1) not adjustable
2) only adjustable if there is no parameter control
Table 3--3 Parameter list AdAP (continued)

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
3 Operation Manual
3.3.4 Structuring mode oFPA (offline Parameters)
SIPART DR22
19 2 Exit key ↗: Return to oFPA in structuring

Parameter value preselection level
Int
80 A1
6.1
A2
Striped pattern 18 Adjustment of parameter value with rapid action
ID offline SP--W
60
A3 6.2
A4
40

Controlled 9 Enter key: no function
variable x 17 20
10 Enter LED off

dark for S4=0 0 I
or at S4=1 function
block to which 16 12 Shift key ↗: Continuous pressing switches the
the parameter II process display to unsignaled
belongs controller
OUT-Y
14 11 Controller LEDs: Steady or flashing light signals
Parameter name displayed controller
flashing dPI.........tE
SIEMENS SIPART DR22
13.2 13.1
Adjustment of parameter
name
Figure 3-8 Control and display elements in the structuring mode oFPA
S1 S94, S95 assigned to Display format Resolution

S267, S268
0 xdI according to
≠4 1 xI dAI to dEI 1 digit
≠6 2 wI -1999 to 19999
38 jxdIj
0 xdI %
1 xI % 0,1 %
4 2 wI %
and 38 jxdIj
6 3 xv according to
4 wv dAI to dEI 1 digit
-1999 to 19999
5 xdII according to
5 to 9 6 xII dAII to dEII 1 digit
and 12 7 wII -1999 to 19999
39 jxdIIj
0 8 y
to # # % 0,1 %
12 37 FE12
Table 3-4 Parameter range and resolution for the alarms A1 to A4

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
Manual 3 Operation
Digital display Fac- Resolution Di- Parameter meaning

tory men-
y x w setting sion
Adjustment/
display area
dPI --.--- to ---- ----.- -- -- Decimal point display I
dAI
dEI
-- 1,999 to 19,999
-- 1,999 to 19,999
0000
1,000
1 digit
1 digit
--
--
Start value
Full scale value } Display
Display
range
I
dPII --.--- to ---- ----.- -- -- Decimal point display II
dAII -1,999 to 19,999 0000 1 digit -- Start value Display range
dEII -1,999 to 19,999 1,000 1 digit -- Full scale value }Display II
A1 --110 to +110 % 5.0 1 digit -- Alarm 1

A2 referenced to --5.0 or -- Alarm 2
A3 dE -- dA 5.0 0.1 % -- Alarm 3
A4 see table 3-4 --5.0 -- Alarm 4
H1.2 0.1 to 20.0 1 0.1 % Hysteresis alarms A1 and A2
H3.4 0.1 to 20.0 1 0.1 % Hysteresis alarms A3 and A4
SA --10 to +110 % --5.0 1 digit -- Setpoint limit start
SE referenced to 105.0 or -- Setpoint limit end
SH dE -- dA 0.0 0.1 % -- Safety setpoint
dark
Sb see table 3-6 0.0 -- Limit setpoint for override control

da
tS oFF, 0.1 to 9984 oFF min Setpoint ramp

vA 0.000 to 9.999 0.000 0.001 1 Ratio factor start
vE 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 0.001 1 Ratio factor end
yS --10.0 to 110.0 0.0 0.1 % Safety manipulated variable
y1
y2
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 100.0
50.0
50.0
0.1
0.1
%
%
Manipulated variable range y1
Manipulated variable range y2 } at
Split range
--1.1 --10.0 -- Linearized FE1 vertex value at --10 %
0.1 0.0 -- Linearized FE1 vertex value at 0 %
1.1 --10 to 110 % 10.0 1 digit -- Linearized FE1 vertex value at --10 % only when
↓ referenced to ↓ -- ↓ S4= 0
11.1 dE -- dA 110.0 or -- Linearized FE1 vertex value at 110 % and
--1.3 or --10.0 -- Linearized FE3 vertex value at --10 % S20 or
0.3 --199.9 to 199.9 % 0.0 0.1 % -- Linearized FE3 vertex value at 0% S21≠1
1.3 see table 3--6, 10.0 -- Linearized FE3 vertex value at 10 %
↓ page 184 ↓ -- ↓
11.3 110.0 -- Linearized FE3 vertex value at 110 %
--10 FU1 --199.9 to 199.9 --10 0.1 % Function transmitter 1 vertex value at --10 %
0 FU1 --199.9 to 199.9 0 0.1 % Function transmitter 1 vertex value at 0 %
10 FU1 --199.9 to 199.9 10 0.1 % Function transmitter 1 vertex value at 10 % only when
S4= 1
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
and
110 FU1 --199.9 to 199.9 110 0.1 % Function transmitter 1 vertex value at 110 % FU1 or
--10 FU2 --199.9 to 199.9 --10 0.1 % Function transmitter 2 vertex value at --10 % FU2=YE
0 FU2 --199.9 to 199.9 0 0.1 % Function transmitter 2 vertex value at 0% S
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
PA rE 0.010 to 1.000 1 0.001 1 Correction quotient pressure start
PE rE 1.000 to 99.99 1 0.001/0.01 1 Correction quotient pressure end only when
tA rE 0.010 to 1.000 1 0.001 1 Correction quotient temperature start S4=1
TE rE 1.000 to 99.99 1 0.001/0.01 1 Correction quotient temperature end
SAII
SEII
--10 to 110 %
referenced to
--5.0
105.0
1 digit
or
--
--
Setpoint limit start
Setpoint limit end } Controller II
when S1 = 12
dEII -- dAII 0.1 %
tSII oFF, 0.1 to 9984 oFF min Setpoint ramp Controller II when S1=12
YSII --10.0 to 110.0 0.0 0.1 % Safety manipulated variable Controller II when S1=12
dark
Pd --.--- to ---- ----.- -- -- display range

Ad -- 1999 to 19999 0000 1 digit -- ratio controller
Ed -- 1999 to 19999 1000 1 digit --
H2 0.1 to 20.0 1 0.1 % Hysteresis alarms A2 at S267 ≠ 1
H4 0.1 to 20.0 1 0.1 % Hysteresis alarms A4 at S268 ≠ 1
y3 0.0 to 100.0 50.0 0.1 % Manipulated variable range y3 Split range controller II
y4 0.0 to 100.0 50.0 0.1 % Manipulated variable range y4 }
at S1 = 12
Table 3-5 Parameter list oFPA

C79000-G7476-C154-02
305735
3 Operation Manual
3.3.5 Structuring mode PASt (parameter control)
S1 --1.1 to 11.1 --1.3 to 11.3 SA, SE, SH Sb Parameter Resolution

range reference
to
dE* -- dA* = 100 %
0 d*I d*I d*I -- -10 to 110 % 1 digit

1 ↓ ↓ ↓ -- ↓ ↓
2 ↓ ↓ ↓ -- ↓ ↓
3 d*I d*I ↓ -- -10 to 110 % 1 digit
4 % % d*I -- -199.9 to 199.9 % 0.1 %
5 d*II d*I d*II -- -10 to 110 % 1 digit
6 % % d*II -- -199.9 to 199.9 % 0.1 %
7 d*I d*II d*I d*II -10 to 110 % 1 digit
8 ↓ ↓ d*I d*II ↓ ↓
9 d*I d*II - -- ↓ ↓
10 d*I d*I d*I -- ↓ ↓
11 d*I d*I d*I -- ↓ ↓
12 d*I d*II d*I -- -10 to 110 % 1 digit
Table 3-6 Parameter range and resolution for the display format dependent parameters
3.3.5 Structuring mode PASt (parameter control)
SIPART DR22
Parameter value 19 2 Exit key ↗: Return to PASt in structuring

preselection level
or error message
tv/Y0 Exit LED: flashing also in case of error
100 C
Int
3 messages
80 A1
6.1
A2
Striped pattern 18
ID offline SP--W Adjustment of parameter value with rapid action
60
A3 6.2
A4

Turbina SIEMENS - Catalogo Manuales y Planos PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Turbina SIEMENS - Catalogo Manuales y Planos PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating manual

Customer: PROCESADORA INDUSTRIAL

Machine type: SST-110 (TWIN-CA 36 GT5)

Year of construction: 2012

Output date: 26.12.2012

Machine number: 4.736.053

1 User information 1-1

2 Safety information 2-1

3 Technical data 3-1

3.6 Shaft vibration 3-11

5 Transport and storage 5-1

6 Assembly and disassembly 6-1

6.6 Test run 6-10

7 Initial commissioning and operation 7-1

7.7.8 Monitoring 7-8

9 Trouble shooting 9-1

9.2 Personnel qualification 9-1

10 Spare parts 10-1

1.2 Using the operating manual

1.3 Contacting Siemens

▪ or if the machine is damaged.

2.2 Laws and regulations

2.3 Intended use

2.5 Safety notes in the operating instructions

2.6 Safety notes on the machine

Warning – hot surface.

Warning – hand injuries.

Do not climb on this machine.

2.7 Safety information in safety data sheets

2.8 Safety notes for operation

2.9 Safety notes for maintenance

2.11 Safety instructions for machines with hot surfaces

2.12 Instructions how to handle a trip

3.1 Operating data

3.1.1 Calibrating the turbine to the unit

3.1.2 Operating limits

Operating Limits (Turbine 1)

Operating Limits (Turbine 2)

3.1.3 Steam flow diagram

3.1.4 Limitation of operating data

The machine may only be operated in the prescribed direction of rotation.

3.2 Operating fluid

3.2.1 Steam quality

Steam quality [➙ 3-12]

3.3 Acoustic data

3.3.1 Octave band sound pressure level

3.4 Adjusting values and switching values

3.5 Vibration velocity

DIN ISO 10816-1 for speeds > 15,000 rpm

Determination of the switching values

3.6 Shaft vibration

3.7 Oil and bearing data

Oil Lube oil (turbine oil) 6-7

Failure load stage: FZG test A/8.3/90 6-7

Oil temperature at normal 45 +/= 5 °C

3.8 Steam quality

Conductivity measured at </= 0.2 µS/cm in continuous operation

3.9 Screw tightening torques

Thread Strength class /steel grade / material

3.10 Electrical technology

4.1 Functional description of turbine 1

4.2 Functional description of turbine 2

4.3 General structure of turbine